ru 
 
 00 
 
 
LIBRARY 
 
 OF THF. 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 OF* 
 
 Accession No. 
 
 , C/^5S 
 
THE 
 
 p 
 
 :ONTAINING THE- 
 
 ARTTOS AND I<ETT3R$ 
 
 WRITTEN BY 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 Geo, 8. Dove & Company. 
 
 SAN FRANCISCO : 
 
 J. A. DOVE & CO., PRINTERS. 
 
 1886. 
 
f 
 
 Entered according to Act of Congress in the year 1886, 
 
 BY GEO. S. DOVE & CO., 
 
 In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 IT HAS been a pleasure to me to have been entrusted with the 
 responsibility of publishing the revelations of the departed prophet, 
 Joseph Morris. For twenty-four years the revelations have been 
 withheld from the people, ( with the exception of a few copies that 
 some of the brethren have had in their possession) notwithstand- 
 ing that in Rev. 88, par. 7, given Aug. 23rd, 1861, the clerks were 
 commanded to copy for the press the revelations that had been 
 given up to that time. The clerks accomplished their part of the 
 work, but the revelations were not produced in printed form. I 
 feel impressed that I, with the aid of many others, have been in- 
 strumental at this time in fulfilling that command, by presenting 
 to the Weber brethren the writings of Joseph Morris complete, in 
 book form. Many of the brethren were opposed -to their publica- 
 tion, believing that it would not be prudent to advance them to 
 the world in their crude state : some contending that the doctrines 
 contained in them were fragmentary, and that most of the instuc- 
 tion was appertaining to local affairs ; but I hope that their publi- 
 cation may result in convincing many that the God of the prophets 
 still speaks. 
 
 The forty letters, or addresses, that were written to Brigham 
 Young, contained many new principles which have been made 
 use of by the leaders of the old Church whenever they had an 
 opportunity to present them to the saints as new truths which had 
 had been retained until wisdom dictated that they should be made 
 known. 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 Brother Joseph Morris in the night of his earthly afflictions, was 
 permitted to have a glimpse of divine realities. All through his 
 life the course of the world appeared to be against him ; and dur- 
 ing the short recognition of his mission which he enjoyed, he had 
 to carry a heavy burden. His claim for recognition rests in 
 the hearts of those who were with him ; and the hidden spiritual 
 truths which he proclaimed, will remind them of his mission in 
 their darkest hours, and be promulgated for future generations 
 to profit by. 
 
 Although no claim can be made for eloquence in the, phrase- 
 ology of the revelations, ( as they bear the marks of an unlearned 
 man ) we are nevertheless confident of the divine origin of the 
 doctrines and principles contained in them. The truths were 
 given to him by direct impression, and he conveyed them in the 
 language he had at command. 
 
 Taking the principles as advanced in their crude state, without 
 the aid of a spiritual understanding, they may appear mysterious 
 and obscure; (some who are opposed to the advance of the new 
 doctrines, may take advantage of this) but, under the guidance 
 of the spirit that revealed to him those principles, they appear 
 grand in their simplicity. 
 
 After twenty-fotir years of investigation and experience in re- 
 ligious matters, I still remain a believer in the prophetic mission 
 of Joseph Morris, feeling convinced that the truths he revealed 
 were from the Eternal Fountain. 
 
 GEORGE S. DOVE. 
 SAN FRANCISCO, CAL., May, 1886. 
 
CONCERNING THE REVELATIONS. 
 
 THE REVELATIONS contained in this book were written by 
 Joseph Morris, between the years of 1857 and 1862. They were 
 inspired and written as the spirit dictated, and after having been 
 read before the congregation of the saints, they were deposited in 
 a chest under lock and key. Immediately after Joseph was shot, 
 Hannah Banks and other sisters took the box from the office, and 
 buried it after dark in the Bowery, where he had on many occa- 
 sions addressed the people. After three days, his widow took 
 possession of it. Her father, after her death, sold it to Abraham 
 Taylor, who retained it safely over twenty years, and before his 
 decease, willed it to his son, Joseph Taylor, of San Francisco. 
 
 The people in South Weber, during the ministrations of Joseph 
 Morris, dwelt in booths and tents in an open field ; they dfd not 
 erect any substantial places of abode, neither did they till the 
 soil, but they subsisted on the means that they had previously 
 acquired, implicitly believing that the Lord would come to deliver 
 them. In this manner they lived for months, expecting a deliver- 
 ance from the bondage that had oppressed them ; and while wait- 
 ing under these conditions, the prophet received many revelations 
 relative to spiritual matters, which has shed a new light on the to- 
 morrow of the Scriptures. 
 
 The value of. the property consecrated from the time that the 
 law of consecration was revealed up to the time that the people 
 were dispersed, amounted to $167,622.54; and the donations for 
 the poor, which amounted to $7,306.16, were distributed by the 
 bishop, who had been appointed to look after the temporal needs 
 of the people ; thus the saints were bound together as one family, 
 having made a covenant with the Lord by sacrifice. 
 
4 HISTORY OF EVENTS. 
 
 had sometimes worked for. One day when Joseph was mowing 
 hay, he said to Father Jones: "Do you know who I am?" ".Yes," 
 he replied, "I do know that you are a prophet of God, for the 
 spirit has told me so." This was the first recognition Joseph had 
 met with, and he took it as a sign that the work would go on. 
 He was very much opposed by Mother Jones, though at times she 
 admitted the new truths, was very friendly, and gave him advice 
 how to avoid the enemies who were constantly on his track. At 
 last, notice was given him by some of the leading men of the 
 place that he must leave in so many hours. At first he gave but 
 little attention to it; but Mother Jones became uneasy and said : 
 "Are you going?" "Yes, Him going, I will go," he replied; so 
 he started next day for South Weber, carrying a small bundle. 
 This was in October, 1860. 
 
 On arriving at South Weber (formerly called Kingston Fort), 
 he enquired for Richard Cook, whose brother, John Cook, he had 
 previously met at the Warm Springs, and John had invited him 
 to come and see them. Both Richard Cook, who was at that 
 time bishop at W r eber, and his brother John carefully investigated 
 Joseph's claims, and received him into their family. John Parson, 
 who lived up Weber Canyon, and many others became interested 
 also, and they were convinced that Joseph Morris was all that he 
 claimed to be. From this time he began to make converts to the 
 new faith, for many became interested, and were convinced of the 
 truth of his mission ; so he was rewarded for all his anxious weep- 
 ing and prayers, and all the scofrlngs and mockings he had suf- 
 fered, and his heart was filled with gratitude. 
 
 This little uprising caused uneasiness in Salt Lake City, and in 
 February, 1861, two of the apostles of the old Church were sent 
 to investigate. They called the people together and demanded to 
 know what folly was going on, and what they were doing there. 
 They said : "We hear it reported that you have a prophet among 
 you, and we cannot accept of any prophet but Brigham Young." 
 Joseph being questioned, replied : "I am by right of my heir- 
 ship, prophet, seer and revelator to the Church of the Latter Day 
 Saints." Seventeen of the Weber people said that they accepted 
 him as a prophet; so they were all "cut off" from the Church. 
 
 The people now commenced gathering around him, as if drawn 
 by the cords of genuine love, and impelled by an unseen hand, 
 and the minds of the people of that whole country were lit up as 
 by the effulgence of the everlasting light. They' began to look 
 from a new standpoint and to a higher light ; their pride was sub- 
 dued, and the black cloud of prejudice, which so often hovers 
 over the minds of men, was removed, and they began to think 
 freely for themselves, not judging from external appearances. So 
 they departed from their old habits and ways, and commenced a 
 
HISTORY OF EVENTS. 5 
 
 new life like little children inquiring after a new treasure. They 
 endeavored to girt themselves with truth and righteousness and 
 approach the mountain of purity by searching diligently, and talk^ 
 ing one to another constantly, away from the cares and labors of 
 life ; for that was a day in which it was hard for any one to be- 
 lieve without a great struggle. They were living amongst a gener- 
 ation whose teeth were as knives, to devour the poor and needy 
 from off the face of the earth. 
 
 Joseph then began to be looked upon much more favorably, and 
 a great reformation took place, and a wonderful out-pouring of the 
 spirit and divine influence prevailed. The gifts and powers of 
 the gospel gave exceeding joy to the honest in heart who attended 
 these ministrations, which prepared the people for what they had to 
 undergo. They were astonished at his doctrine. Sometimes the 
 prophet's countenance would change as if illuminated by the true 
 light of the world ; then he would retire and others would go on 
 with the meeting. 
 
 The news spread throughout the Territory that a new prophet 
 had arisen who had been denounced by the Church, which led 
 many to inquire into the matter. 
 
 On the sixth of April, 1861, six persons were baptized. From 
 this time until Fall, people arrived from all parts of the Territory, 
 inquiring the way to the prophet, leaving their farms and all that 
 they could not bring with them. They came with their teams, 
 flocks and herds, intending to cast in their all with Joseph ; even 
 some came who had spoken against the new prophet. Thus the 
 membership continued to increase until there was four hundred 
 and twenty-five baptized believers. Joseph possessed a wonder- 
 ful power to attract the attention of the people, and to hold them 
 together under the most trying circumstances. 
 
 He was married to Mary Olsen, a Dane, in August, 1861. 
 In the latter part of April, 1862, teams were sent to the grist 
 mill with wheat to be ground for the use of the Camp. As the 
 men were returning home, the teams were taken away from them. 
 The children were without bread, and the Camp much in need. 
 To go to the courts of Utah for redress was useless, so twenty-five 
 men were sent to, Kaysward to take the men prisonrers who had 
 taken the flour, and bring them into Camp ; but there were no 
 legal papers for doing these things. The Morrisites taking thes^e 
 men prisoners raised the indignation of the Mormons, who 
 determined upon .having a writ issued for the appearance of five 
 persons before Judge Kinney at the Court House in Salt Lake 
 City. Judson Stoddart and another officer came with the writ ; 
 but before coming into the Fort they sent a messenger to enquire 
 whether they could come in. John Banks sent John Smith 
 out to see them. Mr. Smith talked with them a few minutes, 
 
6 HISTORY OF EVENTS. 
 
 and told them that they could come into the Fort, which they did. 
 Mr. Stoddart read the warrant for the appearance of five persons 
 therein named, as follows : Joseph Morris, John Banks, Richard 
 Cook, John Parson and Peter Klemgard. Joseph Morris was not 
 present, for he was writing a revelation. John Banks said for 
 himself that he would not take any notice of the warrant, and 
 he sent for some fire and burned it. After this, Mr. Stoddart 
 went away. 
 
 On the 3oth of May, 186.2, occured what was called "Fore- 
 shadowing Day." The officers were at the head of the kingdom, 
 the generals were at the head of the army, and Joseph was nailed 
 as Lord of the whole earth, as a representative of Jesus. Twelve 
 generals appeared on horseback, the first four riding on white, red, 
 black and pale horses. The first seven of these generals wore 
 crowns as representatives of the seven presidents of the earth. 
 Seven companies of infantry well armed and equipped followed 
 them, and they marched around the fort seven times. After this 
 the horses were given up to twelve other persons, who represented 
 the twelve princes of the earth, and each one carried a rod. 
 They marched around the fort twelve times with the companies of 
 infantry following them, as a representation of their position as 
 princes of the earth. From this time until the appearance of the 
 Mormon Militia on the hills around Weber, many revelations were 
 given, and there was much anxiety among the people. 
 
 On the morning of the i3th of June, 1862, Robert T. Burton, 
 with the Mormon Militia, made his appearance on the hills around 
 Weber. They hesitated about coming into the Fort; so they 
 sent a boy, belonging to the Morrisite Camp, with a note ordering 
 the Morrisites to surrender, within thirty minutes, the five men 
 mentioned in the writ that had been served about three weeks 
 previous to this time. The Morrisites were under the impression 
 that should they surrender those men that the warrant called for, 
 that the Mormons would injure them before arriving at the Court 
 House in Salt Lake City ; therefore no immediate reply was sent 
 to Burton. At this juncture a meeting of the saints was called 
 to deliberate upon the condition of affairs, and receive instruction ; 
 while the samts were assembled, engaged in religious services, 
 in a bowery composed of willows and green branches, supported 
 by posts, a cannon ball came in our midst, and it killed two 
 women, one a nursing mother, with a babe in her arms, and 
 the other an old lady. A girl sixteen years of age, had her chin 
 shattered by the same shot. The yells of the attacking party 
 were heard all around us. For an hour and a half after they com- 
 menced firing, not a man in the Camp of Weber took up arms, 
 while the Mormon Militia poured in cannon and rifle shot on 
 every side; then the men said: "What shall we do;" and the 
 
HISTORY OF EVENTS. 7 
 
 word was given: "Protect your families the best way you can, but 
 avoid shedding blood if possible." This was carried out to the 
 letter ; for had the Morrisites been so disposed, they could have 
 done much execution. Only ninety men in our Camp carried 
 arms, while Burton started from Salt Lake with two hundred and 
 fifty men, and that number was about doubled by the time he 
 arrived in Weber. They poured shot and shell into the Camp for 
 three successive days, from Friday morning until Sunday evening, 
 June 1 5th. They sent to Salt Lake for rockets to fire the Camp, 
 but they could not use them, for it rained very heavily on Satur- 
 day. Sunday (the i5th), was a very fine day, but a very sad day 
 for us. We had been almost without food, and were weary, and 
 our ammunition was about exhausted. Late in the afternoon the 
 bugle sounded in the Fort, and a white flag was raised and carried 
 by Alonzo Brown to the western part of the Fort. The order to 
 do this was given by brother John Parson and others, who stated 
 to Joseph that they thought the men had done all they could, and 
 that they were willing to surrender and give their lives for the sake 
 of the people if necessary. Orders were given to cease firing, 
 Robt. Farley continued to blow the bugle while bullets were flying 
 around him, but he remained unhurt. While the white flag was 
 being carried to the western part of the Fort, Burton and his men 
 continued to advance toward us, firing all the time. John Parson 
 called out: "For God's sake and the sake of humanity stop your 
 firing!" Then Burton and many of his men rushed into the Fort 
 and ordered the Morrisites to stack arms, which was done by them 
 without hesitation. After they had done this, Burton called out 
 for Joseph Morris, John Banks, Richard Cook, John Parsons and 
 Peter Klemgard. When they presented themselves before him, he 
 said: "I want no more of your apo.stacy. I do not know how 
 you have escaped as well as you have done. I have fired over five 
 thousand rounds of cartridges into you, and a hundred cannon 
 balls, besides some shell." Then he said to Joseph Morris: "Are 
 you willing to give up," as if he had not already surrendered. He 
 was so overcome with rage that he tried to ride Joseph down with 
 his powerful horse ; but Joseph stepping quietly forward, took hold 
 of the bridle-reins with each hand and sent the horse back upon 
 his haunches. Then he turned to the people and said: "I have 
 taught you righteous principles from heaven ; all those who are 
 willing to follow me to the death, come this way." The general 
 cry was, "Here I am!" with the exception of about twenty per- 
 sons, who formed a group by themselves and said they could 
 stand it no longer. Then Joseph stepped to the western part of 
 the Fort, opposite the school house. Robert Burton, in company 
 with some others, rode up to him there and commanded him to 
 surrender in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ, and by the 
 
*8 HISTORY OF EVENTS. 
 
 authority of the United States. Brother Joseph stood firmly, and 
 looking up to Burton, replied: "Never! no, never; no, never." 
 Then Burton said: "I will try your God," and he fired five shots 
 at him ; at the fifth shot Joseph reeled, and was caught in the 
 arms of a man by the name of John Eames, who laid him down 
 gently on the ground. Such was the earthly end of Joseph 
 Morris, but he still lives in the hearts of those who received his 
 teachings. 
 
 A young woman named Isabella Bowman, holding in her arms 
 the babe of the mother who had been killed by the first cannon 
 ball fired into camp, stepped forward and said : "You blood-thirsty 
 hell-hound, why do you shoot at that good man?" Burton took 
 deliberate aim at her, and shot her dead. Mrs. O'Hagg was shot 
 at the same time. At this time, John Banks was standing near 
 the steps of the school house, when one of the mob stepped be- 
 hind him and shot him in the back of the neck ; but he did not 
 die until that night. After this we were encamped on the South 
 Bench, and put under a strong guard until the following morning, 
 when we were marched to Salt Lake City. We arrived there after 
 a march of two days, and were brought before Judge Kinney, in 
 the Court^ House. When we appeared before the Judge, he said : 
 "I have been misinformed about you men. You were represented 
 to me as a banditti of low, degraded men robbers and thieves ; 
 but I see before me a class of intelligent men, quite different to 
 what was represented to me. On the strength of the repesenta- 
 tions that were made to me, I granted a writ to the Mormon 
 Militia to arrest and bring before me, Joseph Morris, John 
 Banks, Richard Cook, John Parson and Peter Klemgard. I see 
 that I have been completely misinformed." We were then bound 
 over furnishing bonds for each other to keep the peace, on a 
 bail of $1,500 each, for our appearance in court the following 
 March. The majority appeared for trial ; but some few went 
 East, and others went West to Carson Valley and California. At 
 the March session of the court, the names were called and the 
 trial proceeded. Many witnesses were there to testity. Seven 
 men were sentenced to terms of imprisonment, varying from 
 seven to fourteen years. Their names were : Peter C. Klemgard, 
 John Nielson, Abraham Taylor, George Lee, Christian Nelsen, 
 Jens Christiansen and John E. Jones. But they only served three 
 days of their term, for Brother John Parson exerted himself 
 vigorously to obtain a pardon from the Governor of the Territory, 
 and succeeded in doing so. He then took a wagon to the prison 
 for the men, and conveyed them to Fort Douglas. 
 
THE PROPHET CALLED. 
 
 No. i. PROVO, UTAH, Spring of 1857. 
 
 THE FIRST REVELATION RECEIVED BY JOSEPH MORRIS, IN WHICH 
 
 HIS CALLING AS A PROPHET IS MADE KNOWN TO HIM. 
 
 1. Verily, verily, verily, thus saith the spirit unto thee, my ser- 
 vant Joseph : I, the Lord, have beheld thy afflictions, and know 
 the intentions of thy heart And because thou art pure before 
 me. I will give unto thee power over thine enemies ; and thou 
 shalt know that I am the Lord, and that I regard not the persons 
 of men only in their obedience to me. And, now, I say unto 
 thee, let thy heart be comforted, and know that I am with thee, 
 and will be with thee, through thy faithfulness, unto the end. 
 
 2. And I say unto thee, my servant, that I have chosen thee 
 from before the foundation of the world to be a mighty man, yea, 
 to be a prophet in Israel ; and thou shalt prophesy to many na- 
 tions, and peoples, and kings, and tongues. Yea, I say unto thee, 
 that the mountains shall tremble at the uttering of thy voice ; and 
 men shall seek thy life from place to place, and thirst after thy 
 blood as an ox thirsteth after water ; but they shall not have 
 power to take it before thy work is finished. 
 
 3. Thou shalt be betrayed by friends and relatives, and even 
 by thine own flesh and blood. 
 
 4. And I say unto thee, that I have chosen my servant Brig- 
 ham, and also mine apostles to lead my people Israel ; and that 
 power shall not be taken out of their hands only through trans- 
 gression. 
 
 5. And I say unto thee that thy sacrifice has been accepted; 
 and through it I have blessed thee and thy seed after thee through^ 
 out all their generations ; and no privilege in my Holy Temple 
 shall be denied thee and thy posterity forever. Thus saith the 
 Lord by the voice of the spirit. 
 
10 KEYS OF THE PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 KEYS OF THE PRESTHOOD. 
 
 No. 2. SALT LAKE CITY, Winter of 1859. 
 
 A REVELATION OF JESUS CHRIST, GIVING AN EXPLANATION OF 
 
 THOSE ONE HUNDRED AND FORTY-FOUR THOUSAND WHOM JOHN 
 SAW STANDING WITH JESUS UPON MOUNT ZlON. 
 
 1. Who are they? They are the firstborn sons of one hun- 
 dred and forty-four thousand Gods, all in advance of Jesus Christ. 
 John said that they were the first-fruits unto God. Unto what 
 God ? Unto each of their own Fathers. How did they become 
 the first-fruits unto the Lamb also? In that they were appointed 
 by his Father to assist him in bringing to pass the salvation and 
 exaltation of Adam's posterity, and, consequently, they received 
 his mark in their foreheads as a token of the appointment that they 
 had received from him. Why did they come forth upon this 
 earth to assist Jesus in bringing to pass the salvation and exalta- 
 tion of Adam's posterity ? In order that they might continue to 
 pass on from one stage of progression to another, and, ultimately, 
 become Gods like unto the Eternal Father. 
 
 2. How many progressive estates did the Eternal Father pass 
 through before he became a God? Ten. What were they? His 
 FIRST was a spiritual estate ; his SECOND, a probation in the flesh ; 
 his THIRD, a resurrected or celestial estate. In His FOURTH es- 
 tate he went forth upon a mortal earth, received a body, died up- 
 on a cross, and was raised again from the dead. In his FIFTH 
 estate he sat at the right hand of his Father, and was a Mediator, 
 and contended against and conquered death, hell and the grave, 
 In his SIXTH estate he took mortal bodies upon many mortal 
 earths, and officiated in the office of a high priest, a prophet and a 
 p/esident, 
 
 3. His mission to each of the last five of those earths, was to 
 preside over a dispensation of a thousand years on each earth ; on 
 the first of the five, he presided over the first thousand years ; on 
 the second of the five, over the second thousand years, and so on, 
 unto and including the fifth. In his SEVENTH estate he was a 
 prophet, and held the keys of the sixth dispensation. In his 
 EIGHTH estate he was a prophet, Redeemer, lawgiver ond presi- 
 dent of seventh dispensation holding the full keys of the holy 
 
KEYS OF THE PRIESTHOOD. II 
 
 priesthood. In his NINTH estate he went forth upon his own earth 
 to commence mortality, and having completed his mission, he died, 
 He afterwards returned to his own earth and commenced the 
 resurrection of his own posterity, and after its last great change he 
 ascended his throne, and this was his TENTH estate. 
 
 4. Who is Lucifer? He is the second born son of God the 
 Eternal Father. What was the cause of his fall ? He sought to 
 take away the birthright from Jesus Christ, and to break the con- 
 necting link of the holy priesthood. If he had been permitted to 
 come forth upon this earth to redeem Adam's posterity, he would 
 have brought them under him; and, contrary to eternal order, 
 he would have continued to hold them in subjection ; whereas, 
 Jesus being a firstborn son, he was under a covenant by which he 
 was bound to deliver up to the Father all the keys of authority 
 pertaining to this earth, after all things should be made subject 
 unto him, to which covenant Lucifer was not subject. 
 
 5. Did Lucifer come forth into a second estate and receive 
 a body? Yes, and those who fell with him received bodies also, 
 and many of them came into the Church, received their ordina- 
 tions to the holy priesthood, and also their endowments. Why 
 was Lucifer and his band permitted to come forth into a second 
 estate and receive bodies ? In order that they might come into the 
 Church of Christ, receive their ordinations to the two priesthoods, 
 and thereby obtain their outfit ; for they never had an ordination 
 to any authority in their first estate. They were then conquered, 
 cast out of the Church, and their bodies destroyed by Michael 
 who was at that time a seventh angel ; this was their first death. 
 
 6. Lucifer then became, in the spirit, the reigning devil to this 
 earth. How long will he reign? Until this earth is perfected, 
 when he and his band will be cast into a lake of fire and brim- 
 stone ; this will be their second death. 
 
 7. Every world has its devil whose history is similar to that of 
 Lucifer's. 
 
 8. Do devils try spirits in their first estate ? No, they do not. 
 The firstborn son rules in that estate, and the devils are subject to 
 him. But there is an eternal law of the Gods, according to which, 
 the devil, being the second born son, claims the right to lead off 
 in the second estate. His Father enters into a covenant with* him 
 
12 KEYS OF THE PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 when he falls, which is this: "Now, my second born son, seeing 
 that you have revolted from under my government, and have set 
 up a government of your own.,, in opposition to mine as my first- 
 born son rules in the first estate, so you shall lead off in the second 
 estate. And it shall come to pass,, that if you conquer me and my 
 prophets, you shall hold the world in your grasp., and I will lose all ; 
 but if I conquer you, you shall endure both the first and second 
 deaths." 
 
 9. Who is George A. Smith? The second born son of Adam. 
 Is he a fallen angel? Yes. When did he fall? In his first estate. 
 Did any others fall with him? Yes, a large train in like manner as, 
 they fell, who fell with Lucifer that was before him. 
 
 10. Is George A. Smith a true apostle? No; for he never was 
 ordained either to that or to any other office by any of the Gods of 
 eternity. In what sense then is he an apostle? In the same sense 
 that Judas was, of whom Jesus said, "I have chosen you twelve 
 and one of you is a devil." And as such he has gone forth teach- 
 ing the saints, until he has led them to the verge of destruction. 
 
 1 1. -What are those one hundred and forty-four thousand spok- 
 en of by John the Revelator? They are all high priests after the 
 order of Melchiseflec all having obtained a resurrected body. Why 
 were they called to officiate in the lesser offices of the priesthood? 
 Because it was not known who they were while the Church was 
 under an imperfect organization ; hence, they officiated in all the 
 lesser offices of the Church for the work of the ministry. 
 
 12. The holy priesthood runs by birthright, and the firstborn 
 son always holds the keys of that priesthood. Has the firstborn 
 son the privilege of becoming a God? Yes. Have any others 
 the same privilege? Yes. When the firstborn son steps out of 
 his place to become a God, the next to him steps into that place, 
 and holds the keys of the holy priesthood ; and so thfe order con- 
 tinues from one to another until they all hold the keys of the 
 priesthood. 
 
 13. When did Jesus Christ receive his first ordination to the 
 office of a high priest? Soon after he and his brethren had 
 received their resurrected bodies. His own Father ordained 
 them to that authority ; and, holding the holy priesthood, they 
 were appointed to fill the office of Holy Ghpsts pr ministering 
 
O'F tttE PRlESTHOOl). k3 
 
 angels to those of this earth who are heirs of salvation being 
 filled with eternal light 
 
 14. Where and by whom did Abel receive his ordination to 
 the lesser priesthood? In the Garden of Eden (so called), under 
 the hands of his father* Adam. By whom do the younger sons of 
 Adam receive their ordinations to the lesser priesthood? By Abel. 
 
 15. By whom did the fallen angels receive their ordinations to 
 the priesthood as pertaining to this earth? By Cain; and Cain 
 by Lucifer. Cain claims the right to enter into the Church, and 
 blind the eyes of all the servants of the Lord until he has obtained 
 his outfit ; he then becomes a reigning devil. 
 
 1 6. By whom did the holy priesthood come to this earth:' By 
 Seth, who received his ordination from Adam, and whose seed are 
 the chosen of the Lord. He claims the ruling power over this 
 planet, having all things placed under his feet. 
 
 17. Who was that Elijah (or Elias) who accompanied Moses 
 when he appeared unto Jesus upon the Mount> and ordained him 
 to the holy priesthood? It was Enos,, the firstborn son of Seth. 
 Why did Jesus Christ, when he was upon the earth, receive an or* 
 dination by Moses to the holy priesthood? Because Moses held 
 the full keys of the holy priesthood as pertaining to this earth j 
 and when Jesus came forth under his presidency, he had to re- 
 reive an ordination from him. Had Jesus any power to interfere 
 with the I^aw of Moses? No, he had not He came not to 
 destroy the law, but to fulfill it ; and by fulfilling it, he put an end 
 to the ceremonial portion thereof only. 
 
 1 8. What are Holy Ghosts? They are men who have once 
 lived upon a mortal earth like unto this. Upon what principle 
 did they, being many, become one? Upon the same principle as 
 that by which the Father and the Son became one. They all 
 obeyed one gospel, were all perfected by the same law, were all 
 counted worthy of a glorious resurrection, they all entered into the 
 celestial kingdom of their Father, by whom they were all ordained 
 to the high and holy priesthood, through whom and by whom they 
 were appointed to fill the office of Holy Ghosts, and to be minister- 
 ing spirits to the heirs of salvation upon this earth. 
 
 19. Why were the high priests after the order. of Melchisedec 
 commanded to lay their hands upon the members of the Church 
 
14 KEYS OF THE PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 of Christ in order to confer upon them the gift of the Holy Ghost? 
 Because high priests are firstborn sons, holding the keys of the 
 holy priesthood in all those celestial worlds from which they came; 
 and by virtue of their birthright, and being their superiors, they 
 claim the right to command the Holy Ghosts. 
 
 20. Are they all high priests by birthright who are now holding 
 that office in my Church ? No, they are not. What are they ? 
 Some of them are fallen angels ; others are sons f Aaron, and 
 but few of them are high priests by birthright ; hence, when they 
 lay their hands upon the saints, in order to confer upon them the 
 gift of the Holy Ghost, they confer upon them a false spirit instead, 
 thereof; for they can only give to others that which they, them- 
 selves, possess ; and being deceived themselves,, they deceive all 
 those to whom they administer. 
 
 21. Why is Aaron and his seed called to hold the lesser priest- 
 hood only ? Because they have not yet been resurrected ; and 
 their calling is to administer in temporal things ; therefore, when 
 they act in the offices of the high priesthood they deceive, for the 
 Holy Ghosts are not subject to them. 
 
 22. It is contrary to the eternal law f heaven for the lesser to* 
 rule the greater, and in consequence of the violation of this- 
 law vast numbers of false spirits have been introduced into the 
 Church, 
 
 23. According to the eternal law,, one* hundred and forty-four 
 thousand Gods form a quorum. The first God of a quorum, 
 assisted by the next two below him, who are his counselors, rule? 
 all the rest f the quorum,, and he is subject to the God immedi- 
 ately preceding him, and so on, even up to the first God of all 
 who rules and presides over all the quorums of the Gods. 
 
 25. What rod was that which Moses used? It was one of a 
 series of rods which came forth from the first God of all which 
 rods he signed with his own signature,, and covenanted also to sus- 
 tain those men who should be called to use them. These rods 
 are handed down from one G0d t another, and ne f them is. 
 held by the presiding God f each quorum during his reign. 
 There are many quorums,, and to each quorum is connected an. 
 earth in mortality. A presiding God rules for the space of seven 
 thousand years; and his son,, who is a seventh angel, rules at the 
 
KEYS OF THE PRIESTHOOD. 15 
 
 same time upon the mortal earth belonging to that quorum over 
 which his father presides, and while filling that mission he claims 
 the right to use his father's rod. Hence, Moses being a seventh- 
 angel, used his father's rod, and none other could use it unless 
 appointed by him. 
 
 25. Upon what principle does the Lord know all things, even 
 from the beginning to the end? He knows the principle by which 
 all worlds that have been were organized, governed, saved and 
 exalted, and he also knows that all worlds to come must be organ- 
 ized, governed, saved and exalted upon the same principle ; there- 
 fore, the Lord knows all things. 
 
 36. And now I say unto you, O ye saints, lift up your heads 
 and rejoice ! for I, the Lord, have raised up unto you a mighty 
 prophet, who shall deliver you out of the hands of your enemies, 
 rfnd lead you triumphantly over them all. He is a man after 
 mine own heart, and in his mouth I have found no guile. I have 
 tried him as I never before tried man upon the earth, and he has 
 never flinched from his integrity. I have given unto him the keys 
 of my kingdom, and whatsoever he shall bind on earth, shall be 
 bound in heaven ; whosesoever sins he shall remit, I will remit 
 them ; and whosesoever sins he shall retain, I will retain them, I 
 am he whose words are quick and powerful, sharper than a two- 
 edged sword ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen, 
 
 DISOBEDIENT HIGH PRIESTS. 
 
 No. 3. UTAH, March ipth, 1860. 
 
 REVELATION concerning those who having been ordained to 
 the office of High Priests, refuse to go on missions when they are 
 called to do so by the prophet of the Lord, or other legal authori- 
 ties. This is the penalty for that crime : 
 
 Their authority in the Holy Priesthood shall be taken from 
 them in this life, and they shall be bereaved of their wives and 
 children for time, and be made servants to those who fill their 
 mission, I am Jesus Christ Even so. Amen and Amen, 
 
1 6 THE DELIVERANCE OF THE PEOPLE OF GOD, 
 
 THE DELIVERANCE OF THE PEOPLE OF GOEt 
 
 No, 4, UTAH, August iyth r 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ,, the Alpha and Omega, even 
 the beginning and the end. 
 
 2. I have uttered my voice, and it shall be obeyed, and I 
 testify unto you, O r ye rebellious shepherds of my flock that I 
 have given this revelation unto my servant Joseph,- according to 
 the commandment which I have received of my Father. 
 
 3. I have done my duty to you faithfully ; but, notwithstand- 
 ing all my pleadings with you, you have turned a deaf ear to me 
 from the beginning* I can do nothing with you. You have pre- 
 ferred your own judgment to mine,, and thus you are going on. 
 destroying my Church, 
 
 4. The cries of my people have come up into my ears for 
 redress, and, as I live, I will burst their bands asunder,, and give 
 unto them an abundant deliverance. I will supply their needs 
 both in food and raiment ; and I will be their God, and they shall 
 be my people; and I will leave them no more, for my bowels' 
 have yearned with pity towards them. 
 
 5. O! ye saints who trust in me,, 'let your hearts be comforted,, 
 for I have raised up unto you a mighty deliverer, who shall lead 
 you victoriously over all your enemies ; and if you continue faith- 
 ful unto me, you shall see no more affliction. 
 
 6. The cries of the fair daughters of my people have come uj> 
 before me, and I will heal up their wounds. Oh, ye afflicted 
 saints ! hearken to the .words of the Lord your God, and prepare 
 for that which is coming upon you ; for I am about to seperate 
 the sheep from the goats, and if you are prepared for it, it will 
 be well with you. 
 
 7. And, inasmuch as I have sent a warning, voice unto the 
 chief shepherds of my flock, which they have partially rejected, I 
 require a sacrifice to be made by them > and unless this sacrifice 
 is made, there is no salvation for them ; for when men enter into 
 a covenant with me to become mine apostles, and take an oath of 
 the Holy Priesthood, and pledge their word and honor to uphold 
 
REORGANIZATION OE THE HOLY PRIESTHOOD. 17 
 
 that Priesthood, and to live by every word that proceeds from my 
 mouth, and afterward turn a deaf ear to my commandments, they 
 cannot be saved only by the shedding of their blood. 
 
 8. Therefore, O, ye shepherds ! I say unto you, prepare your- 
 selves for that which is coming upon you ; for I will shorten your 
 lives you shall satisfy the demands of justice. My wrath and 
 indignation are kindled against you ; and I will visit you in a day 
 that you are not aware of. 
 
 9. And, now, I say Unto you, my servant, that I will make up 
 unto you for all the disappointments which you have endured 
 through their rebellion. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he who holds the keys of death and 
 hell ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE RE-ORGANIZATION OF THE HOLY 
 PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 No. 5. UTAH, September 6th, 1860, 
 
 1. BEHOLD! Verily 1 say unto you, my servant Joseph, that 
 inasmuch as I have chosen you to stand at the head of my 
 Church, as the Prophet, Seer, and Revelator of the same, you shall 
 take my servant Brigham to be your first counselor, and place 
 upon him the presidency of my Church, under your direction ; 
 and, inasmuch as he will stand by you and take your counsel, I 
 will greatly multiply blessings upon his head. 
 
 2. As concerning my servant Heber, I, the Lord, am not well 
 pleased with him; for he has committed a grevious sin against me; 
 and if he humbleth not himself before me, he shall be destroyed ; 
 but, if he humbleth himself sufficiently before me, he shall receive 
 his former office back among my servants the Twelve, and I will 
 be with him. 
 
 3. I, the Lord, have ordained that another shall act in his 
 place even my servant John Banks ; for I have seen his afflic- 
 tion, and know his weakness, and I will strengthen him, and give 
 him power over his weakness, and he shall become mighty in my 
 Church, and no privilege shall be denied him that is lawful and 
 right ; for his heart is upright before me. 
 
1 8 RE-ORGANIZATION OF THE HOLY PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 4. As concerning the rest of the quorums of my Church, I 
 will that all those who are heirs to my holy priesthood shall be 
 ordained to the office of high priests ; but the quorums of seven- 
 ties and elders shall no more exist in my Church. 
 
 5. There shall not, henceforth, but two quorums exist in my 
 Church : the high priesthood and the lesser priesthood ; and those 
 of the sons of Adam who are faithful shall be ordained to the 
 lesser priesthood. 
 
 6. As concerning the rules and regulations of my Church per- 
 taining to, government, I will give unto my servant Joseph power in 
 mine own due time ; and he shall write a book which shall contain 
 the fulness of my law, and it shall be called "The Book of the 
 Law of the Lord," and out of it all men shall be judged both 
 small and great. 
 
 7. There is a party spirit in my Church; yea, and among the 
 first elders of my Church, which thing is an abomination in my 
 sight. And I will that my servants should cast those feelings out 
 of their hearts, or I will not hold them guiltless. 
 
 I am he who holds in his hands the keys of -death and hell ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE GREAT COMET. 
 
 No. 6. UTAH, September 6th, 1860. 
 
 A REVELATION of Jesus Christ giving an explanation of that 
 great comet that has been seen of late. 
 
 1. Verily I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that inasmuch as 
 you have inquired of me to know concerning it, I will make it 
 known to you, It is the seventh star spoken of by John the Reve- 
 lator, representing the seventh angel that has come forth ; and the 
 tail that was attached to it is a representation of the army of 
 heaven that was to follow the seventh angel. 
 
 2. Behold, I am Jesus Christ, and I testify unto all men that 
 dwell upon the face of the earth that I have sent forth the seventh 
 angel to preside over my Church upon the earth, and it will be 
 woe unto them if they do not humble themselves and obey my 
 
JUDGMENT UPON HYPOCRITES. 19 
 
 gospel, for I will cut them off until there is none left upon the 
 earth to cumber it. 
 
 3. As concerning this star before mentioned, there has never 
 been the like of it seen before upon this earth for magnitude and 
 greatness, nor will be again until the seventh angel comes forth 
 upon another earth like unto this ; therefore, O ye saints prepare 
 for that which is coming upon you, or you will be caught in a 
 snare, and it will be woe unto you if you are cast out of my 
 Church ; therefore hearken unto my words which are 1 quick and 
 powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword ; and behold I come 
 quickly. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 JUDGMENT UPON HYPOCRITES, 
 
 No. 7. UTAH, September 6th, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, verily I say unto you, my servant Joseph, prepare 
 yourself for the work which lies before you ; for I, the Lord, am 
 about to judge between those who serve me, and those who serve 
 me not but who are liars and hypocrites who have oppressed 
 the poor of my people, and turned them away from their rights, 
 Behold, I will settle with them. 
 
 2. And I say unto you that you shall gather all my people 
 Israel together, that I may know who is for me ; and, at the time 
 appointed, I will make known unto you what you shall do, 
 
 3. And inasmuch as you have inquired of me to know con- 
 cerning my saints who are scattered abroad among the nations of 
 the earth, I will make known unto you that which you desire. I 
 am the Lord, and I will preserve them ; and in my own due time 
 I will send forth deliverers to deliver them, and bring them up to 
 the head of my Church. 
 
 4. As concerning the people of the nation called the United 
 States, who have shed the blood of my apostles and prophets, 
 and also of my saints, behold, I will shortly settle with them. I 
 I have given unto them privileges that I have given to no other 
 nation upon the earth ; but they have trampled upon all my bles- 
 sings, and come out as a nation against me to throw down my 
 
20 OATHS TO BE TAKEN BY OFFICERS, 
 
 Church, and to destroy my saints ; but they shall know that 1 am 
 the Lord, and that I will hot be challenged to war by poor mortal 
 man. Therefore, I will come out of my hiding place, and sweep 
 them out of existence ; and of those who are now in that nation, 
 I will leave none but the pure in heart, and they shall have my 
 gospel when the wicked are cut ofif, 
 
 5. Therefore, O, ye inhabitants of the earth prepare yourselves 
 for that which is coming upon the earth ; for the day of judgment 
 has now come to your doors, and I will lay you low by famine, by 
 pestilence, by earthquakes, and by flames of devouring fire, until 
 you are wasted away ; for my wrath is kindled against the rebell- 
 ious, and it will never be appeased until I have laid them low. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ, Even so. Amen 
 and Amen, 
 
 AN OATH OF THE HOLY PRIESTHOOD 
 
 TO BE SWORN BY THE PROPHET'S TWO COUNSELORS* 
 
 No. 8. UTAH, September 8th. 1860. 
 
 I HAVING been duly elected and ordained to the high priest- 
 hood, to be a counselor to the prophet of the Lord, do hereby set 
 my hand to swear an oath according to the order of the holy 
 priesthood, in the presence of the Father, and of the Son, and of 1 
 his servant, the prophet, who holds the keys of authority on this 
 earth. And I testify that I will uphold him with all my power, 
 and abide his counsel in all things until my mission is completed 
 upon the earth. 
 
 The person will then kiss the written word of the Lord and 
 write his name. 
 
 AN OATH OF THE HOLY PRIESTHOOD 
 
 TO BE SWORN BY THOSE WHO ARE ORDAINED TO THE OFFICE 
 OF APOSTLES. 
 
 No. 9. UTAH, September 8th, 1860. 
 
 I HAVING been duly elected and ordained to the high priesthood, 
 to be an apostle, even one of the special witnesses of Jesus Christ, 
 
MANNER OF ANOINTING. 21 
 
 to bear his name to the nations of the earth, do hereby set my 
 hand to swear an oath according to the order of the holy priest- 
 hood, in the presence of the Father, and of the Son, and of his^scrr 
 vant, the prophet, who holds the keys of authority on this earth, 
 And I testify that I will uphold him with all my power and abide 
 his counsel in all things until my mission is completed. 
 
 The person will then kiss the written word of the Lord, and 
 write his name. 
 
 AN OATH OF THE HOLY PRIESTHOOD 
 
 TO BE SWORN BY THOSE WHO ARE ORDAINED TO THE OFFICE 
 OF HIGH PRIESTS. 
 
 No. 10. UTAH, September pth, 1860. 
 
 I HAVING been ordained to the office of a high priest according 
 to my birthright, holding all keys pertaining to this high and holy' 
 calling, do hereby set my hand to swear an oath according to the 
 order of the holy priesthood, in the presence of the Feather, and of 
 the Son, and of his servant, the prophet, who holds the keys of 
 authority on this earth. And I testify that I will uphold him 
 with all my power, and abide his counsel in all things until my 
 mission is completed on the earth. 
 
 The person will then kiss the written word of the Lord and 
 write his name. 
 
 THE MANNER OF ANOINTING THE ELECT LADY. 
 
 No. ii. UTAH, September 9th, 1860. 
 
 i. I, THE PROPHET the of the Lord, holding the full keys of 
 the holy priesthood, according to my birthright, anoint you in the 
 name of Jesus Christ with this holy anointing, according to your 
 birthright, to be a prophetess, even the elect lady, and set you apart 
 to minister in holy things to all those who are of your sex. I, 
 moreover, anoint your womb that you may bring forth a holy 
 posterity unto the Lord. 
 
22 MANNER OF ANOINTING. 
 
 2. The prophet will then lay his hands upon the head of the 
 elect lady, and express these words : I, the prophet of the Lord, 
 holding the full keys of the holy priesthood, according to my birth- 
 right, place my hands upon your head, and seal upon you this 
 holy anointing in the name of Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 The person's name shall then be recorded in the "Lamb's Book 
 of Life," to be no more blotted out forever, 
 
 MANNER OF ANOINTING FEMALES IN THE CHURCH 
 OF CHRIST. 
 
 No. 12, UTAH, September 9th, 1860. 
 
 1. I HAVING been duly elected and anointed to this authority, 
 according to my birthright, anoint you in the name of Jesus Christ 
 with a holy anointing, according to your birthright ; and I set you 
 apart to minister in holy things, according as you shall hereafter 
 be appointed. I, moreover, anoint your womb that you may 
 bring forth a holy posterity unto the Lord. 
 
 2, The elect lady will .then place her hand upon the head of 
 the handmaiden, and express these words : Beloved handmaiden, 
 I having been duly elected and anointed with a holy anointing, 
 according to my birthright to this authority, place my hands upon 
 your head, and seal upon you this holy anointing in the name of 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 The person's name shall then be recorded in the "Lamb's Book 
 of Life," to be blotted out no more forever. 
 
 MANNER OF ANOINTING HIGH PRIESTS. 
 
 No. 13. UTAH, September pth, 1860. 
 
 i. I, the prophet of the Lord, holding the full keys of the holy 
 priesthood, according to my birthright, anoint you in the name of 
 Jesus Christ with a holy anointing according to your birthright, 
 and set you apart to minister in holy things, according to that 
 
MANNER OF ANOINTING AND ORDAINING. 23 
 
 office to which you have been ordained. I, moreover, anoint your 
 secret member that you may beget a holy posterity unto the Lord. 
 2. The prophet will then place his hands upon the head of the 
 person, and express these words : I, the prophet of the Lord, 
 holding the full keys of the holy priesthood, according to my birth- 
 right, place my hands upon your head, and seal upon you this 
 holy anointing in the name of Jesus Christ, Even so, Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 MANNER OF ORDAINING MEN TO THE HIGH 
 PRIESTHOOD, 
 
 No, 14. UTAH, September Qth, 1860, 
 
 I, BEING a servant of the Lord, holding the high priesthood, ac- 
 cording to my birthright and ordination, place my hands upon 
 your head in the name of Jesus Christ. And inasmuch as yoij arq 
 an heir with me to this authority, I ordain you to the office of a 
 high priest, and confer upon you all the gifts, powers, and keys 
 pertaining to this high and holy calling, in the name of Jesqs 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 
 MANNER OF CONFIRMING MEMBERS IN THE 
 CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST. 
 
 No. 15. UTAH, September pth, 
 
 DEAR brother (or sister), I being a servant of the Lord, holding 
 the high priesthood according to my birthright and ordination, place 
 my hands upon yoyr head, and confer upon you the gift of the 
 Holy Ghost ; and inasmuch as you will give heed to the- prompt- 
 ings of that Holy Messenger, he shall lead you into ajl truth, and 
 direct your footsteps until the perfect day ; and I seal his attend- 
 ance upon you in the. name of Jesus Christ. Jyn sp, Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
THE OLD CHURCH REJECTED. 
 
 THE OLD CHURCH REJECTED. 
 
 No. 1 6. UTAH, September i6th, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD! Verily I say unto you, my servant Joseph, pie- 
 pare yourself to go forth and deliver my people Israel ; for the set 
 time for their deliverance has now come. I have sent a warning 
 voice unto the chief shepherds of my flock, and they have treated 
 it as a light thing, and trampled it under their feet as a thing of 
 naqght ; but they shall now know that I am the Lord, and that I 
 can deliver my people, and do my own work without their assist- 
 ance. 
 
 2. I have done my duty to them ; but they have not done 
 their duty to me ; for when I most needed their assistance, they 
 withheld it from me. Yet I am not .without friends in the world, 
 and this they shall shortly see. And I say unto you, that you 
 shall go forth and open your mouth, and with all your power pro- 
 claim both loud and long against the abominations of this people ; 
 for they have altogether departed from me, and I have rejected 
 them. 
 
 2. And, behold, I give unto you a commandment that you 
 shall gather together all those who will hearken unto me ; and I 
 will preserve their lives, and supply their needs both in food and 
 raiment, and I will be their God, and they shall be my people j 
 and I will feed them in a fat pasture, and I will leave them no 
 more. 
 
 4. And I will cut off from the earth all those who will not 
 gather themselves together according to your command ; for I am 
 the Lord. And I will establish the full keys of the holy priest- 
 hood upon the earth, even though I should have to cut off the 
 whole community in order to do so. 
 
 5. And I say unto you that you shall not regard those shep- 
 herds whom, formerly, I placed over my flock, but who are now 
 mine enemies ; for tears of sorrow shall roll down their cheeks. I 
 have done all in my power to save them, but it is all in vain ; and 
 they shall be the first to feel my withering hand ; for my wrath is 
 kindled against them to overflowing. And inasmuch as you have 
 desired a greater manifestation of my power, I will grant it unto 
 
THE ROD OF MOSES. 25 
 
 you ; and when you are called to deliver my people, I will place 
 the rod in your hand with all the power that accompanied it when 
 it was upon the earth before ; for thou art Moses, the legal heir to 
 use it, and no person save thyself shall use it ; therefore, prepare 
 thyself to receive it ; for I will speedily send a holy messenger with 
 it. He shall place it in your hand, and no power shall stand be- 
 fore you all your days. Yea, verily I say unto thee, kings shall 
 consume away and drop from their thrones, and nations shall 
 crumble to dust, and thou shalt have the power to smite the earth 
 with a curse as often as thou wilt, until thy mission is ended ; for 
 I will be with thee unto the end. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he that was, and is, and is to come ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE ROD OF MOSES. 
 
 No. 17. UTAH, September 24th, 1860. 
 
 1. THIS rod proceeded forth from the first God of all, and it 
 is as endurable as God himself. He placed his superscription upon 
 it, and he is sworn to sustain that man who is called to use it, and 
 it cannot be used by any person but the seventh angel, or those 
 whom he shall appoint ; for the seventh angel is always the presi- 
 dent of that world in which he dwells. It is his duty to preside 
 over the dispensation of the fullness of times, and he is sustained 
 by all the Gods of eternity, who number millions. And I say un- 
 to you, my servant Joseph, that I will place the rod of Moses in 
 your hand, for you are worthy ; therefore, prepare yourself to re- 
 ceive it. 
 
 2. To every quorum of the Gods there is a world like unto 
 this passing through a state of mortality ; and to the creations of 
 the great King of Kings and Lord of Lords there is no end. 
 
 3. Behold, I am Jesus Christ, and I testify unto all the inhabi- 
 tants of the earth that I have opened the seventh seal. Therefore, 
 I say unto you, O ye inhabitants of the earth, prepare yourselves 
 for that which is coming upon you ; for I will lay the wicked low, 
 for my wrath is kindled, and it will never be appeased until I 
 
26 REVELATION TO PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG. 
 
 have avenged the blood of all my saints and servants that has 
 been shed upon the earth since the world began. 
 
 4. And, behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that I 
 have raised you up, that through you I might make manifest mine 
 almighty power in the defense of my chosen people. Therefore, 
 my son, be of good courage, and I will be with you, and no power 
 shall stand before you unto the end ; for the hand that is raised 
 against you shall wither, and the tongue that lies against you, shall 
 consume away in its mouth ; and I will bless you above all men 
 with an abundance of blessings, for I have chosen you. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he that was, and is, and is to come ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION TO PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG. 
 
 No. 1 8. UTAH, October 2nd, 1860. 
 
 1. WHEN you were small in your own eyes, I took you and 
 raised you up, and I guarded you both by night and by day ; and 
 when you were afflicted I raised you up again, and I multiplied 
 blessings upon you. I increased your cattle, your horses, your 
 houses and your lands, until you have waxed great. I guarded 
 you as a father guards his son, and you were unto me as the apple 
 of mine eye. But when I raised up a prophet to deliver my peo- 
 ple, and sent him unto you, you shut your door against him, for 
 which thing my wrath and indignation are kindled against you. 
 Therefore, I say unto you, if you had not done this wicked thing, 
 I would have established both you and your seed upon the throne 
 of Israel forever ; but now I will deliver you into the hands of my 
 servant Joseph, and what he does, I will sanction ; for his word 
 shall never fail. 
 
 2. As concerning my servant Heber, his heart was bound up in 
 my servant Joseph Smith. He has thought that my servant Joseph 
 Smith held the full keys of this last dispensation, and also the 
 leading keys of the resurrection ; but he has been deceived. 
 
 3. My servant Joseph Smith is the sixth angel, and he was ap- 
 pointed to open the sixth seal, and to loose the four angels who 
 
REVELATION TO PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG. 27 
 
 were bound in the great river Euphrates, that they might be ready 
 to go to war when the seventh angel should open the seventh seal. 
 These angels represent the riders of the four horses that John saw, 
 and they are the captains of the Lord's hosts. 
 
 4. Did my servant Joseph Smith hold the full keys of the 
 holy priesthood? No, he did not; he only held them in part. 
 Does the seventh angel hold the full keys of my holy priesthood? 
 Yes, he does ; and there is but one man upon the earth who can 
 hold the full keys of that priesthood. Who is that man? It is 
 my servant Joseph Morris. He holds the full keys of my kingdom 
 on the earth ; for he is next in authority to Adam ; and he received 
 his ordination in a council of the Gods to preside over Adam's 
 posterity, and to deliver them out of the hands of all their enemies. 
 
 5. Does my servant Joseph Smith hold the leading keys of 
 the resurrection pertaining to Adam's posterity? No, he does 
 not; nor he never will. Does my servant Joseph Morris hold 
 those keys? No. Who does then? Adam holds the leading 
 keys of the resurrection pertaining to his own posterity. 
 
 6. How many persons are there who hold the leading keys of 
 the resurrection pertaining to this planet? Two. Who are they? 
 Adam and Jesus. 
 
 7. Joseph Smith gives up to Moses; Moses gives up to Adam; 
 Adam gives up to Jesus ; and Jesus gives up to the Father, that 
 God may be all in all. 
 
 8. When Jesus shall have finished his work as a Mediator, 
 he will step out of that place and will go forth upon other earths 
 and preach the gospel ; and he will go on from step to step until 
 he becomes a God like unto the Eternal Father. 
 
 9. And when this world becomes celestialized, and moves out 
 of its present position, and takes its place among celestial planets, 
 Adam will be worshipped by the posterity of Moses as the Eternal 
 Father is now worshipped by Adam's posterity and this accord- 
 ing to the law of eternal progression. 
 
 10. Joseph Smith will come forth upon another earth like un- 
 to this, and hold the full keys of the holy priesthood, to preside 
 over the posterity of Moses. 
 
 11. Jesus said, "No man taketh my life away; but I lay it 
 down of myself. I have power to lay down my life, and I have 
 
28 THE DELIVERANCE OF GOD'S PEOPLE. 
 
 power to take it up again this commandment I received from 
 my Father." 
 
 12. O ye hundred and forty-four thousand! you also have 
 power to lay down your lives and to take them up again ; for you 
 received this commandment from your Fathers. And you, in 
 connection with Adam, hold the keys of the resurrection per- 
 taining to his posterity. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE DELIVERANCE 
 OF GOD'S PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 19. UTAH, October i3th, 1860. 
 
 1. VERILY I say unto you my servant Joseph that, inasmuch as 
 you have desired to know of me concerning the time when I have 
 concluded to commence to deliver my people, I will make it 
 known unto you. 
 
 2. I have heard your prayers and seen your agonizing groans 
 in behalf of mine afflicted people, and I will now satisfy your feel- 
 ings ; for I have borne with the follies of those chief shepherds of 
 my flock until I will bear with them no longer ; therefore, prepare 
 yourself for the work, for I will commence to deliver my people 
 this fall, and it will be woe unto those who undertake to stay my 
 hand, for I will sweep them out of existence as with the besom of 
 destruction until there shall be none left to tell the tale. I have 
 heard the cries of mine afflicted people until I will hear them no 
 longer. 
 
 3. And as for the chief shepherds of my flock, I will not be 
 trifled with by them any longer. Therefore, if they are not ready 
 to do their duty at the time which I have appointed, I will cut 
 them off first, and afterwards those who uphold them, until there 
 shall be nothing left to oppose me ; for I am the Lord, and I am 
 not to be mocked. Had it not have been for the pure that are 
 among my people, I would have cut those shepherds off before 
 this time ; but with a view to save the pure of my people, I have 
 suffered them to run thus far; but, now I will, at all hazards, 
 
THE DELIVERANCE OF GOD'S PEOPLE. 29 
 
 deliver all those who will hearken unto me, and the rest I will 
 destroy. I have shown mercy the rebellious shepherds of my 
 flock, until mercy has no more claim upon them. 
 
 4. And I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that inasmuch as 
 you are surrounded by enemies who are laying snares to entrap 
 you, they shall have no power over you ; but I will break up all 
 their plans by confusing them in their councils until they shall feel 
 that it is hard for them to kick against me ; for my course is one 
 eternal round, and my purposes never fail. 
 
 5. And I say unto you, that whomsoever you curse, I will 
 curse ; and whomsoever you bless, I will bless. And your power 
 shall be felt to the ends of the earth. And although you have 
 murmured against me because I have suffered the deliverance of 
 my people to be delayed up to the present time, yet I have for- 
 given you. And I say unto you, my son, murmur no more ; for I 
 will be with you to the end. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he that was, and is, and is to come ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE DESTRUCTION OF THE SHEPHERDS OF 
 
 ISRAEL. THE REJECTION OF THE 
 
 TEMPLE. 
 
 No. 20. UTAH, October i6th, 1860. 
 
 BEHOLD, I am the Alpha and Omega, even Jesus Christ. I 
 have seen the distress of mine afflicted people, and I have pre- 
 pared a way for their escape. And I have seen the disobedience 
 of those men with whom I entrusted the souls of my people. 
 When I wished to change things I could not work with them ; for 
 instead of assisting me, they sought their own way, and they have 
 been my greatest opposers. Nevertheless, when they shall have 
 done the most against me that they are able to do, I shall have 
 power in mine own hands to accomplish my purposes. I can do 
 without those who can do without me. But they wish to do their 
 own will, and still be considered my servants. I would that they 
 were either hot or cold ; but they are neither. 
 
 2. Oh! how my bowels yearn with pity towards the pure 
 
30 THE DESTRUCTION OF THE FALSE SHEPHERDS. 
 
 of my people who are going on like lambs to the slaughter, and 
 whom I shall be compelled to cut off on account of the wicked- 
 ness of those chief shepherds of my flock. But I will satisfy my- 
 self upon them ; for I will not leave one of their seed alive. As I 
 did to Jeroboam, so I will do to them. 
 
 3. They have done nothing but aggravate me in all their 
 works. When I have commanded them to do one thing, they 
 have done another in opposition to it. When I commanded them 
 to seal no more, they continued sealing as though I had never 
 spoken ; thus trampling my words under their feet. And when I 
 commanded them to send out no more missionaries, they disre- 
 garded my word, and sent missionaries out as though I had never 
 spoken. 
 
 4. They have also contemplated building the temple which I 
 have rejected ; but, behold, I say unto you, O ye rebellious shep- 
 herds ! you have gone your length, and I will now stop you ; for 
 the man that undertakes to lay a stone upon that temple I will cut 
 both him and his seed off from the earth forthwith, and his name 
 shall be handed down in shame and disgrace from generation to 
 generation. 
 
 5. And as for the men who have been sent out on missions in 
 opposition to my command, I will deliver them into the hands of 
 their enemies, and it will be hard for them to escape. And they 
 shall be confounded on every hand ; for I am not with them. I 
 am the Lord. 
 
 6. And as for the sealing which has been done in opposition 
 to my command, I will cast it all down, and visit upon those who 
 have attended to that matter all the sins which have been com- 
 mitted by those who have been sealed by them ; for I am not to 
 be mocked. 
 
 7. Therefore, I say unto you, my son, place yourself in readi- 
 ness for that which is coming upon you ; for I will lay your way 
 open, and you shall have no difficulty in going forth to your place. 
 You shall meet with no disappointments as you have hitherto 
 done. And, at the time appointed, I will make known unto you 
 the course you shall take; therefore, place your confidence in me, 
 and I will lead you triumphantly over all your enemies, and my 
 people shall see no more affliction forever ; for I am the Lord 
 and I will be their shepherd forever. Even so. Amen and Amen' 
 
THE GATHERING TO SALT LAKE CITY. 31 
 
 THE GATHERING TO SALT LAKE CITY. 
 
 No. 21. UTAH, October 24th, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, the Son of the Eternal Father, 
 even he who holds the keys of death and hell. I suffered my 
 blood to be shed upon the cross for the sins of the world that I 
 might save as many as my Father hath put within my power. 
 
 2. And I testify unto all mankind that I have given this reve- 
 lation unto my servant Joseph according to the commandment 
 which I received from my Father. Therefore, I say unto you, 
 O ye saints who trust in me, and profess to live by every word 
 that proceeds from my mouth, place yourselves in readiness for 
 that which is coming upon you, for you shall behold scenes that 
 will cause your hearts to melt within you. 
 
 3. For I am about to gather together, unto one place, all those 
 that will hearken to me ; and it mattereth not unto me whether 
 the liars and hypocrites gather themselves together, or not ; for I 
 will cut them off let them be wheresoever they may. 
 
 4. I have appointed a place for the gathering together of my 
 people, which place is the Public Square in that City called the 
 Great Salt Lake City even the central point. 
 
 5. And I will there stand side by side with my servant Joseph, 
 and speak to him mouth to mouth ; and I will instruct him in 
 those things which will be necessary for him to know at the 
 appointed time. 
 
 6. And I will give unto him power to discern between the 
 sheep and the goats { so called ) ; and he shall place the sheep on 
 the one side and the goats on the other ; for this is the harvest 
 spoken of in the Scripture, when the angels were to be sent to 
 gather out the tares' from among the wheat, that the wheat might 
 l>e save^ and that the tares might be destroyed, 
 
 7. And at that time the hosts of heaven shall be there, and I 
 -will lead them up to battle, and go before them from conquering 
 to conquer ; and I will never again stay my hand until I have laid 
 mine enemies flow ; for my time is now come to make manifest 
 mine almighty power among the nations and .kingdoms of the 
 earth. 
 
32 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PROPHET. 
 
 8. Therefore, my son rest assured that I will be with thee, 
 and make known unto thee all things which may be necessary for 
 thee to know unto the end. And although thou hast been 
 mocked and derided by thine enemies, and hast been belied by 
 them, and been driven from place to place without a sure place to 
 lay thine head, yet thou hast a friend in me who is greater than al] 
 thine enemies. 
 
 9. And now, O ye mockers, hearken to the words of the Lord 
 unto you : Your race is now run, and you shall know that when 
 you mock my servant whom I have called to hold the keys of my 
 kingdom, that you mock me ; and I will settle with you. Behold, 
 I am Jesus Christ, and I testify unto all the inhabitants of the 
 earth that I have sent that spirit which inhabited the body of 
 Moses to rule rny kingdom upon the earth, and that spirit now in- 
 habits the body of my servant Joseph ; and all those who do not 
 believe it, shall soon feel it. Therefore, O ye mockers, mock on, 
 the scene will soon be over. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 TO THE PROPHET JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 No. 22. UTAH, October 3oth, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, verily thus saith the Lord unto you, my son, mur- 
 mur not at your fate, neither be faint-hearted nor faithless inj[my 
 promises ; but be of good courage, and remember that I am with 
 you to fight your battles. 
 
 2. Why should you doubt in my promises? Have I ever 
 failed to fulfill my promises as far as I have gone with you t An- 
 swer this for yourself ; and if I have never failed to fulfill my 
 promises, and you do not believe in those promises which yet re- 
 main to be fulfilled, you are under condemnation. Yea, I require 
 that you should place the utmost confidence in me. Therefore, 
 trifle not with my words ; but rise up and do your duty, and pre- 
 pare yourself for the work that lies before you, for it is at your 
 door. 
 
 3. Do you suppose that I am driven about by every wind that 
 
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PROPHET. 33 
 
 blows, and tossed about like a wave upon the ocean? What think 
 you about it? Then trifle with me no more; neither use any 
 more insulting language towards me. Oh how you have piercecL 
 my heart with the language that you have used to me. I can do 
 my duty without being driven to it. 
 
 4. And when you are ready to go forth to your place go ; 
 and if I am not there to open your way and guard you from your 
 enemies, and lead you triumphantly over them all, I will bear the 
 blame forever. And if you do not speedily rise up and go, you 
 will be under condemnation ; for I am now ready, and I will con- 
 sume everything that stands in your way. And, as a token of this, 
 I will cut off a number of this people that you may know that the 
 time for the work to commence has come ; for those shepherds of 
 my flock will not open the way for you unless I do this. When 
 this is done, you shall go forth speedily, or your enemies will be 
 upon you, and I will not protect you only in the line of your duty. 
 
 5. Therefore, prepare thyself now, and hearken, and try to 
 satisfy thy mind. I say unto thee, that if I do not fulfill the 
 promises which I have made to the very letter, thou art under no 
 further obligation to me and to this people ; and I will do unto 
 thee as thou hast desired of me, or otherwise I will bear the blame 
 forever. Therefore, settle thy mind upon the matter, and all will 
 be well. I am Jesus Christ, the Son of the Eternal Father. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 BLESSINGS FOR THE PROPHET'S BENEFACTORS. 
 
 No. 23. UTAH, November 8th, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Eternal Father, and I speak unto you, 
 my servant Joseph, through mine Only Begotten Son. 
 
 2. And inasmuch as you have felt dissatisfied with my deal- 
 ings with you, in my not submitting to be counselled by you, be- 
 hold I will satisfy you upon this matter. In consequence of the 
 situation in which you have been placed, I have withheld the 
 power of your office from you up to this time ; nevertheless, I 
 have committed unto you the full keys of the holy priesthood ; but 
 
34 BLESSINGS FOR THE PROPHET'S BENEFACTORS. 
 
 now I will committ unto you the full power of your office unto 
 your satisfaction. 
 
 3. You have often feared that I would not fulfill my word ; 
 but I am unchangeable in my course. And now I will counsel 
 with you in all things with which you have to deal ; and your 
 command shall be obeyed in all things ; for I will go before you 
 and make your words good. 
 
 4. Thou art that prophet of whom Moses spoke, who was to 
 come in the lat % er days whose word should be obeyed by all. 
 
 5. And I say unto you, settle your affairs at the place where 
 you now dwell, and get ready. Set your own time to commence 
 the work, and it shall be brought about at your appointed time, 
 and in your appointed way ; for I have now committed unto you 
 all power ; therefore, all things are now placed within your power ; 
 and I will influence you, and make you understand my will con- 
 cerning all things with which you have to deal. And whom thou 
 wilt, I will save alive ; and whom thou wilt, I will destroy ; there- 
 fore, linger not, but go forth as thou art commanded, and start 
 the work. I am the Lord. Even so. Amen. 
 
 6. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the hand- 
 maid in whose house you have dwelt. I have beheld all her 
 affliction with her husband, and I have prepared a blessing for 
 her ; for I will restore her husband unto her again, and he shall 
 be a blessing unto her all her days, 
 
 7. I have seen his affliction until my bowels have yearned 
 with pity towards him ; for I know him. He is a chosen vessel to 
 hold my holy priesthood upon the earth ; and I will make of him 
 a mighty man ; and I will make up unto him for all his distresses. 
 And because they opened their doors for you when you were in 
 distress, and assisted you in the work which I raised you up to do, 
 their names shall be handed down from generation to generation 
 as a memorial for the good deeds which they have done to you. 
 I do not look at men as they look at each other ; for that which is 
 highly esteemed among men, is an abomination in my sight. I 
 am Jesus Christ Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE SIGNS OF COMMAND. 35 
 
 THE SIGNS OF COMMAND. 
 
 No. 24. UTAH, November nth, 1860. 
 
 1. VERILY, verily, thus saith the Lord, even Jesus Christ the 
 Son of God, I have settled my mind concerning the course which 
 I am about to take with my people from the highest of them to 
 the lowest. And I say unto you, my son, that I will now settle 
 the matter with them to your satisfaction. Therefore, settle thy 
 business as I have before commanded thee, and also give the 
 command ; and from the very hour that thou shalt do this, I will 
 commence to lay mine enemies low. If I do not, I will bear the 
 blame forever, and thou shalt be free from blame. And when 
 thou shalt give the command, thou shalt raise thy right arm to- 
 ward heaven, and express these words : 
 
 2. O God, the Eternal Father, in the name of thy Son, Jesus 
 Christ, I call upon thee on this solemn occasion ; and inasmach 
 as thou hast conferred upon me this honor, namely, to deliver thy 
 people out of the hands of all their enemies having placed under 
 my charge and at my command all thy heavenly host by virtue 
 of my authority I command them to go forth from this very hour, 
 even from conquering to conquer. 
 
 3. And when thou wishest to stop me, thou shalt again raise 
 thy right arm, and express these words : 
 
 4. O God, the Eternal Father, by virtue of my authority, I 
 call upon thee, in the name of thy Son, Jesus Christ, to stay thy 
 hand. 
 
 5. And when thou hast expressed these words, thou shalt drop 
 thy arm. And these shall be the signs which thou shalt manifest 
 for starting and stopping. And thou shalt prove that thy word 
 shall never fail. 
 
 6. And when I commence, I will never stay mine hand again 
 until thy way shall be opened, and thou shalt say unto me, "stop." 
 And* I will cut off everything that stands in the way; and thou 
 shalt never again have to complain of me for my backwardness. 
 And, for thy satisfaction, I say unto thee, if I do not fulfill this 
 promise to the very letter, I will take thee out of the midst of this 
 people up into my presence at one hour's notice ; for thou shalt 
 
36 DESTRUCTION OF FALSE SHEPHERDS, 
 
 suffer no longer. And I make unto thee a promise that thou 
 shalt never lose thy life by the hand of an enemy ; therefore, I say 
 unto thee, give the command when thou art ready. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 THE DESTRUCTION OF THE FALSE SHEPHERDS. 
 
 No. 25. UTAH, November i3th, 1860. 
 
 1. VERILY I say unto you, my servant Joseph, be not fearful, 
 nor faint-hearted ; but be of good courage, for I am with thee, 
 and I will make known unto thee the course which I am about to 
 take with mine enemies. 
 
 2. Inasmuch as I have sent a warning voice unto the chief 
 shepherds of my flock, and they have rejected it, I will cut both 
 them and their seed off first, and afterwards I will continue until 
 I shall have cut off all the responsible men in my Church, who are 
 now acting under their influence, until there shall not be a false 
 shepherd left among my people, neither large nor small. 
 
 3. And from them I will go to mine enemies who have come 
 into the midst of my people, and I will not leave one of them 
 alive ; .and inasmuch as I could not seperate the shepherds of my 
 flock from the enemy which has deceived them, they shall all die 
 together in one day. 
 
 4. Nevertheless, I will save alive of my people as many of the 
 pure in heart as I can ; and I will save alive sufficient faithful 
 men to organize my Church according to. mine own pattern. 
 
 5. And inasmuch as thou hast, of late, been visited by mine 
 enemies, who have laid a trap for thee, I will move thee out of 
 their way before the time which they have appointed to ensnare 
 thee has come ; and I will take them in their own snare. 
 
 6. Therefore, get thee ready, and go to some secret place, "and 
 give the command ; and I will go forth from that very hour. 
 And as soon as thou hast given the command, hearken out, and 
 be ready to go forth to take thy place ; for thou shait walk the 
 streets without fear. And, for thy satisfaction, I say unto thee, 
 
RICHARD COOK AND JOHN PARSON. 37 
 
 that if I do not fulfill this promise, I will require no more at thy 
 hands ; but I will take thee out of the midst of this people that 
 very hour. Thou shalt soon prove me in these things. I shalL 
 give unto thee no more revelations upon this subject until I shall 
 have fulfilled this promise, and satisfied thy feelings. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING RICHARD COOK. 
 
 No. 26. UTAH, November 29th, 1860. 
 
 BEHOLD, verily I say unto you, my servant Joseph, hearken 
 unto the words of the Lord your God, for I am about to make 
 known unto you my will concerning my servant Richard Cook. 
 
 I have known him from the beginning, and I have been with 
 him in all his administrations among my people, and my eyes have 
 been upon him for good, for I have prepared him for a great 
 work ; therefore, let him prepare himself for that which has to 
 come, for I will satisfy him. Let him place confidence in me, 
 and he shall never be disappointed. He is a chosen vessel to 
 bear my name to the nations of the earth ; and, in a day to come, 
 he shall receive a place in the apostleship, and travel from place 
 to place all his days ; and he shall gain a name that will never 
 die, for I will be with him. Let him not be faithless in my 
 promises ; but let him set himself for the work. I am Jesus 
 Christ, the Son of God. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOHN PARSON. 
 
 No. 27. UTAH, December 6th, 1860. 
 
 BEHOLD I am Alpha and Omega, even Jesus Christ, the Son of 
 God, and I speak unto him according to his desire. I have 
 heard his prayers which he has offered up unto me, and I will 
 answer them to his satisfaction. I have seen him in all his move- 
 ments in my Church from his beginning; and although he has 
 thought that I have not heard him, yet. I have been present with 
 
38 JOHN COOK. 
 
 him by mine holy angels, and I have now called him to hold an 
 eminent position in my Church, for he is greatly beloved by me. 
 He need not fear that I will not fulfill my promises, for I will to 
 the very letter; and I will give unto him a testimony that I have 
 raised up a prophet to rule my Church upon the earth ; and inas- 
 much as he has desired of me to know his birthright, behold I 
 will make it known unto him. He is an heir to my holy priest- 
 hood, and he shall become one of my special witnesses to bear my 
 name to the nations of the earth ; and he shall bring many thou- 
 sands to the knowledge of the truth ; and he shall open his mouth 
 and prophesy in my name ; and he shall seal up the destiny of 
 nations, and live as long upon the earth as he desires, and pos- 
 sess all the blessings that belong to the high priesthood. I am he 
 that was, and is to come, even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOHN COOK. 
 
 No. 28. UTAH, December nth, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, verily thus saith the Lord unto you, my servant 
 Joseph : that inasmuch as you have inquired of me to know my 
 will concerning my servant John Cook, I will make it known un- 
 to you. 
 
 2. I have prepared a blessing for him ; for he is greatly be- 
 loved by me for his integrity of heart. I have prepared him for 
 a mighty work upon the earth ; and although he is of slow speech, 
 yet I will open his mouth and loose his tongue, and he shall 
 become fluent in speech. And he shall travel, and preach my 
 gospel from land to land, and from country to country, until he 
 is satisfied. He shall go at his pleasure, and return at the same, 
 and be subject to none but the prophet of the Lord ; for his heart 
 is upright before me, and his lineage is that of Ephriam. 
 
 3. He is an heir to my holy priesthood, and I have blessed 
 him with a great blessing, and none of his fellows shall excel him 
 in wisdom. And he shall be blessed with great stores of knowl- 
 edge; and he shall become a counselor to one of the greatest 
 men in my kingdom ; and he shall gain the favor of all who 
 
RICHARD COOK AND THE PROPHET JOSEPH MORRIS. 39 
 
 become acquainted with him. And, in a day to come, he shall 
 possess great riches, and his posterity shall be the chosen of the 
 Lord holding the holy priesthood and he shall live upon the 
 earth as long as he desires. I am he that was, and is, and is to 
 come; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION TO RICHARD COOK AND THE 
 PROPHET JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 No. 29. UTAH, December i5th, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Alpha and Omega, even Jesus Christ, 
 the Son of the Eternal Father. 
 
 2. And I say unto you that I have given my word to accom- 
 plish a mighty work upon the earth. And I have so laid my plans 
 that they cannot be frustrated by man's power ; and I shall work 
 to their accomplishment. Therefore, let all saints, who know any- 
 thing about my plans, rest assured that I will accomplish that 
 whereunto I have set my hands, and let them not be impatient ; 
 for the day of my power will come as soon as they will be ready 
 for it ; and many who will not be ready will be taken in a snare. 
 
 3. As concerning my servant Richard Cook, let him not be 
 impatient ; but let him trust in me, and I will satisfy him. I 
 require of him that he shall place all confidence in my words, and 
 not trifle with them. He need not to fear mine enemies, for they 
 are in my hands, and I will hold them with an almighty hand. 
 Let him prepare himself for the work that lies before him ; for I 
 am about to call him to hold an eminent position in my Church ; 
 and he shall travel, and preach my gospel all his days, for that is 
 his calling. 
 
 4. And, behold, I speak unto you, my servant Joseph, and I 
 say unto you, settle your mind, and place your confidence in me, 
 and do not trifle with my words. Have I ever neglected you? 
 Answer this for yourself. If I have not, why should you insult me 
 in such a manner as you do by throwing out insinuations to me? 
 As I have said unto you before, so say I unto you again, get your- 
 self ready to start the work, and then commence; and if I am 
 
40 A PROPHESY. 
 
 not ready, then I will bear the blame forever you will be clear, 
 and I will stand for myself. 
 
 5. Be it known unto you, O ye inhabitants of Utah Territory, 
 that I have spoken all these things through my servant Joseph, 
 and I am responsible for them. I am he that was, and is, and is 
 to come ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 A PROPHESY TO THE INHABITANTS OF UTAH. 
 
 No. 30. UTAH, December 2ist, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, verily, verily, thus saith the Lord: It shall come 
 to pass that I will commence a mighty work upon the earth in 
 the year eighteen hundred and sixty-one commencing in Utah 
 Territory. 
 
 2. I will begin with the men who now stand at the head of 
 my Church, and I will cut them off first ; and from them I will 
 go to those who are next to them in authority, and I will cut them 
 off also ; and so I will continue until I shall have cut off every 
 shepherd in my Church both large and small that will not 
 stand by my servant whom I have called. 
 
 3. And I will gather my people together to one place, even 
 to the Great Salt Lake City the central point in this Territory. 
 And I will be there myself, and stand side by side with my servant 
 Joseph, and speak to him mouth to mouth. And all the hosts of 
 heaven shall be there. I will lead them up to battle, and I will 
 separate the sheep from the goats. 
 
 4. As I cut off all the firstborn of Egypt, so I will go from 
 settlement to settlement, cutting off all those whom I do not 
 claim as mine own ; for I never shed my blood to save the 
 goats they belong to Satan. 
 
 5. And when I have purged my Church, I will go to that 
 nation called the United States, and I will purge her also ; for I 
 will not leave anything alive in that land but the pure in heart ; 
 for that nation is ripe for the harvest, and I will cut them down 
 now. * 
 
 6. And not many years shall pass away before my people 
 
THE DESTRUCTION OF IDOLATROUS PEOPLE. 41 
 
 shall return to the land of promise ; for I will go before them and 
 fight their battles. 
 
 7. And a temple shall be built in that land; and I will make 
 my appearance in that temple from time to time ; but I will not 
 give any endowments, under the fullness of the holy priesthood, in 
 this place ; for my saints shall not remain here long this is not 
 the place for them. 
 
 8 And when I shall have taken my people back to that land, 
 I will give unto my servant Joseph power to write a law which 
 shall govern the nations of the earth ; and they shall abide it, or 
 be cut off from the earth. And from that time, I will go forth 
 from nation to nation, cutting off everything that opposes my 
 plans, until I shall have utterly wasted away the heathen nations. 
 
 9. And it shall come to pass that, in her turn, I will visit the 
 nation of Great Britain ; and I will purge out of her everything 
 that offends ; for this is the day of my power. And I will be 
 present with my servant Joseph, and speak to him mouth to mouth, 
 whenever it is necessary, until his mission is ended. For I am 
 the Lord, and I have spoken these words. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 THE DESTRUCTION OF IDOLATROUS MEMBERS OF 
 
 THE OLD ORGANIZATION 'OF THE CHURCH 
 
 OF JESUS CHRIST. 
 
 No. 31. WEBER, UTAH, December 3ist, 1860. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, even the Eternal Father, 
 and I speak unto you, my servant Joseph, through mine Only 
 Begotten Son. 
 
 2. Oh, how my wrath is kindled against these idolatrous peo- 
 ple ! What can I do with them ? They are innocently led away 
 from me. W T hat can I do with them ! I will now make known unto 
 you what I will do with them. I will send my holy messengers 
 to them, and they shall hold them by a power that those people 
 do not understand, until my wrath shall be over, and I shall have 
 cut off all those who are worthy of death, and I will not be long 
 about it. 
 
42 THE DESTRUCTION OF IDOLATROUS PEOPLE. 
 
 3. Therefore, I say unto you, my son, finish up your writing as 
 soon as you can, and hold yourself in readiness ; for I will, shortly, 
 make a breach. I shall be ready as soon as you Avill be. I am 
 waiting even now for you ; and if you do not believe me now, 
 you soon will believe me. And when you are ready, try me ; and 
 if I do not satisfy your feelings, then I will bear the blame. 
 
 4. You need not to think that you can make anything of those 
 men to whom I have sent a warning voice ; for they will not come 
 to my terms in this life ; therefore, I have concluded to move 
 them out of the way; even as I have before spoken in former 
 revelations. 
 
 5. Can I submit to let the devil destroy my Church? No, I 
 cannot. I have power to accomplish my own purposes ; and that 
 you shall soon see to your heart's content. 
 
 6. And I say unto you, watch ; for you are surrounded by 
 enemies that thirst for your blood ; but they shall have no power 
 over you, for I will hold them in mine almighty hand. 
 
 7. You are guarded by the hosts of heaven. They are con- 
 tinually around you, guarding you from your enemies. Although 
 you do not see them always, yet you are surrounded by them con- 
 tinually, and you need not to fear ; for the man that shall ap- 
 proach you to lay violent hands upon you, shall die in your 
 presence. 
 
 8. And it is my will that all those who know anything about 
 me, should place the utmost confidence in me : for I will not 
 betray it. 
 
 9. And, again, I say unto you, that you shall not mourn over 
 those men whom I placed over my flock ; for you have done your 
 duty to them. I must either cut them off, or give up to them, 
 and let them do their own will ; and this I cannot allow. I must 
 save my Church ; for the pure in heart have a claim upon me I 
 cannot forsake them. 
 
 10. And inasmuch as you have desired to know of me as to 
 the course that you shall persue with my people, as touching their 
 deliverance, until I shall place the rod in your hands, you shall 
 raise your right arm and give the command, and that shall answer 
 as though the rod was in your hand ; but I will soon place it in 
 your hand ; even as soon as you will be ready to use it. Remem- 
 
TO THE PROPHET JOSEPH MORRIS. 43 
 
 ber that I am with you mine eye is upon you for good. And 
 it is my will that you should instruct those men with whom I have 
 made you acquainted ; for you will need their assistance when 
 you commence the work. 
 
 I will give unto you no mure at this time. I am the Eternal 
 Father ; even the Father of Jesus Christ, through whom I speak 
 unto you. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION TO THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 No. 32. WEBER, UTAH, January 6th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Alpha and Omega, the beginning and 
 the end. And I am come to make known unto you those things 
 which you desire to know of me. 
 
 2. Why are you so faithless in my word? I am really sur- 
 prised at you. Have I not blessed you above all other men that 
 dwell upon the face of the earth? I am sorry that I have to 
 reprove you for your unbelief and lack of confidence in me. If I 
 had ever given you cause for this, I would willingly bear the 
 blame ; but you know that I have never given you the least cause. 
 Why, then, should you insult me in such a manner as you do? I 
 have rights, as well as you have; and when my feelings are 
 wounded, I can feel as well as you can. I am ready to meet you 
 upon any just ground ; and I can prove to you that I have never 
 failed to fullfil my promises in any one thing. And now, I call 
 upon you to meet me and let us have a settling, and if you can 
 prove one case in which I have failed to fullnll my promises, then 
 I will bear the blame forever, and you will be clear ; but if you 
 cannot do this, you will be under condemnation. 
 
 3. And if you do not stop insulting me in such a manner as 
 you have done, I will greatly chasten you for your follies. You 
 know the promises which I have made unto you, and why do you 
 not exercise faith in them ? You know that I am working with 
 you continually ; and you also know the state of this, my people, 
 even as I do. Then why do you act so strangely ? 
 
 4. And, inasmuch as you know that you are not ready for me 
 
44 MANNER OF SEALING THE PROPHET AND PROPHETESS. 
 
 to commence the work, why cannot you rest satisfied until you are 
 ready? I have told you to get ready and start the work; and if I 
 am not ready at that time, then you can insult me as much as you 
 like, and I will never complain about it. I know my duty, and I 
 will do it without being driven to it. I have as much love and 
 affection for these afflicted people as you have. 
 
 5. You have felt grieved in your feelings at me for permitting 
 those men to continue sealing in opposition to my command ; you 
 have desired in your heart that I should cut them off when they 
 stand before the altar; but I have concluded to cut them off in 
 another way ; for I will cut them off all at once. When I begin I 
 will finish ; for I do despise them in my heart. 
 
 6. And again, I say unto you, wind up your affairs as soon as 
 you can, and when you are ready I will be ready also. It may 
 seem, to you, almost impossible for me to clear your way ; but I 
 will do it in one day. Oh ! the woe and lamentation that will be 
 witnessed at that time ! for there is not a heart that will not be 
 penetrated. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he whose words are quick and 
 powerful sharper than a two-edged sword even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 MANNER OF SEALING THE PROPHET AND 
 PROPHETESS FOR TIME AND ETERNITY. 
 
 No. 33. WEBER, UTAH, January yth, 1861. 
 
 1. THE prophet shall express these words: My dearly beloved 
 bride, I, the prophet of the Lord, having chosen you, according 
 to your birthright, to be my wife for time and all eternity, give 
 unto you my hand and heart in a marriage covenant, according 
 to the holy order of heaven ; and swear, in the presence of the 
 Father, and of the Son, that I will be a true and faithful husband 
 unto you. 
 
 2. The prophetess shall then express these words : My dearly 
 beloved bridegroom, I, having chosen you to be my husband for 
 time and for all eternity, give unto you my hand and heart in a 
 
WILLIAM KENDELL. 45 
 
 marriage covenant, according to the holy order of heaven ; and 
 swear, in the presence of the Father, and of the Son, that I will 
 be a kind and faithful wife unto you. 
 
 3. The prophet and prophetess will then kiss the written word 
 of the Lord, and each other ; and their names shall be recorded 
 in a book set apart for that purpose. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING WILLIAM KENDELL. 
 
 No. 34. WEBER, UTAH, January i4th, 1861. 
 
 BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I speak unto you, my 
 servant Joseph, concerning my servant William Kendell. 
 
 2. I have looked down upon him, and I have noticed him in 
 all his movements in my Church from the beginning. I have 
 beheld the integrity of his heart, and when he has been surrounded 
 by darkness I have held him by my power. And now I have a 
 place prepared for him in my Church; and, inasmuch as he has 
 seen great darkness, he shall witness great light ; for his heart is 
 honest before me. He need not to fear nor to be faint-hearted ; 
 but let him place his confidence in me, and I will not betray it. 
 I know the intentions of his heart, and while he trusts in me, he 
 shall never be confounded ; for I will be with him. 
 
 3. Let him settle his mind and prepare himself for a great 
 work ; for he is an heir to the holy priesthood, and his lineage is 
 that of Joseph who was sold into Egypt. And if he is faithful 
 before me, no privilege shall be denied him. I will open his 
 mouth and he shall have a fluency of speech, and bring many 
 thousands to a knowledge of the truth. He shall go from nation 
 to nation, preaching my gospel, and he shall seal up the destinies 
 of nations. He shall live upon the earth as long as he desires, 
 and he shall be satisfied. 
 
 4. And, inasmuch as his partner in life has been attacked by 
 an evil spirit, which has greatly afflicted her, let both him and her 
 rest assured that I will soon release her from it ; and I will grant 
 unto her eternal life. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
46 THE FIRST TEST. 
 
 THE FIRST TEST. 
 
 No. 35. WEBER, UTAH, January i6th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Alpha and Omega, even Jesus Christ, 
 the Son of the Eternal Father ; the same whose blood was shed 
 for the sins of the world, that he might save as many as his Father 
 hath placed within his power. 
 
 2. I am come to make known unto you, my servant Joseph, 
 my will concerning this, my people, and the course which you 
 shall take with them ; for the test is near at hand. And let all 
 those who understand my plans, trust in me, and they shall soon 
 be satisfied. They may be surrounded by enemies ; but not a 
 hair of their heads shall be hurt ; for I will surround them as by 
 a wall of fire. 
 
 3. And it is my will that you should gather together all those 
 \o whom you have made known my purposes concerning this 
 my people. And when they are gathered together, I will speak 
 to them, and make my will known unto them, as touching the 
 course which they shall persue in connection with you ; for I 
 have chosen them. I am the Lord. 
 
 4. And, again, I say unto you, that it is my will that you 
 should remain where you are until I shall have cleared your way ; 
 for I have concluded to do it speedily. And when your enemies 
 appear to crowd upon you, be calm in your mind, and do not let 
 your feelings be ruffled ; for your enemies shall be as straws in 
 your way. 
 
 5. And, again, it is my will that you should hold yourself in 
 readiness, and do not be faithless. I shall be ready when you 
 are never fear. It is my business to lead my Church triumph- 
 antly over all its enemies. Do you think that I shall forsake my 
 Church, and let the destroyer take all, after having given my life 
 for it? What think you of this? Do not act so strangely, as though 
 you knew nothing about me. You know that I cannot fail to 
 fulfill my promises. 
 
 6. And, inasmuch as you have desired to see me face to face, 
 and to converse with me, you shall soon have that privilege. I 
 would have met with you before this time, if I had had a place where 
 
TO THE PROPHET. 47 
 
 I could have met with you. But I will soon place you in a 
 position where I can speak mouth to mouth with you ; for I know 
 that you wish to see me. 
 
 7. And as concerning my servant Richard Cook, it is my will 
 that he should hold his office as the bishop in this place. He 
 shall not give up to those, mine enemies, who are seeking to move 
 him out of his place ; and I will sustain him. And as for those 
 men who have come to this place to fight against me, I will visit 
 them with sudden death ; for I will send an angel to them, and 
 he shall cut tnem off. They shall know that they cannot stand 
 against me. And I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that you 
 shall open your mouth and curse them, and I will fulfill it when 
 they have left this place. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 36. WEBER, UTAH, January lyth, 1861 
 
 BEHOLD, verily saith the Lord unto you, my son, set yourself 
 strong against mine enemies ; for the work has now commenced, 
 and it will continue until I have put all enemies under my 
 feet ; and you shall go about your work without any fear. You 
 have complained to me for not giving unto you a manifestation of 
 my power. How could I do this before I had placed you in a 
 position for it ? As soon as I can give unto you a manifestation of 
 power, I will do so. You will soon need it ; therefore, stand to 
 your post like a man, and be not faint-hearted, and I will 
 strengthen you for the work ; and I will make your enemies flee 
 before you as chaff before the wind. And when the day has come 
 for you to give the command, I will make it known unto you ; and 
 at that time all doubt will leave you, and you will be satisfied at 
 once. And I will influence you continually, and I will stand by 
 your side, and put words in your mouth, and your oppression shall 
 soon leave you, and you shall never have to complain against me 
 after I have once started. I have pitied thee when I have seen 
 thee weighed down with oppression; but I will release thee at 
 
48 SELECTION OF MEN TO THE APOSTLESHIP. 
 
 once. I will now take thy burden ; therefore, rest thyself, and be 
 satisfied. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he that holds the keys of death and 
 hell; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 CURSINGS, AND THE SELECTION OF MEN TO THE 
 APOSTLESHIP. 
 
 No. 37. WEBER, UTAH, January 2oth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, verily I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that, 
 when you curse those men whom I commanded you to curse, you 
 shall raise your right arm towards heaven, and express these words : 
 Oh God, the eternal Father, I, thy servant, raise my right arm 
 towards heaven, and, having been called by thee to hold the 
 sealing and binding power upon the earth, by virtue of my 
 authority, and in the name of thy Son, Jesus Christ, I seal a curse 
 
 upon and , which shall be sudden 
 
 death. And I command the destroying angel to follow them up, 
 and lay them low. And I pronounce this curse upon them in the 
 name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 2. And after you have cursed those men, you shall then curse 
 the chief shepherds of my flock, beginning at the first of them; 
 and when you have done this, you shall then curse all the false 
 shepherds of my flock. 
 
 3. And, again, I say unto you, that you shall curse all your 
 enemies in this place ; for you have enemies here who thirst for 
 your blood ; but whom I will speedily destroy. Before I do this, 
 however, I will break them up, and confuse them and I will so 
 set them one against another, that they shall have no power to 
 unite themselves against you ; and you shall pass on without any 
 difficulty, until I clear your way so that you can go and take your 
 place. And I will do this at once. And when I have done with 
 your enemies here, I will cut them off forthwith. 
 
 4. And, inasmuch as I have committed unto you the keys of 
 my kingdom on the earth, it is necessary that there should be an 
 
SELECTION OF MEN TO THE APQSTLESHIP. 49 
 
 understanding between us, as touching matters of importance. I 
 do not claim the authority to do anything upon the earth, only 
 through you; for I shall work according the law, as I am com- 
 manded by my Father, and without law I shall do nothing. And 
 I will make known unto you my law at all times when it shall 
 become necessary to do so; therefore, in all that you do, regulate 
 yourself according to my word; and, if you will do this, I am 
 bound to fulfill your words to the very letter. If I do not, I shall 
 have broken the law of the holy priesthood, which I cannot do. 
 
 5. You need not, any more, to fear; for I will now take your 
 burden upon myself, and I will see if I cannot bear it. My heart 
 has been pained when I have looked down upon thee, and heard 
 thy groans ; but thy oppression is nearly at an end. Thou art 
 beloved above all men for thy patience, thy virtue, and thine 
 integrity ; for there is none like unto thee upon the earth ; and the 
 nations thereof shall feel thy rod. 
 
 6. And although the shepherds of my flock have proven 
 treacherous to me, yet I have selected out a number of faithful 
 men, whom I will give unto thee; and they will be faithful unto 
 thee, and thou shalt ordain them to the apostleship; and thou 
 shalt have twenty-four apostles. 
 
 7. And I will make the nations bend to thee, and, at thy 
 command, the earth shall reel to and fro like a drunken man. 
 And the nations of the earth shall abide the law that shall come 
 forth from thy mouth, or be cut off; for I, the Lord, have spoken 
 it. And whomsoever thou shalt bless, I will bless ; and whomso- 
 ever thou shalt curse, I will curse ; for I am one with thee. 
 
 8. And it is my will that all those who know me shall uphold 
 thee with all their power. And I will send unto them the com- 
 forter, and he shall lead them into all truth. And I will give unto 
 them a powerful testimony, for I have called them ; therefore, let 
 them stand firm to the truth which shall make them free. And I 
 will influence those men who are now absent from you, and they 
 shall come forth to you when they are needed. And let my 
 servant Richard Cook be strong, and I will be with him, and put 
 words into his mouth at all times, when it becomes necessary for 
 me to do so. 
 
 I jnow add no more at this time. I am he who holds the keys 
 of death and hell even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
50 JUDGMENTS OF GOD UPON THE WICKED. 
 
 THE JUDGMENTS OF GOD UPON THE WICKED, 
 AND THE DESTRUCTION OF THE INNOCENT 
 WHO ARE DECEIVED. 
 
 No. 38. WEBER, UTAH, January 25th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he whose words are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; the same whose blood was shed 
 upon the cross for the sins of the world ; who groaned upon the 
 cross and bore the shame of the wicked, that he might save those 
 who were heirs to salvation; and having conquered death, hell, 
 and the grave, is now interceding with his Father in behalf of 
 those whom he shed his blood to save. 
 
 2. And I am come to make known unto you, my servant 
 Joseph, those things which you have desired to know of me. 
 Why do you not place confidence in me? You know that I am 
 with you. You have nothing to fear. I am all sufficient for your 
 enemies. And I am continually watching over ycu, and holding 
 your enemies off you, and they cannot come upon you until I 
 permit them to do so, and I will hold them until I am ready to 
 make a breach ; and when I am ready, I will cut them off sud- 
 denly. You need not to fear that you will be injured by them ; 
 for I will take care of you. Your work is not yet done. You 
 shall never be slain by an enemy. Therefore, let your mind be 
 at rest, and make your calculations for speedily commencing the 
 work. 
 
 3. I will stop the wicked course of this people. They shall 
 not go on as they are going. Oh how my heart is pained when I 
 look down upon them, and see their situation. They know not 
 what they are doing. They take the wrong for right, and right 
 for wrong. What can I justly do with them? I do not want to 
 destroy the innocent with the guilty ; but what can I do ? I shall 
 be compelled to cut off many innocent people who, being de- 
 ceived, I cannot undeceive this I cannot avoid ; but I will save 
 as many of them as will hearken to and obey my word. And I 
 will take this matter into my own hands, and I will speedily bear 
 it off. And I will be present at the time wnen I shall have 
 brought these things to a head, and then I will manifest my power. 
 
JOHN FIRTH. 51 
 
 4. And as soon as those chief shepherds of my flock have 
 made the first move against you, I make the second move against 
 them ; and I will cut them off instantly. And from them I will" 
 go to others, and cut them off also even all who stand in your 
 way, and mine enemies shall see that I am more powerful than 
 they are. And until this matter shall be brought to a head, I will 
 hold off from you all other surrounding influences. And no person 
 shall have any power to approach you, or to injure you. You 
 shall pass on without any fear. And as concerning the curses 
 which you have uttered, I have heard them, and I will fulfill them 
 at the time appointed. 
 
 5. And as concerning my servant Richard Cook, let him not 
 be cast down. He suffers fear and unbelief to creep upon him, 
 which is grievous for me to see. There is no cause for this. He 
 has never yet suffered any loss by trusting in me ; let him, there- 
 fore, repent of his follies, and lay hold of my promises, and let 
 him act the part of a man. I have poured out great blessings 
 upon him, and let him prove himseif worthy of them. I am dis- 
 pleased with him. If he will do my will, let him place the utmost 
 confidence in me, and I will not betray it ; for my wrath is kindled 
 against none so much as it is against those who confess not my 
 hand in all things ; for without faith it is impossible to please me. 
 
 I now add no more. Let this suffice for the present, and I will 
 make known more unto you hereafter. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOHN FIRTH. 
 
 No. 39. WEBER, UTAH, January 2yth, 1861. 
 
 1. VERILY, I say unto you, my Son, that inasmuch as you have 
 inquired of me to know my will concerning my servant John 
 Firth, I will make it known unto you. I have looked down upon 
 him, and I have seen the darkness which has surrounded him, and 
 when I have seen him labor under it, I have pitied him ; but with 
 him it is now at an end. 
 
 2. He is greatly beloved by me for his humility, his faith, and 
 
52 LANGUAGE DESTRUCTION OF WICKED SHEPHERDS. 
 
 his honesty of purpose and he shall be made strong, and do a 
 mighty work upon the earth ; for he is an heir to the high and holy 
 priesthood which priesthood holds the sealing and binding power. 
 His lineage is that of Ephraim ; and I have prepared a place for 
 him in my kingdom ; for his calling shall be to go from nation to 
 nation and preach my gospel. 
 
 3. And, in a day to come, he shall become a counselor to 
 those who shall be ordained to the office of apostles, and I will 
 open his mouth and loose his tongue, and he shall become fluent 
 in speech. Let him prepare himself for the work which lies before 
 him ; for I shall soon need his assistance in connection with others; 
 therefore, if he will be my friend, let him hold himself in readiness 
 for that which is coming, and, in the time of trouble, I will be his 
 friend also. 
 
 4. The great last test is near at hand, and I now need friends, 
 and to those who will be my friends now, I will be a friend in a 
 day to come none need to be afraid to put their trust in me, for 
 I will not betray their confidence. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he that was, and is, and 
 is to come even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 LANGUAGE, AND THE DESTRUCTION OF THE 
 WICKED SHEPHERDS. 
 
 No. 40. WEBER, UTAH, January 3oth, 
 
 1. VERILY, I say unto you, my son, that inasmuch as there 
 has been some dissatisfaction manifested by some, concerning the 
 language which I, the Lord, have made use of in the revelations 
 and addresses which I have given, I will satisfy the minds of all 
 upon this subject. 
 
 2. I have taken the liberty of expressing myself in the plainest 
 of language, that all might understand. I do not imitate the great 
 men of the earth (so called); for their wisdom is an abomination 
 in my sight they take wrong for right, and right for wrong they 
 are filled with vainness they know not what they are doing. And 
 as for the language which they speak, it is not correct. There is 
 
LANGUAGE DESTRUCTION OF WICKED SHEPHERDS. 53 
 
 not a correct language now spoken upon the earth; but, in a day 
 to come, I will give unto my people a correct language. 
 
 3. And, inasmuch as there have been some disputations about 
 the word "isolate," I will explain the meaning of that word, as it is 
 understood in heaven : It is to elevate, or place on high. The 
 world does not know the correct meaning of that word ; therefore, 
 let all be satisfied. 
 
 4. And I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that you shall not 
 alter the sense of any revelation that I have given, or that I shall 
 hereafter give. 
 
 5. I am, indeed, surprised at you, my son, for yo\ir lack of 
 confidence in me. I am holding your enemies off you; this you 
 know. You are afraid that I shall forsake, you ; but you may rest 
 yourself satisfied that I will never leave you; neither can your 
 enemies injure you. 
 
 6. And you shall soon be called to give the word of command, 
 and then you will be satisfied at once ; and you shall have things 
 your own way. 
 
 7. You have greatly desired to see me, I know, and you shall 
 soon have the privilege. 
 
 8. I will speedily stop the course of those wicked shepherds 
 of my flock their names shall not grate on your ears but a few 
 days longer. These afflicted people shall not long have those 
 wicked men to look to, for I will speedily destroy those shepherds, 
 and leave my people without a shepherd to look to, until I shall 
 place others over them. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he that was, and is, and is to come 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amem. 
 
 THE CLOUD NOW GATHERING. 
 
 No. 41. WEBER, UTAH, February 2nd, 1861. 
 
 1. VERILY I say unto you, my servant, that inasmuch as the 
 cloud is now gathering, and must shortly burst, it is necessary that 
 you should understand my will upon this matter. 
 
 2. You know that I have been with you from the time that I 
 
54 THE CLOUD NOW GATHERING. 
 
 first called you until now, and no person, as yet, has ever had the 
 power to hurt you. You know that if I had not preserved you 
 from your enemies, they would have slain you before this time ; 
 and knowing, as you do, that I have always been with you, why 
 cannot you place confidence in me now? I have always worked 
 according to the law, and I cannot deviate from it. 
 
 3. What would you have me to do? I am willing to do any- 
 thing that lies in my power to minister comfort unto you. I know 
 that you are burdened with this idolatrous people, and you wish 
 me to clear both them and their shepherds out of your way with- 
 out troubling you with them. And inasmuch as you desire it, I 
 will make unto you a promise, that your enemies shall have no 
 power over you ; but I, will deliver this people into your hands, 
 and what you do, I will acknowledge. 
 
 4. And as for those shepherds, they have forgotten all that 
 which they once knew, and they now know nothing about me. They 
 are wholly led by the devil. And inasmuch as I could not make 
 them hear me, I will make them fear me. As I have said unto 
 you before, so I say unto you again, I will not leave one of their 
 seed alive. I will clear your way to your satisfaction. I will cut 
 off everything that dwells in those accursed houses which have 
 been built by the poor of my people. I will also scatter their 
 flocks, and the poor of my people shall gather them, and possess 
 them ; for my wrath is kindled against those who now possess 
 them. And I say unto you that you should not fear your enemies ; 
 but remember that I will control all things according to my own 
 will : for I have taken the matter into my own hands, and I will 
 carry it on myself, and nothing shall go wrong, for I am round 
 about my people. The command shall soon be given after which 
 I will commence the destruction of your enemies ; and then I 
 will go on from conquering to conquer ; and I will lay the way 
 open for you. But if I do not clear your way, I will require no 
 more at your hands. 
 
 5. Those who have been made acquainted with my plans, 
 have longed to see a manifestation of my power, and they shall 
 soon see it to their satisfaction. Let them be steadfast in me, and 
 know that I am with them ; and if they will be true to me, I will 
 be true to them ; but if they prove false to me, I will cut them 
 
WARNING THE INHABITANTS OF SOUTH WEBER. 55 
 
 off instantly. Those who seek to save their lives, shall lose them ; 
 for I, the Lord, despise the false hearted. 
 
 6. And as for my servant Richard Cook, let him be strong, 
 and not fear. And let him not be afraid to speak boldly those 
 things that I will place in his mouth, for I will be present with 
 him. And let him hold his place, and I will uphold him : and 
 who can stay my hand? Let him prove me in this thing; for I 
 have an object in view for counselling him in this wise, and he 
 will know the secret hereafter. I have laid my plans, and I am 
 working to their accomplishment ; and, when the test is over, all 
 will be satisfied. 
 
 7. I now close. I will give unto you more hereafter. I am 
 he who holds in his hands the keys of death and hell ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE LORD ADVISES THE PROPHET TO PLACE 
 MORE CONFIDENCE IN HIM. 
 
 No. 42. WEBER, UTAH, February 6th, 1861. 
 
 BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, even Jesus Christ, and I am 
 come to make known unto you those things which you have 
 desired to know of me. I am astonished at you for your lack of 
 confidence in me. What is the cause of it? Have you ever 
 proved me false in one thing? You know that you have not; then 
 it is your duty to place the utmost confidence in me. You know 
 that I cannot fail to fulfill ^the promises which I have made. The 
 influence which is before you seems too great for you to strive 
 against, and on this account you manifest great dissatisfaction 
 with me. This oppression which you are now called to bear I 
 cannot help. I have done everything for you that I could do. 
 You know that you are placed in a position where you have to 
 bear oppression. This cannot be avoided. I know what oppres- 
 sion is as well as you do. I have endured everything that could 
 have been placed upon man, and I was compelled to bear it or all 
 must be lost; -and you are placed in a similar position. Then 
 why do you murmur at your fate? Rise up and stand it like a 
 
56 THE PROPHET ADVISED. 
 
 man, and I will be with you continually, and stand by you. I 
 will do my duty, you need not fear. You have felt dissatisfied 
 with me for suffering this matter to run so long, but it is all right. 
 I am working to the point. You have not long to wait, and when 
 my presence is needed I will be there. You have longed to see 
 me, and you have not long to wait. You have also felt dissatisfied 
 with me because I have not given unto you the power of your 
 office. I have given it unto you, but you have never yet been 
 placed in a position to use it. You will find that you have the 
 power when it is needed. Oh, then, place your confidence in me, 
 and I will lead you safely through all the snares of your enemies. 
 It will be woe unto them that set themselves against you. 
 
 And as concerning those men who now stand at the head of 
 my Church : They have now turned against me, and they have 
 laid their plans to fight against me, and they will strive to break 
 up my plans which I have laid for the accomplishment of my 
 purposes. They will strive to divide the people in this place and 
 to remove the bishop out of his place : and I will meet them here, 
 and they will find that I am here. I will reveal a secret to them 
 that will satisfy all. I have tried to satisfy them by word of 
 mouth, but it is no use. I will now see if I cannot penetrate them; 
 therefore, I say unto you, my son, get yourself ready to give the 
 command, and I will be present with you. At that time I will 
 show you that which you have longed to see. I will control all 
 things to your satisfaction. If you would only place confidence 
 in me you would set my feelings at rest at once. You must place 
 confidence in me. I require it at your hands. Then why will you 
 not do the thing that I wish you to do? I have never betrayed 
 your confidence, and why cannot you try me ? 
 
 And as concerning my servant Rickard Cook, let him stand 
 fast to his place, and I am with him, and he shall see where the 
 power lies. And as concerning the rest of those that know my 
 plans, let them be strong, and I will fight their battles. They may 
 place their confidence in me without any fear, and their minds 
 will soon be at rest. 
 
 I give unto you no more at present. I am he whose word is 
 quick and powerful sharper than a two-edged sword even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
INHABITANTS OF WEBER WARNED. 57 
 
 WARNING TO THE INHABITANTS OF SOUTH WEBER 
 AGAINST FIGHTING THE PEOPLE OF GOD. 
 
 No. 43. SOUTH WEBER, UTAH, February yth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, verily, verily, thus saith the Lord: That, inas- 
 much as the first test is now near at hand, and must commence 
 in this place, it is necessary that those who love and fear me, and 
 who are trusting in me for salvation, should know my will concern- 
 ing them, that they may escape my wrath and save their lives. 
 
 2. I, the Lord, have sent a warning voice unto the chief 
 shepherds of my flock, and they have rejected it, and are now 
 fighting against me ; and it is necessary that all those who expect 
 to receive eternal life should know this fact. Therefore, let them 
 make up their minds as to which side they are going to take. I 
 feel in duty bound to lay this matter before them, and then they 
 can please themselves as to what they will do ; but, if they take 
 sides against you, I will cut them off suddenly, for those who fight 
 against you, fight against me, and of such I will not leave alive 
 one person in this place. 
 
 3. But I will stand side by side with you in this place, and I 
 will give unto you that courage which it will be necessary for you 
 to have at the time when it will be needed. You need not to fear, 
 for I am not far from you, and the hosts of heaven, also, are with 
 me, and you shall see them to your satisfaction you shall see 
 them go out to battle, and they shall both go and stop at your 
 bidding. I will make the nations of the earth tremble. I cannot 
 penetrate all men by my word, but I will do it by my power. 
 You shall not have cause to murmur against me but a short time 
 longer ; therefore, treasure up in your heart these things which I 
 have made known unto you, and I will be with you unto the end. 
 
 I am the Lord, and I have spoken these things. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
58 COMMANDED TO PREPARE FOR THE FIRST TEST. 
 
 THE PROPHET AND THE SAINTS COMMANDED TO 
 PREPARE FOR THE FIRST TEST. 
 
 No. 44. WEBER, UTAH, February ioth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I am come to make my 
 will known unto you concerning this first test, which is now at 
 hand. It is necessary that you should know my will concerning 
 this matter. What is the reason that you cannot place your con- 
 fidence in me.'' You keep my feelings continually ruffled, and 
 unless you place confidence in me I cannot work with you. 
 
 2. I am all sufficient for your enemies. I have marked out 
 their course, and I will make them walk in it. They can do 
 nothing, save that which I permit them to do. I shall be present 
 with you to influence you in this affair, and all things shall be con- 
 trolled to your satisfaction. You are greatly afraid that I shall 
 neglect you at that time. Do you not know that I have been with 
 you always, even from the beginning? I have told you to cite one 
 case in which I have failed to fulfill my promise, and if you can 
 do this, then I will bear the blame ; but if you cannot do this, you 
 are under condemnation for having insulted me in the manner in 
 which you have done. You keep my feelings continually wounded 
 by your insults. I will do everything that I can do to ease your 
 burden ; and, as I have said unto you before, so I say unto you 
 again, when you need my presence, you shall see me. You com- 
 plain of me because I have not of late shown unto you the hosts 
 of heaven ; but when it becomes necessary you shall see them. 
 Tell me, therefore, what you require of me, and, if I can do so, I 
 will grant it unto you. The influence of that which lies before you 
 greatly oppresses you ; but I can move that out of your way in one 
 day. I have striven to bring this matter to a head, and as soon as 
 possible I will do so. 
 
 3. And as concerning those men whom you have made ac- 
 quainted with my plans, who profess to be my friends, it is necessary 
 that they should now set themselves for a test. They have longed 
 to see it come, and it is now close upon them, and their hearts 
 will pain them before it is through. They have longed to see a 
 manifestation of my power, and they shall shortly see one. Let 
 
THE FIRST TEST. 59 
 
 them stand firm by me ; let them stand up and testify to the truth 
 of those things which I have made known unto them through you; 
 for this thing I require of them, and they shall be endued with the 
 power my of spirit ; and if they will do those things which I have 
 commanded them to do, I will be with them. The hosts of heaven 
 shall be round about them, and not a hair of their heads shall be 
 hurt. They have never yet seen my wonder-working hand made 
 bare ; but they shortly shall see it. 
 
 4. And, behold, I say unto you, my son, that inasmuch as you 
 have desired to know of me what course you shall take in this 
 matter, I will make my will known unto at this time. I will 
 influence you, and lead you in the way that I wish you to go. I 
 will take the responsibiltty of the work upon myself, and no person 
 shall do anything save that which I shall permit them to do. 
 Therefore, let all be diligent, and do the things which I have 
 commanded them, and all shall be well. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ, the Son of 
 the eternal Father, and I have given this revelation unto my 
 servant Joseph, according to the , commandment of my Father. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE FIRST TEST. 
 
 No. 45. WEBER, UTAH, February nth, 1861. 
 
 1. VERILY, thus saith the Lord, that, inasmuch as you have 
 desired to know of me as to the manner in which you shall act 
 in this affair, I will make my will known unto you upon this 
 matter. 
 
 2. I am with you all the day long; and you have no cause to 
 fear. And I will prepare you for the work that lies before you; 
 and, when you are called to go into the assembly of the people, I 
 will go in with you, and stand side by side with you, and you shall 
 speak those things which I place in your mouth. I will also sus- 
 tain your words, and I will make them take every word that flows 
 from your mouth. They shall find out that they cannot have 
 things their own way ; but when you are in that assembly all shall 
 
60 INABILITY OF MAN TO UNDERSTAND THE WAYS OF GOD. 
 
 be subject unto you. Your command shall be obeyed without 
 fail. You shall declare yourself the prophet of this people, and I 
 will sustain your words in all things. 
 
 3. And it is my will that all those whom you have made 
 acquainted with my plans should sustain your words also, and 
 leave the result in my hands, and they will be satisfied. And as 
 to those men who are coming to this place, I will reveal a few 
 things to them here. And when this first test is over, all my 
 friends will be satisfied. Therefore, let all be strong ; for I am 
 with them. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE INABILITY OF MAN TO UNDERSTAND THE 
 
 WAYS OF THE LORD JOHN PARSON AND 
 
 ROBERT FARLEY COMMANDED TO 
 
 MOVE TO SOUTH WEBER. 
 
 No. 46. WEBER, UTAH, February i2th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he whose words are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; the same who groaned upon the 
 cross ; who bore the shame of the wicked that he might break the 
 barrier of the tomb, and set the captive free. 
 
 2. Be it known unto all that I am at work, and that I will 
 never stay my hand until I have laid all mine enemies under my 
 feet. Let not those men who have trusted in me be discouraged 
 at the prospect that is before them ; for I will satisfy them. They 
 need not to think that I have forgotten them, for I have not. I 
 am well pleased with them for having taken the course which they 
 have taken in this the first test. They have done all that I 
 required at their hands. I will work the next test to their satis- 
 faction. Let them stand still and watch my wonder-working 
 hand, and they will not need to watch it long, before they will 
 have received that which they have longed to see, which will be a 
 manifestation of my power unto salvation. 
 
 3. I am not trifling either with them or with this people. I 
 am placed in a position where I have to work in a manner that all 
 do not understand; and, not understanding, they have thought that 
 
INABILITY OF MAN TO UNDERSTAND THE WAYS OF GOD. 6 1 
 
 I have not fulfilled my promises ; but I have. When I speak I do 
 it in mine own way, and all cannot understand me ; but to you it 
 is given to understand my ways, to others it is not. I expect, 
 therefore, that you will stand for me, and explain my meaning to 
 the satisfaction of all with whom you have or may become 
 acquainted. 
 
 4. You feel hard towards me because I do not cut off those 
 shepherds who are now leading my flock ; but you know that I 
 have before told you that I am bound by law ; nevertheless, when 
 I begin I will finish ; and when the test is over, all will be satisfied. 
 
 5. I am obliged to take a course to warn this people. I first 
 sent a warning voice unto the chief shepherds of my flock, and 
 they refused to warn the people. But they must be warned, and 
 I will warn them; but I must take mine own course to do it; there- 
 fore, let all be satisfied with what I do, for I work so as to save 
 the innocent, of whom I do not want to cut off any more than the 
 law compels me to cut off. And it is my will that these men 
 should rest themselves satisfied, and not murmur against you. I 
 am at the head of things, and I will work them to the point. 
 
 6. And inasmuch as my servant John Parson has desired of 
 me to know my will concerning him, I will make it known unto 
 you. If he cannot remain where he is in peace, let him remove 
 to this place, and all shall be well with him not a hair of his 
 head shall, be hurt; for I will be present with him by my holy 
 angels. 
 
 7. And as concerning my servant Robert Farley, let him settle 
 his affairs where he is now living, and come down to this place with 
 my servant John Parson. I have prepared a blessing for him. 
 Let him trust in me, and I will abundantly bless him ; he needs 
 not to fear his enemies I am all sufficient for them. 
 
 8. As concerning my servant Richard Cook, let him rest him- 
 self satisfied, and not murmur at his fate. He must not be 
 impatient, but he must exercise patience, and not be restless, and 
 I will be with him. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
62 A WARNING TO THE PEOPLE. 
 
 WARNING TO THE PEOPLE OF GOD. 
 
 No. 47. WEBER, UTAH, February i6th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, the Son of the Eternal Father, 
 by whose command I have come to speak unto you. 
 
 2. Oh, my servant Joseph, why do you insult me in such a 
 manner? I have done all that I could do for you. I cannot, at 
 the present time, remove the oppression which you are called to 
 bear. You are too restless. You do not place your confidence 
 in me. I have told you that I wish to warn this people, and I 
 am doing so. You need not to question my work ; for I shall 
 take mine own course to warn this people ; but, when the test is 
 over, all will be satisfied. I know what I am doing, whether you 
 think that I do, or not. I have to work according to law I can- 
 not deviate from it. I take no pleasure at all in working with 
 you ; for you are continually wounding my feelings. I know 
 what the oppression is that you are called to bear, and I feel for 
 you; but what can I do? I am compelled to take such a course 
 as that which will warn this people, among whom are many that 
 are innocent, whom I desire to save. If you would only place 
 your confidence in me, all would be right. I arn round about 
 you continually by my holy angels, and they will guard you from 
 the attacks of all your enemies. 
 
 3. You wish to know what course I am about to take to warn 
 this people, and I will reveal it unto you. You know that I 
 called upon you to declare yourself the prophet of this people, and 
 you did so that was the means which I first put into operation to 
 warn this people. All those who have heard of that declaration are 
 now looking towards you ; and all those who have not as yet heard 
 of it, soon will do so ; and they, also, will then look towards you. 
 The chief shepherds of my flock will rise up against you, and seek 
 to stop your course; but when they do so, and crowd upon you, 
 I will come out of my hiding place, and in one day I will cut 
 them off the earth. I am holding the surrounding influences off 
 you on every hand ; and, until the appointed time shall have 
 arrived, your enemies cannot come upon you ; and when they 
 come, I will preserve you from their grasp. Before I shall have 
 
THE PEOPLE MUST BE WARNED. 63 
 
 cut off those wicked shepherds, you will not have long to wait ; 
 for, in my heart, I do despise them, and I will shortly move 
 them out of the way. 
 
 4. You are afraid lest you should be taken by your enemies 
 unawares ; but you need not to be ; for I will so reveal unto you, 
 at all times, when it becomes necessary to do so, that you shall 
 not be caught by them unawares. And when they visit you, I 
 will give you the power to look them through ; and you shall 
 answer them according to their folly, and they shall not have 
 power to resist your words. And if an enemy crowds too hard 
 upon you, I will smite him dead in your presence in one minute. 
 I will not be trifled with by your enemies. You shall have no 
 cause to complain against me on that account. 
 
 5. And as concerning these people who believe in your words, 
 let them be comforted ; for I am round about them by my holy 
 angels, and I am well pleased with them for having taken the 
 course which they have ; and, if they will abide your counsel, not 
 a hair of their heads shall be hurt. I am abundantly able to do 
 mine own work; therefore, let all stand still, and watch my won- 
 der-working hand, and all shall be well. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he who holds the keys of 
 death and hell ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PEOPLE MUST BE WARNED. 
 
 No. 48. WEBER, UTAH, February 24th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, the Son of the Eternal Father; 
 even he who is from everlasting to everlasting ; the same who bore 
 the shame of the wicked that he might save the world, and cast 
 the destroyer out. 
 
 2. And I am come to speak unto you, my son, according to 
 the commandment of my Father. I have heard your prayers, and 
 I know the anxiety of your mind. You are greatly troubled about 
 this people. You long to see me come out of my hiding-place to 
 deliver them out of the hands of ail their enemies. I am as anxious 
 to see this take place as you are ; but I am bound by law I can- 
 
64 THE PEOPLE MUST BE WARNED. 
 
 not do my own will. You have greatly afflicted my feelings by 
 talking to me in the manner that you have done. You are very 
 restless. If I could help you I would ; but you have not long to 
 wait. I am working this matter up to a head as fast as I can. 
 
 3. The warning is going forth at a rapid speed, and it will soon 
 reach the ears of all; and, when that is done, I shall be ready to 
 fulfill the promises which I have made to you. I will then come 
 out of my hiding place and clear the way for you at once. I shall 
 then be at liberty, according to the eternal law of heaven, to come 
 out and destroy everything that stands in your way ; but before I 
 cut off mine enemies, I am obliged to give unto all a warning, and, 
 until I have done this, I shall not require anything at your hands, 
 nor at the hands of those men who are one with you. Let them 
 stand still and watch my wonder-working hand. They need not 
 to think that they can do anything to warn this people, for they 
 cannot ; that is my business ; but, after I shall have done my part, 
 I shall call upon them to do theirs. Let them make themselves 
 ready, for they have no time to lose. They have long wished that 
 I was ready, but I shall be ready before they will be, and this they 
 will find out. Then let them rise up like men, and set themselves 
 for the work. 
 
 4. And as concerning my servant John Cook, he has thought 
 that he could warn his friends ; but he has been deceived. They 
 will not give hear to him ; but they meet him with a delusive spirit, 
 and overpower him : he cannot stand against them. Therefore, 
 let him be still, and leave the warning of his friends to me. And 
 inasmuch as his business calls him to mingle himself with those 
 people who know nothing about me, who have departed from my 
 ways, who know not what they are doing, who take wrong for 
 right, and right for wrong let him leave these things in my hands, 
 and, in the end, I will satisfy him. And as for those chief shep- 
 herds, I will mark out their course, and I will make them walk in 
 it. They cannot do what they wish to do. They shall obey 
 me they cannot help it. 
 
 5. All power that is upon the earth is in my hands, and I will 
 wield it to accomplish my purposes. I shall now assume my rights 
 upon the earth, and the kings of the earth shall feel my withering 
 hand. And as for your enemies in this place, and throughout this 
 
JUDGMENTS TO COME AS A WHIRLWIND. 65 
 
 Territory, you need not to fear them, for I am round about you, 
 and I will protect you from them all only be strong. 
 
 6. And as concerning my servant Richard Cook, let him be 
 strong, and I will soon liberate him. He wishes to preach my 
 gospel, and he shall soon have that privilege granted to him. 
 
 7. Let all who know me rest assured that I am with them, and 
 if they will take your counsel, not a hair of their heads shall be 
 hurt. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he whose words are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword ; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE JUDGMENTS OF GOD TO COME AS A WHIRL- 
 WIND. 
 
 No. 49. WEBER, UTAH, March 3rd, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the light and life of the world; even he 
 who moves forth in the midst of darkness, and the darkness com- 
 prehendeth him not ; the same who broke the barrier of the tomb, 
 and set the captive free ; who speaks the word, and all the 
 heavenly hosts obey. 
 
 2. And I am come to speak unto you, my son. Oh, my son, 
 why do you suffer your spirit to droop? Why do you not do 
 the thing that I wish you to do? Why do you take such a 
 course as you have taken, when, by so doing, you wound my feel- 
 ings. Have I not called upon you, time after time, to bring up 
 one case wherein I have failed to fulfill my promises as far as I 
 have gone with you ? I know that you are placed in a painful 
 position; but I cannot help it. I have done my best for you, 
 whether you think so, or not. I have greatly complained of you, 
 because you have not placed that confidence in me which I have 
 required of you. I know that your intentions are pure ; but you 
 are overpowered by the influence which is before you, which 
 is too great for you to strive against. If I could only prevail 
 upon you to place all confidence in me, my feelings would be 
 at rest ; but it seems that you cannot place that confidence in me 
 which I require ; therefore, I shall have to be content without it. 
 
66 JUDGMENTS TO COME AS A WHIRLWIND. 
 
 3. Now let us reason together : You are sensible of the 
 course that I have taken with you from the beginning. I have 
 been with you both at home and abroad. You have been to me 
 as the apple of mine eye ; and wherever you have been, I have 
 been with you. And you know that I have protected you from 
 all your enemies; and you know, also, that if I had not, you 
 would have been slain before this time. Notwithstanding, after 
 all that you have witnessed of my protecting care, which I have 
 had over you, you cannot place that confidence in me which is 
 required of you. O, that I could prevail with you ! O, that you 
 would place that confidence in me which I require I should be 
 released at once. 
 
 4. And, now, I speak unto you concerning this people : You 
 know that the warning voice is going forth at a rapid speed, and, 
 as soon as it shall have reached the ears of all, I will come out of 
 my hiding place and clear your way according to my former 
 promises. I will not keep you waiting after the warning has 
 reached the ears of all, and it will not be long before it will have 
 done so. You may be setting yourself for that time ; for it will 
 come as a whirlwind, and none but the pure in heart will escape. 
 And, until the very day comes for me to commence the work, I 
 will hold the surrounding influences off you, and you shall have 
 no difficulty in passing along from day to day. And let these 
 people who are now with you, be strong and remember that I am 
 with them, and that I will fight their battles; for I am well 
 pleased with them for that which they have done. Their good 
 acts shall be handed down from generation to generation in 
 honor to their names ; for they have wrought a good work for me, 
 and for their poor brethren. They are blessed of me ; and the 
 good acts which they have performed will be like bread cast upon 
 the waters, which is seen after many days. 
 
 5. And, as concerning my servants John Parson and Richard 
 Cook, let them hold themselves in readiness; for I am their 
 friend, and I am all sufficient for them. They shall soon be liber- 
 ated, and they shall preach my gospel until they are satisfied. 
 
 I now add no more at this time. I am he that was, and is, 
 and is to come ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
COMMANDED TO TARRY AT SOUTH WEBER. 67 
 
 COMMANDING THE PROPHET TO TARRY AT SOUTH 
 
 WEBER. FORETELLING DESTRUCTIONS 
 
 TO COMMENCE THERE. 
 
 No. 50. WEBER, UTAH, March 8th, 1861. 
 
 1. VERILY, I say unto you, my son, that inasmuch as the cloud 
 is now fast gathering, and must shortly, burst upon the heads of 
 your enemies to the destruction of many thousands of souls, it is 
 necessary that you should understand my will concerning this 
 matter. 
 
 2. The warning has now reached the ears of almost all of this 
 people. It will not be more than a few more days before it will 
 have reached the ears of all. Your enemies are already setting 
 themselves against you. They are seeking to raise a mob to 
 destroy you, and you need to prepare yourself for it ; for, although 
 it will not come until I am ready, it will, nevertheless, soon come. 
 I am controlling it. I will make mine enemies do what I wish 
 them to do, and they shall go so far, and no farther. I will raise 
 up a standard against them. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, that the men who now stand 
 at the head of my Church are at the head of this mob, and it will 
 involve all the shepherds who are corrupt before me. As I said 
 unto you in a former revelation, so I say unto you again, I will 
 not keep you waiting after the warning has reached the ears of all. 
 And when your enemies come upon you, you must not fear, but 
 stand to your post like a man, and I will fight your battles. I will 
 lay your enemies low before your face. You must place your 
 confidence in me in this case ; for I shall require it of you. And 
 it is my will that these people, who are one with you, should also 
 place their confidence in me. They must not fear their enemies, 
 for the great test is near at hand, and those who forsake me through 
 fear and turn traitors to me, as they may suppose to save their 
 lives, shall lose them, for I will cut them off first. But if they 
 stand fast to their integrity, and act honestly towards me, I will be 
 true to them, and not a hair of their heads shall be hurt ; for I 
 love those who are filled with integrity. 
 
 4. And if your enemies should send unto you a warning, 
 
68 COMMANDED TO TARRY AT SOUTH WEBER. 
 
 ordering you to move away from this place, you shall pay no 
 attention to it, but tell them to " come on " as soon as they are 
 ready. Those people who profess to be one with you will behold 
 scenes that will cause their hearts to fail them. And as I have 
 said unto you before, so I say unto you again, I will stand side 
 by side with you in this place, and I will speak with you mouth to 
 mouth ; and you shall see the hosts of heaven go out to war. I have 
 told you before, that when my presence is needed you shall see 
 me. You have nothing to fear. I am all sufficient for your 
 enemies. And when you are called to give the command, I will 
 come up and speak to you, and you shall be perfectly satisfied 
 in every respect. 
 
 5. And when the test comes you shall call these people who are 
 one with you to one place, even to the place that I shall appoint. 
 I will make known unto you more upon this subject hereafter. 
 
 6. And inasmuch as those men whom I have called to devote 
 themselves wholly to my cause, wish to know what I mean by 
 telling them to make ready, I will explain the matter to them. 
 Let them store their minds with the principles of my gospel, even 
 those principles which I have revealed unto them through you ; for 
 they will be called upon to preach the fullness of my gospel ; and 
 let them study this and nothing else, and I will supply their 
 temporal needs. They need not to think that they can both do 
 this and put in their crops, for they cannot. They may set them- 
 selves for the test. They need not suppose that it is a great way 
 off, for it is not; let them judge by the signs of the times. It is 
 nearer than they think it is; therefore, let them harken to the 
 words of my mouth, and diligently obey them, and all shall be well. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 THE ROD OF MOSES IS PROMISED. 
 
 No. 51. WEBER, UTAH, March i6th 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, even Jesus Christ, the 
 Son of the Eternal Father. And I am come to speak unto you, 
 my servant Joseph, according to your desire. 
 
THE ROD OF MOSES. 69 
 
 2. Oh, that you could only place your confidence in me ! 
 What a burden it would remove from you ! When you are 
 oppressed I feel your oppression, even as you do. You need not 
 to think that I pass on without having to contend with evil, for I 
 do not. I am responsible for my words, and I shall have to fulfill 
 them or suffer the consequences. I am as much bound by law as 
 you are. I cannot swerve from the eternal, unchangeable law of 
 heaven ; and I have sworn an oath of the holy priesthood, that, if 
 you will be led by me, I will make your words good. If I could 
 make you believe that you have nothing to fear, I should gain the 
 point which I wish to gain. The oppression which afflicts you is 
 in consequence of your not placing sufficient confidence in me. 
 You distrust me without a cause, and, by so doing, you afflict both 
 yourself and me. 
 
 3. You see the pure principles of my gospel trampled under 
 the feet of those 'who profess to be my people ; you witness all 
 manner of wickedness among this people ; you hear the cries of 
 my poor and afflicted people, who are oppressed and robbed of 
 their rights' by liars and hypocrites ; and these things give you 
 sorrow and pain; but justice has come to their doors. And I will 
 now defend the rights of my poor and afflicted people, for my 
 heart has been pained when I have seen their distress. I am now 
 working for their deliverance. The last test will shortly come, and 
 then I will strike the final blow. 
 
 4. As I said unto you before, so I say unto you again, pre- 
 pare yourself for the test, for whan it comes, it will come suddenly. 
 Seek to strengthen yourself by exercising your faith in me, and do 
 not, any more, show such weakness as you have done, but rise up 
 like a man and do your duty ; but leave mine to me. Each of us 
 is responsible for himself. If I do not do my duty I shall have to 
 bear the blame ; if you do not do yours, you will have to bear the 
 blame. 
 
 5. You think that I have not done my duty to you, because I 
 have not given unto you the rod. But, although it belongs to you, 
 you have never stood in need of it ; nevetheless, you shortly will 
 need it, and then I will bring it unto you, for I have it. When 
 my servant Moses had delivered mine own covenant people, I took 
 the rod from the earth, and it is in mine own possession. It is 
 
70 THE ROD OF MOSES. 
 
 never upon the earth, only when the full keys of the holy priest- 
 hood are upon the earth. Inasmuch, therefore, as you hold those 
 keys, when I visit you I will give it unto you. And I make unto 
 you a promise, that I will never neglect you. Let us be united 
 and work together, and everything will move on well. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, that, inasmuch as you have 
 many enemies, whose tongues are continually lying against you 
 without a cause, I will settle with them. I will record the names 
 of all those who maliciously lie against you, and who continue to 
 do so, and I will visit them with sudden death. And when the 
 scourge passes through this Territory, all such shall be destroyed, 
 and the remnant who shall be left, will be as the gleaning of grapes 
 when the vintage is over; for I shall make a great slaughter. I 
 know that you are weary of waiting for me, but I am bound by 
 law to take the course which I am taking. 
 
 7. And behold, I say unto you, that you have enemies in this 
 place who are seeking to lay a snare for your feet. Beware of 
 those who come into your presence, who profess to be your friends. 
 Open your eyes and look at them, and I will give unto you power 
 to discern who they are, and you shall shun such, and they shall 
 fall into their own snare. They seek to lead your enemies upon 
 you before the time which I have appointed has come ; but, if you 
 will do as I have commanded you, they shall have no power over 
 you ; but if you do not, they will ensnare you and cause you 
 trouble. You need to open your eyes wide, and look at every 
 one. who comes into your presence? You have the gift of discern- 
 ment by which, if you will use it, you may know who people are. 
 
 8. And as concerning those people who are one with you in 
 very deed, let them lift up their hands and rejoice, for I am their 
 shepherd ; and if they will do those things ' which I have com- 
 manded them to do, I will be with them unto the end. The test is 
 close upon them. I know that they are weary of waiting for it ; 
 nevertheless, when it does come, it will come too soon for some of 
 those who have been wishing for it to come. And as I have said 
 unto you before, so I say unto you again, as soon as you need to 
 see me, I will come unto you and talk with you, and I will make 
 known unto you all things which are necessary for you to know at 
 the time. 
 
SAINTS IN FOREIGN LANDS. 7 1 
 
 9. And as concerning the seed which, from this time forward, 
 may be put into the ground by those whom I have commanded 
 not to sow, those who may put it in will not reap it they will have 
 their trouble for nothing. I have told them, now, and they can 
 please themselves as to what they will do. 
 
 10. And as concerning the warning which I have sent forth, it 
 has now almost reached the ears of all. I need not to say any 
 more to you at this time upon this subject ; therefore, let this, for 
 the present, suffice, and I will make known more unto you here- 
 after. Therefore, be strong, and I will be with you unto the end. 
 
 I am he whose words are quick and powerful, sharper than a 
 two-edged sword; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 THE SAINTS IN FOREIGN LANDS. 
 
 No. 52. WEBER, UTAH, March 24th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Son of the Eternal Father, even Jesus 
 Christ. And, inasmuch as you have desired to know my will con- 
 cerning my saints in foreign lands, I will make it known unto you. 
 You know that they are now in the hands of false shepherds, and 
 are held by them, even as my saints are held by false shepherds in 
 this Territory ; and I will make known unto you what I will do to 
 release them. I will cut off those false shepherds, and I will leave 
 my saints without a shepherd to look to, until I shall have placed 
 others over them. My people are groaning under oppression in 
 foreign lands, even as they are here, and they wish to know my 
 will concerning them ; for they are faint for lack of knowledge. 
 
 2. They are continually calling upon me to release them from 
 Babylon ; but if they were here they would be worse bound than 
 they now are. Then what can I do with them in such a case ? I 
 am continually looking down upon them, and my heart is pained 
 when I behold their situation. They feel as though they were 
 sheep without a shepherd as though there was nothing for them 
 to cling to. They feel as though I had betrayed their confidence ; 
 as though they had believed in me in vain. They know not what 
 they are doing. They would serve me if they knew how ; but they 
 
72 SAINTS IN FOREIGN LANDS. 
 
 know but little about, me, notwithstanding I have done my best for 
 them. 
 
 3. I cannot change the nature of things. I am always regu- 
 lated by law. I cannot deviate from it. I have never failed to 
 abide by it. I need not to be driven to do my duty, for I know 
 what it is, and without being driven thereto (which is beneath me) 
 I will discharge that duty. I take delight in defending the rights 
 and relieving the wants of the poor, the distressed, and the inno- 
 cent. Mine afBicted people have thought that I have neglected 
 them, and suffered them to be afflicted by the destroyer ; but their 
 suffering and affliction will result in their good. And I will give 
 unto them a great endowment, which will make up for all their 
 losses and disappointments, and then they will be abundantly 
 satisfied, and know that I have done my duty to them. 
 
 4. And after that I shall have purged my Church here, I will 
 go to my churches abroad, and purge out of them, also, every- 
 thing that offends. I will overturn all things pertaining to my 
 Church, whether at home or abroad. 
 
 5. And, as concerning my saints who are in this place, let 
 them lift up their heads and rejoice ! for I am with them, and all 
 is well. I am working to their deliverance, and the cloud that is 
 gathering against them will soon burst. All things are working 
 well, whether you see it or not. There is a calm now, but there 
 soon will be a storm. Their enemies are now counseling together 
 about this matter, in order to find out the best plan to put a stop 
 to my work ; but I will control them in their councils, and bring 
 them to my terms. They cannot do anything save that which I 
 permit them to do. 
 
 6. Let not these people who are one with you grow weary in 
 waiting for me. I am doing all that I can . to satisfy them. Let 
 them be patient not restless. I am working as fast as I can, and 
 they ought to be satisfied. They know that I have given unto 
 them the keys of the holy priesthood, about which they before 
 knew nothing, and they know that those keys of knowledge came 
 from me ; they know, also, that they could not have come from any 
 other source. Let them, therefore, rise up like men, and use their 
 judgment, and put away all doubt from them. They have good 
 sense, if they would use it. Let them not trifle with me. They 
 
THE PROPHET AND OTHERS REPROVED. 73 
 
 have never lost anything by trusting in me. The things that come 
 from above are sacred, and they must be treated with care ; they 
 must not be trifled with. Let them treat these things with 
 solemity, and not with light-mindedness. 
 
 7. And again, as touching those people who are one with you. 
 When the test is about to commence I will make it known unto 
 them through you, and you shall call them together to the place 
 which I shall appoint. And I will make known unto you where 
 the place is, which I shall have appointed for that purpose, in time 
 for you to gather the people to it. Therefore, let them all be 
 satisfied, and know that, if they will abide in me, I will be with 
 them unto the end* 
 
 I now add no more. Let this suffice for the present, and I will 
 give unto you more hereafter. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET AND OTHERS REPROVED. 
 
 No. 53. WEBER, UTAH, March 3ist, 186 1. 
 
 1. LIFT up your head, and stand to your post like a man do 
 not act so vainly. You act, betimes, as though you knew nothing 
 either about me or my plans, and you let others also see your 
 weakness. Why do you not rise up, and strive against those 
 influences that oppress you? You know my will concerning this 
 people, even as I do; consequently, you have no cause to 
 act as you do. I have many times told you that you have 
 nothing to fear. Do you think that I have nothing to do with 
 this people? What did I give my life for? Have I no claim on 
 them ? Have they no claim on me ? If neither I nor they have 
 any claim upon each other, then all is lost. 
 
 2. I am abundantly able to do mine own work ; for I have 
 the power, and I will use it to the deliverance of my people ; and 
 that you shall shortly see. You do not need to doubt my power ; 
 for I have sufficient to cut off the inhabitants of a million earths 
 like this, if the law required me to do so. You surely think that 
 I am not honest ; but whether I am, or not, I cannot fail to ful- 
 fill my words ; for I am compelled to work by law, that Adam's 
 
74 THE PROPHET AND OTHERS REPROVED. 
 
 posterity may be saved ; and if I should fail, another would come 
 and take my place. The work must go on it cannot stop ; and 
 were I not to abide the law, I should have to suffer the conse- 
 quences. Then let me prevail upon you to exercise faith in me. 
 
 3. You think that I have too much sympathy for those chief 
 shepherds who have misled my people, to cut them off; but you 
 are mistaken. They have no sympathy for themselves ; therefore, 
 how can I sympathize with them ? I have done my duty to them ; 
 but, instead of hearkening to me, they have risen up and set them- 
 selves in war against me. And do you think that I will give up 
 to them, and let all my words fall to the ground unfulfilled? No, 
 I will not. If they are presumptuous enough to set themselves in 
 war against me, I shall be compelled to cut them off. But I shall 
 not strike the first blow ; for it is contrary to the law of heaven for 
 me to do so. But I will work them up to a head, and then they 
 will come out openly against me, and strive to stop my course. 
 And when they do this, I shall be at liberty, according to the law 
 by which I am governed, to cut them off. And I cannot break 
 that law. I cannot deviate from it. If you knew my situation, 
 you would not complain of me as you have done. I have done 
 the best that I could for you. 
 
 4. And as for these men who profess to be one with you, I 
 am astonished at them also, for their coolness and lack of faith in 
 me. I have done my duty to them, and blessed them ; but they 
 do not appreciate the blessings that I have placed within their 
 reach. They know that I have committed the full keys of the 
 holy priesthood to my servant upon the earth, and that they have 
 received a knowledge of things about which they knew nothing 
 before. And, after all, how lightly they value these things ! They 
 need not to think that I am dependent upon them, and that I can- 
 not do without them ; for I can. I do not want the help of those 
 who render help grudgingly. They need not to think that I can- 
 not do without their help. If they wish to forsake me, they can 
 do so; and I can find friends when they have forsaken me. If 
 men do not lay hold and labor for me with all their hearts, I do 
 not want their labor at all. I dislike those who are half-hearted 
 they will do me no good. They are continually filled with fear; 
 so much so, that that they are of no use to me ; as they now are 
 
THE PROPHET AND OTHERS REPROVED. 75 
 
 I can do nothing with them. If they cannot place their confi- 
 dence in me, and work with me, I have no use for them ; and 
 they may do their own will. When I sent them from my presence 
 to the earth, they promised to assist me with all their power ; but 
 now, when I need their help, they are a burden upon me. They 
 are so much afraid of me, that they cannot do their duty ; never- 
 theless, they have a part to act as well as I have ; and if they do 
 not act that part, they will have to suffer the consequences. They 
 are not ignorant about my plans ; they know what I mean to do. 
 
 5. And now, behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that 
 I will establish the full keys of the holy priesthood upon the earth, 
 even if I have to cut off this entire people in order to do so ; for 
 there are many of them whom I despise. They will do anything that 
 those corrupt shepherds tell them to do. They have laid aside their 
 own judgment and given it up to others who are as blind as them- 
 selves ; and they do not for a moment think about what they are 
 doing. But can they justify themselves before me? No, they 
 cannot ; therefore, I will visit many of their sins upon them. I 
 will visit them shortly, and I will open their eyes for them at once. 
 
 6. And inasmuch as you wish to know my will concerning the 
 gathering together of these people, I will make it known unto you. 
 When your enemies are about to come upon you, I will speak 
 unto you suddenly, and make known unto you the place which I 
 have appointed for the gathering together of these people. 
 
 7. And, behold, I say unto you, you may be setting yourself 
 for the test. And you must take care of your writings, and lock 
 them up, and keep them safe. And, if you will do as I have 
 commanded you, I will lead you safely through in spite of your 
 enemies. And remember that, when the test is about to com- 
 mence, I will make my appearane to you ; and you shall have no 
 cause to complain against me for neglect of duty towards you. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he whose words are quick and pow- 
 erful, sharper than a two-edged sword ; even Jesus Christ Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
76 REORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH. 
 
 REOGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH APPOINTMENT 
 
 OF RICHARD COOK, JOHN PARSON AND 
 
 OTHERS TO OFFICE. 
 
 No. 54. WEBER, UTAH, April 3d, 1861. 
 
 1. A REVELATION of Jesus Christ, concerning those who know 
 his plans, and who are willing to comply with his request. Let 
 them hearken to my words, which are quick and powerful, sharper 
 than a two-edged sword, and all shall be well with them. It is 
 necessary that a move should be made by them for their good. 
 There are many people now scattered around, who have no stand- 
 ard to rally to, and, on this account, it is necessary that a move 
 should be made for their benefit. 
 
 2. It is my will that all those who believe in me should be 
 baptized for the remission of sins, and they shall receive the gift 
 of the Holy Ghost in its fullness, and, also, that testimony which 
 has been promised to them. They need not to be afraid to do the 
 thing which I require at their hands, for I will sustain them in it. 
 And while they trust in me they have nothing to fear ; for I will 
 be round about them, both at home and abroad, and they shall be 
 as giants. Everything shall become subject to them ; and, as soon 
 as they are ready, I will deliver them out of the hands of all their 
 enemies, and they shall know no more affliction. 
 
 3. I am working mine enemies up to a head at a rapid speed, 
 and they will soon break out, and come up against you with all 
 their power. You may open your eyes and be looking out for them ; 
 fur they will come upon you suddenly. You have no time to lose. 
 And when they come, your hands will be full. But I will be 
 present with you at that time to instruct you. 
 
 4. I cannot make you understand me as I wish to do. You 
 are continually wishing to see me, that you may know whether I 
 am ready for the work, or not. But, if I come unto you when you 
 need to see me, will not that be soon enough? What think you? 
 You know that you have not yet been placed in a position where 
 you have needed a manifestation of my power ; and, until you are 
 so placed, you do not need to see me. If I am not with you 
 when my presence and power are needed, then yqu will have 
 
REORGANIZATION OF THE CHURCH. 77 
 
 cause to complain of me. Why do you not act reasonably? You 
 know that, according to my promises, I have kept your enemies 
 off you, and I have broken them up, and set them one against- 
 another, and they have had no power over you. What have you 
 to complain of? Nothing at all. Therefore, let your mind be at 
 rest. And if ever you complain against me again, let it be when 
 I deserve it; but do not keep wounding my feelings without a 
 cause. I will never neglect you, never fear. 
 
 5. And, behold, I say unto you that, when you shall have 
 baptized those men who believe in me, you shall ordain those of 
 them who are high priests by birthright to the office of high 
 priests. 
 
 6. And you shall take my servant Richard Cook to be your 
 first counselor; and, in a day to come, you shall make him the 
 president of the Church under your direction. Let him stand up 
 like a man and prove himself worthy of that blessing. 
 
 7. And as concerning my servant John Parson, you shall or- 
 dain him to the office of an apostle, and he shall preside over the 
 apostleship. 
 
 8. And as for my servants John Cook, William Kendall, and 
 John Firth, you sfiall ordain them to the office of high priests ; 
 and, in a day to come, they shall receive their appointments to 
 honorable places if they will abide in me. Let them store their 
 minds with all necessary information, that they may become useful 
 in their places ; and you shall ordain others as they come along, 
 and place them in their own places; and you shall show no 
 partiality to one more than another; for I, the Lord, am just 
 in all my ways. I cannot look upon sin with the least 
 degree of allowance. And unto all those that have come 
 forth with honest hearts and contrite spirits, I will make 
 unto them this promise : That they shall receive the gift of 
 the Holy Ghost in its fullness. They shall speak in tongues 
 and prophesy, and receive all the gifts of the spirit. And if they 
 are sick, and not appointed to death, I will heal them, and their 
 joy shall be full. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he that was, and is, and 
 is to come; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
78 THE ORDINANCE OF BAPTISM. 
 
 THE MANNER OF ADMINISTERING THE ORDI- 
 NANCE OF BAPTISM. 
 
 No. 55. WEBER, UTAH, April 3rd, 1861. 
 
 A REVELATION of Jesus Christ, showing the manner of admini- 
 stering the ordinance of baptism to those who wish to become 
 members of the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints, 
 under the fullness of the gospel. 
 
 The person called to administer in this ordinance, shall raise 
 his right arm up towards heaven, and calling the person by name, 
 shall say: I, having received authority from Jesus Christ, baptize 
 you for the remission of your sins, and into the fullness of the gos- 
 pel of Jesus Christ, in the name of the Father, and of the Son, 
 and of the Holy Ghost. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 GOD'S FAITHFULNESS IN FULFILLING HIS 
 PROMISES. 
 
 No. 56. WEBER, UTAH, April 4th, 1861. 
 
 1. INASMUCH as there has been some dissatisfaction mani- 
 fested by some concerning the blessings which I have given unto 
 my servants whom I have called, I will answer them upon this 
 matter. 
 
 2. They have thought that I am partial to one more than to 
 another, and they have also thought that I have not fulfilled my 
 promises which I have made in those blessings ; but they condemn 
 me before I have had an opportunity of fulfilling them. They 
 judge me rashly, and condemn me as though I had not the power 
 to make my promises good ; but I shall make them good. They 
 think that I have so arranged things to commence with, that I can- 
 not make good the promises which I have made ; but I know my 
 business. I do not make a promise that I am not able to fulfill ; 
 and, in due time, I will fulfill all the promises that I have made, 
 to the satisfaction of all those who are concerned. But they think 
 that if I do not fulfill my promises immediately after I have made 
 them, that all is over, and that I am false. They do not know 
 
THE FAITHFULNESS OF THE LORD. 79 
 
 much about me. My ways are not like the ways of men. All 
 things with me have to take their regular rounds, and I cannot 
 turn them out of their regular course. They must take their own 
 time. But men upon the earth do not stand for law ; they ride 
 over it and do as they please. In heaven all are subject to the 
 celestial law, which law cannot be changed. Therefore, immortal 
 beings cannot be subject to mortal beings; but mortal beings 
 must be subject to immortal beings. 
 
 3. And as concerning my servant Richard Cook, I have called 
 him, and, if he will stand to his post like a man, I will uphold 
 him, and he will never have cause to complain against me for 
 neglecting him; but he is, betimes, very impatient. Let him 
 exercise more patience than he has hitherto done. 
 
 4. vAnd as concerning my servant John Parson, I have called 
 him to preside over those who shall be called to hold the apostle- 
 ship, and inasmuch as he will do his duty, I will uphold him to 
 his satisfaction. 
 
 5. It was necessary for me to call these two men, in order to 
 commence an organization ; and, as soon as I can do so, I will 
 call all the others, and place them in honorable places also. They 
 shall have no cause to complain, if they will be honest before me, 
 and that I do not wish to doubt. Let them rise up and shake 
 themselves, and cling to the truth, and forsake all falsehood ; and 
 let them store their minds with those principles which I have 
 revealed to them. Let them not sit in judgment upon anything 
 that I have revealed, or that I shall hereafter reveal through my 
 servant ; for he is subject to me only ; and let all others obey the 
 words that come from his mouth, for I will sustain them. 
 
 6. Let not those who profess to believe in me think that my 
 servant Joseph is partial to one more than to another ; for he is 
 not. For honesty and integrity, there is none like unto him upon 
 the earth. I can trust him, whether others can or not. There- 
 fore, I command all those who profess to be my friends, to forsake 
 all their follies, and not dictate to me. Let them learn to obey 
 me, and, by so doing, they will save themselves from much 
 affliction. And let them leave those things which belong to me. 
 alone, and all shall be well with them. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Son of the Eternal Father ; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
8o ORDINATION. 
 
 ADVISING SLOWNESS OF SPEECH IN ORDINATIONS. 
 
 No. 57. WEBER, UTAH, April 6th, 1861. 
 
 BEHOLD, verily I say unto you, my son, that when you place 
 your hands upon the head of a person, you shall pause for a short 
 time. You must not be hasty in speaking. And, if you will do 
 as I command you, you will ordain him aright ; for I will 'stand 
 by you to dictate you. Remember that I do not work in haste 
 I must have my own time. And if you will observe and keep my 
 commandments, you will never be led wrong. 
 
 I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 ORDINATION. 
 
 No. 58. WEBER, UTAH, April 8th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I speak unto you, my servant Joseph, according 
 to your request. You are greatly afraid lest I should lead you 
 wrong when you are called upon to ordain men to the priesthood ; 
 but you need not to fear, for I will sanction what you do. It is 
 my business to direct you in all your movements. I am satisfied 
 with what you have done, and I will record it in heaven. You 
 must not fear, but trust fully in me ; and if there is anything that 
 goes wrong, I will bear the blame. Do your own duty, and leave 
 mine to me. 
 
 2. You are astonished at my leading you to ordain so many 
 high priests. You have thought that the high priests were scarce ; 
 but they are not. There are many thousands of them now upon 
 the earth ; and, although there are quite a number of them now in 
 my Church, there are, notwithstanding, many of them who have 
 not yet obeyed my gospel. Of those who have, some of them are 
 in the lesser priesthood ; but they will be taken out, and placed in 
 their own places. And, in due time, all things pertaining to my 
 Church will be placed in their own order. 
 
 3. And it is my will that you should give unto all those whom 
 you have ordained to the high priesthood a certificate of their 
 ordination, as soon as you can make it convenient. And, behold, 
 
THE CHIEF ACTING OFFICERS. 8 1 
 
 I speak unto all those who have complied with my request; 
 let them place their whole confidence in me, and I will fight their 
 battles. They have nothing to fear, for I will be by their side by 
 my holy angels ; and, if they will hearken to the whisperings of the 
 still small voice, not a hair of their heads shall be hurt. 
 
 4. And as concerning the Holy Ghost, which I have promised 
 to all those who have complied with my request, it shall commence 
 to influence them from the time that they were confirmed into my 
 Church ; and its influence shall continue to increase with them, 
 and seal the truth upon their minds. It shall be a continual 
 light to their pathway, and give unto them the promised 
 testimony. 
 
 5. And when your enemies are about to come upon you, you 
 shall call all those who believe in me together ; and at the right time 
 I will appoint unto you the place to which they shall gather. I 
 am controlling those wicked shepherds who oppose you, and I will 
 bring them to my own terms. All will go right. Therefore, let 
 them hearken diligently to my words, and obey them, and I will be 
 with them unto the end. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he who holds in his hands 
 the destinies of all men; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 THE CHIEF ACTING OFFICERS UNDER THE FULL- 
 NESS OF THE HOLY PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 No. 59. WEBER, UTAH, April lyth, 1861. 
 
 1. INASMUCH as the chief acting officers of my holy priesthood, 
 under the fullness of the gospel, feel that I have not given unto 
 them a sufficient testimony of the truth of the mission of my 
 servant, the prophet, who now holds the keys of my kingdom upon 
 the earth, let them hearken unto the words of the Lord their God ; 
 for I am about to reason with them upon this matter. 
 
 2. They bring up the evidence which I gave unto those men 
 whom I have called to assist my servant, Joseph Smith, and com- 
 pare it with the evidence which they have received under the full- 
 ness of the priesthood ; and they consider that the evidence which 
 
82 THE CHIEF ACTING OFFICERS. 
 
 I gave to the associates of the Prophet Joseph Smith, is greater 
 than that which they have received ; but they do not know what 
 they are saying. They think that it was a great thing for me to 
 send a holy angel unto those men, who were one with my servant 
 Joseph Smith, in his beginning. But what was that compared 
 with that which they have now received? Unto them I have 
 revealed all heights of exaltation, both of Gods and angels, and 
 also of worlds innumerable. And I have placed them in a 
 position where they can come to a knowledge of the inhabitants of 
 all earths which have been created. Moreover, I have sent unto 
 them the angel Gabriel, clothed in mortality, to restore all things, 
 and to bring down all power under his feet, and I am with him ; 
 but it seems that I cannot make those men believe it. Oh, how 
 they do trifle with me ! How they aggravate me with their follies ! 
 If they would only act reasonably with me, I could do with them ; 
 but they do not. They think that I ought to do everything that 
 they ask me to do in a minute. They will not give me time to 
 commence to do it before they censure me because it is not done. 
 I cannot please them, do what I will. In their estimation all that 
 I do is wrong. They think that they know what ought to be done 
 better than I do. They cannot do their own duty, for fear that I 
 shall not do mine. How can I work with such people? They 
 act as inconsistently as though they knew nothing about me. 
 
 3. It seems that they cannot place their confidence in me 
 unless they could see me ; but they cannot see me until there shall 
 be a temple built, and a holy place appointed for that purpose ; 
 and then, if they are worthy, I will meet with them, and speak 
 with them mouth to mouth. It is contrary to the law by which I 
 am governed for me to meet with them in the open air, or to be seen 
 by them. No person can see me without being transfigured ; but 
 I will show myself to those who have occasion to see me. If I 
 show myself to my servant who holds the keys of my kingdom, it 
 is sufficient at present ; but, in due time, I will reveal myself to 
 thousands. When I met with mine ancient covenant people, they 
 had a place prepared for me, where I could meet with them, and 
 show myself unto them ; and when these my people have prepared 
 a place for me, I will appear to them also. 
 
 4. The trouble with my servants is this : They do not know 
 
THE CHIEF ACTING OFFICERS. 83 
 
 me. Their minds have been exercised too much with the foolish- 
 ness of men. So much so, that they neither have confidence in 
 me, nor in anything else. Neither do they reason honestly, or they 
 never could have come to the conclusion to which they have 
 come. But I suppose that they will justify their own course, and 
 consider that it is I who am wrong. Suppose that I should make 
 my appearance to them, what benefit would that be to them ? It 
 would not relieve them. Suppose that I should open the heavens 
 to them, and they should see all the heavenly host, what benefit 
 would that be to them.'' They know that these things exist in the 
 heavens, as well as if I had shown them unto them. They have the 
 keys of knowledge by which all these things are known ; and if they 
 do believe in those keys, which reveal all things, they would not 
 believe that it was me, even should they see me. They would not 
 acknowledge the sight of their own eyes. There is a spirit that 
 wars against them that would lead them to infidelity. It is in the 
 Church, and they have felt the effects of it ; and they must strive 
 against it, or it will take them down the stream to destruction. 
 But if they cannot believe in those keys of knowledge which I 
 have given, they cannot believe in me ; for, whosoever under- 
 stands the laws by which I am governed, sees me in all my glory, 
 for these are my attributes. And by this means, those who have 
 any knowledge of me, know me. And this is eternal life to all 
 people, that they have a perfect knowledge of my laws and obey 
 them. 
 
 I now add no more ; but I will shortly give unto you more. 
 For the present, let this suffice. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE CHIEF ACTING OFFICERS UNDER THE FULL- 
 NESS OF THE HOLY PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 No. 60. WEBER, UTAH, April i8th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am come to speak 
 unto you again concerning those chief acting officers of my 
 Church under the fullness of the holy priesthood. 
 
84 THE CHIEF ACTING OFFICERS. 
 
 2. They are greatly afflicted in their feelings without a cause. 
 If they could only place their confidence in me, what a burden it 
 would remove off them. But, if they cannot do so, they must 
 grapple with their own weakness. I have done my duty to them 
 as far as I have gone with them ; and they know that no person 
 as yet has ever injured them. And if I have preserved them 
 through the past, why cannot they place their confidence in me, 
 and trust me for the future? If men could only act reasonably 
 with me, I could do with them. Whoever has proved me false in 
 any one thing that I have ever promised? No. one. I never 
 failed to fulfill my word ; yet men say that they do not understand 
 me. It is only given to one man upon the earth to understand me 
 perfectly ; and he who holds the keys of my kingdom upon the 
 earth is that man ; and it is his duty to explain my words to the 
 satisfaction of all. I am governed by a celestial law. 
 
 3. As I have said unto you in a former revelation, so I say 
 unto you again, what benefit would it be unto those men if I 
 should send unto them a holy angel? What would they know 
 about him more than what they now know? They know that an 
 angel is a resurrected personage ; and what more do they need to 
 know about angels? If an angel was sent unto them, what could 
 he tell them more than they now know? Nothing at all. They 
 have the greatest angel now in their midst that ever surrounded 
 my throne; but they do not appreciate that blessing. But, behold, 
 I say unto them, if they do not alter their course, I will take him 
 away from them. I will not suffer that his feelings shall be con- 
 tinually wounded by their foolishness. 
 
 4. They need not to think that I am dependent upon them ; 
 for I am not. Should they leave me I can still obtain help. 
 They act as though they had nothing to do with the salvation of 
 man. They had much better have remained with their fathers at 
 home, than to have come here to grumble and complain as they 
 do. I suppose that they think that they are laboring for me ; but 
 they are not. If they labor at all, they do it for themselves. 
 They had better make up their minds what they are going to do. 
 And if they are going to draw out from me, the sooner they do 
 so, the better; for, as they now are, they are of no use to me. 
 But if they conclude to act in the office to which I have appointed 
 
THE CHIEF ACTING OFFICERS. 85 
 
 them, I wish them to humble themselves before me, that I may 
 pardon their sins; for they have grievously sinned against me. 
 They think that I should do everything that they ask me to do in 
 one minute. If I have made unto them a promise, and they are 
 worthy, I will fulfill it as soon as I can ; but the way in which 
 they now act, renders them unworthy of the least of my blessings. 
 They consider that I have never given unto them a manifestation 
 of my power ; as yet, they have never needed one. When they 
 need to see one, they shall see it. They can read in the Bible of 
 the miracles that I performed through my servant Moses ; but I 
 did not manifest my power through him until I had first raised 
 him up, and given unto him all the keys of the holy priesthood. 
 And I was several years in doing so before I began to manifest 
 my almighty power through him. But after I had started my 
 work with him, I never staid my hand while he was upon the 
 earth; and I will do the same now. After I shall have once 
 started, I will never stay my hand again until I shall have brought 
 down all power under my feet. But these men think that I should 
 now give unto them a manifestation of my power to satisfy them. 
 Should I do this, I would disturb the calm which I wish to exist 
 until I am ready to burst things up, and then they will se all the 
 manifestations of power which they wish to see.- When they see 
 that I am at work, the}- ought to be satisfied. As often as they 
 need information, they can hear from me, if they will take the 
 right course. I am ready and willing to pour out blessings upon 
 all those who seek me with all their hearts. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he. that was, and is, and is to come; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 FORMER REVELATIONS EXPLAINED. BAPTISM. 
 THE SACRAMENT. HEALING OF THE SICK. 
 
 No. 6 1. WEBER, UTAH, April i9th, 1861. 
 
 i. IT is necessary that you should know my will concerning 
 the work that lies before you. Those men who are connected 
 with you in this work, have desired to know of me what I meant 
 
86 BAPTISM. THE SACRAMENT. 
 
 by calling upon them to be baptized for the remission of their sins, 
 and, thereby, commencing an organization. It was necessary for 
 me to do this, in order to prepare a number of men to preach my 
 gospel in its fullness, and that there might be a place prepared for 
 the people to rally to, when I shall have moved the obstacles that 
 now bind my people together out of the way, and those obstacles 
 I will remove when I shall have worked things up to a head. I 
 understand my business, no matter whether others think that I do 
 or not. When I told my people to stand still and watch my 
 wonder-working hand, I did not mean that they should stand still 
 and do nothing at all ; but, on the contrary, I called upon them 
 to do a small thing to loose my hands so that I could work, and I 
 expected them to do it. Then what did I mean by telling them 
 to stand still? I meant that they must not go abroad among the 
 people to preach, until I shall have opened the way for them. I 
 told them that they could not convince the people by so doing t 
 for it is my business to penetrate their hearts ; and, when I am 
 ready, I can do it effectually. But the law by which I am 
 governed binds me to take a course to save alive as many innocent 
 people as I shall be able to : besides which, I do not delight in 
 shedding the blood of the innocent. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I say unto you, my son, it is necessary 
 that you should know my will concerning the future. You have 
 baptized many already; others, also, will flock to you, and call 
 upon you for baptism; and, as much as possible, I will send unto 
 you those who are worthy ; but the rest I will restrain. I will 
 regulate all these things as well as possible. And you shall 
 baptize those who apply to you for baptism, and place them in 
 their own places; and you shall continue to preach to those who 
 come to hear you. I will shortly place you in a different position 
 to that in which you are now placed. Therefore, hearken to my 
 words, and be content to remain as you are until I change your 
 circumstances. 
 
 3. As touching the partaking of the sacrament, it is my will 
 that these my people should wait a short time for this privilege, 
 and I will speak unto my servant again upon this matter at 
 the time which I have appointed, and reveal unto him more about 
 it. Until then, let all be satisfied, and continue on as they 
 are. 
 
THE SCHOOL OF THE PROPHETS. 87 
 
 4 
 
 4. And as for the healing of the sick, I will pour out that 
 blessing upon my people in rich abundance to the satisfaction of 
 all, if they will only wait until the time has arrived for me to do 
 so. But the difficulty with them is, that they must have a thing 
 done immediately, or they begin to murmur against me, and 
 charge me with being false. I do not work in haste. All things 
 with me must take their regular round. 
 
 5. And as concerning the gifts of the spirit, I will shortly pour 
 them out upon my people to their satisfaction. I am doing the 
 best that I can for them in every respect. Let them all hearken 
 to my words, and diligently obey them, and all will be well. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he whose words are quick and 
 powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE SCHOOL OF THE PROPHETS. 
 
 No. 62. WEBER, UTAH, May 3d, 1861. 
 
 BEHOLD, I am the light and the life of the world ; the same 
 which moves forth in the darkness, and the darkness compre- 
 hendeth it not. I am he who speaks the word, and all the 
 heavenly hosts obey ; who groaned upon the cross, and all eternity 
 was pained. And I am come to speak unto you, my son; con- 
 cerning those whom you have ordained to the holy priesthood. 
 It is necessary that you should enter into an order whereby to 
 instruct them in those things which I have revealed unto you, that 
 they may be prepared for the work which I have called them to 
 do. There is a great work lying before them, and they need to be 
 preparing themselves for it. And this order which you must com- 
 mence, you shall call the "School of the Prophets." And in that 
 school you shall teach the hidden mysteries of my Church. And 
 you shall gather together the high priests as often as you can make 
 it convenient, and instruct them on this wise. And, for the time 
 being, you may admit into the school the priests of Aaron ; but, in 
 due time, there will be none admitted into this school but high 
 priests. And this order shall be fully established in the Church, 
 
88 THE PROPHET AND HIS ASSOCIATES. 
 
 and it shall continue as long as the fullness of the priesthood con- 
 tinues upon the earth. And you shall preside over this school, 
 and it shall be conducted after this manner : It shall be opened 
 by singing and prayer, and there shall be perfect order kept in the 
 school. There shall be but one person speak at once, and all 
 others shall sit in silence ; and there shall be no laughter allowed 
 in the school. And, inasmuch as my servants will hearken unto 
 my words and obey them, I will meet with them in this holy place, 
 and they shall be filled with wisdom. Every endowment neces- 
 sary shall be granted unto them. It is my delight to build them 
 up in those things which belong to eternal life. Let them not fear, 
 for, if they will hearken unto me, I will be with them unto the 
 end. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET'S SICKNESS, AND HIS ASSOCIATES. 
 
 No. 63. WEBER, UTAH, May 3d, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, verily I say unto you, my servant Joseph, I have 
 looked down upon you and seen your sickness. You have passed 
 through so much since I called you, and it has so broken your 
 constitution, that it is with great difficulty that you manage to live ; 
 and you must not talk any more at this time than duty calls you 
 to do, and, when you do talk, you must not exert yourself any 
 more than necessary. The ill usage which you have been called 
 to pass through was more than mortal man could well endure ; but 
 I will shortly heal you again, and you shall gradually gain your 
 strength back. 
 
 2. I am continually at work with this people, striving to bring 
 about a change, and all things are working well. There are 
 hundreds of people who now believe in me, and they will soon 
 call upon you for baptism ; and I shall soon have a sufficient 
 number in the new organization of my Church to commence the 
 work with, and then, when there is a certain number in the 
 Church, which will be sufficient for me to commence my work 
 with, I will cut a clear way through your enemies. I will then 
 make a slaughter among them. And as I have said unto you 
 
THE PROPHET AND HIS ASSOCIATES. 89 
 
 before, so I say unto you again, I will hold all your enemies off 
 you until I am ready to cut them off. When I am ready, then I 
 will destroy them in the flesh. I will act with you in such a way 
 as to remove all the burden that I can off you ; for I do not delight 
 to see you continually weighed down until your life is a burden to 
 you. 
 
 3. And it is my will that those men who are one with you 
 should do likewise. Let them uphold you, and I will uphold them. 
 And, if they will only do that which I command them, all will be 
 well with them. They must take a course to hold all the burden 
 off you that they can. Let them cease their light-mindedness and 
 loud laughter, for it is sin in my sight. As for the preaching 
 which they have done to those who have come to hear, I am well 
 pleased with it. In this respect I am well pleased with them. 
 Notwithstanding this, they are light-minded. This is the greatest 
 failing that they have. They should be an example to others. 
 It is my will that they should continue in preaching as they have 
 hitherto done ; and let them place their whole confidence in me. 
 I will do my duty. They need not to fear. No person ever 
 knew my works to fail. It is not the work of the Lord that is 
 frustrated, but the work of man. They can see the works of man 
 failing all around them, and, on this account, they are deceived ; 
 for they judge of the works of the Lord by the works of man ; 
 therefore, it is hard to find faith upon the earth. 
 
 4. And as concerning my servant John Parson, I have seen 
 his sickness, and I will shortly heal his body, and he shall enjoy 
 good health. He desires that blessing, and it shall be granted 
 unto him. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he whose words are quick and 
 powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
90 JOSEPH SMITH, JR. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOSEPH SMITH, JR. 
 
 No. 64. WEBER, UTAH, May 4th, 1861. 
 
 1. IT is necessary that you should understand my movements 
 among men. 
 
 2. You have heard of a new sect rising up, calling themselves 
 the "True Latter Day Saints," headed by the son of my servant, 
 Joseph Smith, and you wish to know whether I have anything to 
 do with them, or not. I answer that I have. I am using them to 
 be a scfourge to those false shepherds of my flock, that through 
 them I might open the eyes of some. But, when I have accom- 
 plished my purposes with them, I will turn them another way. I 
 have given unto them a portion of my holy spirit to prepare them 
 for the work which I have called them to do. Therefore, I am 
 using them to assist you, and, in the end, I will bring them up to 
 you, and many of them will obey the fulness of my go spel, and 
 become one with you. They are in my hands, and I will turn 
 them hither and thither as it seemeth me good. They enjoy, in 
 part, the gifts of my spirit. I have given unto them wisdom, and 
 love for each other ; and I will take good care of them. You need 
 not to think that they will come in contact with you, for they will 
 not. They will become subject to you. And, at the time which 
 I have appointed, I will bring down all power under your feet. 
 
 3. I have not, as yet, called my servant, Joseph Smith, who 
 now stands at the head of that party, to be a prophet. I have 
 only moved upon him by my holy spirit for a certain purpose. 
 I shall do nothing in that respect, but what I do through you. I 
 do not claim the right to do anything upon the earth that concerns 
 you, without your consent. Therefore, when I call my servant 
 Joseph Smith to be a prophet, I shall call him through you. 
 
 4. There will be many prophets called to assist you in a day 
 to come, but none will hold the keys of this dispensation except 
 you. All others will be subject to you. There is an order in my 
 Church, and that order has to be adhered to. There can be but 
 one person upon the earth at once holding the keys of a dis- 
 pensation. There may be many prophets upon the earth at one 
 time, but they must be subject to him who holds the keys. 
 
THE DELIVERANCE OF THE RIGHTEOUS. 91 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he who holds in his hands 
 the keys of death and hell ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 THE DELIVERANCE OF THE RIGHTEOUS. COM- 
 MANDING THE SAINTS TO GATHER TO 
 SOUTH WEBER. 
 
 No. 65. WEBER, UTAH, May nth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, it is necessary that you 
 should know my will concerning those people who have obeyed 
 the fulness of my gospel, and who are looking to me for deliver- 
 ance. They are chiefly of the poor class. Not many rich, as yet, 
 have obeyed the fulness of my gospel ; but I have looked down 
 upon the poor of my people, and I have prepared a blessing for 
 them ; for they shall feast upon the good things of the earth, 
 and the blessings of heaven shall be abundantly poured out 
 upon them ; but the proud, the hypocrites, and the liars, I will 
 visit as with a whirlwind. I will not leave one of them alive. 
 Yea, verily, I will feed the fat with judgment. Those men who 
 have obeyed the fulness of my gospel think that I am a long 
 while before I do so. They are tired of waiting for me. 
 
 2. Why am I so long before I come out of my hiding place to 
 sweep away the refuge of lies from among the pure in heart? I 
 will answer this question. I must first prepare a number of men to 
 preach the fulness of my gospel before I can cut off the wicked. 
 If I do not do this, what shall I do with those who will be left? 
 Where could they look to for salvation, if I had not prepared 
 some men to preach to them? I must have something prepared 
 for them to cling to. Before I throw down one government I, 
 must commence another. I must lay my plans out in a way to 
 save alive all that I can. There are many among this people who 
 are pure in heart who think that they are doing right by taking 
 the counsel of those corrupt shepherds who have forsaken me 
 they know no better. I must so arrange matters as to have them 
 taught of my ways. I am taking the wisest plan to save alive the 
 pure of my people ; therefore, let all be satisfied with the way in 
 
92 THE DELIVERANCE OF THE RIGHTEOUS. 
 
 which I am working, and all things will come out right. 
 
 3. Those chief shepherds think that I shall not cut them off; 
 but when that time has arrived, I will show them whether I will, 
 or not. They will shortly try what they can do. They would 
 have come against you before this time if I had not held them. 
 They cannot come up against you until I permit them. They 
 thirst for your blood ; and thirst they may ; they shall never have 
 power over you. They cannot kill you as they have killed other 
 prophets their power is over they have gone their length, and I 
 will shortly settle all difficulties with them. If those men whom 
 I have called to preach the fulness of my gospel wish to see me 
 come out of my hiding place, to clear their way, let them prepare 
 themselves for it. They will do anything but that which I com- 
 mand them. They are almost continually dabbling with those 
 things which I told them not to meddle with. They want to take 
 their own course, and still they are not willing for me to jtake 
 mine ; but if I do not do the thing which they think that I ought 
 to do, they murmur against me : they will not meet me upon fair 
 grounds. If they wish me to come out of my hiding place to 
 clear the way for them, why do they not prepare themselves for it? 
 Are they prepared to preach the fulness of my gospel? No, they 
 are not ; neither will they prepare themselves for it. But, unless 
 they will do this, if they put in their crops, they shall not reap 
 them, and continue to be mine apostles. They shall find out that 
 I am the master. If they will not do as I command them, they 
 will have to suffer the consequences. Those who are blessed the 
 most, are the most unfaithful. When ^ave any of them proved 
 my word to fail ? I am waiting for them to prepare themselves. 
 Suppose that I were to cut off mine enemies to-morrow, are they 
 ready for it? No. How much do they know about the fulness of 
 my gospel t But very little. Oh, fyow harcjl ^ is for me to deal 
 with men upon thg ear|:h ! If I would give up to them, and let 
 them take the^r /own cpurse ? I might get #?P n g w ^ n them ; but the 
 moment; that I cros,s their pgth, they 'are ready to deny |he truth, 
 and to depart from me ; but I wjU chasten the rebellious,. }f I 
 had never spoken to them, they could but do as they are $piqg. 
 I suppose that they think that they will accomplish their own ends^ 
 and then, if they have time to spare afterwards, they will attend tq 
 
COMMANDING THE SAINTS TO SOUTH WEBER. 93 
 
 me. I can get plenty of such servants as those. If I have men 
 to assist me, I want those who will hearken to my words and obey 
 them. 
 
 4. And as concerning those people who have obeyed the ful- 
 ness of my gospel, and who are scattered abroad among mine 
 enemies, it is my will that they should gather up to this place as 
 soon as they can do so conveniently. If they cannot get houses, 
 let them get tents. And they must come as well prepared with 
 food as they can be, that they may not be any more burdensome 
 to others than possible. If any of my people have surplus property, 
 let them sell it for wheat and other useful provisions, that they may 
 have a sufficiency to live upon until I place fresh means in their 
 hands ; and if they will do as I command them, they shall not 
 lack for the common necessaries of life ; for I will clear the way 
 for them in time to give them a fresh supply of necessary means. 
 I call upon all those who profess to live by every word that proceeds 
 from my mouth to hearken to this revelation, and obey it, and all 
 will be well with them ; and if they do not, I will chasten them. 
 And I testify unto you, O ye saints, that I have given this revela- 
 tion unto my servant Joseph. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING RICHARD COOK AND 
 JOHN PARSON. 
 
 No. 66. WEBER, UTAH, May 1510, 1861. 
 
 i. LET them hearken unto my words, which are quick and 
 powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword, and all will be well with 
 them. Let them know that I am not displeased with them. Their 
 intentions are pure before me. They think that I am severe with 
 them, when I am not. When I am cutting down those false 
 principles that exist in the world, they think that I am cutting 
 them down. It is necessary that they should understand me 
 aright. I shall never reprove them, only when they stand in need 
 of it. My yoke is easy, and my burden is light. I do not mean 
 to break up the feelings of men without a cause. They have done 
 well under the circumstances which have existed. I have now 
 
94 RICHARD COOK AND JOHN PARSON. 
 
 given the fulness of the holy priesthood unto men, and these keys 
 of knowledge cannot be tested by anything that now exists upon 
 the earth ; but all things shall be tried by them, and I will make 
 the world understand them. 
 
 2. If I raise up a prophet, it is my business to back him up, 
 and recommend him to the world. He cannot be tried by the 
 testimony of inspired writers. The greater cannot be tried by the 
 lesser ; and the greatest tries all things. All things that ever have 
 been written by inspired men are swallowed up in that which is 
 perfect; but, at present, and until I come out in power, it is 
 necessary to assist the judgment of men by bringing forth all the 
 testimony that can be produced from the writings of inspired men, 
 in order to prove to the world that the holy priesthood is now 
 given to men in its fulness. When I shall have come out in 
 power, all the world will be satisfied of the mission of my servant 
 Joseph. I cannot do all things at once. I must work gradually. 
 All things pertaining to the salvation of man will be brought about 
 in due time. Therefore, let my people be comforted, and know 
 that I am with them. I am he who holds in nis hands the destinies 
 of all men ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE FAITHLESS CHASTENED. 
 
 No. 67. WEBER, UTAH, May lyth, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am he who shuts, and no one opens ; and who 
 opens, and no one shuts ; and I have decreed a judgment upon 
 this people. Oh, how they aggravate me with their follies and 
 unbelief! How long can I bear with them? Not long. Al- 
 though I have spoken and revealed all heights of both glory and 
 exaltation, and even keys of knowledge which have been hid from 
 the earth for many thousand years ; yet they will turn round and 
 deny those things. There are those among these people who have 
 been baptized into the fulness of my gospel who have denied the 
 revelations which I have given, and they are using their influence 
 to destroy others ; and until they shall have humbled themselves, 
 I have rejected them ; and if they do not speedily do so, I will cut 
 
THE FAITHLESS CHASTENED. 95 
 
 them off the earth. They shall know that I have spoken ; for, if I 
 cannot make them hear and obey my words, I can make them 
 feel my wrath. Because I have not yet come out in power, they 
 take the advantage of me, and trample my words under their feet 
 as a thing of naught. There are those who think I never shall 
 come out of my hiding place to cut off mine enemies ; but they 
 may rest themselves satisfied upon that matter. Let them prepare 
 themselves for it. I cannot make people understand it now ; but 
 they will understand it when it comes. If they could understand 
 it now, it would be an advantage to them. It will come suddenly, 
 and but few will be prepared for it. 
 
 2. I am under an obligation to these people to save as many 
 of them alive as possible. In order to do this, I have commenced 
 an organization, and appointed a gathering place for all those to 
 gather to who will gather, and who are worthy, that I may leave 
 them without excuse ; for, when I begin, I shall cut off everything 
 that stands in my way. But, you may ask the question : How 
 long shall we have to wait for you ? I will answer you as touch- 
 ing this matter. As soon as you have gathered a number of 
 people together, and taught them so that they can preach the 
 fulness of my gospel, then I will cut off everything that stands in 
 your way ; and, from that time, you shall no more have cause to 
 complain of me. It is hard for me to keep on good terms with 
 you, while I permit those men to live to torment you with their 
 wickedness. But I will pay you a visit shortly, and then you will 
 be satisfied. I am round about you continually by my holy 
 angels. You have nothing to fear. Let those people who are 
 gathering up to this place be of good courage, and know that I am 
 with them, and that I will fight their battles, for I delight in them. 
 They shall know that I am their deliverer, and that I am more 
 than sufficient for their enemies. 
 
 3. And now, behold, I say unto you, my* son, I will make 
 known unto you who they are, whom I intend to cut off from 
 among this people. I will cut off all those who have given up 
 their judgment to others whom I cannot penetrate with truth ; for 
 they have not hearkened unto me, or they would not have given 
 up their judgment to others. They know that I have placed a 
 curse upon those who trust in man, and refuse to hearken to me. 
 
96 THE FAITHLESS CHASTENED. 
 
 I have a duty to perform to mankind. It is my duty when I raise 
 up a prophet to back him up, and give to the world of mankind a 
 sufficient testimony of the truth of his mission ; and when I have 
 done this, I have fulfilled the law. And if I cannot, by so doing, 
 penetrate men, I can, according to the law by which I am 
 governed, cut them off the earth. And I will cut off all those 
 who embrace the fulness of my gospel, and afterwards turn away 
 from me. And I will cut off those, also, who have had the 
 opportunity to obey the fulness of my gospel, and have refused 
 to do so through fear. And who can stay my hand? I will not 
 be mocked. I shall not always bear with people. My words can- 
 not any longer be trampled under the feet of those who have had 
 the opportunity to obey my gospel. Those who rebel against me 
 where can they go to out of my hands ? When they have done 
 their worst, I can bring them to justice. They must understand 
 that I have rights as well as they have. When I have sent my 
 gospel to the earth, I have done my duty; and if people will 
 obey it, they will do their duty also; but if they will not, I am 
 bound by law to move them from the earth. Therefore, let all 
 those who wish to be saved in my kingdom, consider what their 
 duty is, and do it, that it may be well with them ; for if they do 
 not, I will bring upon them all the curses which I have promised. 
 I now add no more. I am the Sofa of the Eternal Father ; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE DESTRUCTION OF ENEMIES. FORETELLING 
 THE TRIUMPH OF THE SAINTS. 
 
 No. 68. WEBER, UTAH, May 25th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am come to 
 speak unto you, my servant Joseph, concerning the test which 
 will shortly commence at this place. It is now time for these my 
 people to prepare themselves, for they have not long to wait before 
 they will see it commence, and it is necessary that they should 
 understand me perfectly upon this matter. I shall suffer your 
 enemies to come up to this place, and they will seek to destroy 
 
THE DESTRUCTION OF ENEMIES. 97 
 
 both you and all those who believe in me ; and when they are 
 ready to strike the first blow, I will smite them all dead in one 
 minute. And I will, also, smite dead all those who have given 
 their sanction for those murderers to come against you. I can 
 and will penetrate them. 
 
 2. And as concerning that man who now stands at their head, 
 he cannot get out of my way. And I will settle with him for all 
 the blood which he has been instrumental in shedding, and I will 
 now avenge all the innocent blood that has been shed in this 
 Territory upon the heads of those who are guilty. Oh, how my 
 wrath is kindled against those murderers who are in the midst of 
 this people ! I sent a warning voice unto those chief shepherds 
 and promised to pardon all their sins, if they would but humble 
 themselves before me, but they would not. They chose to go on 
 destroying everything that came in their way, and they justify 
 themselves in all that they do. They believe that everything that 
 they do is right, and they shed innocent blood without feeling the 
 least guilt upon their consciences. All that they think about is 
 destroying everything that crosses their path. They care nothing 
 about the poor and innocent ; but they want to possess everything 
 themselves, and, if they cannot bring the rest of their fellow beings 
 to their terms, starve them to death. 
 
 3. And now, behold, I say unto you, that when I shall have 
 cut off out of your way all those whom I have before mentioned, 
 I shall send you up to the head-quarters of my Church, and you 
 shall have no trouble to take your place. And when those mur- 
 derers come up against you, I will ride up to you, and talk with 
 you. You will see that when I am needed I shall be on hand. 
 But I will not plant my feet upon the earth at this time. You 
 have nothing to fear, for I am always with you. Satan seeks to 
 afflict you, and to destroy you ; but you shall ride over him, and 
 bring his power to the ground. 
 
 4. And as concerning these people who have obeyed the 
 fulness of my gospel, and who have not, as yet, gathered up to 
 this place, let them hearken unto me. It is my will that they 
 should gather up here as soon as they can, or they will be too late. 
 And I will not protect those who will not hearken to my words. 
 And lo, I come quickly to their deliverance. I am he who holds 
 the keys of death and hell; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
98 ALL THINGS ARE REGULATED BY LAW. 
 
 ALL THINGS ARE REGULATED BY LAW. 
 
 No. 69. WEBER, UTAH, June 2nd, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he who moves forth in the midst of dark- 
 ness, and the darkness comprehendeth him not. And I am come 
 to speak unto you according to your request. 
 
 2. Why are you so faithless in me? You know that I am 
 continually with you. I am continually watching over you, both 
 by day and night ; yet you are afraid to trust yourself in my care. 
 You do not wish me to let the enemies of my people come up 
 against them ; but you wish that I would cut them off before they 
 reach this place. You think that if I allow your enemies to come 
 up here, both you and this people will be running a great hazard of 
 your lives. I have told you before that if I act according to the law 
 I cannot strike the first blow; and I cannot deviate from law. I 
 am as much bound by law as you are. If I should suffer your ene- 
 mies to come upon you, and upon this people, and slay you all, I 
 should have to bear the blame ; I should break the law by which I 
 am governed ; and this I cannot do. According to the law of heaven 
 I am bound to protect you. It is ordained in heaven that you 
 shall never be slain ; but that you shall live until your mission is 
 ended. Your mortal body shall be renewed, and you shall have 
 the power over death. You shall not die until you have entirely 
 done your work. 
 
 3. As concerning the healing of the sick, it is necessary that 
 my people should be very faithful and hearken to the dictates of 
 my holy messengers ; and if they will do this, my holy angels will 
 continually surround them to direct their footsteps, and to heal 
 them when they are sick. My people should attend to their 
 secret prayers. They must be faithful to me, if they expect to 
 receive my blessings. If they are not faithful, I will deliver them 
 into the hands of the destroyer, and he will afflict them. I will 
 not suffer that my people shall now live as they have done hereto- 
 fore. I have now committed the fulness of the holy priesthood 
 to the earth ; and where I have given much, I shall also require 
 much. I will not be trifled with now. , 
 
 4. When I look down upon the people I am pained ; for I 
 
ALL THINGS ARE REGULATED BY LAW. 99 
 
 see among them those whom I sent from my presence to the earth 
 to assist me such as might have been a blessing to their fellow 
 creatures but who are now good for nothing. Tfrey suffer them- 
 selves to be held by the chains of the devil ; and they do not exert 
 themselves in the least to come out from under his power. I have 
 opended the way for them to come out if they would exert them- 
 selves to do so. I have commenced an organization, and I shall 
 call upon all those who wish to be saved to come unto me ; but 
 if they will not, I shall be clear of their blood. There are a num- 
 ber of high priests whom I have sent down to the earth to fill 
 responsible missions ; and now, when I need them to assist me, I 
 can do nothing with them ; but I have put their names down. I 
 will not spare one of them alive ; for, in my heart, I do despise 
 them. I can find men when they are moved out of the way. I 
 will take the poor of my people, even those who have been 
 despised, and I will make them the chief men in my kingdom ; but 
 the proud and the haughty I will stamp under my feet. Oh, how 
 the children of men have aggravated me with their wickedness ! 
 I could scarcely ever place a little authority upon men but they 
 destroyed themselves. Even since the days of Adam to the 
 present time I have been constantly aggravated by the children of 
 men. I have never had perfect satisfaction from them. They 
 would either be at one thing or another laboring against me to 
 wound my feelings ; but my time has now come, and I will make 
 a slaughter among them. I will give unto you no more at this 
 time ; but I will shortly speak unto you again. Let this suffice for 
 the present. I am the Son of the Eternal Father; even Jesus 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 TO THE PROPHET JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 No. 70. WEBER, UTAH, June i2th, 1861. 
 
 i. IT is necessary that you should know my will concerning 
 this people. Why are you so fretful? You lay many charges 
 against me for neglect of duty towards you. You consider that I 
 am very distant with you, and that, in this thing, I am blamable. 
 
100 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 You consider, also, that you hold the full keys of the holy priest- 
 hood, as well as I do ; and that on this account, you are entitled 
 to the blessing* of beholding my presence. You consider that I 
 have laid upon you the burden of this entire people, and that you 
 will have to do your duty, whether I do mine or not. You seem 
 to think that I am allowed to run at loose ends ; and that, because 
 I have the power, I oppress you. You say that I will not do the 
 least thing to console you. You consider that I have never cut off 
 any of your enemies ; and that there is difficulty in getting me to 
 commence. You forget that I have told you that I do not want 
 to disturb the calm that exists among this people, until I am ready 
 to break them up. I have told you before that I am as much 
 bound by law as you are ; and if I fail to do my duty, I shall have 
 to bear the blame. I cannot run at loose ends any more than you 
 can. I do not take delight in oppressing you. I have told you 
 before that you have nothing to fear. 
 
 2. As I have said unto you before, so I say unto you again, if 
 I come unto you when my presence is needed, is not that suf- 
 ficient? You say in you feelings, No. Then what would you have 
 me to do to satisfy you? You say, in your feelings, that you wish 
 me to come and show myself to you now. You say, also, that I 
 feel myself a very important character ; but that you have rights 
 as well as I have ; and that, as far as power is concerned, you are 
 entitled to every privilege that I am. I do not deny this. I know 
 that you hold all the keys of knowledge that I hold, and that, as 
 far as the priesthood is concerned, you are entitled to all the 
 privileges that I am. But you charge me falsely wherein you say 
 that I feel myself an important character, and that I am above your 
 society. Then you may ask, Why do I not make my appearance 
 to you? Because it is not necessary for me to do so, until your 
 enemies come up against you. I will come then and cut off every- 
 thing that opposes you, according to my former promises. You 
 know that you are placed in a position where you have to exercise 
 faith in my promises it cannot b e avoided. I do not take delight 
 in oppressing you. I have always acted according to the celestial 
 law by which I am governed ; and when you blame me, you do it 
 unjustly. You know that I have not made the laws; neither can 
 I change them. If I act according to the law, am I not justified? 
 
TO THE PROPHET. IOI 
 
 What think you? If so, cease your complaints. I cannot run at 
 loose ends, any more than you can. You think that I have tied 
 your hands so that you have no power to control this people. 
 When you need the power, you shall have it. I will not deny you 
 anything that you stand in need of. I will give unto you the rod 
 as soon as you are ready to use it. I have it and I will bring it 
 unto you, and place it in your hand in time for you to use it. 
 You have desired to see me and the host of warriors that I have 
 under my command. You know that I have shown many of them 
 unto you at different times. You are not ignorant of their exist- 
 ence. You know to your satisfaction that they do exist, and what 
 more do you wish to know concerning them? If I were to satisfy 
 you, I should have to put myself to a great deal of unnecessary 
 trouble. I have something else to do than to spend my time un- 
 necessarily to gratify your curiosity. My hands are so full of 
 business that I have no useless time to spend. Then why cannot 
 you be satisfied? You know that I am always with you. 
 
 3. Those chief shepherds boast of their wickedness. They 
 raise themselves up in the pride of their hearts, and flatter them- 
 selves that I shall never visit them ; but their time is short. I 
 shall soon be ready as soon as there is a certain number in the 
 new organization of my Church. I will then move both them and 
 their seed off the earth in one day. And as I have said unto you 
 before, so I say unto you again, I will hold all your enemies off you 
 until I am ready to cut them off. Therefore, be patient, and 
 labor with diligence. And, behold, I come quickly to your 
 deliverance. I am the Son of the Eternal Father ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING WILIAM HARRIS, MARK 
 H. FORSCUTT AND JOHN E. JONES. 
 
 No. 71. WEBER, UTAH,' June i2th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am he that was, and is, and is to come, even 
 Jesus Christ. And I am come to speak unto you concerning the 
 priesthood. 
 
102 APPOINTING OFFICERS. 
 
 2. It is necessary that you should make some alterations in it 
 for the benefit of my people who are called to officiate in the two 
 priesthoods. 
 
 3. It is my will that you should place a president over the 
 priesthood of Aaron for the time being, and until the literal heir to 
 the presidency of that priesthood comes forth to fill his own place. 
 You shall place my servant William Harris over that priesthood. 
 And he shall call the priests of Aaron together, and instruct them 
 according to the revelations which I have given. And he shall 
 preside over that priesthood, having all power to act in that office ; 
 and you shall teach him his duty. And inasmuch as he will be 
 faithful to that calling, I will be with him continually, and the 
 spirit of revelation shall rest upon him. And I will reveal many 
 things to him, from time to time, concerning his duty. And he 
 shall call two counsellors to assist him : such as the spirit shall 
 dictate. 
 
 4. The priests of Aaron shall be admitted into the "School of 
 the Prophets," as heretofore. 
 
 5. And as concerning the high priesthood : It is necessary 
 that you should make some alterations in it also. You have 
 ordained but few to the apostleship as yet. You need to ordain 
 some more to assist you. 
 
 6. You shall ordain my servant, Mark Hill Forscutt, to the 
 office of an apostle, and I will be with him ; for his heart is up- 
 right before me. I have seen his affliction, and I have prepared 
 him for a mighty work. And he shall see no more distress ; for I 
 will abundantly supply him with that which is necessary for his 
 support in every respect. 
 
 7. You shall ordain my servant, John E. Jones, to the office 
 of an apostle, also ; for I am well pleased with him ; and he shall 
 preside over those of his own nation. And if he will hearken dili- 
 gently unto me, I will surround him continually with my holy 
 angels. And I will bless him with great stores of knowledge. 
 But few shall surpass him in wisdom ; and his latter days shall be 
 his best days. Therefore, let him hearken unto my words, and 
 act in the office to which I have called him, and all shall be well. 
 I will call others, in due time, when I need their assistance. 
 Therefore, let all be satisfied with what I have done. I am the 
 Son of the Eternal Father ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
CONCERNING DEBTS. 103 
 
 REVELATION CONCERING DEBTS. 
 
 No. 72. WEBER, UTAH, June i3th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am come to make known unto you my will con- 
 cerning mine enemies, by whom my people are surronnded. They 
 seek to lay snares to entrap those who have yielded obedience to 
 the fulness of my gospel, and thereby to gain power over them. 
 By this means they seek to bring up a mob against them. They 
 also bring up and charge my people with debts that are not honest 
 debts, in order to get a clue on them. They want to raise a mob 
 against my people, and yet have it said that they did it lawfully. 
 All the murders which have been committed, they have committed 
 under a pretense of law; and they seek to justify and clear them- 
 selves from blame for whatever they do. What can I do in this 
 case? They think that they will work while they have the chance, 
 and I shall let them work until they bring things up to a head. 
 They shall have their own way in this matter, and I will run side 
 by side with them, and make every turn which is necessary for the 
 benefit of my people ; for I will be round about my people con- 
 tinually, and overrule all things for their good. I shall let mine 
 enemies take their own course this right they claim and I shall 
 take mine ; and I will control all things aright. 
 
 2. It is my will that those people who have embraced the 
 fulness of my gospel should pay their honest debts.; but those 
 debts which are not honest they shall not pay any more. Neither 
 shall my people go to their courts of law any more ; for I will 
 defend their rights from this time henceforth. 
 
 3. And as concerning those of my people who have embraced 
 the fulness of my gospel, and who emigrated to this Territory in 
 the hand-cart companies, and who are poor they shall not pay 
 for their emigration; for I, the Lord, never dictated the starting of 
 a hand-cart company. That plan was devised by the devil to 
 destroy my saints ; and I will avenge the blood of all those who 
 have lost their lives in those hand-cart companies, upon those who 
 are guilty before me. 
 
 4. Mine enemies have committed all manner of iniquity, and 
 tried to make the people believe that I am at the head of it. If 
 
104 CONCERNING DEBTS. 
 
 it had not been for the poor and innocent among my people, I 
 would have moved them out of the way long since. But I am 
 bound by law to take a course to save alive as many of the inno- 
 cent as possible. They have been deceived by those who pro- 
 fessed to be my servants, and I am in duty bound to lay out my 
 plans to save them. I am working as fast as I can. I am send- 
 ing people up to you as fast as I can under existing circumstances, 
 and I am holding those from you who are corrupt. I will do all 
 that I can to assist you. 
 
 5. I am well pleased with the services of my servants Richard 
 Cook and John Parson. They have labored diligently for the 
 benefit of my people. Let them exercise a little patience, and the 
 long looked for blessing will come. 
 
 6. And as touching the healing of the sick, that blessing has 
 not yet been poured out upon my people to any great extent. I 
 am only, as it were, just commencing my work, and I can only 
 pour out my blessings upon my people as they are able to receive 
 them, and this I will continually do. I have to work gradually 
 and consistently. But the difficulty is this, some people want me 
 to do everything at once, not knowing that, if I were to do so, I 
 should destroy them. What can I do with people in order to 
 please them ? I will tell you what I will do. I will take my own ' 
 course, and all will have to be satisfied. I will not be dictated to 
 by mortal men upon the earth. It is their place to obey and not to 
 dictate. Let all my people learn their duties, and do them, and 
 leave mine to me. Some people are very fond of marking out 
 the course which they think I ought to walk in ; yet they do not 
 know how to do their own duty. My people should humble them- 
 selves, and learn of me. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he whose words are quick and 
 powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
ELECTING OFFICERS. THE UNFAITHFUL. 105 
 
 MANNER OF ELECTING OFFICERS. 
 
 No. 73. WEBER, UTAH, June i6th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, verily I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that it is 
 my will that you should read the name or names of those whom I 
 have called before the congregation of the saints, that they may 
 know my will in all business matters ; and when their name or 
 names shall have been read over, you shall rise up and call upon 
 the congregation to sanction what I have done, by repeating a 
 loud AMEN ; and none shall rise up in opposition to what I have 
 done, for I am the Lord, and my word shall be obeyed. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 CHASTENING THE REBELLIOUS AND UNFAITH- 
 FUL. COMMANDING THE RICH TO 
 ASSIST THE POOR. 
 
 No. 74. WEBER, UTAH, June 28th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Son of the Eternal Father, and I am 
 come to speak unto you, my servant Joseph, concerning this 
 people. 
 
 2. There are those among them who find fault with the reve- 
 lations which I have given. They think that those revelations do 
 not agree with each other ; but they think that they contradict 
 each other. And they seek to find fault where there is no fault. 
 Let them humble themselves before me, that I may pardon their 
 sins. If they would use their judgment, they would not give way 
 to such feelings. They can see my wonder-working hand made 
 bare before their eyes continually. They know that I am bringing 
 people up to them from all parts of the Territory. They can see 
 my spirit moving upon the people, and yet they will quibble about 
 a revelation which they do not understand. I have never made a 
 promise to them that I shall not fulfil to the very letter. 
 
 3. If the people would use their proper senses, I could do 
 with them ; but they will not If my people wish to do my will, 
 
106 THE UNFAITHFUL AND REBELLIOUS. 
 
 let them hearken to my words and obey them, and leave off their 
 follies, or I will chasten them severely ; for I will not always be 
 trifled with. If I want a people at all, I want a people who will 
 serve me in mine own appointed way. I will deliver out of the 
 hands of their enemies none but those who will hearken to my 
 words and obey them. I want none but the pure in heart. And 
 if those of whom I have now made choice will not serve me 
 acceptably, I will cast them off, as I have done the old church, 
 and seek another people who will serve me. 
 
 4. It is my will that those who are rich among my people 
 should feed the poor and destitute among them ; for I will that 
 none shall go hungry or destitute of clothing. 
 
 5. There are those, also, among my servants, who oppose my 
 servant whom I have called to hold the keys of my kingdom, which 
 thing is displeasing in my sight. It is my business to dictate him 
 in his course ; therefore, let all others hearken to his words, and 
 obey them, and not dictate him. I will dictate him myself. I 
 will lead him aright ; none need to fear. Whosoever opposes him, 
 opposes me ; for I am with him in all his movements among my 
 people. 
 
 6. There are those, also, among these people, who think that I 
 shall not come out of my hiding place to deliver them before their 
 substance is wasted. They fear that I shall lead them into dif- 
 ficulty, and leave them there. When did I ever lead any people 
 into trouble, who served me with all their hearts? Never. I have 
 never failed, as yet, to fulfil my words to men upon the earth. If 
 people are satisfied that I have spoken, they may rest assured that 
 my words will be fulfilled. Have I ever spoken to them through 
 my servant Joseph? I answer, Yes. All the revelations which he 
 has written, I have given unto him, and all the promises which have 
 been made unto my people through the revelations which I have 
 given, I will fulfil them to the very .letter, for I have made them. 
 Therefore, let my people trust in me, and I will supply their needs 
 in every respect. 
 
 7. And as touching the reaping of the crops, it is necessary 
 that those who are the chief acting officers under the fulness of the 
 holy priesthood, should know my will concerning them upon that 
 matter. When I called them, I called them to preach my gospel, 
 
THE UNFAITHFUL AND REBELLIOUS. 1 07 
 
 and to do nothing else ; but they would not hearken to me, for 
 they sought to take their own course. When I called mine 
 ancient apostles, I commanded them to leave their worldly em- 
 ployments, and follow me, and they did so, and continued faithful 
 all their days. Oh, that I had men to assist me now, as faithful 
 as they were ! They thought but little of their lives. But now, 
 when I call men, I cannot prevail upon them to leave all and 
 follow me. Their minds are almost continually upon their worldly 
 substance. They would be my servants, if I would let them have 
 their own way. But if they cannot place sufficient confidence in 
 me to trust themselves in Tny care, they cannot be mine apostles. 
 No man can hold my gospel in one hand, and the world in the 
 other. Therefore, if they wish to serve themselves, and cling to 
 the world, they are welcome to do so. But if they wish to forsake 
 all as mine ancient apostles did, then I will accept of them as 
 apostles, and uphold them in every respect. They can now decide 
 upon the course which they intend to take. That revelation which 
 I gave, stating that my people must not put in their crops, was 
 given more particularly to them. I did not want them to waste 
 their time in that way ; but I wished them to study my gospel and 
 nothing else. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE FIRST COUNCIL OF THE CHURCH. 
 
 No. 75. WEBER, UTAH, June 29th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, verily I say unto you, rny servant Joseph, that 
 inasmuch as business is fast crowding upon you, it is necessary that 
 you should enter into some arrangements in order to prepare your- 
 self for it. 
 
 2. It is necessary that you should form a Council, consisting 
 of six members, for the time being ; and this Council shall decide 
 upon all cases of difficulty that exist among my people. It shall 
 be called the First Council of my Church; and I will make 
 known unto you whom you shall call as councillors. But, in due 
 
108 THE FIRST COUNCIL OF THE CHURCH. 
 
 time, the First Council shall consist of but three persons, namely, 
 the prophet and his two counsellors. You shall call this Council 
 together as often as it may be necessary to do so, and I will be 
 with you in your Council myself, and dictate you in all your move- 
 ments for the good of my people. And it is my will that my peo- 
 ple should hearken to the decision of this Council in all things ; 
 and, if they will do this, I will be with them. 
 
 3. My people should know that I have committed the fulness 
 of the holy priesthood to the earth ; and where I have given much, 
 I shall also require much. I will not be trifled with any longer by 
 the children of men. I wish my people to place their confidence 
 in me, and act well their part. Why should they be afraid of me, 
 inasmuch as I have never broken my word? They have more 
 need to be afraid of themselves, lest they should fail to do those 
 things which I require at their hands. 
 
 4. They say that they do not understand me when I do speak. 
 They know that, inasmuch as they had yielded obedience to the 
 fulness of my gospel, I commanded them to gather up to this 
 place; and I promised to supply their temporal needs. What 
 more do they want ? If I supply them with all that they need, 
 until I come out in power, is not that sufficient for them ? They 
 will have to place their confidence in me ; they cannot get out of 
 it ; therefore, they might as well reconcile themselves to their fate. 
 They will not gain anything by murmuring against me. Why 
 should people complain against me when I have always done my 
 duty ? I wish that men upon the earth would do their duty as 
 faithfully as I do mine. Oh, how men do sin against me by their 
 murmurings ! If they had the least cause of complaint against me 
 for neglect of duty towards them, I would willingly bear the blame ; 
 but they act unreasonably. 
 
 5. These people need not to think that I shall not come out 
 of my hiding place in time to deliver 4hem out of the hands of 
 their enemies; for I shall. If they would only rest upon my 
 word, I should be satisfied with them, I am controlling all things 
 aright. My people have nothing to fear; for I am all sufficient 
 for their enemies. I will lay a stumbling-block before those chief 
 shepherds, and they will stumble over it, and be destroyed. My 
 plans are laid for their overthrow. And there are those among 
 
COMMANDED TO COLLECT THE REVELATIONS. 109 
 
 these people, who have obeyed the fulness of my gospel, who will 
 stumble and be destroyed also, if they do not watch their foot- 
 steps; therefore, all my people should consider well the course 
 which they are taking, that it may be well with them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET COMMANDED TO COLLECT ALL 
 THE REVELATIONS. 
 
 No. 76. WEBER, UTAH, July 4th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he that shuts, and no one opens; and that 
 opens, and no one shuts. And I say unto you, my son, that there 
 are jars and contentions among those people who have yielded 
 obedience to the fulness of my gospel. They take the revelations 
 which I have given, and they contend with each other about the 
 meaning of Jhem. They keep up an uproar among my people, 
 and they are destroying themselves thereby. They know not what 
 they are doing. I am greatly displeased with those contentious 
 people. They seek to take their course in preference to the course 
 which I mark out for them. But, if they do not stop their con- 
 tentions, I will let the sword of my indignation fall suddenly upon 
 them, and I will cut many of them off the earth. They wish to 
 see me come out of my hiding place in power to destroy mine 
 enemies : but, if they do not humble themselves before me, and 
 cease their contentions, I will first come out in judgment upon 
 them. I have conferred upon them great blessings, and their 
 condemnation will be great. If they wish to do my will, let them 
 take the counsel of my servant whom I have called, and to whom 
 I have committed the keys of my kingdom ; and if they will do 
 this, all will be well with them. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, it is 
 my will that you shall gather in all the revelations which are 
 scattered among these people, and you shall keep them in your 
 own possession ; and if my people wish to hear the revelations 
 read which I have given, let them gather themselves together at 
 
110 COMMANDED TO OBEY THE HIGH COUNCIL. 
 
 seasonable times, and one shall be appointed to read for them, 
 that all things may go on in order, for I am the Lord, and I will 
 that all things shall be conducted in order in my Church. 
 
 3. There are also contentions among my people concerning 
 the reaping of their crops. They are greatly afflicted in their feel- 
 ings, and seem disposed ever to find something to contend about. 
 How long shall I bear with those who continue to murmur against 
 me ? Not long. I have rights as well as my people have ; and 
 when my rights are trampled upon, I can feel as well as they can. 
 Oh, that the children of men would act consistently and reason- 
 ably ! but they will not. As concerning the reaping of their crops, 
 I will speak unto my people again upon the subject, then they 
 will know more about it ; until then, let them rest satisfied, and all 
 will be well. 
 
 4. And inasmuch as I have appointed a High Council, con- 
 sisting of six members, it is my will that these, my people, should 
 uphold them in all their decisions ; for I am at the head of this 
 Council, and from it there can be no appeal. I will control this 
 Council myself; therefore, what they do, I do. I wall back up all 
 that they do. Nothing shall go wrong. Therefore, let my people 
 hearken to them in all things, and by so doing, they will hearken 
 unto me ; for whosoever upholds them, upholds me ; and whoso- 
 ever rebels against them, rebels against me ; for I am the Lord, 
 and I have chosen them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he who holds in his hands 
 the destinies of all men; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 NO RE-BAPTISM FOR BACKSLIDERS. 
 
 No. 77. WEBER, UTAH, July 6th, 1861. 
 
 i. IN answer to your prayer, I am come to speak unto you. 
 You are greatly afflicted with these people. There are rebellious 
 people among them, w T ho rise up against you, and sit in judgment 
 upon you. They are not willing to allow me to dictate you. They 
 think that they know what you ought to do. They are all in con- 
 
NO RE-BAPTISM FOR BACKSLIDERS. Ill 
 
 fusion, and my spirit is grieved with them ; and, if they do not 
 humble themselves before me, it will not abide with them. There 
 are, also, those among these people who do not believe in me. 
 They treat the revelations which I have given as a thing of naught, 
 and even laugh at them ; but when they have gone their length, I 
 will stop them. Because I have not yet come out in power, they 
 try to take the advantage of me. I do not delight in destroying 
 those that can be saved ; but when I am compelled to cut people 
 off in order to save them, I shall do so. Those who yield obe- 
 dience to the fulness of my gospel, and afterwards turn away from 
 me, can never be baptized again for the remission of their sins. 
 They must pay the penalty of death for their transgression. Wher- 
 ever they go, I will follow them, till the penalty is paid. They 
 cannot get out of my hands, for I do in my heart despise 
 traitors. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that it is my will that 
 you should strive to reconcile these people to me. If you can do 
 this, all shall be well with them ; but if you cannot yourself do 
 this, then I will come out in power to assist you. And I will cut 
 off all those that offend from among this people, and I will give 
 unto you the power to govern them. I do not delight in afflicting 
 you. You shall shortly see a change among these people to your 
 satisfaction. 
 
 3. And as I have said unto you on a former occasion, so I say 
 unto you again, you shall not suffer my servants who assist you to 
 destroy the sense of any revelation which I have given, or which 
 I shall hereafter give. They may have the privilege to correct 
 your spelling, but the sense of revelations they shall not destroy. 
 And behold, I say unto you, my servant, that you are not learned 
 after the manner of the world ; but you are ignorant of many 
 things which exist among men. I delight in plain and simple 
 language ; and on this account, I did not suffer you to receive an 
 education after the manner of the world. I have controlled you 
 from the day of your birth, and I have watched over you myself. 
 You were sent to the earth by the commandment of my Father, 
 and both I and my Father swore an oath of the holy priesthood, 
 in your presence, to uphold you, and to bring down all power 
 under your feet. 
 
112 COUNSELLED NOT TO SEEK REDRESS. 
 
 4. You are beloved above all men upon the earth ; for there is 
 none upon the earth like unto you for integrity of heart and 
 honesty of purpose, and I will make your words good. If my 
 people wish to save their lives, let them speedily humble them- 
 selves before me; if they do not, I will come out in judgment 
 upon them, and they will witness such sorrow as they have never 
 before witnessed. They had better think about what they are 
 doing before it will be too late^ in order that they may save their 
 lives. 
 
 I now give unto- you no more. I am he whose words are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE SAINTS COUNSELLED NOT TO SEEK REDRESS 
 EROM SOME OF THEIR ENEMIES. 
 
 No. 78. WEBER, UTAH, July loth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, it is necessary that you 
 should be very careful in dealing with mine enemies, for they are 
 prompted by men who are in authority; and those men who 
 prompted them, did so in order that they might have a cause to 
 come up against my people. But I will give them what they are 
 seeking for, and I will fight the battles of my people myself. I do 
 not wish them to fight with their enemies. Let my people guard 
 their property well. I wish to hold mine enemies off for a short 
 time ; yet, if my people will do as I command them, they will not 
 be the losers. They must not, in this case, lay violent hands 
 upon mine enemies ; but leave them in my hands, and I will 
 settle with them. And, in due time, I will restore to my people 
 all that they have lost by their enemies, and I will add a hundred- 
 fold to it. 
 
 2. They must not quibble about small things at this time; for 
 this is a day of great events. My people should know that mine 
 enemies will fight against me as long as I permit them to live, and 
 they rnust naturally expect a little trouble from them ; it is neces- 
 sary for them, that they may know the difference between good 
 
COUNSELLED NOT TO SEEK REDRESS. 113 
 
 and evil, and between light and darkness. They must expect 
 opposition in the world this cannot be avoided ; for while evil is 
 in the world, they will have to come in contact with it ; but, if 
 they will hearken diligently to me, not a hair of their heads shall 
 be hurt. 
 
 3. The time which I have appointed for the utter destruction 
 of mine enemies will soon come, and until that appointed time has 
 arrived, I will hold mine enemies as with an iron grasp, and they 
 shall not have the power to do a great deal of injury to my people 
 before I am ready to come out. 
 
 4. My people need not to fret about their situation, for I will 
 provide for them. I know what they need, and I will supply their 
 needs in every respect. My hand is not shortened any more -now 
 than it was when I delivered mine ancient covenant people ; and 
 as I was with them then, so I will be with my people now. 
 
 5. But they do not fully place their confidence in me ; they 
 give way to their feelings, and are filled with misgivings. When 
 people fail to place their confidence in me, they treat me as though 
 I was a deceiver ; they bring down my wrath upon them, and sin 
 grievously against me ; for I have never yet betrayed the confidence 
 of any person upon the earth. The'children of men treat me with 
 less confidence than they would a murderer, and they do not deal 
 as fairly with me as they do with each other. If a man upon the 
 earth be honest, they will, in a great many instances, give him 
 credit for his honesty ; But I, who never failed to fulfil my promises 
 to people upon the earth, am treated a"s a traitor. 
 
 6. Oh, how unprincipled the children of men are ! If I was 
 not merciful towards them, I should sweep them out of existence 
 in one minute ; but I have borne with them until my patience is 
 almost exhausted, and I will speedily destroy them. I will that 
 my people should humble themselves before me; for I do not 
 want to come out first against them. They should treat sacredly 
 the revelations which I have given, and live by every word that 
 proceeds from my mouth ; and if they will do this, I shall be well 
 pleased with them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Paternal 
 Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
ATONEMENT. 
 
 ATONEMENT. 
 
 No. 79. WEBER, UTAH, July i6th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he who shuts, and no one opens; and who 
 opens, and no one shuts ; even the life and light of the world. 
 And I am come to speak unto you concerning these my people. 
 Oh, how they have sinned against me ! They do not know how 
 to appreciate my blessings. When I confer blessings upon my 
 people they turn around upon me and insult me, and trample 
 them under their feet. Oh, how I despise those ungrateful people ! 
 If they do not forsake their sins, and turn unto me, I will cut them 
 off the earth ; and I will raise up another people who will ap- 
 preciate my blessings. 
 
 2. There are those among these people who are a stink in my 
 nostrils. They are not worthy of an existence upon the earth. 
 They are corrupt themselves, and from their own corrupt hearts 
 they judge me. They neither have confidence in me or in any- 
 thing else. Being corrupt themselves, they think that every other 
 person is corrupt also. But I will shortly visit them, and I will 
 follow them up, let them go wherever they may. There are those 
 among these people who are traitors to me. When they are with 
 my people, they profess to be my friends ; but when they meet 
 with mine enemies, they are of all mine enemies the most bitter. 
 After yielding obedience to the fulness of my gospel, they will 
 seek the company of mine enemies, and lie to them against me. 
 Oh, how I do despise them, for they bring trouble upon those that 
 are innocent. But my people are not all under this condemnation. 
 Many of them have sought to serve me with all their hearts ; but 
 others have brought evil upon them. If those traitojs and liars 
 wish to remain among my people, they had better stay their course; 
 or, if they do not, I will make a public example of them. 
 
 3. I shall not always take the innocent from among my people 
 to atone for the sins of the guilty ; but, when my people sin 
 grievously against me, either an atonement must be made for them 
 by the sacrifice of one who is free from sin, or they themselves 
 must be destroyed. And in this case, in order to make an atone- 
 ment for others, I have taken one who was free from sin. I was 
 
ATONEMENT. 115 
 
 compelled either to do this, or to cut off the earth many of these 
 people, for they have sinned grievously against me. And I con- 
 sider that it was better for me to take one to make an atonement 
 for those who had *sinned, than to cut many off. I considered, 
 also, that I would try them again, and see what they would do. 
 My people should consider that they have yielded obedience to 
 the fulness of my gospel ; and where I have given much, I shall, 
 also, require much. My people should attend to their secret 
 prayers, and seek me with all their hearts ; and, if they will do 
 this, I will be found by them. They must be diligent in all their 
 pursuits, and not neglectful of their duties; but they should be 
 faithful in all things. 
 
 4. And as concerning my servant Abraham Taylor, whose 
 child I have taken, he should know that I have taken it to make 
 an atonement for others. If I had not done this, I must have 
 destroyed many souls. Therefore, let him be reconciled unto me, 
 and know that I have done it for the best, and I will make up 
 unto him for his loss ; and, through his faithfulness unto me, I 
 will be with him unto the end. Therefore, let all be satisfied with 
 what I have done. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he that was, and is, and is to come ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 ADVISING THE PURCHASE OF A TRUMPET. - 
 THE REMOVAL OF TRAITORS. 
 
 No. 80. WEBER, UTAH, July i8th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, verily I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that 
 inasmuch as the people are fast gathering to this place, and it is 
 troublesome to you, at times, to gather them together when their 
 presence is needed, it is necessary that you should have some 
 means adopted whereby to gather them together with less diffi- 
 culty ; and in order to do this, you must purchase a trumpet ; and 
 when you wish to gather my people together, you must sound it. 
 And when my people hear the sound of the trumpet, they shall 
 gather themselves together according to your request ; and, by 
 doing this, it will save you much trouble. 
 
Il6 THE SOWING AND REAPING OF CROPS. 
 
 2. I have looked down upon you, and I have seen your sickness 
 and affliction. You are afflicted by those traitors who have 
 yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel, and who are now 
 mine enemies ; but I am on their track, and you shall not long be 
 afflicted by them. I have heard your prayer, and I will shortly 
 answer it. I despise a traitor as much as you do. And I will 
 remove every obstacle out of your way, so that you shall have no 
 cause to complain of my neglect of duty towards you. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE SOWING AND REAPING OF CROPS. 
 
 No. 8 1. WEBER, UTAH, July 2oth, 1861. 
 
 1. LET MY people hearken unto my words, which are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword, and all will be well 
 with them. 
 
 2. It is necessary that they should understand me aright when 
 I speak unto them. When I spoke unto them concerning the 
 sowing and reaping of their crops, they did not understand me 
 aright. I spoke, in the first place, unto those men whom I had 
 chosen to hold a place in the apostleship. I called upon them to 
 study my gospel, and to do nothing else ; but, at that time, they 
 did not hearken unto me ; but they sought to do their own will. 
 They had not sufficient confidence in me ; and for this I gave 
 unto them a rebuke. I told them that if they sowed, they should 
 not reap. I wished them to leave all their worldly affairs alone, 
 and devote all their time to the ministry ; for when I need their 
 assistance myself, I cannot allow them to dabble with the things 
 of the world ; but if they will do so in opposition to my command, 
 they cannot at the same time be mine apostles. 
 
 3. But those whom I have neither called to the apostleship, 
 nor to fill any other 'office in my Church, whereby the whole of 
 their time is taken up in my service, I will that they should follow 
 their employments until they are called. Let them prepare them- 
 selves for that which is coming upon them ; and, if they will do 
 
THE SOWING AND REAPING OF CROPS. I 17 
 
 this, I will, in due time, call them to fill honorable places in my 
 Church. They will shortly have enough to do in preaching my 
 gospel. 
 
 4. When I spoke about the crops, I spoke also unto those of 
 my people who had yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel, 
 who did not reside in this place ; but who were residing in other 
 parts of the Territory. I advised them not to plant their land. I 
 told them on this wise : that if they sowed their wheat, and planted 
 their land, they would have to leave it again, and would, con- 
 sequently, have their trouble for naught. 
 
 5. I also told my people to sell their surplus property, and 
 purchase wheat and other useful provisions ; but they have not 
 hearkened unto me in this thing. But they must purchase pro- 
 visions, for they will need them. There are people gathering here 
 from different parts of the Territory, and some of them have not 
 much provisions with them. My p'eople must feed those who are 
 hungry ; and if they do as I command them, I will furnish them 
 with fresh means by the time that they require them. But they 
 are afraid that I shall let them perish. They think that winter 
 will overtake them as they are now situated ; but they may trust 
 themselves in my care. I can deliver them in one day, and can 
 place everything which they need in their hands. And unto those 
 who are faithful unto me, I will give cities that they never built, 
 and vineyards that they never planted ; and, in due time, they 
 shall be the richest of all people upon the earth ; for I will deliver 
 all things into their hands. 
 
 6. If my people would place their confidence in me, I could 
 work wtth them ; but, through their lack of confidence, they afflict 
 both themselves and me. They often look on the dark side, and 
 thereby invite trouble ; give way to misgivings, and afflict them- 
 selves without a cause. O ye people who profess my name, what 
 do you think about me? Do you think that I am false? Have I 
 ever broken my word? Do you not see me at work? Open your 
 eyes, and look about you ! For, behold, my spirit is moving upon 
 all the heirs of salvation who are in this Territory, and, even now, 
 there are hundreds who are partially believing in me. Did I ever 
 fail to deliver a people when I set myself about it? Let mankind 
 answer. And if I never did fail to deliver a people when I set 
 
Il8 THE SOWING AND REAPING OF CROPS. 
 
 myself about it, why should my people look upon me with such sus- 
 picion? It is hard to deal with them. They look for evil where 
 there is none ; but they must make up their minds to place their 
 confidence in me, and act their part, or they will have no claim 
 upon me. If my people have a claim upon me to deliver them 
 out of the hands of all their enemies, have I not a claim upon them 
 to serve me in mine own appointed way ? Yes, this is just. I do 
 not ask any more at their hands towards me than I am willing to 
 do for them. If they" will serve me in mine own appointed way, 
 I will deliver them according to my word ; but if they will not do 
 this, they will have no claim upon me. I have rights as well as they 
 have ; therefore, let them meet me upon equal ground. I do not 
 require impossibilities at their hands. All that I wish them to do, 
 is to live by every word that proceeds from my mouth. My yoke 
 is easy, and my burden is light. My people must decide upon that 
 which they are going to do ; and, if they decide to serve me, let 
 them hearken to the words that proceed from my mouth and obey 
 them. 
 
 7. And as concerning those who have yielded obedience to 
 the fulness of my gospel, and who afterwards turn away from me, 
 I will visit them with sudden death. I will not spare the life of 
 one of them. There are some people against whom I have set my- 
 self now, and I will shortly overthrow them. They go about from 
 one place to another, seeking to discourage all those who will sub- 
 mit to be talked to by them. I am in duty bound to tell them 
 before I cut them off, and give them a chance to reform if they 
 wish to do so ; if not, I will shortly destroy them ; for they are 
 not worthy to live upon the earth. 
 
 8. And as concerning the citizens of this place who had put 
 in their crops before they obeyed the fulness of my gospel, it is 
 my will that they should reap them. 
 
 9. And as concerning my people who have moved to this 
 place from afar, they need not to trouble themselves about their 
 hay ; for I will provide both for them and for their cattle. They 
 need not to trouble themselves about the winter. They may 
 behold heart rending scenes before that time. They will shortly 
 see that which they arc wishing to see. Let them humble them- 
 selves before me; for they do not understand that which lies 
 before them. 
 
WILLIAM KENDALL AND MOSES BURNS. 119 
 
 i o. It is my will, also, that those people now scattered abroad , 
 who believe in the fulness of my gospel, should gather up to this 
 place as soon as they can, or they will have trouble to get here ; 
 for they will meet with great opposition. Therefore, it is neces- 
 sary that they should gather up here while they can do so without 
 much difficulty. 
 
 ii. As long as my people obey me in all things, I will uphold 
 them in all things. Therefore, they now know what I require at 
 ther hands. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he whose words are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING WILLIAM KENDALL 
 AND MOSES BURNS. 
 
 No. 82. WEBER, UTAH, July 22nd, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am come to speak 
 unto you concerning those of mine enemies who are among these 
 people who have yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel, 
 and who are now my most bitter enemies ; and who are going 
 about from place to place seeking to destroy the pure in heart. 
 They are as serpents which are filled with poison. They cast a 
 deadly influence upon everything that comes within their power. 
 They are false hearted. They are neither true to me nor to any- 
 thing else. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I say unto you, that I have looked down 
 upon W T illiam Kendall and Moses Burns, and I have sealed up 
 their destiny. They do not believe in me at all. They are 
 infidels, and would deny the sight of their own eyes ! They are 
 in the possession of such delusive spirits as those which lead men 
 to deny me ; and if my people are not aware of those spirits, they 
 will lead them down to destruction. Those men have given way 
 to those false spirits until they have obtained full possession of 
 them, and they cannot be reclaimed in mortality. They have 
 sinned unto death, and I will shortly destroy them. 
 
120 WILLIAM KENDALL AND MOSES BURNS. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that you 
 shall separate them from the congregation of the saints, and deliver 
 them up into my hands, and I will settle with them. And you 
 shall warn all my people against that spirit. 
 
 4. Let my people humble themselves before me ; for they know 
 not the dangers to which they are exposed. They must be steady- 
 minded, and leave off all loud laughter. This is not a time for 
 trifling ; but it is time for deep reflection ; a time when my people 
 need to place their full confidence in me, in order that they may 
 be able to stand. 
 
 5. And, behold, I say unto you, that there are others Who are 
 departing from me, besides those whom I have mentioned. They 
 have, also, given way to delusive spirits; and if they do not 
 speedily repent, and retrace their steps, I will separate them from 
 the congregation of the saints, and destroy them. My people will 
 either have to live by every word that proceeds from my mouth, or 
 perish. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ, the Son of the 
 Eternal Father. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE WORK OF TRAITORS. DAY OF GOD'S 
 VENGEANCE. 
 
 No. 83. WEBER, UTAH, February 24th, 1861. 
 
 1. IN answer to your prayer, I say unto you, lift up your head 
 and rejoice, and know that I am with you ! 
 
 2. Why should you disturb yourself about those false men 
 whom I have cast out from among my people? I have done it 
 for a wise purpose in myself, and this you will see hereafter. You 
 need not trouble yourself about the injury which they are able to 
 do to my people, for I will take care of them ; and those men will 
 not injure those whose hearts are upright before me. They will 
 only draw out from among my people those who are corrupt like 
 unto themselves. It is necessary that they should do this, for I 
 have a place for all corrupt-hearted people to fill, and I will make 
 them all serve me. Those men shall do the work which I have 
 
THE WORK OF TRAITORS. 121 
 
 appointed them to do, and I have appointed them to gather out 
 of my Church all liars and hypocrites who are like unto them- 
 selves. And when they have done this, I shall have nothing more 
 for them to do upon the earth, and, in one minute, I will sweep 
 them off. Their presence will not trouble you long ; for they will 
 soon finish the work which I. have appointed them to do. 
 
 3. And, behold, I say unto you, that I will send the people 
 unto you as fast as I can do so ; for I am at work with my people 
 who are scattered abroad throughout this Territory, and I will not 
 let them rest until that which I require at their hands is accom- 
 plished. They shall know that- 1 am the Lord, and that I have a 
 claim upon them, which claim requires them to do my* work. I 
 shed my blood to save them, and, either living or dead, I will 
 make them walk up to their duty and do it; for I have not 
 shed my blood in vain. I will undeceive thousands of them at 
 once. 
 
 4. Oh, how foolish my people are ! They will submit to all 
 manner of wickedness, and abomination, and charge me with it, 
 and say that I am at the head of it. They appear to know noth- 
 ing about the principles of right and wrong. They are entirely 
 given up to wickedness. Oh, how hard it is for me to bear with 
 them ! But the day of my power and vengeance will soon come, 
 and then I will destroy mine enemies. You long for that day to 
 come that you may be satisfied. You have suffered much from 
 your enemies ; but I will pay them off at once. I long for that 
 day to come as much as you do, for I am weary of bearing with 
 those wicked people who call themselves after my name ; but, as I 
 am governed by law from which I cannot deviate, I am compelled 
 to wait until the appointed time has come. Therefore, I say unto 
 you, my son, be content with the way in which I am working, and 
 all shall be well. Seek to strengthen yourself for the work that 
 lies before you; for it is a great work, and leave these people in my 
 hands, and I will settle all difficulties with them ; this is my busi- 
 ness. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
122 THE COMET. 
 
 CONCERNING THE COMET. 
 
 No. 84. WEBER, UTAH, August 3rd, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he that moveth forth in the midst of dark- 
 ness, and the darkness comprehendeth him not; even Jesus 
 Christ. 
 
 2. And I am come to speak unto you, my son, concerning 
 that comet which has astonished the world of mankind. In a 
 revelation which I gave unto my servant Joseph Smith, I spoke 
 concerning it. I told him that a great sign should appear in the 
 heavens, and that all people should see it; that another angel 
 should sound his trump both long and loud, and that all nations 
 should hear it. 
 
 3. And now, behold, I testify unto all mankind, that this comet, 
 which has twice made its appearance in the heavens, is that sign 
 which I spoke of to my servant Joseph Smith, which sign was to 
 appear in the heavens previous to the sounding of the seventh 
 trump by the seventh angel, whose mission is to throw- down the 
 Roman Catholic power, and to bring down all enemies under his 
 feet. 
 
 4. When this comet made its appearance the first time, it 
 denoted the expiration of the sixth thousand years ; the raising 
 up of that prophet who is to restore all things ; the ushering in of 
 the millennial reign ; the opening of the seventh seal, wherein the 
 curtain that has hidden the eternal worlds from the view of mortals 
 should be rolled up, and the face of the Lord should be unveiled. 
 It is the seventh angel's star ; and the tail attached to it is a repre- 
 sentation of the army of heaven that is to attend the mission of 
 the seventh angel even to go before him from conquering to 
 conquer. 
 
 5. When this comet made its appearance the first time, I had 
 just commenced to raise up my servant, the prophet ; but when it 
 appeared the second time, I had raised him up. I have now 
 fully prepared him for his work, and I am now ready to give unto 
 him the power of his office, as soon as that power is needed. 
 Therefore, let all mankind know that I have raised up that prophet, 
 even that deliverer, who was to come out of Zion to turn away 
 
THE SOLDIERS. 123 
 
 ungodliness from the house of Israel ; even from mine elect. And 
 it shall come to pass that I will cut off from among the people all 
 who will not obey him. 
 
 6. Let my people trust fully in me, and I will be their never- 
 failing friend. Without my help they can do nothing. Let them 
 be reconciled to me, and serve me ; for this is the best thing that 
 they can do. They need not to think that I am a hard master, 
 for I am not. I am continually working for their benefit. Let 
 them serve me in mine own appointed way, and all will be well 
 with them. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he that was, and is, and is to come ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 CONCERNING THE SOLDIERS THAT CAME INTO 
 UTAH TERRITORY. 
 
 No. 85. WEBER, UTAH, August 3rd, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHQLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, even the Son of the 
 Eternal Father. And I am about to speak unto you concerning 
 those soldiers who came into this Territory. 
 
 2. Because of the wickedness of those people who called them- 
 selves after my name, I brought that army up to this place to rule 
 over them, that I might stay the murders which they were com- 
 mitting; for, of all people, those who profess my name are the 
 most wicked. They would shed innocent blood without feeling 
 the least guilt upon their consciences ; hence, I brought that army 
 upon them, in order to stay their course, until I raised up a prophet 
 to take the reins of government into his own hands ; for, at that 
 time, I did not want to come out of my hiding place to destroy 
 the murderers from among those people who profess my name. 
 If I had done this, I should have caused an uproar among the 
 people too soon even before I had raised up a prophet to lead 
 my people. And I wished to keep everything as still as I could, 
 until I should be ready to come out upon mine enemies ; and, on 
 this account, I brought that army up to this place to rule over this 
 people. That army has, therefore, done the work which I set it 
 to do. 
 
124 THE SOLDIERS. 
 
 3. I will make all men serve me whether they will, or not 
 they cannot help it ; for I shall turn them hither and thither at my 
 own pleasure. My ways are not as the ways of man, nor my 
 thoughts as his thoughts. I am governed by an unchangeable 
 celestial law, and mortal men do not know anything about that 
 law. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that 
 I have dispensed with that army which I brought up to this place, 
 having done with them ; and I will now take the old church into 
 mine own hands, and I will see if I cannot govern it. 
 
 5. I have now removed everything out of their way, and they 
 can come up against you whenever they are ready. I am ready 
 now. Let my people make themselves ready ; for they will soon 
 see that which they are wishing to see. Let them humble them- 
 selves greatly before me ; for they need humility. They need to 
 fortify themselves against every evil, for the day of their deliverance 
 is at hand. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, hold 
 yourself in readiness for your enemies, for they will soon come up 
 against you. And I, also, will come up to you, and you shall see 
 me to your satisfaction. I will remove all fear both from you and 
 from all those people who trust in me. As I have said unto you 
 before, so I say unto you again, I will make a slaughter among 
 your enemies. They shall not stand in your pathway two minutes 
 after they are ready to strike the first blow. I shall try them to 
 see what they will do ; and when they make the attempt to kill, I 
 will destroy them according to a celestial law. Rest yourself con- 
 tented, and know that I am with you continually. I will shortly 
 speak unto you again, and I will make known unto you all things 
 necessary to prepare you for that which is coming upon you. You 
 need not, therefore, to be cast down at the prospect which lies before 
 you. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
CONCERNING REVELATIONS . 125 
 
 THE SENSE OF THE REVELATIONS MUST REMAIN 
 UNCHANGED. 
 
 No. 86. WEBER, UTAH, August 8th, 1861. 
 
 1. A REVELATION given by Jesus Christ concerning the cor- 
 recting of revelations, and other articles given by him. 
 
 2. Let those, my servants, who are engaged in this work, 
 hearken unto me, and I will make known my will unto them upon 
 this matter. It is my will that they should run in the same channel 
 with me. They must follow the pattern which I have given, and 
 shall hereafter give : the sense they shall not destroy. They must 
 take up subject after subject after me. In some instances my ser- 
 vants study to imitate the work and wisdom of men. If I had 
 wanted my servant Joseph educated after the manner of men, I 
 could have placed him in a position for it ; but this I did not 
 want. The wisdom of the world is foolishness in my sight. I 
 delight in plain and simple language that all can understand ; but 
 those, my servants, say that I do not speak plainly, so that I can 
 be understood. They should know that I speak in half sentences. 
 I speak plain enough for those to understand who are enlightened 
 by my spirit. I can make all those understand me whom I wish 
 to. I do not want all- people to understand. Those things that 
 belong to me are spiritually discerned. But those, my servants, 
 study the things of the world, and how they can turn things out of 
 their hands to please the wise and learned among men. Their 
 minds are fixed upon the world and its wisdom. 
 
 3. It is my business to make people understand me ; and I w^ll 
 do it. It is not my will that any people should understand me 
 but those who are heirs to the resurrection ; these I will take care 
 of myself. 
 
 4. Those, my servants, wish to know what I require at their 
 hands. They are at liberty to correct the spelling of my servant 
 Joseph, for he does not spell correctly, and to divide the revela- 
 tions into paragraphs ; and in cases where he has made use of a 
 wrong word to convey the right sense, in all such cases as this, 
 they may have the privilege to substitute suitable words in their 
 places. And, again, in cases where a word, or two, needs adding 
 
126 . CONCERNING REVELATIONS. 
 
 to render the sense more plain,, they may have the privilege to add 
 such words ; but they rmrst be very careful in this case. They 
 must be very humble and prayerful before me ; and if they will 
 do this, I will be with them to dictate them. They need the 
 spirit of revelation with them continually when they are writing 
 those sacred things ; and that spirit will not attend them if they 
 are not very faithful. They give way to too much light-minded- 
 ness and laughter. They trifle too much. They let themselves 
 loose to be operated upon, betimes, by false spirits, which afflict 
 them. They do not understand the spirits that operate upon 
 them. They should be lowly in heart, and of solemn counte- 
 nances ; for they cannot fully understand the destruction that is 
 about to come upon the people. If they could see it before hand, 
 as it will be, a laugh would not come out of their mouths. They 
 treat lighty those things. 
 
 5. If they wish to be my servants, let them hearken unto my 
 words and obey them ; and if they will do this, I will be with 
 them while they are engaged in copying off those sacred writings 
 which I have given through my servant Joseph. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he whose words are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two edged sword ; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 INRTUCTION FOR THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 87. WEBER, UTAH, August i4th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am he who moves forth in the midst of darkness 
 and the darkness comprehendeth him not, even Jesus Christ, the 
 Son of the Eternal Father ; and I am come to speak unto you 
 concerning those things which you desire to know of me. You 
 must be very careful who you read this revelation to. You must 
 read it to your two counsellors, and to none else. My servants 
 wish to know when I am about to come out of my hiding place to 
 deliver my people out of the hands of their enemies. I will make 
 known unto them this secret. I will deliver these people out of 
 the hands of all their enemies this fall. They shall not be hurt 
 
INSTRUCTION. 127 
 
 by the winter ; therefore, let my people provide food to serve them 
 until I place all things necessary in their hands ; for I will do so 
 according to my words. My people are restless where they are. 
 They would like to know how long I intend to keep them there ; 
 but 1 dare not tell them this secret ; if I did, I should greatly 
 injure them. I wish to keep them quiet. 
 
 2. Let my servants strive to keep down that restless feeling 
 which my people are in possession of. I do not want to see con- 
 fusion among them. I will send you a good number of people up 
 to this place between this 'and the time when I shall come out in 
 power to deliver my people. My plans are all laid, and I am 
 working to them. Mine enemies say that they will not come up 
 against me ; they say that they will make my words fall to the 
 ground unfulfilled ; but I shall turn them hither and thither as it 
 seemeth me good. I can make them obey me without any 
 difficulty. 
 
 3. And as concerning those men who are acting as clerks in 
 my Church : If they will do my will, they will humble themselves 
 before me ; or, if they do not, I will chasten them severely, and 
 they will have hard work to stand. They suffer pride to enter into 
 them, and they raise themselves up above their fellows, which 
 thing is an abomination in my sight. They need not to think that 
 I cannot do without them ; for I can. If they will not humble 
 themselves, and do as I wish them to do, I can get others that 
 will do my will. 
 
 4. And, behol'd. I say unto you, my son, it is my will that you, 
 in connection with your two counsellors, should strive to bring 
 those clerks to a knowledge of their true position, If you can do 
 this, all will be well with them ; but if you cannot do this, I will 
 remove them out of that office, and they will see great affliction. 
 They do not appreciate my blessings ; but they lavish them away 
 upon their lusts; and instead of doing good, they do injury to the 
 rest of their fellows, which are as good as they are. 
 
 Let this suffice for the present, and, if necessary, I will speak 
 unto you again upon this subject. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
128 CONCERNING THE PROPHET AND OTHERS. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOSEPH MORRIS, MARK 
 H. FORSCUTT AND JOHN PARSON. 
 
 No. 88. WEBER, UTAH, August 23rd, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, even Jesus Christ. And 
 I am about to speak unto you concerning your present situation 
 with this people. You know their present situation. Some of 
 them are poor as regards the things of this world; but many of 
 them are willing to uphold you with all their power. 
 
 2. You have hitherto denied yourself of that which would have 
 rendered your existence more tolerable. You have denied your- 
 self of earthly comforts, in order that you -might not be burdensome 
 to those who have yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel. 
 
 3. If you had been placed in a position where you could have 
 enjoyed the society of. a faithful companion, it would have added 
 many comforts to you in your distress, of which you have, hither- 
 to, been under the necessity of denying yourself. And now, 
 behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, it would be well for 
 you to look for -a faithful companion. You are now placed in a 
 position where you can have this privilege ; therefore, use your 
 privilege, and I will uphold you in all things which are lawful. 
 
 4. The sufferings of no person upon the earth have been equal 
 to yours my own not excepted. I suffered until I sweat as it 
 were drops of blood ; but my sufferings did not last as long as 
 yours have done. Through the many agonies of your soul, caused 
 by the weight which has rested upon you, your inward parts have 
 been gradually wasting away. You must take all the care of your- 
 self that you can until I come out in power, and then I will heal 
 you again. 
 
 5. You have all the world placed upon you, even as I had; 
 therefore, I know what it is 1 to bear a burden as well as you do. 
 Nevertheless, I am at many times pained when I look at you in 
 your agonies, and I have often wished that I could relieve you; 
 but I am bound by law. I can only take a certain course ; yet I 
 will work with you continually ; therefore, fear not, for you are 
 always surrounded by my holy angels. You are guarded so that 
 no earthly power can injure you. 
 
CONCERNING THE PROPHET AND OTHERS. 129 
 
 6. You complain of my not working faster among the people. 
 I am working fast, but you cannot always see it. There are many 
 hundreds who partially believe in me now; and when I have 
 removed mine enemies put of the way, I will bring them up to the 
 head of my Church. Some of them will remain where they are 
 until I break the bands which now bind them and set them free ; 
 others will come up here before I come out in power. Some will 
 liberate themselves as much as they can ; others will wait until I 
 liberate them. 
 
 7. And behold, I speak unto you concerning my servants 
 Mark Hill Forscutt and John Parson. They are often* troubled 
 with sickness ; but I will heal them in the day of my power. Let 
 them take care of themselves as much as possible until that day 
 arrives. I am compelled to work according to the law by which I 
 am governed, which law they do not understand. And as far as 
 their health will permit, let them prepare for the press as many as 
 possible of those revelations, explanations and articles which I have 
 given. They have^ but a short time in which to do their work 
 before I show my power, and shortly after that event, which will 
 open the way, I shall send those revelations and explanations to 
 the world. Therefore, my servants will now know my will con- 
 cerning them, and let them work accordingly. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE MARRIAGE COVENANT. 
 
 No. 89. WEBER, UTAH, August 23rd, 1861. 
 
 i. THE candidates for marriage shall stand before the high 
 priest appointed to minister in that holy ordinance, and the bride- 
 groom shall take the bride by the right hand, and, after the high 
 priest officiating, shall repeat the following words : " My dearly 
 beloved bride, I, agreeable to the will of the Lord, and all the 
 parties concerned, give unto you my hand and heart in a marriage 
 covenant for time ; and hereby pledge my word and honor that I 
 will be a true and faithful husband unto you. " 
 
130 THE MARRIAGE COVENANT. 
 
 2. When the bridegroom has repeated these words he shall loose 
 the bride's hand. 
 
 3. The bride shall then take the bridegroom by the right hand, 
 and, after the high priest officiating, shall repeat the following 
 words : " My dearly beloved bridegroom, I, agreeable to the will 
 of the Lord, and all other parties concerned, give unto you my 
 hand and heart in a marriage covenant for time; and hereby 
 pledge my word and honor that I will be a kind and affectionate 
 wife unto you,- keeping myself from all others purely for you only, 
 so long as we both shall live." 
 
 4. When the bride has repeated these words she shall loose the 
 bridegroom's hand. 
 
 5. The high priest officiating in the ordinance shall then say : 
 "By virtue and authority of my holy calling, I pronounce you 
 husband and wife. Even so. Amen and "Amen." 
 
 6. Their names shall then be recorded in a book set apart for 
 that purpose. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE LORD'S INDIGNATION 
 AGAINST MURDERERS AND TRAITORS. 
 
 No. 90. WEBER, UTAH, August 24th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he who shuts, and no one opens; who opens, 
 and no one shuts ; even Jesus Christ. And I am come to speak 
 unto you, my son, concerning these my people who have yielded 
 obedience unto the fulness of my gospel. 
 
 2. There are some among them who grow weary in waiting for 
 me. They begin to think that I do not intend to come out of my 
 hiding place to deliver them, according to my promise ; but they 
 may rest satisfied upon that matter. Some of my people can see 
 the pit from which they have been dug; but they cannot feel 
 sufficiently for those who now sit in darkness. They ought to have 
 some sympathy for them. I wish to gather as many of the pure 
 in heart up to this place as I can this season without injuring, by 
 the inclemency of the winter, those who are already gathered ; and 
 I will satisfy every faithful saint who trusts fully in me. Those 
 
CONCERNING TRAITORS AND MURDERERS. 131 
 
 people who are growing weary should seek to reconcile themselves 
 to my ways. They need not to think that I do not know their 
 situation, for I do. If they will place their confidence in me, I 
 will provide for them. 
 
 3. The full keys of the holy priesthood are now upon the earth ; 
 and that priesthood brings to pass a change of things. I shall 
 now lead these my people day by day, as I did mine ancient 
 covenant people ^therefore, they might as well reconcile them* 
 selves to their fate, for they will have to trust in me. They need 
 not to fret and fume about the position in which I place them, for 
 it will be in vain. My course is marked out for me by law ; and 
 their course is marked out for them by law, also ; and they will 
 have to walk in it, or die. They have a duty to perform, as well 
 as I have. If they can hold me to my promises, I can hold them 
 to the covenants which they made with their fathers before the 
 world took its present position. If I am bound by law, they are 
 also. Therefore, I can hold them to their duty, or slay them. 
 This I shall do, if their conduct merits it. I will slay all those 
 who, having yielded obedience to the fulness of my go'spel, after- 
 wards turn away from me ; for this is according to the law by 
 which I am governed. 
 
 4. There are some who have already turned away from me ; 
 and they are now boasting that I have not cut them off; but I will 
 .cut them off in the day of my power. When I come out of my 
 hiding place I will clear them out of the way ; therefore, they need 
 not to boast. I have never spoken a word that I shall not fulfil. 
 My people may think that I am severe : with traitors, I am. 
 There is nothing else upon the earth that I despise, as I despise 
 them. The sin which they commit is almost equal to the sin 
 against the Holy Ghost, which is committed by all fallen spirits. 
 There is no other sin that can be committed by one who is an heir 
 to the resurrection equal to treason the sin of a traitor. Let my 
 people be aware of this sin, for it is easily committed. All those 
 who lose my spirit, and cannot gain it again, will commit the sin. 
 Therefore, let my people be aware how they act, lest they lose that 
 spirit which leads into all truth. 
 
 5. There are, even now, those among my people who are losing 
 my spirit. Let such repent, and turn unto me with all their hearts, 
 
132 CONCERNING MURDERERS AND TRAITORS. 
 
 that I may pardon their sins and send my holy spirit unto them 
 again. If they do not do this, I will cast them out from among my 
 people. They have no cause for turning against me ; therefore, 
 let them speedily retrace their steps, that it may be well with them. 
 If they will do this, I will be with them. They need not to sup- 
 pose that they can stand without my assistance, for they cannot. 
 If they will not come to my terms, I shall not come to theirs ; and 
 if they do not comply with my request, it will l^e to their own loss. 
 People may set themselves against me, but what can they do? 
 They will, after all, have to come to my terms, and suffer loss. 
 None need to think that I shall rob them of their rights, for I will 
 give to every man that which is his due ; therefore, let all people 
 be satisfied ; for I will do that which it is my duty to do unto all. 
 Let my people humble themselves before me, and all will be well 
 with them. 
 
 6. As concerning mine enemies abroad they cannot under- 
 stand the object of the gathering of my people to this place. They 
 ask of them what they will do in the winter season. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts, and I will answer them this question myself. Hear 
 me, O ye enemies of my truth ! I will feed you with judgment ! 
 Yea, I will send you to your graves at a time when you are not 
 looking for it. You have polluted my holy name, and you have 
 sought to destroy my poor and afflicted people; and, as your 
 fathers did before you, so you have cast the truth to the ground; 
 but your race is now near at an end. I will give unto the poor 
 and destitute, whom you have robbed of their rights, your houses 
 and your lands ; and when you are suffering in hell your portion, 
 they shall enjoy the good things of the earth. I will give unto 
 them those blessings, and who can stay my hand? 
 
 7. And as concerning that man who now stands at the head of 
 mine enemies, let him know that his days are short he cannot 
 deceive my people with his lying tongue much longer. He com- 
 mits all manner of abominations in my name, and, by so doing, he 
 lays them to my charge. He professes to be my servant, when* he 
 is the servant of the devil. He has not, for many years, led my 
 people by my spirit ; for he does not understand its operations ; but 
 he takes light for darkness, and darkness for light ; and he is, with 
 all his power, seeking to destroy the innocent. He will justify the 
 
THE CLERKS REPROVED. 133 
 
 shedding of innocent blood, and the sin against the Holy Ghost. 
 He cannot distinguish the innocent from the guilty. He does not 
 know them apart. Therefore, he justifies the guilty and condemns 
 the innocent. He does not understand the principles of right and 
 wrong. What shall I do with him? I will take him from the 
 earth, and his seed with him, according to my word. And I will 
 give his riches" to the poor, to feed and clothe them. 
 
 8. Let my people hearken to my words, and obey them ; and, 
 if they will do this, I will feed them in a fat pasture when their 
 enemies are powerless ; for I must save the pure in heart. They 
 have a claim upon me. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he whose words are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword ; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE CLERKS REPROVED. 
 
 No. 91. . WEBER, UTAH, August 3oth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am come to speak unto you, my servant Joseph; 
 and I say unto you that you must stand in your place. You must 
 not give way to those who call themselves my servants, who rebel 
 against you ; but you must dictate to all my servants. They shall 
 obey you, and if they do not, I will cast them off, and place others 
 in their places. They should know that it is their duty to obey 
 you, and not seek to dictate to you. I will confound all those 
 who fight against you. 
 
 2. I called clerks to assist you ; but they are proud, and seek 
 to take their own course ; and what can I do with them? they 
 will have their own way. They cannot stand to be corrected. I 
 would that they were obedient to me. It would save them much 
 affliction of mind. They must humble themselves before me ; or, 
 if they do not, they will lose their places as apostles in my Church; 
 for no person can hold the office of an apostle in my Church with- 
 out humility of heart. Let them take reproof, and . humble them- 
 selves before me ; and if they will do this, it will be well with 
 them. They have given way to a false spirit, which is at war with 
 
134 THE CLERKS REPROVED. 
 
 me, and they know it not, and it greatly afflicts them. This spirit 
 I will cast out of my Church. It would destroy my people if I 
 let it continue amongst them. Therefore, inasmuch as there is 
 difficulty among my servants, the clerks, it would be well for them 
 to stop their labors as clerks for the time being, until they under- 
 stand me more perfectly in that matter. They do not seem to 
 understand their duties as they ought to do. There is a misun- 
 derstanding among them in relation to their duties ; therefore, let 
 .them wait a short time until they know my will perfectly concern- 
 ing themselves and their duties. And if they will humble them- 
 selves before me, and satisfy me, and work according to the 
 instruction which I shall give unto them through my servant 
 Joseph, I will, shortly, reinstate them as the clerks of my Church ; 
 but if they will not do this, I will entirely cast them out of that 
 office. All that I require of them is to work according to the 
 directions of my servant Joseph ; for whosoever obeys him, obeys 
 me. I will back him up, for he is right before me ; and all my 
 people know that it is their duty to obey him ; for they know that 
 I have sent him. If they do not do this, I shall require it at their 
 hands. 
 
 I now add no more. I am he that was, and is, and is to come ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING MARRIAGE. 
 
 No. 92. WEBER, UTAH, September 3rd, 1861. 
 
 1. LET MY people hearken unto my words, and diligently 
 obey them, for I am about to speak unto them upon the subject 
 of marriage. 
 
 2. My people must not run hastily into marriage ; but they must 
 move very carefully in this matter. They must not enter into a 
 covenant of courtship, or marriage, with each other without first 
 obtaining the consent of my servant Joseph. And if they will 
 seek his counsel upon this matter, I will give unto him to know 
 whether it is right in my sight for them to to be united, or not. 
 If my people will do as I have commanded them in this thing, 
 
CONCERNING MARRIAGE. 135 
 
 their unions shall be attended with great blessings ; but if they 
 will not abide my law in this matter, I will curse them, and cast 
 them out from among my people, and destroy them in the flesh. 
 
 3. In cases where the candidates for marriage, who may ap- 
 pear before the prophet to ask for counsel upon this subject, are 
 young, and have parents who have yielded obedience unto the 
 fulness of my gospel, it is the duty of the parents to sanction what 
 I do through my servant, the prophet ; for he is accountable to 
 me only. But in such cases as those where the candidates have 
 not parents in my Church, it is their duty to marry according to 
 the counsel of the prophet, who holds the keys of my kingdom, 
 without asking the permission of their parents ; for there is no 
 appeal from his w r ord. 
 
 4. And inasmuch as there are men in my Church who have 
 left their wives for my sake, and wives who have left their hus- 
 bands, and are laboring under disadvantages, let them hearken 
 unto the counsel of my servant Joseph, and all will be well with 
 them. I will give unto him to know whether it is right for them 
 to marry, or not ; and what he does, I will sanction ; for I will 
 be with him in all his works. Therefore, let not my people mur- 
 mur at what he does ; neither let them think that they understand 
 my ways better than he does but rather let them humble them- 
 selves before me, and learn from him, and know that I will sanc- 
 tion what he does. If they will do this, I will be with them. I 
 am the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING WHOM THE LORD WILL 
 SLAY IN THE DAY OF HIS POWER. APPOINT- 
 ING JOHN BANKS AS SPOKESMAN. 
 
 No. 93. WEBER, UTAH, September yth, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the light and life of the world; even that 
 which shines forth in the midst of darkness. Through me all light 
 has come to mankind, and all power is in my possession, and I 
 will wield it to defend the, right. Ere long my power shall be felt 
 throughout this Territory ; and every knee that is spared shall bow 
 
136 . THE DAY OF GOD'S POWER. 
 
 to ray sceptre, which I will place in the hand of my servant 
 Joseph when I visit him. And after I shall have delivered the 
 sceptre into his hand, his mind will be at rest ; which at the pres- 
 ent time is not the case, for he is .very restless, and it is difficult 
 for me to deal with him. It is my wish to satisfy him ; but I am 
 compelled to wait until the appointed time has arrived even until 
 I have worked mine enemies up to a head. When I shall have 
 done this, I shall be ready to destroy them. 
 
 2. My servant Joseph complains against me, because I have 
 not visited him to his satisfaction. He considers that I am 
 neglecting him in this matter; but such is not the case. If it had 
 been necessary for me to have visited him oftener than I have done, 
 I should have done so. I am leading him, and I know his situa- 
 tion; therefore, I will never leave him in trouble, for it is my busi- 
 ness to attend to him, and I will not fail to do so. He also fears 
 that I will neglect him, and that, when mine enemies come up' 
 against me, I will not be there to fight his' battles ; but he has no 
 need to fret about that, for I despise them as much as he does. 
 Neither has he any need to think that I will not defend my own 
 rights ; for I am determined that I will. For what purpose did I 
 lay my life down? Was it not to save the posterity of Adam? If 
 so, shall I fail to do the work which my Father appointed unto 
 me ? No. While I have the power, I shall use it. I cannot give 
 way to the devil ; for, if I should do this, of all things I would be 
 the most corrupt. All of Adam's covenant people have a claim 
 upon me, and they trust in me as their saviour and deliverer. 
 Therefore, how can I forsake them? I cannot. I have set my 
 hand to lead them triumphantly over all earthly powers, and I will 
 do so. 
 
 3. As I have previously said unto my people, so I say unto 
 them again, after I shall have commenced the destruction of mine 
 enemies, I will never stay my hand until I have brought them all 
 under my feet. My people may wish to know what I intend to do 
 with those of mine enemies who will come up against them to des- 
 troy them? I will answer my people this question. I will meet 
 them here, and smite all of them dead in one minute. They shall 
 not have the power to hurt one saint who trusts fully in me ; but 
 those of my people who have yielded obedience to the fulness of 
 
JOHN HANKS APPOINTED. 137 
 
 my gospel, who may turn against me through fear when their ene- 
 mies come up against them, I will slay them with their enemies. 
 
 4. My people may also wish to know whether I intend to slay 
 none others in the day of my power but those who will come up 
 against them. I will slay, in that day, all those who have sanc- 
 tioned the coming of those murderers against them, and I will cut 
 off the earth all those who stand at the head of the old Church, who 
 oppose me in my course. I will leave those of my people who 
 constitute the old Church without their present deceitful shepherds, 
 and I will plant true shepherds over them instead thereof; for I 
 will not suffer my holy name to be profaned by them. 
 
 5. Let my people examine themselves, and see whether they 
 are right before me. If they will seek the attendance of my 
 spirit, it will show unto them their true position before me. Let 
 them not trifle too much with sacred things; but let them be very 
 careful in taking my name in their lips, for it is sacred, and must 
 be "treated as such. My people suffer their spirits to droop, and 
 unbelief to enter into their minds, and, thereby, allow*Satan to gain 
 the advantage over them. They know that I am at work'; there- 
 fore, let them rest contentedly, and be of good courage, and know 
 that I am all sufficient for their enemies. They have no cause to 
 fear that I will not do my part if they will attend to their duties ; 
 but rather let them fear lest they fall short in the performance of 
 their duties, and, consequently, ^11 before my presence; for I 
 shall come as a whirlwind, andj but few will stand at my ap- 
 pearing. 
 
 6. I am the Root and Branch of Jesse the Bright and Morn- 
 ing Star. 
 
 7. And behold, I speak uto you, my servant Joseph, concern- 
 ing my servant John Banks. Let him do that which is in his 
 heart to do, and I will uphold him therein. He has no cause to 
 fear, for I am with him ; and I am well pleased with him, because 
 his heart is right before me. Therefore, I will uphold him in all 
 things which are lawful and right ; and I will bless him with power, 
 and with great stores of knowledge, to enable him to carry out the 
 desires of his heart ; for I have chosen him to be your spokesman. 
 This is his calling in my Church ; therefore, let him act therein, 
 and all shall be well with him. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
138 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 TO THE PROPHET JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 No. 94. WEBER, UTAH, September 8th, 1861. 
 
 1. MY SON, why do you suffer your feelings to be worked up 
 to such a pitch? It is all without a cause. You say that you do 
 not understand my ways in dealing with you. You complain 
 against me for not taking a straightforward course with you, and 
 making you to understand me aright. You know that I have told 
 you before that I am regulated by law, and that I cannot deviate 
 from it. I am compelled to lead you day by day, and I cannot 
 show you both the beginning and the end of every small .thing. I 
 have given unto you a knowledge of the magnitude of the work 
 that lies before you, even your mission to the earth as* the presi- 
 dent of the high priesthood ; and, if you understand your mission 
 aright, you know that all earthly power has to be brought down 
 under your feet. You know that I cannot fail to uphold you ; but 
 it seems that you cannot, in the slightest thing, place confidence in 
 me, unless you can see perfectly through it. 
 
 2. You complain of me because I do not visit you, and speak 
 with you mouth to mouth. You know all about my duty to you. 
 You understand the place which I hold in the holy priesthood in 
 connection with my Father, and how I stand in relation to you, 
 and to the inhabitants of the earth. You also know that I have a 
 work to do, and that I cannot fail to do it. 
 
 3. You fear your enemies too much. You could not feel a 
 great deal worse than you do feel betimes, if you knew nothing 
 about me. I am pained to look at you. I cannot persuade you 
 to place your full confidence in me ; if you could do this, you 
 would have no trouble. When trouble is near, I will be by your 
 side ; and I will speak to you at all times when you need to hear 
 from me. And when my power is needed, I will come up to you 
 and talk to you mouth to mouth, and you shall see me then to your 
 satisfaction. You must not give way to trouble. Everything' is 
 moving on aright, and the test will shortly be here. Prepare your, 
 self, for it will come suddenly ; and it will be a day long to be 
 remembered by those who are permitted to behold it and live, 
 And now, my son, strive against the principle of evil with all your 
 
TO THE MILITARY AUTHORITIES. 139 
 
 power, and be not faithless ; but exercise confidence in me. I am 
 all sufficient for your enemies. 
 
 4. I will speak to you again shortly, and tell you what to do 
 in time for you to know how to act; for you will shortly need my 
 counsel, and my power also. Prepare for the day of my power. 
 I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION GIVEN IN ANSWER TO AN ORDER 
 FROM THE MILITARY AUTHORITIES OF UTAH, 
 
 No. 95. WEBER, UTAH, September nth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I am come to speak unto 
 you concerning your enemies who are laying a snare for you and 
 these my people who are trusting in me. You wish to know my 
 will concerning this affair which now lies before you, and I will 
 reveal it unto you. Mine enemies are seeking to obtain a clue to 
 justify them in coming up against you to, as they suppose, destroy 
 you. But I am controlling them, and I will make them come to 
 my terms ; for they can do nothing save that which I permit them 
 to do. 
 
 2. And it is my will that my people should hearken to my 
 words and obey them, that it may be well with them. They have 
 no friend to look to at this time except me ; and they must either 
 trust me now, or perish, There is no other help for them ; and if 
 they will serve me with all their hearts, (for this thing I require of 
 them) I will not leave them. 
 
 3. The cloud will soon burst upon the heads of mine enemies, 
 and . waste them all away. My people should not suffer their 
 spirits to droop. They must seek to fortify and prepare them- 
 selves for the test which is coming. I love those who are brave, 
 and they shall find a friend in me that will never forsake them ; 
 but the faint-hearted and faithless I despise. I am the Stone and 
 Shepherd of Israel their only defense. And I delight to defend 
 those who are pure in heart. I glory in those who trust in me ; 
 and they shall never be disappointed. 
 
140 TO THE MILITARY AUTHORIT1 KS. 
 
 4. And, behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph that, I 
 have gathered these people together myself, and they shall never 
 be scattered by mine enemies. They shall be subject to no power 
 but mine. 
 
 5. Let mine enemies fear and tremble before me; for I shall 
 take them out of existence quickly. And let them know that, 
 when they wage war with these my people, who have yielded 
 obedience to the fulness of my gospel, they wage war with me, and 
 I shall try if I cannot fight them. If they knew their destiny, 
 their hearts would fail in their undertaking ; but they will not be- 
 lieve it until they feel it. Mine enemies never would believe in 
 my words ; otherwise, they might have saved their lives ; but they 
 had to die to prove that, when I spoke, I told the truth concern- 
 ing them. They are like the unthinking horse that rushes into the 
 battle they cannot see the danger that lies before them ; there- 
 fore, they continually run into it, and perish. 
 
 6. And now, behold, I speak unto you mine enemies ! And 
 I say unto you, come up hither to fight against my people, and 
 you shall prove that I have told you the truth. I have said almost 
 enough about you in the revelations which I have previously given; 
 and now I will tell you the story. Therefore, O ye mine enemies ! 
 come up against me as soon as you can, and get your trouble over. 
 I am ready for you. Be it known unto you that my people who 
 have yjelded obedience to the fulness of my gospel, shall never 
 comg tp ypur terms, 
 
 .7. I am the Lord of Hosts, and I have spoken these things. 
 Thergfpre, let my people prepare themselves for the day of my 
 power ; and ]p I cpme quickly, I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father; even Jesus C n ri st > Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 .REVELATION (UVEN AT THE TIME OF TRAINING. 
 
 No. 96, WEBER, UTAH, September i2th, 1861. 
 
 WHEN it is time, J \vjlj come; and until that day I will guard 
 you by my holy angels. F@ar npt, for I will stand by you. I am 
 watching the movements of your- enemies* I am round about my 
 
THE FIRST COUNCIL. THE APOSTLES HI P. 141 
 
 people. What, therefore, have they to fear? Let them do their 
 own duties, and leave the results in my hands, and I will deal out 
 to all their just rewards. My people should learn to obey me, and 
 let others alone. Let them learn of me, for I am meek and lowly 
 in heart ; and if they do this, it is all that I require of them. I 
 am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE REORGANIZATION OF THE FIRST COUNCIL. 
 THE ORGANIZATION OF THE APOSTLESHIP. 
 
 No. 97. WEIJER, UTAH, September i3th, 1861. 
 
 1. HEARKEN unto my words, my son, and obey them ; for I 
 am about to speak unto you concerning the priesthood. 
 
 2. I commanded you to organize a High Council, to consist 
 of six ' members ; but now, as I am about to make some altera- 
 tions in the organization of my Church, that Council which con- 
 sists of six members shall no longer exist in my Church. The 
 First Council of my Church shall now consist of three persons, 
 namely, the prophet and his two counsellors. 
 
 3. And you shall now organize the apostleship in part. You 
 have ordained four persons to the apostleship already, and you 
 must ordain eight more. You must only make up the number of 
 twelve at this time; but, in due time, you shall call and ordain 
 twelve more, and then you will have twenty-four apostles. 
 
 4. I will regulate all things in my Church, and make every- 
 thing according to the pattern which my Father has shown unto 
 me; for I do nothing of myself. I work, always, according to the 
 law. And, in due time, I will make known unto you all things 
 which you need to know. 
 
 5. And let my servants whom I am about to call hearken unto 
 me. Let them seek to prepare themselves for the responsibility 
 which I am about to place upon th^m ; for they will need great 
 humility and integrity of heart. I shall require much at their 
 hands. Therefore, let them hearken unto me; and, if they will 
 do this, I will uphold them to their satisfaction. They shall never 
 have cause to complain of me for neglecting them ; but if they are 
 
142 THE APOSTLESHIP. 
 
 not humble, I will chasten them severely. If they will walk before 
 me in humility, they shall have nothing to fear. They must be 
 aware of pride, and not let it enter into their hearts ; for Satan will 
 seek to destroy them. He will strive to make them believe that 
 they are very great ; but they must remember that he who is most 
 like unto a little child, is the greatest in my kingdom. I resist the 
 proud ; but I give grace unto the humble. 
 
 6. I have called to the apostleship my servants John Trolsen, 
 Gudmund Gudmundsen, Niels Jacobsen, James Cowan, James 
 Dove, James Mather, John R. Eardley and Abraham Taylor. 
 
 7. And, behold, I speak unto you concerning my servant 
 Alexander Dow. I have called him to preside over those who 
 hold the office of high priests. And he shall call them together 
 from time to time, according to the revelations which I have 
 already given through my servant Joseph, and to those which I 
 shall hereafter give through him. He shall regulate himself in all 
 things pertaining to his duties in this office by my word, and my 
 servant Joseph will instruct him in all cases when it shall become 
 necessary. Let him prepare himself for this office, and, if he will 
 do this, I will be with him unto the end. I am Jesus Christ. 
 
 8. And let my servants, who hold my holy priesthood, prepare 
 themselves to do a work ; for, in due time, I will give unto all those 
 who are faithful to their callings, honorable places. I am the 
 Lord ; and I am with the faithful among my people. Let all be 
 satisfied with what I have done ; for I will give unto all their 
 rights, none need to fear. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ, the Son of 
 the Eternal Father. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 CONCERNING THE COURSE THAT THE LORD WILL 
 
 PURSUE WITH THE PROPHET AND 
 
 HIS ENEMIES. 
 
 No. 98. WEBER, UTAH, September i4th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the light and life of the world; even he 
 who moves forth in the midst of darkness, and the darkness 
 
CONCERNING THE PROPHET AND THE ENEMIES. 143 
 
 comprehepdeth him not. And I am come to speak unto you, my 
 servant Joseph. 
 
 2. Why are you so fearful? Why do you suffer your spirit to 
 droop? You are in pain continually, in consequence of your lack 
 of confidence in me. You could not feel worse than you do, if 
 you knew nothing at all about me. As I have said unto you be- 
 fore, so I say unto you again, I am pained when I look at you. I 
 wish that you would use your judgment. If you would do this, 
 you would not feel as you now do. What can I do with you, if 
 you still continue to give way to fear as you have done ? You lack 
 confidence both in me and in my Father. Have we ever neglected 
 you? You know that we have not. Have we not opened the 
 heavens and revealed all heights of glory and exaltation to you? 
 Have we not given unto you the power to read the rounds of 
 eternity? Have we not given unto you the full keys of the holy 
 priesthood.'' You know that we have. Have we not shown unto 
 you the hosts of heaven? You know that we have. You know that 
 they have paraded before you many times. Have you not seen them 
 with their swords drawn ? You know that you have. Have I not 
 ridden up to you repeatedly ? You know that I have. You know 
 all about me that you need to know. You have the keys whereby 
 you can trace me in all my movements. You are not blind with 
 regard to my duties towards you, and towards my people. You 
 know that, if I suffer your enemies to destroy you and these peo- 
 ple, I shall have to bear the blame. You know that I am bound 
 to protect you and these people, if I act according to the law by 
 which I am governed ; and you know that I cannot break a celes- 
 tial law. What are you afraid of? Why cannot you act reason- 
 ably ? If you would do so, all would go on right. Do you think 
 that I am a friend to evil-doers ? Even if I were inclined to 
 defend the principle of evil, I could not do so, for I am com- 
 pelled to act according to the law ; but I am not inclined either to 
 do or to defend evil. If I had been, I should not have been here. 
 Even if my will should incline to evil, I could not do it ; for the 
 law binds me to sustain the truth ; this you know. Why, then, do 
 you act so strangely ? You seem to be afraid to trust yourself in 
 my care, but you need not to be so ; for I would scorn to suffer 
 that any word which I have ever spoken, should fall to the ground 
 
144 CONCERNING THE PROPHET AND THE ENEMIES. 
 
 unfulfilled. I love the truth as well as you do, and I will defend 
 it as long as I have the power to do so. 
 
 3. I can cut a clear way through mine enemies, and, when 
 they come up against you, I will do so ; this you shall see. And 
 I will hold your enemies off' you until I am ready to destroy them, 
 and, until then, they shall not trouble you. I will give unto you 
 all necessary information from time to time. You shall not be 
 taken by your enemies unawares ; for I will come and talk with 
 you a short time before they come upon you. I will visit you, and 
 tell you all that you need to know to prepare you for that time. I will 
 watch them ; but you need not to look for them, before you have 
 seen me. They are setting themselves against me now, and they 
 will not be a great while before they come up against you. 
 
 4. They want to take you and your counsellors ; but when they 
 attempt to do so, I will stand by you, and smite them all dead in 
 one minute. They shall have no power over you. And, at that 
 time, I will have placed a number of my holy angels at every 
 settlement in this Territory. Where they have armed men ap- 
 pointed to fight against me, I will have my holy angels placed by 
 their side, and, as I cut off all the firstborn of Egypt, so I will cut 
 them all off at once. I will not leave alive any person that has 
 organized himself in a company to fight against me. Whether they 
 come up against me, or not, if they shall have given their con- 
 sent, that will have been sufficient to condemn them. 
 
 5. As I have said in a former revelation, so I say unto you 
 again, I shall suffer a number of your enemies to come up here to 
 commence the work appointed them, and then I shall destroy them 
 all ; both those who come up here, and those who do not, who are 
 of the same mind with those who will come against you. And I 
 will make such a slaughter among them that, after that day, you 
 shall have no opposers left. At that time you shall see my power 
 made manifest, and, after that, you will be perfectly satisfied, and 
 you will not have any more fears about you. Prepare for that day, 
 and trust in me ; for I am able to defend your rights. 
 
 6. W T hen my holy angels go out to war, they go with their 
 resurrected bodies, prepared for their enemies. A holy angel, dis- 
 robed of his glorified body, is not prepared for war he is de- 
 prived of a portion of his power ; but mine angels are prepared 
 
THE PLOT. THE COMING TEST. 145 
 
 for the work which they have to do. And behold, I say unto you, 
 my son, that you shall both feel their influence and see them go 
 out to battle ; for my holy angels delight in attending you and 
 fighting your battles. They are one with you, and are always 
 ready to do their duty. You have nothing to fear; then be of 
 good courage, and do not give way to misgivings. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he whose words are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two edged swor4 ; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PlTOT LAID BY THE ENEMIES. THE 
 COMING TEST. 
 
 No. 99. WEBER, UTAH, September i8th, 1861. 
 
 1. HEARKEN unto the words of the Lord your God, and pre- 
 pare for the day of my power, which is near at hand. For, lo ! I 
 shall come as a thief in the night, and but few will stand to behold 
 my presence. 
 
 2. I am now moving forth in the line of my duty among the 
 people of this Territory, and preparing them for the day of my 
 power : a day when those who shall be left alive, will behold such 
 scenes as will cause every heart to sicken ; for my wrath is kindled. 
 It is with difficulty that I endure the insults of those who profess 
 my name. I would have slain them before this time if the law by 
 which I am governed had not restrained me. 
 
 3. I was compelled to commence an organization, and to pre- 
 pare a number of men to preach the fulness of my gospel before I 
 could manifest my power. This is the reason that I have so long 
 delayed the day of my coming. I could not avoid it. I could 
 not work in any other .way than that in which I have worked. I 
 know that both you and your brethren have been made the sub- 
 jects of temptation. It has been with great difficulty that you 
 have endured the wickedness of those corrupt people who profess 
 my name ; but you shall not bear their sins mnch longer. 
 
 4. When they come to this place to train, they will seek to lay 
 a plot by which to ensnare you and your brethren ; but I will be 
 here, and control them in mine own way. I will be their Captain, 
 
146 THE PLOT. THE COMING TEST. 
 
 and, though they will not see me, I will lead them hither and 
 thither according to my own pleasure ; and they shall do nothing 
 save that which I lead them to do. And I will make them to do 
 just that which I wish them to do. I have broken them up, and 
 scattered them, and they have had no power over my people up 
 unto this day ; neither shall they ever have ; for I will break them 
 up and scatter them until they shall come up against me, at the 
 time when every preparation shall have been made for the battle, 
 and everything be ripe at the head, and they come out in open con- 
 tact with me, then, as I have before said, I will destroy them. Until 
 then, I will set them one against another, and break? them up, and 
 lead them hither and thither to suit my own purposes. They have 
 undertaken a work that will weary them. They will find out that 
 there is a hand at work which they can neither understand nor 
 control ; for I am the Lord, and I am more than sufficient for 
 them. They will' seek to compel my people to be trained by 
 them ; but my people must remember that I am their General, 
 and I will lead them aright ; but they must take no notice of mine 
 enemies. And if my people will do as I command them, which 
 is all that I ask of them, I will protect them, and their enemies 
 shall not hurt them. This I am bound to do, and my people are 
 bound to obey my commandments ; and, as I have a duty to per- 
 form towards them, so, also, they have a duty to perform towards 
 me. Let them be sure that they do their duty towards me, 
 and then they can claim my protection. I will meet them on 
 equal grounds. They must be steadfast, and trust in me, and in 
 the move which I will make for their benefit, they shall see my 
 wonder-working hand. Therefore, I say unto my people, that 
 they must not train nor mix with mine enemies ; or, if they do, I 
 will chasten them severely. I have separated them from the 
 world, and they shall not be united with the wicked any more ; 
 or, if they are, I will slay them. Let them trust in me, and do as 
 I command them this is all that I ask of them. 
 
 5. And, behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that you 
 may set your feelings at rest, and stand to your post like a man ; 
 and, if you will do this, you will never suffer affliction by your 
 enemies, for I will surround you by my holy angels. O that you 
 would cast all fear far from you ! How you would be relieved of 
 
CONDUCT DURING TRAINING. 147 
 
 an unnecessary burden which you now carry. You are afflicted 
 day by day for naught ; then why not rest in me? You cannot 
 gain anything by fretting. You cannot force things out of their 
 regular channel, nor bring the day of deliverance before the ap- 
 pointed time. All things in heaven have to take their regular 
 round. Then be satisfied, and I will come to your deliverance. 
 I am Jesus Christ, the Son of the Eternal Father. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE MANNER IN WHICH THE PEOPLE SHALL 
 
 CONDUCT THEMSELVES WHILE THEIR 
 
 ENEMIES ARE TRAINING. 
 
 No. ioo. WEBER, UTAH, September ipth, 1861. 
 
 1. LET MY people hearken unto my words, which are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword ; and lo, I will come 
 to their deliverance in this case, which is now at hand. If they 
 will do this, I shall be well pleased with them, and they shall find 
 me a never-failing friend. They will need my interference in this 
 case. Mine enemies thirst for the blood of my people, and thirst 
 they may. It is in the hearts of mine enemies, who are coming up 
 to this place to train, to slay these people who trust in me, if they 
 cannot bring them to their terms. Mine enemies think that they 
 
 'have all the power in their own hands ; and that they can do as 
 they please with these few people who trust in me ; but they will 
 see what power they have, when they come to try their strength. 
 I shall not cut them off this time things are not yet ripe at the 
 head. Until mine enemies, who are at the head, are prepared, I 
 shall confuse all others and break them up in their attempts to 
 commit violence on my people. I will surround them by my holy 
 angels, and force them hither and thither; and I will make them 
 do my will, whether they are willing to do it or not ; for it is my 
 business to control them. 
 
 2. All that I ask of my people is to do their own duty. If 
 they will do this, they may safely depend on me ; but if they do 
 not do this, they will be in danger. It is my will that my people 
 should mind their own business, and stop at their own homes while 
 
148 CONDUCT DURING TRAINING. 
 
 mine enemies are training. Let my people leave their enemies in 
 my hands ; I can manage them without their assistance. I do not 
 call upon my people to fight their own battles. I will fight their 
 battles ; that is my duty. And if in any case of emergency, when 
 mine enemies are here, I want to gather my people together, I will 
 speak unto my servant Joseph, and he shall call them together. I 
 am the Lord. 
 
 3. Let my people watch my wonder-working hand in this case, 
 and they will gain a confidence in me which they have never before 
 possessed. I wish to train my people so that they will be able to 
 place confidence in me. I shall lead them through scenes which 
 may be painful at the first sight ; but when they are over, my peo- 
 ple will profit by the experience which they will have gained. 
 
 4. After much tribulation cometh the blessings. And this is 
 the blessing which I will give unto my people even victory over 
 all their enemies. They have nothing to fear if they will walk 
 humbly before me. 
 
 I am he who holds the keys of death and hell ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING TRAINING. 
 
 No. 1 01. WEBER, UTAH, September 2oth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Son of the Eternal 'Father, and I am 
 come to speak unto you, my servant Joseph. 
 
 2. I have heard your prayers, and the prayers of your brethren, 
 which have been offered up before me, and I will answer them to 
 the satisfaction of all concerned. I will strengthen both you and 
 your counsellors to your satisfaction. You may depend fully on 
 me, for I will never forsake you. I am here now with a number 
 of mine army, and we will remain here until the trouble is over. 
 You shall see that I will control things aright. Mine enemies wish 
 to lay hold of you and your counsellors, to destroy you. You 
 must not go out among them ; but both you and your counsellors 
 must keep yourselves secret. You must not go out at all. You must 
 give me a chance to work, and do not seek to confuse tilings. Let 
 
CONCERNING TRAINING. 149 
 
 everything be kept as still as possible among my people ; and then 
 everything will go on aright. 
 
 3. And as I have said unto you before, so I say unto you 
 again, I do not want the help of my people. I will deal with mine 
 enemies myself. I will be with yon to dictate you in this affair, 
 when you need information from me. I will uphold my people to 
 their satisfaction, also. Oh, my son, why do you entertain doubts 
 concerning the fulfilment of my promises? If I fail to protect you 
 and these people in this affair, or at any other time, I will bear the 
 blame forever. You cannot "bring up one case wherein I have 
 failed to protect you ; this you know. I will deal honestly with 
 you never fear. Therefore, rest yourself contented. I am here 
 by your side, and I will protect you. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION GIVEN AT THE TIME OF TRAINING. 
 
 No. 102. WEBER, UTAH, September 2oth, 1861. 
 
 WHAT I say unto you, I say unto all. Watch, and you shall see 
 me scatter mine enemies. You shall know that, when I spoke 
 unto you concerning them, I told you the truth. I am the Lord 
 of Hosts, and I control all things according to mine own pleasure. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 A REVELATION CONCERNING MARY MORRIS. 
 
 No. 103. WEBER, UTAH, September 24th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he who moves forth in the midst of darkness, 
 and the darkness cpmprehendeth it not. And I am about to speak 
 unto you according to your request. 
 
 2. You wish to know my will concerning your companion. 
 You are in trouble concerning her. What can I do with her, if she 
 will not stand by you and take your counsel? If she fights againts 
 you, she fights against me. If she refuses to hearken to you and 
 obey you, she has no part with me, for I shall cast her off. I have 
 
150 MARY MORRIS. 
 
 given her unto you to be your wife. She needs not to think that 
 I do not know her. I do. I have controlled her from her child- 
 hood up for a wise purpose in myself, and now I have given her 
 unto you, and it is my will that she should obey you in all things 
 which are lawful in me. Let her not think that she is not your 
 right companion. When I have given her unto you, she is. 
 
 3. Let her fight valiantly against the powers of darkness. If 
 she will do this, I will assist her. I will give her power over the 
 destroyer. He will seek to destroy her. If she will not abide by 
 your counsel, she will be destroyed in the flesh; for I am the Lord, 
 and I will destroy her if she will not abide in my law; and behold, 
 my law shall proceed from the mouth of my servant Joseph. 
 
 4. Let her seek to comfort him. I gave her unto him for a 
 comforter, and not to afflict him. She has given way to the de- 
 stroyer. Let her strive against evil, if she wishes to do my will. 
 If she will do this, I will greatly bless her, for I have chosen her. 
 I am the Lord, and behold, I will make known unto you her birth- 
 right. Her lineage is that of Ephriam, even the royal seed of 
 Israel. She is also an heiress to the first resurrection, being one 
 of the firstborn daughters of Adam. Through her faithfulness 
 thousands of her sex will come to her and call her blessed ; for I 
 have chosen her for my servant according to his request. I shall 
 control him in all things. I know what is best for him. She is 
 pure before me. I know her. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, you may 
 safely depend upon me. I know what you need, and I have sent 
 unto you a companion of mine own selecting. Understanding 
 your calling and disposition, I know that you could never be happy 
 with a companion who is not pure. It is contrary to the law of 
 heaven for you to take to yourself a wife who is not pure. You 
 could not abide with her according to the law by which you are 
 governed. That which is pure cannot be united with that which 
 is impure. I know that you despise those who are impure, as well 
 as I do ; and I will never afflict you with those. You may rest 
 yourself satisfied with those whom I have sent unto you, for they 
 are pure. I know what you need, and I will supply your needs in 
 all things which may be necessary from time to time. 
 
 6. And behold, I speak unto you again concerning your com- 
 
COMING OF CHRIST. DESTRUCTION OF THE WICKED. 151 
 
 panion. Let her hearken unto my words, and I will be with her 
 unto the end, and crown her with exaltation in the presence of her 
 Father forever and forever, for I am the Lord, and I have spoken 
 these things. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE COMING OF CHRIST. THE DESTRUCTION OF 
 THE WICKED. 
 
 No. 104. WEBER, UTAH, September 27th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I shall come as a thief in the night, and but few 
 will stand to *behold my appearance ; for the earth will shake, and 
 many will fall upon the ground as dead. When I come in power 
 to deliver my people out of the hands of their enemies, I shall 
 come as a refiner, to purify my Church from all corruptible things. 
 And I will make a change among my people, and also among the 
 nations of the earth ; for I am weary of beholding the abomina- 
 tions which exist among men. 
 
 2. The appointed time for me to make a change upon the 
 earth has now come. I shall now assume my rights. I shall now 
 rule upon the earth it is my right. And who can stay my hand? 
 I shall go forth from conquering to conquer, and lay myriads dead 
 before me. The children of men are filled with vanity. They 
 think that they can stay my hand, and bring my plans to naught. 
 
 3. Even those men whom I placed at the head of my Church, 
 but who are now mine enemies, think that they can break up my 
 arrangements, bring my plans to naught, and conquer me. They 
 know not what they are doing. I can destroy them all in one 
 minute. I will make them do what I want them to do. They 
 shall have no power to do anything only what I permit them to do. 
 They know nothing about me. It is not difficult for me to govern 
 them. I lead them hither and thither at my pleasure; and at the 
 appointed time I will bring them up to a head. My plans are all 
 laid, and I know my business well. And all those of my people 
 who are pure in heart I will satisfy. The rest I will destroy. I 
 will cut a clear way through the inhabitants of the earth ; never- 
 theless, I will, as much as possible, save alive those who are heirs 
 
152 COMING OF CHRIST. DESTRUCTION OF THE WICKED. 
 
 to the resurrection ; but the rest I will destroy whenever they cross 
 my pathway. 
 
 4. I am bound by law to defend the principles of truth ; and I 
 shall protect the pure and honest who trust in me. I always work 
 on the defensive. I cannot turn out of the regular channel which 
 I am compelled by law to walk in. But I can work mine enemies 
 up to come against me, and then I can destroy them. This is 
 what I am doing. They are seeking now to get a clue against 
 you. They want a reason that, as they suppose, will be a justi- 
 fiable one for coming up against me; and I will give them one. 
 I know what they want, and when I am ready they shall have it. 
 I am ready myself, but my people are not. I am compelled to 
 wait for them, and they are holding me, for I can only work with 
 them according to that which they can bear. If they cannot 
 receive much, I cannot reveal much unto them. I can only work 
 with my people as they prepare themselves for it. 
 
 5. They give way to the destroyer, and suffer my spirit to 
 depart from them; and what can I do with them? They will not 
 strive against the powers of darkness as they ought to do ; but 
 they give way to doubt and fearful forebodings of the future. They 
 fear that they will be overtaken by the winter; and they give 
 themselves trouble when they have no need to do so. They need 
 not to think that I do not know the position in which I have 
 placed them ; for I do. I have taken them into mine own care ; 
 and if they will do what I require of them, I will provide for them. 
 
 6. There are those among my people who are fearful of future 
 consequences. They have not sufficient confidence in me. They 
 fear mine enemies. They will not cling to me as they ought to 
 do ; but they give way to the destroyer, and he gains the advan- 
 tage over them. And then, when they are overcome, they go 
 among my people who have not power to detect false spirits, and 
 shed abroad the influence among them, and thus prepare the way 
 by which the adversary gains advantage over the rest. And so 
 that influence has run from one to another until all my people 
 have partaken of it. They must humble themselves before me. 
 If they will do this, my spirit shall attend them, and I will remove 
 all sickness from them. They have brought that sickness upon 
 themselves by giving way to false spirits, which have afflicted 
 
COMING OF CHRIST. DESTRUCTION OF THE WICKED. 153 
 
 them ; and those spirits will always afflict my people when they 
 gain the upper hand of them. But if my people would do as I 
 have commanded them, they would never be overcome by the 
 destroyer. Let them place their full confidence in me, and serve 
 me with all their hearts. This I require of them. I will not 
 accept of those who are half-hearted. I despise them. I can do 
 nothing with them. My people know what I require of them, if 
 they would do it ; but there are those among them who treat sacred 
 things lightly ; and there are others whose minds are fixed too much 
 upon the things of the world, so much so, that they cannot do 
 their duty in my Church. My people are all giving way. What 
 can I do with them? I pity them. They cannot exercise that 
 confidence in me which is required. 
 
 7. O ye people who trust in me, let us reason together. Ye 
 know that, by the operations of my spirit, I have brought you here 
 from different parts of the Territory, and I have opened the 
 heavens to you, and you can read the rounds of eternity ; you can 
 see the principles by which all things exist, both in heaven, on the 
 earth, and also in hell; and what more do you require of me? If 
 I have opened the heavens to you and permitted you to see the order 
 of all things, do. you not think that I will deliver you according to 
 my promise? What think you? O ye people who trust in me, 
 do not manifest such weakness, but rise up and do your duty ! 
 You know that I have protected you from all your enemies up to 
 this time, and I am always ready to defend you. I have sur- 
 rounded you by my holy angels from the time that you gathered 
 to this place up to this time ; but you have not seen me. I can 
 stand in your midst and you cannot see me, except I show myself 
 unto you. I have the power to show myself to those who are 
 worthy, and to none else. I continually guard these my people 
 with a mighty host If they could see them they would be satis- 
 fied at once, but they cannot. But they 'will 'soon witness my 
 power, for it is that which they desire to see a manifestation of. 
 Let them prepare for it. 
 
 I am he that was, and is, and is to come ; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
154 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 105. WEBER, UTAH, October 4th, 1861. 
 
 1. WHAT can I do to satisfy you, my son? You are continu- 
 ally in trouble. I have spoken to you from time to time and 
 striven to comfort you. The principle of evil which prevails in the 
 world bears you down until you have no pleasure of your life; and 
 you fear that I shall not come out and move your enemies out of 
 the way. You feel that I hold myself at a distance from you, and 
 that I will not come up to you and show myself unto you. You 
 consider that I do not act honest with you. You say that you can 
 see mine enemies before your eyes almost continually, and you are 
 sensible that they will come up against you. You say that you are 
 satisfied that your enemies will come up and seek to destroy both 
 you and my people ; but you say that you are not satisfied with 
 my dealings with you. You consider that I do not sufficiently 
 uphold you. You consider that inasmuch as you can see mine 
 enemies, that you ought to see me and my host ; this you con- 
 sider is right. 
 
 2. But behold, I say unto you, my son, you have never seen 
 mine enemies come up against you as yet. You have only seen a 
 few men come up to this place, and when they came they did not 
 come to slay my people. They only came to gain a point, as they 
 supposed ; they were not sent to destroy my people ; and 
 when they came I confounded them. They had not the 
 power to accomplish their designs. I have always broke 
 their grasp. They never had the power to do those things which 
 they wanted to do ; and I always will confound them until I have 
 worked them up to a head, and then I will destroy them accord- 
 ing to my word. You can see that your enemies never have had 
 any power over you, and you should be satisfied. 
 
 3. You must judge of the future from the past. If I have 
 fulfilled my promises in the past, you may be sure that I shall 
 fulfil them in the future. W T hat are you afraid of ? You are afraid 
 that I am guilty of sympathizing with the wicked and neglecting 
 the pure in heart. I have heard thejf: prayers and seen their 
 affiictipns ; and I will ayepge them of thejr. gnemies! As I have 
 
TO THE PROPHET. 155 
 
 told you before, I shall never sympathize with the wicked. You 
 need not to fear because I am compelled to delay it so long before 
 I come out in power. You are losing confidence in me, and you 
 are doing it without a cause. You know very well how I am 
 situated, and you know that I cannot do otherwise than what I am 
 doing. If you were ignorant of my situation, I could put up with 
 your insults better ; but you sin against me wilfully. I know the 
 oppression which you are called to bear; but it does not mend your 
 situation for you to keep wounding my feelings as you do. I have 
 rights as well as you have ; and I can feel as well as you can when 
 my rights are trampled upon. 
 
 4. I have always done my duty to you, whether you think so 
 or not. I am fit to be depended upon as much as you are. I 
 love the principle of right as much as you do; and I can do my 
 duty without being driven to it. You may think that I have 
 nothing to do; but I am as busy as you are. You must know that 
 when I have the whole world to rule, that my hands are full. 
 You know my duty to the inhabitants of the earth. Why do you 
 act so strangely? I have always done my duty. If I ever fail to 
 fulfil a promise which I have made unto you, then I will take your 
 insults as my just due ; and I will not complain. Why do you 
 not meet me on equal ground? You will gain nothing by fretting 
 and insulting me time after time. You cannot force the day of 
 deliverance before the time, nor move the things of eternity out of 
 their regular channel. You must know that the ruling power is 
 in my hand, and I shall work according to the law ; and I shall 
 reveal the law unto you ; and when I have done this, you will know 
 that I have always kept it while I have been dealing with you, 
 while you were laboring in the days of your weakness. You are 
 almost ready to believe that I punish you on purpose to afflict you, 
 even when I could avoid it. But know this, that I have always- 
 done my best for you. I am your friend, if you could only believe 
 it ; and if you do not believe it now, you soon will do so. 
 
 5. And as you have complained against me for not making my 
 appearance unto you, and showing unto you the heavenly hosts 
 also, I make unto you this promise : That when you see mine 
 enemies coming up against you, you shall both see me and the 
 heavenly hosts. We shall be ready for battle at that time. When 
 
I$6 PROSPERITY FOR THE RIGHTEOUS, ETC. 
 
 you see one party, you shall see the other also ; and I moreover say 
 unto you that you shall see me before that day. You shall have no 
 cause to complain against me. I know that neither you nor these 
 people can do anything for yourselves. It is my business to fight 
 the battles of my people, and I will do it to their satisfaction. 
 Only let them be faithful, and live by every word which proceeds 
 from my mouth. It is all that I require of them. 
 
 6. And now behold, I say unto you, my son, hearken to the 
 reproof which I have given unto you, and profit by it, that it may 
 be well with you ; and whenever you murmur against me, let it be 
 when I deserve it ; or if you continue to insult me as you have 
 done, without a cause, I will chasten you severely. I will not put 
 up with such insults. 
 
 I will speak unto you again shortly. Let this suffice for the 
 present ; and lo, I come quickly. I am the Bright and Morning 
 Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amem and Amen. 
 
 THE DESRUCTION OF THE WICKED. FUTURE 
 
 PROSPERITY FOR THE RIGHTEOUS. THE 
 
 HEALING OF -THE SICK. 
 
 No. 1 06. WEBER, UTAH, October 5th, 1861. 
 
 1. HEARKEN unto my words, O ye my people ! for I am 
 about to speak unto you. 
 
 2. You are troubled about many things, about which you have 
 no occasion to be troubled. You cannot change the nature of 
 things by fretting. Then why do you not reconcile yourselves to 
 your lot ? I am with you fear not ; for yet a little while and the 
 blessing will come. And after the test is over, you will be made 
 glad ; for you will see no more oppression. O then, why cannot 
 you struggle against the powers of darkness a few days longer? 
 I would have delivered you before this time if I could have done 
 so ; but I am compelled to act according to the law. I feel for 
 you, and I will do all that lies within my power to bear you up. 
 I will send my holy angels to visit you \ and they shall cause you 
 to dream pleasant dreams, and to see visions, Yea, my spirit, if 
 
PROSPERITY FOR THE RIGHTEOUS, 'ETC. 157 
 
 you will invite it, shall inspire you until you shall feel strong in 
 me. If you will do this, I will remove all sickness far from you. 
 My people are afflicted when they suffer their spirits to droop, and 
 give way to misgivings. They cannot stand against the destroyer 
 unless they are upheld by me ; and they cannot be upheld by me 
 unless they will keep my commandments. They know their situ- 
 ation; and it would be well for them if they would cling to me 
 with all their hearts it is the best thing that they can do. If I 
 am not their friend, they have none. Then let them act so that I 
 can lawfully befriend them. I have brought them here myself. 
 I have chosen them for mine own, and I will bless them with 
 eternal life if they will only obey me. 
 
 3. The names of all the faithful among my people shall be 
 handed down from generation to generation to their honor for the 
 good act which they have done to their fellow creatures. They 
 are worthy of the greatest blessings that are in store for the 
 children of Adam. I am well pleased with the faithful. I would 
 that all my people were faithful ; but there are some in my Church 
 who are careless and neglectful of their duties. Let such repent 
 of their carelessness, and turn to me with all their hearts, that it 
 may be well with them. 
 
 4. My people will soon be called to take sides, either for me, 
 or against me. They will learn a secret in that day. They will 
 then see where the strongest power lies. I have told them soon 
 enough for them to make up their minds as to what they intend to 
 do. If they expect to be saved in the day of my power, they 
 must serve me with all their hearts. If they will not do this, I 
 will not protect them. Now they know my mind concerning 
 them. 
 
 5. Those who profess to be my people must serve me with all 
 their hearts, otherwise I will not preserve their lives ; but I will 
 deliver them into the hands of the devil, and he will destroy them 
 in the flesh. 
 
 6. And inasmuch as the fall has now set in, my people will 
 expect cold weather, and they must prepare themselves for it as 
 much as possible ; but, for their convenience, I will moderate the 
 weather to a certain extent until I am ready to come out in power 
 and change their circumstances this I will do shortly. Let my 
 
158 PROSPERITY FOR THE RIGHTEOUS, ETC. 
 
 people seek to bear each other's burdens. They need not to be 
 afraid of parting with their substance to make both themselves and 
 those who are destitute comfortable for a short time. And if those 
 who are in good circumstances among my people will assist those 
 who are poor, I will shortly give unto them ten-fold, yea, a hun- 
 dred-fold ; for whosoever relieves the poor and the destitute, do it 
 unto me ; and I will reward them. 
 
 7. My people need not to think that I intend to keep them 
 here all winter; for I do not. I shall break up the plans of mine 
 enemies, and before the winter is over I will send them to their 
 graves ; for in my heart I do despise them. They cannot think 
 about anything else but laying their plans to fight against me. I 
 will give unto them fighting enough. O the blindness and wicked- 
 
 ^ness of men to raise their puny arms to fight against me! Let 
 my people rest in me, and know that I will give unto them wealth ; 
 yea, even more than they will know what to do with. Those who 
 are faithful in my Church will be. the most wealthy of all people ; 
 for I am about to place all things in their hands; for all things 
 which are upon the earth are theirs. And I will break down all 
 earthly power ; and, in due time, I will place all things in the 
 hands of my people. 
 
 8. I have done all in my power to warn the people of this 
 Territory of the destruction which is coming upon them ; and 
 after all that I have done, I shall be compelled to destroy thou- 
 sands of those who are heirs to the resurrection this I cannot 
 avoid ; for I cannot convince them in this life. Oh, how I am 
 pained with the blindness and wickedness of men ! 
 
 9. And, behold, I speak unto you concerning the death which 
 has lately taken place among my people. My people may be sur- 
 prised thereat. But, behold, I say unto you that he was appointed 
 unto death; and I have taken him from the midst of my people 
 for a wise purpose in myself. I had a place appointed for him. 
 Therefore, let not his companion fret over her loss, for I will pro- 
 vide for her. I am acquainted with her needs, and I will supply 
 them ; for I am the Lord. 
 
 10. And, behold, I say unto you, my son, if my people will 
 be faithful unto me, I will spare the lives of all those who are 
 not appointed unto death, and I will heal them when they are 
 
CONCERNING THE SICK. 159 
 
 sick. And when you are called to visit those who are sick, I will 
 give unto you to know whether they are appointed unto death, or 
 not. And if they are not appointed unto death, you shall lay your 
 hands upon their heads, and I will heal them. My power shall 
 be felt through you from this time henceforth. I am the Lord of 
 Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE SICK. 
 
 No. 107. WEBER, UTAH, October i8th, 1861. 
 
 1. LET MY people hearken unto my words, which are quick 
 and powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword; for I am about to 
 speak unto them. 
 
 2. It would be well for them if they would hearken unto my 
 words, and obey them ; otherwise they will have to suffer for it. 
 When I counsel them, I know what I am doing. Those who are 
 in good circumstances need not to be afraid of parting with their 
 substances to make those who are poor in their midst comfortable. 
 Some of those who first embraced my gospel were afraid of losing 
 their substance ; and for fear that the poor should want anything 
 of them, they forsook the truth. Their eyes were full of greedi- 
 ness. They were afraid that others should live as well as them- 
 selves ; but it is ordained in heaven that the poor shall live as well 
 as the rich. Therefore, let them know that when I am ready, I 
 will destroy them, and give their substance to the poor; and who 
 can stay my hand? 
 
 3. All the children of Adam have an equal claim upon the 
 products of the earth, according to the right which they hold in their 
 Father's kingdom ; but the children of the devil have robbed them 
 of that right, and, for this sin, the whole world is under a curse. 
 The poor have never had their rights ; but they have always been, 
 as it were, trampled under the feet of the rich. It will be hard for 
 those who are sick to abide my law ; but they will now have to 
 abide it, or perish ; for the devil has now ruled this world his time 
 out. My law is about to come to the earth, and, when it comes, 
 
l6o CONCERNING THE SICK. 
 
 it will set all things in order. The children of men may be pre- 
 paring themselves for it ; for it will come even before my people 
 are aware of it. They need not to think that that time is many 
 years hence, for it is not. My judgments will come upon the 
 nations of the earth thick and fast ; yea, as a whirlwind. The 
 inhabitants of the earth little know what awaits them. Therefore, 
 let those among my people who are in good circumstances assist 
 those who are poor, that they may find an inheritance among the 
 faithful of my people, which they shall obtain if they will do as I 
 have commanded them. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning those who 
 are sick among my people. There are some of them who have 
 given way to the destroyer, and he is afflicting them. He seeks to 
 afflict all those of my people that he can gain the upper hand of. 
 My people do not seem to fully understand their duties ; if they 
 did, there would not be so many of them sick. They should 
 struggle against unbelief with all their power. They should pray 
 in their hearts continually. They must serve me with all their 
 hearts. If they will do this, there will not be much sickness in 
 their midst ; but they will be healthy and strong ; for mine angels 
 will continually attend them, and keep sickness far from them ; 
 but, by their unbelief and neglect of prayer, they drive mine 
 angels far from them. I have told my people often enough what 
 I require at their hands, and yet they will not do it. If they will 
 not do as I have commanded them, they must suffer the conse- 
 quences. I have done my duty to them ; but they give way to 
 almost every attack of the destroyer. It is not difficult for him to 
 lead them astray. What can I do with them ? They will not 
 struggle against the destroyer as they ought to do ; but they give up 
 to him entirely. My holy angels are continually around them, 
 waiting to be invited ; but, by their conduct, they often invite the 
 angels of the devil in preference to my holy angels, whom they 
 drive away ; and the evil spirits surround and afflict them with 
 sickness. If they will not do as I have commanded them, I can 
 do nothing for them ; but if they will keep my commandments, 
 my yoke will be easy, and my burden light. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that when any of my 
 people are dangerously sick, you shall visit them, and lay your 
 
 f 
 
MANNER OF ADMINISTERING TO THE SICK. l6l 
 
 hands upon their heads ; and, if they are not appointed unto 
 death, I will heal them. You need not to lay your hands upon a 
 person more than once, for it is all that I require. I only need 
 your sanction ; and then if they are not appointed unto death, I 
 will heal them. I am compelled by law to acknowledge your 
 authority before I can do anything among my people upon the 
 earth ; and when you have given me your consent, I will give unto 
 my people the blessing appointed by you. 
 
 6. When you lay your hands upon the head of a person who is 
 sick, you shall express the following words: "Oh God, the 
 Eternal Father, I, thy servant, according to thy request, lay my 
 hands upon the head of this, thy servant (or handmaiden), in the 
 name of thy Son, Jesus Christ, according to the law of heaven, 
 and ask thee to look down upon this, thy servant (or handmaiden), 
 who is thus afflicted ; and, inasmuch as he (or she) is not ap- 
 pointed unto death, wilt thou heal him (or her). Dear brother 
 (or sister), by virtue and authority of the holy priesthood which I 
 hold, according to my birthright, I command this disease to depart 
 from you. From this time be you whole. I pronounce this bless- 
 ing upon you, ih 4he name of the Father, and of the Son, and of 
 Holy Ghost. Even so. Amen and Amen." And I will heal 
 them according to your request. 
 
 I add no more at this time. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE INDEPENDENCE OF THE PEOPLE OF GOD. 
 
 No. 1 08. WEBER, UTAH, October nth, 1861. 
 
 1. LISTEN to the words of the Lord your God ; even the Alpha 
 and Omega, the beginning and the end ; for I am about to speak 
 unto you. 
 
 2. You are greatly afraid that I shall neglect you. Do you not 
 think that I know all about you, and this people? Your enemies 
 have sent unto you, and unto a number of this people, summonses 
 to appear before them, to give unto them an account of your con- 
 duct. What shall I say unto you upon this subject? I will tell you 
 what to do ; and if you and this people will do as I command you, 
 
1 62 THE PEOPLE OF GOD. THE ENEMIES. 
 
 I will uphold you, and take the responsibility upon myself. I 
 think that I am able to maintain mine own ground with them. 
 They feel determined to make me give unto them an account of 
 my proceedings ; but rny course shall never be questioned by them. 
 I have begun a work, and I am able to carry it through. I can 
 destroy the entire inhabitants of this earth in one day. What are 
 they in my hands ? Scarcely a bubble. But they will soon try 
 what they can do. They are so blind that they do not see that I 
 am at the head of this work. They think that there are but a few 
 people here, and that they can do what they please with them. 
 They think that they will have but little trouble to bring them to 
 subjection; but they have a lesson to learn which they will not 
 learn until they fairly commence their operations with my people ; 
 then I will show them who they are. I will show them that they 
 have trusted to a broken reed. They will not know that they are 
 deceived in their course until they come up against me. They 
 believe that they are led by me to come up against my people ; 
 and they think that I shall uphold them in their bloody act. But 
 they must look to the devil for support. They need not look to 
 me for help. If they would but look around them and study their 
 past course, they would know that I have not been with them for 
 many years. Their works have failed in every instance ; whereas, 
 if I had been with them, their works would have prospered. My 
 works and designs are not frustrated by men. I have never failed 
 to accomplish the work which my Father appointed unto me by 
 law. That which cometh from heaven never fails; but the works 
 and designs of the devil are brought to naught. When men be- 
 hold a people who are called by my name constantly failing in all 
 their attempts to build up, as they suppose, a church unto me, 
 they may be sure that I have forsaken them. If I was at the head 
 of a people, their works would prosper; but those people who pro- 
 fess my name do not even believe the sight of their own eyes ; for they 
 do not believe that their. works have failed. They know nothing 
 about the principles of right and wrong; and they who are thus 
 deceived have nothing but death staring them in the face ; for they 
 have given up their judgment to others; and I have cursed all 
 such who trust in man, and disobey my words. O the blindness 
 of the children of men ! It is hard for me to deal with them. I 
 
THE PEOPLE OF GOD. THE ENEMIES. 163 
 
 am constantly at work for their benefit ; but, after all, I cannot 
 satisfy them. 
 
 3. And behold, I speak unto you again concerning your ene- 
 mies. Let my people abide by my words, for I am about to give 
 unto them a commandment. Let them mind their own business; 
 which business is to serve me with all their hearts. They are 
 subject to none but me. Let them leave their enemies in my 
 hands. They need not to fear their authority ; for if they were 
 backed up by all the world I am more than a match for them. I 
 care nothing about their backing. I know all about their authority, 
 and I will hold them so that they shall not have the power to hurt 
 a hair of the heads of my people who are faithful. I am round 
 about them continually, forcing them hither and thither, and con- 
 trolling them in their councils. My people need not to think that 
 their enemies will make any move against them that I shall not be 
 acquainted with, or that I shall not have driven them to ; for I 
 control them in all their movements. My people have nothing to 
 fear, if they will do as I command them. I want to work mine 
 enemies up to a head ; this is what I am aiming at. I am com- 
 pelled by law to do this, before I can deliver my people. And 
 while I am doing my duty, my people must not be afraid. When 
 they see danger, they must remember that I am as near unto them 
 as their enemies are ; and they must understand that their deliver- 
 ance is at hand. They should then lift up their heads and rejoice 
 in me, and know that I am their shepherd and their defense even 
 the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that inas- 
 much as you have desired of me to know the reason why I have 
 not shown myself unto you of late, I will inform you. You say 
 that both myself and the heavenly hosts were accustomed to show 
 ourselves unto you in times which are past, and you want to know 
 the reason why we do not do the same now. You say that you 
 need to behold our presence now more than you ever did ; and 
 you consider that, at the time when our presence is most needed, 
 we will not visit you. We visited you, in the first place, to show 
 unto you that we existed. We considered that it was our duty to 
 make known unto you this fact, that you might be satisfied. You 
 now know that we do exist, for you have seen us. And, inasmuch 
 
164 THE PEOPLE OF GOD. THE ENEMIES. 
 
 as we have convinced you of this fact, we do not feel ourselves 
 under the obligation of constantly showing ourselves unto you. 
 To know that we exist is all that you need to know. Should we 
 show ourselves unto you a thousand times, you would not know 
 any more about our existence than what you now know. When 
 you need to see us, we will come and show ourselves unto you ; 
 but we shall not come unto you until you are in trouble. Then 
 we will come unto you and release you. What more do you re- 
 quire at our hands than this ? 
 
 5. You seem to be afraid to make a move, except you can see 
 us before your eyes almost continually. We know all about your 
 difficulties ; therefore, walk up and do your duty, and leave ours 
 to us ; and we will do it. You know that we have never neglected 
 you ; then why cannot you walk up to your post like a man ? If 
 ever we neglect you, then you can justly blame us ; but if we never 
 neglect you, you have no right to blame us. Wait until you have 
 a cause to complain of us. If we do not come unto you when you 
 are in trouble, and release both you and this people out of the 
 hands of their enemies, then we are willing to bear the blame for- 
 ever. We know all about your oppression. We feel for you, and 
 we are .willing to do all that lies in our power to ease your burden. 
 Then know that we are your friends, and be contented. All things 
 are moving on aright, for we are with you. Let this suffice for the 
 present, and I will shortly speak unto you again. You will soon 
 need to hear from me, for you will soon meet with trouble. 
 
 I am he that was, and is, and is to come ; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 CONCERNING THE APPOINTING OF OFFICERS TO 
 ADMINISTER TO THE SICK. 
 
 No. 109. WEBER, UTAH, October i2th, 1861. 
 
 1. INASMUCH as I have given unto you the law pertaining to 
 the healing of the sick, it is necessary that I should speak unto 
 you again upon this subject. 
 
 2. You will not be able to attend to all the sick yourself; 
 
THE APPOINTING OF OFFICERS. 165 
 
 therefore, in order to ease your burden, you shall appoint several 
 others to act in your place, under your authority. And when you 
 have commissioned them, I will bless their administrations as 
 though you administered to them yourself. All that I require of 
 you is your sanction. You cannot be present everywhere at oncey 
 consequently, you must have agents to act for you. 'And let those 
 agents whom you shall appoint act according to the law ; for, if 
 they do not, I will not bless their administrations. They must 
 regulate themselves always according to my law. And, behold, 
 my law shall proceed from the mouth of my servant Joseph. 
 
 3. My servant Joseph Smith sent elders out to preach to the 
 world, and to lay their hands upon the heads of those who were 
 sick, and to anoint them with oil, and pray over them, that they 
 might be healed. This order existed upon the earth when my 
 holy priesthood was upon the earth in part only. But that order 
 of things will not exist under the fulness of the holy priesthood. 
 
 4, All miracles which now are, or henceforth shall be per- 
 formed in my Church, must be performed according to the law 
 which I have appointed for them. I always work by law; and 
 without law I do nothing. My servants need not to anoint the 
 sick with oil any more. They must repeat over the heads of the 
 sick the ceremony which I have given through my servant Joseph, 
 and then I .will heal them. Those ordinances which only existed 
 in part in my Church, exist no longer. I have committed the ful- 
 ness of the holy priesthood to the earth, and it will bring about a 
 new state of things altogether. Everything that I now do, I shall 
 do according to a perfect law. I shall now, from time to time, 
 give laws to regulate all things in my Church, as fast as my peo- 
 ple can prepare themselves to receive them. My people need to 
 begin to open their eyes, and look around them, for I shall work 
 fast ; and if they do not strive to keep pace with me, I shall con- 
 sume them with my judgments ; for I am compelled by law to 
 drive things ahead. Therefore, let them seek to keep up with me 
 that they may not perish with the wicked. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the light and life of the world; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
I 66 THE ANGELS IN HEAVEN. 
 
 THE ANGELS IN HEAVEN. 
 
 No. no. WEBER, UTAH, October i5tb, 1861. 
 
 A REVELATION given by Jesus Christ, concerning the angels in 
 heaven, showing their power to act as agents the order in 
 which they move, and the means by which they subsist as im- 
 mortal beings ; and showing also the kind of earth on which 
 they dwell, and what their duties to mortal beings who dwell 
 upon this earth are. 
 
 1. HEARKEN, my son, unto my words, for I am about to reveal 
 many things unto you for your comfort and satisfaction. You say 
 that you wish to know more about me, and I will strive to satisfy 
 you. 
 
 2. My angels are all subject to me. I have no trouble to rule 
 them, for they all abide the celestial law, which law is perfect. 
 And they are trained by that law from the time of their celestial 
 birth up to the time of their maturity, and even throughout all 
 eternity. They know nothing about any other than a celestial law. 
 They are not afflicted and driven hither and thither as men upon 
 the earth are. They know no evil in heaven ; for they are guided 
 by correct principles, and there is no opposition where they dwell. 
 
 3. Do the angels in heaven grow up from childhood to ma- 
 turity? Yes! How long are they in growing up from childhood 
 to maturity? But a few years according to the time which regu- 
 lates mortal beings. They grow up to maturity much sooner than 
 those do who are clothed with mortality ; and they are trained by 
 their parents to abide every celestial law ; and they have a perfect 
 knowledge of all things. They have no disposition to rebel. The 
 principle of good is the prevailing principle there. They never 
 die ; but they always retain the freshness of youth. They know 
 no pain, for they have the power over disease, and, consequently 
 they never fall victims to it. 
 
 4. Have they physical powers like those which mortal beings 
 have? Yes. 
 
 5.' Have they flesh and bones like mortal being have? Yes. 
 6. Are they, with respect to their bodily form, like unto men 
 upon this earth? Yes. 
 
THE ANGELS IN HEAVEN. 167 
 
 7. Can they labor with their hands? Yes. Do they earn 
 their subsistence by so doing? Yes. 
 
 8. A celestial earth yields its fruits in its times and in its sea- 
 sons. The angels of heaven need both food and raiment, even as 
 mortals do, and they have to work to obtain them. What man- 
 ner of food do they live upon? They live upon the fruits which the. 
 trees yield ; and also upon other fruits produced from the earth. 
 Does a celestial earth bring forth all manner of produce for the 
 sustenance of its inhabitants? Yes. Do angels live upon the 
 same kind of food that mortals live upon? Yes; to a certain 
 extent they do. In what respect does their food differ? What 
 do mortals live upon which the angels of heaven do not? Mor- 
 tals use animal flesh, to obtain which they shed blood. But the 
 angels of heaven do not eat animal flesh. In every other respect 
 they live as mortals live, even from the products of the earth on 
 which they dwell. 
 
 9. Every earth supports its own inhabitants, and has laws to 
 govern and regulate it, adapted to its case, whether in its first, 
 second, or third estate. 
 
 10. Respecting the vegetable creation : Do all trees and herbs 
 decay in heaven as they do on the earth ? No ; they grow up to 
 maturity, and always remain fresh and fruitful. They yield their 
 fruits in the seasons thereof. A celestial earth is always undergoing 
 a process of purification ; it is always undergoing a change ; but it 
 loses nothing. 
 
 11. When an earth has become celestial, and the resurrection 
 of its inhabitants is completed, it ceases to grow ; after which, its 
 inhabitants have not the power to propagate their species in that 
 world. Nothing can dwell in a celestial world but celestial beings ; 
 for if angels who are in heaven had the privilege to propagate their 
 species there, they would bring forth angels who would be in their 
 first estate only, and this could not be; for, according to the law, 
 none can enter a celestial world but resurrected beings. 
 
 12. Resurrected beings have the privilege to visit earths whose 
 inhabitants are mortal. They have the power, according to the 
 law of heaven, to visit those who are inferior to themselves ; but 
 none except those who are celestial beings can enter heaven. The 
 greater can visit the lesser ; but the lesser cannot ascend to heaven 
 to visit the greater. 
 
1 68 THE ANGELS IN HEAVEN. 
 
 13. Have the angels in heaven a correct language? Yes. Do 
 they all speak the one language? Yes. Do they understand all 
 manner of languages, as people do upon this earth ? Yes. But in 
 heaven, although they understand all manner of languages, they 
 all speak one language, being compelled by law to do so. They 
 have a higher education in heaven than men have upon the earth, 
 consequently, they have no confusion there. When will the in- 
 habitants of this earth all speak one language.'' When the earth 
 has undergone its last change and become celestial. All the chil- 
 dren of Adam, who are heirs to salvation, will come forth in the 
 resurrection in their own order ; and, as they each come forth, they 
 will be taught the same perfect language, until every son and 
 daughter of Adam, who are heirs to the resurrection, shall have 
 come forth and received their education. Who will be their teach- 
 ers? Their own parents. They will then all speak that same 
 language which will have been taught them by their parents, who 
 will have brought them forth. Will the children of Adam ever 
 learn a perfect language in mortality? No. A perfect language 
 will only be spoken by a perfect people ; imperfect beings must be 
 content with imperfect things. 
 
 1 4. What ought we to understand by perfection ? A perfect 
 people on a perfect earth abiding a celestial law. Will mortals 
 never abide a celestial law? No. Does not the fulness of the 
 holy priesthood bring about a perfect state of things upon the 
 earth ? No, not in every respect ; it brings that which is perfect as 
 far as it is revealed; but it brings only that portion to a mortal 
 earth which mortals can abide. It does not establish a celestial 
 law in all its parts ; for while men are in mortality they cannot 
 keep a celestial law in all things. The fulness of the holy priest- 
 hood gives unto that person who holds it a perfect knowledge of a 
 celestial law; but while in mortality people are not placed in cir- 
 cumstances in which they can abide it fully ; hence, mortals have 
 laws adapted to their case. 
 
 15. Does the holy priesthood, when it is upon the earth in part, 
 bring about any perfect law or doctrine which belongs to the gospel 
 of Christ? No. What is the difference between the priesthood 
 in part and the holy priesthood in its fulness? The priesthood in 
 part only gives a knowledge of the things of God in part ; but the 
 
THE ANGELS IN HEAVEN. 169 
 
 fulness of the holy priesthood gives a perfect knowledge of all the 
 laws and doctrines which belong to the gospel of Jesus Christ. It 
 reveals all mysteries both in heaven, upon the earth, and in hell 
 even a knowledge of things as they are. The priesthood in part 
 is a foreshadowing or representation of those principles which are 
 fully explained under the priesthood in its fulness. While the 
 priesthood is upon the earth in part only, a great deal of deception 
 and many false ideas creep into the Church. Under it the Lord 
 reveals himself to his people in visions, in dreams, in figures, in 
 parables, and in dark speeches ; therefore, it allows much false- 
 hood to exist undetected, which misguides the human race. 
 
 1 6. And now, behold, I speak unto you again concerning my 
 holy angels. You wish to know by what means they move from 
 heaven to this earth. They are filled with light and power. They 
 can move like thought. They come from heaven to the earth in 
 a few minutes, according 10 your time. From the time that I first 
 called you until now, I have surrounded you by my holy angels. 
 If I had not done so, Satan with his host would have slain both 
 you and these people who* believe in me. I am compelled to 
 guard both you and these people continually. If I did not do this, 
 Satan and his host would destroy both you and them. You should 
 know that my holy angels are always around you. You under- 
 stand the power of the devil as well as you understand my power. 
 You know that he is at the head of one-third of my Father's family, 
 who fell with him when my Father's family was in its first estate. 
 And you know that the other two-thirds of my Father's children 
 are under my command. And you know that Lucifer is con- 
 stantly at war with me, and with my host ; but I have power over 
 him. And you know that he is at war with you, for you know 
 that he has laid you stiff many times ; and if my host had not 
 delivered you out of his hands, he would have slain you. You 
 know how he operated upon you ; you are not a stranger to his 
 power. He has not a body so that he can operate physically 
 upon mortals as they can operate upon each other; but he can 
 strike them stiff, and take their breath from their bodies. In 
 this 'way he can destroy the children of men. But the angels 
 of heaven have bodies like unto those of mortal men, but far 
 more powerful than they have. The warriors of heaven go to war 
 
170 THE ANGELS IN HEAVEN. 
 
 in their resurrected bodies, and they have all power ; but disem- 
 bodied spirits have not. In this respect I have the advantage 
 over the devil. And I have also another advantage over him. I 
 have two-thirds of my Father's children under my command; 
 whereas, Satan has but one-third under his command. I have the 
 advantage over him in every respect. How shall I operate mine 
 enemies when I come to destroy them? My holy angels will 
 smite them dead in one minute. You shall see them ; but mine 
 enemies shall not see them. 
 
 17. You may ask me this question: If my holy angels eat 
 food, where do they obtain it from ? They move about from place 
 to place, and possess the power to do their own work, and to sup- 
 ply their own needs from time to time. They do not partake of 
 food as often as mortals do, and they are continually passing from 
 heaven to the earth, and from the earth up to heaven, which they 
 accomplish in a few minutes. 
 
 1 8. Is it far from this earth up to heaven ? Not as far as the 
 children of men have supposed that it was. They are not correct 
 in their calculations. They err in all tjieir ways. They know but 
 little about correct principles. No person can understand the 
 nature of an earth, the laws by which it is governed, and its rela- 
 tionship and connection with other planets, except I reveal them 
 to him. 
 
 29. The children of men have had a variety of ideas concern- 
 ing the earth on which they dwell, and concerning the sun, moon 
 and stars, which rule the days, weeks, months and years, and 
 which regulate the times and seasons ; but they are deceived. 
 They cannot come to a knowledge of these things, except I reveal 
 them unto them ; and I shall reveal those things to none, but to 
 him that is an heir to the fulness of the holy priesthood. I will 
 give unto him a perfect knowledge of all things, both in heaven 
 and upon the earth ; this is his right. And all the wisdom of the 
 world shall be tried by him, and come to his standard, for it is 
 correct ; and I will lead him. 
 
 20. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that to every earth 
 which is travelling up to perfection there is a sun, moon and stars, 
 to give light thereto. Therefore, the earths are independent of 
 each other, each earth having a sun, moon and stars, to rule the 
 
THE ANGELS IN HEAVEN. 171 
 
 seasons, and to light them up ; and when the earths to which they 
 belong move, they move with them, to give them light, and to 
 regulate their seasons until those earths become celestial, and then 
 they are swallowed up in a celestial light, and move in one eternal 
 day. 
 
 21. The last celestial earth is near the eartfi upon which you 
 dwell. It is clear, like unto a sea of glass ; level, like unto a plain ; 
 and most beautiful to look upon. And upon it there are many 
 temples where the authorities in heaven meet to worship. There 
 is, also, a capital city in heaven, where I and my Father, in con- 
 nection with a number of others, dwell. And in that city we have 
 a temple, where I and my Father, and other chief authorities, 
 meet. And, in due time, I will give unto you the plan upon which 
 that temple is built, and you shall build one like unto it. And 
 this temple, which you shall build, shall be built in Jackson 
 County, after the pattern which I shall show unto you. And I will 
 meet with you in that temple, as one man meets with another, and 
 converse with you whenever you wish me to do so. 
 
 22. I know what you want, and I will grant it unto you. Let 
 your heart be comforted, and know that I am always with you by 
 my holy angels. You trouble because I have withheld from you 
 the rod. You think that you ought to have it. You consider that 
 if you had it, your mind would be at rest. You need not to 
 trouble about that ; for I will give it unto you as soon as you 
 need it. 
 
 23. I have taken the responsibility of all things upon myself, 
 and I will make things work aright. I shall now begin to reveal 
 myself unto you in a more satifactory and powerful manner than I 
 have hitherto done. You will now need to hear from me often. 
 You will soon have difficulties to contend with ; but when trouble 
 is near, you shall always find me by your side. I will soon bring 
 mine enemies up to a head to that point to which I want them 
 to come before I destroy them ; but, until that time comes, they 
 shall not have the power to hurt one of those who trust in me. 
 My people must leave mine enemies in my hands ; they can do 
 nothing with them. And they shall not do anything, save that 
 which I permit them to do. Let my people place their full con- 
 fidence in me, as I have often told them before. They know that 
 
172 APPROACH OF THE TEST. 
 
 I am with them, overruling everything for their good ; therefore, 
 let them leave everything in my hands, and I will not betray their 
 confidence. 
 
 I am the Stone and Shepherd of Israel, and the- Bright and 
 Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE IMMUTABILITY OF THE PURPOSES OF GOD. 
 THE NEAR APPROACH OF THE GREAT TEST. 
 
 No. in. WEBER, UTAH, October 22nd, 1861. 
 
 i. HEARKEN unto my words, which I am about to speak unto 
 you. Why are you so low spirited ? Why do you feel so bitter 
 against me, as though I had broken the promises which I have 
 made unto you? You fear that I shall give unto your enemies the 
 power over you, and let all my words fall to the ground unfulfilled. 
 You feel that I have already, in this case, betrayed your confi- 
 dence. You feel, also, a backwardness in trusting in me for the 
 future. You say that you cannot understand my way of working ; 
 and that, on this account, you cannot place your confidence in 
 me. In consequence of this, you are oppressed until your life is 
 a burden to you. What can I do with you ? You burden both 
 me and yourself without a cause. You fear that I shall neglect 
 you. Do you not think that I know all about your situation? I 
 know all about it. You think that I keep myself too much at a 
 distance from you. It seems that you cannot trust me in the 
 smallest thing which you cannot see through. Should I give unto 
 you the power to see through all things which you have to meet 
 with, you would not need to exercise any faith in my promises ; 
 therefore, you would not, in any degree, live by faith. But you 
 must live by faith, this at present you are compelled to do. Ac- 
 cording to the law, I have to work with you gradually. I cannot 
 reveal unto you all things at once. And while I am revealing 
 unto you one .thing after another, you must exercise faith in me, 
 and you must continue to do so until I shall have revealed all 
 things unto you ; and then your faith will be swallowed in knowl- 
 edge, then you will walk by sight, and not by faith. 
 
APPROACH OF THE TEST. 173 
 
 2. You think that I do not deal fairly with you because I do 
 not give unto you the rod. You consider that I do not deal as 
 fairly with you as I did with my servant Moses. You think that 
 I gave unto him the rod before he was called to use it to encour- 
 age him, and that I ought to do the same to you. But, behold, 
 I say unto you that I did not give the rod unto him until he was 
 called to use it. The Bible does not give a full history of the call- 
 ing of my servant Moses. As I said unto you before, so I say 
 unto you again, I was several years in raising him up before I 
 gave unto him the rod. I have dealt as fairly with you as I did 
 with him. I first gave unto him the full keys of knowledge, and 
 afterwards I gave unto him the power ; and I am doing the same 
 unto you now. Why, then, cannot you be satisfied ? 
 
 3. You say that, as yet, I have not manifested the least degree 
 of power that you could perceive. I cannot do so until I am 
 placed in a position for it. And I have never yet been placed in 
 a position where a manifestation of power was necessary ; until 
 then, I cannot come out in power; this you should know. But the 
 trouble with you is this : You are afraid that I shall not come out 
 in judgment upon mine enemies when it shall become necessary 
 for me to do so. If I do not, then you may justly call me a 
 traitor. But you know that, if I do not come out and manifest 
 my power at that time, all will be over with you and these my 
 people. You need not to fear ; for I shall not leave you alone to 
 be conquered by your enemies. I am astonished at you ! Why 
 do you suffer your spirit to droop? Why do you not rise up and 
 set yourself against your enemies ? You know the obligation that 
 I am under to the posterity of Adam ; and you know that, accord- 
 ing to the law, I cannot fail to do my duty, still you are afraid 
 of me. You know that my duty both to you and to this people is 
 to protect you and them ; and yet you are afraid that I shall falter, 
 and suffer mine enemies to overcome you, and destroy my 
 work ! O, why are you so fearful ? 
 
 4. You are astonished at me because I have suffered mine 
 enemies to come up to this place and take away my people's 
 property. I will explain this matter to you. You know that I 
 have told you before that I intend to deliver all the property that 
 now belongs to mine enemies into the hands of my faithful people. 
 
174 APPROACH OF THE TEST. 
 
 And you know that I am governed by a law of justice. I cannot 
 deviate from it. If mine enemies had never taken away the 
 property of my people as spoils, I could not, according to the law, 
 take away theirs. But if they take away the property of my people 
 contrary to the law, and without their consent, then I can take 
 away theirs also, and be justified by the law in doing so. When 
 they have the disposition to unlawfully take the property of my 
 people, and take it without the owner's consent, though they do 
 not take to the value of fifty dollars, they break the law, and it is 
 accounted unto them as though they took all that my people pos- 
 sessed, which they would do ( for they have the will ) if I should 
 permit them. Therefore, if they do not do so, it will be because 
 they cannot ; and no thanks will be due to them. I shall suffer 
 them to go as far as I -want them to go, and then I shall stop them 
 in their course. I want them to go so far that I can destroy them 
 and take all their property as spoils, and give it unto my people 
 according to law. My people shall not be impoverished much by 
 them, however; for I will not suffer them to take a great deal 
 more of my people's property. 
 
 5. And again, if mine enemies were not to come up against 
 my people to destroy them, I could not, according to the law by 
 which I am governed, destroy mine enemies. I always defend 
 the truth, and act according to law. Therefore, when mine 
 enemies come up against my people with a determination to shed 
 their blood, I will lay them low. 
 
 6. But, behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph that, it is 
 you that mine enemies wish to slay. They think that, if they could 
 destroy you and a few others of my people, they could then do 
 whatever they might be disposed to do with the rest. If they 
 could accomplish your destruction, they would make the rest of 
 my people their slaves. And I say unto you, my servant Joseph, 
 that they will strive to entrap you; but I will burst up their 
 schemes, and break up their snares, and destroy them. You 
 wish to know when I intend to come out in judgment upon your 
 enemies. As I have said unto you before, so I say unto you 
 again, your enemies will set a trap to ensnare you. They will 
 come up to you, and strive to lay hold of you ; and when they do 
 this, you may know that the day of my power has come. They 
 
APPROACH OF THE TEST. 175 
 
 will then make their last struggle. At that time, I will lay mine 
 enemies low by thousands. The last attempt that they will ever 
 make in this world, they will then* make; and it will be to lay 
 hold of you. But I will hold them from you until I am ready for 
 them in every respect. 
 
 7. My people are unprepared for a manifestation of my power. 
 The minds of many of them are like the fool's eye, upon every- 
 thing except that which they ought to be upon. My people act 
 vainly. They pay but little attention to the course which they pur- 
 sue. But they will either have to lay things to heart, or they will 
 suffer great loss. 
 
 8. I am about to place a test before them that will prove what 
 they are. They will then either stand for me, or fall with mine 
 enemies. When mine enemies come up to arrest my servant 
 Joseph, he shall gather all my people together, and they shall 
 stand before mine enemies and choose then what side they will 
 take ; and if they go over to the enemies' side, I will destroy them 
 in one minute. I will save the lives of none but those who stand 
 firmly by my servant Joseph ; for those who uphold him, uphold 
 me. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 9. My people must show a willingness to uphold my servant 
 with all their power, and it shall be accounted unto them for 
 righteousness.- That minute when my servant Joseph and my 
 people stand before mine enemies, I will come as a whirlwind, 
 and the earth will shake as by an earthquake, and many will fall 
 upon the ground as dead. Therefore, let my people prepare 
 themselves for that day, and put away their follies, for it is right 
 upon their heels ; they have no time to spare. 
 
 10. And, again, it is wisdom in me that my people should not 
 travel among their enemies as much as they have hitherto done. 
 Let them stay at their own homes as much as possible, they have 
 no cause to do otherwise. Mine angels have hitherto protected 
 them. But if they do not hearken to my advice in this thing, I 
 will not protect them any more. 
 
 11. And it would be well for those who have yielded obedi- 
 ence to the fulness of my gospel, and who are now absent from 
 this place, to gather up here as soon as they can, that it may be 
 well with them ; for if those who have the means do not gather 
 
176 BRIGHAM YOUNG. 
 
 up here, I will not preserve their lives. They know their duty ; 
 therefore, let them perform it. 
 
 12. And let those, my servants, who are engaged in writing 
 the revelations which I have given, use all diligence to prepare 
 them for printing. They have no time to spare, for I shall speedily 
 burst things up. And let all my people be diligent in their duties, 
 and I will be with them unto the end. I am the Son of the 
 Eternal Father ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE WICKED CONDUCT 
 OF BRIGHAM YOUNG. 
 
 No. 112. WEBER, UTAH, October 23rd, 1861. 
 
 1. HEARKEN unto my words, O ye my people, for I am about 
 to speak unto you concerning your enemies. 
 
 2. Prepare yourselves for a sudden change, for your enemies 
 are now on your track, and they will never stay their course while 
 I permit them to live. They are determined to drive things ahead; 
 and it would be well for my people if they would be more 
 diligent. 
 
 3. The man who now stands at the head of the old Church 
 has given mine enemies his consent lor them to waste my people 
 away. They have now a free course to work in. It would be 
 well for my people to open their eyes and look around them ; for 
 trouble will come upon them as a thunderbolt, and they will then 
 have no time to prepare themselves. . I have told my people in 
 time; therefore, let them now prepare themselves. That man 
 whom I called, and placed over my Church for a season, is blood- 
 thirsty. He thirsts for your blood, and for the blood of my ser- 
 vants who are one with you. He grinds his teeth in anger. He 
 says that he will not suffer his great name to be profaned. He 
 sits in my servant Joseph's seat, and thinks that he has all power, 
 and that there is 'no power in heaven nor on the earth that can 
 move him out of that seat; but, when I am ready, I will remove 
 him in one minute. I will show him whether he has any power, 
 or not. Of all men that ever lived upon this earth, and held a 
 
BRIGHAM YOUNG. 177 
 
 ( 
 
 part of the holy priesthood, and afterwards fell, none other has 
 ever insulted me has he has done. He has committed all manner 
 of sin and blasphemy. He has striven to destroy the principle of 
 righteousness, and laid it all to my charge. He has made the peo- 
 ple believe that he was my servant, and that I have upheld him in- 
 all his abominations. And thus he has turned my people to 
 infidelity, and caused them to doubt the existence of a just God. 
 In this way he has blasphemed against me ; yet he thinks that he 
 is my servant, and that I sustain him ; and in this way he justifies 
 all his abominations. He knows nothing either about me, or 
 about just and righteous principles. He thinks that he is the god 
 of this world, and that nobody has a right to question anything that 
 he does. He thinks also that if I, the Lord, or any other authority 
 upon the earth, dare to call in question anything that he does, he 
 will fight us at once. He thinks that he is the god of all; that 
 what he says is right ; and that all other gods must come to his 
 standard, and regulate their acts by it. And thus he has made use 
 of my name to gain such an unrighteous influence over the minds 
 of my people, professing to be my servant, and acting as my 
 lord. He conducts himself as though he were the authority 
 under which I must act, and, according to which, I must even 
 square my law; and that, if I will not do so, he will fight me. 
 He must be the standard to regulate all gods by ! O the blind- 
 ness and wickedness of that man ! He surpasses in wickedness 
 all that have ever lived before him, or that will ever live after him. 
 4. And I say unto you, my son, that your enemies have laid a 
 trap for you. You know that they have fined you, and that you 
 have not paid the fine; and should your fine not be paid, they 
 will strive to lay hold of you to take you away, and this would 
 bring the test before the time ; for I am not, as yet, quite ready to 
 cut them all off. It would, therefore, be well for my people to 
 pay your fine, and in this manner to break their hold of you, for I 
 have not yet worked them up sufficiently. Therefore, let my peo- 
 ple loose your hands, and, if they will do this, I will make all 
 things work aright. If they will do their part, and work with me$ 
 I will justify them. Mine enemies want to lay hold of my servant 
 Joseph now; but I am not yet ready. They think that, if they 
 can take him, they will have conquered, and that they can then 
 
178 BRIGHAM YOUNG. 
 
 destroy my work. They do not care so* much about the property 
 of my people ; that is not the object which they are after. But 
 they are obliged to work in a certain way. They cannot attain 
 the object which they desire all at once. They are compelled to 
 work gradually. I know all their plans, and I will reveal them 
 unto you. I wish to draw them on yet a little farther ; but I shall 
 soon be ready for them, and then I will bring them up to the 
 slaughter, and deal unto them as they have desired to deal unto 
 my people. 
 
 5. I anf waiting, also, of my people; they are not ready. But, 
 whether they are ready or not, the test will shortly have to come. 
 I shall not hold it off much longer. I have told them, time after 
 time, to prepare themselves ; but they do not lay these things to 
 heart as they ought to do. They are too vain and lightminded. 
 They think that they are ready for a manifestation of my power, 
 and I cannot convince them to the contrary ; but they will soon 
 be tried as to whether they are ready or not. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, I will now give unto 
 you a knowledge of the plans of mine enemies beforehand, and 
 also a knowledge of mine own intentions with respect to them 
 even how I intend to act with them in all their movements. From 
 this time forth, you shall see your way clearly ; therefore, go about 
 your work fearlessly, and trust in me. And when the test has 
 come, and my people are gathered together, they shall show them- 
 selves ready to defend you, if necessary. And when I see their 
 willingness to uphold you, I will, as I have promised, come to 
 their deliverance ; but I wish first to try them. I will shortly give 
 unto you more, and I will make known unto my people their duty 
 from time to time. 
 
 I am the Bright and Morning Star, even Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE GREAT TEST. 179 
 
 SOME CIRCUMSTANCES FORETOLD THAT WILL 
 
 TRANSPIRE IN CONNECTION WITH THE 
 
 GREAT TEST. 
 
 No. 113. WEBER, UTAH, October 24th, 1861. 
 
 1. HEARKEN unto my words, my son, for I am about to speak 
 unto you for your comfort and satisfaction* 
 
 2. You know that I have spoken unto you before concerning 
 your enemies. I have told you what the plan is which they have 
 laid to arrest you. I have also called upon my people to loose 
 your hands, by paying your fine. But suppose that mine enemies 
 should refuse to accept the pay which you shall offer unto them, 
 and strive to obtain possession of your person, what shall be done 
 then ? You know that I have told you before that I wish to draw 
 them on a little farther and work them up to a head. I am now 
 
 ' speaking unto you to satisfy your feelings. I know your mind. 
 You want something to depend upon. You want to feel secure. 
 You wish to know what I shall do with your enemies, if, when you 
 offer to pay your fine, they will not accept of it, but, instead there- 
 of, strive to take you. You need not to trouble yourself about 
 that. I will manage that affair myself. Rather than your enemies 
 shall arrest and take you away, I would cut off from the earth two- 
 thirds of the inhabitants of this Territory. 
 
 3. If I should permit your enemies to destroy you, my work 
 would be destroyed; for I could not, according to the law of 
 heaven, appoint another man in your place. There is but one 
 man upon an earth that can hold the full keys of the holy priest- 
 hood, and if he was destroyed, the full keys of the holy priesthood 
 would be taken from the earth with him another man could not 
 take his place. Therefore, it would be better that I should cut off 
 the earth everything that opposes him, than to let him be destroyed 
 by mine enemies. If I suffered him to be destroyed, all would be 
 over, the devil would have conquered, the world would be des- 
 troyed, and all the children of Adam would return to their native 
 element, and be no more. Then how can I neglect you? I am 
 compelled to take care of you ; and in my hands you are safe. 
 Therefore, I say unto you again for your satisfaction, rather than 
 
l8o THE GREAT TEST. 
 
 suffer your enemies to take you, I will cut off' two-thirds of the in- 
 habitants of this Territory in one minute. I am on the track of 
 your enemies ; therefore, fear not. I have, from time to time, as 
 you have moved along, given unto you all the encouragement that 
 I possibly could. 
 
 4. And now behold, I give unto you a sign. When your 
 enemies crowd upon you to take you, then know that the day of 
 my power has come. 'Whenever you see this, you may know that 
 the great day has arrived. Therefore, leave your enemies in my 
 hands, and I will bring them to the right point. When difficulties 
 are near, I will always acquaint you therewith. 
 
 5. And behold, I speak unto you concerning those chief act- 
 ing officers who stand by and uphold you. Mine enemies are 
 opposed to them, even as they are opposed to you ; and they seek 
 to entrap them, even as they seek to entrap you. Therefore, let 
 those, my servants, pay their just debts (if they owe any), that mine 
 enemies may have no just claim on them. And if mine enemies 
 deal with my servants unjustly, and sue them, they shall not go to 
 law with them, but, in that respect, they shall defy them. Mine 
 enemies wish to lay hold of them to destroy them. Therefore, I 
 require that my people shall stand by those men who are one with 
 you, even as they stand by you. And if my servants will do as I 
 have commanded them, I will uphold them to their satisfaction. 
 I will take the responsibility upon myself. 
 
 6. And behold, I speak unto you concerning my people at 
 large. Let them conduct themselves, both at home and abroad, 
 in such a manner that their enemies cannot lawfully lay hold of 
 them ; and, if they will do this, I will uphold them. I can law- 
 fully uphold my people if they will do as I command them. I 
 am bound to take a lawful course in all that I do. Let my people 
 obey my words, for I counsel them aright. 
 
 I am the Stone and Shepherd of Israel, the Bright and Morn- 
 ing Star ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
DESTRUCTION OF THE REBELLIOUS. l8l 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DESTRUCTION 
 OF NEARLY TWO-THIRDS OF THE INHABIT- 
 ANTS OF UTAH TERRITORY, 
 
 No. 114. WEBER, UTAH, October 25th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am come to speak unto you, my servant Joseph, 
 concerning the inhabitants of Utah Territory. 
 
 2. I have made up my accounts with them. I have been 
 working with them ever since I first called you, and there are 
 many of them who are heirs of salvation, whom I cannot turn from 
 their wicked course. They have gone too far ever to retrace their 
 steps in mortality. I shall, therefore, have to destroy them in the 
 flesh ; but they shall come forth in the resurrection. Their des- 
 truction in the flesh will cancel all the sins which they have com- 
 mitted throughout their life times. If I could have turned them 
 from their sins, I should not now have to destroy them ; but I am 
 compelled by the law either to turn them from their sins or to slay 
 them. They cannot roam at large regardless of my law any longer; 
 for they are my covenant people, and I have a claim upon them. 
 The day of my power has now come. The time for me to settle 
 accounts with them, and to make known unto them the covenants 
 which bind them to me, has now arrived. For, according to the 
 covenant which they made with their father, Adam, they are com- 
 pelled by the law of heaven to sustain the principle of righteous- 
 ness ; and should they fail to do this, they forfeit their existence 
 in the flesh ; therefore, I have a claim upon them. 
 
 3. And, behold, I say unto you, my son, that I shall destroy 
 nearly two-thirds of the inhabitants of this Territory. The sentence 
 has been passed upon them. I have all their names recorded for 
 destruction, and I am prepared for the work. And behold, I say 
 unto you that of that number on whom I have passed the sen- 
 tence of death, there is more than one-half who are fallen spirits 
 whose names are not recorded in the Lamb's Book of Life. And 
 inasmuch as I shall be compelled to destroy all whose names are 
 recorded for destruction, I shall destroy, among that number, 
 many thousands who are heirs to the resurrection. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the other 
 
1 82 DESTRUCTION OF THE REBELLIOUS. 
 
 one-third who shall be left. I shall be able to turn them from the 
 error of their ways. I have now, to a certain extent, broken them 
 loose from the influence of the devil, so much so, that, when I 
 come out in power to their deliverance, I shall be able to turn 
 their hearts entirely unto me. They are in pain, and they are 
 wishing that I would deliver them, and set them free. They long 
 for something to liberate them, and they are the poorest of my 
 people. I have their names recorded for salvation, even as I have 
 the names of the other two-thirds recorded for destruction. The 
 destinies of both parties are fixed. I am settling my affairs as fast 
 as possible. Let all prepare for the great day which is at hand ; 
 for it will come as a whirlwind, and but few will stand. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, rny son, there are some among 
 my people who cannot fully understand the reason that I called 
 upon my people to pay your fine. It was necessary that I should 
 bring mine enemies into a certain position, and to a certain point, 
 before I should be permitted, according to the law, to destroy 
 them. Mine enemies are too fast ; they are desirous of bringing 
 things to a head at the wrong point,, and I have to bring them to 
 my terms. And, in order to do this, I have to use means to break 
 their hold until I have brought them up to that point to which I 
 wish to bring them. They claim the right to act in their own 
 sphere independently ; hence, I have to outwit them by turning 
 their plans around. In this manner, I overrule their plans for the 
 benefit of my people, make their evil purposes work to a good 
 end, and thereby, make man to serve me, and the wrath of man 
 to praise me. Mine enemies claim the right of freedom in action, 
 as well as either I or my people do. Therefore, let my people 
 understand that mine enemies have rights as well as they have, 
 and that those rights cannot lawfully be infringed upon. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Son of the Eternal Father, 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE ROD. APPROACH OF 'THE TEST. 183 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE ROD, AND THE 
 NEAR APPROACH OF THE GREAT TEST. 
 
 No. 115. WEBER, UTAH, October 25th, 1861. 
 
 1. LISTEN to the words of the Lord your God, which are quick ' 
 and powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword, and prepare your- 
 self for trouble, for you will soon meet with it. 
 
 2. As I have said unto you before, so I say unto you again, 
 make yourself ready for the great test, for it is right upon you. 
 You say that you would not care for trouble if you felt fully pre- 
 pared for it. In fact, you think that you are prepared as far as 
 you are concerned ; but that I am not at my post. You consider 
 that, through my neglect, you are entirely unprepared for the work 
 that lies before you ; and you are angry with me on account of rhy 
 backwardness. You consider that you ought to have had the rod 
 of power in your hand before this time; and that I ought not to 
 have deferred giving you the rod until the last extremity, for that 
 by so doing, your feelings are continually injured. You consider 
 that I am blamable for such conduct. Suppose that I had given 
 unto you the rod a few months ago, what would it have profited 
 you, inasmuch as you did not need to use it? You would have 
 brought both trouble upon yourself and upon my people. It is an 
 emblem of power too sacred to be trifled with. Every time that 
 it is wielded there is a meaning connected therewith. When it is 
 waved all the hosts of heaven must move forth to battle. They 
 are compelled by law to do so. Suppose that I had given it to 
 you a few months ago, even as you thought that I ought to have 
 done, and that you had taken it and trifled with it; you would, 
 by so doing, have given unto me a false sign, and I should have 
 been compelled to go out to battle ; for the celestial law, which I 
 cannot break, would bind me to do so. What would have been 
 the result of such an act ? It would have disarranged all my 
 work, and thrown all heaven out of order. But I know my duty 
 better than to give unto you the rod before the time when you 
 will be called upon to use it shall have arrived. I will give it unto 
 you then, as I have before promised you I know your pride, you 
 want to handle it. You do not care so much about the result of 
 
184 THE ROD. APPROACH OF THE TEST. 
 
 a sign as I do. Although I know that you do not wish to break 
 the law, yet if you were to have the rod in your possession before 
 you really needed it, you might in an unguarded moment give a 
 false sign. And as I feel in duty bound to prevent the occurence 
 of such an event, you must not consider that I have imposed 
 upon your rights by withholding it from you. I have done so for 
 a wise purpose in myself. When I give it unto you, I will also 
 give you to understand all that is necessary for you to know about 
 the use of it. You shall never give me a sign by it only when I 
 command you to do so ; and when I command you to give me the 
 sign to go to war, I will do so according to the law. And if we 
 work together in this manner, all things will work well between us. 
 
 3. You may wish to know what the rod is like. You will soon 
 see it for yourself, and hold it in your hand. Yea, I am just 
 about to give it unto you. I am near unto you, and I will give it 
 unto you suddenly. Prepare yourself to receive it. I have shown 
 it unto a person in this camp. He can give you a true discription 
 of it. I showed it unto him that you might hear of it, and know 
 that it is near unto you. 
 
 4. You feel as though your heart would be pained if you saw 
 your enemies coming upon you before I had prepared you to meet 
 them. But you need not to fear about that, for you shall see me 
 a short time before they come upon you, and I will fully prepare 
 you to meet them ; you shall not lack for anything at that time. 
 You need not expect them before you have seen me; for I shall 
 ride up to you, and that too, in a moment, suddenly. You know 
 my way of moving, that it is quick. I can ride up to you at any 
 time when I wish to do so, for I am around you continually. I 
 shall not have far to come when you wish to see me. You say in 
 your heart to me : " Do but as you have said that you would do, 
 and then I shall be satisfied." 
 
 5. When my enemies come to this place to train, let my peo- 
 ple mind their own business, and stay at their own homes, unless 
 my servant Joseph shall call them together. Let them do as he 
 shall command them, and I will justify them, and uphold them; 
 otherwise, they will see affliction and, death. I will control mine 
 enemies in that affair. Their aim is to lay hold of my servant 
 Joseph ; but I will see if I cannot control them. I will hold them 
 
THE PROPHET REPROVED. 185 
 
 until they become powerless. I can manage them without any 
 difficulty. 
 
 6. And as I have before commanded you, my servant Joseph, 
 pay your fine if they should ask for it ; and, in this manner, break 
 their hold off you at this time. I will take them irtD mine own 
 hands when they come, and I will make everything work well for 
 the benefit of my people. And behold, I say unto you, my son, 
 that I will move upon you and dictate you when your enemies 
 are around you, and you shall have but little difficulty with them ; 
 therefore, fear not, but be of good courage. I, even the Lord of 
 Hosts, am with you. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET REPROVED. 
 
 No. 116. WEBER, UTAH, October 26th, 1861. 
 
 i. WHEN you are ready to deliver my people, tell me, and I 
 will send mine enemies up to you. But you are not ready for that 
 work now. Your heart is faint. You cannot do anything as you 
 are now. You feel as though you had no power to back you up. 
 If you had not, you could not act much worse than you do. Look 
 about you and see whether there is anything about you to be afraid 
 of. You need not to fear ; I will not send your enemies upon you 
 as you are now. I know that, if I did, I could do nothing with 
 you. You know how you ought to act. You know what is re- 
 quired at your hands. You need not to be afraid of shadows. 
 Wait until you see something to be afraid of; and if you will do 
 this, it is all that I require of you. If you will do this, you will 
 never fear at all ; for I will take all fear away from you at that 
 time by standing by your side. You shall see that you have the 
 strongest power then. At that time you will be like unto a lion 
 among lambs. Everything will give way before you. But if you 
 see the least trouble brewing now, you are on the move ; you think 
 that it is coming, and you are unprepared for it ; and thus it breaks 
 down your feelings. O let me advise you to fear nothing until you 
 see it. You might think that I have no power, and that to trust to 
 me would* only be like trusting to a broken reed. 
 
1 86 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I say unto you, prepare yourself to 
 deliver my people, and tell me when you are ready; and as I have 
 said unto you before, so I say unto you again, I will send mine 
 enemies upon you when you are ready. But you say in your mind 
 that you will never be ready until I have appeared unto you, and 
 given unto you the necessary preparations for the work. I will do 
 this for you. I do not expect that you will be ready until I have 
 done this. I will give unto you timely warning when your enemies 
 are coming up against you. You have every inducement given 
 unto you to cheer you up. You have no cause to be downcast. 
 Then cheer up. I am the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 117. WEBER, UTAH, October 26th, 1861. 
 
 WHY do you surmise this, that, and the other? Why cannot 
 you depend upon what I have told you? I know the intentions 
 of your enemies. If I do not see fit to turn them round when 
 they come up to this place to lay hold of you, then you may know 
 that the time has arrived. I shall either turn them round and 
 break their hold of you, or else I shall destroy them. I shall 
 either do one or the other of these things. And what need have 
 you to trouble? All things are in mine hands. It matters not 
 which way I turn them round if I do turn them; and .if I should 
 not turn them round, but suffer them to destroy you, who will have 
 to bear the blame but myself? If you stand to your post all will 
 be right with you. We must all bear our own burdens ; and if 
 either of us neglect our duty, we must bear the blame. One will 
 not be blamed for the neglect of another; therefore, remember 
 that I am by your si : de. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
THE TWELVE PRINCES OF ISRAEL. 187 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING WHY AARON AND THE 
 
 TWELVE PRINCES OF ISRAEL HAD 
 
 EACH A ROD OF POWER. 
 
 No. 1 1 8. WEBER, UTAH, October 29th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he who shuts, and no one opens; and who 
 opens, and no one shuts; even Jesus Christ. And I am come to 
 explain this matter unto you. 
 
 2. Behold, I say unto you, that my Father holds a sceptre or 
 rod of power, and when I am compelled by law to go to war with 
 the inhabitants of the earth, my Father honors rne with that rod, 
 and I wield it in his name and according to his command ; and 
 in consequence, all the heavenly hosts obey me. 
 
 3. And there are twelve chief generals in heaven, who are 
 next to me in authority ; and they, also, have a rod each, and 
 when I raise my Father's rod, they all, at the same time, raise their 
 rods, and give their command. Those chief generals are my 
 Father's first born sons those who are next to me by birthright. 
 They are subject to me, and all the rest of the inhabitants of our 
 earth are subject to them. An$ thus my Father has a rod which 
 I use. And those twelve who are next to me by birthright have 
 each a rod, also ; and when these rods are raised, all the hosts of 
 heaven go to war. There are, also, many other authorities in 
 heaven ; but they do not have rods. Mine angels are all subject 
 one to another the younger are all subject to the elder; hence, 
 they all act in their places, according to their birthright. There is 
 perfect order with us, for we have a perfect organization. We all 
 know our duties, and we do them, 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, we never raise our 
 rods only according to the law of heaven. We are governed by 
 it in every respect ; therefore, when we raise our rods you must 
 raise yours, also. I will tell you when to raise your rod, and when 
 to give the command. I shall stand by your side when you do 
 this, and we shall raise our rods about the same time. I will give 
 unto you a perfect knowledge of all our movements with our 
 enemies. 
 
 5. You may ask : If there are twelve chief generals in heaven, 
 
1 88 THE TWELVE PRINCES OF ISRAEL. 
 
 what is the reason that they were not shown to John the Revelator? 
 He saw only four. I showed unto him the first four of the twelve, 
 and that was sufficient at that time. There are many things which 
 belong to the fulness of the holy priesthood which I did not show 
 unto my servant John. It was not necessary for me to reveal all 
 things unto him, for he only held a portion of the keys of the holy 
 priesthood. I only gave unto him a partial figure of the last mis- 
 sion of the angel Gabriel (the seventh angel to the earth). 
 
 6. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the twelve 
 Princes of Israel. They are the twelve sons of Adam, next to 
 Aaron by birthright ; and they stand, in connection with Aaron, at 
 the head of all Adam's children who are heirs to the resurrection. 
 The rods which they held when they were upon the earth, in the 
 days of Moses, were emblems of power, representing the twelve 
 rods which are used by the twelve chief generals in heaven. 
 And the rod which Aaron used was a representation of that rod in 
 heaven which belongs to the Eternal Father, and which is now 
 used by me. 
 
 7. The full keys of the holy priesthood give a true knowledge 
 of the order which exists in heaven. Under them, earthly things 
 will pattern after heavenly things. Hence, the twelve Princes of 
 Israel on' the earth represent, in every respect, the twelve chief 
 generals who are in heaven. And when this earth shall have 
 undergone its last change, and become celestial, those twelve 
 princes will be the first twelve rulers in Adam's world, next in 
 authority to Aaron ; and Aaron will use his Father's rod. Thus, 
 when Adam shall have become an Eternal Father, and Aaron a 
 Jesus Christ, when the twelve princes of Israel shall have obtained 
 their resurrection, and this earth been celestialized, the twelve 
 princes of Israel will claim the ruling power over this world, and 
 will again have twelve rods, which will be given to them by their 
 own Father, who will also give them all necessary power, and they 
 will rule his kingdom. All the rest of Adam's children will be 
 subject to them. 
 
 8. And behold, I say unto you, my son, prepare yourself to 
 receive your rod, and to use it. We have our rods with us, and 
 we are ready to use them as soon as it shall become necessary to 
 do so. I will reveal all things unto you concerning the use of your 
 
THE PROPHET'S COUNSELLORS. 189 
 
 rod, and I will always stand by your side after I shall have given it 
 unto you. I have it with me now, and I can give it unto you in 
 one minute ; therefore, prepare to receive it. I am the Bright 
 and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 THE RESPONSIBILITY OF GIVING COUNSEL TO 
 
 THE SAINTS PLACED UPON THE PROPHET'S 
 
 COUNSELLORS. 
 
 No. 119. WEBER, UTAH, October 3oth, 1861. 
 
 1. HEARKEN unto the words of my mouth, my son, for I am 
 about to counsel you concerning your duty towards my people. 
 I do not require of you to attend to all church business yourself. 
 You cannot do this. I have given unto you counsellors and 
 others on whom I have placed a responsibility ; and I expect 
 that every man whom I have called will do his duty, and thereby 
 lighten your burden. It is your duty to receive revelations from 
 my mouth, and write them for my people, even to stand between 
 them and me, and to give unto them my words, this is as much 
 as you can well attend to. 
 
 2. You are not required by me to burden yourself with every 
 person's duty. Let those who have duties to perform in my 
 Church perform them, and then they will ease your burden. You 
 cannot be present everywhere with my people, looking into the 
 business of all at once ; therefore, you must have others to assist 
 you. I know that you are burdened with this people in conse- 
 quence of the way in which they are now situated ; but I will 
 speedily place you in a pleasant position, and you shall be sur- 
 rounded by faithful men; but I will give unto you more of them. 
 
 3. Many of my people have done well, and I am well pleased 
 with them. Let them continue to hearken unto my words, and I 
 will shortly give unto them the victory over their enemies. I will 
 change their position in life. I shall not keep them suffering here 
 but a very short time longer. I am now drawing things to a head 
 at a rapid speed ; and when the two powers come together I will 
 destroy all mine enemies who dwell in this Territory, according to 
 
190 THE PROPHET'S COUNSELLORS. 
 
 my former promises. Let my people work with me. They must 
 remember that they have duties to perform as well as I have ; and 
 if they will discharge those duties, they shall receive the blessings 
 promised. 
 
 4. And, behold, I say unto you, my son, fix your mind upon 
 your own duty, even as I have commanded you, and place a 
 responsibility upon your two counsellors, and all things will work 
 well. Let them receive my words from you, and act upon them. 
 Let them regulate themselves in all their councils by my word 
 which they receive through you. If they will do this, I will give 
 unto them the spirit of counsel, and they shall counsel my people 
 aright. You shall not be called upon to give private counsel unto 
 my people, except in such difficult cases as those wherein your 
 counsellors feel themselves incompetent to give satisfactory counsel 
 to those who shall apply for it even where revelation needs to be 
 given to settle the matter. In such cases you may be called for, 
 and your word will be and end to controversy. In all extreme 
 cases you may be called for, but not otherwise. 
 
 5. And it would be wise for you to meet in council with your 
 counsellors, as often as twice in a week, to offer up petitions before 
 me in behalf of yourselves and of my people at large. If you and 
 your counsellors will do this, I will send the recording angel to 
 hear your prayers, and he shall record them, and present them to 
 my Father and to the other leading authorities in heaven, and we 
 will counsel upon them. And if it be lawful for your prayers to 
 be answered, we will answer them according to your request. We 
 wish to hear from you and from your counsellors in this manner, 
 at least as often as twice in a week. We will take good care of 
 you, never fear. 
 
 6. We are constantly directing you in all your movements for 
 good. We know that you are but frail men, surrounded by all 
 manner of enemies who thirst for your blood ; but you have no 
 need to fear them, for I will hold them as with an iron grasp. 
 They shall be perfectly powerless. They shall do nothing only 
 what I wish them to do in order to fill up their cup, and, in so 
 doing, they shall not afflict my faithful people to hurt them much. 
 All things will go on aright with the faithful ; but the rest will be 
 consumed. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 Amen. 
 
THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 19! 
 
 THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 
 
 No. 120. WEBER, UTAH, October 3ist, 1861. 
 
 A REVELATION concerning the origin and nature of the American 
 Government and the departure of modern legislators from its 
 principles. The apostacy of the apostles of the old Church. 
 Revealing the design of the Almighty in commanding his saints 
 not to train with their enemies. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I will reveal unto you the 
 design that I had in counselling my saints not to train with their 
 enemies. 
 
 2. According to the decree of heaven, I was compelled to 
 establish a Republican form of government upon this land, to con- 
 tinue for a season, until I shall have accomplished a certain design. 
 Notwithstanding this, the order of that great government is con- 
 trary to the true order of government which exists in heaven, and 
 which will eventually exist upon the earth. That government is 
 an exception to all other governments established either by my 
 Father or by any other God connected with the quorum of worlds 
 to which we .belong. But when we established that government 
 we had an object in view. We inspired George Washington and 
 his associates to establish that government, and to write the law 
 which should regulate the people who should occupy this land. 
 We raised him up for that purpose. He was before appointed to 
 that work. What object had we in view for establishing such a 
 government upon this land? Our object was to give unto every 
 person the right to liberty of conscience in religious matters. 
 Under that government they were at liberty to act out that which 
 was in them. 
 
 3. Under it I could have established my Church, if its admin- 
 istrators would have dealt with my people according to the law 
 which I had caused to be written ; but they would not. My peo- 
 ple were as free to act, according to that law, as they were ; but 
 they assumed power over my people, and trampled their rights 
 under their feet, and, contrary to the law, they shed the blood 
 of my servant Joseph Smith, slew many of my saints, and others 
 they drove from their homes ; but I will recompense them for it 
 all. 
 
192 THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 
 
 4. They have departed from the law which I, at the first, 
 caused to be written, and they have framed laws of their own, 
 adapted to their own corrupt purposes, in order that they might 
 shed human blood to satisfy their bloody appetites. They thirst 
 for blood all the day long, and I will give unto them blood until 
 they are satisfied. I will give unto them blood to drink, for they 
 are worthy. I will cut off the inhabitants of the United States by 
 millions ; and I will lay their land nearly waste. I will begin with 
 them as soon as I shall have purged my Church, and I will leave 
 alive none but the pure in heart. 
 
 5. And now behold, I speak unto you concerning the people 
 of the old Church. They are more corrupt than the inhabitants 
 of the United States are. They, also, thirst for the blood of those 
 who cross them in their pathway. They are continually thirsting 
 for blood. They cause those of my people who are innocent to 
 swear oaths obligating them to shed the blood of their fellow men, 
 contrary to my law. I claim the right myself to inflict the penalty 
 of death upon the transgressors of my Church ; but they take my 
 work out of rny hands. I do not call upon those whose hands are 
 steeped in blood to attend to that business. When I pass the sen- 
 tence of death upon any of my people, I do it justly.- 
 
 6. Those men whom I called to be apostles to lead my Church 
 under my servant Joseph Smith, have been pleading with several 
 of the presidents of the United States to admit them into the 
 Union (as they call it); but those presidents were ashamed of 
 them, and did not wish to be disgraced by such an alliance ; con- 
 sequently, they would not be united with them. But they still feel 
 discontented, and continue to beg for shelter under the wings of 
 their great father and protector, (?) notwithstanding that their 
 father (?) has driven them from place to place, and taken their all 
 away from them time after time, and slain their prophet, and also 
 many of their brethren. What do those apostles by such plead- 
 ings and by such conduct say to that government? They say 
 plainly : O, our father, we now care nothing about our prophet 
 whom you have slain, and our brethren, whose blood you have 
 
 i shed, nor about the many times that you have driven us from our 
 homes. We are willing to forget all this, if, father, you will only 
 permit us to become one with you. Our prophet was an imposter, 
 
THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 193 
 
 and we were deceived by him ! You did justice when you slew 
 him, and when you murdered our brethren in cold blood, and 
 when you took all our possessions from us, and drove us far from 
 you into a barren country ! Still, father, we plead with you, and 
 say, O do admit us into the Union ! We are willing to acknowledge^ 
 father, that all that you have done unto us is right ; and if you will 
 not admit us into the Union, we shall break our hearts ! And 
 now, father, inasmuch as we plead with you in this manner, how 
 can you refuse to accept of us? We have no friend but you. We 
 believe that we were deceived by Joseph Smith. We do not 
 believe now that he was a prophet. We deny everything that he 
 taught us. He led us into trouble, and if you do not help us out, 
 whatever shall we do? 0, then, do take pity on us, and help us 
 out of this difficulty. If you will do this, we will be your slaves 
 forever! O, can you turn your back upon us any longer? Do 
 accept of us, and we will never rebel against you any more. We 
 assure you that we will have nothing more to do with the doctrine 
 of Joseph Smith. We will bid adieu both to him and to his 
 doctrines forever ! After this we will take good care that his 
 doctrines shall not lead us into any more trouble. Therefore, 
 father, we ask you now, for the last time, to receive us, or we 
 perish. 
 
 7. O ye people who have yielded obedience unto the fulness 
 of my gospel, hearken unto my words, for I am about to talk to 
 you. Will you obey me, or would you rather make the same ship- 
 wreck of your faith that those have done whom I first called to the 
 priesthood under Joseph Smith? Will you go to their standard 
 and be regulated by their laws, or would you rather obey me? 
 
 8. I commanded my people not to train with their enemies, 
 and why did I do so? In order that I might obtain a clue on 
 mine enemies. I knew that, if my people did not train, mine 
 enemies would fine them ; and that, if my people would not pay 
 the fine, they would take away some of the property which be- 
 longed to my people. Were they justified by the law of the 
 United States in doing this? They were not. Therefore, by 
 extorting a fine from those of my people who are not American 
 citizens, and taking away their property, they broke the law which 
 they profess to keep. If they never take away another cent's 
 
194 THE AMERICAN GOVERNMENT. 
 
 worth of property from my people, I can now, according to the 
 law of heaven, take away all that they have. When I commanded 
 my people not to train with them, I set a trap for them, and I 
 caught them in it. I have won the first point with them. 
 
 9. They will set (as they suppose) another trap to ensnare a 
 few of my people. They are gaining confidence. They think 
 that because my people did not oppose them, but, on the con- 
 trary, suffered them to take whatever their feelings dictated, they 
 won the last cast. They feel proud now, and they think that they 
 will win the day. They are constantly studying what scheme they 
 shall put in operation next. They want to keep things on the 
 move ; therefore, I will give unto them another pretext. They 
 have to wait for me. They can do but little without me. I have 
 to lay both their plans and mine own too. And I wish to lay 
 another plan for them that will induce them to come up against 
 my people to slay them ; and this I can do without much dif- 
 ficulty, for they are bloodthirsty. They are ready for the slaughter; 
 therefore, I will bring them to that point. 
 
 10. But, when they come, they will make a pretence that they 
 do not wish to slay all my people. They will offer to protect 
 as many of them as will forsake me and go over to their side. 
 They will try to make as many of my people as will hearken to 
 them beli'eve that they are their best friends; but those who may 
 be false-hearted among my people will not have much time to talk 
 with them, for I shall speedily remove them out of the way. Mine 
 enemies will pretend that they only want my servant Joseph, and a 
 few of his brethren, and that, if my people will let them take those 
 few men, they will not molest the remainder. But, as I have said 
 unto you before, so I say unto you again, I will not spare the lives 
 of any but those who will faithfully stand by my servant Joseph, 
 and by my servants who stand by him. I have told my people 
 what I mean to do; and they can please themselves what they 
 do. They will find out that I have told them the truth. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Son of the Eternal Father ; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE ARMY OF HEAVEN. 195 
 
 THE ARMY OF HEAVEN. 
 
 No. 121. WEBER, UTAH, November ist, 1861. 
 
 A REVELATION concerning the army of heaven ; giving an account 
 of their number, the manner in which they go to war, the means 
 by which they are supported, the manner of their 'division into 
 sections by their twelve chief commanders, and the nature of 
 their duties to the promised seed of Abraham. 
 
 1. LISTEN to the words of the Lord your God, for I am about 
 to draw near unto you, and reveal many secrets- unto you in order 
 that you may be prepared for the work which I have called you to 
 do. When I reveal unto you the secret things of heaven I am draw- 
 ing near unto you. No person can know me except I reveal myself 
 unto him ; and I cannot reveal myself to any person only accord- 
 ing to the law by which I am governed. I am drawing nearer 
 unto you every day. I am giving unto you a knowledge of the 
 most sacred things. I shall soon have revealed all that is neces- 
 sary for you to know before I come and reveal myself in person 
 to you to stand in your presence and to be seen by you during the 
 whole of the time that we shall be at war. At such times, I shall 
 never leave you, but I shall stand by your side, and you will see 
 me before your eyes continually even as one man sees another. 
 Hitherto you have not needed to see m9 only to convince you 
 that I exist ; and I showed myself unto you to convince you of 
 that fact. But I shall now show myself unto you in a more satis- 
 factory manner; therefore, prepare yourself for a visit from me, 
 for L shall soon visit you ; and when I come, I shall abide with 
 you. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning my war- 
 riors. I have told you that they are commanded by twelve 
 generals, who are my Father's firstborn sons. They were ordained 
 by Him to fight the battles of Abraham's seed ; for his seed are 
 my covenant people, and I am compelled to fight their battles. 
 All the warriors of heaven received their ordinations to the au- 
 thority which they hold ungier the hands of my Father, who has 
 ordained hundreds of millions. He now is, and always has been 
 busily engaged. He has had no time trifle away. All the inhabit- 
 ants of our earth are also busily engaged. They are not slothful. 
 
196 THE ARMY OF HEAVEN. 
 
 3. The angels of heaven cannot officiate in any office upon 
 our earth until they have received an ordination from my Father. 
 They do not all receive an ordination of the same kind. Some 
 are appointed to one office, and some to another ; but they all 
 officiate in their own callings, and there is no confusion among 
 them. 
 
 4. I revealed unto my servant John some things concerning 
 the army of heaven. He saw them and knew their number. 
 Their number is two hundred millions. They are all horsemen, 
 and they are divided into twelve sections, which are commanded 
 by twelve generals, each of whom commands an equal number. 
 There are also other officers, all of whom hold positions according 
 to their birthright, and are subject from the least unto the greatest 
 to those chief generals ; hence, there is no cause for contention 
 among them, for they all possess that which it is their right to pos- 
 sess, and they are all satisfied therewith. 
 
 5. It is the duty of that army to rule the four quarters of this 
 earth. The first four generals each rule one-quarter, and the other 
 eight generals assist them. They stir up the nations to war, and 
 they quell them again. They move forth among the armies of 
 men, and turn them hither and thither as it seemeth them good, 
 and no earthly power can hinder them. They go to the kings 
 and rulers of the earth when they are sitting in council, and turn 
 them hither and thither at their pleasure. Kings and rulers are 
 all brought to their terms. The needs of this army are supplied 
 by that portion of the angels who are otherwise engaged. The 
 whole army is not always upon the earth. Its presence here is 
 not always needed. Sometimes a portion of it is in heaven, while 
 the other portion is upon the earth. The warriors of heaven do 
 not all come to the earth together, except when there is great 
 trouble upon the earth. At such times they are all needed ; but 
 that is very seldom, for, if necessary, they could cut off the entire 
 inhabitants of the earth in a few minutes. Some of them, how- 
 ever, are continually passing from the earth to heaven, and from 
 heaven to the earth. They often exchange places for their own 
 convenience ; but there is, nevertheless, always a force upon the 
 earth sufficiently large for all necessary purposes. They will be 
 more busily employed in the future than they have been in the 
 
THE ARMY OF HEAVEN. 197 
 
 past, even from this time until their work is finished; which 
 work is now only fairly beginning. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, it will be your duty to raise 
 your rod first, and give the first command ; and as soon as you 
 have given your command to the heavenly host, I will give mine 
 to the twelve chief generals, and they will give theirs to each of 
 their seperate sections, one after the other, in quick succession, 
 commencing with the one who is first according to birthright, and 
 ending with the last of the twelve. In this order the army of 
 heaven will go out to war, and, when they do so, they will make 
 great slaughter. The armies of the nations of the earth cannot be 
 compared with the army of heaven ; they have not been trained 
 for war as the angels of heaven have. 
 
 7. And now, behold, I say unto you, my son, seek to strengthen 
 yourself for the great work that lies before you. I will not send 
 your enemies upon you until you are prepared to meet them, 
 should I do so, I should of all men be the most dishonest. I 
 know that your enemies would slay you if I did not prevent them. 
 I know that you depend upon me, and I will never betray your 
 confidence. Therefore, be true to your trust, and watch for the 
 day of my power to come ; for it will come upon many as a thief 
 in the night. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Stone and Shepherd 
 of Israel, the Bright and Morning Star ; even Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE FOUR AND TWENTY ELDERS. 
 
 No. 122. WEBER, UTAH, November 2nd, 1861. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto me, my son, and I will speak unto you again. 
 Inasmuch as there are four and twenty elders in heaven, sitting 
 upon four and twenty seats, under the throne of my Father, and 
 there are only twelve of them who use rods, what part does the 
 remaining twelve of the twenty-four act upon our earth? They 
 are twelve generals who act under the authority of those first twelve 
 who use the twelve rods, being next to them by birthright, and, 
 
198 THE TWENTY-FOUR ELDERS. 
 
 consequently, they act under them. What part will those twenty-four 
 apostles act under the fulness of the holy priesthood? Will they 
 all hold the same authority? No ; one will be subject to another 
 according to their birthright. The lesser will be subject to the 
 greater; but the apostleship will not be placed in its right order 
 until all the high priests assemble upon Mount Zion. Other high 
 priests will act in the various places of those twenty-four legal heirs 
 to the apostleship until they come and take their right places. 
 Behold, I am the Lord, and I will call such high priests as will be 
 suitable to fill their places until they come to take their own places. 
 Some of them are in the spirit world, and a few of them are upon 
 the earth ; and I will place those who are upon the earth, who are 
 handy to come at, in their own places. They are valiant men. 
 
 2. When my kingdom is set up, and my work has become 
 extensive upon the face of the earth, I shall divide my Church into 
 twelve parts, and I shall call every section a stake, and I shall 
 place twelve apostles over those twelve stakes, even those of the 
 apostles who hold the first birthright, and the remaining twelve will 
 become subject to them. This order will exist upon the earth, 
 even as it does in heaven. Earthly things under the fulness of the 
 holy priesthood will be a perfect representation of heavenly things, 
 even a perfect order of things. 
 
 3. What is the difference between Holy Ghosts and the 
 warriors of heaven? Is there any difference between them? No. 
 The warriors of heaven were ordained by their Father both to in- 
 fluence those who are heirs of salvation and to direct their foot- 
 steps, and also to fight their battles. The warriors are Holy 
 Ghosts. 
 
 4. As I have said unto you before, so I say unto you again, it 
 is not necessary for all the hosts of heaven to be upon the earth at 
 once. It is the duty of the first four captains of the Lord's Host 
 to govern the four quarters of the earth, even to govern the heathen 
 nations, who know nothing about the gospel, who are fallen angels. 
 And it is the duty of the three next in authority to the first four, to 
 take charge of that portion of Adam's children who yielded obedi- 
 ence to my gospel in the flesh ; and in times of great trouble all 
 the hosts of heaven will come out and assist those three generals. 
 They take the charge of those of Adam's children who yield obedi- 
 ence to my gospel in times of peace ; and when trouble comes 
 
THE TWENTY-FOUR ELDERS. 199 
 
 upon them and they need assistance, the first four generals and 
 also the other five come to their assistance ; and when those twelve 
 all come out to battle, all the armies of heaven go out to war ; and 
 thus the whole army of heaven go out to war when they are called 
 upon to do so. 
 
 5. What is the reason that those warriors cannot be seen by 
 mortals on the earth, when there are millions of them upon the 
 earth continually ? They are close by people upon the earth, and 
 still they cannot see them. What is the reason of this? It is 
 darkness which mortals are enveloped in. They can see nothing 
 but that which is mortal like unto themselves. Can the angels of 
 heaven see mortals upon the earth and know what they are doing? 
 Yes ; they know the thoughts of their hearts before they have 
 spoken one word. They can see and understand all about mortals; 
 but mortals can neither see nor understand anything about them, 
 except I reveal it unto them. No mortal can either see me or 
 mine holy angels except I show them unto him; and he must 
 be transfigured in order to see either me or mine holy angels. He 
 must be enveloped by a holy influence, wherein his spirit becomes 
 enlightened by being touched with that holy influence. It is the 
 spirit which is within mortals that sees either me or mine holy 
 angels, and not the mortal eye. None can see me except that I 
 envelop them in a holy influence, and by that means quicken 
 their spirits ; and I shall do so to none but those who are worthy. 
 Therefore, let those who wish to see me prove themselves worthy. 
 If they will do so, I will envelop them by a holy influence and 
 quicken their spirits, and they shall both see me and my holy 
 angels. And if they do not see me when I come in power, they 
 may know that they are unworthy of that favor ; therefore, if my 
 people desire to see me, let them prepare themselves for it. I am 
 he that was, and is, and is to come ; even Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
200 LIFE AND DEATH. 
 
 REVELATION EXPLAINING THE PRINCIPLES UPON 
 WHICH MEN LIVE AND DIE. 
 
 No. 123. WEBER, UTAH, November 5th, 1861. 
 
 1. HEARKEN to me, my son, for I am about to make known 
 unto you those things which you have enquired of me to know. 
 You wish to know why all people do not live to the same age. 
 You are astonished that while some live to become old, others die 
 in their childhood. You wish to know the reason of this. You 
 think that all people ought to live to an equal age, and that, if 
 they do not, there is something wrong. I have told you before 
 that the children of men neither gain nor lose their salvation while 
 in mortality; and that the number of years which they live in 
 mortality does not give them any advantage more than they had 
 gained before. They either won or lost their claim to the resur- 
 rection before they entered into mortality. It was ordained in 
 heaven that each of Adam's children should receive a mortal 
 body; but it was not ordained that they should all live to the 
 same age. Some die at one age, and some at another. To the 
 one who lives to an old age there is no more credit due than to 
 the one who dies young. Whether the children of Adam are in 
 this world, or in the spirit worlds, it matters not. If they are 
 striving to do good they are accepted. Some people are ap- 
 pointed to live upon the earth for special purposes, and others are 
 not. It is necessary for some to live upon the earth to an old 
 age, because their services are needed. It is also necessary that 
 others, in order to fulfil the law of heaven, should take mortal 
 bodies and die in their childhood, because their services are most 
 needed in the spirit worlds. 
 
 2. Adam's children cannot all dwell upon the earth at the same 
 time ; neither can they all be absent at the same time. They are 
 divided. Some of them must dwell upon one earth, some upon 
 another. They are called to inhabit four different earths even 
 this earth, and three spirit worlds. And in all those worlds, the 
 children of Adam are called to superintend and minister in temporal 
 things. This is their duty upon all earths until they have received 
 their resurrection, and then they will minister in spiritual things, 
 
LIFE AND DEATH. 2OI 
 
 having become celestial beings. But how can a spirit minister in 
 temporal things upon a spiritual earth ? The spirits which are in 
 the spirit worlds have charge of the products of the earths on 
 which they dwell; for a spiritual earth yields forth all manner of 
 produce, even as this earth does. Spirits need both food and 
 clothing, even as mortals do ; and high priests who are called to 
 minister in those spirit worlds are supported there by the children 
 of Adam, as they are upon this earth. Therefore, to keep things 
 in order, in all those worlds, the children of Adam must be 
 divided. 
 
 3. But before spirits can enter into the two worlds called the 
 terrestrial and the telestial worlds, they are obligated to come and 
 take upon them mortal bodies, and die. All the children of" 
 Adam who are heirs to the resurrection have a part to act either 
 on this earth or in the spirit worlds before mentioned. When I 
 take children from this earth, I do it in order to send them to 
 their own fields of labor. Such have been appointed unto 
 death. 
 
 4. Behold, I am the Lord, and I lay no claim to fallen spirits. 
 Satan claims the right to lead them, for they belong to him ; but I 
 claim the right to lead those who are heirs to the resurrection, for 
 they belong to me. But I overrule all Satan's plans, and I shall 
 bring him and his host to naught. The reason that the children 
 of Adam die before they have grown up to their full stature, is, in 
 many instances, because they were before appointed unto death. 
 But there are some cases wherein people die before their appointed 
 time. Such bring death upon themselves through their own follies. 
 Such are condemned by the law of heaven, being accounted 
 unworthy to fill a place either in the terrestrial or telestial worlds. 
 They are, therefore, compelled to return to their father, Adam, by 
 whom they are chastened for their sins, and again sent upon the 
 earth to fill their appointments ; and when they have faithfully 
 filled them, they are accounted worthy to pass on into the spirit 
 worlds. 
 
 5. It is the duty of Aaron, fhe firstborn son of Adam, and a 
 few more of Adam's first born sons, to take three missions upon 
 this earth in mortality. Aaron has not yet been upon either the 
 terrestrial or telestial worlds ; but, at all times when he has not 
 
202 THE GREAT TEST. 
 
 been upon this earth, he has been with his father. He will not go 
 to those spirit worlds until he shall have finished his last mission 
 upon this earth. He will then go and await his resurrection, and, 
 in the resurrection, he will be the first who will come forth. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that I will 
 heal all those of my people who are sick, who are not appointed 
 unto death, after you shall have repeated the ceremony, which I 
 have given, over their heads. My people need not to send for 
 doctors, for if they are appointed unto death, a doctor cannot heal 
 them. I will heal all those who are not appointed unto death 
 myself; therefore, let my people save all such trouble and ex- 
 pense. I am Jesus Christ. Even so, Amen and Amen, 
 
 THE TIME OF THE GREAT TEST. 
 
 No. 124. WEBER, UTAH, November 6th, 1861. 
 
 REVELATION wherein the Lord promises to strengthen the prophet 
 and the faithful among his people so that they may behold him 
 and the host of heaven at the time of the great test ; and in 
 which he reasons with, reproves, and threatens with destruction 
 the rebellious. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am come to speak unto you, my son. I know 
 what you require at my hands. You say that, if I were ready to 
 deliver my people, you would be, also. But you think that I am 
 not ready. You consider that I have yet much to reveal unto you 
 before I shall have prepared you to meet your enemies ; but I can 
 soon prepare you. I have been revealing unto you the secret 
 things of heaven rapidly, in order that I might prepare you to meet 
 your enemies. I am now moving fast. I have yet a little to reveal 
 unto you, and when I shall have revealed it, I shall be ready to 
 come and remain with you; and at all times when trouble is on 
 hand I shall abide with you. Should I ever leave you, it will be 
 in times of calm, when there is peace between my saints and mine 
 enemies. 
 
 2. You say that you cannot exercise sufficient faith in me to 
 receive the rod. You feel your weakness in this matter. What 
 
THE GREAT TEST. 203 
 
 shall I do for you ? I will strengthen you abundantly. I will 
 surround you by millions of my holy angels, and I will open your 
 eyes so that you shall see them. You shall move and act entirely 
 under their influence. You shall not feel the weakness of human 
 nature. You shall feel strong, as though you were the Lord, and 
 had all power in your hands. You shall have all the heavenly host 
 around you to go to battle at your command, and you shall see 
 millions of them. You shall even be among your enemies as a 
 lion among lambs. They shall be as nothing before you. 
 
 3. As I have said unto you before, so I say unto you again, 
 before you see your enemies coming upon you, you shall see me 
 and my holy angels. They shall surround you, and when your 
 enemies are coming towards you, you shall constantly see them 
 before your eyes. I shall permit your enemies to come close to 
 you, and to my people, and that for a wise purpose in myself. 
 They will ask my people to deliver you and a number of my 
 servants up to them ; and they will promise my people that, if they 
 will do so, they will spare their lives, and let them go. And some 
 of my people will attempt to go over to their side ; but before they 
 arrive there, I will smite them dead. The reason that I shall 
 suffer mine enemies to come so close up to my people, will be to 
 try them. If they can stand faithful to my servant Joseph, and 
 not flinch, then they will be worthy of a deliverance ; but, if they 
 cannot do so, I shall slay them with mine enemies. 
 
 4. I will give unto my people who are faithful a fair chance. 
 When they behold mine enemies they shall also see both me and 
 the heavenly host. When they see the one power, they shall also 
 see the other; I will deal fairly with them. Those who are worthy I 
 will abundantly strengthen ; but there are a few among my people 
 who are unworthy, and I shall neither show myself, nor my holy 
 angels unto them. They will be destroyed. 
 
 5. I have told those who are unfaithful what I required at their 
 hands, and yet they would not do as I commanded them. They 
 treat my words lightly, and do not even believe them ; but their 
 days are numbered. . They will know to their sorrow that I have 
 told them the truth; but they are not honest before me. The 
 truth they do not want. They have not obtained a testimony of 
 the truth because they were unworthy of the operations of my 
 
204 THE GREAT TEST. 
 
 spirit upon them ; and no person can have a testimony of the truth 
 except it be given by my spirit; and my spirit will give a testimony 
 to none but to those who are worthy. You will know who those 
 unfaithful people are when I come to move mine enemies out of 
 my way. I have done my duty to my people. I have revealed 
 unto them the hidden mysteries of my kingdom : this many of 
 them know. All my people might obtain a testimony of the 
 truth, if they would seek it lawfully, for I will give a testimony to 
 all those who are worthy. Therefore, those who have not obtained 
 a testimony should know that they are unworthy of it. 
 
 6. Let those of my people who expect to be saved in the day 
 of my power rise up and shake themselves, and act as though they 
 had some life within them. They are going to sleep. If they do 
 not awake and shake themselves from their slumbers, I will awaken 
 them suddenly. I have told them enough about their carelessness. 
 I will not tell them many times more; but if they do not heed me, 
 I will slay many of them. I have told them time after time what 
 I require of them, and yet they will not do as I have commanded 
 them. If they wish to be my saints, they must work with energy. 
 They will never accomplish anything by going to sleep. They 
 have something to do as well as I have, and I call upon them to 
 do their duty. I have a claim on them, as well as they have 
 upon me. I have always done my duty to them, and if they will 
 not willingly do their duty to me, I will make them do it, or 
 destroy them. They are often calling upon me to confer some 
 blessing or other upon them, and if I do not give unto them the 
 things which they ask for, almost as soon as the words are cut of 
 their mouths, they are ready to censure me for not being true to 
 them. They will not act honestly with me. All that I ask of 
 them is to serve me with all their hearts ; but, instead of doing so, 
 they go to sleep and suffer evil spirits to overcome them. And, if 
 my people will not serve me with all their hearts, those spirits will 
 cause them to deny the truth, as some have already done, and they 
 will not be able to stand, for my angels will not attend them. 
 
 7. My people also bring sickness upon, themselves by their 
 unfaithfulness. They give way to evil influences which afflict 
 them, and then they call upon me to heal them. They impose 
 upon me in almost every respect. They would not have had so 
 
THE ROD IS PROMISED. 205 
 
 much sickness among them as they have had, if they had done as 
 I commanded them. Had they kept my commandments, they 
 could have kept those evil influences far from them, and then they 
 would not have been afflicted by them. I do not require more at 
 the hands of my people than what they are able to do. All that I 
 require of them is to serve me with all their hearts. This they 
 could do with ease if they would ; and they must do it, or I will 
 not uphold them, and if I do not, then they will go to destruction. 
 I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET IS PROMISED THAT, BEFORE HE 
 
 IS CALLED UPON TO DELIVER THE PEOPLE 
 
 OF GOD, HE SHALL RECEIVE THE ROD. 
 
 No. 125. WEBER, UTAH, November yth, 1861. 
 
 1. WHY are you so restless in your feelings when you know 
 that I am always with you ? You are afraid lest, when your 
 enemies come against you, I shall not be with you. It seems as 
 though you cannot exercise sufficient faith in me to obtain the 
 blessings which belong to you, and which I have promised unto 
 you. 
 
 2. Perhaps you will say, " If you did not hold them from me, 
 I could ; but you hold them from me, and until you shall give 
 them unto me, I cannot obtain them. You also keep yourself at 
 a distance from me. You will neither draw near unto me your- 
 self so that I can see you, nor give unto me the rod which belongs 
 to me. You withhold from me my rights, and how can I feel well 
 towards you while you deal with me after this manner? How can 
 I place confidence in you? You will reveal unto me revelation 
 after revelation, as often as I ask you to do so. I have no trouble 
 with you in this respect. But what is the reason that you will not 
 pay me a satisfactory visit? You take a delight in oppressing me. 
 You know what I require at your hands. I have called upon you 
 time after time to strengthen me. What is the reason that you will 
 not do so? You know that I cannot do the work that you have 
 sent me to do unless you strengthen me. All that I ask of you is 
 
2O6 THE ROD IS PROMISED.' 
 
 tu prepare me for the work. 'But, inasmuch as you do not come 
 and manifest yourself unto me in a satisfactory manner, it lessens 
 my confidence in you. There must be some cause for your back- 
 wardness, and, in consequence thereof, you are causing me to 
 sustain a great injury. You are breaking my confidence in you, 
 and, apparently, operating against both yourself and me. You 
 either have some cause for dealing with me in this manner, or you 
 are greatly to blame. Then tell me why you have neither visited 
 me in a satisfactory manner nor given unto me the rod. Tell me 
 why I am still left to contend with such weakness ; for, in conse- 
 quence thereof, I am unfit to perform my duty." 
 
 3. Behold, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I will make known 
 unto you the reason of all these things. There are reasons why I 
 have not given unto you the rod, and, also, why I have not visited 
 you in a satisfactory manner. You have never, as yet, needed the 
 rod, neither has it been necessary for me to visit you in the man- 
 ner in which you wish me to visit you. It is contrary to the law 
 of heaven for me to give unto you the rod until your enemies are 
 about to come against you. Neither can I visit you in a manner 
 that will satisfy you, except I bring unto you the rod. It is the 
 power that you want ; and you cannot have the power except you 
 have the rod. You will not be able to deliver my people out of 
 bondage except you have it ; for my angels are not compelled to 
 go to war excepting when the rod is waved. And inasmuch as I 
 cannot bring unto you the rpd until your enemies are about to 
 come against you, I deem it unwise to come to you without it; 
 for I know that after I should have visited you, you would not be 
 satisfied. It is not my presence merely that you want, for you 
 have seen me. It is the power that you need, and that you must 
 have before you can deliver my people. Therefore, when I come, 
 I will bring the rod and place it in your hand, and until then you 
 will not need to see me. At that time, and ever afterwards, you 
 will have all the power that you need, and you will have no more 
 cause to complain against me. I know that you are now situated 
 that you can do but little ; but I shall shortly liberate you. I am 
 bound by law to withhold the power from you until you need ii ; 
 therefore, strive to reconcile yourself and wait patiently until I 
 come ; and as soon as you need to see me I shall come ; and 
 
THE ROD IS PROMISED. 207 
 
 when I come I shall be as ready to fight the battles of my people 
 as hitherto I have been to reveal the hidden mysteries of my king- 
 dom unto them. I am not afraid of mine enemies ; and that my 
 people shall then see. I have the power to defend the principle 
 of truth, and I will defend it. It will be no difficulty for me to 
 destroy all mine enemies out of my way. 
 
 4. But my people are becoming weary of waiting for me. 
 They are becoming slothful and careless about those things that 
 flow from my mouth. Many of them think that they have trusted 
 in me as long as it is necessary to do so. The words of my 
 mouth will not satisfy them. They are short-sighted indeed ! 
 They have not waited for me long, as yet. They have suffered 
 but little through obeying my commandments ; neither will the 
 faithful ever suffer a great deal through doing so ; for the day of 
 suffering for the faithful is over. I will take their burdens upon 
 myself, and I will bear them. Let not my people grow weary 
 now, for they have nearly obtained the victory ; but rather let 
 them arouse themselves, and struggle for their liberty, and they 
 shall obtain it. It is worth struggling for ; and those who will not 
 struggle for it, shall not obtain it. I will give the victory unto all 
 those who are worthy ; therefore, let my people prove themselves 
 worthy of the promised blessing, and they shall obtain it. I am 
 the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 5. And behold, I speak unto you concerning mine enemies : 
 They have laid their plans to come up against my people, and 
 they will soon be here to try their skill ; but as soon as they are 
 ready, I shall be ready also. And I say unto you, my son, that I 
 will give unto you sufficient warning, so that you may prepare my 
 people to meet them. At that time I will satisfy you. Lift up 
 your head and rejoice, and prepare to meet me, for I shall speedily 
 visit you, and remain with you. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am he that was, and is, and 
 is to come ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
208 THE PREACHING OF THE GOSPEL. 
 
 THE DESTRUCTION OF THE WICKED. PREACHING 
 
 OF THE GOSPEL BEFORE THE SECOND 
 
 DESTRUCTION. 
 
 No. 126. WEBER, UTAH, November 8th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he that shuts, and no one opens, and that 
 opens, and no one shuts. And I am come to speak unto you, my 
 servant Joseph. 
 
 2. You wish to know how I am about to proceed in the deliver- 
 ance of my people, and I will make known unto you the course 
 which I intend to take in this matter. Inasmuch as I have told 
 you that I intend to cut off two-thirds of the inhabitants of this 
 Territory, you wish to know how I intend to cut them off. You 
 wish to know whether I intend to destroy them all at once, or not ; 
 and I will inform your mind upon this subject. I do not intend 
 to cut them all off at once ; but I will first cut off all that stand in 
 my way. After that I shall send my people to Salt Lake City, the 
 central point in this Territory. I shall march forth before them, 
 and I shall lead the hosts of heaven before them to battle ; and 
 nothing that wishes to oppose me will be able to stand before them. 
 I am the Lord. 
 
 3. At the time of the first destruction, I shall cut off the chief 
 authorities and bishops of the old Church ; and thus I shall break 
 the bands which now bind my people together in slavery. When 
 the first command is given, I shall clear those officers out of the 
 way ; and by so doing, I shall preach a loud sermon to those who 
 will be left alive. 
 
 4. And of those who will be left alive, I shall gather together 
 upon the public square, those who will hearken unto me, as I have 
 before said unto you. And those who will not hearken unto me, 
 and yet assemble at that place, I shall destroy. In this manner 
 I shall purge my Church. I shall leave alive none but a portion 
 of those who are heirs to the resurrection, and of them I shall be 
 compelled to destroy nearly one-half. 
 
 5. When I shall have broken the bands which now bind my 
 people together in the old Church, I shall send my servants 
 through this Territory to preach 'to, and to gather the people to the 
 place appointed. And should any gather there who are not heirs 
 to the resurrection, I shall destroy them. 
 
DESTRUCTION OF THE ENEMIES. 209 
 
 6. All those who gather there will have to pass through a 
 straight place, where I and my servant Joseph will stand, in order 
 to examine all that pass through ; and all who will be permitted to 
 pass us, will be accounted worthy of a place in my kingdom on 
 the earth. I have given unto my servant Joseph the gift of dis- 
 cernment in part. He now possesses it to a great degree, and when 
 I come to him, I will give it unto him perfectly. And when we 
 shall be separating the sheep from the goats, I will stand with him, 
 as one man stands with another. And when I shall have purged 
 my Church, there will be but few more than one-third of the peo- 
 ple who are now living in this Territory left alive. Mine enemies 
 little think what lies at their doors ; if they did, their hearts would 
 fail them ; but it is hidden from their eyes. They rush forward 
 like the unthinking horse does when it rushes out into battle; and 
 they will be destroyed. They know not what they are doing. 
 
 7. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you wish to know 
 how I intend to destroy mine enemies. It is not wisdom in me 
 to reveal this secret fully unto you at this time ; but I will shortly 
 reveal it unto you. I will not withhold from you anything which 
 I can reveal unto you. According to the law by which I am 
 governed, the/e are some things which, at present, I am forbidden 
 to reveal unto you ; but I shall reveal them unto you when the time 
 shall have come for them to be revealed ; until then, I shall be 
 compelled to hold some things from you. Everything will come 
 forth in its own time and place; and out of its time and place 
 nothing will be revealed by me. 
 
 8. You may ask me the question : Can the heavenly hosts 
 use swords and guns and other deadly weapons, as men upon the 
 earth can ? Yes ; they can use any kind of deadly weapons that 
 mortal men can. They can slay men in many different ways. 
 They can draw their breath out from their bodies, and cause them 
 to fall dead by thousands without shedding their blood, or ap- 
 parently wounding their bodies. They have the advantage over 
 mortal men in every respect, and they are prepared for the work 
 which they are called to do. Therefore, I say unto you, my son, 
 let your mind be at rest as to the manner in which I intend to slay 
 mine enemies. I will slay them when they come to lay hold of 
 you, and that you shall see. I will reveal unto you one thing after 
 
210 DESTRUCTION OF THE WICKED. 
 
 another, as you shall stand in need thereof; therefore, be of good 
 courage, and I will be with you unto the end. I am the Lord. 
 
 9. And, behold, I say unto you, 'my people wish to know what 
 I mean by saying that I am waiting for them. They think that, if 
 the day of deliverance was before appointed by law, they could do 
 nothing neither to forward nor yet to hinder the work. What shall 
 I say unto them upon this matter? That day has never been 
 appointed by the law of heaven ; but when I shall have brought 
 the two powers together, then the time will have come. I am 
 compelled by law to bring those two powers together, and in order 
 to do this I have to influence mine enemies to come up against 
 me; and this I could have done long since, if- my people had been 
 ready to preach my gospel. I wished to give unto them all the 
 opportunity that I could, and I have been very urgent with them, 
 because I wanted them to be well prepared. It would be folly in 
 me to cut off all mine enemies before I should have prepared a 
 number of men to preach to those innocent people who will be 
 left alive. I am, therefore, waiting for those men whom I have 
 called. They are not fully prepared to preach my gospel in its 
 fulness. 
 
 10. The appointed time for me to come out of my hiding 
 place is when my servants shall have prepared themselves for the 
 work ; for there is no law in heaven which appoints the day on any 
 other principle. When I have a people to deal with who are 
 altogether ignorant of me and of my works, and who are called to 
 such a work as that which lies before my servants, the law of 
 heaven gives me the privilege of doing the best that I can to in- 
 struct and prepare them for it. I am compelled by law to destroy 
 mine enemies, and to establish my kingdom, and to save the world; 
 but I am not compelled by law to commence to deliver my people 
 on a certain day. I have to do this when I can make all things 
 ready. Therefore, let my servants do all that lies in their power 
 to learn the principles of my gospel, that they may be able to 
 preach it to others when they shall be sent to do so. I am Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE RODS OR SCEPTRfiS OF POWER. 211 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE ORDER BY WHICH 
 ALL WORLDS ARE GOVERNED. 
 
 No. 127. WEBER, UTAH, November 9th, 1861. - 
 
 1. LISTEN unto me, for I am about to speak unto you con- 
 cerning the origin and order of all rods, which are sceptres of 
 power, placed in the hands of certain men according to their birth- 
 
 t rights. 
 
 2. There is an order by which all worlds are governed. To 
 every world which has been created there are thirteen rods, which 
 are used by fourteen persons who are at the head of the govern- 
 ment of each world. The first rod belongs to the father, who is 
 the first of the fourteen, and is used by him and by his firstborn 
 son who is the second of the fourteen. The other twelve rods are 
 owned and used by the remaining twelve, who are also firstborns, 
 and whose birthrights immediately follow the birthright of the 
 firstborns. 
 
 3. The privilege to use his father's rod is granted to the first- 
 born son, because he is called to act in his father's stead. When 
 the world of a high priest is in its first estate, he is seldom upon 
 it. He is absent on missions, preaching the gospel upon other 
 earths which are passing through mortality, or in the terrestrial 
 and telestial earths, and, consequently, is almost entirely absent 
 from home. And inasmuch as his world needs to be governed, 
 and he cannot be at home himself to govern it, he places his own 
 sceptre in the hands of his firstborn son, and he rules his father's 
 world while it is in its first estate, because he is always at home. 
 He never leaves his father's earth while it is in its first estate. 
 And when an earth arrives at the first celestial point, where he is 
 compelled by law to govern his own earth and a mortal earth 
 below it, which is depending upon him to govern, save and exalt it; 
 and inasmuch as a God cannot leave his own earth according to 
 the law, and come down upon a mortal earth to lead his own hosts 
 out to battle, he has to give unto his firstborn son the power to 
 command all his host in his stead, and to do this he has to give 
 unto him his sceptre, and he acts in the name and by the authority 
 of his father j and the hosts of heaven obey the command of the 
 
212 THE RODS OR SCEPTRES OF POWER. 
 
 firstborn son as though the Father himself was there commanding 
 them. 
 
 4. The inhabitants of a celestial earth are compelled to obey 
 the command of the firstborn son when he acts under his Father's 
 authority, and in his absence. The father's field of labor is upon 
 his own earth, among his own children ; and the firstborn son's 
 field of labor is upon this earth when the full keys of the holy 
 priesthood are upon it. 
 
 5. The duty of the Eternal Father is of a two-fold nature. . 
 He has two worlds to govern ; and in order to perform both these 
 duties, he remains at home with a portion of his children, and 
 sends his firstborn son with his host of warriors to rule the inhabit- 
 ants of this earth and establish his kingdom, destroy the power 
 of evil, and save the world. This is the duty of the firstborn son. 
 
 6. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the presi- 
 dent of the high priesthood upon the earth. He claims the right 
 to hold a rod of power which belongs to his Father. And in con- 
 sequence of his Father being the presiding God over a quorum of 
 Gods, his time is occupied in the performance of his own duties, 
 and in counselling with other Gods who are connected with him, 
 therefore, he cannot leave his own world ; consequently, he gives 
 unto his son his own sceptre, and sends him down to the mortal 
 earth belonging to his quorum to rule it. He is also compelled by 
 law to swear an oath in the presence of his son that he will sustain 
 him, even should he be compelled to call out the entire inhabit- 
 ants of every celestial earth under his command in order to do so. 
 The Father acts in one place, and the son acts in another ; each 
 one performing their separate duties. The son, in his Father's 
 absence, acting for him and under his authority, 
 
 7. And it is the duty of the president of the high priesthood 
 on the earth to command the heavenly host. He must raise his 
 Father's rod and give the first command, and when he has done 
 so, Jesus Christ must raise his Father's rod, and give the second 
 command to the twelve chief generals ; and each of them must 
 also give their separate commands in their own order, from the 
 first to the last. The reason that the seventh angel is called upon 
 to give the first command unto the heavenly host, even before 
 Jesus gives his command, is on account of his birthright, he being 
 
THE RODS OR SCEPTRES OF POWER. 213 
 
 the firstborn son of a God who rules over a quorum of worlds, 
 and his authority must be acknowledged first, and after him the 
 authority of Jesus must be acknowledged; and this order con- 
 tinues from the first to the last. 
 
 8. Every world that is created is entitled to thirteen sceptres 
 or rods, which rods all proceed from the first God of all, and 
 they belong to the Father and the twelve firstborn -sons to all 
 worlds, whether celestial, or mortal, or in their first estate. There 
 is a set of rods to each world, and those rods remain upon their 
 own separate earths to be used by the firstborn sons upon those 
 earths which are in their first estate. Those rods are not sent 
 from one earth to another. While in their first estate, each set 
 of rods remain upon the earths to which they belong until those 
 earths become celestial. 
 
 9. Thirteen rods are a set ; and when one world after another 
 becomes celestial, and are appointed, according to law, to rule the 
 next mortal earth below, the firstborn son brings his Father's rod, 
 and all the rest of the twelve generals bring their rods with them. 
 When they are sent by their Father to establish his kingdom upon 
 the earth, and when they have done their work upon the earth, 
 and this world has become celestialized, then Jesus Christ will 
 give his Father his rod back again, and each of the twelve gen- 
 erals will keep their own rods upon their own earth. Jesus will 
 never use his Father's rod after he has done with it this time, until 
 his Father becomes the president of a quorum of Gods; then I 
 (Jesus Christ) shall use his rod again, even as Moses will use his 
 Father's rod upon this earth. 
 
 10. This is the order in which all worlds are governed; both 
 those which have been created, and those which hereafter shall be 
 created. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Bright and Morning Star; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
214 INSTRUCTION FOR THE SAINTS. 
 
 REVELATION INFORMING THE SAINTS HOW TO 
 
 ACT WHEN THEIR ENEMIES COME TO 
 
 ARREST THE PROPHET AND 
 
 HIS ASSOCIATES. 
 
 No. 128. t WEBER, UTAH, November gth, 1861. 
 
 i. WHEN I am ready to come in power, I will make it known 
 to you in time for you to make all things ready for it. You may 
 rest yourself perfectly contented upon that matter. You shall not 
 be insulted and imposed upon by your enemies much longer. 
 You need not to fear the threats which they may make against you, 
 and think that, when they come up against you, I shall not be 
 ready to meet them, for I shall. They cannot come until I permit 
 them ; and I shall not permit them until I am perfectly ready for 
 them. You need not to trouble yourself about your enemies 
 bringing false debts against you, and threatening you with the con- 
 sequence if you do not pay them. They cannot come upon you 
 until the right time. It is right that they should have a clue on 
 you of some kind or another, in order to bring them up against 
 you. They will pretend that what they do against my people will 
 be done according to their law. They will bring false debts 
 against them, in order that they may have a pretext to come up 
 up against my people to shed their blood ; pretending that my 
 people are thieves and will not pay their debts, and, consequently, 
 deserve to be slain. They will come up to this place and strive to 
 lay hold of you and a few more chief men who are closely con- 
 nected with you ; and they will offer to spare the lives of all the 
 rest of my people if they will deliver up to them those men who 
 are the ghief authorities of my Church. And in this manner they 
 will lay their false and hellish plans in order to shed innocent 
 blood. They wish to do their bloodthirsty acts under a pretence 
 of law ; but they will not accomplish their desire ; for I will not 
 favor their bloodthirsty appetites sufficiently to let them kill one per- 
 son, either saint or sinner. I shall do all the fighting myself. They 
 will shed no blood, for I will hold them as tight as though they 
 were screwed in a vise, until I slay them all. I shall be the exe- 
 cutor, and I shall inflict the penalty of death upon those who are 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR THE SAINTS. 215 
 
 worthy of it. I shall not leave that work to corrupt, bloodthirsty 
 men. 
 
 3. And, behold, I say unto you, my son, you shall not pay to 
 
 your enemies any more unjust debts. And if they sue you, and 
 
 strive to bring you before their courts of law, you shall not go. 
 And if they seek to arrest you, you shall call my people together, 
 and they shall show themselves willing to stand by you, and pre- 
 vent your arrest, if it becomes necessary. Should but few men 
 come to arrest you, my people shall surround you, and when they 
 see that they cannot take you, they will go back without you ; but 
 when they come the second time, they will come with a great force, 
 feeling determined to take you. I wish to take a course to bring as 
 many of them up to this place as I possibly can, In order to slay them. 
 If a large number of them should come to take you at the first 
 attempt which they will make, then I shall come out and destroy 
 them all. In that case, I shall have gained the point that I am 
 striving for. All that I wish is to draw a large number of them 
 up to this place. I do not want to commence in this place with a 
 few; and if but few come to try to take you in the first attempt, let 
 my people surround you, as I have before said unto you. They 
 shall not be hurt by their enemies. You will see the object which 
 I have in view for counselling both you and my people in this 
 wise. I want to bring a large number of them up at the same 
 time before I destroy them. It matters not to me whether they 
 come in a sufficient number at the first time, or whether they shall 
 have to come a second time. When a sufficient number of them 
 come up at once, I will come out upon them. I am compelled to 
 take a certain course. Therefore, you will now know how to act 
 when your enemies come up to take you. I will shortly give unto 
 you more upon this subject. Let this suffice for the present. I 
 am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
2l6 THE HIGH PRIESTS' QUORUM. 
 
 MANNER OF ORGANIZING A HIGH PRIESTS' 
 QUORUM. 
 
 No. 129. WEBER, UTAH, November nth, 1861. 
 
 1. LISTEN unto me, my servant Joseph, for I am about to 
 speak unto you concerning the organizing of the high priests who 
 are in my Church into a quorum. 
 
 2. Inasmuch as I have organized the first presidency of my 
 Church, the apostleship, and the priesthood of Aaron, it now 
 becomes necessary for me to organize the high priesthood, also. 
 It will be of great benefit to the high priests if they will do their 
 duties ; but if they do not, they will suffer loss. They must gather 
 themselves together and instruct each other, and seek to learn the 
 principles of the fulness of my gospel, and to prepare themselves 
 to preach it to their fellow men. The high priests will have to 
 bear the chief burden of my Church, and they will be assisted by 
 the priests of Aaron. Much will be required at their hands, and 
 if they will seek, with all their hearts, to prepare themselves for 
 the work which I have called them to do, I will be with them in a 
 powerful manner, both by visions and, by dreams, and also by 
 open manifestations. I will even come into their assemblies, and 
 meet with them ; and those who are sufficiently faithful shall see 
 me. They shall know that I am with them when they meet 
 together in a quorum capacity, for I will visit them. It is their 
 privilege to see me if they are faithful enough ; and if they do 
 not see me occasionally, when they are met together in a quorum 
 capacity, they may know that they are not sufficiently faithful. I 
 am the Lord, and lo, I come quickly. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, it is my will that my servant 
 Alexander Dow should prepare himself to fill the office unto which 
 I have called him. I know his intentions. Let him seek counsel 
 from the mouth of my servant Joseph, whose right it is to instruct 
 him in all his duties in my Church. 
 
 4. All my people, whether high or low, shall seek counsel from 
 the mouth of my servant Joseph, and obey it. I will uphold no 
 person who opposes him. His word shall not be called in ques- 
 tion by my people; but they shall obey his word in all things, as 
 
ETERNAL PROGRESSION. 217 
 
 though I stood in their midst and spoke unto them myself. I am 
 responsible for what he says and does ; and if they will obey him, 
 they will obey me, for I am constantly with him, influencing him, 
 and he shall not go astray ; and, ere long, all the world shall feel 
 his power. I am the Lord. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that you 
 shall give unto my servant Alexander Dow two counsellors, such as 
 I shall show unto you. And it would be well if you would gather 
 the high priests together as soon as you can, and organize 
 them into a quorum. And let them meet together in a 
 quorum capacity at least once in each week, and oftener, 
 if they can make it convenient Let them rise up like men and 
 set themselves against evil. They are my high priests, and I 
 will take care of them if they will cling to me with all their hearts. 
 
 I now give unto you no more on this subject. Let this suffice 
 for the present. I am the Stone and Shepherd of Israel, and the 
 Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE LAW OF ETERNAL 
 PROGRESSION. 
 
 No. 130. WEBER, UTAH, November nth, 1861. 
 
 i. WHAT shall I say unto you, my servant Joseph? I perceive 
 that your mind is much burdened in relation to the principle of 
 eternal progression. You cannot see the order by which, consist- 
 ently, the second and third firstborn sons, and also all others of 
 the sons of the Gods, who are heirs by law to the godhead, can 
 become Gods. I have not, as yet, revealed unto you in its fulness 
 the principle of eternal progression. I have only revealed unt'o 
 you the order by which the firstborn sons arrive at the godhead. 
 This I have perfectly revealed unto you ; but I have much more 
 to reveal unto you concerning the principle of eternal progression. 
 I will shortly reveal unto you the order by which all those who 
 do not fall from exaltation in their second estate, arrive at the 
 godhead. The order by which the second firstborn, and all others 
 
2l8 ETERNAL PROGRESSION. 
 
 of the sons of the Gods, who are heirs by birthright to the god- 
 head, progress, differs somewhat from the order of the firstborn 
 sons. The firstborn sons of the Gods have an order altogether 
 different in its nature from the order by which second firstborn 
 and other sons become Gods. 
 
 2. No God can have more than one firstborn son, whom he 
 can call his only begotten son. Only begotten sons are of the 
 royal blood, and are of the first order ; and the second born sons 
 are of the second order; thus all the sons of the Gods have their 
 rights, and they follow each other in their own order. The first- 
 born son steps out first, and the second, in course of time, follows 
 him ; then the third, and so on, until all who are heirs to that 
 blessing step out to become Gods. Therefore, the order by which 
 the firstborn sons become Gods, differs in its nature to the order 
 by which all the rest arrive at the godhead. 
 
 3. You may rest yourself satisfied, my son, in relation to the 
 laws of eternal progression. You cannot understand the separate 
 orders of progression except I reveal them unto you. I deemed 
 it wise only to give unto you a partial knowledge of the principles 
 of eternal progression and exaltation. I could not reveal unto you 
 all things at once. You know that I have continued to reveal 
 unto you one principle after another, from the time that I com- 
 menced with you until now. You know that, if I had revealed 
 the hidden things of my kingdom any faster unto you than what I 
 have done, you could not have borne it. I have never, since this 
 world began, revealed the hidden mysteries of eternity to any 
 other prophet as fast as I have unto you. You have been placed 
 in a more difficult position, and have suffered more than any other 
 prophet who came before you, or that will ever succeed you, and 
 your situation compelled me to drive things ahead. Therefore, I 
 was compelled to deal with you in a different manner to that in 
 which I have ever dealt with any other prophet ; but your afflic- 
 tions are now almost over. 
 
 4. Lift up your head, and stand to your post like a man, and 
 I will shortly move the wicked out of your way. I know that you 
 are weak, and able of yourself to do but little. I do not expect 
 much of you. I will do the fighting. All that I require of you is 
 to walk up to your post, and I will take your burden upon myself, 
 and bear it. 
 
THE DECEITFULNESS OF THE WORLD. 2 19 
 
 5. And now, behold, I say unto you, that I will shortly reveal 
 unto you the principles of eternal progression and exaltation in 
 their fulness. Therefore, fret not, neither be impatient, but wait 
 my time, and all will be well. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE DECEITFULNESS OF THE WORLD. 
 
 No. 131. WEBER, UTAH, November i2th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, you think that the law of 
 heaven gives great scope unto the wicked ; even power to afflict 
 the pure in heart who are compelled to bear their insults and 
 abuse~to such an extent that they have no real pleasure upon the 
 earth. 
 
 2. Both you and my people have suffered so much from the 
 hands of your enemies, that you are induced to believe that the 
 law of heaven either gives unto the wicked the power to oppress 
 the righteous to a painful and unreasonable extent, or that I do 
 not do my duty in this matter, and prevent such oppression ; for 
 you consider that both you and my people are oppressed by them 
 until your lives are a burden unto you. You consider that they 
 have power over you, and that they trample your rights under their 
 feet, and that there appears to be no help for you. You say that 
 all that I have yet done has been to promise to deliver you, and 
 that I have done this repeatedly, but that I have never yet ful- 
 filled my promises. You also say that you are weary of waiting 
 for me. You consider that you cannot raise that amount of 
 courage which is necessary to enable you to strive against your 
 enemies, while I, apparently, give unto them the victory over you. 
 You consider that you cannot struggle against both them and me ; 
 and that I am assisting them by allowing their oppression to 
 remain upon you ; and that, because I have allowed this state of 
 things to continue so long, you can hardly raise sufficient faith to 
 believe that I shall ever move it off you. Having suffered so 
 much, during such a long period of time, you think that the 
 promise of God is news too good to be true. You have been so 
 
220 THE DECEITFULNESS OF THE WORLD. 
 
 much accustomed to bear the oppression and abuse of your fellow 
 men, that you have become inured to it ; and it is difficult for you 
 to hope for anything better. On this account it is very difficult for 
 me to make you believe that I shall ever deliver you and my peo- 
 ple, although you know that, if I act according to the law, which I 
 cannot break, I cannot fail to deliver my people. 
 
 3. You have seen but little in the world besides abuse and 
 deceit, and having been so often deceived by people upon the 
 earth, you are almost afraid to believe and trust in me. O how 
 hard it is for me to deal with men upon the earth ! But you may 
 venture with -safety to believe on my word. If people upon the 
 earth have deceived you, I have not, neither will I ever do so. 
 All my prophets whom I have sent upon the earth have seen so 
 much of its wickedness and deceit, which are its leading principles, 
 that they have scarcely expected to meet with anything else. 
 When the truth was told them, they could hardly believe it. Even 
 when I spoke unto them, they were almost ready to believe that I 
 lied, like unto the children of men, who will not believe a word 
 that comes from my mouth unless I give unto them irresistible 
 evidence of its truth, and then they will scarcely believe it, fearing 
 that it might come from a wicked source. Do what I will, I can- 
 not deal with them with any degree of satisfaction. The deceit 
 of this world afflicts the minds of all people who come into it 
 until they have no confidence in each other, nor yet in me. It is 
 the foundation of all the disunion, affliction and sorrow which now 
 exists among men. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that it is the deceit 
 which yon have seen in the world which has injured you. You 
 look for nothing else but deceit among the children of men. And 
 when I speak unto you, you can scarcely believe me. To believe 
 what a person says is out of the common course of things. O, 
 that your mind could have been kept unaffected when you have 
 seen the deceit that has been practiced in the world. I could 
 then, with greater satisfaction both to you and myself, have worked 
 with you ; for never before has a man been created upon the earth 
 as unassuming, honest, humble and faithful as you are. You are 
 beloved both by me and my Father above all men that ever lived 
 upon the earth. You are even equal, in honesty and virtue, to my 
 
THE MISSION OF MOSES. 221 
 
 Father. Your love of and firmness to the truth surpasses that of 
 all others who ever lived upon this earth before you, or that will 
 ever succeed you. And oh, how it pains me to see how you have 
 been injured by the deceit which you have experienced among^ 
 men ! Oh, how it pains me to endure the suspicions of the man 
 with whom I am so closely connected, and through whom I have 
 to work and perform all my miracles among men, and whose 
 right it is to bring down all power under his feet ! Sut I will 
 speedily remove all suspicion far from him. It has greatly afflicted 
 me in times past ; but I shall not be burdened with it much longer, 
 for I will suddenly remove it from him. And after that, he will 
 not be suspicious of me any more. I will give unto him all that 
 he wishes to have, and then he will be satisfied. I am the Light 
 and Life of the world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING MOSES WHEN HE WENT 
 
 TO DELIVER THE CHILDREN OF ISRAEL 
 
 OUT OF THE HANDS OF PHARAOH. 
 
 No. 132. WEBER, UTAH, November i3th, 1861. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword, and I will reveal unto you many 
 things. You have often wondered how I dealt with my servant 
 Moses while I was performing such mighty miracles through him, 
 in overthrowing Pharaoh and destroying Egypt. I was with him 
 myself. I stood by his side, and he saw me before his eyes con- 
 tinually, even as one man sees another. And I spoke unto him 
 mouth to mouth. I told him when to raise his rod, and when to 
 lower it. And when he smote the Egyptians with plagues, I stood 
 by his side and told him what kind of a plague to smite Egypt 
 with. And when he, by virtue of his authority, pronounced a 
 curse upon the Egyptians, I fulfilled it. It was his duty to pro- 
 nounce curses upon his enemies, and it was my duty to fulfil them. 
 Thus we worked together in unison, each one performing his own 
 part. If he had pronounced a curse upon anything, and I had not 
 
222 THE MISSION OF MOSES. 
 
 fulfilled it, I should have broken the celestial law of heaven ; for 
 by it I was bound to make his words good. He also was com- 
 pelled by the same law not to pronounce a curse upon anything 
 until I had told him to do so. And he never broke the law of 
 heaven while he was upon the earth. He never pronounced a 
 curse upon anything until I told him to do so ; and his word never 
 failed. When the president of the high priesthpod is upon the 
 earth, and when there is trouble on hand, I am compelled by law 
 to stand by his side. I cannot fail to do this ; but I am not com- 
 pelled by the "law to stand by his side when he is not in trouble. 
 When he is surrounded by enemies who are striving to destroy 
 him, if I did not come and stand by his side then, I would have 
 broken the law of heaven. If I should neglect him then, I should 
 be of no use neither to him nor yet to my people ; if I did that, I 
 should entirely neglect my duty ; for it is my duty to fight the 
 battles of my people, and to establish my kingdom upon the earth 
 forever ; and even when the president of the high priesthood is 
 upon the earth it is my duty to guard him when he is not ap- 
 parently surrounded by enemies. I am compelled by the law of 
 heaven to take care of him from his childhood up. Mine angels 
 have guarded him from his infancy ; but he has not always seen 
 them. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, I did 
 not give the rod unto my servant Moses until he was called to use 
 it. If I had given unto him the rod before he was called to use 
 it, I should have broken the law of heaven ; for it forbids me the 
 privilege of delivering the rod into your hands until you are called 
 to use it. I have dealt with you even as I dealt with my servant 
 Moses, for thou art he, and my dealings with him are always the 
 same. Let him come to the earth whenever he may, he is always 
 one with me, for we work together. 
 
 3. When my servant Moses was upon the earth, and when I 
 had fully prepared him, I sent him to Egypt to deliver my people, 
 Israel. I met him there and delivered unto him the rod. But 
 O how he did murmur against me while I was raising him up ! 
 And when I sent him from his father-in-law in Midian to Pharaoh 
 in Egypt, I had hard work to get him started. He said that he 
 could not deliver my people, and that the Egyptians would laugh 
 
THE MISSION OF MOSES. 223 
 
 at him. Even after I had given unto him all the keys of the holy 
 priesthood, I had hard work to move him. I gave him all the keys 
 of the holy priesthood while he lived with his father-in-law, Jethro. 
 I did not wish him to go to Egypt until I had (with the exception 
 of placing the rod in his hand), fully prepared him for the work 
 which I had called him to do. He said that he did not wish to 
 go to Egypt to be laughed at, and after this manner he contended 
 with me. He fought against me with all his might. 
 
 5. I had promised to meet him in Egypt and give unto him 
 the rod, and also the power necessary for the work that I had 
 called him to do; but he did not fully believe me. He feared 
 that I should not fulfil the promise that I had made unto him. 
 He, therefore, went to Egypt with faltering steps, murmuring all 
 the way until he arrived there. Nevertheless, I met him there 
 according to the promise which I had made unto him, and I 
 strengthened him until he was satisfied. And when he saw that I 
 had fulfilled the promise which I had made unto him, he humbled 
 himself greatly before me. At first, he could \not believe ; but 
 when I had given unto him the rod, he placed all confidence in 
 me, and afterwards his faith never failed. He had the strongest 
 faith that ever a prophet had upon the earth. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you my son that, after I shall 
 have placed the rod in your hands, your faith will never fail you. 
 You will then suddenly become strong. You have murmured 
 against me many times ; but you have not murmured against me 
 any more than Moses did, although the spirit that now dwells in 
 your body is the same that formerly dwelt in the body of Moses; 
 and, for convenience, I sometimes call you my servant Moses, and 
 at other times, my servant Joseph. The bodies that you have 
 inhabited are two, distinct bodies, but the spirit is the same. 
 
 7. And now, I say unto you, lift up your head and be strong, 
 and know that I will be as faithful unto you as I was unto my ser- 
 vant Moses. You shall never justly have cause to complain of me. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. Let this suffice for the present, 
 and I will, shortly, speak unto you again. I am Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
224 THE FIRST PRESIDENCY. THE OLD CHURCH. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE FIRST PRESI- 
 DENCY, AND THE TWELVE APOSTLES OF 
 THE OLD CHURCH. 
 
 No. 133. WEBER, UTAH, November i4th, 1861. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto me, my son, and I will speak unto you con- 
 cerning the apostles of the old Church. I gave unto them a 
 chance to save their lives, but they would not accept of it. They 
 treated my words lightly. They considered them scarcely worthy 
 of their notice. They felt so great that my words had but little 
 weight with them. While I was sending revelation after revelation 
 to them for their consideration, they thought that, when I should 
 see that they would neither hearken unto them, nor respond to the 
 call which I made upon them, I should give up the chase. They 
 thought that they had me fast, and that, if they should set them- 
 selves against me, I could do nothing. In this way they flat- 
 tered themselves/ that they could overpower me that I should give 
 up to them, and that they would continue unmolested. They 
 thought that they had all the bishops and leading authorities under 
 their control, and that I had no chance at all with them. They 
 set themselves against me with all their power, and called upon all 
 the people throughout this Territory, who. had not received their 
 endowments, to come up and receive them. They wanted help 
 to fight against me; and they thought that, if they could get 
 all my people bound to them by their wicked oaths, they would 
 uphold them while they fought against me. By so ~doing, they 
 expected to block up my way so that I could not obtain a foot- 
 hold among my people. They thought that when I should per- 
 ceive that there was no chance for me I should (as they call 
 it) "let them slide," and abandon my work; but, to use their 
 language, "there is no back out to me." I can make them give 
 way without any difficulty. They can neither tie my hands nor 
 block up my way. They can make no bands that I cannot break, 
 and that too, without putting myself to much trouble. Oh, their 
 wickedness ! Of all men who ever held the apostleship upon the 
 earth, they are the most corrupt ; none others have ever insulted 
 me as they have. They have done all that lay in their power to 
 
THE FIRST PRESIDENCY THE OLD CHURCH. 225 
 
 destroy Adam's posterity, and to send this world back to its native 
 element. Rather than suffer any of their failings to be brought to 
 light, and to be kno^n by their fellow men, they would destroy 
 Adam's posterity, and disorganize his world. O what love they- 
 have for their fellow men ( ? ) They are not worthy of human 
 forms. What shepherds my people have had to take care of 
 them ! My people may blame me for calling and placing those 
 men over them ; but I did not call them all. I called only a few 
 of them ; the rest were called by men. If I had no better men to 
 assist me than those, I should be hard set for help. I shall not 
 forget them ; but I will repay them for all their abominations 
 when I shall have brought them to the place where I can do so. 
 My people ought not to blame me for their unfaithfulness. I was 
 compelled, in the infancy of my Church, to call some men to act 
 in the priesthood ; and when I called some of those apostles, I 
 had not many men to choose from, consequently, I did the best 
 I could. 
 
 2. Those who have been called to the apostleship by Brigham 
 Young, I never called ; for I never spoke unto him. I never gave 
 him the authority to call any person to the apostleship; for that 
 right does not belong to him. He took that authority upon him- 
 self, as he has done in many other things. I called him through 
 my servant Joseph Smith to preside over the apostleship; and I 
 never called him to fill any other office in my Church. He has 
 assumed one thing after another. He could not be satisfied until 
 he had placed himself in Moses' seat. If he had not done that 
 thing, but had humbled himself sufficiently, his life would have 
 been spared ; but, in consequence of his presumption, I shall be 
 compelled by law to move him out of Moses' seat. He cannot 
 sit in that seat after I am ready to move him out. If he had 
 never placed himself in it, it would never have become necessary 
 to move him out of it. When he placed himself there, I left him ; 
 for I never sustain that which I have not appointed ; and I never 
 appoint except by law. He unlawfully assumed the rights of 
 another, which act has led him to destruction ; and not him only, 
 but also the rest of the apostles who are connected with him. 
 Had it not been for that act, I should not have entirely forsaken 
 them. I could not sustain another in the place of my servant 
 
226 THE FIRST PRESIDENCY. THE OLD CHURCH. 
 
 Moses ; therefore, I abandoned them ; and when I did so, the 
 devil undertook to lead them, and they did not know the differ- 
 ence. They do not know me from the devil. They are so far 
 gone that they do not know the operations of my holy messengers 
 from the operations of devils. 
 
 3. The enquiring mind might think that it was fore-ordained 
 that Brigham Young shquld assume the place of the president of 
 the high priesthood ; but it was not. It was known in heaven 
 that he would do that wicked act, and that he would also lead my 
 people to destruction ; but he was not appointed to do it. It was 
 his dishonesty, presumption, and blindness which caused him to 
 do it. None of my people were fore-ordained to commit sin. 
 They do it because they choose to do it. Sometimes they commit 
 sin wilfully ; sometimes on account of blindness. Some commit 
 sin under one impression, and some under another; but none are 
 compelled by an irresistible decree to do so. If they were, I 
 could not justly punish them for it. Such a principle would for- 
 bid all punishment for crime. Some of those men who are at the 
 head of the old Church, committed sin because they were blinded 
 and overpowered by the devil ; and others of them have com- 
 mitted sin through their carelessness and dishonesty. They chose 
 to do it because they loved it. But the difficulty with them is 
 that when I offered them deliverance out of the hands of the 
 devil, they would not accept of it, but continued to sin against 
 both light and knowledge, which proves that they are corrupt men. 
 If I suffer the devil to overcome my servants, and to lead them 
 into bondage, it is my duty, if they will hearken unto me, and 
 accept deliverance, to deliver them out of his hands ; but if they 
 will not, it proves that they are as corrupt as the devil is who led 
 them into the sin that they afe all of one mind. I sent unto 
 those men offer after offer. I pleaded with them as a father 
 pleads with his son ; and I promised to pardon all the sins which 
 they had committed while they were in the hands of the devil. 
 Notwithstanding all that I offered them, they clung to the devil, 
 because they loved him better than they loved me. They would 
 not accept of deliverance out of his hands. What are they worthy 
 of? They are worthy of the same treatment that the devil is ; for 
 they love the devil better than they love God, and sin better than 
 
THE FIRST PRESIDENCY. THE OLD CHURCH. 227 
 
 righteousness. They ought to go with the devil, and they shall go 
 with him. I will send them all off the earth together ; for they 
 surpass in wickedness all men that I ever called to the priesthood 
 before them. In former times I have seen my servants whom I 
 have called to the priesthood, in trouble, and I have delivered them 
 out of it time after time, and they humbled themselves before me 
 with all their hearts, and felt thankful for the blessing which I con- 
 ferred upon them. But these men, when I offered them deliver- 
 ance, would not accept of it they must be slain ; but they cannot 
 wear a martyr's crown. They have loved to live with the devil, 
 and they shall die with him. They have been one with him in 
 life, and in death they shall not be separated. O what apostles 
 they are ! They are a disgrace both to me and my Father, and 
 I do not intend that they shall take my name into their corrupt 
 mouths very many more times. I will shortly stop their breath. 
 They shall not deceive my people but a few more days. They 
 use my name to obtain an influence over my people ; and while 
 professing to be my servants, they act like devils ; and thus they 
 strive to make my people belive that I am as corrupt as they are. 
 I now add no more. I am the light and life of the world; 
 even Jesus Chiist. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE MANNER IN WHICH REVELATIONS ARE 
 GIVEN TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 134. WEBER, UTAH, November i5th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, you have often desired to 
 know of me the whole secret of the manner in which revelations 
 are communicated to you ; but I did not deem it wise to fully 
 reveal this matter unto you until now. 
 
 2. As I have often told you before, I am governed by law, and 
 I am compelled to reveal things unto you in their proper order. I 
 could not, when I commenced with you, reveal unto you the deep 
 and hidden mysteries of my kingdom. I was obliged to com- 
 mence with you in a small way first. I have revealed, and shall 
 continue to reveal unto you from time to time as you are able to 
 bear it, all necessary information. 
 
228 THE MANNER IN WHICH REVELATIONS ARE GIVEN. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that I and my Father 
 and other chief authorities who are nearly related to us by birth- 
 right, have a holy place where we meet together in council ; and 
 all the books which contain the celestial law, and all other laws by 
 which all worlds in their first and second estates are governed, are 
 in our possession ; and by consulting them from time to time we 
 obtain all the information necessary to govern Adam's posterity. 
 All the laws which will be given to you to govern this world are in 
 our possession, and we shall shortly commence to reveal them 
 unto you. You need not think that the time when I shall com- 
 mence to give unto my people the law is a great way off; for when 
 I once begin, I will move things out of their way quickly. They 
 need not to think that I shall not have an opportunity to give unto 
 them a law before the temple is built, for I shall. It will be one 
 of the first things that I shall reveal unto my people after I shall 
 have cut off mine enemies from among them. I shall be com- 
 pelled to give unto them a law in order that I may be able to 
 govern them ; for no people can be governed without a law. Let 
 my people think about this, and prepare themselves for it. 
 
 4. When the temple shall have been built unto me in Jackson 
 County, I shall then begin to send my law to the nations of the 
 earth, and I will make them abide it. I will send it from one 
 nation to another, and I will cut off everything that opposes it. 
 In establishing it throughout the earth, I shall cut off the earth's 
 inhabitants by millions. But I shall not give the law unto the 
 nations of the earth as soon as I shall give it unto my people. My 
 people will have it first, because they will need to be governed by 
 it ; for it is according to the decree of heaven that the law should 
 first be given unto my people, that by abiding it themselves they 
 may be prepared to send it to the nations of the earth. They will 
 receive it many years before mine enemies will. They will receive 
 it from me, but mine enemies will receive it from them. This is 
 the order in which it will come to the earth, and be transferred 
 from one nation to another. 
 
 5. And now behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, I will 
 make known unto you the way in which I give unto you the revela- 
 tions of my Father. As I have said unto you before, so I say unto 
 you again my Father has a high council in heaven, where we dwell, 
 
THE MANNER IN WHICH REVELATIONS ARE GIVEN. 229 
 
 and the condition of this earth is very often brought before our 
 notice by the ministering angels, whose duty it is to minister from 
 heaven to the earth, and from the earth to heaven. And behold, I 
 say unto you that we never give you a revelation upon any subject 
 whatever until it has first passed through our council, where it is 
 first written by a recording angel, then tried by the law ; after- 
 wards it is signed both by my Father and myself and forwarded 
 to you. We give unto you the sense contained in every revelation 
 which we send unto you. You do not speak as perfect a language 
 as we do. We could not give unto you a revelation in our 
 language, except that you could speak it. You know that you are 
 not fluent in your own language, and we have to convey to you the 
 ideas contained in our revelations in the best and plainest manner 
 that we can. If you were fluent in your own language we could 
 reveal unto you more perfectly than we do ; but with the knowl- 
 edge you have we are enabled to convey unto you any idea that 
 we may wish to convey. There is not a perfect language now 
 spoken upon the earth, not even by those who are the most highly 
 educated among men. One nation need not boast of its language 
 being more perfect than that of another nation, for all languages 
 upon the earth are imperfect. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, I am often by your 
 side dictating you while you are writing revelations. I can come 
 from heaven unto you in a few minutes, according to your time; 
 and when I cannot conveniently come myself to dictate you, I 
 send one of the angels who sit in council with my Father and me, 
 who understands all revelations that we send unto you, even as we 
 understand them, and he dictates you, acting for me, in my name, 
 and by my authority. I am very often with you myself, although I 
 do not often show myself unto you while you are writing. I am for- 
 bidden to show myself unto you in a manner that will satisfy you, 
 until I come to remain with you. You will now understand the 
 manner in which we give unto the revelations of our will. You 
 should know that, when you sit down to write a revelation, either 
 myself, or one of the angels who belong to the high council of 
 heaven, is by your sicfe dictating you. We even put words into 
 your mind, and we do all with the exception of writing them. I 
 am Jesus Christ; even he who is now by your side dictating you. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
230 THE COMING OF THE ENEMIES. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE COMING OF THE 
 
 ENEMIES AGAINST THE PEOPLE 
 
 OF THE LORD. 
 
 No. 135. WEBER, UTAH, November i6th, 1861. 
 
 1. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; for I am about to speak unto 
 you concerning your enemies. 
 
 2. They are now preparing themselves for another struggle with 
 my people. They have been very quiet of late ; but they now 
 think that they will set themselves in a way that will enable them 
 to accomplish something when they make another attempt. When 
 they recently came up against my people, it was with the intention 
 of destroying them ; which they would have attempted to do, had 
 my people sufficiently resisted them. But their plan fell through. 
 They did not then accomplish the work; therefore they have to try 
 their skill again. They think that they will get a clear hold the 
 next time that they try their luck. They now feel ashamed of them- 
 selves on account of being foiled in their attempt to commit the 
 bloody act ; and they think that before they quit the next time 
 they try their hand, they will make a clear job of it. They feel 
 determined not to be thwarted any more. I am now ready for 
 them. I will lift up a standard against them when they come the 
 next time, and they shall meet with opposition. 
 
 3. All that I require at the hands of the chief shep- 
 herds of the old Church is to send a large company against 
 me. This I require at their hands; and if they do not do so 
 willingly, I will make them do it ; for I will thwart them in their 
 attempts until they come to my terms. They are set against others 
 of my servants as much as they are against you ; and if they send 
 up but a few men to take either you or those men who are closely 
 connected with you, and of whom I have before spoken, my peo- 
 ple shall prevent them, even if they should be obliged to commit 
 violence upon them in order to do so. My people can prevent a 
 few of them from laying hold of you, or any of my servants, with- 
 out much assistance from me; nevertheless, I shall be present, 
 and if my power is needed, I shall use it. But I do not wish to 
 
THE COMING OF THE ENEMIES. 23! 
 
 come out of my hiding place to attend to a few of mine enemies. 
 My people can deal with a few men themselves if they are not 
 afraid of them, and are willing to do so. My people need not to 
 be afraid of them so much as to give way to them, and let them 
 take away those whom they will come for. I shall try the in- 
 tegrity of my people in this matter, and see if they are willing to 
 let mine enemies lay hold of my servants and take them away ; 
 and if, in consequence of such unfaithfulness on the part of my 
 people towards my servants, I should be compelled to step out to 
 destroy a few of mine enemies at a time when I do not want to 
 do so, I shall reject and destroy them all, and defend my servants 
 myself. 
 
 4. When mine enemies come, whether they be few or many, I 
 shall be here, and I shall watch the movements of my people. If 
 my people will do as I command them, they will take good care 
 of my servants. Let them not put me to any unnecessary trouble 
 through their unfaithfulness to my servants ; for they must be taken 
 care of either by my people or by me. I do not require any im- 
 possibilities at the hands of my people. They ought not to compel 
 me to come out of my hiding place to destroy mine enemies 
 before the time. When a great number of them come, then I will 
 come out and destroy them all, even as I have said. Let my peo- 
 ple do what they can; and what they cannot do, I will do myself. 
 I shall try them to see whether they are true to me, or not ; and I 
 will give unto them credit for all the good they do. I am well 
 pleased with many of them, and I hope that they will be true to 
 me in the day of trial. I do not wish to doubt their honesty, but 
 I feel in duty bound to put them on their guard, in order that they 
 may save their lives on that day. 
 
 5. I know what mortal men are. They are weak, and very 
 liable to become excited when they are surrounded by enemies. 
 If they could keep themselves from becoming excited, they might 
 with safety be depended upon ; for where there is no excitement, 
 there is certainty. Let my people be aware of excitement, and let 
 
 ^them be steady-minded, and then they can be depended upon. 
 Let them hearken unto my words, and obey them, and all will be 
 well with them. I am the Light and Life of the world; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen arfd Amen. 
 
232 HIGH PRIESTS' MEETINGS. 
 
 THE LAW BY WHICH THE HIGH PRIESTS ARE 
 
 GOVERNED WHEN THEY ARE ASSEMBLED 
 
 IN QUORUM CAPACITY. 
 
 No. 136. WEBER, UTAH, November lyth, 1861. 
 
 1. THE president of the high priests' quorum shall be punctual 
 in the discharge of his duties. He shall take the lead, and be an 
 example of piety and goodness to those who are of the same order 
 as he is. He shall appoint a place and time for the high priests' 
 quorum to meet ; and, at the place and time appointed, he should 
 be the first to attend. He shall open the meeting by singing and 
 prayer ; and afterwards, he shall salute his brethren and deliver the 
 first speech, and in doing so he shall not occupy more than fifteen 
 minutes. He shall then deliver the meeting into the hands of his 
 brethren for them to occupy the remainder of the time, with the 
 exception of about ten minutes, which shall be left for him to offer 
 such closing remarks as he may deem necessary. The high priests 
 who speak shall not occupy more than ten minutes each. And 
 while they endeavor to speak in my name, they shall seek the 
 guidance of the holy spirit, and if they will do so, it will influence 
 them and guide their tongues. 
 
 2. And while they are met together to edify each other, their 
 time shall not be taken up by those who hold higher authority than 
 themselves, except any member of the first presidency should 
 come into their assembly. They shall have full liberty to address 
 the high priests as the spirit shall lead them. They have full 
 liberty to speak in any quorum meeting in my Church, for they 
 preside over all the quorums of my Church, and all other presi- 
 dents therein are subject to them. 
 
 3. The president of the high priests' quorum will, if disposed, 
 have the liberty to call on any of the apostles to address the meet- 
 ings ; but, unless called upon, the apostles have no right to speak 
 in the high priest's meetings. The apostles have a quorum meet- 
 ing of their own; therefore, let them attend to it, discharge their 
 own duties, and leave the high priests to discharge theirs. 
 
 4. Let all the organized quorums of my Church attend to their 
 
TO THE PROPHET. 233 
 
 own duties (and not infringe upon each other's rights), for this is 
 lawful and right in my sight. 
 
 5. And it is wisdom that the high priests should not occupy 
 more than two hours at each meeting ; and they shall close eax:h 
 meeting with singing and prayer. 
 
 6. I am the Lord, and I have given this law ; therefore, it shall 
 be observed by the high priests of my Church from this time 
 henceforth. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 137. WEBER, UTAH, November ipth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that you need 
 not to let your spirit droop through fear of your enemies coming 
 upon you before I am ready for them. They cannot come upon 
 you too soon if they come in the way that I want them to come; 
 and if they are not willing to come up against my people in the 
 way that I wish them to, I will make them do so, if my people 
 will only hearken unto my words, and assist me in the way that I 
 have commanded them to. 
 
 2. I have been revealing one principle after another unto you 
 at a rapid speed, in order to prepare you to meet them when they 
 come up against you. I have revealed unto you almost all that is 
 necessary to prepare you to meet your enemies, no matter how 
 soon they come up, if they only come right. I can come up to 
 you any time, even in a minute's warning. All that you need now 
 is for me to come up to you and give unto you the rod; and that 
 I can do at any time when it is necessary. 
 
 3. You understand the way in which I intend to work with 
 you. You know the order in which the army of heaven will go 
 forth to war; you are well informed upon this matter. When I 
 am by your side, continually telling you what to do, what more do 
 you require at my hands? You say in your feelings that you 
 require nothing more than that. "But, will you come up to me in 
 the way which you have promised to come, and deliver your own 
 
234 T0 THE PROPHET. 
 
 people whom you have gathered together even those who have 
 yielded obedience to the fulness of the gospel? Yes. I will 
 deliver all those of my people who are worthy to be delivered. I 
 will deliver all those who are my friends, who love the truth. 
 
 4. Through your restlessness I am compelled to renew my 
 promises unto you repeatedly. I should not need to tell you the 
 same thing over and over again so many times as I have done, if 
 you could place your confidence in me. If I told you one thing 
 once or twice, it would be all-sufficient. If I told you the truth 
 once, and you understood it, it is all that is necessary. It is as 
 good as if I told you the same thing a thousand times over ; but 
 you are not satisfied except that I will keep renewing my promises 
 unto you time after time. You may set your mind at rest. All is 
 well. I am by your side. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, that my people shall pay no 
 attention to the calls of mine enemies. My people are not subject 
 to them. I will tell my people what to do if they will do it ; and 
 I will take the responsibility upon myself. I will see my people 
 through all their difficulties if they will do as I command them. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, I will watch the move- 
 ments of mine enemies, and I will make known unto you the 
 plans which they are laying to destroy my people, as they suppose. 
 I will give unto you all necessary information from time to time 
 concerning their movements. You shall not be taken unawares 
 by them ; but when the test comes, you will be perfectly satisfied 
 with my dealings with you in every respect. I cannot satisfy you 
 until the test comes ; then I can satisfy you. You do not need to 
 be afraid of it coming ; for when it comes, both you and my peo- 
 ple will be liberated. You will then be set free, and you will have 
 the liberty to travel where you wish to without the fear of being 
 molested by an enemy. You will not feel your weakness after 
 that ; therefore, prepare, for it is close upon you. I am Jesus 
 Christ, the Son of the Eternal Father. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 138. WEBER, UTAH, November ipth, 1861. 
 
 . You say that you are satisfied that I could give unto you the 
 theory of the fulness of my gospel. You are satisfied that I have 
 the power to reveal unto you the secret things of eternity ; in this 
 respect you are satisfied. But you say that you are not satisfied 
 in relation to my power. You say that you do not know to your 
 satisfaction whether I have the power to cut off mine enemies, or 
 not. O, how hard it is for me to deal with you. You have not 
 confidence to believe that I shall give unto you the power over, 
 your enemies ; but you almost believe that I shall leave you, and 
 let your enemies take you, and do what they like with you. You 
 actually believe that I will not sustain you. You think that I have 
 let them drive you from place to place, and that I have always 
 given them power over you; and you cannot think that I ever 
 intend to stay their course. If I had intended to let the people 
 of this Territory go on as they were doing, I should not have inter- 
 rupted them in their course, and, consequently I should not 
 have called you, and afflicted you with them. You know that I 
 have done nothing, as yet, but give unto you the keys of the holy 
 priesthood. I know that I have done but little, as yet. I have 
 only been preparing you for your work. I will satisfy you 
 that I have the power when the enemies come up against me. 
 You must place confidence in me, and go on following the dic- 
 tates of my holy messengers. And as I have satisfied you with 
 the theory, I will satisfy you with the power ; therefore, go on, 
 and be steadfast. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
236 THE SAINTS COUNSELLED TO RESIST. 
 
 THE LORD PROMISES TO VISIT THE PROPHET. 
 THE SAINTS COUNSELLED TO RESIST 
 THEIR ENEMIES. 
 
 No. 139. WEBER, UTAH, November 20th, 1861. . 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Life and Light of the world ; even he who 
 moves forth in the midst of darkness, and the darkness compre- 
 hendeth him not. And I am about to speak unto you, my servant 
 Joseph. I am now by your side dictating you ; therefore, hearken 
 diligently to that which I am about to make known unto you ; for you 
 will soon witness great scenes. My Father has sent me specially to 
 reveal things of great importance unto you. I have done all that 
 lay in my power to inform your judgment, and to post you up; 
 and I shall now begin to work with you in a more powerful man- 
 ner. I am now compelled to draw near unto you ; therefore, pre- 
 pare yourself to come into my presence, for in a few days I shall 
 unveil my face unto you, and you shall see my glory. And you 
 shall see all things as they are with me. I know your desires, and 
 you shall be satisfied. 
 
 2. Your enemies are determined to destroy you, and with you 
 a number of my servants, if they themselves are not destroyed in 
 the attempt. They say that they see clearly enough that my peo- 
 ple will not humble themselves and be obedient unto them. They 
 say that they have already twice tried my people, and they have 
 bid defiance to them and trampled their words under their feet as 
 a thing of naught, and they will not endure it. They say, also, 
 that they will slay every person that has yielded obedience to the 
 fulness of my gospel. They should say, " If we are not slain our- 
 selves in the attempt." They think that their dignity has been 
 greatly insulted by my people. 
 
 3. When I sent to their chief shepherds revelation after revela- 
 tion for their consideration, they trampled my words under their 
 feet as an idle tale, and thereby greatly insulted my dignity ; and I 
 might have said that I would not bear it. They did not care for 
 my rights, or for my dignity either ; but I bore their insults. I 
 did not come out upon them and cut them off as soon as they had 
 
THE SAINTS COUNSELLED TO RESIST. 237 
 
 insulted me. I sent unto them more than thirty revelations and 
 addresses, and they treated them as idle tales, and even mocked 
 me. They thought that it was beneath their dignity even to open 
 one of those revelations and look at it. They thought that they 
 would be disgraced by such an act, especially if any person of as 
 noble blood as they are of saw them doing so. O no, they could not 
 bear to hearken to a word that had come from the mouths of per- 
 sons so low and degraded as my Father and I. They felt that 
 they were of blood too noble (?) to waste their precious time in 
 hearkening to such mean, degraded persons as we are ! This is 
 the spirit in which they treated the words of my mouth. And 
 now, when I have but just begun to cross their path, and to oppose 
 them in the least, they are anxious to shed blood. They cannot 
 endure the least opposition ; but they thirst for the blood of every 
 person who opposes them in the least. I will give unto them 
 blood enough before they will be many days older. I will destroy 
 every person from among the people that has a desire to shed the 
 blood of his fellow men. And when I begin I will remove that 
 spirit from among the people. 
 
 4. My people have long desired to see a change of things. 
 They will soon see it; and it will he well for those who are worthy 
 of deliverance. Let all my people strive to prove themselves 
 worthy, that it may be well with them. I greatly fear that there 
 are some of my people who will be caught in a snare. It appears 
 that I shall not be able to make them understand it until it comes 
 upon them, and then it will be too late. I have told my people 
 what to do to save their lives, if they will but do it ; but. if they 
 will not, they must suffer the consequences. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that if but a few of 
 mine enemies come to take away any of my servants, let one or 
 two of my servants, who are brave and fearless, walk up to them 
 and ask them what they have come for. And if they say that they 
 have come to take away any of my servants, tell them that they 
 cannot take them without taking all my people. And let my 
 servants tell them to go about their business, and the next time 
 they come, bring a sufficient force to take all my people ; other- 
 wise, they shall not take away one of them. Tell them that my 
 people will either sink or swim together. And if, after my servants 
 
238 THE SAINTS COUNSELLED TO RESIST. 
 
 shall have delivered this message unto them, they will not go away, 
 but shall still continue to press on, and seek to lay hold of those 
 persons for whom they came, my people shall hinder them, even 
 if, in order to do so, they have to commit violence upon them. 
 Yea, they shall prevent them from taking any of my servants, even 
 though they should be compelled to slay them ; and I will hold my 
 people guiltless. Mine enemies shall not lay hold of any one of 
 my servants upon any consideration whatever. My servants shall 
 not be polluted by their filthy hands. Let none of my servants 
 shake hands with them; for if they do, I will not hold them guilt- 
 less. Let my people keep their hands clean. They must not 
 shake hands with their enemies, for, by so doing, they would show 
 that they were one with them ; and they cannot, at the same time, 
 be one with me and one with mine enemies too. Therefore, let 
 my people keep their hands and hearts clean, that I may bless 
 them. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it would be well for 
 my people to remain at home as much as they possibly can. They 
 will soon be needed; and when their presence is needed here, 
 they must not be absent. They must not leave this place more 
 than one day at once. When they leave in the morning they must 
 return at evening. Let my people pay attention to what I say, 
 and I will be with them unto the end. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. ' 
 
 THE LORD PROMISES TO SMITE HIS ENEMIES 
 WITH WEAKNESS. 
 
 No. 140. WEBER, UTAH, November 2ist, 1861. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; and lo, I shall come unto you 
 quickly. Prepare for me ; for, as I have said unto you before, so 
 I say unto you again, I shall ride up to you in a few days, and 
 talk with you. I shall raise up the veil that hides all the heavenly 
 hosts from your view, and I shall let you see them as they are. 
 
THE ENEMIES TO BE SMITTEN WITH WEAKNESS. 239 
 
 And after I shall have raised up the veil, I shall not drop it again 
 while you are in trouble with your enemies. At such times, both 
 myself and the armies of heaven will be in your sight continually. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, it would be well for you to 
 make yourself perfectly familiar with the "signs of command," 
 for you will soon be called to use them. I shall be with you at 
 that time; and on that day we shall stand together; and I will 
 instruct you even mouth to mouth ; therefore, prepare yourself 
 to meet me. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you that, if but few of mine enemies 
 come up to take my servants, and my people resist them, and send 
 them back without those for whom they come, they will soon come 
 up against my people with a large force, determined, as they will 
 suppose, to make clean work of it. My people may conclude that 
 when mine enemies are resisted, the battle will have begun, and 
 that it will soon be over. Let my people be brave and fearless, 
 and I will be by their side. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you my servant Joseph that, if but 
 a few of mine enemies come to take away my servants, I will smite 
 them with weakness, and they shall feel as though they had no 
 power to do anything with my people. I will give my people 
 power over them ; for I will inspire my people greatly. But if a 
 large number of mine enemies come up against my people the 
 first time, I shall have gained the point which I wish to gain, 
 without putting my people to the trouble of resisting them, and 
 sending them back. I will watch their movements. They can- 
 not take me wrong. I shall be ready, and shall be here waiting for 
 them when they come, whether they be few or many. I will make 
 known unto you, beforehand, the way in which they intend to 
 come, so that you may prepare to meet them; therefore, you 
 need not to give yourself any trouble about it ; for they cannot 
 come upon you wrong. I am ready for them. If they determine 
 to come up in a large company at first, I shall know it, and I shall 
 visit you before they arrive, and, at that time, I will talk to you 
 face to face. I will unvail both myself and all the heavenly hosts 
 unto you. You shall see us plainly. And at that time I will give 
 unto you the rod, as I have said unto you before. And after I 
 shall have given unto you the rod, you will see a great slaughter. 
 
240 THE ENEMIES TO BE SMITTEN WITH WEAKNESS. 
 
 I shall slay many thousands on that day. There will be dead 
 bodies laying in every settlement in this Territory. I will cut off 
 mine enemies in this Territory, even as I cut off the firstborn of 
 Egypt. I will see whether I cannot open the eyes of the people, 
 and make them look around them. They will want to know what 
 the matter is. I shall leave the people without a shepherd ; for 
 those are the men that I shall cut off at the time of the first 
 destruction. I shall station my angels in every settlement in this 
 Territory. And when the command is given by you to the 
 heavenly hosts, I will give my command to the generals, and they 
 will give the command to the hosts of heaven. And those who 
 will be cut off will all fall dead at about the same time ; for mine 
 angels will smite them dead as soon as the command shall have 
 been given unto them. 
 
 5. And as I said unto you before, so I say unto you again, 
 if but few of mine enemies come up at the first, I will smite them 
 with weakness, and, in this way, I will give my people power over 
 them ; but, in that case, I shall not show myself unto you. Should 
 but few of them come, and my people resist them, and send them 
 back, after their departure I will speedily visit you, and prepare 
 you to meet them when they come the second time. Should they 
 be compelled to come a second time, they will bring a large force 
 with them. They will set themselves, as they suppose, so as not 
 to be disappointed more than once. All things will work well. 
 I can bring them to my terms. 
 
 6. Let my people do their duty, and should it become neces- 
 sary, assist me in the way that I have appointed, and all will be 
 well. I am the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE ROD OF MOSES 
 AND THE BIRTHRIGHT OF JOHN BANKS. 
 
 No. 141. WEBER, UTAH, November 22nd, 1861. 
 
 i. INASMUCH as you desire to know of me as to the manner 
 in which you shall act after I shall have placed the rod in your 
 hand, I will make it known unto you. I have told you before that 
 
ROD OF MPSES. BIRTHRIGHT OF JOHN BANKS. 241 
 
 I shall stand by your side at that time to tell you what to do ; but, 
 inasmuch as you press me, I will make known unto you all that I 
 can concerning that matter. You will not let me rest. You want 
 to know all that you possibly can beforehand. You are so afraid_ 
 of being entrapped that you do not like to trust yourself in my 
 care. You are afraid lest I should fail when both you and my 
 people are in your greatest difficulties. You say that you could 
 rest satisfied if you could only feel sure that I shall come to you 
 when trouble is near. You fear lest there should be some failure 
 made, which may cause both you and my people to lose the cast. 
 If, through my neglect, my people should Lose the cast, I should 
 have to bear the blame myself; but I shall never make a failure. I 
 never did such a thing, nor I never shall. You may safely depend 
 upon me. See that you do your own duty, and all will be right 
 with you. None will suffer but those who neglect their duty. 
 This is a time when all my people must either do their duties or 
 perish. 
 
 2. When the day of my power shall- have arrived, none of my 
 people will be able to depart from me and live upon the earth. I 
 shall slay all those who depart from me at that time. Any person 
 who yields obedience to the fulness of my gospel, and afterwards 
 turns away from it, shall be destroyed ; for death is the penalty fc r 
 that crime. Therefore, let my people be aware how they act after 
 they have obeyed the fulness of my gospel, in order that they may 
 save their lives. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that I will 
 make known unto you the way in which you shall act after I shall 
 have placed the rod in your hand. When you raise it, you shall 
 hold it up until I tell you to lower it. You will have to hold it up 
 until I shall have cut off many thousands of people, even until I 
 shall have cut off all those who will be slain at the first cutting off. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, the rod is very heavy. You 
 cannot hold it up long yourself. You will have to hold it up a 
 long time. You will be obliged to call upon my servant John 
 Banks to hold up your arm ; that is his right, for he is your coun- 
 sellor and spokesman by birthright. He held up your arm many 
 times while you were leading the children of Israel. There are 
 but three persons now living upon the earth whose birthright is 
 
242 JOHN BANKS. RICHARD COOK. 
 
 greater than his. Your first counsellor, Brigham Young, I shall 
 destroy ; and my servant John Banks will then stand next to you 
 by birthright as a counsellor. Those who are now living upon the 
 earth, whose birthright is greater than that of my servant John 
 Banks, will be called to fill other places they will not be coun- 
 sellors to you. 
 
 5. If your first counsellor had done his duty, and opened up 
 the way for you when I sent you to him, he would have retained 
 his place; but, on account of his altogether refusing to do his duty, 
 I was compelled to call another to fill his place. I have called my 
 servant Richard Cook t6 fill that office. It is a gift that I have 
 given unto him because he assisted you to commence my work. 
 He can hold that place if he continues faithful ; otherwise, he will 
 lose it. Let him be aware lest he be overcome by the destroyer ; 
 for Satan will seek to try him greatly. He must endeavor to be 
 more patient. He needs not to fear ; all things will end aright. 
 
 6. Let my servants hearken unto my words, and act faithfully 
 in the places which I have appointed unto them, and I will be with 
 them unto the end. I am the Son of the Eternal Father; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THOSE WHO BELIEVE, AND WHO HAVE NOT 
 GATHERED TO SOUTH WEBER, ARE COM- 
 MANDED TO DO SO IMMEDIATELY. 
 
 No. 142. WEBER, UTAH, November 23rd, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I am come to speak unto 
 you, my servant Joseph, concerning my people. They wish to 
 know what I am going to do with them. They say that winter is 
 coming upon them, and they begin to fear. They say that they 
 did not expect to be here at this season of the year; and they 
 begin to fear lest I should allow them to suffer by the winter's 
 blast. They wish to know what I am going to do with them after 
 I shall have come out in power. They consider that they will 
 want homes. 
 
COMMANDED TO MOVE TO SOUTH WEBER. 243 
 
 2. Hearken unto me,. O my people, and I will tell you what 
 I intend to do with you. I will cut a clear way through your 
 enemies ; and to all who will be spared to need them, I will fur- 
 nish homes. I will cut off so many of the inhabitants of GreaL 
 Salt Lake City thai few of them will be left alive. That City will 
 be left almost without inhabitants; for it is one of the most wicked 
 places upon the earth. Its inhabitants will commit all manner of 
 abominations, and justify themselves in doing so. 
 
 3. After the first scourge is over, there will be plenty of room 
 in that City for my people, and they will not be molested much 
 by those who will be left. Therefore, after the scourge is past, I 
 shall send my people down to that City, and I shall there furnish 
 them with homes. They will be well provided for in every respect, 
 and they will not be trampled upon by their enemies ; for there 
 will be but few of them left to trouble my people. 
 
 4. And most of those of mine enemies who will be left alive 
 will be silent; for they will find out that that will be the best thing 
 that they can do. There will, therefore, be a calm among mine 
 enemies^ in this Territory. They will think a great deal and 
 say but little. They will fear and tremble exceedingly. But at 
 the present time I have thousands of enemies among the members 
 of the old Church, both those who are heirs to the resurrection 
 and those who are high priests, who are ready to gnash their teeth 
 with rage and agony. They feel as though they would like to 
 hurl me from my throne. They seem to consider that I am the 
 worst enemy they have. They say in their feelings that if it was 
 not for me they would not care; that they could go on trampling 
 the poor of my people under their feet unmolested. Oh, how it 
 pains them when they hear that I am at work ! They believe and 
 tremble. 
 
 5. Though many of those people who are in the old Church 
 are fallen spirits, many of them know that I have commenced a ' 
 work upon the earth. There is not an angel in heaven nor a spirit 
 that is damned in hell that does not know it. Even all the inhabit- 
 ants of the spirit worlds know it. But, although fallen spirits who 
 are clothed in mortality know that I have commenced a work 
 upon the earth, and that they cannot stay my hand, yet such 
 knowledge will not prevent them from fighting against me. They 
 
244 COMMANDED TO MOVE TO SOUTH WEBER. 
 
 will fight against me until the last minute that they are permitted 
 to live. 
 
 6. And when those who are heirs of salvation are entirely led 
 by fallen spirits, they will do the same thing. This is the reason 
 why I shall be compelled to destroy so many of them with the 
 fallen spirits. They have entirely given up their judgment to 
 others who are fallen spirits ; and having devils as guides, they 
 are led by them. Having resigned their judgment, I cannot work 
 with them ; but I can convince those of the truth who use their 
 ownjudgment ; and this I am in duty bound to do. 
 
 7. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it is my will that all 
 those who have yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel, 
 and who are now absent from this place, should gather here as 
 soon as they can, or they will see great trouble. My people must 
 gather themselves together, and set themselves for the test, for it 
 is close upon them. 
 
 8. And if there are any people in the surrounding settlements 
 who believe, but who have not, as yet, yielded obedience unto the 
 fulness of my gospel, let. them also gather to this place as ^soon as 
 they can ; and let them lose no time, that it may be well with 
 them. I will provide for all those who will hearken diligently to 
 my words and obey them. Therefore, let those who know my will 
 concerning them, obey it, or they will be beaten with many stripes. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen, 
 
 REVELATION TO THE PROPHET ON IMPORTANT 
 MATTERS. 
 
 No. 143. WEBER, UTAH, November 24th, 1861. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto me, my son, for I am about to make known 
 unto you things of great importance. I promised to give unto 
 you timely warning, in order that you might prepare both yourself 
 and this people for the great test which is at hand. You will not 
 live in pain but a short time longer. I am pained to see you. I 
 see that you cannot lay hol'd of the promises which I have made 
 
TO THE PROPHET. 245 
 
 unto you. If you could, it would greatly relieve you of an un- 
 neccessary burden which you carry. 
 
 2. I commanded you to gather together all my people who are 
 absent from this place. They will not have much time allotted-., 
 them to gather up here. I told you that I would not leave you in 
 the dark as to the time when I intended to come out of my hiding 
 place and sweep away the wicked from among the pure of my peo- 
 ple. It is necessary that you should know something about the 
 time when I intended to do this. 
 
 3. You know that I have been backward in revealing some 
 things unto you for a wise purpose in myself. As the time draws 
 near I will draw nearer unto you; and I will reveal unto you 
 all hidden things which you ought to know. I shall draw as 
 close up to you, from day to day, as your enemies do ; and when 
 they are about to come upon you, I will visit you before they do; 
 and when they come up to you, I shall have fully prepared you to 
 meet them. 
 
 4. If I should give unto you the rod now, mine enemies would 
 get to hear of it, and they would be afraid to come up against me, 
 and it would break up my arrangements with mine enemies. It 
 would bring them all into confusion. It would fill them with fear; 
 and they would not be able to raise courage to come up against 
 me; and in this manner it would disarrange all my business, and, 
 thereby, I should break the hold which I now have on them. 
 They would not come up against me now. It would strike terror 
 to their hearts which they could not soon shake off. It is as much 
 as they can well do now to raise the courage to come up against 
 me. Their hearts even pain them now at the thoughts of coming 
 up against me ; therefore, I deem it, wise to keep all things as still 
 as I possibly can, to give them a chance. It is their duty to start 
 the test; and after they have started the work it is my duty to 
 finish it ; and I will finish it effectually. 
 
 5. And now behold, I say unto you, my son, prepare yourself 
 to meet me, for I am coming up to you quickly; for not many 
 days will pass away before I shall visit you, and place the rod 
 in your hand. Prepare yourself to receive it ; for I will lay many 
 thousands low before that time comes, I deemed it wise to 
 reveal unto you, within a few days, the time when I intended to 
 
246 THE CONFLICT. 
 
 come out to destroy mine enemies. The day and the hour I shall 
 not make known unto you until it comes ; but I have told you 
 near enough for you to prepare for it. It will come soon 
 enough whether you and my people are ready for it, or not. You 
 say that you are ready as soon as I have placed the rod in your 
 hand. You consider that you are waiting for me. You say that 
 you wish me to come up to you and fully prepare you for, the work. 
 You consider that the whole work is waiting for me. We shall 
 soon see whether it is, or not. You will find that when it comes, 
 it will be soon enough both for you and my people. You will see 
 that you are none too well prepared for it. Therefore, listen unto 
 my words, and obey them, and all will be well. I am the Stone 
 and Shepherd of Israel; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 THE COMING CONFLICT. 
 
 No. 144. WEBER, UTAH, November 26th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, that it is necessary for me 
 to speak unto you again concerning mine enemies. They are 
 now placed in a position where they are either compelled to come 
 up against my people, or else to give up to them. I am now about 
 to try the power of the devil ; and his agents shall see what they 
 have to trust to; and my people shall see what they have to trust 
 to. The powers of heaven and earth are now coming together; 
 and my people shall see where the strongest power lies. 
 
 2. I have given unto my people the theory of the fulness of my 
 gospel. They have seen that, and now they shall see the power 
 of it. It ha*s been very difficult for me to satisfy my people with 
 the theory of my gospel ; but I shall fully satisfy them at once. I 
 shall come as a whirlwind, and surround my people when they are 
 gathered together to meet their enemies. I shall surround them 
 with my presence at once. I shall surround them by mine 
 holy angels so that no earthly power can hurt them. And at 
 my appearance many of my people will fall on the ground, being 
 overcome by my presence. The shock will be so great that it will 
 
THE CONFLICT. 247 
 
 overpower them ; and through their weakness, not being strong 
 enough to stand it, they will fall down almost as dead ; but I will 
 strengthen them, and raise them up again, and they shall see both 
 me and my holy angels to their satisfaction. Let my people seek 
 to strengthen themselves for this event by clinging unto me with 
 all their hearts ; and if they will do this, I will assist them. I will 
 draw near unto them, and strengthen them, if they will draw near 
 unto me. I will assist those that will strive to assist themselves. 
 My people know how to act in order to gain strength, if they will 
 exert themselves to do so. 
 
 3. And now behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that 
 inasmuch as mine enemies are about to visit you, it would be well 
 for you to appoint a few men, and let them be well prepared to 
 meet mine enemies. And those men whom you shall appoint 
 shall walk forth to meet mine enemies, if but a few of them come 
 up ; and they shall ask mine enemies what their business is ; and 
 if mine enemies tell my people that they' are come to collect the 
 fine which their court placed upon my people for not training when 
 they were called out to do so, my servants shall tell them that a 
 number of my people whom they fined were not American citizens, 
 and that, in consequence of this, they could not compel my people 
 to train. Mine enemies cannot keep the law which they profess to 
 be governed by. They unlawfully fined my people and took away 
 their property unjustly. They trample their own laws under their 
 feet ; and every person that will not do the same, they want to shed 
 their blood. They will not abide any law. They have now 
 placed fines upon people who have not been in over two years, 
 who have but little property, even those who have nothing to pay 
 with ; and they placed that fine upon them in order to take them 
 away. They knew that those persons could not pay the fine, and 
 they did that in order to make an inroad upon my people. They 
 thought that my people would not resist them as long as they only 
 came for property. Their first plan which they laid did not 
 answer. They want to do something whereby they can feel 
 assured that they will meet with resistance. That is what they 
 want. In order to get this hold on my people they fined those 
 who could not pay the fine, and thus, they want to take the person 
 instead of the fine. They thought that when we saw that they 
 
248 THE CONFLICT. 
 
 were about to take away our brethren, that we should rise up 
 against them to hinder them. They thought right. They have 
 laid the right plan for bringing the matter up to an issue. 
 
 4. They shall not touch one of my people who trusts in me. 
 When my servants go to meet mine enemies, if they are called to 
 
 ,do such a thing, they shall tell mine enemies the situation of some 
 of my people whom they have fined, even that they are so poor 
 that they cannot pay the fine ; and let them tell mine enemies that 
 they shall not take those men away from this place without taking 
 all my people along with them. My servants must tell thejn that 
 my people will all rise or fall together in this manner. My serv- 
 ants shall talk to them if it becomes necessary. 
 
 5. But behold, I say unto you, my son, if I see that they are 
 about to come up to my people in a large company the first time, 
 my servants will not need to deliver this message unto them. If 
 such is the case, I shall come to you before they do. You will be 
 perfectly safe. The work is in mine own hands, and I will bring 
 it through. Give yourself no trouble at all. But I tell you, my 
 son, you may be preparing yourself to meet me, even to be fully 
 emerged into my presence. Although you are well acquainted 
 with me, it will be a sudden shock to you. You will have all that 
 you can bear. It will come upon you so suddenly. It is the 
 sudden shock which you will feel. Your strength will be greatly 
 tried. If I could reveal myself unto you in this powerful manner 
 gradually, you would not feel the shock so much as you will when 
 I come upon you all at once. 
 
 6. The law by which I am governed compels me to reveal 
 myself unto my people when I come in power all at once ; and 
 thus, it will be hard for them to endure my presence when I come 
 in such a powerful manner. This is the reason why I have urged 
 upon my people so much for them to prepare themselves to meet 
 me. When I come, they will need all the strength which they can 
 obtain through their faithfulness. They will find that they will 
 have none too much when I come,, let them be as faithful as they 
 may. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
THE ROD IS PROMISED. 249 
 
 THE PEOPLE ARE PROMISED THAT THEY SHALL 
 
 SEE THE ROD BEFORE THEY SEE 
 
 THEIR ENEMIES. 
 
 No. 145. WEBER, UTAH, November 27th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, it becomes my duty to 
 speak unto you again. I am compelled to draw near unto you, 
 for mine enemies are working at a great speed, and they will force 
 me to come to you speedily ; therefore, prepare for me. And I 
 say unto you, my son, be strong and of good courage. Mine 
 enemies say in their hearts that they would rather die than be' im- 
 posed upon by my people. They consider that it is a shame for 
 them to suffer a handful of people (as they call them) to bid 
 defiance to them. They consider that they are strong, and that 
 my people would be as nothing in their hands. Therefore, they 
 are vexed with themselves, because they have suffered my people 
 to run to this length. They are almost ready to mid fault with 
 each other for suffering this thing to run to such a length; but now 
 they say in their feelings : "If we have neglected our duties thus 
 far, we shall have to rise up and make the best that we can of a 
 bad job. We ought to have bursted them up before they had 
 made such headway. We have nobody to blame but ourselves ; 
 but now we will see whether we cannot wipe them out at all 
 hazards." But their hearts even fail them when they think about 
 it. But they need not to blame themselves for neglecting their 
 duties. They suffered my work to go on because they could not 
 hinder it. They have not so much power as they thought they 
 had. If they had a grain of good sense, they might know that I 
 was at work, and that I have foiled them in all their movements 
 when they have striven to operate against me. They have not 
 had the power to do a thing against my people. They have all 
 the time been working for me, to forward my purposes. I can 
 make them serve me without much difficulty. Every move that 
 they make is for the benefit of my people. I turn them hither and 
 thither at my pleasure. O, how their anger is kindled against my 
 people ! They say that they will venture to come against my peo- 
 
250 THE ROD IS PROMISED. 
 
 pie in spite of all the threats which I have made against them. 
 They say that they will try what I and my people can do to them ; 
 and that they were never before insulted by any people upon the 
 earth as my people have insulted them. 
 
 2. But behold, I say unto you, O ye mine enemies, I will see 
 whether I cannot insult you when you come up against my people. 
 Ye vipers ! ye damned spirits of hell ! I will pay you off for all ! 
 Ye are the children of those demons who have shed the blood of 
 my prophets and apostles whom I sent to the earth. And your 
 fathers were murderers from the beginning, and I will visit their 
 sins upon you. I have longed for this time to come a time 
 when I can settle with your race for all the blood which they have 
 shed. O, how I have longed for the time to come when I should 
 have the privilege of sweeping you off" the earth by millions ! Oh, 
 how thankful I feel that the day of my power has come ! I will 
 give you blood enough ! My prophets and servants whom I sent 
 to the earth, whose blood your race has shed, and whose spirits 
 you forced back to me, have called upon me many times for 
 redress, and they are pleading with me now. But when they have 
 pleaded with me, I have not been able to redress their wrongs. . I 
 have been bound by law, and I have been pained with their cries 
 until I could not rest. But I have striven to satisfy myself with 
 tl-e hope that my day would come, and I have promised myself 
 that, when that day should arrive, I would slay those murderers by 
 millions ! Yea, I feel that I shall hardly ever be able to satisfy 
 myself upon them. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, before 
 mine enemies are through with -my people, they will bring up a 
 large mob against them ; and they will not be long about it. You 
 may contine to watch for me; for, as I have told you before, I 
 shall come unto you suddenly. I have told you that I shall visit 
 you before your enemies do. I shall unveil myself unto you 
 before I unveil myself to my people. I shall give unto you the 
 rod before your enemies come into your sight ; but soon after I 
 have given unto you the rod, you will see several hundreds of 
 them some from almost every settlement around. Mine enemies 
 are gathering themselves together even now, in order that they may 
 be ready when they are called upon. The matter is now well 
 
THE ROD IS PROMISED. . 251 
 
 understood by hundreds of them. I shall fully prepare you for 
 them by the time that they reach this place. When they arrive I 
 will not give unto them the chance either to speak understandingly 
 or to raise their weapons of war. They will then have gone their_ 
 length that is all that I require of them. If I would give unto 
 them the liberty to speak unto my people, they would tell them 
 that, if they would deliver up unto them the chief men in my 
 Church, they would spare the lives of all the rest of my people. 
 But they shall not have the chance to make such a proposal unto 
 them ; for, before they will have had a chance either to deliver 
 their message or to do anything else unto my people, I will sweep 
 them out of existence. I shall take their will for the deed ; for, 
 when they have come up here, I shall understand what they are 
 come for. Before they will have had the chance to destroy any of 
 my people, I shall destroy them all. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, I shall not show my- 
 self unto my people as soon as I shall show myself unto you. I 
 shall not show myself unto them until mine enemies come up to 
 them ; but when mine enemies stand before them, I will show 
 both myself and my holy angels unto them. And those of my 
 people who are strong enough to behold my presence, without fall- 
 ing upon the ground, shall see mine holy angels smite mine 
 enemies dead. The strong will have that privilege. But rny peo- 
 ple shall see the rod in your hand, even before they see me. Those 
 who are around you when I give the rod unto you will see it 
 (should there be any persons around you at that time). And all 
 my people who gather up to meet mine enemies will see the rod in 
 your hand before they shall see their enemies, and that will 
 strengthen them, and they will be better able to face their enemies. 
 I will do all that I can for my people to strengthen them in the 
 trying day. Let them prepare for me ; for lo, I come quickly. I 
 am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
252 HOW TO MEET THE ENEMIES. 
 
 REVELATION INSTRUCTING THE PROPHET HOW 
 TO MEET HIS ENEMIES. 
 
 No. 146. . WEBER, UTAH, November 29th, 1861. 
 
 1. IT is necessary for me to speak unto you again concerning 
 mine enemies, and your duties toward my people. I have told 
 you many times to prepare for me. I feel in duty bound to warn 
 you of that which is close upon you. 
 
 2. Although you are so well acquainted with thejtheory of the 
 fulness of my gospel, you are not, as yet, acquainted with the 
 power of it. I shall reveal a great secret unto you at once, and it 
 will almost overpower you. You have none too much strength 
 for your place. Your office and calling require you to have 
 strong faith. But there have been many strange things which 
 have served to break your confidence. You know that, as yet, I 
 have never been placed in a position where I could give unto you 
 a manifestation of my power ; and you have been overpowered in 
 your feelings with the influences which have proceeded from your 
 enemies. They have always had the upperhand of you, and they 
 have ridden over your feelings roughshod ; and, because you have 
 never had the power to help yourself, it has overpowered your 
 feelings, and held you down, so that you could not raise that 
 amount of courage and faith which was necessary. You could 
 not struggle against such an influence. But I will give unto you 
 the power over that which has, hitherto, had the power over you. 
 I will break that influence down at once. You have been greatly 
 afflicted by it, and by your murmurings you have afflicted me also. 
 But your murmurings against me on this account are near at an 
 end. 
 
 3. And now, behold, I say unto you, my son, I am about to 
 speak unto you concerning mine enemies coming up to this place. 
 As I have said unto you before, I shall visit you in time for you 
 to gather my people together before mine enemies reach this 
 place. And I say unto you that, as soon as I shall have visited 
 you, and placed the rod in your hand, you shall begin to call my 
 people together; and by the time that all my people will be 
 gathered together, mine enemies will be in sight. And when they 
 
HOW TO. MEET THE ENEMIES. 253 
 
 will have reached to within a few hundred yards of where you 
 will stand, you shall raise your rod and give your command ; or 
 they will, in a few minutes, be at you ; for they will come on 
 horses, and they will ride fast ; therefore, you must take them irT 
 time ; for you know that I cannot give my command until you 
 have given yours. And then, after I shall have given mine, the 
 twelve chief generals will have to give theirs to the heavenly hosts. 
 You must give us time to get the- word of command out of our 
 mouths ; for the heavenly hosts cannot, , under any circumstance 
 whatever, lawfully go to war until we have raised our rods, and 
 given the command unto them. See, therefore, that you give us 
 time. If you will do your own duty, you will have nothing to 
 fear. If you will give the command soon enough, we will cut off 
 all your enemies when they are a few rods from you. If you will 
 give the command in time, I will take them in time. You know 
 our situation. See, then, that you liberate us, as I have com- 
 manded you. 
 
 4. It will not be a time for trifling ; but it will' be a time of 
 solemnity, and a time when all my people will be required to do 
 their duties. If they do not, they will perish ! Some of my people 
 are almost going to sleep ; but they will open their eyes and look 
 about them then. Those of my people who will not hear me, will 
 have to feel me. There are a few of my people who are unfaith- 
 ful, whose lives I cannot save. I can do nothing with them but 
 slay them. Therefore, my son, prepare for me; for lo, I shall 
 come unto you quickly. I am Jesus Christ Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 A WARNING TO THE REBELLIOUS. 
 
 No. 147. WEBER, UTAH, December ist, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am come to speak 
 unto you. Listen unto my words. My people are getting dis- 
 couraged at the severe weather which they now have to contend 
 with. They wish to know the reason of such unpleasant weather. 
 They say that I promised to moderate the weather for their benefit, 
 
254 WARNING TO THE REBELLIOUS. 
 
 and now think that I am breaking my promise. They think that 
 they have ne"ver seen worse weather than what this is at this time 
 of the year ; and they say in their ieelings that they do not know 
 the reason of it. But they say in their feelings, also, that they 
 should like to know the reason of it. I have blest my people with 
 pleasant weather up to tfiis time. They have never had cause to 
 complain of me before. They have suffered but little before from 
 the inclemency of the weather ; and this unpleasant weather which 
 my people are now callefl to contend with, is for a wise purpose in 
 myself. I do not afflict my people without a cause, even foolishly; 
 but I have an object in view for all that I do. All things will work 
 together for good to those of my people who are faithful, who are 
 willing to confess mine hands in all things ; for I rule in heaven 
 and upon the earth by mine angels. I bring everything to my 
 terms. Mine angels turn the governors of the ea*th hither and 
 thither according to mine own good pleasure ; therefore, I rule in 
 heaven and among the nations of the earth ; and none can say, "what 
 doest thou." I am accountable to no person on the earth; and 
 none can stay my hand. 
 
 2! Let my people confess mine hand in all things ; for I am 
 well pleased with all those who confess mine hand in all things. 
 My people should know that after the bitter, then cometh the sweet, 
 and shortly after this storm is over, cometh the blessing to my 
 people, which is victory over their enemies ; and they will see no 
 more oppression after that. My people must not let small things 
 trouble them, for this is not a day of small things ; but it is a day of 
 great events. My people should be strong, for they will have great 
 things to deal with. This is not a day of weakness ; but it is a day 
 of strength, and my people must be strong. They have been weak 
 long enough. They must cling to me with all their hearts; and if 
 they will do so, I will strengthen them abundantly. 
 
 3. And now behold, I speak unto you concerning mine 
 enemies. They have contemplated burning up the property of my 
 people; and if I had not prevented them, they would have burnt 
 up my people's property ; but I have prevented them one time 
 after another. I broke them up from time to time. If they could 
 have done the thing which they wished to do, they would never 
 have come up against my people in a large mob. They wanted 
 
WARNING TO THE REBELLIOUS. 255 
 
 to waste away my people by burning up their property ; and in this 
 way they wished to bring them to want. They thought that if they 
 could reduce them to shear poverty, they would scatter ; and in 
 this way they thought that they could break up my people and_. 
 scatter them through this Territory, and make slaves of them ; and 
 they see that all their plans for scattering and destroyi ig my peo- 
 ple have failed. I have prevented mine enemies several times 
 from setting fire to my people's property. Mine enemies did not 
 want to raise a large mob and come up against my people to 
 destroy them, as they supposed, in that way. They wished to 
 destroy them in other ways ; and now they are satisfied that they 
 cannot destroy my people in any other way than in raising a mob 
 and coming up against my people to destroy them in that way. 
 And, as they have hitherto failed in every attempt which they have 
 made to destroy my people, so they will fail in the last and great 
 attempt which they will make to try to destroy my people ; but in 
 that attempt they will make an end to their own lives. 
 
 4. They consider now that things have run long enough, and 
 that they will try now and put a stop to it. They hate to be 
 driven to the necessity of raising a large mob and sending them 
 up against my people. But they are compelled to do so. I told 
 my people that I would make them come to my terms, and they 
 have concluded now to obey me without any more trouble. They 
 find out that it is no use to rebel against me "any more; and they 
 say in their feelings, "Father, we will obey you; although we 
 are rebels., Father, we will obey you now. We acknowledge thai 
 we have been very rebellious children. O, Father, won't you for- 
 give us? We are willing, Father, to obey you now, because we 
 cannot help it. O, won't you forgive us ? If we had been willing 
 to obey you at the first, what unnecessary trouble it would have 
 saved us. Now we see, Father, what weak and short-sighted 
 creatures we are. We see that it is no use for us to rebel against 
 you. You are wise, but we are ignorant. You are strong, but 
 we are weak. And now, Father, will you not forgive us, after we 
 have made such a fair and humble acknowledgement unto you?" 
 O, ye vipers ! ye liars ! ye hypocrites ! ye murderers ! You cannot 
 escape the damnation of hell ! When you have done your worst, I 
 can make you obey me. In vain do you struggle against me. I 
 
256 THE UNFAITHFUL. 
 
 can bring you to obedience. My course is one eternal round, and 
 my purposes never fail. My plans cannot be frustrated by mortal 
 men. I am the Lord of hosts. 
 
 5. And behold, I speak unto my people. Let them strive to 
 make themselves contented, and not murmur against me; for I 
 know their situation, and I do all things for the best. I will lay 
 no more burdens upon them than what they are able to bear. 
 Let them humble themselves and prepare for me ; for lo, I shall 
 come as a whirlwind, even as a consuming fire ; and but few will 
 stand to behold my appearance. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION TO THE UNFAITHFUL AND REBEL- 
 LIOUS PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 148. WEBER, UTAH, December 2nd, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am he that shuts, and no opens, and that opens 
 and no one shuts ; and I am about to speak unto you concerning 
 some of those who have yielded obedience unto the fulness of my 
 gospel, who are now losing my spirit, who fear they are neither 
 hot nor cold even those on whom I have placed a great responsi- 
 bility, who are unworthy of the least of my favors. I need not 
 to look for friends among them. They trample my blessings un- 
 der their feet as a thing of naught. They are almost unwilling to 
 turn their hand over to benefit their poor brethren ; but I will set- 
 tle with them. Oh, how my wrath is kindled againt them ! When 
 I have sent the fulness of my gospel to the earth, and opened 
 their way, and inclined their minds to obey it, yet they are not 
 willing to act their own part in it. They have had but little 
 trouble as yet. It has cost them but little. They are too un- 
 principled for me to work with them to any advantage. When I 
 have brought the fulness of my gospel to their doors, and done 
 everything that I possibly could for them, they do not appreciate 
 my favors. The are too careless and too unprincipled to do their 
 duties. The least thing that they are called to do appears to be 
 too much for them. They wish to have offices conferred upon 
 them; and when I have given unto them the desires of their 
 
THE UNFAITHFUL. 257 
 
 hearts, and placed them in honorable positions, they lavish my 
 blessings away upon their lusts. It is too much for them to do 
 the least duty which they are called upon to do. They cannot 
 even attend regularly to the public meetings for fear lest they 
 should be called upon to do something to help the poor. Oh, 
 how I do despise them ! If all my people were like unto them, 
 the poor of my people might perish at a time when I needed 
 assistance. I do not need to look to them for help. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I am the Lord, and I speak unto John 
 Trolsen, Niels Jacobsen, and Niels Morrisen, and I testify unto 
 them that I am about to settle with them. They have but a few 
 days allotted to them to turn themselves around and begin to do 
 their duties. I shall not be trifled with by them. I have a claim 
 on them ; and if they do not humble themselves before me, and 
 satisfy me for their neglect of duty and the manner in which they 
 have insulted me by trampling my blessings under their feet, I 
 will cut them off from the earth in a few days ; for I do, in my 
 heart, despise them. I can do without them if they can do with- 
 out me. I need not look to them for help. I am satisfied con- 
 cerning them. Therefore, I say unto you, O ye rebellious and 
 unprincipled men, look out for me, for I shall visit you as a whirl- 
 wind if you do not speedily repent, and retrace your steps, and 
 satisfy me for the many insults that you have given unto me. You 
 promised to be faithful unto me and my people when I conferred 
 upon you the apostleship. You have never done your duties 
 since you received your ordinations. You are as dead branches. 
 You are worthy of death ; therefore, make up your minds as to 
 what course you are going to take. You know my mind in rela- 
 tion to you. I am the Son of the Eternal Father, even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET INSTRUCTED HOW TO ACT WHEN 
 HE MEETS HIS ENEMIES. 
 
 No. 149. WEBER, UTAH, December 3rd, 1861. 
 
 i. WHAT shall I say unto you, my son? I see that you are 
 depressed in spirit on account of the near approach of your 
 
258 HOW TO MEET THE ENEMIES. 
 
 enemies, and of your apparent lack of preparation to meet them. 
 You feel yourself unprepared for an attack by them. But I have 
 now placed you in such a position that I can prepare you to meet 
 them in a short time. All that I need to do now is to ride up to 
 you, and place the rod in your hand, and stand by your side to 
 instruct you. This I shall do in the course of a few days. Your 
 enemies will come up to you in a few days. You know that I 
 have given unto you a partial knowledge of the time when you 
 may be looking out for them. In the time when you need to be 
 looking out for them you will not be disappointed. Seek to 
 strengthen yourself for that event. I will give unto you sufficient 
 time to fully prepare my people to meet them ; and when my peo- 
 ple are gathered together, they shall stand in the Fort, and the 
 high priests shall stand next to you in a rank. When I speak of 
 the high priesthood, it includes the apostleship. All apostles are 
 high priests, or should be ; therefore, all the high priests shall stand 
 next to you, three abreast in a row, and the apostles shall stand 
 next to you in the row ; and the first row shall be filled up with the 
 president of the high priests and his counsellors and other high 
 priests who have been in my Church the longest ; and thus the 
 high priests shall stand in their own order ; for I will give unto 
 them an endowment that day that they will never forget while they 
 are clothed in mortality. Let them stand to their posts like men. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, that the priests of Aaron 
 shall stand next to them in their 'order, three or four abreast, as 
 becomes necessary. And my people must all be at this place on 
 that day. I will bring mine enemies up here in the right way, and 
 at the right time ; this is my work. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, that those women and children 
 who have yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel, shall 
 stand behind the priests of Aaron, in order, and the children shall 
 stand behind the women. All things with my people shall be 
 placed in order on that day ; for I am the Lord, and order is my 
 first law. If my people will place themselves in order, as I have 
 commanded them, I will accept of them. I am the Lord. Let 
 my people be courageous, and set themselves for the work. They 
 will need. strength on that day. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that I will 
 
HOW TO MEET THE ENEMIES. 259 
 
 ride up to you when your enemies are many miles from you ; for 
 it will take you some time to place my people in perfect order. 
 And when I come up to you and place the rod in your hand, I 
 shall assist you in placing my people in order. I shall talk to you 
 mouth to mouth on that day ; and you shall see me face to face 
 as I am. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you shall stand before 
 my people with your counsellors by your side. You shall stand 
 between my people and mine enemies ; and a large number of 
 mine holy angels shall stand between your enemies and you ; and 
 they will only let your enemies come so near unto you. They will 
 smite mine enemies dead at the right time. Only give us the com- 
 mand in time as I have commanded you, and we will satisfy your 
 troubled mind in a few minutes. 
 
 6. When we begin, my servant John Banks will do his duty. 
 He knows what it is. Let him hold up your arm, for you will be 
 overpowered at that time through the sudden shock which you will 
 meet with all at once; and, in consequence of this, you will be 
 unable to raise the rod, and hold it steady yourself. Your nerves 
 will be affected until you cannot hold the rod steady. It is heavy, 
 and you are a weak man. You will drop it if you are not assisted. 
 I know what you r will do if you are not assisted. I feel in duty 
 bound to make known unto you the true position in which you will 
 be placed at that time ; therefore, seek to strengthen yourself as 
 much as possible. 
 
 7. And behold, I say unto you, that my servant John Banks 
 will feel his weakness greatly. Even the strong of my people will 
 have enough to do to stand upon their feet. Let all my people 
 prepare for that day, for it is at hand. I am the son of the 
 Eternal Father ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
260 FALSE REPORTS. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE FALSE REPORTS 
 
 WHICH HAVE BEEN CIRCULATED BY 
 
 THE ENEMIES. 
 
 No. 150. WEBER, UTAH, December 4th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, that all is 
 right. There is nothing going wrong between my people and 
 mine enemies. I am controlling all matters between my people 
 and mine enemies. It is necessary that I should stir them up. I 
 have done a thing that will arouse them, and remind them of their 
 duties. I do not want them to go to sleep. They know their 
 duties ; and if they do not walk up to them, I will arouse them. 
 They are backward. They do not like to walk up to their posts ; 
 therefore I am under the necessity of arousing them. I am ready 
 for them as far as I am concerned. All that I am waiting for is 
 my people and them. I am prepared, and I have prepared you. 
 All that remains to be done to prepare you to meet your enemies 
 can be done in a short time. All that is now needed to prepare 
 you for your work, is for me to ride up to you and give unto you 
 the rod, and stand by your side as I have promised you. And it 
 is I who is now dictating you. And you are surrounded by the 
 heavenly hosts. Even now they are fully prepared for war, if they 
 were called upon to go to battle this day. I have your rod 
 with me now, and I can assure you that it will be but a few days 
 before I give it unto you. I may say that I am just upon the 
 point of giving it unto you now. This is the nearest that I can 
 explain myself unto you in this matter. You will understand me. 
 You will have it in your hand before you have well turned around. 
 This people are now just upon the verge of being gathered to- 
 gether. Let them prepare themselves for that which is coming 
 upon them. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it is necessary for me 
 to arouse mine enemies. The last circumstance which transpired, 
 I, the Lord, caused it. I brought my people and mine enemies 
 in contact with each other for a wise purpose in myself. I wanted 
 to arouse mine enemies all around, that I might bring up a large 
 
FALSE REPORTS. 261 
 
 number of them to this place. I have now cast a stumbling-block 
 before mine enemies ; and they will be greatly infuriated against 
 my people. Mine enemies who live in this place will go abroad 
 and misinform others. They will tell mine enemies who live 
 abroad that their lives are in danger. I will promise them that 
 their lives will be in danger before they are through with their un- 
 dertaking. They should tell mine enemies abroad that it is me 
 that abused them, and ask them if they can help themselves. I 
 will abuse them before they are many days older. Thus mine 
 enemies will tell lies to the people abroad, and cause the people 
 'to come up against my people foully. Mine enemies abroad will 
 believe the reports of mine enemies who live in this place ; and 
 they will not seek to find out the truth of the whole matter ; but 
 they will believe the reports of liars without any more evidence ; 
 and thus they will come up against my people on false evidence. 
 This is the stumbling-block which I promised to lay before mine 
 enemies that I might righteously destroy them. They will attempt 
 to destroy my people without a just cause; and by defending the 
 just and righteous, I shall lawfully and justly destroy them. I 
 now have them in the right position, after working with them for a 
 time. I have to do all things according to the law of heaven; 
 and it upholds me in defending the principles of truth, justice and 
 righteousness ; and thus I shall destroy mine enemies while I sus- 
 tain those principles. If mine enemies never came in contact 
 with those people who teach and practice the principles of right- 
 eousness, and had never sought to destroy them, but let them 
 alone, and gave unto them their rights, I should never destroy 
 them. If I ever destroy people, it is to defend that which is right. 
 Right must rule ; and it is my duty to defend it. This I shall do. 
 If mine enemies do not wish to be destroyed, they must not cross 
 my path ; for, if they do, I shall make their existence short. I go 
 straightforward. I do not turn to the right nor to the left. I am 
 not turned out of my course by evil doers. I am the Lord of 
 Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
262 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 REVELATION TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 151. WEBER, UTAH, December 5th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, you are troubled in your 
 feelings. You scarcely know how to contain yourself, you feel so 
 burdened with the work that lies before you. You feel satisfied 
 that your enemies will be here in the course of a few days at the 
 farthest. You are sure that they will come upon you; and you 
 say that I hold myself at such a distance from you that you can- 
 not fully believe that I intend to come to you before your enemies 
 will be here. You think that such a sudden and powerful mani- 
 festation from me to you and my people appears too much to 
 believe even so much that you cannot raise that amount of faith 
 necessary to lay hold of that promise; and thus you stumble at it. 
 You think that it is too much for mortal men eve^ to look for or 
 expect, and, consequently, you think that it is out of the power of 
 man to exercise faith in such a promise. 
 
 2. You know that this is a day of great events. It is not a 
 day of small things. You know that, years ago, when you felt 
 your weakness even when you did not exercise sufficient faith in 
 me to believe that I ever should confer upon you such an endow- 
 ment I gave unto you the keys of the holy priesthood. I did 
 not promise you that I would give unto you those keys, before I 
 conferred that blessing upon you. You could not exercise faith in 
 a thing which you knew nothing about; consequently, I gave unto 
 you that blessing independently of your faith. All that I require 
 of you is to do as I tell you. If you can raise faith enough to do 
 that, it is all that I require of you. 
 
 3. I know that you can do nothing with your enemies yourself. 
 I do not expect it of you. If you will do as I command you, you 
 will open the way for me. I have to work through you. I can 
 do nothing upon the earth only by your consent ; and if you will 
 always liberate me, I will do the work. I will sweep all your 
 enemies off the earth whenever they cross your path. Then let us 
 work together. Do your own part of the work, which will be 
 but little, and do not fret about me. I will do mine own part of 
 the work without fail. There is no faltering to the heavenly 
 hosts. 
 
TO THE PROPHET. 263 
 
 4. You need not to fret and trouble yourself about the great 
 day of my power, which is at hand, or because that you can- 
 not fully believe that I shall bring unto you the rod. You will 
 believe it when you , see it, and that will be soon enough. Your 
 faith will not bring it before the time, nor will your lack of faith 
 keep it from you one minute after the time shall have arrived. Tf~~ 
 the rod does not come at the right time, it will be my fault, and 
 not yours. Therefore, do not fret and fume about things which 
 you cannot control, even things which belong to me to control. I 
 will mind mine own business, if you will mind yours. Do as I 
 tell you, and leave that portion of the work which belongs to me 
 in my hands, and all will be well. 
 
 5. You wish to know what you are to do with the rod after I 
 shall have cut off mine enemies. You say that you have no 
 respectable place to put it. You know that I ha^ve told you that I 
 shall continue with you after I shall have visited you; and after the 
 scourge is over, I shall go before you to the city called Salt Lake 
 City, and there I shall find you a respectable place to put it. And 
 if you should be at a loss for a respectable place to put it for a 
 few days until I shall find you that place, as I shall be with you 
 all the time, and shall continually move in your presence, if you 
 will hand it back to me after you have used it, I will take care of 
 it for you until I shall find you a suitable place to keep it, and 
 then you can keep it in your own possession continually. It is not 
 an instrument to be played with it must be taken care of. It is 
 your Father's rod, and it has been in existence millions of years. 
 It is made of that kind of material that will never waste away, and 
 it has your Father's signature upon it. And when you wave it, 
 your Father is compelled to sustain you, if necessary, with all the 
 power which he has. 
 
 6. Behold, I am Jesus Christ, and I testify unto you, my son, 
 that I have the privilege to call upon the inhabitants of other 
 celestial earths even many of them, if I need their assistance ; 
 but I have power enough without any help from other worlds. I 
 do not lack for power. I have an abundance of it, and you will 
 soon see a display thereof. Therefore, my son, remember that I, 
 even Jesus Christ, am with you. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
264 INSTRUCTION FOR THE PROPHET. 
 
 \ 
 
 REVELATION CONTAINING INSTRUCTIONS TO THE 
 PROPHET. 
 
 No. 152. WEBER, UTAH, December 6th, 1861. 
 
 1. LIFT up you head, and stand to your post like a man, for I 
 call upon you to do so. Do not shrink from your duty ; for you 
 have good backing. All the heavenly hosts say that they wish me 
 to inform you -that they will uphold you. They say, "We will 
 fight your battles until you are satisfied. You shall never have 
 cause to complain of us for neglecting you. We delight in fight- 
 ing your battles ; for that is now our entire duty. We shall be 
 with you, and we will show you that we are not afraid of your 
 enemies, when we .can lawfully attack them. We will show you 
 that we do not uphold them in their abominations any more than 
 you do. We have been pained with their wickedness as well as 
 you have ; but we have had to bear with it as well as you have. 
 But we now have them into the right shape. We can now do 
 something with them. We have longed for this time to come, so 
 that we could attack them. We wish to encourage you, for we see 
 that your spirits droop, and that your are in trouble." 
 
 2. Behold, I am Jesus Christ, and I have given unto you, my 
 servant Joseph, the mind of all the heavenly host. They called 
 upon me to reveal unto you their full intentions. They are one 
 with you in all things, and they will satisfy you as soon as your 
 enemies come up against you, which they are now just on the point 
 of doing. Mine enemies do not wish to trouble my people about 
 their fines until they shall have all mine enemies prepared for the 
 work (as they suppose). They wish to make all things ready 
 before they send a messenger up to my people to ascertain their 
 minds in relation to their fines. And if mine enemies do send a 
 messenger up to my people to find out their intentions concerning 
 their fines, it will only be to meet with a denial. Mine enemies 
 have heard that my people intend to resist them ; therefore, they 
 have been preparing themselves to meet with resistance from 
 them. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, if mine enemies do 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR THE PROPHET. 265 
 
 send a messenger up to my people, they shall resist him, and send 
 him away. I will now give unto mine enemies a chance to see 
 what they can do. And I also say unto you, my son, that if a 
 messenger comes, and my people send him away, which they must 
 do, you may then, begin to look out for me and the heavenly hosts; 
 for we shall come unto you soon after that messenger shall have 
 left this place, for he will go forthwith to bring a mob ; and if he 
 does not bring up a mob against my people on the same day that 
 he is resisted, he will do so on the day following. Therefore, my 
 son, if you see this, you must watch for me, and you will not be 
 disappointed ; for I shall come unto you suddenly, as I have before 
 promised you. You may then begin to think about gathering my 
 people together. But you need not fear, for I will come unto you 
 in time, and give unto you sufficient time to gather all my people 
 together, and to place them in order. 
 
 4. And I also say unto you, mine enemies will speedily either 
 send a messenger up to you, or they will bring up a mob at once. 
 You may begin to look out for a visit from them, either of one 
 kind or the other. If they conclude to send a mob up to you at 
 the first, I shall know it, for I am watching them. I feel in 
 duty bound to put you on your guard. As I have said unto you 
 before, so I say unto you again, I will come unto you when your 
 enemies are many miles from you. Before they reach up to where 
 you will be, you will have all my people placed in their proper 
 order, and you will be waiting for mine enemies to come up. You 
 will not be hurried at all. You have nothing to fear. Therefore, 
 let me entfeat you not to let your spirits droop, for it is painful 
 unto me to see you so cast down. When you suffer your spirits 
 to droop to such an extent, it entirely unfits you for your place ; 
 therefore, rise up and stand to your post like a man, and do not 
 let your spirits fail you. I am by your side. I am Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
266 COMMANDED TO PREPARE TO MEET THE LORD. 
 
 THE PEOPLE COMMANDED TO PREPARE TO 
 MEET THE LORD. 
 
 No. 153. WEBER, UTAH, December yth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, I am with you, and you 
 shall see me in the course of a few hours. I am watching mine 
 enemies, and I will bring them to the right position. You feel as 
 though you desired to see me. You will not be in pain long on 
 that account ; for you will see me to your satisfaction in the course 
 of a few hours. As I have told you, get yourself ready to meet 
 me, and do not shew such weakness. You are afraid that I shall 
 leave you alone; but you have nothing to fear. Mine enemies 
 are now about ready to come up against my people. All that 
 they are waiting for is to receive their orders, and then they will 
 come up. Let my people be calm and steady-minded. They 
 must not be excited. They need to begin to lay things to heart. 
 This is not a time oi trifling ; but it is a time of solemnity. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you that, it is my will that all my 
 people should wash themselves clean this day, and prepare them- 
 selves to meet me ; and when my people are called together to 
 meet me and their enemies, they must come as well dressed as 
 possible; for I am the Lord, and I delight in cleanliness and 
 respectability. My people must dress themselves as neat as possi- 
 ble, and I will accept of them. I am the Lord. My people must 
 rise up and do as I have commanded them. They have no time 
 to lose. Let them listen unto me, and all will be well with them. 
 I shall now speedily make a change of things. O how I do wish 
 that you would cast all fear far from you. If you would do this, 
 I could work with you with pleasure. You know that you cannot 
 improve the present condition of things by fretting. Your whole 
 fear is in me. You fear that I shall betray your confidence, and 
 that when I am wanted I shall not be there. You say in your 
 feelings that if you knew that I should cpme unto you when I am 
 needed, that you could rest contented ; but ypu cannot believe in 
 my promises fully, and that is what afflicts you. You are unwill- 
 
DESCRIPTION OF THE SAVIOR, ETC. 267 
 
 ing to believe in a "thing except you can see it. I am honest 
 never fear. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONTAINING A DESCRIPTION OF 
 THE SAVIOR. 
 
 No. 154. WEBER, UTAH, December 7th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOJLD, I am the Light and Life of the world, even he 
 who shines forth in the midst of darkness, and the darkness com- 
 prehendeth him not, even Jesus Christ ; and I say unto you, that 
 I cannot rest while I see you cast down as you are. What can I 
 do for you to minister unto your present relief? If you could 
 endure as you are, without murmuring against me, for a few hours, 
 it would be all that I should wish to ask of you. I know that you 
 are in a peculiar position, and you need to see me. This I know. 
 But I am bound by the law of heaven to keep at a distance from 
 you, until I come up to you. I will not keep you in misery more 
 than a few hours. Then try to contain yourself for the space of a 
 few hours. I have told you many times that I am by your 
 side. 
 
 2. You wish to know how I shall come unto you when I come 
 to reveal myself fully unto you, and how I shall approach you 
 when I come to give unto you the rod, and what you may expect 
 to see when you see me ; what I am like ; what you may look for ; 
 how I am dressed, and what kind of a personage I am ; am I a 
 large man or a small one ; what color of hair I have ; what com- 
 plexion I am of ; shall I be on horseback or on foot ; have I your 
 rod with me now; and where shall you stand when I shall give it 
 unto you ; if I have your rod, how do I carry it about with me ; 
 if I have no means except riding on horseback, you would think 
 that I could not carry it conveniently. 
 
 3. Behold, I say unto you, my son, that I have many carriages 
 with me. I am amply supplied with conveyances all that I 
 need while I am attending to the mission which I have to perform. 
 
268 DESCRIPTION OF THE SAVIOR. 
 
 I shall come unto you with my resurrected body. I am rather 
 large in stature; much larger than you are. You are small and 
 weakly now; but when you are in your resurrected body you. are 
 very large in stature. Resurrected beings are larger in stature 
 that mortal men. I have seen you in your glory ; but this is a 
 time of trouble with you. You feel small now; but you will soon 
 feel that you are the master of the whole earth. You will shortly 
 stand in your glory again. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, that I am of a fair complexion. 
 I have lightish hair, and my beard is long and rather sandy. I 
 am of a lighter complexion than you are ; you are rather dark. 
 You must pay attention to what I say unto you. I have given 
 unto you a true description of myself in every respect. I ride 
 upon a white horse; and I shall be upon a white horse when I 
 come up to you. You must look out for Satan ; for he will seek 
 to visit you before I do ; and he will try to make you believe that 
 he is me. But, behold, I say unto you, that Satan does not wear 
 his beard, even as I do, and he is not of the same complexion 
 that I am of. You know him, and you must resist him and send 
 him away from you. He wishes to destroy you. It would be 
 well if your companion or some other person would watch over 
 you while you sleep, and let them shake you if you make a noise, 
 for Satan is mad at you, and he says that he will destroy you if he 
 can ; therefore, you must look out for him. He intends to visit 
 you before I do if he can. He is large in stature, and when he 
 comes as he is, in his right garb, he is black; this you know. He 
 is large, but not as large as myself. If you see us both, you will 
 know us apart. You will see me, as I have told you before, in a 
 few hours ; and when I ride up to you and give unto you the rod, 
 you will be standing on the outside of your door, not far away 
 from it. When I give it unto you, I shall envelop you in mine 
 own influence. I shall strengthen you so that you can lay hold 
 of it; and as soon as you have received it, you must com- 
 mence to gather my people together, and to place them in order. 
 You may rest yourself contented until you see me. You need not 
 to look for your enemies until you have seen me. I will guide 
 you in that respect. I arri not a traitor, and that you shall soon 
 see. 
 
THE ENEMIES DISAPPOINTED, ETC. 269 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, that the angels are large in 
 stature even as I am. They are powerful in war. You know 
 what resurrected persons are like. You have seen them often 
 enough. You complain of me that I have not shown unto you 
 the heavenly hosts of late. I have kept them away from you for 
 a wise purpose in myself. If I had continued to show them unto 
 you from time to time, Satan would have visited you also, and 
 afflicted you greatly. When I stopped visiting you, Satan stopped 
 afflicting you. If I had continued to visit you, Satan would have 
 continued to visit you ; but when I stopped visiting you, he stopped 
 also. I had to stop visiting you in order to stop him. You know 
 his way of working. You may prepare yourself now, for he will 
 try you with all his power. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that I am well pleased 
 with my people for the willingness which they manifested in 
 responding to the call which I made upon them in order that they 
 might meet me neat and clean. My spirit shall abundantly 
 strengthen them. They have strong faith in my promises, and I 
 will abundantly satisfy them for their faithfulness. Let them be 
 strong, and I will be their Shepherd forever. I am Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE ENEMIES DISAPPOINTED. 
 
 No. 155. WEBER, UTAH, December 8th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am about to speak unto you concerning your 
 enemies. Their hearts fail them to certain extent. Before they 
 sent a messenger up to my people to collect their fines, they were 
 all ready to come up against my people if that messenger was 
 resisted by my people. Mine enemies were full of glee before 
 that messenger came up to my people to collect their fines; and 
 they stated what they would do if my people resisted that messen- 
 ger. But when that messenger returned to them, having been 
 resisted, their feelings changed to a certain extent. They did not 
 think that my people would really resist them ; and when they had 
 learned that my people had so promptly resisted them, they were 
 
270 THE ENEMIES DISAPPOINTED. 
 
 smitten to their hearts with terror. They did not know what to 
 make of it. They saw their position at once; and they feel 
 now as though they wanted time to take their breath. They are 
 not in such a hurry as they were before. That messenger came 
 up to my people and met with such a denial that they would not 
 come up against my people if they could help "it. But they are 
 compelled to come now, or else give up to my people. They have 
 commenced a work, and they must not back out. They will have 
 to come on, or lose their credit as honorable devils. Their duty 
 compels them to come on. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that I should have 
 come up to you before this time . if they had done their duty. I 
 fully expected that they would have been here before now. They 
 would have been here if their hearts had not failed them in conse- 
 quence of that messenger meeting with such a positive denial. 
 They did not expect such a denial, and, therefore, it disarranged 
 them, and they wanted a little more time to turn themselves round 
 and get their breath. They say that they will have to come up 
 against my people. They say that they cannot back out now. 
 They will try again to muster fresh courage. They say in their 
 feelings that they must make the best of their bad work. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that you will soon see 
 them coming down that bench. You need to keep on the look- 
 out for me. I will watch them, and you must lookout for me. I 
 shall come unto you in time, as I have told you. All that you 
 need to do is to lookout for me. Give yourself no trouble what- 
 ever. I have commenced a work, and I can carry it on. Woe 
 unto them that undertake to stay my hand ! I will send them 
 home speedily. Let my people be calm and patient, and hold 
 themselves in readiness to be called up when I am ready to call 
 upon them. I am round about my people ; and I am ready at 
 any time. I am the Son of the Eternal Father; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE LORD PROMISES TO VISIT THE PROPHET. 271 
 
 \ 
 
 THE LORD PROMISES TO VISIT THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 156. WEBER, UTAH, December 8th, 1861. 
 
 i. I AM come to speak unto you again, my servant Joseph. I 
 see that you wish to hear from me again. I want to relieve your 
 feelings all that I can. My heart aches for you when I see you 
 struggling in pain. O how soon I could relieve you if I was only 
 set at liberty. I long to relieve you. I am coming to visit you, 
 as I have promised you. You want to know how I shall come, 
 and what I shall bring with me for you when I come to visit you ; 
 what kind of attire I shall have on when I come to you and unveil 
 myself unto you ; what kind of a hat .1 shall have on when I visit 
 you ; when you may fully expect a visit from me. You ask, " Will 
 you answer me those questions? If you would, it would greatly re- 
 lieve my present feelings." I will strive to relieve you as much as 
 I possibly can. You may begin to reconcile yourself to your fate. 
 I am now about to strengthen you abundantly. You shall never 
 feel as wretched in your feelings again as you have felt during the 
 last few days. I will take care of that. Your feelings could not 
 be discribed with the tongue of mortal man. Oh ! the painful 
 feelings which you have had. I must take a course to put an end 
 to such feelings as those. I cannot bear to see you in such 
 a condition. It brings a horror indescribable to my heart. I 
 must lift you up, and give unto you better feelings. I could do 
 it in a few minutes if my way was clear, so that I could come out 
 upon mine enemies ; but they have lingered thus far, and kept 
 your feelings in constant trouble. But they will soon come up 
 now. I will give unto you better feelings. 
 
 2. I shall be dressed in warlike apparel when I come up to 
 you. My clothing will be striped with red, even as you have seen 
 the clothing of generals oVer the armies upon the earth. But my 
 attire is far more beautiful than theirs ; and the apparel which the 
 armies of heaven wear is similar in its nature to that which I wear. 
 When the armies of heaven are about to go out to war, they dress 
 themselves in warlike apparel. They have all things in proper 
 order. I wear a high hat, beautiful to look upon, with many small 
 
272 THE LORD PROMISES TO VISIT THE PROPHET. 
 
 crowns on the top of it ; and the horse which I ride upon is very 
 large and most beautiful. When you see me you will be so 
 astomshed that your natural strength will leave you for a moment, 
 until I lay hold of you and hold you ; but after a few moments, 
 you will be strong, and you will be able to look upon me steadily 
 and talk with me. I know your weakness, and I will deal kindly 
 with you ; and after I have made myself perfectly acquainted with 
 you, you shall then introduce mt to those of my servants who are 
 closely connected with you in the priesthood; and thus you shall 
 first introduce me to one and then to another ; and in this manner 
 you shall make my people acquainted with me. I know them, but 
 they do not know me as yet. But when you have introduced me 
 unto them, they will know more about me. I want them to know 
 me perfectly. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that I have your royal 
 robe with me, and I will give it unto you when I give unto you the 
 rod ; and you must put it on before you take the rod and raise it 
 and give the command. Before ever you take that rod and raise 
 it you must put on that royal robe which I shall give unto you. 
 For it is unlawful for you to raise that rod and give a command 
 except that you have on you the royal robe. The robe which I 
 shall give unto you is your Father's robe, and it is beautiful to 
 look upon. 
 
 4. I shall give unto you these things which I have promised 
 you ; and I shall endow yon with power all at once ; and I shall 
 do all this before your enemies are in sight. I shall do a great 
 deal in a short time. I cannot tell you, my son, to an hour when 
 I shall come unto you and give unto you these things. I have to 
 watch mine enemies and work as they work. I am continually 
 watching mine enemies ; and I will tell you their feelings and in- 
 tentions from time to time. They hardly know what to do. Their 
 minds change from time to time. Sometimes they feel prepared 
 to come up against my people to destroy them, as they suppose, 
 and at other times their hearts fail them. When they think about 
 destroying my people, they cannot jteep in one mind long ; and 
 thus they strive to baffle me all that they can. But they will come 
 to my terms at last. They are free agents, and I am compelled 
 to give unto them, their agency. I have to run with them and out- 
 
THE UNSETTLED CONDITION OF THE ENEMIES. 273 
 
 wit them ; and in this manner I have to turn their evil purposes to 
 good ends, and bring them to my terms. In this way I make the 
 wrath of man to serve me ; but I do not even destroy the agency 
 of devils. All people have their rights. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE UNSETTLED CONDI- 
 TION OF THE ENEMIES OF THE LORD. 
 
 No. 157. WEBER, UTAH, December pth, -1861. 
 
 i. I AM compelled to speak unto you again, for I see that 
 things are now beginning to work among mine enemies. They are 
 beginning now to arouse themselves again. They feel that, to deal 
 with the matter with which they now have to deal, is a hard job ; 
 and, to a certain extent, their hearts fail them. They say in their 
 feelings that they wish that they knew how things would come out. 
 They want a prophet to tell them whether or not they would pros- 
 per. They want a prophet that would say to them, "Go up 
 against those people and prosper." They want encouragement. 
 Even though it should be from a false prophet, it would help them 
 at this time. They have a prophet in their midst. If they would 
 ask him, he would tell them whether they would prosper or not ; 
 but a true prophet will not answer their purpose at this time. If 
 a false prophet would only tell them to "go up, and prosper," it 
 would, at the present time, relieve them greatly. It is a word of 
 encouragement that they want to help them no matter whence it 
 comes. Oh, how their hearts do pain them. They hate to give 
 up to my people, and they hate to come up against them. They 
 wish that they were placed in such a position that they could drop 
 the thing altogether. They find themselves this day in such a 
 position as they did not expect to be in ; and on this account they 
 are in pain. They see that they have to fight their way out in the 
 best manner they can ; that, let the matter turn out whichever way 
 it may, it will cause them a great deal of trouble ; and they think 
 that, if they should lose the cast altogether, theirs will be a bad 
 
274 THE PEOPLE COMMANDED TO BE READY. 
 
 case. They are sensible that they will either gain the cast or lose 
 it, and they fear 'that they will lose it; that is what afflicts them. 
 These are the thoughts of their hearts ; therefore, they want encour- 
 agement from some source or other. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, my people must keep 
 together as much as they possibly can. They must not wander 
 far away, but hold themselves in readiness, so that any time when 
 they shall be called upon, they may be here ; for things are now in 
 a very uncertain condition among mine enemies; they work so 
 unsteadily. Therefore, when they come, they will come in a hurry 
 just while the fit is upon them. They are so unstable that, if 
 they did not come in this way, they would not come at all. There- 
 fore, let my people hold themselves in readiness for them, and all 
 wifl. be well with them. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that when they do 
 come up against my people, I will destroy them speedily ; for in 
 less than two hours, according to your time, after I shall have 
 given unto you the rod, I shall have slain many thousands of mine 
 enemies ; therefore, their destruction will soon be accomplished. 
 When I do begin I shall work fast. Dead bodies will lay in all 
 parts of this Territory; for, at thaMime, I shall destroy that spirit 
 of murder which now prevails, from among this people. I will 
 give unto those who shall be left, something to think about. 
 
 4. And behold, I speak unto you concerning the robe which 
 I shall give unto you. When I give it unto you, I will tell you 
 how you must wear it. I will also help you to arrange my people 
 in their proper order, and I will assist you to make all things ready 
 for mine enemies by the time that they shall reach this place ; and 
 before they will be in sight you will be fully prepared for them. 
 I have done all that I possibly could to prepare you for your 
 work, unless I should come and reveal myself fully unto you ; and 
 that I cannot do until your enemies are about to come against you. 
 I have made known unto you everything that I possibly could in 
 order to cheer you up ; and all that I have promised I shall fulfil 
 as soon as the time shall have come for me to do so ; but I cannot 
 fulfil any promise which I make until the proper time for it to be 
 fulfilled has arrived. I will fulfil all my promises when the proper 
 time for their fulfillment has come. There is a time for all things, 
 
THE ENEMIES APPEAR RELUCTANT. 275 
 
 and all things must be done in their own time and order. 
 I add no more at the present time. I am the Light and Life 
 of the world; even Jesus Chiist. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE ENEMIES ARE RELUCTANT ABOUT COMING 
 AGAINST THE LORD'S PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 158. WEBER, UTAH, December loth, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Son of the Eternal Father, and I am 
 about to speak unto you for your satisfaction. You see how mine 
 enemies strive to baffle me. They hate to come to my terms. 
 They do not want to fulfil the revelations which I have given con- 
 cerning them; and thus they are turning and twisting about to 
 strive to make me a liar. They do not want to come up against 
 my people in the way that I have said that they would. They 
 want to come up some other way to make me appear false. They 
 would rather never come, than come in the way which I have said 
 that they would. In fact, if they could do without coming, it 
 would greatly relieve them. But they see that they have to do 
 something ; and what they do, they will be driven to it. O how 
 they do hate to come to my terms. If it had not been for fulfill- 
 ing my word, they would have been here before this time. But 
 they want to destroy my people and still do it in another way to 
 that which I have appointed ; and, on this account, they are now 
 lingering between two opinions. They see that they cannot get at 
 my people in any other way than to bring a large mob against 
 them ; and for them to do so, it would be fulfilling my word ; and 
 they do not ^ know what course to pursue to make me a liar, as 
 they would call me. But they will come to my terms or do noth- 
 ing at all. If they do not make a move speedily, I will. If they 
 will not do their duty, I will do mine. The work has to go on ; 
 and if they do not speedily come on, I will give unto you the rod, 
 and I will start the work myself. I will cut them off for neglect- 
 ing their duty even for being traitors to the devil. They have 
 commenced the work with my people. My people never inter- 
 
276 THE ENEMIES APPEAR RELUCTANT. 
 
 rupted them. They began a work, and now they are afraid to 
 proceed with it. But if they do not speedily proceed with their 
 work, I will commence, and I will sweep them off the earth. 
 They need not to think that they can save their lives now ; for 
 they cannot. Inasmuch as they commenced the work, they have 
 given unto me the first offence ; and if they do not continue with 
 the work, after starting it, it is because they are afraid to do so. 
 If they stay back, it will be through fear of their own lives. They 
 will thirst for the blood of my people as much if they staid away 
 from them as if they came up against them ; therefore, I can law- 
 fully slay them now, whether they come up against my people or 
 not. But I can bring them up against my people in the way that 
 I have appointed, if I feel disposed to wait for them. But I am 
 now in a hurry, and they are backward. I shall not wait on them 
 long. 
 
 2. I will not hold my people in suspense but a ve.y short 
 time. I will not disappoint my people. Let them hold them- 
 selves in readiness, as I have before commanded them; and if 
 mine enemies do not very speedily come up, they will not have 
 the opportunity to do so. Before they sent that messenger up to 
 this place to collect fines from my people, they all appeared ready 
 to come up against my people forthwith if that messenger met 
 with resistance ; and when he returned to them, and delivered his 
 message, they were discouraged. They appeared to have no spirit 
 for war. Just at that time they were smitten with astonishment. 
 They all felt weak. They felt unable at that time to come up 
 against my people. They wanted encouragement from some 
 source or another. They did not come up against my people 
 the day after they were resisted, because they could not. Their 
 spirits were broken at that time. There is no other way for them 
 to come up against my people but the way which I have appointed 
 for them. If they will not come upon my people in* that way very 
 soon, they will not have the privilege to come up to them in any 
 way ; for I am about to come out upon them very speedily. 
 
 3. As I have said unto you before, I am about to come unto 
 you. You must keep on the lookout for me, and prepare your- 
 self for a sudden shock ; for I shall soon be with you in the way 
 in which I have appointed. You will know what to expect. You 
 
CONCERNING PERSONAL INTERVIEWS. 277 
 
 will know me when you see me. I have described myself plainly 
 unto you. I have left nothing undone in that respect. Then 
 keep on the lookout for me, as I have commanded you. I am 
 the Light and Life of the world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING HOW PERSONAL INTER- 
 VIEWS BETWEEN THE LORD AND THE 
 PROPHET SHALL BE CON- 
 DUCTED. 
 
 No. 159. WEBER, UTAH, December loth, 1861. 
 
 1. WHAT shall I say unto you, my son? I have said almost 
 all that I have to say unto you in the manner that I have hitherto 
 been accustomed to reveal unto you. While I have been raising 
 you up, I have been compelled to reveal the keys of knowledge 
 unto you in the way that I have done. I could not speak unto 
 you mouth to mouth, because it was unlawful for me to do so ; but 
 when I shall have fully raised you up, it will be my duty to speak 
 unto you mouth to mouth ; this I shall then be compelled to do. 
 You will not be considered as fully raised up until you shall have 
 obtained your Father' robe and rod. When you shall have those 
 things in your possession, you will be fully raised up ; for I shall 
 never deliver those things into your possession until it is lawful for 
 me to do so. And after you shall have received them, it will be 
 my duty to reveal unto you the mysteries of my kingdom in a 
 more plain and satisfactory manner even to talk to you mouth 
 to mouth. This I can do when I shall have given unto you your 
 robe. You will have to put it on whenever you wish to talk to me 
 mouth to mouth;. for I now wear my Father's robe, and when you 
 and I shall meet together in council, I shall come unto you attired 
 with my Father's robe, and you must put on your Father's robe 
 before you come into my presence. If you do not, you will not 
 be able to see my face ; therefore, when we meet together, we must 
 meet in our robes. 
 
 2. None can put on those royal robes except those who hold 
 
278 CONCERNING PERSONAL INTERVIEWS. 
 
 the keys of the holy priesthood in heaven and upon the earth. I 
 hold the keys of the holy priesthood in heaven, and that entitles 
 me to my Father's robe and rod. And when I put on my Father's 
 robe, and wield his rod, I am clothed with all his power. I work 
 in his name, and by his authority he sanctions all that I do. 
 And behold, I say unto you, my son, as I hold the keys of the 
 holy priesthood in heaven, so you hold the keys of the holy priest- 
 hood upon the earth. And as I am entitled to my Father's robe 
 and rod, so you are entitled to your Father's robe and rod. And 
 as I make use of my Father's robe, and wield his rod, under his 
 authority, and in his name, so you put on your Father's robe, and 
 wield his rod, in his name, and by his authority, and he sanctions 
 all that you do. And thus your authority must be acknowledged 
 first, and mine second. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, there may be times 
 when I shall be busily engaged in heaven, and shall not be able 
 to come myself and reveal things unto you mouth to mouth ; but 
 when I cannot come unto you myself, I shall send unto you 
 another angel who is high in authority, to talk to you in my stead. 
 He will tell you those things which you may wish to know; and I 
 shall put my Father's robe upon him whenever I shall send him to 
 minister unto you ; but whenever trouble is around you, I shall 
 always be with you myself. 
 
 4. I am about to come unto you suddenly ; therefore, I shall 
 reveal the hidden things of my kingdom unto you by talking unto 
 you mouth to mouth. Henceforth, you will almost always receive 
 the information which you will need from heaven, either from my 
 mouth, or from the mouth of a holy angel even such a one as I 
 shall appoint to minister unto you. I shall reveal but little more 
 unto you in the way in which I have revealed unto you while I 
 have been raising you up; but almost the next thing that I 
 shall do will be to reveal to you face to face. I may say that 
 I am coming to you almost immediately. I cannot tell you any 
 nearer when I shall come; for one of the next things which you 
 will see will be me. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
TO THE PROPHET. 279 
 
 TO THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 160. WEBER, UTAH, December i ith, 1861. 
 
 1. WHY are you so faithless when you know that I am always 
 with you? Mine holy angels never leave you. They are always 
 ready for any emergency. They are never away from you ; and 
 why are you cast down in such a manner as you are, as though you 
 had no guard over you? There is no earthly power that can come 
 near enough to you to hurt you. When mine enemies come 
 around you, I know their intentions. If they come to this place 
 with a full intention of destroying you, or any of my people, I 
 shall not let them come near enough to you to hurt any of you. 
 I know the intentions of every man that comes into this place. 
 There is a guard set over this place, which consists of many angels; 
 and those angels know the business of every person that comes 
 into this place. This place is ruled by mine holy angels. Devils 
 have to be subject unto them when they come into this place ; for 
 I am the Lord, and I have a foot hold here, and I will make them 
 give way. Let devils come here and I will show them what they 
 are. I claim one small spot upon the earth where I can start a 
 work, and I shall go forth from that place and destroy everything 
 that opposes me ; for I am the Lord. Look out for me, my son. 
 
 2. You must place all things in order at home, and prepare for 
 dressing yourself up as neat and clean as you possibly can ; for I 
 wish you to be respectably dressed when I meet you. Both me 
 and mine holy angels are well dressed; much better than you are 
 at present. But you shall dress like unto us ; for we will give unto 
 you celestial clothing ; and while you wear that clothing you will 
 never die. When you have to die you will have to take off your 
 celestial dress. 
 
 3. When you are in full power you will not wear clothing 
 which has been manufactured by mortal hands; but you will wear 
 clothing which has been manufactured in heaven by holy angels. 
 You will not wear clothing that has been manufactured by the 
 hands of fallen and sinful people. Your clothing must not be 
 soiled by the hands of mortals ; and while you wear clothing that 
 
280 THE PROPHET REPROVED. 
 
 has never been soiled by sinful and deadly hands, you will live ; 
 and when you die you will have to take off your celestial dress ; 
 for you could never die with it on. 
 
 4. Listen unto me, my son. I am coming to you speedily. I 
 could tell you when I shall come to you. The time is now 
 fixed for the test. You must watch out^ for that influence resting 
 upon you. All is well. I am the Lord of Hosts, even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET REPROVED FOR HIS LACK OF 
 FAITH. 
 
 No. 1 6 1. WEBER, UTAH, December nth, 1861. 
 
 1. O, HOW I am astonished at you ! I have never before seen 
 a man act as you do. What are you afraid of? You are filled 
 with fear. You have little or no faith about you. You seem to 
 place no reliance in me ; and yet you cannot bring up one instance 
 wherein I have failed to fulfil my promises. What do you mean 
 when you cannot believe that I intend to come up to you and give 
 unto you power over your enemies. Do you think that after I 
 have been at all the trouble which I have to raise you up, that I 
 am about to let the devils destroy you before you have done any- 
 thing towards delivering my people? What think you? You 
 must have a poor opinion of me. I do not think that I deserve 
 such treatment from you. I have always tfulfilled my promises 
 which I have made unto you as far as I have gone with you. But 
 you see trouble ahead, and you fear that I am about to leave you 
 in it. You are afraid before you are hurt. 
 
 2. I know that you appear weak, very weak; but I am com- 
 pelled to stand by you and obey your command. You are in 
 trouble because I do not come unto you aud give unto you the 
 power which I have promised unto you. You are weary of waiting 
 for me. You think that I trifle too much with mine enemies. 
 You cannot see why I should suffer myself to be baffled by them 
 so much. You want me to come straight out upon them, and 
 move them out of the way at once. Because I have been so long 
 
A WARNING. 28l 
 
 working with mine enemies to bring them up to a point, you are 
 losing confidence in me. You begin to think that I am trifling 
 with your feelings ; and, on this account, you are almost ready to 
 conclude that I am not true unto you, and that I profess to be 
 your friend, when in reality I am your enemy. You are almos 
 ready to believe this. But I have done all that lay in my power to 
 satisfy you. In the position in which I have been placed, I have 
 been compelled to work with mine enemies in the way in which I 
 have, as far as I have gone with you. But now I can satisfy you. 
 You may look out for me shortly. I may pay you a visit to-mor- 
 row, and I may lay your feelings at rest then. I may lay many 
 thousands dead upon the ground on that day. Before long I 
 will go into the halls of the great and proud to give them a 
 timely warning. There may not be one soul left in them to 
 tell the tale. Woe and lamentations may be heard throughout 
 this Territory. I shall soon preach a sermon that will never be 
 forgotten. Therefore, I say unto you, my son, prepare to meet 
 me. Before long you may see me and be fully satisfied. You 
 must not be disappointed if you see some of your enemies in a 
 short time. I will promise you that you will see me long before 
 you see them. You will be perfectly ready when they come up 
 to where you are ; and if you do not see me to-morrow, you will 
 not see them either. Whenever you see them, you will have seen 
 me long before them. Therefore, be strong, and watch for me. 
 I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 I 
 
 REVELATION GIVING THE SIGN BY WHICH THE 
 
 PROPHET MAY KNOW WHEN THE LORD 
 
 WISHES TO TALK WITH HIM. 
 
 No. 162. WEBER, UTAH, December nth, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, I have told you where 
 you will be standing when I ride up to you to give unto you your 
 robe and rod. But how shall I make you understand when to 
 come out of your house to meet me at that time when I shall want 
 to see you? How shall I make you understand when to stand at 
 
282 A SIGN FOR THE PROPHET. 
 
 the place where I 'have told you to stand? You may be in your 
 own house at that time, or you may be in some other place ; but 
 let you be where you may, I will give unto you a sign by which 
 you will know when I wish to see you. 
 
 2. Let you be where you may, when I shall want to see you, I 
 will cause a powerful influence to rest upon you such an influence 
 that you will not be able to resist and that influence shall lead 
 you right to the place where I have appointed to meet you. Yea, 
 I will send many angels to you wherever you may be at that time, 
 and -they will influence you, and lead you to that place. And 
 when they shall have led you there, they will hold you there until 
 I come and unveil myself unto you, and talk with you. 
 
 3. I shall then give unto you those things which I have 
 promised. When I unveil my face to you, I shall lay hold of you 
 myself. And, as I have said unto you before, so I say unto you 
 again, when mine angels have led you to the place where I have 
 appointed to meet you, I shall not keep you waiting there for me 
 more than a minute or two before I shall be with you. 
 
 4. You will now know what to expect when that powerful in- 
 fluence lays hold of you you will understand it. Do not fight 
 against it, but go with it, and all will be well with you. It will 
 shortly lay hold of you ; therefore, you may keep on the look out, 
 for it will lay hold of you suddenly, and lead you into my pres- 
 ence. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 DISUNION AMONG THE ENEMIES. 
 
 No. 163. WEBER, UTAH, December i2th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, I do not want to come up 
 to you before the right time ; then I will come. I do not want to 
 come to you before your enemies shall have started away from 
 their homes. I want them to be on their way to this place before 
 I ride up to you. They have not started away from their homes 
 to come this way, as yet, neither will they for some time yet, even 
 should they come at all to-day. 
 
 2. At present there is confusion among them, and they hardly 
 
DISUNION AMONG THE ENEMIES. 283 
 
 know what to do. They are not united as yet ; but there are some 
 of them who are laboring with the others to bring them to unity. 
 They may be united enough to come up here to-day, or they may 
 not. But they will scon come to a conclusion as to what course 
 they will take, and if they conclude to come up here to-day, they_ 
 will soon do so. And should they conclude to do so, I will tell 
 you. 
 
 3. And as soon as they shall have started on their way to come 
 to this place, I will send mine angels to influence you, and to lead 
 you to the place where f have appointed to meet you. I will not 
 neglect you. I know how your feelings are pained through fear 
 that I shall neglect you and this helpless people. You are over- 
 burdened, and it seems that you cannot rise up until I help you; 
 therefore, I will come and lift you up myself. 
 
 4. I have told you the true state in which mine enemies are 
 placed at this time. They are set the one against the other : and 
 as they now are, they can do nothing. I am watching them ; for 
 this is the day which they have appointed to come and wipe my 
 people out (as they call it); but they are not united upon the 
 matter ; some are for it, and others are opposed to it. There are 
 two parties of them, the one opposed to the other ; hence, they 
 know not what to do. They are held in this manner, for they 
 cannot come until they shall all be united, and they may not be 
 unitepl to-day. There are many among them who are opposed to 
 the act of coming up against my people, and those who wish to 
 come are laboring with them to persuade them to come up and 
 assist them to destroy this small handful of people (as they call 
 them). 
 
 5. And now, I say unto you, my son, I will watch them and 
 see what decision they come to, and if they decide to come up 
 against my people to-day, I will visit you as I have promised. 
 You shall see me as soon as they have started to come this way. 
 I will give unto you plenty of time to make ready. But should I 
 not visit you in the course of four or five hours, you may conclude 
 that they are not coming up against my people to-day. You will 
 soon know whether they are or not. 
 
 6. You must keep on the look out for that influence which 
 will lead you into my presence. You are on safe ground. Lean 
 
284 THE LORD PROMISES TO VISIT THE PROPHET. 
 
 on me, and I will bear your burden. I will speedily remove this 
 painful feeling away from you, for I am pained to see you strug- 
 gling under it. Lift up your head like a man; for I am the Lord, 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE LORD PROMISES TO VISIT THE "PROPHET. 
 
 No. 164. WEBER, UTAH, December i2th, 1861. 
 
 1. LET not my people be discouraged at the prospect which 
 seems to present itself before them. They may feel somewhat 
 disappointed and cast down on account of their enemies failing to 
 come up to this place according to their own appointment. On 
 their account my people have not been delivered as they expected 
 to be. Mine enemies seek to baffle and disappoint me all that 
 they can ; but it is about the last time that they will baffle me. 
 
 2. If they do not come against my people in the course of two 
 or three days from this time, they will, for the present, give up the 
 project. They will either do what they intend to do to my peo- 
 ple within that time, or they will give them up until they think 
 that they have obtained a better hold on them. But I shall only 
 give unto them about two or three days to make up their minds as 
 to what they will do. If they do not do something within that 
 space of time, I will come unto you and endow you with power, 
 as I have promised you. After that time I will place all power in 
 your hands ; but if they come up against my people within that 
 time, I will endow you with power when it is needed. If they do 
 not come up against me within the time that I have specified, 
 I will not keep you waiting any longer; but I will then let 
 you loose, let things go as they may with mine enemies. You 
 shall then be as a lion let loose among lambs, and you shall 
 destroy everything that stands in your way. Mine enemies need 
 not to think that they can tie my hands, for they cannot. I now 
 have them under my grasp. I can now lawfully destroy them, 
 and that is all that I need to require' of them ; although I would 
 rather that they would come up against me. But if they will not 
 
CHASTISEMENT AND INSTRUCTION. 285 
 
 come up against me within the time that I have appointed, I will 
 come out upon them as a whirlwind, and sweep them off the earth 
 as with a besom of destruction. I will cut off that fallen race 
 from among the heirs of salvation. My people have not long to 
 wait, let mine enemies do whatever they may. I shall work now. 
 I have about done being baffled and driven about by them; and 
 I shall now take a straightforward course. Let my people place 
 their confidence in me, and I will not betray it. I am the Lord. 
 And let them hold themselves in readiness, as I have before com- 
 manded them. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you must not suffer 
 your spirits to droop any more than you can help, for it unfits you 
 for your office ; therefore, struggle against such a feeling, that you 
 may be well able to do your duty. I am the Lord of Hosts, and 
 I am with you continually. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONTAINING CHASTISEMENT, IN- 
 STRUCTION, AND A RENEWAL OF THE 
 LORD'S PROMISE TO DELIVER 
 HIS PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 165. WEBER, UTAH, December i3th, 1861. 
 
 i. WHAT do you mean, my servant Joseph, by talking in the 
 way in which you have done? I have been with you and your 
 counsellors, and I have heard your conversation about me and my 
 people, and about my promises "to do this, that, and the other," 
 and all my promises failing. You know the situation in which I 
 am placed, and you need not to make things appear so strange. 
 You know that I have had to deal with men on whojji I have no 
 claim men who are free to act, and whose free agency I cannot 
 lawfully destroy. And you know, also, that they are altogether 
 opposed to me, and that, inasmuch as they are free to oppose - my 
 plans, they do so. They will not come to my terms if they can 
 help it. They, will strive to baffle me all that they possibly can. 
 They will not come to my terms when I want them to do so; but 
 they would do so, if I could spare time to wait for them. They 
 
286 A DELIVERANCE PROMISED. 
 
 want better backing. They feel afraid to undertake such a work 
 themselves; consequently, they want the. destruction of my people 
 to be sanctioned by another power ; and they think that, if they 
 can put the matter off for a short time, they will be able to obtain 
 help from the right source, and then they will be sure that all 
 things will come off right with them. It is too great a matter for 
 them to run into lawlessly; and, without good backing, they are 
 afraid. If it was only a small matter, they would not be afraid of 
 it ; but it is a great matter, too great for them to undertake to put 
 a stop to without good backing, which they now wish to obtain. 
 But I shall not wait for them over the time which I have ap- 
 pointed. 
 
 2. My people's faith is beginning to fail, and I cannot keep 
 them in suspense in this way by not delivering them. If I do not 
 come out now to deliver them, they will depart from me, and go 
 down to destruction. Therefore, I shall be compelled to come 
 unto you and give unto you the rod- as I have promised ; or else, 
 I may give up to the devil, and let him destroy all. I cannot 
 delay the deliverance of my people any longer. I must come up 
 to you, and I will come to you at all hazards. I will not suffer 
 my promises to fail. I cannot fail to do the work which is ap- 
 pointed unto me by the eternal law of heaven, although I have 
 deferred the matter as long as I possibly could. You cannot fully 
 believe, my son, that I shall come to you in the course of a day or 
 two ; but you may believe it. The promise seems too much for 
 your faith to lay hold of; but, great as it may seem to be, it will 
 be realized. 
 
 3. You shall not murmur against me in the way in which you 
 do; for, by so doing, you keep me continually in pain, and I can- 
 not endure it. You say that you are oppressed until your life is a 
 burden uifto-you. I know it; but I cannot help it. You oppress 
 me with the complaints which you make against me. 1 know what 
 ails you you are overburdened, so much so, that you cannot 
 exercise that amount of faith and confidence in me which is neces- 
 sary in order to fill your office ; and you let others see your weak- 
 ness. You cannot even keep it from them ; but you let them see 
 how you are cast down ; and thus your conduct tends to cause my 
 people to be cast down also. When they see your spirit droop, 
 
A DELIVERANCE PROMISED. 287 
 
 theirs may well droop. You know that my promises cannot fail ; 
 but my people do not know it, They look to you for encourage- 
 ment; therefore, when they see you cast down, how can they be 
 otherwise? They partake of the same spirit and feeling that you 
 do, and consequently you are all failing in your feelings together, 
 and are all unprepared for a visit from me. * 
 
 4. But you may say that "it is the want pf a visit from you that 
 causes our spirits to droop, and if they do droop, it is your fault ! 
 Why do you not uphold us as you ought to do? You, apparently, 
 let your word fall to the ground, and thereby destroy our con- 
 fidence in you. We are ever likely to suffer our spirits to droop 
 when we feel that we have nothing to depend upon. You have 
 promised deliverance unto us time after time, and when we have 
 flattered ourselves that the day of our deliverance had arrived, we 
 have, hitherto, been disappointed ; consequently, we have not been 
 able to prevent our spirits from drooping, because we fear that you 
 are not true. We do not know how to place confidence in you. 
 We do not know what we ought to believe, or what we ought not 
 to believe. We cannot understand you ; for your ways are past 
 our finding out, and we are at a loss to know how to act, or what 
 to do to please you." 
 
 5. Hearken unto me, O my people, and I will tell you what I 
 require of you. If you will do as I command you, day by day, it 
 is all that I require of you. Do not trouble yourselves so much 
 with that which belongs to me. It is my duty to deliver you at 
 mine own time and in mine own way ; and it is your duty to obey 
 me. And if I do not deliver you as I have promised, then you 
 will have cause to let your spirits droop ; then you will be able to 
 justly say that I have failed to fulfil the promises which I have 
 made unto you. But I have not, as yet, failed to fulfil the 
 promises which I have made unto my people ; neither shall I ever 
 fail to fulfil them. I have only been baffled a little by the devil, 
 and the deliverance of my people has been deferred a few days. 
 My promises have riot failed, nor never will. My people are 
 ignorant of my way of working. They are too ready to charge 
 me with failing to fulfil my promises ; but they would not have 
 such feelings concerning me if they knew much about me. If the 
 smallest thing goes wrong with them, they are ready to charge me 
 
288 A DELIVERANCE PROMISED. 
 
 with being false. They are ready to throw away all those precious 
 truths which they have received through the fulness of my gospel, 
 because of some small thing coming forth which they, short-sighted 
 creatures, cannot understand. 
 
 6. Let my people be aware how they charge me ; for I am 
 true. I am not driven hither and thither by the devil beyond that 
 which is lawful. He claims the right to oppose and baffle me, if 
 he can; but he cannot hinder me from eventually fulfilling my 
 promises. I make no promise that I cannot fulfil ; therefore, let 
 my people seek to know me, and then they will not be so ready to 
 charge me with being false. Oh, how my people insult me with 
 their short-sightedness, and wilful wickedness. They know better 
 than to charge me with being false, if they would use their com- 
 mon sense. I will not take such insults from them. If they 
 would walk faithfully before me, they would have my holy spirit to 
 guide them, and it would teach them better than to charge me in 
 that manner; for my spirit will lead those who will be led by it. 
 
 7. And now, behold, I say unto you once more, look out for 
 me. I shall come in the way that I have appointed, and I will 
 not weary you with waiting for me. You will soon be in posses- 
 sion of those things which you are wishing to see ; but you are 
 impatient for them. It may be that you will be satisfied when you 
 have them in your own possession. I shall soon try whether you 
 will be or not. But, I promise you that, if you murmur against 
 me after I shall have given them unto you, and shall have removed 
 your enemies out of your way, as much as you do now, I will 
 chasten you severely. Continue to look out for me, and I will give 
 unto you those things which you want. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION IN WHICH THE LORD EXPLAINS 
 
 WHY HE HAS NOT DELIVERED 
 
 HIS PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 1 66. WEBER, UTAH, December i4th, 1861. 
 
 i. You may ask me these questions: "What are you about 
 to do now, seeing that your first arrangments appear to be broken 
 
WHY THE PEOPLE HAVE NOT BEEN DELIVERED. 289 
 
 up? How do you intend to proceed with the work? If you are 
 about to pay me a visit, how will you come ? And if you are 
 about to make any new arrangements, what are they? Are you 
 about to show yourself unto your people, as you first promised 
 them, or not? We wish to know what you are about to do ; and 
 we want no more disappointments. We expect that you have now 
 done being baffled by the devil, and we want you to come out as 
 you have promised us. We know that when* you have to wait for 
 the devil, you are altogether uncertain ; for we know that he will 
 baffle you, and disarrange your plans as much as he possibly can ; 
 this we are satisfied of. But you say that you have done waiting 
 for him now, and that you are going to work without him. You 
 are not going to run side by side with him any more in this case. 
 You say that you have now brought your enemies to that point 
 where you can lawfully destroy them ; and we should think that 
 that is all that you need to do. You can now take a straightfor- 
 ward course of your own ; consequently, we do not expect to be 
 disappointed by you any more ; therefore, tell us now what you 
 require of- us in order that we may prepare ourselves to meet you. 
 We long to see yoy. We are doing all that we possibly can in 
 order to be ready to meet you. We have heard a great deal 
 about you, and now we would like to see you, although we know 
 that it would be a great shock to us ; but, notwithstanding that, 
 we should like to see you." 
 
 2. You who are faithful shall see me. I will promise you 
 that ; and you will find that I shall have visited you soon enough. 
 "But will you visit us in the way in which you first appointed? 
 Shall we arrange ourselves in order according to your first ap- 
 pointment?" "Yes. I shall not break up that arrangement. 
 W T hen I wish you to gather together, I shall come unto my servant 
 Joseph in the way which I first appointed, and I shall place the 
 rod in his hand before he commences to gather you together. I 
 shall give unto him the robe and rod at the same time; and he 
 shall put on his robe before he steps forth to raise his rod and 
 give the command. 
 
 3. And inasmuch as your enemies are not, apparently, coming 
 up against you soon, you will not be cramped for time to arrange 
 matters. You can take your own time, and do all things right. 
 
2 pO WHY THE PEOPLE HAVE NOT BEEN DELIVERED. 
 
 And when you, my servant Joseph, raise your rod, I will cut off all 
 your enemies, let them be wherever they may. They appointed 
 a time once to come up to this place to slay my people ; but their 
 hearts failed them. They were afraid of their own lives. It was 
 not because they repented of their evil act which they wanted to 
 commit. Neither have they yet given up their wicked intention ; 
 but they are laboring to obtain a better hold on my people. They 
 did not feel safe in coming up against them without better back- 
 ing. They want some other power to back them. I know their 
 intentions. They want to slay my people now as much as they 
 ever wanted to slay them. Although they have backed out through 
 fear, they are waiting to get a better foothold. Their desire to 
 shed innocent blood is as strong now as it ever was. And shall I 
 suffer those bloodthirsty wretches to live ? No ; as I live I will 
 sweep them off the earth before they shall have the opportunity to 
 lay a fresh plan to destroy my people. I will promise them that 
 I will not give them the chance to obtain that backing which they 
 are striving for. I am at their heels now. Inasmuch as they 
 would not come up against my people, after appointing the time 
 to come, I shall take the will for the deed. I wanted them to 
 come to some point where I could lawfully destroy them. And if 
 they ever had it in their hearts to destroy my people, I can destroy 
 them. There are many thousands now in this Territory who thirst 
 for the blood of my people ; but they cannot bring things into the 
 right shape, as yet, to perpetrate such a bloody act, and that is 
 the reason why they have not attempted it. They are so blood- 
 thirsty that they hardly know how to contain themselves. Some 
 of them are ready to break through all law, and to come and 
 attempt to destroy my people ; but others who have a little better 
 sense than they have, hold them back. Those of mine enemies 
 who have a little common sense are afraid to come up against my 
 people ; but those that have no sense are not afraid to come up 
 against them; such cannot see where the danger lies; and as 
 they know nothing, they fear nothing. That class of men will 
 rush into any dangerous undertaking, because they cannot see any 
 danger. They are devil's slaves. They are not fit to be let loose 
 without a guard to take care of them. They have to be taken 
 care of by more experienced devils. They are a constant burden 
 
THE ENEMIES WARNED. 2QI 
 
 to experienced gentlemen devils. There are different grades of 
 devils. Some are called to fill responsible places both on the 
 earth and in hell; and other devils are. governed by them. They 
 take the charge of things which belong to the reigning devil, and 
 
 they think for those who have not sense enough to think for them- 
 
 selves, and take care of them. The slave devils are sent to do the 
 dirty work, and the gentlemen devils dictate them. There are 
 devils adapted for all kinds of dirty work. The gentlemen devils 
 in this Territory have prevented their slaves from coming against 
 my people, or they would have come; for devils without sense 
 can see no danger, consequently, they fear none. 
 
 4. Are mine enemies who are in this Territory worthy of 
 death; both the responsible devils and their slaves? Yes. Shall 
 I destroy them? Yes. Do I require any more of them before 
 I destroy them ? No ; I do not. Inasmuch as they would not 
 come up after appointing a time, I want no more of them. I 
 am now setting myself to destroy them. I will send mine angels 
 into the palaces of the great, and they will lay whole families dead. 
 They will not leave one alive in many great men's houses (so 
 called). I can find the way to them. They can appoint no guard 
 that can stop my course. I shall not ask any of them whether I 
 may be permitted to see them, or not. I sent a prophet to a cer- 
 tain person, and he would not see that prophet; but I will now 
 send a messenger to him that will not only see, but penetrate him. 
 His days in mortality are now about spent. He may now look 
 out for a visitor, for he will speedily have one. 
 
 5. And now, behold, I speak unto the inhabitants of this 
 Territory. Are you prepared for a visit from me? for I shall now 
 visit you whether you are or not. I have done all that I possibly 
 could to warn you of what I am about to do in your midst. I 
 am now coming out upon you, and I shall preach a sermon to 
 those who will be left that they will understand. As I have before 
 said unto you, my son, so I say unto you again, the first move 
 that I shall make among the people of this Territory will be to lay 
 many thousands of them dead. 
 
 6. And I say unto you once again, you shall gather my peo- 
 ple together, and set them in order, even as I first commanded 
 you. And I will come and show myself unto those of my people 
 
292 WHY THE PEOPLE HAVE NOT BEEN DELIVERED. 
 
 who are faithful, as I would have done if their enemies had come 
 up and stood before them. And after I shall have called upon 
 you to raise your rod, and you shall have raised it, and given your 
 command, mine angels shall go forth to war, and in a few minutes 
 they will have slain all that I intend to destroy at the first cutting 
 off. I shall clear the way for my servants to go abroad through- 
 out this Territory to preach the fulness of my gospel. And when 
 I shall have cut off a sufficient number for the first time, I shall 
 come unto you and tell you to lower your rod. And as you lower 
 it, you shall repeat unto me the sign for stopping. Before you 
 give the command to the heavenly host, you shall have your rod 
 raised and steadied ; and when it is raised and steadied, you shall 
 give the command. You must be very calm and deliberate in 
 what you do while you are raising the rod. You must not be 
 unsteady at that time. I need not to charge you with being 
 unsteady, for you are the most steady-minded man that dwells 
 upon the face of the earth ; but inasmuch as I know the circum- 
 stances in which you are placed, it is necessary for me to give unto 
 you a strict charge concerning the rod before you have it in your 
 hands. 
 
 7. Behold, I say unto you, my son, I gave unto you a partial 
 knowledge of the time when I intended to commence to deliver 
 my people ; but I did not know fully how mine enemies would act 
 between that time and this. They have baffled me once,* and 
 thrown me a little out of time. I should have delivered my peo- 
 ple inside trie time that I specified unto you, if mine enemies had 
 not disappointed me ; but I shall not be much out of time, 
 although I have been disappointed. You know that while I had 
 tadeal with enemies who took delight in baffling me, I could not 
 appoint any positive time. They opposed me all that they possi- 
 bly could, and tried to make my words prove false ; but now that 
 I have got through with them, I can set a time when I intend to 
 come out, and I can fulfil my promise ; but I could not make a 
 positive promise while I had to deal with devils who claim the 
 right to exercise an agency to work against me. While I had to 
 deal with such a wicked agency as that, I had to work by 
 stratagem. I had to strive to outwit the devil to bring him to 
 my terms. But I had not an equal chance with him. He had an 
 advantage over me. 
 
WHY THE PEOPLE HAVE NOT BEEN DELIVERED. 293 
 
 8. The revelations which I have given have been read to my 
 people publicly, and mine enemies have heard them as well as my 
 people have. Mine enemies could very easily obtain a knowledge 
 of my plans ; and when they knew them, they strove to break them 
 up, and to frustrate me. And even if they had not themselves 
 heard what my plans were, and had asked some of my people, 
 they would have told them. There are some among my people 
 who are ignorant, who have worked against me, who are traitors 
 to me. They are not friends to the trwth, but they are enemies to 
 it. They would fill the mouths of mine enemies. And thus all 
 my plans have been made public. Mine enemies have known all 
 about them that they wished to know; and they have had the 
 advantage over me; for when they knew my plans, they could 
 easily frustrate them. 
 
 ' 9. But, when mine enemies laid their plans against me, they 
 did it in secret in places which they had which were adapted for 
 that purpose, and into which, when assembled, they would not 
 admit a traitor to them ; and thus they could keep all their plans 
 secret. But it was not so with me. All the Territory have been 
 able to obtain a knowledge of my plans ; therefore, because I have 
 not had an equal chance with them, they have been able to frus- 
 trate me in my movements ; but I shall, nevertheless, accomplish 
 my purposes. My promises will never fail. My people should 
 understand the unfavorable position in which I have been placed, 
 in that I have had to work against a people under such disadvan- 
 tages. 
 
 i o. Let all my people prepare for me ; for lo, I shall come 
 suddenly even as a thief in the night upon all the rebellious ! 
 
 I am the Stone and Shepherd of Israel, and the Bright and 
 Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
294 THE PEOPLE DISSATISFIED. 
 
 THE PEOPLE APPEAR DISSATISFIED AND 
 RESTLESS. 
 
 No. 167. WEBER, UTAH, December i5th, 1861. 
 
 1. I AM COME to speak unto you, my servant Joseph. I am 
 in haste to make a change in things ; for my people are discour- 
 aged, and they are beginning to deny the truth, and to fall away. 
 I intend to save the lives of some of them. I do not want to 
 destroy any more of my people than I can help. I have to hurry 
 to save the lives of some of them. They are ignorant of my situa- 
 tion. If they understood it, they would not act as they do. 
 
 2. Mine enemies appointed a time to come up against my 
 people, and I prepared to meet them, but they did not come ; con- 
 sequently, they disappointed me as well as my people. I have no 
 means of knowing what devils will do so long beforehand ; they 
 change from one thing to another so often. They are not gov- 
 erned by any fixed law by which I can judge what they will do. 
 Sometimes I cannot tell what they will do from one day to another. 
 At other times I am aware of their movements. Their actions 
 depend upon the situation in which they are placed. 
 
 3. I should have no trouble with my people if they knew my 
 way of working. They should know it ; they have been taught 
 enough ; and if they had given proper attention to what they have 
 been taught, they could understand. But some of them, seem- 
 ingly, love to live in ignorance. They think that I can do any- 
 thing regardless of law. But they should know that I am entirely 
 governed by law. I can do anything that is lawful; but that 
 which is unlawful, I cannot do. I should have delivered my peo- 
 ple inside the time which I appointed, if mine enemies had come 
 against my people at the time which they appointed. But they 
 broke their word, as devils will ; and thus they disappointed me 
 and my people. When I appointed a time to deliver my people, 
 I did it upon these grounds : That, if mine enemies come up 
 against my people, at the time which they had appointed, that I 
 should deliver my people in the course of so many days. But 
 they did not come up, and consequently they interfered with the 
 
THE PEOPLE DISSATISFIED. 295 
 
 first arrangement which I made, and prevented me from delivering 
 my people inside the time which I had appointed ; therefore, I am 
 compelled to make other arrangements. 
 
 4. I shall deliver my people in the course of a few days from 
 the time that I was first disappointed. My people need not to let _ 
 their spirits droop so much as to render them unfit to meet me. 
 If they do, I will promise them that they will see great sorrow. 
 Can they not keep their spirits up for a few days? They are not 
 so destitute of the common necessaries of life that they need to 
 murmur so soon. I have provided well for them in every respect. 
 They have pleasant weather, as pleasant as they could wish for. I 
 have moderated the weather for them ; and I have done all that I 
 could to make them comfortable. Some of them are unwilling to 
 wait for me a few days while I prepare myself again after this dis- 
 appointment. I do not ask them to wait for me long ; and if I do 
 not come and deliver them, I will be willing for them to charge 
 me with being false. 
 
 5. There are some of my servants who are greatly afraid of 
 me. They need to be afraid of themselves. They are unprepared 
 for a visit from me. I did not expect to see such folly manifested 
 by them. They are unstable in their ways. They do not know 
 what ails them. They had better turn themselves around as soon 
 as they can. They have no time to spare if they wish to save their 
 lives ; for I will promise them that ' if they feel as they do now 
 when I come, I will cut them off. I will nut spare the life of any 
 person who has yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel 
 to operate against me. If they wish to live to do good, they can ; 
 but they cannot live to fight against me. If there are any such 
 persons among my people as 1 1 have described, let them turn them- 
 selves round as soon as they can ; for they have no time to spare. 
 Some of my people do not know when they are well treated ; but 
 they trample my blessings under their feet. They do not appre- 
 ciate them. I do despise those who are ungrateful. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that it would be well 
 for my people to prepare themselves as well as they can for 
 moving out of this place as soon as I have moved their enemies 
 out of their way. Let them get themselves ready as much, as they 
 can during the short time which will be allotted them. But they 
 
296 COMMANDED TO PREPARE FOR MOVING. 
 
 must not run into confusion. Let them work steadily and orderly. 
 Let them put as many of their wagons in order for traveling as they 
 can ; but they must not break up their homes until I have cut off 
 mine enemies, and am ready to move them away from this place. 
 My people must act consistently. They must not throw them- 
 selves out of homes until I have found them new ones. My peo- 
 ple will understand me. Let them be orderly in their movements. 
 Let them not run into confusion. I am the Lord. 
 
 7. My people need not to think that I shall be long before I 
 set them at liberty. I shall work as fast as I can. I shall lose no 
 time. Let my people do their duties, and all will go on right. 
 My people must not go far away from this place. They must not 
 run about from place to place any more than they can help. 
 They must not forget that I told them that they must hold them- 
 selves in readiness. I shall speedily come. Let them keep up 
 their spirits, and cheerfully wait a few days; that is as long 
 as I will require them to wait for me. They will find plenty to do 
 to prepare their wagons for a trip, until I come. I shall lead my 
 people out of this place as sooi^ after I have destroyed mine 
 enemies as I possibly can ; and I shall go before them and find 
 them homes myself. I shall tell my servant Joseph what to do 
 with my people in respect to finding them homes. I will give unto 
 them good homes. They will be satisfied with them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Glorious Branch of 
 Jesse, and the Bright and Morning Star ; even Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DISAPPOINTMENT. 
 
 No. 168. WEBER, UTAH, December .1 6th, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am about to speak unto you for your own satis- 
 faction. You wish to know how I am about to deal with my 
 people. They have been cast down; but they are now in good 
 spirits, and I have confidence in them. I feel that they will wait 
 patiently for me until I come out and deliver them. I do not 
 
THE DISAPPOINTMENT. 297 
 
 expect that they will cause you any more trouble through their 
 restlessness. They feel satisfied at this time, and they will rest 
 satisfied for several days. They will wait for me as long as I wish 
 them to. It was well for them that they met with a disappoint- 
 ment. They will be better prepared to meet me in the course of two 
 or three days than they were three or four days ago. That disap~ 
 pointment which they met with will be the means of strengthening 
 them greatly. It has broken the first snare. They are . through 
 the first snare ; and they are stronger and better prepared in every 
 respect even now than they were three or four days ago. I wish 
 to prepare them as well as I can to meet me. 
 
 2. Notwithstanding all this, if mine enemies had come up 
 against my people on that day which they had appointed, I should 
 have come out of my hiding place and swept them off and 
 cleared the way for my people, whether they had been prepared 
 for me or not. But it was better for them that I did not come out 
 in power on that day. They were not prepared for me. They 
 wanted instructing on that matter, and they have received instruc- 
 tions this day that will be of great benefit to them. They have 
 learned a lesson this day that will greatly help them in every 
 respect. From the instruction which they have received to-day, 
 they begin to learn that they were not prepared to meet me. They 
 see this, and they will strive now to prepare themselves to meet 
 me when I come ; and thus that disappointment which they met 
 with was a great blessing unto them. Therefore, I say unto you, 
 my son, my people will wait patiently for me until I come. I will 
 not weary them in waiting for me ; for I will come while they are 
 in good spirits, and they will be much better prepared for me 
 when I come, than what they would have been at the first. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that I will draw more 
 near unto you day by day, until I come up to you in the way in 
 which I have appointed. I will speak unto you, more or less, about 
 every day, until I come to you; and a few hours before'I send 
 mine angels unto you, I will give you to feel positively that I am 
 about to send mine angels unto you. And when you feel that 
 influence, you may conclude that mine angels will visit you in the 
 way which I have before appointed, and they will lead you into 
 my presence, as I have appointed. Lift up your spirits, and I will 
 
298 TO THE PROPHET AND HIS COUNSELLORS. 
 
 give unto you power over that influence which has oppressed you. 
 You have now almost overcome it. I, even the Lord of Hosts, 
 am with you. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION TO THE PROPHET AND HIS 
 COUNSELLORS. 
 
 No. 169. WEBER, UTAH, December iyth, 1861. 
 
 1. You wish to know the reason why I do not tell my people 
 correctly when I intend to come and deliver them. You blame 
 me for saying that I am about to come and deliver my people in 
 the course of a few days, and then not coming within that time 
 as I have said. You want me to give an account to you for 
 neglecting to come in the course of a few days, as I stated that I 
 would. You say that, if I will not explain this matter to your 
 satisfaction, you will not be responsible for me to my people. 
 You say that -when I promise my people that I will deliver them 
 in the course of a few days, and I do not do so according to my 
 promise, you consider that I do not tell the truth, and that I am 
 disappointing both you and my people; and you consider that I 
 am taking a course to destroy the confidence of my people in me. 
 You say that you cannot understand the reason why I deal in that 
 way with my people. You think that I do not deal honestly with 
 them ; and you are afraid of me. You are afraid that I shall lead 
 you into trouble, and leave you there. You are afraid that I shall 
 defer the matter so long that my people will turn round upon you 
 and charge you with being false. 
 
 2. I shall never bring trouble upon you. I told you that I 
 would not weary you and my people with waiting for me. Are 
 you ready to meet me? If you are, these people are not. But I 
 suppose that I shall have to come whether they are, or not. I 
 shall destroy a number of them when I come. I cannot stay away 
 from you any longer. I am comkig. My people should all be 
 here ; but they arc not, and they will not all be here when I come; 
 but I shall gather all those together who are here. I told my peo- 
 ple that they must hold themselves in readiness for me. I told 
 
TO THE PROPHET AND HIS COUNSELLORS. 299 
 
 them that they must not go far away from this place. I told them 
 that I should not be more than a few days from the time that I 
 was disappointed until I came. I told them the truth. I shall 
 come in a few days from the time that I was disappointed ; and 
 t^at you will see. I could not tell you to one day when I could 
 be with you in the way which I have appointed ; but I could tell 
 you very near. A few days has now passed since my disappoint- 
 ment, and I am coming up to you now. 
 
 3. My son, you will not have the chance to murmur against 
 me for stopping away from you much more. If you murmur 
 against me all the time from now until I come, you will have done 
 your share of murmuring. I want you now to prepare yourself 
 like a man. I will put an end to your murmuring, for it is unen- 
 durable. "When may you expect to see me?" You may begin 
 to look out for me to-morrow; and if you do not see me on that 
 day, you may lookout for me the day following and so on, until 
 you see me. You will not be disappointed many times. I will 
 promise you that you may begin to lookout for me to-morrow; 
 and you must continue to look for me until you see me. 
 
 4. I understand the situation in which you are placed, and I 
 will not hold you in trouble. What more can I say unto you to 
 cheer your spirits? You need assistance, and you shall have it. 
 I have told you how you may expect to -be guided into my pres- 
 ence ; and I have told you how I intend to receive you. Endeavor 
 to keep yourself in a proper frame of mind until I come unto you; 
 for I do not like to come unto you when you are so cross ; for it 
 is disagreeable to me to see you so ruffled in your temper; there- 
 fore, be as calm and patient as you possibly can until you see me. 
 I shall delight to come unto you if you are kind, and humble, and 
 calm. Seek to cultivate that frame of mind that I require of 
 you. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
300 WHY THE DELIVERANCE HAS BEEN DEFERRED. 
 
 REVELATION EXPLAINING WHY THE DELIVER- 
 ANCE OF GOD'S PEOPLE HAS BEEN 
 DEFERRED. 
 
 No. 170. WEBER, UTAH, December iyth, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, you feel to ask me these 
 questions: "Why could you not come out and deliver your peo- 
 ple at the time when yuur enemies appointed to come up against 
 them? Why could you not, without taking a few more days, 
 deliver your people then, even if your enemies did disappoint you? 
 Why did you disappoint your people in such a manner? You 
 either have a cause for this, or you are greatly to blame ! Tell us, 
 then, what the cause is. " 
 
 2. Behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, you know 
 that I am the first general of the armies of heaven. I am also 
 the first counsellor to my Father, and a member of the first 
 council in heaven. And I counsel with my Father about all 
 matters that belong to the government of this earth, and we regu- 
 late ourselves by law we do nothing but that which is lawful. 
 And as I am the first general of all the armies of heaven, it is my 
 duty .to receive the law from my Father, and to bring and reveal 
 it unto you ; and to stand between my Father and you. I am a 
 mediator to minister between two powers, namely, the first presi- 
 dent in heaven and the first president of the earth. I am not the 
 president in heaven ; my Father is the president there, and I am 
 his counsellor, and rule by his authority. And inasmuch as I am 
 his firstborn son, he has made me the first ruler in heaven. All 
 my Father's children are subject to me, and I am subject to my 
 Father. 
 
 3. I do not claim the right to preside over the earth ; that is 
 your right. It is my duty to sustain you. You rule this earth 
 for the last thousand years, with all power and authority, even .as 
 my Father rules over heaven. And all the inhabitants of the 
 earth shall be subject to you as the inhabitants of heaven are sub- 
 ject to my Father; for you hold an independent priesthood. 
 When I say "independent" I mean that you do not depend on 
 
WHY THE DELIVERANCE HAS BEEN DEFERRED. 301 
 
 men who live upon the earth for your power, nor to give you the 
 victory over your enemies your power comes from above. I am 
 your general, and it is my duty to fight your battles. I have two 
 hundred million warriors under my command a number suf- 
 ficient to rule the inhabitants of the earth, and to destroy every- 
 thing that may stand in your way, until your mission shall Tie 
 ended. I could destroy all the inhabitants of the earth in a few 
 minutes, if it were necessary ; therefore, 'your power is in me, and 
 not in mortal men. That is what I mean by saying "you hold an 
 independent priesthood." You do not depend upon mortal men 
 to fight your battles, although you need them tc> assist you to 
 preach my gospel ; that is more their duty than to fight. They 
 will not be called upon to fight a great deal. Those who fight 
 must understand a perfect law ; therefore, angels are ordained to 
 fight ; and even they must not destroy any people only on the 
 principle of justice. Mortal men do not understand a perfect law, 
 and until they do, I will not, at present, call upon them to fight 
 much. But I will give unto you a knowledge of a perfect law, 
 and you must not send my people to war until you understand 
 that law, except in some frivolous cases in such cases as those 
 wherein my people are attacked by a few of mine enemies, and 
 even then I will speak unto you and tell you what my people shall 
 do ; for all things which are done by me are done lawfully and 
 justly, and that which is not done by me, I will not sanction. I 
 am the Lord. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it has hitherto been 
 my duty to minister from heaven to the earth, and from thence I 
 have very often been travelling, or from the earth to heaven. As 
 I have said unto you before, I am a member of the high council 
 of heaven ; and I have to make all things known unto you con- 
 cerning this earth. When I shall have committed unto you the 
 law, and commanded you to send it forth to the nations of the 
 earth, I shall sustain it, and I shall destroy everything that opposes 
 it. I will either make all the inhabitants of the earth live accord- 
 ing to it, or I will destroy them. 
 
 5. And now, behold, I say unto you, my son, you wish to 
 know the reason why I did not deliver my people at the time 
 which mine enemies had set to come up against them to (as they 
 
302 WHY THE DELIVERANCE HAS BEEN DEFERRED. 
 
 supposed) destroy them. I was sent by my Father to meet them 
 here, and I received certain orders from him in which he told me. 
 what to do. He told me that I must come up to you, and give 
 to you the robe and rod in time for you to have met them, if 
 they had come up against you at the time which they had ap- 
 pointed : and he told me that, if mine enemies should come up 
 against you, I must slay them all, and many thousands more, also. 
 He told me that I must cut a clear way through mine enemies, 
 and give unto my people a complete deliverance out of their hands; 
 and this I should have done, if mine enemies had come up against 
 you ; but that, should they not come up according to their appoint- 
 ment, I must do nothing, but return to him, and tell him how 
 things had transpired. He told me, also, that if mine enemies 
 should fail to fill their first appointment, he wanted me to meet 
 him in council before I should make another move. The first 
 arrangements which my Father made were broken up through that 
 failure, and we had to meet in council and make other arrange- 
 ments ; and we had to take time in order to do so. We shall soon 
 prepare ourselves again ; and when I come again, my people shall 
 not be disappointed. I shall not have to trust to the failures of 
 mine enemies any more. I am the Lord. 
 
 6. My people will readily see how I have been placed, and 
 that I could not have done otherwise than I have done ; and that 
 I have done as my Father commanded me, and have kept the law' 
 of heaven. Let my people be contented, and not murmur. If 
 they were as faithful to their duties as I am to mine, they would 
 have nothing to fear; but they neglect their own duties, and mur- 
 mur against me. I am always faithful. I have never failed to 
 fulfil my promises, neither shall I ever fail to fulfil them. I am 
 the Light and Life of the world; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
THE PROPHET VISITED. 303 
 
 THE PROPHET IS VISITED BY THE LORD. 
 
 No. 171. WEBER, UTAH, December i8th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I have shown myself imtp^ 
 you this day, and you can judge of my feelings, for I appeared 
 unto you as I am. 
 
 2. Oh, this short-sighted people ! How long shall I bear with 
 them after I have explained to them, through you, the reason why 
 I could not deliver them at the time when mine enemies appointed 
 to come up against me, but failed to do so? Through their failure 
 I was disappointed, and I have shown my people to what extent I 
 was disappointed, and what my Father required of me if mine 
 enemies failed to come up against me at the time which they had 
 appointed. I have shown unto my people that I had to return to 
 my Father to deliver my report, and to counsel with him, if mine 
 enemies failed to come up according to their appointment. And 
 after delivering my report before the high council in heaven, we 
 had to sit in counsel upon the matter, and try it by the law. I 
 had to do all this before I could make another move. I had 
 to take time to do all this ; and yet after I have shown unto 
 my people all these things, they are not satisfied. Some of them 
 are without reason. But I will recompense those dissatisfied peo- 
 ple when I come, but it will not be to their salvation, for I shall 
 destroy them in the flesh. O how they have injured others of my 
 people who would have been faithful if they had not discouraged 
 them. When my people are discouraged and faithless, and in a 
 murmuring mood, I cannot work with them. If I come to them 
 while they are in that state of feelings, I shall destroy them. If 
 they wish to meet me in an acceptable manner they must raise 
 their drooping spirits, and place all confidence in me, and not 
 murmur ; but they must be strong in me full of faith and confi- 
 dence or I will not accept of them. Those who have these feel- 
 ings which I have described, are right in my sight, if there are any 
 such. But if none of them have those feelings, none of them are 
 right, and consequently I cannot accept of them. If I come and 
 find all my people in that murmuring, faithless, ungrateful state 
 of mind, I shall slay them all. They have no cause to have such 
 
304 THE PROPHET VISITED. 
 
 feelings. I have continually been with them, and I have revealed 
 my will unto them from time to time, even as often as they needed 
 to hear from me. They have no cause either to complain of me, 
 or to let their spirits droop, for I have done my duty to them. If 
 I ever had neglected them, I should not blame them if they mur- 
 mured against me. If they had any just cause to let their spirits 
 droop, and to manifest such dissatisfaction as they do against me, 
 I would willingly take it from them. If I had ever neglected 
 them in any respect, I should take their murmurings and accept 
 them as my just due. All that I ask of them is to deal with me 
 justly. If they have any just cause to complain against me for 
 neglecting them, let them do so, and I shall take it as my just due; 
 but if they have not, let them cease their complaints against me ; 
 for if they do not, I will move them out of the way, for I am the 
 Lord, and I will not be insulted by mortals. Let my people think 
 about what they .are doing, and turn themselves round, and culti- 
 vate meek and humble spirits, and cease their complaints against 
 me, and let them rise up and bestir themselves, and act as though 
 they had some faith in me. I wish them to be energetic, and act 
 as though they had some force of character about them. Let 
 them not go to sleep. They need to be up and doing. This is 
 not a time to trifle with sacred matters; but it is a time when all 
 those of my people who expect a deliverance should rise up and 
 labor to obtain it. I do not call upon my people to do much ; 
 and what they cannot do, I will do ; but if they will not do their 
 own duty, they will perish. They must be energetic. They know 
 their duty ; and if they will not do it now, they know what to 
 expect. I am the Lord. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you know my feelings 
 toward you. I have known your feelings ever since I first visited 
 you up to this day. You have murmured against me many times; 
 and if you had not have been placed in the position which you 
 have, I could not have borne with it; but I knew the burden 
 which I had placed upon you, and I knew that your burden was 
 too much for you to bear, and that, you had to relieve yourself by 
 casting the anguish of your afflicted soul upon some one ; and it 
 fell upon me, because I was the next to you ; and I had to take it 
 all. You could not speak to any other person but me. Oh ! how 
 
I 
 
 THE PROPHET VISITED. 305 
 
 you have afflicted me. I never think about your- murmuring 
 against me but what I am pained. I have never borne as much 
 from any prophet upon the earth as I have received from you. 
 None has ever been placed in as painful a situation as you have. 
 If it had not been for the painful situation in which you have been 
 placed, I should not have borne it ; but situated as you were, I 
 was compelled to bear it. I knew that you could not help mur- 
 muring, for you were overburdened, and you had to cast the 
 anguish of your soul upon some one, and those whom it fell upon 
 had to take it. I could not justly punish you for doing a thing 
 that you could not help ; therefore, I have borne your murmurings 
 because I could not help it. I wish that I was not obliged to 
 bear so much of it. But it is now about over, and I feel greatly 
 relieved. I can come and satisfy you now. All my work is now 
 arranged, and I am at liberty to come unto you as soon as I wish 
 to do so. I have been with my Father in counsel, and he has 
 liberated me again. I am now prepared, and I shall not disap- 
 point my people this time. Mine enemies may lookout for me 
 now. If they will not do their duty, I will do mine. 
 
 4. All that I wanted was the sanction of my Father before I 
 came out upon mine enemies, and I have obtained it. I shall 
 soon be with you for good. I rode up to your door this day, to 
 the place that I appointed to meet you, and you saw me, and after 
 me came the next general to me in authority, and you saw him. 
 You know our feelings toward this people. We want them to do 
 as I have told them in this revelation ; for, if they do not, we will 
 destroy them. As soon as they have heard this revelation, they 
 must endeavor to be in that frame of mind which I have before 
 mentioned, if they wish to save their lives. We want them to pre- 
 pare themselves to receive us. I have told them what I want 
 them to do before I come. And as soon as my people have heard 
 the contents of this revelation, they must begin with all their power 
 to meet me in the way which I have appointed ; for soon after my 
 people have heard this revelation, I shall come. I have shown 
 myself unto you to-day that you might know that I was here and 
 ready to visit you. And I say unto you, my son, if you are not 
 dressed up neat and clean when those impressions are made upon 
 your mind which I promised should be made previous to mine 
 
306 THE PEOPLE ARE NOT PREPARED. 
 
 angels leading you into my presence, you must make haste and 
 dress yourself and hold yourself in readiness to be lead into my 
 presence by mine holy angels. And it would be well if my peo- 
 ple would prepare themselves to-morrow, and let them keep them- 
 selves neat and clean until I come. I am the Lord of Hosts ; 
 even Jesus Christ, Even so. Amen. 
 
 THE PEOPLE ARE NOT FULLY PREPARED TO 
 MEET THE LORD. 
 
 No. 172. WEBER, UTAH, December ipth, 1861. 
 
 1. LET MY people watch and pray, for they need great faith 
 and humility, and they have but a short time to obtain it. If they 
 do not obtain it in a very short time, they will not obtain it at all 
 while in mortality. They were far better prepared to meet me 
 several days ago than what they are now, and I am ready to 
 deliver them now if they were ready to meet me ; but they are not, 
 and I must either wait for them until they are ready to meet me 
 in the way which I have appointed, or I must come unto them and 
 slay them all. I must do either one or the other of these things. 
 
 2. If my servant Joseph will give me his consent, I will come 
 immediately if I have to slay two-thirds of this people. I can- 
 not deliver this people until I obtain his consent. He is the 
 governor over Adam's posterity. I have my Father's consent 
 to destroy all mine enemies who are in the midst of my people who 
 are in this Territory, and now I have to obtain the consent of my 
 servant Joseph. He has murmured against me time after time 
 because I was not ready to deliver my people, and he has insulted 
 me time after time on that account ; and now I am ready, but he 
 is not. He calls upon me publicly to stay my hand. He says 
 that he will not give unto me his consent to come unto my people 
 as they are now. He says that he does not want to have them 
 all slain after calling upon me in the way which he has to come 
 and deliver my people, and insulting me because I did not come 
 when he knew that I could not come (according to the law by 
 
THE PEOPLE ARE NOT PREPARED. 307 
 
 which I am governed at those times), when he called upon me to 
 do so. But now that I am liberated by the law of heaven, and 
 sent to the earth to deliver my people by my Father, you are not 
 ready for me; you will not give unto me your consent. 
 
 3. You say that my people are not in a proper state of mind to 
 meet me, and on that account you wish me to wait until they are 
 better prepared to meet me. Oh, how I have been imposed upon 
 both by you and by them ; but I will satisfy myself upon some- 
 body. As I live, I will cut some of these people off from the 
 earth. Those of them who have murmured so much against me, 
 I will be satisfied upon them. I will avenge myself upon them. 
 Let those of my people who intend to prepare themselves to meet 
 me in the way which I have appointed, do so as soon as they 
 possibly can, or I will not wait for them. 
 
 4. My servant Joseph cannot keep me away from my people 
 long, if he acts according to law. He cannot prevent me from 
 coming to deliver my people any longer than while they have had 
 time to prepare themselves, after hearing what I required at their 
 hands. Those of my people who feel disposed to humble them- 
 selves and come to my terms, will soon do so. It will not take 
 them long to make up their minds. I need not to wait long for 
 them ; and the rest I shall destroy. My servant Joseph will not 
 stand between me and my people to keep me off from them when 
 I explain my situation to him. He is not hard to deal with in 
 many respects. He will always give way to that which is right. 
 He will not stand against a correct principle one minute after he 
 is convinced of it. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you must strive to 
 prepare this people to meet me as soon as you can those of 
 them who are willing to hearken unto your counsel; and those who 
 are not willing to comply with my request, you need not trouble 
 about. I shall deal with them. Therefore, watch this people and 
 strive to prepare them, as I have commanded you. And when 
 you think that they are ready to meet me, tell me ; and when you 
 are ready for me to come up to you, as I have promised to do, I 
 will come and clear everything out of your way. You must not 
 keep me waiting but a very short time ; for I cannot wait long. 
 You know my will concerning you and this people ; strive to do it, 
 
308 THE PEOPLE MUST BE UNITED. 
 
 and all will be well. If you hold me long, I shall be under the 
 necessity of rising up against you ; for it is unlawful to keep a large 
 army waiting when they are sent forth to battle. We are waiting 
 for my people now. Do not keep us waiting any longer than you 
 can possibly help. Therefore, I say unto you, my son, work with 
 us, and liberate us, and all will be well. I am the Stone and 
 Shepherd of Israel; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 THE LORD WILL NOT DELIVER HIS PEOPLE UNTIL 
 THEY ARE UNITED IN FAITH. 
 
 No. 173. WEBER, UTAH, December 2oth, 1861. 
 
 1. MY SON, you are anxious to know my will concerning you 
 and this people. You are in a quandary about what I require at 
 your hands. Inasmuch as I told you that I was ready and wait- 
 ing for you, you wish to know how long I am willing to wait for 
 you ; for you say that you do not want to stand in my way when I 
 want to come unto my people to release them. You wish to know 
 what I require of you in order for me to be satisfied with you. I 
 will tell you what I require of you. You know that this people are 
 not prepared to meet me. Many of them are double-minded; 
 and a few of those people who have yielded obedience unto the 
 fulness of my gospel cannot fully believe that I ever intend to' 
 deliver my people as I have promised. They have but little faith 
 in my promises ; not even enough to render them of any use unto 
 me ; and they are injuring others by their murmurings. 
 
 2. My people are not one in me; but they are divided in their 
 sentiments. They do not all believe alike. There is confusion 
 among them. Some believe one thing and some another; and 
 but few believe fully in me. But I shall be compelled to wait 
 until I can bring all those who are worthy of a deliverance into a 
 unity of faith. While there are a few of my people who believe 
 that I shall speedily come and deliver my people according to my 
 word, and others who believe that I shall not come unto my peo- 
 ple for months yet; and others again who cannot fully believe that 
 
THE PEOPLE MUST- BE UNITED. 309 
 
 I ever intend to come while my people are in such a divided state 
 as this, I shall not deliver them. I shall save the lives of none 
 but those who believe in the promises which I have made unto 
 them. Those that are not one, are not mine. If a people cannot 
 
 believe in my words I cannot Jawfully do anything towards deliver- 
 
 ing them. I cannot deliver those people who cannot believe in 
 me. Those people who do not believe in the revelations which I 
 have given, do not believe in me, and, consequently, they have no 
 claim upon me any more than other strangers have. If I deliver 
 a people out of the hands of their enemies, that people must 
 believe in me ; if they do not, I cannot deliver them. 
 
 3. What do I require at the hands of my people in order for 
 them to prepare themselves to be delivered according to the 
 promises which I have made unto them? I require that they 
 should believe every word that proceeds from my mouth, and live 
 by them. When I promise my people that I am about to deliver 
 them, if they are faithful, in the course of a few days, I require of 
 them that they should believe what I said. I want them to believe 
 that I mean what I say. I do not want them to believe that I 
 shall probably come to deliver them in a few months. I do not 
 want them to believe that I mean months instead of days. I want 
 them to believe that I mean what I say. Their faith is misplaced, 
 it is not rightly centered i^ is a false faith. Those who have such 
 a faith as to believe that I mean months instead of days, have a 
 false faith, and if they do not forsake it, they will be destroyed ; 
 for they will not be expecting me when I come, and, consequently, 
 they will be destroyed by the brightness of my coming. And * 
 again, there are others who partly believe that I never intend to 
 come. They have a false faith, also, and they are going down to 
 destruction. There is but little hope for some of them. They are 
 without good sense. They do not know enough to save their own 
 lives. They act unreasonable. Such as those are but little better 
 than fallen spirits. 
 
 4. I wish to give those of my people who are willing, a chance 
 to obtain a correct fajth. Those of my people who are willing to 
 serve me with all their hearts, who are worthy of a deliverance, 
 will soon obtain a correct faith, and live by it. 
 
 5. My people haVe been disappointed, which disappointment 
 
310 THE PEOPLE "MUST BE UNITED. 
 
 has brought confusion amongst them. My people do not know 
 how to center their faith since they met with that disappointment. 
 But when I reveal unto those who are worthy of a deliverance my 
 full intentions in relation to the time of their deliverance, they will 
 speedily lay hold of a correct faith. There are a few among my 
 people whose lives I cannot save if they do not turn themselves 
 right around; for they have never served me in an acceptable 
 manner. Their minds have always been like the fool's eye. They 
 have never laid the things of my kingdom to heart. They are not 
 worthy to live as they now are. I am afraid that they will not lay 
 things to heart in time to save their lives, because they have not 
 sufficient faith in me. Therefore, I say unto you, my son, 
 those of my people who were disappointed and thrown into con- 
 fusion, not knowing how to center their faith, who are worthy 
 through their faithfulness of a deliverance, they will come to my 
 terms at once, as soon as they know what I require at their hands. 
 They are not hard to deal with when they know what to do. You 
 must tell them what I require of them, and they will obey your 
 command at once.' 
 
 6. And as soon as you have brought them to a unity of faith 
 even to believe that I am about to deliver them, according to my 
 word, when they are united, even those that are faithful, and are 
 looking for me to come, then I will cqme suddenly. All that I 
 am now waiting for is the faithful of my people to become united, 
 with their faith properly centered in me. I shall not wait for those 
 who are unfaithful, who have never laid those things to heart which 
 
 ' I required of them. You now know my will concerning you and 
 my people. 
 
 7. You say that you do not want to stand in my way. You 
 say that you are willing that I should deliver my people as soon as 
 I feel disposed to. You say that you want to understand me per- 
 fectly. You wish to know how long I am willing to wait for my 
 people even to give them a chance to prepare themselves properly 
 to meet me. My people may have the opportunity to hold 
 another public meeting or two ; and both you and your counsellors 
 must instruct them, and strive to unite them by properly inform- 
 ing their minds in relation to the faith which they must exercise in 
 me to be prepared to meet me ; and when my people are prepared 
 
THE PEOPLE CAN BE UNITED. 311 
 
 to meet me, I will not stay away from them another hour. I am 
 ready to come unto them now, if they were ready to receive me. 
 You know what I am waiting for. Prepare for me ; for lo, I come 
 quickly, even as a consuming fire, upon all the rebellious. I am 
 the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION INFORMING THE PROPHET THAT 
 
 HE CAN BY ONE DAY'S INSTRUCTION UNITE 
 
 THE FAITH OF THE PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 174. WEBER, UTAH, December 2ist, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you my son, I know what those things 
 are which you want, and you shall have them. 
 
 2. You consider that I dealt with my servant Moses in a more 
 satisfactory manner than I have done with you ; that so sure as I 
 made a promise to him, I fulfilled it. You say that when I told 
 him time after time to tell Pharaoh that I would bring plagues 
 upon Egypt, I fulfilled my word ; that when I threatened to bring 
 a certain plague upon Egypt on the morrow, I did so ; and that 
 according to my word, I brought different plagues upon Egypt 
 until I compelled Pharaoh to let my people go ; that I not only 
 fulfilled all the promises which I made through him in Egypt, but 
 that I continued to do so as long as he lived upon the earth ; that 
 when he smote the rock, the water gushed out; that when he 
 waved his rod over the Red Sea, the waters divided ; and that 
 whenever he made a promise to the, Children of Israel, that 
 promise I fulfilled. 
 
 3. You consider that I have not worked as satisfactorily with 
 you as I did with him ; that I have worked with you in a round- 
 about manner; and not in that plain, positive and satisfactory 
 manner that I did with him ; that in many things I have kept you 
 in the dark, so that you could not see as far into the future as you 
 desired to see ; and that in consequence you have never, as yet, 
 been satisfied with my way of working with you. My son, you 
 
312 THE PROPHET IS DOWNCAST. 
 
 should consider that, inasmuch as I have only been raising you up, 
 you have not, as yet, been endowed with the full power of your 
 office; but I am just upon the point of endowing you therewith. 
 You are weary of waiting for it, for while you are held in and 
 afflicted with weakness, as you have hitherto been, you have no 
 pleasure in living ; and you say that, if I ever intend to endow you 
 with the power of your office, which I have so long promised you, 
 it is time that' I was preparing to do so. You consider that I have 
 dallied with you long enough. 
 
 4. But behold, I say unto you, my son, I should have 
 endowed you with the power of your office before this time, if 
 my people had been ready to receive me, but they have not. 
 They have delayed my work through their double-mindedness. 
 Had they been united, as they ought to have been, you would 
 have had your robe and rod in your own keeping before this time. 
 You must, therefore, blame them, and not me. You are cast 
 down in your feelings because those things have been withheld 
 from you so long; and because of your weakness and disappoint- 
 ments, you now feel indifferent about them, and about me, also. 
 You consider that you have been imposed upon both by me and 
 these people, and that through them you are afflicted, and still 
 kept in weakness. You consider that the robe and rod belong to 
 you, and that it is as little as I could do to give unto you that 
 which belongs to you. You even say in your feelings that life is a. 
 burden to you, and that all you now require of me, is to take you 
 from the earth, which you think would be a great relief to you. 
 You say that you should like to enjoy life like other people enjoy 
 it ; but that you have not, for several years, been able to do so ; 
 that the manner in which I have worked with you has destroyed 
 all your happiness ; that I have strained your mind, and destroyed 
 your inward parts by working with you in such an uncertain and 
 painful manner while I have been raising you up; and you con- 
 sider that, if I cannot work with you in a way that w r ill satisfy you 
 better, and to strain both your mental and physical powers less 
 than I have done, you cannot endure it. You wish to know 
 whether I am about to work with you in a more easy and pleasant 
 manner, or not. If I am not, you say that you never can endure it. 
 
 5. You would like to know how I intend to work with you for 
 
THE PEOPLE CAN BE UNITED. 313 
 
 the future. I will answer you this question. I shall work with 
 you in as plain and satisfactory a manner after I shall have given 
 unto you your rod, as I did with Moses when he brought all those 
 plagues upon Egypt. Your word will not fail any more in the 
 future than his did in the past. I shall not strain your mind at all- 
 after I shall have endowed you with the power of your office. I 
 shall then talk with you as one man talks with another. Your 
 days of affliction are now past. 
 
 6. I want you to unite my people as I have commanded you, 
 and I promise you that, when you shall have done so, you will 
 soon see me ; for I will not remain away from you one hour after 
 you are ready for me to come unto you. I do not want to remain 
 away from you any longer than I can help, for I am now in pain 
 in consequence of having to wait for my people; therefore, my 
 son, let your heart be comforted, for I am with you. I sent a 
 holy angel, who is in authority, unto you to talk with you, and to 
 comfort you. I have done all that I possibly could to uphold 
 you until I can come unto you myself to place all power in your 
 hands. After that, you will never again feel your weaknesses you 
 have hitherto done. Your own weakness has greatly afflicted you. 
 You know what I am now waiting for; therefore, strive to bring 
 my people to order, and to a unity of faith. That is all I require 
 at your hands. You can do this in one day after you commence ; 
 for you have great influence with them. They have all confidence 
 in you. You can very easily, by one day's instructions, bring 
 them to a proper state of mind to mtet me ; and I will not hold 
 myself from you after you are ready for me. 
 
 7. You need not to be afraid to tell my people that I shall 
 come as soon as they are united, for fear that I shall disappoint 
 you all ; for I shall not. I know your feelings, my son, in this 
 matter. You do not like to tell my people that I shall come as 
 soon as they are united, lest I should not come according to your 
 word. You fear that, if you did this, and I did not come accord- 
 ing to your word, the people would blame you, and I should come 
 off clear. You do not like to be responsible for another, no mat- 
 ter how true he may be ; but my people will understand my word, 
 and I make unto them this promise, that, as I live, I will come 
 unto them, and deliver them as soon as they are united in the 
 
314 A VOTE OF THE PEOPLE TO BE TAKEN. 
 
 way which I have appointed. All that I ask of them is to unite 
 themselves in one faith, even as they shall be taught. 
 
 I now giv'e unto you no more. I* am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET IS INSTRUCTED TO ASCERTAIN, BY 
 
 VOTE, HOW MANY OF THE PEOPLE BELIEVE 
 
 IN THE LORD'S WORDS. 
 
 No. 175. WEBER, UTAH, December 22nd, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, that inasmuch as you 
 have held two public meetings this day, and striven to unite my 
 people as I commanded you, it has had a very good effect upon 
 their minds. The majority of them are willing and prepared to 
 come to my terms. You will have but little difficulty to unite 
 them in the way which I have appointed. When my people meet 
 again, as they will do to-morrow, you shall hold a testifying meet- 
 ing as usual. You must deliver the meeting into the hands of my 
 people, and let as many of them as can speak their feelings. No 
 one must speak long; but my people must ( speak short and to the 
 point. I wish to hear from as many of them as I possibly can ; 
 for I shall be there myself to hear their testimonies ; and a mighty 
 host of my holy angels will be with me. We shall come to hear 
 an expression from the people. W T e shall see whether they are 
 united or not. We will pour out the influence of mine holy angels 
 upon my people in great abundance, if my people will open the 
 way (or them. 
 
 2. I am well pleased with the course which both you and your 
 counsellors took with my people in the day that has past. You 
 have done much good towards my people in uniting their faith, 
 even as I commanded you. They see the necessity of being 
 united, as they have been taught. They will, therefore, come to 
 my terms when they are tried, as they will be ; for I shall find out, 
 by a public vote, how many of my people will come to my terms ; 
 and almost all, if not all, my people will vote. You shall call 
 
A VOTE OF THE PEOPLE TO BE TAKEN. 315 
 
 upon them to vote just before you close the meeting; and my peo- 
 ple shall vote after this manner : You shall stand upon your feet 
 and ask my people how many of them are willing to believe and 
 live by every word that proceeds from my mouth ; and you shall 
 ascertain by a vote how many of my people there are who believe___ 
 that I mean what I say when I speak unto them, when I say days. 
 I want to know how many of my people believe that I mean days. 
 I want to. know how many of my people have a correct faith. To 
 have a correct faith they must believe that I mean days when I 
 say days. To have a correct faith they must be looking out for 
 me to come day by day. To have a correct faith they must 
 believe that I shall not be more than two or three days at the 
 farthest, after they have held their testifying meeting, which I have 
 previously spoken of. To have a correct faith they must begin to 
 look out for me after Monday, and they must continue to look out 
 for me until I come. I can assure them that I shall not weary 
 them much by looking out for me. I do not want to tell them 
 any nearer the time when I shall come. I have told them near 
 enough. Let them prepare themselves to meet me ; for lo, I shall 
 come as a whirlwind to release my afflicted people. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that I will work with 
 you in a pleasant and satisfactory manner from this time forth.' I 
 will not strain your mind in this matter which lies before you. I 
 will strengthen you from this time forth ; and when I am fully 
 ready to come up to you (when I say ready, I mean when my peo- 
 ple are ready for me to come. I was ready myself several days 
 since, but I am waiting for them) I shall give you to feel that I 
 am ready to send my holy angels unto you to influence you, and 
 to lead you into my presence. And, as I have said unto you 
 before, if you are not dressed up when that feeling comes over 
 you, you must make haste and prepare; for mine angels will 
 influence you shortly after that feeling has taken possession of you, 
 and they will lead you into my presence, as I have said unto you 
 before ; and when they bring you into my presence, I will lay hold 
 of you, and I shall prevent you from falling to the earth. You are 
 very weak in body, and, in consequence of your bodily weakness, 
 you cannot very well endure a sudden shock; and on that account 
 
316 THE PROPHET IS DOWNCAST. 
 
 I shall be as gentle with you as I possibly can. Therefore, my 
 son, trust in me, and all things will go on right. I am the Light 
 and Life of the world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET FEELS DOWNCAST. 
 
 No. 176. WEBER, UTAH, December 22nd, 1861. 
 
 i^ I SEE, my son, that you are borne down in your feelings 
 until you are unable to do your duty, and I am pained for you ; 
 but you see that I cannot help you until I can come up to you in 
 the way which I have appointed. It is now that you want assist- 
 ance. This is a hard time with you. 
 
 2. You say that it is too much for you to exercise faith in me 
 to expect such a great 'manifestation from me ; but you know that 
 such a manifestation as the one which you are called upon to 
 exercise faith in, must be given, or Adam's posterity will all be lost. 
 This you know. If you can exercise faith enough in me to do as 
 I command you, it is all that I require of you. I will not disap- 
 point you. You are afraid that I shall not come after promising 
 my people that I would ; and you think that, if I make such a 
 mistake as that, all is over with you. You want to know what I 
 am going to do with you, if I should make such a mistake as that. 
 You wish to know whether I am about to deliver you into the 
 hands of my people, or other wicked people, to slay you ; for you 
 say that you do not want to be delivered into the hands of wicked 
 people, if I fail to deliver my people according to my promises. 
 If I fail to deliver my people, you want me to take you from the 
 earth forthwith. You do not want to be delivered into the hands 
 of wicked men to do as they please with you, even to put you to 
 all manner of misery, and to torture you until you are dead. You 
 want me, if my word fails, to take you from the earth. As soon 
 as my words have failed, you think that I ought at least to have 
 that much honor about me as to take you from the earth at once. 
 You think that it is my duty to do that much for you. 
 
 3. O, my son, I will satisfy you in the course of two or three 
 
CONCERNING THE PROPHET AND THE PEOPLE. 317 
 
 days at the farthest. I will never deliver you into the hands of 
 your enemies ; I will promise you that. If I do not come unto my 
 people and deliver them, it will be because I have not the power 
 to do so ; and I can assure you that I do not lack for that. Rest 
 yourself satisfied. I will come unto you and deliver my people 
 according to my promise. I need not to tell you that if I do not, 
 that I will take you from the earth according to your request. I 
 speak in this manner in order to satisfy you. Rest in me. I am 
 the Lord. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE CONDITION OF THE PROPHET WHEN HE 
 
 WAS FIRST CALLED. THE PEOPLE ARE 
 
 WILLING TO OBEY THE LORD. 
 
 No. 177. WEBER, UTAH, December 23rd, 1861. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord, ar>d I have seen the movements 
 of my people this day. I told you that it would not require much 
 work for you to unite the faith of this people. They are not hard 
 to deal with when they have confidence in their leaders. My peo- 
 ple have confidence in you, and even in my servants who assist 
 you ; and their confidence shall increase in you abundantly. I 
 have given unto you power over them all. The influence which 
 you have obtained, I have given unto you. When you have made 
 a promise unto my people I have fulfilled it, as far as I have gone 
 with them. This is what has given you an influence with them, 
 and even power over them. They will give up to you, because 
 they know that I am with you ; for they know that it is not within 
 the power of man to reveal to his fellow men such light and 
 knowledge as you have made known unto them. They are not 
 ignorant of the power of mortal men. They will submit to you at 
 once, because they know that I am with you. If they did not 
 know that, you would have no more power over them than any 
 other man ; therefore, you have gained your influence through me. 
 I have always been with you by mine holy angels from the time 
 that I first called you, up to the present time ; and I have never, 
 
318 CONCERNING THE PROPHET AND THE PEOPLE. 
 
 in such a short time, bestowed such light unto mortal man upon 
 the earth as I have unto you. 
 
 2. I gave unto my servant Moses the full keys of the holy 
 priesthood when he was upon the earth ; but I did not raise him 
 up as fast as I have raised you up. I took more time to raise him 
 up than what I could take this time. I have been hurried this 
 time. My servant Moses was placed in more favorable circum- 
 stances than you have been. I could take time then to raise him 
 up, because he was placed in good circumstances. But this has 
 not been the case with you. You could not possibly have been 
 placed in worse circumstances than you were placed in when I 
 first visited you; and on that account I had to raise you up 
 quickly. You could not have endured it if I had not done so. 
 I raised you up as fast as I possibly could, because I was com- 
 pelled to do so. Your situation in the world compelled me to 
 work fast. You had no home when I first visited you. You were 
 severed from all earthly ties ; ami you had been tossed from place 
 to place for years before I called you. You had but little pleasure 
 of your life for years before I calle'd you, and even after I called 
 you, you had still less. You are weary of being afflicted as you 
 have been. You want a change of things. You do not care 
 which way it comes. You shall have one now. You have my 
 people in such a position that I can do something with them. 
 This is all that I have been waiting for for the last few days. 
 
 3. I met with my people to-day, according to my word, and I 
 heard an expression from my people, and they appeared to be 
 willing to live by every word that proceeds from my mouth, and 
 they appeared to manifest a willingness to watch for me, as I had 
 commanded them. I am well pleased with their manner of voting. 
 I could not expect any more at their hands in that respect. But 
 they are too light-minded. They trifle too much with sacred 
 things. They are not solemn enough ; for this is a solemn time, 
 and my people should be thoughtful. I will promise them that 
 they will feel solemn before they are through with the test which 
 they are about to meet with. It would be a great benefit unto 
 them if they would prepare themselves for it in the way which I 
 have appointed ; but they will not do that until they are compelled 
 to do so. They think that they have done well to unite them- 
 
CONCERNING THE PROPHET AND THE PEOPLE. 319 
 
 selves as well as they have, and I think so to. They think that I 
 should be satisfied with their efforts. I see that they cannot bring 
 their minds to a proper state of solemnity at present ; but they will 
 be solemn enough when I come. I shall have to be satisfied with 
 them, and deliver them as the now are ; for I cannot bring them 
 any nearer to the standard that I wish to bring them to than what 
 they are at present. This is the best opportunity that ever I have 
 had with them ; and if I do not take them now, I never can 
 deliver them ; for I am persuaded that they will never be better 
 prepared ; therefore, I shall take them now. They may be watch- 
 ing for me, as I have commanded them. I am" the Lord. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that you must wear 
 your seven locks of hair until I come. Your hair must be divided 
 into seven parts, because you are the seventh angel, and a 
 deliverer; but none of the rest of my people must divide their 
 hair in seven parts ; for it is unlawful for them to do so. They 
 must wear their hair otherwise. I will reveal more unto you upon 
 this subject hereafter. Let this suffice for the present. I am the 
 Lord. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it is time for you to 
 begin to raise your spirit, and begin to watch for me ; for I shall 
 then strengthen you at once. You know the way I am about to 
 come, and the arrangements that I am about to make with my 
 people when I come. In gathering them together, to stand in 
 their own own order, you will attend to these things. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION IN WHICH THE PEOPLE ARE COM- 
 MANDED TO BE ORDERLY. AND CALM. 
 
 No. 178. WEBER, UTAH, December 24th, 1861. 
 
 i. I WISH to speak unto you again, my son. I want you to 
 hold yourself in readiness. I can assure you that you need to be 
 preparing yourself. My people have tolerably good weather. I 
 have moderated the weather for their convenience. I shall take my 
 
320 REQUESTED TO BE ORDERLY AND CALM. 
 
 people away from this place very soon after I have moved the 
 obstacles out of their way. I told my people some days ago to 
 get their wagons ready for a quick move; but they have not 
 altogether done as I commanded them in this respect ; therefore, I 
 shall have to do the best that I can with them as they are. They 
 are but mortal, and I cannot look for a great deal from them at 
 present. I will do the best that I can with them. I shall soon 
 gather them together, for I have nothing to wait for now. 
 
 2. My people are moving about after wood and other things. 
 I wish that they were through with that work, so that all things in 
 this place might be" perfectly calm and quiet; for I do not like to 
 come unto my people while they are all in a bustle and confusion. 
 As soon as they can bring themselves into perfect order and 
 quietude, I will come unto them. Let them get through with 
 their work and bustling as soon as they can. If there are any of 
 my people who lack for wood to burn, let them get up as much as 
 will serve them for a few days even for as long a time as they 
 will need to stop in this place. Possibly it may not be that all my 
 people can get the privilege to move out of this place the same 
 day; but I will move them all as fast as I possibly can. I know 
 how anxious they are to be delivered, and to move out of this 
 place. They have been confined here long enough. They shall 
 be liberated as soon as they have made all things ready in the way 
 which I have appointed. Therefore, let those of my people who 
 have no wood to burn, procure some as soon as they possibly can ; 
 and as soon as they have done so, let all the Camp of Israel come 
 to order. I want a perfect silence and calmness in the whole 
 Camp. I want no confusion nor disorder whatever when I come. 
 And as soon as all my people can arrange all their matters and 
 come to that perfect order and silence which I have spoken of, 
 then I will come suddenly to their deliverance, and I will lay 
 many thousands low tfiat day. Their bonds will then be broken. 
 They need to humble themselves greatly before me, in order that 
 I may strengthen them. If they will do this, I will strengthen 
 them to their satisfaction ; therefore, let my people hearken unto 
 my words, and diligently obey them, and lo, I come quickly, even 
 the Lcrd of Hosts. 
 
 3. And behold, I speak unto you concerning your dress pre- 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR THE PROPHET. 321 
 
 vious to your coming into my presence. You must dress yourself 
 up in white linen. Your linen dress must not be soiled ; for you 
 must put your robe over your linen dress when I have given it 
 unto you. I will show you how you must wear your robe, and 
 you must wear it in the way which I shall show unto you. When 
 you are dressed in white linen, and mine angels shall lead you into 
 my presence, I shall have with me your robe and rod, and I shall 
 give unto you your robe first, and I shall show unto you your rod 
 when I give unto you your robe. As I have said unto you before, 
 so I say unto you again, I shall give unto you your robe the first, 
 but I shall hold your rod in mine own possession until you have 
 put on your robe, and then I shall give it unto you while you use 
 it ; and then you must give me back your robe and rod, and I will 
 take care of them until you have a proper place of your own to 
 keep them. As soon as you have your robe in your own posses- 
 sion, you must tell my servants to gather my people together as 
 quickly as possible without confusion ; and my servants must place 
 my people in order when they are gathered together, as I have- 
 shown unto them in a revelation which I gave some days ago. 
 You will, my son, then have something else to do than run about 
 to place my people in order. You must stand by my side and 
 talk to me. I will tell you how my people must be placed, and 
 you must talk to my servants and to the people. I will talk to 
 you, and you must talk to the people, and introduce me to those 
 of my people who are worthy. I want to talk to you mouth to 
 mouth. I want you to see me. I see you all the time when I am 
 here ; but you have not seen me as often as you wished to ; but 
 you will soon see me as often as you desire to, after I have 
 broken the bonds. 
 
 4. Keep your clothing ready so that you can put it on quickly 
 when you are called upon to do so. When that feeling comes 
 over you which I have spoken of, you must then hurry and dress 
 yourself in white linen, as I commanded you ; for you will have no 
 more time allotted unto you after that feeling comes over you than 
 you will need to dress you and get yourself ready to be led into 
 my presence by mine holy angels ; therefore, prepare yourself to 
 meet me. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
322 "COMMANDED TO PREPARE. 
 
 THE PROPHET IS COMMANDED TO PREPARE TO 
 MEET THE LORD. 
 
 No. 179. WEBER, UTAH, December 24th, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, I am in a 
 hurry to speak unto you again, although I know that it is very 
 troublesome to you to write so much. You will soon have done 
 being troubled so much with writing under such unfavorable cir- 
 cumstances. You may ask me why you cannot use your Father's 
 rod without first putting on his robe. A celestial law forbids any 
 God the privilege of taking his sceptre into his hand, and raising 
 it, and giving a command, until he has first put on the royal 
 robe. You are called to use your Father's robe and his rod in his 
 stead, and by his authority, as though your Father was here to use 
 them himself. He sanctions all that you do. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, that the ground on which 
 you will stand when you raise your rod, and give your command, 
 is holy ground. I have sanctified it for the purpose. I know the 
 spot of ground where you will stand. I will lead you to it at the 
 time. The place where you must stand when you give the com- 
 mand must be made perfectly clean, and you must have something 
 put under your feet to stand upon. Your feet must be kept per- 
 fectly clean. You should stand in linen shoes when you give the 
 
 , command. All your clothing which you have on while you have 
 the rod in your hand should be white linen not soiled. If you 
 have not all those things in your own possession now, you must 
 make haste and obtain them. My people will assist you. You 
 have no time to lose. You will have all that you can do to get 
 ready for me by the time that I want to come to you ; for I can 
 assure you that the time of my coming is near. You will under- 
 stand me. And when you have put on your robe, and you are 
 about to come to that place where you must stand when you give 
 your command, you must put on your slippers and walk to the 
 place where you must stand, and when you have come to that 
 place, you must take off your slippers and put on your linen shoes. 
 The place on which you stand must be beautified; for it is most 
 
COMMANDED TO PREPARE. 323 
 
 holy. I have already appointed the place and sanctified it ; and I 
 will lead my servant to that place. My people will beautify it for 
 you. I will tell you how it must be beautified, and you must tell 
 my people, and they will soon beautify it according to the orders 
 which they will receive from you. They will not keep you waiting 
 long. All things will go on in an orderly manner. I am the 
 Lord. 
 
 3. I need not to tell you any nearer than I have done when 
 you may expect to see me. You know near enough. You under- 
 stand my way of working, and you can see a little ahead. I am 
 ^with you continually. O, how pleased I am that the time has 
 come when I can put an end to all that abomination which exists 
 among those people who are in this Territory, who are continually 
 blaspheming mine holy name. O, what a delight I shall take in 
 bursting the oppressive bonds that have bound the pure of my 
 people, and setting them free ! I love the poor and honest, and I 
 will fight their battles. I am thankful that the time has come 
 when I can relieve your troubled feelings. My trouble with you 
 is now at an end, and that is a great relief to me, as well as it is to 
 you. I shall work with you in a different way now, than I have 
 hitherto done. I can satisfy you for the future, and that is a 
 source of pleasure unto me ; for I do not like to be complained of. 
 1 wish to have the good will of those with whom I am so closely 
 connected. I want to work with them in a perfect union. This 
 I shall do for the future. You would not be a hard man to 
 deal with if you were not oppressed to such an unreasonable 
 sxtent ; it is that which has caused you to murmur against me. 
 But I shall remove that oppression off you, then you will not 
 murmur against me, but we shall work together in unison. This 
 is why I want you to prepare for me, my son. Lo, I come quickly. 
 I am the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
324 . COMMANDED TO PREPARE FOR MOVING. 
 
 THE PEOPLE ARE REQUESTED TO BE PREPARED 
 FOR MOVING. 
 
 No. 1 80. WEBER, UTAH, December 25th, 1861. 
 
 i. You ARE somewhat astonished at such unfavorable weather 
 as this at this time. You cannot understand the reason of it. 
 You think that it. is a very unlikely thing to expect me to come 
 and deliver my people at such an unfavorable time as this. You 
 say that my people have never experienced harder weather than 
 this since I gathered them to this place, and they think it hard to 
 have such weather at this time when they expect to be delivered 
 every day even according to my words. My people think that 
 I am working against both them and myself. They think they 
 should have very good weather; but instead of that they think 
 that it could not be much worse. I can moderate the weather 
 for their benefit when they are ready for me to visit them. I sent 
 this unfavorable weather at this time for a wise purpose in myself. 
 My people do not know all things as yet. I study their benefit, 
 and they do not always know when I am working in their favor. 
 But they must place themselves in my hands, and believe that I 
 will overrule all things for their good. When my people have 
 procured sufficient wood to last them for a few days, and have 
 brought themselves to order, and to that calmness which I have 
 before spoken of, then I will come as I have said. But my peo- 
 ple have not procured sufficient wood to last them for a few days, 
 as I commanded them. They must do this, or else they will 
 suffer when I come to deliver my people. They will not have 
 much of an opportunity to obtain wood to burn after I have re- 
 moved their enemies out of their way. Their time will then be 
 taken up in others ways than in getting wood. All their time will 
 be taken up in preparing themselves to move out of this place. 
 They should be at work now procuring wood, as I have com- 
 manded them. It is hard for me to make my people understand 
 me. I suppose they think that they now have enough wood to 
 last a few days ; but they have not. They should be at work now 
 getting wood. They must go to work with all their power, and 
 
COMMANDED TO BE PREPARED. 325 
 
 they must not slacken in their exertions until they have obtained 
 sufficient wood to last them. I know what my people need, and I 
 will counsel them aright if they will obey me ; but if they will not, 
 they will suffer for it. I have waited long enough for them. I 
 have waited for them one week, and they are not ready for me 
 yet. How long must I wait for them ? I can soon moderate the 
 weather for that circumstance when my people are ready to meet 
 me. When they are ready for me there will be nothing in the 
 way. I will take good care of that. My people feel the' need of 
 being delivered. They have suffered in the wet and cold long 
 enough. I can moderate the weather suitable to the circum- 
 stances in a very short \irne. Therefore, let my people bring up 
 enough wood to last them, as soon as they can, in* order that their 
 time may be spent otherwise even in preparing themselves to 
 move out of this place as soon as possible after the test is over ; 
 for I do not want my people to remain in this place any longer 
 than they can possibly help after I have moved mine enemies out 
 of their way. This is not the place for them after that event. It 
 would be gratifying unto me if my people would move out of this 
 place the day after I have moved mine enemies out of their way ; 
 but they will not be able to do it. It will be a busy time among 
 my people while they are preparing to move out of this place. 
 After the scourge is over they will not have time to do anything 
 else than to prepare to move. 
 
 2. My people will see why I want them to obtain as much 
 wood as they will need for the present ; for they will not have any 
 time to procure it after the scourge is over. Therefore, let them 
 attend to that matter now, and all will be well. I am the Lord of 
 Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
326 THE ORDER IN WHICH THE PEOPLE MUST MOVE. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE ORDER IN WHICH 
 
 THE PEOPLE OE THE LORD MUST MOVE 
 
 FROM THIS PLACE TO GREAT 
 
 SALT LAKE CITY. 
 
 No. 1 8 1. WEBER, UTAH, December 25th, 1861. 
 
 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, after I shall have cut 
 off your enemies out of your way, you must lead my people from 
 this place to Great Salt Lake City, and both I and my holy angels 
 will go before you ; and if those of mine enemies who shall be left 
 alive should rise^ip against you, and attempt to injure either you or 
 any of my people, I will slay them when they make the attempt. 
 
 2. You know that I have told you that- 1 ride upon a white 
 horse large and beautiful ; therefore, you must ride upon a white 
 horse, also. I will go before you. I shall only be a few steps in 
 advance of you until we reach the city. As I am the first general 
 in heaven, so you are the first general upon the earth ; therefore, 
 as I ride a white horse, so you, whenever, from this time forth 
 until your mission is ended, you have occasion to ride upon a 
 horse, must ride one of the same color. 
 
 3. You and my people must march forth from this place in the 
 following order: You must ride behind me upon a white horse; 
 my servant John Banks must ride oh one side of you upon a black 
 horse ; my servant Richard Cook must ride on the other side, of 
 you upon a red horse ; and my servant John Pason must ride upon 
 a pale horse. You four will represent the four captains of the 
 heavenly host. Earthly things must pattern after heavenly things; 
 therefore, as four chief generals lead all the heavenly host, s four 
 chief generals must lead Adam's posterity. These four leading 
 men upon the earth represent the four first generals who are in 
 heaven as there are four first leaders in heaven, so there must be 
 four first leaders upon the earth. And after you and your three 
 brethren who will be on horseback, will follow the apostles in three 
 wagons drawn by horses, and next the high priests, in wagons 
 also, with their president at their head. The high priests should 
 be drawn by horses ; therefore, let them raise all the horse teams 
 
THE ORDER IN WHICH THE PEOPLE MUST MOVE. 327 
 
 that they possibly can ; but, if they cannot obtain horses sufficient 
 to draw them, they must make out with oxen. I would that my 
 people had sufficient horse teams to move them all ; but they have 
 not; therefore, they must do the best that they possibly can. 
 After the high priests will follow the priests of Aaron, with their- 
 president at their head. All things must go on in proper order. 
 Each man who is not otherwise engaged, and who can possibly do 
 so, must take care of his own companion and family. The wives 
 and children of those men who stand at the head of my Church 
 who, on account of their being otherwise engaged, will not be 
 able to take care of them, must be taken care of by others who 
 are partly liberated, and who will be able to take care of them. 
 In this order, my people must travel to their journey's end. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you will not be 
 called to raise your rod and give your command for every frivolous 
 case. If but a few of mine enemies should rise up either against 
 you or any of the rest of my servants, and you will give me your 
 consent, I will cut them off without putting you to the unnecessary 
 trouble of raising your rod, and giving your command. You need 
 not to raise your rod and give your command for trifles ; but when 
 a few hundreds or a few thousands of people stand in your way 
 and oppose you, and you wish to have them destroyed, it will -be 
 necessary for you to raise your rod and give your comTnand. But 
 in cases of small importance, you need not to do so ; all that you 
 need to do then, will be to give me -your consent by word of 
 mouth, and I will always cut them off according to your word 
 that I can do, according to the law by which I am governed. You 
 may meet with such small cases, and when you do, you will now 
 know how to deal with them. 
 
 5. I have now told you the order in which you and my people 
 must move away .from this place, and also, how to deal with your 
 enemies ; therefore, prepare yourself to do your duty, and make 
 all things ready; for lo, I come quickly. I am Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
328 THE MEETING OF THE LORD AND THE PROPHET. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE MANNER IN 
 
 WHICH THE LORD WILL MEET 
 
 THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 182. WEBER, UTAH, December 25th, 1861. 
 
 1. WHAT more can I say unto you, my son, than what I have 
 said? I must come to you next. You understand the signs of 
 the times. I need not to say a great deal more unto you at this 
 t;me. There is no necessity for it now. I have said all that I 
 need to say unto you until I change the condition of things ; that 
 appears to be my next work. You want me to come quickly. You 
 do not want me to linger ; and I will promise you that I will not 
 linger. I do not see anything more that I can reveal unto you 
 that would be of much benefit to you. You understand my 
 present situation. I need not keep you writing unless I had some- 
 thing to reveal unto you. 
 
 2. You know by your own feelings that the test has come, and 
 you know that, if I fulfil the promises which I have made unto 
 my people, I cannot delay the matter any longer. I cannot delay 
 the" test any longer, and still fulfil my promises. You know my 
 situation very well. You know that it is your duty to be watching 
 for me. You know the feelings which you now have. You must 
 wash yourself early to-morrow morning. You understand what I 
 mean. You must put all your underclothing on, and also put on 
 your every-day clothing, and after you have had your every-day 
 clothing on but a very short time, that first feeling will come over 
 you. I will impress that feeling upon you so clearly that you can- 
 not misunderstand it; and when that feeling comes over you, you 
 must make haste and dress yourself up in white linen ; for as soon 
 as you are dressed up, mine angels will guide you into my 
 presence. You must give way to them and all will be well. You 
 will behold strange scenes at that time. I shall meet you at your 
 own door, where I first appointed to meet you, and give unto you 
 your robe ; and when I have given unto you your robe, I will lead 
 you to the place where you must stand when you raise your rod 
 and give the command, even that place which I have sanctified, 
 
THE PROPHET LACKS CONFIDENCE. 329 
 
 which is most holy ; and my people shall beautify it and make it a 
 proper place for both you and me to stand upon ; for I shall stand 
 close by you. There must be room made for both of us to stand 
 upon. 
 
 3. I need not to say anything more unto you upon this subject. 
 I have said enough unto you at present. You know now what to 
 expect ; therefore, watch for me. I will immerge you into my 
 presence as gently as I possibly can. I know that you are very 
 weak in body, and I will deal with you accordingly. I am the 
 Light and Life of the world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET APPEARS TO LACK CONFIDENCE. 
 
 No. 183. WEBER, UTAH, December 26th, 1861. 
 
 1. WHY cannot you be good natured? You are afraid that I 
 shall let the right time pass by, and not come and fulfil my 
 promises. You think that I have but a short time in which to 
 fulfil my promises. You think that I have delayed so long that 
 you begin to fear that I am going to fail all together. You are 
 satisfied that I cannot have, at the furthest, more than a few hours 
 to arrange matters and to come to you. If I do not come in that 
 length of time, you think I shall fail altogether; and, if such 
 should be the case, you think that you will be in a difficulty ; and 
 you think that your confidence will have been betrayed beyond 
 that of any other man that ever lived upon the earth. 
 
 2. I know that I have but a few hours allotted me to turn 
 myself around and to come and deliver my people. If I do not 
 come in that length of time, my promises to my people will fail to 
 a certain extent ; but I can deliver my people inside the time 
 which I appointed ; if I do not, I ask no more of you, and I will 
 bear the blame, and I will do unto you according to your desire. 
 I will deal fairly with you, never fear. You greatly fear that I arn 
 about to break my word, and destroy both you and my people. If 
 I fail to fulfil my promise in the deliverance of my people, I 
 
330 THE LORD PROMISES TO FULFIL HIS WORD. 
 
 know that both you and my people would be destroyed, and this 
 world would also be destroyed. But I shall make no such mis- 
 takes as those. 
 
 3. You see where I stand in connection with you and my peo- 
 ple ; and I see my position, also ; and I shall make the best of it. 
 I know that I have driven things to the last extremity. I wish you 
 to be good natured, my son ; and do not allow such an idea to enter 
 your mind as to think that I shall not come according to my 
 word; for I shall. I am about to come unto you immediately. I 
 shall soon be through with mine enemies. 
 
 4. After I come unto you it will be a very little work for us to 
 destroy mine enemies who are in this Territory. I shall come 
 quickly, and I shall soon accomplish my work. You think that it 
 is a great thing to destroy all mine enemies in this Territory ; but 
 I consider it but a trifle. I can do it all in a very short time. 
 Therefore, my son, let me entreat you to be good natured for an 
 hoi^r or two, and after that space of time I shall begin to satisfy 
 you. I do not ask anything more of you than that. If I do not 
 begin to satisfy you after that length of time, you may grumble 
 against me as hard as you like, and I will take it. You now know 
 what to look for in the course of a couple of hours. I have told you 
 now near enough. You do not need to know any nearer the time 
 when I shall come. Therefore, watch for me in the way which I 
 have appointed ; for lo, I come quickly ; even the Lord of Hosts. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET IS INFORMED THAT HIS BIRTH- 
 RIGHT ENTITLES HIM TO THE ABILITY 
 FOR THE OFFICE HE HOLDS. 
 
 No. 184. WEBER, UTAH, December 27th, 1861. 
 
 i. I WISH to speak unto you, my son, once more. I see the 
 position in which you are placed with this people. You wish me 
 to find another man to take your place ; for you say that you can- 
 not endure the oppression which I place upon you. You say that 
 
BIRTHRIGHT AND ABILITY. 33! 
 
 the wa Y i which I work through you does not satisfy you. In 
 fact, you say that you cannot bear the burden which I have placed 
 upon you. You say that I have never worked with you at all in a 
 way that has satisfied you ; and you say that you do not want to 
 keep murmuring against me on that account. You wish me to 
 call another man and place him in your place. You say that I 
 might find another man that would not murmur against me as 
 much as you do, and you do not wish to stand in the way of a 
 better man; therefore, you want me to find another man and 
 bring him to you, and you say that you will lay your hands upon 
 him in the sight of all the congregation. You wish me to work 
 through him as I have done through you ; and you want me to 
 take you from the earth. 
 
 2. But behold, I say unto you, my son, you require that at 
 my hands which I cannot do. You know that I cannot call 
 another man and place him in your place ; and if I could do such 
 a thing, I do not want to do it. I could not find another man 
 upon the earth that could have borne as much as you have borne 
 under any circumstance whatever. No other man upon the earth 
 possesses the necessary abilities for such an office as yours ; and 
 those abilities I could not give to another man until he inherited 
 them by birthright. I could not give such abilities as those to any 
 man before the time had come for him to have them. To have 
 the abilities which you have, a man must hold the keys of the holy 
 priesthood by birthright. Therefore, the abilities which you pos- 
 sess cannot be given to another. 
 
 3. Make yourself as contented as you possibly can. I will 
 make all things right with my people. I know that they are fret- 
 ful, and they do not know what ails them. I have them in my 
 care, and I will bring them to the right position, no matter how 
 they fret and fume. I can manage them, if you cannot, and that 
 you shall see. I will make them do what I want them to do. I 
 have a claim on them. They are not devils ; but they are the 
 chosen seed, and I am about to try them, no matter how they 
 reason their own case and murmur against me for breaking my 
 promises. I shall not break my promises ; but I shall try these 
 people. They need not to think that they will get through with- 
 out being tried. I cannot confer such a blessing upon them as 
 
332 THE DISAPPOINTMENT. 
 
 they expect to receive without trying them severely. I have given 
 unto my people the full keys of the holy priesthood, and they have 
 never been tried as yet. That knowledge which they have 
 received through the fulness of my gospel has never been tested as 
 yet. 
 
 4. There are many of my people who have been made 
 acquainted with the principles of the fulness of my gospel to a 
 great extent, and when the smallest thing seems to cross their path- 
 way, they are ready to deny all that they have been receiving for 
 many months. What faith have they in me? They have no faith 
 worth mentioning. But I shall try them according to the privi- 
 leges which they have had to obtain both faith and knowledge, 
 and if they have not that faith and knowledge which will enable 
 them to stand that trial which is appointed for them, they will 
 perish in the flesh ; for the trial will come upon them. What is it 
 that is trying my people now? A little disappointment. They 
 think that I ought to have come out in power (as they call it) and 
 delivered them before this time; and because I have disappointed 
 them a little, and they have not yet been delivered, they are down- 
 cast in their feelings, and are ready to deny all that they have 
 received. 
 
 5. When I come shall I find faith upon the earth? It is 
 unlawful for me to confer a blessing upon a people until I have 
 first tried them. I could not confer a blessing upon Abraham 
 until after I had tried him. I commanded him to offer up his 
 only son upon the altar; and I had made a promise unto him that 
 I would bless his seed after him forever ; and yet I commanded 
 Abraham to offer up the man through whom that seed should 
 come. If I tried my people in that way, they would think that I 
 was very unreasonable. But Abraham had to be tried in that way 
 before he could be called the father of the faithful. That was a 
 great blessing conferred upon him; and if he could not have 
 endured the trial through which that blessing came, he could not 
 have received the blessing. If he endured the trial, he claimed 
 the blessing ; but if he had not endured the trial, he never could 
 haye leceived that blessing; for it is unlawful to confer a blessing 
 upon a single person or a people without that person or that peo- 
 ple have first endured a trial which was appointed by law for that 
 
A TRIAL BEFORE THE BLESSING. 333 
 
 blessing; and if my people do not endure the trial which is 
 appointed by law for the blessing which lies before them, they 
 cannot receive the blessing ; therefore, I shall try them, and as 
 many of my people as can endure the trial which is appointed for 
 the blessing, can receive the blessing. Let my people prepare 
 themselves to endure the trial, and they shall receive the blessing. 
 It is coming right upon them. 
 
 6. Let my people watch for me, for lo, I am coming as a 
 whirlwind ; and my people will soon be called to endure the trial. 
 They need not to lose their precious time by murmuring about 
 small things. This is a day of great events, and my people should 
 know that those of my people who murmur at every small thing 
 which crosses their path, will not endure the trial that lies before 
 them. My people may ask what trial it is which they will be 
 called to pass through. They will know soon enough. Let them 
 keep themselves dressed up neat and clean as I first commanded 
 them, and they will soon understand what the trial is. 
 
 7. And behold, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, you need 
 not to trouble yourself about this people ; but deliver them into my 
 hands and I will take charge of them. If you cannot manage 
 them, I can, and I will bring them to my terms. You have 
 suffered enough on their account. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 A TEST IS PLACED BEFORE THE PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 185. WEBER, UTAH, December 28th, 1861. 
 
 i. I WILL speak unto you, my son, concerning my people for 
 your benefit. You know that I have taken a course to disap- 
 point my people. I was compelled to do so in order that I might 
 show unto them their follies. They did ndl understand my way 
 of working, and I was compelled to take a course to teach them, 
 and I could not do this without taking a course to disappoint 
 them, and thereby to destroy the false ideas which they have of 
 my character ; and after I have removed the false ideas which they 
 
334 THE TEST. 
 
 have of me, then it opens the way for me to show unto them my 
 true character. If I did not first destroy falsehood, I never could 
 establish truth in its place, inasmuch as falsehood reigns univer- 
 sally, and all people have partaken of it, and they do not under- 
 stand the truth. 
 
 2. If ever the children of men are made to understand the 
 truth as it is, they will first be compelled to forsake falsehood ; 
 and when they have forsaken falsehood, truth can take its place. 
 Truth and falsehood cannot occupy the same place. All people 
 must be led either by truth or falsehood. There is only those 
 two principles in the world, and all people are led by either one 
 or the other of them ; and when falsehood has taken deep root 
 in the minds of people, it is very difficult to remove it and estab- 
 lish truth in its place. In doing so it becomes very painful to 
 those who are thus operated upon by an opposite principle. It is 
 very hard for a people to forsake that which has led them all their 
 lives. If something comes along which condemns that principle 
 which has led them all their lives, they look upon it with suspicion, 
 and they begin forthwith .to try it by that false principle which has 
 formerly led them. They may wish to ask me this question : 
 "Have we been led by false principles all our days?" I answer 
 them, Yes. 
 
 3. Behold, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I testify unto all 
 mankind that I have never given one key pertaining to the holy 
 priesthood, in its fulness, to any prophet for several thousand 
 years, until I had opened the last seal. 
 
 4. The world of mankind have been led by mystery, and 
 figures, and parables, and dark speeches which the children of 
 men could not understand; consequently the devil has taken 
 advantage of them. 
 
 5. When there was nothing revealed by me to guide the 
 human race, the children of men were more apt to take those 
 figures, and parables, and dark speeches ,wrong than they were 
 li^ht, because the prevailing influence in the world was evil and 
 false. It obscured the little light that was brought to the world 
 by mine holy angels ; for they were restrained by law from reveal- 
 ing much to the children of men, and, on that account, the influence 
 of the devil, which is a false influence, prevailed over that small 
 
THE TEST. 335 
 
 / 
 
 glimmering of light which proceeded forth from mine holy angels ; 
 and thus, through a false influence operating upon Abraham's 
 seed, they misunderstood those parables, and figures, and dreams, 
 and dark speeches which were given unto them by the prophets 
 and righteous men ; and thus mankind have been without a true 
 standard whereby they might find out whether they were righteous 
 or not. When they have undertaken to judge any matter, they 
 were more likely to judge wrongfully than rightfully, because they 
 did not know me nor my ways. I never revealed my attributes 
 unto them. They knew me not. A true knowledge of myself 
 was withheld from the children of men until the time came for 
 the last seal to be opened, and, at the opening of that seal, a true 
 knowledge of myself and my attributes was revealed unto the 
 children of men. 
 
 6. All things both in heaven, and upon the earth, and in hell, 
 and in all other worlds, are made plain through the keys of the 
 holy priesthood. These keys try all things both in heaven, and 
 upon the earth, and in hell, and upon all other earths which have 
 been created and are travelling up to perfection; and those of" 
 my people who cannot lay down all those things which they pos- 
 sess at the feet of him who holds the keys of my kingdom, cannot 
 be delivered by me. He that has cattle, horses, houses, lands, 
 wife, children, man servants, maid servants, gold or silver, that 
 cannot lay it all at the feet of my servant Joseph, cannot be my 
 disciple, nor be delivered by me, nor by any member of my 
 Church ; but all those who will do this, with free and open hearts, 
 I will deliver, and they shall be members of my Church, and I 
 will bless them abundantly. Gold and silver, and horses, and cat- 
 tle, and all other kinds of property shall be no object unto them. 
 They shall have an abundance of all things. But those of my 
 people who cannot do this with all their hearts even willingly 
 need not to offer up; for, if they do, I will not accept of them. 
 I shall know whether they offer up with all their hearts, or not. 
 They know what I require at their liands before I shall deliver 
 them. If they do not offer up in the way which I have ap- 
 pointed, I shall not deliver them. They cannot deceive -me. 
 I shall be there when the vote is taken. My people will be called 
 upon to vote either for me or against me. 
 
336 THE PEOPLE MUST BE PREPARED. 
 
 7. You must stand up, and call upon those who are willing, to 
 lay all things at your feet even according to my request to 
 stand upon their feet ; and after they have stood upon their feet, 
 and have sat down again, you shall call upon those who did not 
 stand up to do so, if there be any ; and if there are any who are 
 opposed to me when they are standing upon their feet, the clerk 
 must take their names ; and when my people are gathered together 
 to meet me, they must not come and stand in the rank with the 
 rest of my people ; my people must take care of that ; and when I 
 come to deliver the faithful .of my people, I will destroy them all. 
 My people now know what I require at their hands before I can 
 deliver them. Therefore, let all those who wish to be delivered 
 comply with my request, and they shall receive the blessing. I 
 am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE LORD WILL NOT DELAY HIS COMING WHEN 
 THE PEOPLE ARE PREPARED. 
 
 No. 1 8 6. WEBER, UTAH, December 28th, 1861. 
 
 1. I WISH to speak unto you again for your own satisfaction 
 that you may know what to expect in relation to my coming. 
 I have told you the reason why I took a course to disappoint my 
 people. I did it in order that I might have an opportunity after 
 their disappointment to- bring them to a knowledge of a correct 
 principle ; for I could not have done this without I had first dis- 
 appointed them, and thereby show them the folly of their course. 
 After I had done that, it gave me a good opportunity to correct 
 their judgment and put the'm right; this I have almost done. 
 Another meeting or two will fully prepare them to meet me ; and 
 when they are prepared, I shall not remain away from them one 
 hour after you have taken tHe vote of my people upon the matter 
 which I commanded you to place before them ; then I will be 
 ready to come and deliver those who comply with my request. 
 
 2. All that I am waiting for now is to try my people ; that is 
 the test which I have so long spoken of. It has come at last, and 
 
THE LORD PROMISES TO COME. 337 
 
 the deliverance of my people will follow it in quick succession. 
 You may not see more than one night pass over after that vote has 
 been taken before my people are divided, if there is any division ; 
 and if there is none, it will be all the better. Therefore, I say 
 unto you, my son, that you may begin to look out for me theday__ 
 after that vote has been taken. I shall not disappoint you as I 
 have done before when I was disappointing my people on purpose 
 to bring them to a knowledge of the truth as it is in me. I shall 
 have nothing to disappoint you for this time ; and I shall not dis- 
 appoint you this time ; therefore, you may begin to look out for 
 me on Monday morning. 
 
 3. You may possibly see me on Monday. I may deliver my 
 people on Monday ; but if I should not come on Monday, I shall 
 surely come on Tuesday ; that you may depend upon. As I live, 
 I will come and deliver my people either on Monday or on Tues- 
 day. You know now my full intentions. Prepare yourself to 
 meet me, and hold yourself in readiness, for I shall come accord- 
 ing to my word. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 THE PEOPLE ARE STILL UNPREPARED. 
 
 No. 187. WEBER, UTAH, December 30th, 1861. 
 
 i. I WISH to speak unto you, my servant Joseph, for your own 
 satisfaction. You know that I told you that I intended to deliver 
 my people on Monday or Tuesday. But you see yourself that I 
 have not had the opportunity to deliver my people to-day. I 
 swore an oath unto you that I would deliver my people either on 
 Monday or on Tuesday if my people were ready 10 meet me. 
 I did not mean that I would come and deliver my people if they 
 were not ready for me. I shall fulfil the promise that I made 
 unto you, when my people are ready for me. I shall not come 
 unto my people until they are prepared for me, if they can make 
 themselves ready to meet me in the course of two or three days; 
 but if they cannot make themselves ready in that time, I shall 
 come upon them when they are unprepared ; for I shall not wait 
 
338 THE LORD PROMISES TO COME. 
 
 more than two or three days under any circumstances whatever. 
 I cannot wait more than that length of time. Therefore, my son, 
 if you can prepare my people to meet me td-morrow, I will come 
 to-morrow ; but if they cannot make everything ready to meet me 
 by midday, I shall not come to-morrow, for I want, at least, one 
 part of the day to gather my people together and to place them 
 in their own order. I do not wish to be cramped for time. 
 Let me come whenever I may, I do not want things to be carried 
 on hurriedly; therefore, I want sufficient time allotted me, because 
 I work in order without confusion. 
 
 2. I do not want you to understand that it will take me a few 
 hours to cut off mine enemies, for it will not ; for my army can 
 destroy the inhabitants of this Territory in less time than that. 
 
 3. I want to come to my people in the fore part of the day, 
 in order to give my people as good an opportunity as I possibly 
 can to prepare themselves to move out of this place soon after 
 their deliverance. When they are delivered, I wish them to have 
 the whole day before them ; therefore, when I visit you, it will be 
 early in a morning. If you do not see me early in a morning, 
 you need not look for me that day. Therefore, if you can make 
 all things ready for me by to-morrow morning, I will come and 
 deliver my people ; but, if you cannot, I shall not deliver my peo- 
 ple to-morrow. You know that I have told you how you may 
 expect to be led into my presence. You will give attention to all 
 those things ; and if you want me to come speedily, open the way 
 for me. I am waiting for my people. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Bright and Morning Star ; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PEOPLE ARE REQUESTED TO CONSECRATE 
 THEIR PROPERTY. 
 
 No. 188. WEBER, UTAH, December 3oth, 1861. 
 
 i. I AM near unto you, my servant Joseph, and I am watching 
 the movements of my people this night. My servants feel very 
 
REQUESTED TO CONSECRATE. 339 
 
 anxious to prepare my people to meet me to-morrow morning ; and 
 I will promise them that if they can get through that portion of 
 work which they are now so busily engaged in this night, in an 
 orderly manner, I will come unto you to-morrow morning in the 
 way which I have before appointed. If my people think that they 
 can get ready to meet me to-morrow, let them labor with all 
 diligence to do so, and I will not disappoint them. You may use 
 your influence, my son, to encourage them to prepare to meet me 
 to-morrow. 
 
 2. As I have said, you need not be afraid of me disappointing 
 them; for I shall not disappoint them if 'they are ready. All that 
 I wish them to do is to consecrate all their property in the way 
 which I have appointed. I will not wait for any of my people to 
 come here who are now absent. All that I require now is for 
 all those of my people who are here to consecrate. I shall not 
 wait for any who are absent. I knew that my people would not 
 all be here when they were wanted. Therefore, let my servants 
 work diligently, if they feel so disposed, until they are through with 
 my people, and then they shall see me to-morrow. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that if you see that 
 there is a possibility of my people being fully prepared to meet me 
 to-morrow, you must prepare yourself to meet me early in the 
 morning. You must have all your linen clothing ready to put on. 
 You know what is required of you to fully prepare you. Attend 
 to all those things, for I shall come suddenly, and I shall soon 
 clear the way for my people. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION ENJOINING IMMEDIATE COMPLIANCE 
 WITH THE LAW OF CONSECRATION. 
 
 No. 189. WEBER, UTAH, December 3oth, 1861. 
 
 i. I AM in a hurry to speak unto you, my son, for my people 
 have no time to lose i.i preparing themselves to meet me. I have 
 seen their offerings which they have made according to my request, 
 and with many of them I am well pleased ; for they have done all 
 
340 REQUESTED TO COMPLY IMMEDIATELY. 
 
 that I required of them. There are a few who offered up grudg- 
 ingly; but not many. The majority of them have come to my 
 terms with all their hearts. I have accepted of their offerings, and 
 I will deliver them. But I call upon those few of whom I have 
 spoken to repent. I need not mention their names. Those 
 who are guilty will know who I mean. They know very well that 
 they, did not offer up with all their hearts; and if they do not 
 repent, and become whole-hearted, I will not deliver them ; but, 
 when I come, I will slay them, let them stand wherever they may. 
 Should they even stand in the ranks with the faithful of my people, 
 my holy angels would pick them out and slay them ; therefore, 
 they had better give up with all their hearts, as the rest of my peo- 
 ple have done, for I will accept of none but the whole-hearted. 
 They cannot deceive me by hiding themselves in the crowd, nor 
 thereby escape my judgments. If they do not do as I have com- 
 manded them in this revelation, I shall slay them as I have said. 
 They now know my will concerning them ; they had, therefore, 
 better decide as to the course which they intend to take. I am 
 the Lord. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, all my people who 
 are willing to consecrate, must bring in a list of their property and 
 deliver it into the hands of my servant John Banks as soon as they 
 can ; for I shall not come and deliver them until they have done 
 so ; but after they have done so, I will come and deliver them. 
 Therefore, let my people go to work and make out all their lists of 
 property to-night, if they can ; and they can do this if they will put 
 themselves to a little trouble in order to do so. I wish them to 
 understand that they must not linger in this matter. Let all this 
 work be done to-night, and I will soon show my people what I am 
 about to do. They have wanted to know a little more about me, 
 and they shall soon know it. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you must appoint a 
 clerk to record all the property of my people which they may con- 
 secrate, and let that matter be attended to in a proper and orderly 
 manner. And when my servant John Banks shall have received 
 those lists from my people, he must deliver them into the hands of 
 the clerk who may be appointed to record them, and see that they 
 are properly recorded ; this will be his duty from this time hence- 
 
ANOTHER PROMISE. 34! 
 
 forth. Therefore, my people will deliver their lists of property 
 into his hands. 
 
 4. And again, I say unto you, my people must have 
 the lists of all their property which they intend to consecrate 
 brought in to my servant John Banks before midday to-morrow, 
 at the furthest. They must bring them in to-night if they possibly 
 can. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my people must not run 
 about from place to place; but they must hold themselves in 
 readiness, and watch for me. These things are all that I require 
 of my people, and if they will do them, I will do my duty to them. 
 Let them hearken unto my words, and diligently obey them, and 
 all will be well. I am the Son of the Eternal Father ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 ANOTHER PROMISE. 
 
 No. 190. WEBER, UTAH, December 3ist, 1861. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, I see the position in 
 which you are placed with my people. They cannot get ready to 
 meet me this day by the time that I wanted to come. I 
 felt satisfied last evening that my people could not get everything 
 ready to meet me this morning, and I shall not come to-day. Let 
 all my people settle up their accounts to-day, and prepare them- 
 selves for a visit from me to-morrow morning ; and if they will do 
 this, I will surely come to-morrow morning. I am satisfied that 
 my people have done all that they possibly could to prepare them- 
 selves to meet me to-day ; but they have not been able to make 
 all things ready, and, on that account, I cannot come this day. 
 I want to come as soon as my people will prepare themselves to 
 meet me. They may do this to-morrow, morning without hurry- 
 ing themselves. 
 
 2. My servants must show unto my people the necessity of 
 fully preparing themselves to-day to meet me to-morrow ; for, as I 
 live, I shall come to-morrow if my people are prepared to meet 
 
342 THE PROPHET'S FAITH. 
 
 me. Therefore, if my people wish to see me on that day, they 
 can, if they will prepare themselves to do so. If they do not see 
 me on that day, it will be entirely their own fault. If they do not 
 prepare themselves, they will have to see me whether they are 
 ready or not. I shall not wait for them more than another day 
 or two. My people now know my mind ; therefore, if they wish 
 to see me, let them prepare themselves by to-morrow. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET POSSESSES GREAT FAITH. 
 
 No. 191. WEBER, UTAH, December 3ist, 1861. 
 
 1. IT is hard for me, my son, to work with you, for I have to 
 work against your lack of faith to such an extent in some things, 
 and in other things you have an abundance of faith. You have an 
 abundance of faith in the theory of my gospel. I have no trouble 
 in revealing unto you the revelations of my will. By your faith 
 you can draw a revelation from me at any time, and on almost 
 any subject. I have no trouble with you in this respect. I could 
 not give unto my servant Joseph Smith the revelations of my will 
 as easy as I can give them unto you. He had not as strong faith 
 in that respect as you have. It was hard for me to work with him 
 on that account ; for he had not sufficient faith to draw them. 
 When I gave unto him the revelations of my will, I had to do it 
 against his faith. When I wanted to give unto him a revelation, I 
 had to force it upon him. He had no faith to draw it, and, on 
 that account, I did not give unto him any more revelations than I 
 could possibly help. It was very difficult for me to work through 
 him ; but with you it is to the contrary. I have no trouble to give 
 unto you the revelations of my will. I cannot hold them from you. 
 You draw them from me. by your faith, and it is pleasant for me 
 to give them unto you. You have great faith in the theory of my 
 gospel ; but it is hard for you to exercise faith in the power of it, 
 although you know that the power of it will be given. 
 
 2. When I come unto you, I shall have to force myself upon 
 
THE PROPHET'S FAITH. 343 
 
 you. You have not sufficient faith to draw me ; consequently, I 
 shall be compelled to force myself upon you. I wish that you 
 could draw me ; but you cannot. You know that I have to come 
 speedily ; and thus I have to work with you in this respect, even 
 against faith, and it is hard for me to make you believe that I arn 
 coming up to you to give unto you the power of your office even 
 as I gave unto you the theory of the fulness of my gospel. 
 
 3. You seem to work against me in relation to the conferring 
 of power upon you. If you could draw that blessing upon you by 
 your faith, it would be much better both for you and for me ; but 
 it seems that you cannot. I shall be compelled to force it upon 
 you, and I shall do so very speedily. I am very sorry that it is so 
 hard for you to exercise faith in my coming to endow you with 
 power. You know that I have promised it unto you, and you 
 should know that shall fulfil my promise. You know that I can- 
 not fail. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION PROMISING TO PRESERVE FAITHFUL 
 
 THOSE WHO HAVE HITHERTO 
 
 BEEN FAITHFUL. 
 
 No. 192. WEBER, .UTAH, January ist, 1862. 
 
 1. Lo, I come, and all nature shall feel the shock! The earth 
 shall reel, and men's hearts shall fail them ! The cloud is now 
 gathering ! This you feel. You know that I am coming, for I 
 have given unto you a true feeling, and you shall not be disap- 
 pointed. You will understand my movements, for I will not hide 
 anything from you. 
 
 2. My people are unsettled in their minds, and there are a 
 number of them who wish to leave this place, for their faith is 
 failing them. They begin to think I never intend to come. 
 Others of my people wish to leave this place for a few days; and 
 my people in general wish to scatter. What shall I do with them ? 
 Shall I let them scatter? I know that they want both food to eat, 
 
344 THE FAITHFUL. 
 
 and wood to burn ; and I know, also, that they cannot hold 
 together more than a few days longer. I know all about their 
 situation. Their faith is failing them, and that is the worst of all. 
 But, shall I suffer any of my people who have been faithful 
 hitherto, to leave me now? No, I shall not. I will hold them as 
 with an iron grasp. I will stop them. There are those among my 
 people who would like to leave this place to-morrow. When my 
 people are about to scatter, then I shall come and stop them, and 
 I will find them something better to do than to forsake the truth. 
 As I have gathered them together, so I will take care of them; but 
 they must not go away from this place. Let them hearken unto 
 my words, and obey them, and I will take care of them. If they 
 go away they may be caught. I can scarcely give them liberty to 
 >e absent one day^ although I know that many of them are nearly 
 destitute of wood, and that they have but little opportunity to 
 obtain it ; but I am coming to their deliverance. 
 
 3. How soon shall I come? I am now preparing myself to 
 come. But you say, "I thought that you were prepared?" Mine 
 army of warriors are with me upon the earth, and have been for 
 many days. They are ready to receive their appointments ; and I 
 am now stationing them throughout this Territory. I am now 
 appointing the different generals their separate work, and those 
 generals will appoint mine angels their work. I have the names 
 of all those whom I intend to slay the first time of cutting off; 
 and those generals will place an angel by the side of each of those 
 whose names are recorded for destruction ; and when I shall have 
 set those warriors in order, and an angel shall have been placed 
 by the side of each of those of mine enemies whom I intend to 
 cut off this time, then I will come and give unto you your rod; 
 and when you shall have given your command, I will give mine 
 unto the generals of mine army, and they, theirs, to the heavenly 
 hosts ; and then mine angels will slay mine enemies all at once. 
 I am now at work arranging mine army. That is all that I have 
 to do before I come unto you ; and that is a very short work for 
 me to do ; and when I shall have accomplised it, I shall come to 
 you, as I have said. You may, therefore, form an idea as to how 
 long I shall be before I am with you. When I come, I shall be 
 very likely to visit you the first thing in a morning. 
 
PEOPLE WILL FORSAKE PRINCIPLE. 345 
 
 4. My people ought not to leave this place on any account 
 whatever. Some of them will go away to obtain such things as 
 they think they need ; but it is not safe for any of them to be 
 absent from this place one day. I have now told my people, and 
 they can please themselves as to what they do. I know they have- 
 been disappointed before, and that has partially broken their con- 
 fidence in me ; but if they will do as I have commanded them, 
 they will be benefitted by it ; for I do not always mean to disap- 
 point them. 
 
 5. You say, my son, that you wish that something would 
 transpire to force me out of my hiding place to deliver my peo- 
 ple ; that you do not care what it may be, for you think that I shall 
 never come to my people until I am compelled to do so, and that 
 I will not come of my own free will ; but I can assure you that I 
 shall. What can I say more unto you ? I will accomplish my 
 work, and save my people, if they will obey me. I am the. Light 
 and Life of the world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THAT PEOPLE WILL FOR- 
 SAKE PRINCIPLE IN THEIR ENDEAVORS 
 TO AVOID TROUBLE. 
 
 No. 193. WEBER, UTAH, January 3rd, 1862. 
 
 i. I WISH to speak unto you again concerning those people 
 who have yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel. You 
 are afraid that I shall lead you into trouble by deferring their 
 deliverance. You are afraid that I shall weary them so much that 
 they cannot endure it, and thus overpower them with hardships 
 until their spirits are broken and they give up ; and that through 
 too many hardships they will be led to give up, and thus deny me, 
 as some have already done who never have endured anything. 
 You say that you know what mortals are. You say that if I over- 
 burden them, they will deny either me, or anything else. You say 
 that they will bear only so much, and if you place any more than 
 
346 PEOPLE WILL FORSAKE PRINCIPLE. 
 
 that upon them, that they will turn around upon me, and curse 
 both me and everything else that proceeds from me. You know 
 that this is a thing which mortals are guilty of. 
 
 2. They will bring themselves into trouble, and they will give 
 way and deny anything ; yea, even the sight of their own eyes. 
 If you press them hard enough they will break through anything, 
 regardless of principle. They do not study principle in an ex- 
 tremity ; but they study how to avoid trouble, and they forsake 
 principle. They can see nothing else but getting out of an unpleas- 
 ant position the best way that they can ; that is all that they care 
 about knowing then. They do not look at the consequence that 
 will follow the course which they take when they forsake principle ; 
 and thus mortals can only bear so much before they will give up. 
 But there are some that will bear more than others. All people 
 cannot bear the same amount of hardships before they give way. 
 Some -will give way sooner than others; and those that give way in 
 the least difficulties are the most worthless. The purest material 
 will endure the most, because there is the least dross about it. I 
 know what mortals can bear. I know the nature of them all, and 
 I know how much I can lay upon them before they will entirely 
 give up and deny everything ; for they will do this if you place too 
 much upon them. 
 
 3. When I have gathered a people together, the law of 
 heaven compels me to place a trial upon them before I can confer 
 a blessing upon them ; and in placing this trial upon my people, 
 some of them will give way and deny me, while others will endure 
 that trial without much difficulty ; such is the difference in the 
 nature of people. Some will not endure the trial which merits that 
 promised blessing, and consequently they cannot receive it. No 
 person can receive a blessing at mine hands without they endure 
 the trial which was appointed by law for that blessing. There is 
 no blessing that can be conferred upon Abraham's seed but there 
 is a trial connected with it ; and before a people can be permitted 
 to enjoy the blessing, they must first endure the trial which was 
 appointed for that blessing. If they cannot do that, they never 
 can partake of the blessing. Before a people can enjoy the sweet, 
 they must first partake of the bitter ; and when they have earned a 
 blessing, they can enjoy it. 
 
A TRIAL BEFORE THE BLESSING. 347 
 
 4. And now I am placing a trial upon my people just before 
 I give unto them the blessing. Some of them will not endure it ; 
 but they will deny me altogether on account of a slight trial which 
 I am compelled to place upon them before I can deliver them. I 
 do not wish to afflict my people by trying them, if I could give_ 
 unto them the blessings without it; but I cannot. If a people 
 must have one, they must have the other. Merit and reward go 
 hand in hand. Where you find one you find the other. They are 
 based upon the principle of justice, which is an unchangeable 
 principle, and is sustained by all glorified beings. Therefore, the 
 faithful of my people will know my situation, and they will not think 
 that I am too hard on them. When I try tham according to the 
 law by which I am governed, I do not wish to be any harder upon 
 them than I can help. I do not delight in afflicting those who 
 trust in me ; hut I strive to make their burdens as light as I possi- 
 bly can. I have done all that I possibly could for my people as 
 time has passed along. 
 
 5. I know all about their situation, and I feel for them. I will 
 release them in time. I know their destitute state both for wood 
 and provisions. I will deliver them before they are called on to 
 suffer for those things which are most needed. Many of my peo- 
 ple have been faithful, and I will not lay more upon them than 
 what they are able to bear. I will not break them down before I 
 come to deliver them. The law of heaven does not bind me to 
 lay a burden upon my people which they are unable to bear. But 
 there are those among my people who are unwilling to bear the 
 slightest burden and endure the smallest difficulty. If they are 
 called upon to bear with the least inconvenience, they begin to 
 murmur against me, and charge me with being oppressive. What 
 are such people good for? I have no use for them. They are 
 unworthy to merit the least blessing. I suppose that they think 
 they ought to have blessings without meriting them. They 
 feel that they are something extra, and that they have no right to 
 be tried. 
 
 6. All those who receive a blessing at my hands must abide 
 the trial which was appointed for that blessing. None can escape 
 the justice of my law. Therefore, my son, you may expect to see 
 a few people among those whom I have gathered together, who 
 
348 ANXIOUS TO BE DELIVERED. 
 
 will not endure that trial which is appointed for my people to pass 
 through before they can claim the blessing which lies before them. 
 Many of my people will endure the trial, and enjoy the blessing ; 
 but a few will deny me and fall, and be destroyed by the bright- 
 ness of my coming, and lose that blessing which they greatly 
 desired to partake of. Therefore, let those of my people who 
 wish to receive the blessing endure the trial valiantly, and they 
 shall receive it ; for I am coming to give unto them their reward. 
 I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PEOPLE ARE ANXIOUSLY AWAITING A MANI- 
 FESTATION OF THE POWER OF GOD. 
 
 No. 194. WEBER, UTAH, January 3rd, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, you feel dis- 
 satisfied with me because I have not made known unto you the 
 exact time of my coming. You desire to know why I have kept 
 this secret from you up to this time. You say that it would have 
 saved you much uneasiness if you had known it. You say that 
 on account of not knowing that secret, you have not known how to 
 counsel my people, and that you are set fast with them. You say 
 that you do not know what to do with them. You say that you 
 feel as though you were bound with them ; and you say that you 
 should be well pleased with me if I would give you liberty. You 
 say that you can do no more for them than what you have done, 
 and you now wish to deliver them into my hands to see what I 
 can do with them. You say that they are very restless, and it is 
 out of your power to pacify them. You say that nothing but a 
 manifestation of my power will satisfy them. 
 
 2. But I can assure you that the manifestation of my power 
 which they are looking for, and which I have promised, will move 
 some of them out of the way when it comes. I am greatly sur- 
 prised at some of my people. If they saw a manifestation of my 
 power, and were permitted to live through it, they would do little 
 or no good afterwards ; for after they had seen it, they would say 
 
THE UNBELIEVING. 349 
 
 that it was of the devil, and not by the power of God. Those who 
 cannot believe in the keys of the holy priesthood, and in the reve- 
 lations which proceeds from my mouth, would not believe that it 
 was me when they saw me ; but they would say that I was the 
 devil. They would not know me from the devil. Those people- 
 who do not believe in the revelations which I have given, deny my 
 power, and they do not know me. What claim have they on me 
 to deliver them? I will send them speedily to their graves when I 
 come. 
 
 3. Through their wickedness they force min'e holy angels far 
 from them, and they cling close to the devils, and invite their 
 influence, and through it they deny the truth. What have they to 
 do with me? I have had enough of such saints. They profess to 
 be saints and act like devils ! They cannot believe the sight of 
 their own eyes. What can I do with people who deny the sight of 
 their own eyes, as some of those people do who profess my name? 
 But there are not many of my people who are so unbelieving as to 
 deny everything. But I shall slay all those who deny the revela- 
 tions which I have given. A ipanifestation of my power would 
 not benefit them. They would not believe that it was from me 
 any more than they would believe that the revelations which I have 
 given were from me. That spirit that will deny one, will deny the 
 other; therefore, such do not believe in me; they are infidels, 
 and will deny my power, and defy the Holy Ghost. They have 
 committed a sin which is unto death, and there is no forgiveness 
 for them in the flesh ; and I shall slay them when I come. 
 
 4. None of my people have had a justifiable cause to allow 
 their feelings to run to such extremes as that, even to deny all 
 that I have revealed, as some have done. But my people may say 
 that none of them have" done that. There are some among my 
 people who have done this in their feelings. They have denied 
 me altogether, and I have' cursed them, and if they were permitted 
 to live upon the earth, their flesh would consume away upon their 
 bones, and their eyes would drop out of their sockets. If they 
 were permitted to live upon the earth, they would never have 
 another day's happiness ; and when they died, they would die such 
 a death as I have before described. The Holy Ghost will never 
 operate upon them again while they are in mortality. But as I 
 
350 THE UNBELIEVING. 
 
 have said unto you before, I, will put an end to their existence 
 when I come, and I will set a mark upon them in order that the 
 rest of my people may know them and shun their company dur- 
 ing the time that they are permitted to live. Those of my people 
 who are led by the Holy Ghost will know them when they see 
 them, for I will show them unto the faithful of my people ; but 
 they will not hurt any of my people with their" evil spirits, which 
 lead them, while they are permitted to live among them. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you wish to know 
 when I am about to come. I have never been able to tell you 
 this exactly. I cannot tell this so long before the time; and 
 because I have had so many difficult circumstances to meet with 
 which have baffled me. But I can tell you as near as a day before, 
 or may be a little nearer. When I get within a day of the time of 
 my coming, then I can tell you, and very likely I may do so. I 
 do not want to promise you that too positively ; but I will do all 
 that I can to satisfy and encourage you. This much I can tell 
 you, that my coming is very near. You know your own feelings 
 in relation to my coming. It is as near as you feel that it is. You 
 know that I have never suffered you to be deceived in your feel- 
 ings. Your feelings are correct ; follow them, and counsel my 
 people according to them. If you will always do this, you will 
 counsel them aright ; for I will influence you aright. And if you 
 follow your impressions, you will never go astray. I am the Lord 
 Hosts ; and lo, I come quickly. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THOSE PEOPLE WHO 
 WERE ACTUATED BY HYPOCRISY AND CON- 
 SECRATED PROPERTY UNWILLINGLY. 
 
 No. 195. WEBER, UTAH, January 6th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, tm's, my people, have 
 consecrated their property according to my commandment, and I 
 may try the sincerity of some of those who have consecrated their 
 property unto me ; and if 1 prove them dishonest, I shall withdraw 
 
UNWILLING TO CONSECRATE. 351 
 
 my holy spirit from them, ' and I shall destroy them for their 
 hypocrisy and wickedness. There are many of my people who 
 consecrated their property with all their hearts, and they would 
 give it up at any time when it was called for, and their hearts are 
 right before. But there are others of whom I am jealous, whom I 
 intend to try ; and if they resist me after they have delivered them- 
 selves and all that they had into my hands for my disposal, then 
 I shall withdraw my spirit from them, and destroy them in the 
 flesh ; for I am the Lord, and I rule in heaven above, and upon 
 the earth beneath; and who can stay my hand? I speak the 
 word, and it shall be obeyed. I regard not the persons of men, 
 only according to their obedience to me. I will accept of none 
 but the whole-hearted. If any person loves their earthly substance 
 more than they love my gospel, they shall not enjoy it. I will not 
 accept of idolatrous people. If the principles of my gospel are 
 not worth all that a man possesses, he cannot have them ; for it 
 will take all that he possesses to purchase them. If a person can- 
 not give up all their worldly substance, it proves that he loves his 
 worldly possessions best ; and where a man's heart is, there his 
 treasure is also; and that person who worships his worldly sub- 
 stance, and not me, is an idolater, and he cannot be a member of 
 my Church ; for no idolater can enter into my kingdom. My laws 
 cannot be broken. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you are displeased 
 with me for giving this people the power over you. You say that 
 you cannot do anything with them. You say that they will only do 
 what they feel disposed to do, and that you cannot help yourself; 
 and you desire to know what you are to do with my people if, 
 when you give unto them a commandment, which has come from 
 my mouth, they will not obey it. You must deliver them into my 
 hands, and I will destroy them if they will not obey my command- 
 ments which I give unto them through you. You need not to put 
 yourself to the least trouble, but deliver them into my hands, and 
 I will move them out of your way at once ; for I am coming to 
 settle all disputes with all parties among my people here and 
 throughout this Territory. It is hard to make my people under- 
 stand me. O how some of them love the things of this world 
 which are perishable. If they would obey me, I would give unto 
 
352 JUDGMENT UPON TRAITORS. 
 
 them never failing riches and life everlasting; but they strain at a 
 gnat and swallow a camel. They will strain and stumble over one 
 of the simple laws of my kingdom ; and, on the other hand, they 
 will swallow the devil and all his works without the least difficulty. 
 What can I do with such a generation of people? They are un- 
 worthy of the least of my blessings. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, your feelings are 
 greatly agitated when you behold those traitors who have forsaken 
 me and who are now my most bitter enemies. I will promise you 
 this, that they shall not live upon the earth more than a few days. 
 I will move them out of the way when I come ; for I despise 
 them as much as you do. I know that you have been afflicted in 
 your feelings every time that you have seen them. They have 
 been proud of their abominations, and have mocked me day by 
 day. I will lay everyone of them low when I come. As I live, 
 I will not spare the life of one of them ; for they will be smitten 
 from the earth. I can assure you that I am coming unto you 
 fully as soon as you expect to see me. You know your present 
 feelings. You may depend that my coming is close upon you. 
 Prepare for me, for I am coming as a whirlwind. I am Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THAT ALL PEOPLE WHO 
 ARE HEIRS OF SALVATION MUST ABIDE 
 THE ETERNAL LAW OF CON- 
 SECRATION. 
 
 No. 196. WEBER, UTAH, January yth, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, you feel to ask me what 
 I am doing. You wish to know what I am waiting for. You 
 wish to know whether I am waiting for another mob to rise up and 
 come up against my people. You say that if I am waiting for 
 this, you should like to know it ; for you say that there is some- 
 thing about me which you do not fully understand ; and that you 
 would like to understand my movements more fully than what you 
 
CONSECRATION. 353 
 
 have hitherto done. You say that you are weary. You do not 
 want to wait any longer for me ; and you say that if I would come, 
 it would greatly relieve you. 
 
 2. What shall I say unto you concerning these thiqgs? I can 
 assure you that I am not waiting for another mob to rise up_ 
 Mine enemies have done all that I require of them to warrant 
 their utter destruction in the flesh. Then what am I waiting for? 
 "Are you waiting for your people, or are you not ready? Answer 
 me this question, and it will set my feelings at rest." I am wait- 
 ing for my people. I called upon them to consecrate their 
 property, and they did so; and now I wish to try the honesty of. a 
 few of my people of whom I am jealous ; and if they deliver up 
 with all their hearts, I have nothing more to wait for. I want a 
 perfect giving up by all my people who expect to be delivered; and 
 it must not be given grudgingly, but with free and generous hearts ; 
 and those who cannot do this, I wish them to withdraw from the 
 rest of my people as soon as they can ; for as soon as they will 
 have withdrawn from among my people, I will come. This is 
 what I am now waiting for. If there be none in the midst of my 
 people but those who are willing to offer up with all their hearts, 
 the sooner that they manifest their complete devotion, the better; 
 for I will come as soon as they have done this. 
 
 3. They are holding me from delivering the faithful of my peo- 
 ple. I want all things right with my people before I deliver them. 
 The law by which I am governed compels me to have all things 
 right with my people before I can release them. If all my people 
 (so called) will not offer up, they are not all of one faith ; they are 
 not all one in me, and consequently they are not mine, and can- 
 not lay any just claim on me in mortality. Those of my people 
 who will offer up with all their hearts, according to my law, have a 
 claim upon me to deliver them and to fight their battles ; for they 
 have honored that eternal law of consecration, which law cannot 
 be broken, for it is an eternal law; and those of my people who 
 abide that law become one in me, as I am one with my Father. 
 Without an obedience to that law, a people can never become 
 one. 
 
 4. This law is upheld by all Gods ; and without an obedience 
 unto it, no person can obtain eternal life. It is the gateway into 
 
354 CONSECRATION. 
 
 celestial glory ; all angels are regulated by that law ; upon it all 
 true happiness hangs ; all glorified beings are held together, and 
 are governed by it ; it is the great law of heaven ; upon it all other 
 laws are based ; it is a celestial law, and my people will have to 
 abide it under the fulness of the holy priesthood. Some portion 
 of the celestial law will be kept by mortals, and some portion of it 
 will not. The celestial law regulates all things upon a celestial 
 earth, and there are some portions of a celestial law which mortals 
 can abide, and other portions that they cannot, and the portion 
 which mortals can abide, they will be compelled to. My people 
 need not think that they can stand against it, for they cannot ; for 
 there is not a God who rules on high that does not sustain it. 
 My people cannot evade it, no matter what they do. They will 
 have to abide it or be slain. There is not a person now living 
 upon the earth, nor ever will live upon it, but what will either have 
 to abide that law or perish. None can ever break it and live. 
 As it reaches one nation of people after another, and they reject 
 it, they will be swept off from the earth until it has conquered all 
 things and brought all mine enemies under my feet ; and those 
 who oppose it, are not my friends, nor friends to the principles of 
 righteousness ; and I shall treat them as I do fallen spirits. I 
 shall move them off the earth as they cross my pathway. My 
 people should know that -they will either have to obey that law or 
 perish ; and if there is one person among my people who will not 
 abide that law, I will slay him, and I will give his property to the 
 poor. 
 
 5. I will make all people, either living or dead, consecrate 
 their property as I come in contact with them. This law has to 
 be kept by the children of men, or else they will have to perish ; 
 it is either one or the other with them. Therefore, I want all my 
 people to show themselves as they are. If they will not give up 
 with all therr hearts and abide this law, let them come out against 
 it, and separate themselves from the rest of my people who will 
 abide it, and when they have done this, if there should be any 
 opposed to it, I will come and deliver the rest ; and if there be 
 none opposed to it, let my people all give up at once, for there are 
 a few of my people who have held back, and I am waiting to see 
 what conclusion they will come to. Therefore, let all my people 
 
THE PEOPLE DESIRE A GREATER MANIFESTATION. 355 
 
 clear the way for me. They know my will; for lo, I come quickly. 
 I am the Stone and Shepherd of Israel, and the Bright and 
 Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION DESCRIBING THE AMOUNT OF 
 
 TESTIMONY GIVEN TO GOD'S PEOPLE 
 
 CONCERNING HIS WORK. 
 
 No. 197. WEBER, UTAH, January 8th, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, I made 
 unto you a promise that I would deliver my people in time ; that 
 I would not let them suffer either for wood or provisions, and you 
 shall see that I will fulfil my promise to your satisfaction. You 
 may now safely begin to prepare for me. You know what prepar- 
 ations will be necessary for such an event as the one which lies 
 before you, for I have told you often enough. I have been feel- 
 ing after a few of my people, and nearly all, if not all of them, will 
 come to my terms ; but if there should be a few who will not do 
 so, they must not be suffered to come into the rank when my peo- 
 ple shall be gathered together to meet me ; none shall be per- 
 mitted to stand there but those who have consecrated according to 
 my appointment. I know that my people think it is hard for 
 them, considering the amount of testimony which I have given 
 unto them, to entirely give up unto me. I desire to reason with 
 them upon that matter. They think that I have not given unto 
 them a sufficient evidence that I have commenced a work, or that 
 I am leading them. They say that they have never, as yet, seen 
 me nor any of my holy angels; neither have they seen a manifesta- 
 tion of my power, and that, notwithstanding this, I call upon them 
 to make a full and complete sacrifice of all that they haVe unto 
 me. They cannot understand it. They say that, considering the 
 limited amount of knowledge which they have received, it is 
 almost too much for them to subscribe to. 
 
 2. My people all know that I am at work, and that I have com- 
 menced to organize my Church in their midst ; that they have felt 
 
356 CONCERNING THE PROPHET. 
 
 the operations of my holy angels upon them many times ; that my 
 spirit bears testimony to the words of my servant, the prophet, and 
 to the keys of the holy priesthood which he has brought to the 
 earth. They know that he has opened the heavens, and revealed 
 unto them the rounds of eternity even all the heights above, and 
 depths below; that he has made known unto them the nature of 
 all things both in heaven and upon the earth, and also their own 
 origin and destiny. They know very well that all mysteries have 
 been solved by him ; that he has progressed far beyond their 
 limited knowledge and comprehension ; that his wisdom cannot 
 be approached by mortal men ; he leaves them all in the shade ; 
 they are fools compared to him. His wisdom circumscribes all 
 the world, and will, shortly, circumscribe all eternity. All former 
 prophets fall into the shade when compared to him. He makes 
 clear to the human mind all the dark mysteries which they have 
 introduced into the world, over which thousands have stumbled. 
 Nothing comes amiss to him. He is the master of the whole 
 world. 
 
 3. My people, if they know anything at all, know that what I 
 have said is true. They are all living witnesses to it. Have they 
 no testimony of me and of my truth? It is now several thousand 
 years since any people had so great a testimony as these few peo- 
 ple who have yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel have. 
 Hundreds and thousands of people have sought to serve me to 
 the best of their abilities, and have laid down their lives for the 
 little truth which they thought they had received ; but the little 
 truth which they received bears no comparison to the light which 
 these, my people, have received. They endured by faith, and 
 have never, as yet, received the object for which they suffered and 
 died ; yet it appears too much for some of my people even to 
 consecrate the little property they have just before they receive 
 that blessing for which so many thousands have suffered and died 
 without obtaining. 
 
 4. Some of my people whom I have gathered together are 
 unwilling to put themselves to the least inconvenience by striving 
 to bring about that promised blessing. I have not called upon any 
 of them to sacrifice their lives. I have only called upon them to 
 consecrate their property in obedience to the law of heaven, and 
 
COMMANDED TO REMAIN. 357 
 
 my people must either do so, and deliver themselves into my hands, 
 or they can never be saved. Therefore, those of my people who 
 will not consecrate their property, if there be any such, will have 
 to consecrate their lives ; for I shall take them,, and then their 
 property will do them no good. They will lose both their liv^s 
 and their property at once ! Therefore, let all those of my people 
 who wish to save their lives and prosper upon the earth, obey my 
 commandments, and they shall so. I am the Lord, and I will 
 uphold then. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE LORD COMMANDS THOSE MEN WHO HAVE 
 
 WIVES AND CHILDREN ABSENT, TO REMAIN 
 
 AT THE GATHERING PLACE. 
 
 No. 198. WEBER, UTAH, January loth, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, I see the true position 
 of my people. There are quite a number of men here who have 
 yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel, who are laboring 
 under great disadvantages in consequence of the absence of their 
 families. They are put to much inconvenience in almost every 
 respect. They feel very much for their families who are absent 
 from them, whom they would like that I should take care of, and 
 whose lives they would like that I should save when my overflow- 
 ing scourge passes through this Territory. I know the feelings of 
 those men towards their wives and children, and I will make unto 
 them a promise that, inasmuch as their wives and children are one 
 with them, and with my work, and will not fight against it, I will 
 preserve their lives, and bring them into the fulness of my gospel, 
 and my servants shall enjoy the society of their wives and children 
 again. My servants need not to trouble themselves on account of 
 their families, for I will take care of them inasmuch as they are 
 worthy ; but if there are any of my servants who have wives and 
 children absent from this place, who are not one with them, but 
 who are mine enemies, who are fighting against the truth, who 
 have time after time resisted the- promptings of my holy angels, 
 
358 THE WORTHY WILL BE PROTECTED. 
 
 I 
 
 and have utterly refused to be led by them, and still continue to 
 do so, such I shall destroy *\vhen I come ; for their names are 
 recorded for destruction. 
 
 2. I have sent my holy angels to operate upon every person in 
 this Territory who is an heir to the resurrection, and they have 
 striven with them, and some of them have given way to their 
 operations, and mine holy angels are now leading and watching 
 over them, and they feel, to a certain extent, as these my people 
 do. They are longing for a day of deliverance to come they 
 feel as though they were in bondage even as those of my people 
 do who have yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel ; but 
 they do not understand my plans as well as these, my people, do ; 
 but I have broken them loose from the grasp of the devil, and 
 when I break the bonds which now bind them, I shall be able to 
 turn them entirely unto me. This I shall do directly. Therefore, 
 I shall save the lives of that class of people. Their names are all 
 recorded for salvation, and I shall take good care of them. 
 
 3. But there are others in the old Church who are heirs to the 
 resurrection, who have resisted the operations of my spirit. I sent 
 my holy angels to operate upon them, and after they had labored 
 with them for a time, and could not turn them to righteousness, 
 they wrote down all their names, and handed them to me ; those I 
 shall destroy. I am compelled either to turn a people to me, or 
 destroy them ; therefore, when I come, I shall utterly destroy all 
 those heirs of salvation whom I could not turn unto me. 
 
 4. There is, also, another class of people in the old Church 
 unto whom I never sent my holy angels, in order to lead them to 
 salvation. They have no claim on me. They are influenced by 
 the devil and his angels, and their names are all down for destruc- 
 tion. The first slaughter which I shall make in this Territory will 
 not .leave many of them alive. I shall be hard on that class of 
 people, for they are fallen spirits. They have deceived the rest of 
 the people, and led many of them to destruction. I have now in 
 my possession the names of all those of all classes whom I intend 
 to destroy. Therefore, my way is perfectly clear before me, and I 
 am coming speedily. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 5. And behold, I speak unto you again concerning those of 
 my servants whose families are absent from this place. Let them 
 
THE WORTHY WILL BE' PROTECTED. 359 
 
 make themselves contented concerning their families ; for I will 
 take care of as many of them as are worthy, and those of them 
 who are not worthy I shall destroy. If my servants were with 
 their families, and their families wer not worthy to live, they could 
 not save their lives. Nothing can be done to help those who are 
 condemned to die; neither can anything be done to injure those 
 whose 'names are down for salvation and deliverance. All are in 
 my hands, and I will give unto them their rights. 
 
 6. And let those of my servants, of whom I have spoken, trust 
 in me, and be contented as they are. They must not go to their 
 families now; but they must remain where they are until I shall 
 have delivered my people, and then they can have those of their 
 wives and children who shall be left alive, again. All things will 
 be right with the faithful of my people. I am the Lord, and I am 
 coming speedily. My people will not have time now to go any 
 great distance to see their families, and to return ; for I am just 
 upon the point of coming to my people ; therefore, let them stay 
 in this place, and keep themselves as clean as possible ; for I, the 
 Lord of Hosts, am coming to their deliverance. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION IN WHICH THE LORD REFUSES TO 
 MAKE ANY ADDITIONAL PROMISE CONCERN- 
 ING THE TIME OF HIS COMING. 
 
 No. 199. WEBER, UTAH, January nth, 1862.' 
 
 i. WHAT can I say unto you, my son, to satisfy you? I can 
 see that you are oppressed in your feelings until you scarcely know 
 how to endure it. You see that, for some cause or other which 
 you do not fully understand, I continue to defer the deliverance 
 of my people day after day, and, on this account, you are in great 
 trouble. If you understood the cause of it, you would be* perfectly 
 satisfied ; but you do not. You say that you do not know how 
 long I intend to baffle my people, as I have baffled them for the 
 last few weeks; but that you would like to know; that in conse- 
 
360 ADDITIONAL PROMISES UNNECESSARY. 
 
 qrence of ray people being baffled by me so much, you do not 
 know how to understand me ; and, on *that account, you do not 
 know how to prepare yourself to meet me, neither do you know 
 when to look for me. You s^.y that you want something positive 
 from me, which both you and my people would be able to depend 
 upon ; that if I do not give it unto you, that neither you nor my 
 people will know when to look for me, and that you wilf all be 
 taken unawares, and, consequently, be found altogether unpre- 
 pared -to meet me. 
 
 2. Should such be the case, you think that I, and not my peo- 
 ple, ought to bear the blame; for you say that my people have 
 already prepared themselves once or twice to meet me, and I dis- 
 appointed them. Therefore, they do not know when to look for 
 me unless I give unto them a positive statement with regard to the 
 time of my coming, and, even if I should do that, you say that my 
 people would not place confidence in what I should say ; that they 
 would expect to be disappointed, as they were before; that they 
 would not believe in another promise, should I make one unto 
 them ; that it is of no use whatever for me to make any more 
 promises unto them until I shall have fulfilled those promises 
 which I have already made, and that to do so, is my next duty 
 unto my people. You also say that, inasmuch as I have promised 
 to come and deliver my people, I shall do it ; and such being the 
 case, you wish to know how my people can prepare themselves to 
 meet me when they do not know the time of my coming; that 
 under such circumstances, you can see no other chance for me, 
 than to come upon them unawares ; for you say that they will not 
 be.lieve another promise on that subject on any consideration 
 whatever. Therefore, you wish to know what course I am about 
 to take with them, in order to give unto them a true knowledge of 
 the time of my coming. 
 
 3. I told my people, some time ago, to keep themselves neat 
 ^and clean, and to watch for me until I come, and all those who 
 
 have observed that commandment, and will continue to do so, will 
 not be taken unawares ; but those of my people who have not kept 
 that commandment will be taken unawares. If my people are 
 wise, a- hint unto them is sufficient. 
 
 4. The hour of my coming is nearer than many of my people 
 
HYPOCRITES. 361 
 
 suppose that it is. I shall not tell my people to prepare for me 
 any more. I have once told them how to prepare themselves to 
 meet me. 1 shall come as a thief in the night upon some of them, 
 and I shall catch them going to sleep ; for when some of my peo- 
 ple little expect me, lo, I come. 
 
 5. Some of my people are already beginning to think that 1 
 am delaying my coming, and their faith is beginning to fail them. 
 It is time for such to begin to look out for me, for I am cording 
 to awaken them. My people being in such a condition is one sign 
 of my coming. I shall come when the faithless least expect me, 
 I shall come as a thief in the night upon the blind and rebellious^ 
 and I fear that there are a few of that kind among my people, 
 They will be caught in a snare ; but the wise and obedient will not 
 be caught in a snare. They will look for me at the right time, 
 and they .will not be disappointed, for my spirit shall guide them 
 aright ; but it will guide none but them. My spirit will remain 
 with the faithful, and lead them into all truth, I shall deliver 
 them, and none else. I shall not come upon them as a thief in 
 the night ; for they will understand. They are my friends, and 
 will not be deceived ; for I am their Shepherd and Defense for- 
 ever; even the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen, 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING HYPOCRITES. 
 
 No. 200. WEBER, UTAH, January nth, 1862. 
 
 i. I HAVE heard your prayer, my son, and I am come to 
 answer it. You greatly desire to know of me the reason why I 
 delay so long the deliverance of my people. I will make it known 
 unto you. I will make known unto you the true situation in which 
 I am placed, as regards my people. The law of heaven compels 
 me to enforce the law of consecration upon them, and deliver 
 those who will abide it, and none else. I called upon all those of 
 my people who were willing to abide that law to consecrate their 
 property ; and nearly all of them, if not entirely all, came forth, 
 gave in their names, and stated the amount of property which they 
 had ; and they signified, both by vote and by deeding their 
 
362 HYPOCRITES. 
 
 property over to me, when called upon to do so, that they would 
 abide that law. But when I sent my servant unto some of them, 
 they would not give up to him any portion of their property. 
 
 2. But behold, I say unto you, O ye hypocrites ! I will have 
 your property, and your lives, also ! Ye cannot mock me ! I did 
 not want you to vote, neither to come and deed over your 
 property to me if you did not intend to give it up when my 
 steward called for it. 
 
 3. There are hypocrites among my people who are worthy of 
 death, and they will have their reward ; for I will give it unto 
 them. They show how much they love my work. They place a 
 greater value upon a little perishable property, than they do upon 
 the principles of eternal truth. But those principles cannot be 
 purchased by them. Such men are unworthy of a standing among 
 the honorable men of the earth. They are men of no principle 
 whatever. There is nothing about them worth saving. They are 
 entirely worthless. They are not equal to honorable devils ; for 
 devils will sometimes keep their word, and, to a certain extent, 
 their fellow devils can depend upon them ; but some of these peo- 
 ple with whom I have to deal, have nothing honorable about them. 
 There is no dependence at all to be placed in them. They are a 
 disgrace to their kind. They are of no use to me, but, instead 
 thereof, they hinder me from coming to deliver the faithful of my 
 people. I have been waiting to try those of whom I was sus- 
 picious, and I am now satisfied concerning them. You do not 
 know them all ; for I have not shown them all unto you. If I 
 were to send my steward unto them for a portion of their property, ^ 
 and wait for a denial, in order that you might know them, it would 
 hinder me for a considerable time from coming to set the faithful 
 of my people free. 
 
 4. And behold, I give unto you a commandment, you shall 
 not suffer any person who has positively denied my steward the 
 privilege of taking a portion of his property for the support of the 
 poor who have consecrated their property both by vote and deed, 
 to stand in the rank with my people when they shall be gathered 
 together to meet me. Such are rejected by me. I am the Lord. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, I will not waste my 
 time in trying the rest of those of whom I am jealous, by sending 
 
HYPOCRITES. 363 
 
 my steward unto them, and waiting for a denial from them ; for it 
 would occupy too much time. I know their intentions as well as 
 if I tried them in that way. Therefore, I shall suffer all those 
 whom I know to be hypocrites, but whom you do not know, to 
 come into the rank with the rest of my people, and I shall sla^ 
 them there. 
 
 6. I shall deliver none but the whole-hearted. I have no more 
 time to spend with hypocrites. I shall now come to give unto all 
 persons their reward. Those hypocrites will speedily find me 
 upon them. They have hindered me for a time, but they shall 
 hinder me no more. I want no more of them. I will now have' 
 their property. Let them blaspheme and gnash their teeth as 
 much as they may, it will avail them nothing. I gave them a fair 
 chance to give up their property honorably ; but they would not. 
 They might have saved their lives, and, in due time, have gained 
 much more property than they now possess. They think that, 
 possibly, I shall never come ; but they need not to think any such 
 thing. Some of those corrupt men who forsook the truth at the 
 beginning of my work, try to comfort themselves with the hope 
 that I shall never come ; but oh ! how they are deceived by the 
 devil! I will now show them their condition. The thing that 
 they have greatly feared is now at their doors. Oh, how they have 
 wished that my servant was a false prophet, and that this work 
 which I have commenced might go down ! When they have seen 
 it prosper, it has cut them to their hearts like daggers. They are 
 now in hell, and their flesh is wasting away from their bones ; for 
 they are cursed ! They have had no pleasure of their lives; but 
 they have been in hell ever since they departed from the truth, and 
 their misery has been great. I am now about to send them home 
 to recompense them for all. The ways of transgressors are hard ; 
 but the ways of truth are the ways to true happiness, and those 
 who walk therein are sure to find it. 
 
 7. Lo, I come as a whirlwind, and but few will stand to 
 behold my appearance ; for I shall come as a refiner and purifier, 
 to set my house in order. I am the Lord of Hosts. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
364 RICHARD COOK AND JOHN BANKS. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING RICHARD COOK AND 
 JOHN BANKS. 
 
 No. 201. WEBER, UTAH, January i4th, 1862. 
 
 1. LISTEN unto me, my son, for I am about to speak unto 
 you concerning my servants Richard Cook and John Banks. 
 There are hard feelings existing between them. They do not see 
 alike ; neither do they work in union ; they are not one in me. 
 What shall I do with them ? They cannot fill those offices which 
 I have appointed unto them. They allow small things to throw ' 
 them into confusion, and thereby it causes great disunion to exist 
 not only with them, but throughout the Camp. When my people 
 see a contentious spirit with those men, they are very apt to par- 
 take of it. When a contentious spirit controls men who are at the 
 head of my Church, that same spirit runs throughout the body of 
 the people. They all feel its influence, more or less. Those men 
 who stand at the head of my Church should watch themselves. 
 They should watch that spirit, and guard against it ; or, if they do 
 not, they will soon do more injury than they have ever done good. 
 I will not suffer that spirit to exist in my Church ; if I do, my 
 Church will be destroyed at once. 
 
 2. My servants should know better than to give way to such 
 a spirit as that; for, by so doing, they become my greatest enemies, 
 and I shall be compelled to cast them off. I .shall not allow that 
 spirit to remain among my people. If my servants will not put 
 that spirit away from them, I will .yisjt them, and I will remove it, 
 and I will remove them with it. I will not suffer that spirit to 
 have a place in my Church. I called them to be counsellors to 
 my servant Joseph, to assist him ; but if ( they give way to that 
 contentious and aspiring spirit, they will very soon become his most 
 bitter enemies, and fight against the truth, and strive to destroy it. 
 They would do this if they were permitted to proceed ; but I will 
 stop that spirit, if they dp not stop it themselves. They know 
 better than to give way to such a spirit as that. It would soon 
 destroy my work if I should suffer it to exist ; but I shall stop it 
 immediately, if I am compelled to remove those two men to do 
 
RICHARD COOK AND JOHN BANKS. 365 
 
 so. It would be better to slay them, and thereby stop that spirit, 
 than to let it continue until it had taken possession of all these 
 people, and then be compelled to destroy them ; but I shall not do 
 that. If I am compelled to destroy any person, I shall destroy 
 those who first gave way to it. 
 
 3. I will watch those two men, and if they do not cast that 
 spirit from them, I shall come as a whirlwind and destroy them. 
 They may decide on what they intend to do. They know my will 
 concerning them. They shall not destroy my people. If I am 
 compelled to destroy them, I shall call others to take their posi- 
 tions. I can perform my work without the assistance of quarrel- 
 some and contentious men. 
 
 4. As concerning my servant Richard Cook, he suffers the 
 the things of this world to twine around his heart until he is en- 
 tirely unfitted for the office which I have appointed him. He 
 seeks to evade the truth as it is. He seeks to soften it to suit the 
 people ; and he has not preached the law of consecration in its 
 right spirit. He has sought to evade the truth. He is afraid of 
 hurting the feelings of my people, and thus he is operating against 
 me and the truth as it is. He is doing an injury to the truth; 
 he seeks to take the face of it and pervert it even to soften it to 
 suit the people. He has not preached my gospel in its true spirit. 
 He is afraid that he may hurt the feelings of the people. He has 
 not yet gained possession of the right spirit of my gospel in its ful- 
 ness. His worldly substance twines around his heart, and holds 
 him as with fetters of iron ; and he has never had the power to 
 break loose from it. His heart seems to be bound up in this 
 world's goods, until it appears that he cannot break the bonds that 
 bind him; and when he attempts to preach my gospel, he preaches 
 like a man in bonds. He has to watch himself lest he should go 
 too far. If he feels that my spirit is about to lead him out a little 
 further than he desires to go, he will either stop or take up another 
 subject ; and in that way he will quench my spirit and force it 
 away from him; this is preaching my gospel in bonds. Those 
 who do this are men who will not let my spirit dictate them ; but 
 they war against it ; they will only go so far ; they are determined 
 to lead my spirit instead of being led by it. 
 
 5. My servant Richard Cook is doing great injury to my peo- 
 
366 RICHARD COOK AND JOHN BANKS. 
 
 pie by the course which he has taken. He has not consecrated 
 his property with all his heart. He is still in bonds. I have not, 
 as yet, accepted of his offering. He has not done it with all his 
 heart ; and he is holding others from doing it. He is fearful. He 
 is afraid that I shall never come and deliver my people ; but he 
 need not be. I can assure him that I shall come too soon for 
 him if he does not make an acceptable offering, and rid him- 
 self of that spirit which is gradually destroying him. Let him rise 
 up like a man and prepare himself; and let him not show such 
 weakness. He understands the principles of my gospel ; but he 
 acts very inconsistently. If he would use his judgment, he would 
 not act as he does. If he desires to become useful unto the 
 perishing children of Adam, let him consecrate his property in a 
 lawful manner, so that he can be accepted of me, and live through 
 the day of my power ; and let him place himself in such a position 
 that he can preach my gospel freely, and not in bonds, for I do 
 not accept of any such preaching. He has spent months of his 
 precious time, just through suffering the things of this world to 
 twine around his heart until it is so hard for him to liberate him- 
 self. O how hard it is for those of this, world who have riches to 
 obey my law. Their riches will canker with them. Therefore, 
 let my servant' Richard Cook give heed unto my words, and 
 obey them, that it may be we 1 ! with him when I come; for lo, 
 I come quickly. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 6. And behold, I speak unto you, my son, concerning my ser- 
 vant John Banks. He has preached my gospel in its true spirit ; 
 but there are some things about him which are not right. He has 
 a very stubborn will. He is not very humble. He must guard 
 against his natural temper ; it causes him to go to extremes ; and 
 when he starts on a wrong course, it is difficult to set him right 
 again. He is not an humble man. He is not easily persuaded. 
 It is very hard for him to control his own nature. If he does not 
 strive to overcome his temper, it will lead him to destruction. 
 When he goes wrong, he must be informed of it. His temper will 
 not change my laws. He will be compelled either to submit to 
 be put right when he is wrong, or be destroyed. Therefore let him 
 guard against his temper, and be humble, so that my servant can 
 work with him in a pleasant manner. I know that he feels very 
 
RICHARD COOK AND JOHN BANKS. 367 
 
 important, so much so, that he thinks that my servant, the prophet, 
 can hardly teach him anything. He thinks that he' is about equal 
 in knowledge with the prophet ; but he need not think this. His 
 knowledge is but trifling when compared with the knowledge of 
 my servant, the prophet, whose wisdom circumscribes not only the_ 
 wisdom of my servant John Banks, but that of all the world. The 
 wise men of the earth are fools compared with him. Therefore, 
 let no man upon the earth think that they are his equal ; for they 
 are not ; when they think so, they are deceived by the devil, and 
 they know not what they are doing. 
 
 7. I know my servant John Banks. I know the intentions of 
 his heart. He does not like to concede to a man and acknowl- 
 edge him as his superior ; but he will be compelled to do it now; 
 for I will uphold my servant, the prophet, and I will destroy every 
 person who opposes him. I do not care who they are; I will 
 uphold all men in their rights. I will never uphold one man in 
 in taking away another man's rights. If anything happens which 
 appears to operate against the feelings of niy servant John, he 
 rises up against it at once. It does not make any difference 
 whether it is right or wrong, if he thinks that it is wrong, he is 
 satisfied. When he has given his judgment upon any subject, he 
 thinks that it should be an end to all controversy. It is very hard 
 for a prophet to deal with a disposition of this kind ; such a dis- 
 position is assuming; it will place itself in the judgment seat. 
 Such a spirit will lead a person down to destruction if they do not 
 overcome it. It would be well if men knew the spirit that is 
 leading them. That spirit which will not be in subjection to the 
 man who holds the keys of my kingdom, and thinks itself equal 
 to my servant, is not of me ; but it is the spirit of Lucifer. Be 
 aware of that spirit ; for those who invite it will be led down to 
 destuction. Therefore, let those, my servants, humble themselves 
 before me, and do as I have commanded them Let them cast 
 far away from them that rebellious and aspiring spirit which is 
 breeding confusion among them, and let them work together in 
 union ; or, if they do not, I shall suddenly visit them, as I have 
 promised them. They know better than to act as they have done. 
 They could not act much worse if they went to work purposely to 
 destroy my work. I am much displeased with them. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
368 THE REBELLIOUS. 
 
 THE PEOPLE ARE INSTRUCTED NOT TO POLLUTE 
 
 THEMSELVES BY USING THE PROPERTY 
 
 OF THE REBELLIOUS. 
 
 No. 202. WEBER, UTAH, January i5th, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my servant Joseph, I see the 
 true position in which I am placed with these people whom I have 
 gathered together. I have seen their intentions, and I know what 
 they are. With a great many of my people I am well satisfied, 
 and I require no more of them. But there are some who are fear- 
 ful they are afraid to trust themselves in my hands ; but they are 
 in my hands continually, and they cannot get out of them, either 
 in this world or in the spirit worlds ; for I shall never loose them, 
 let them go wherever they may, and I shall not fail to bring them 
 to my terms, either- in this world or some other. I shall not fail 
 to do the work unto which my Father appointed me. I can 
 humble the rebellious when I set about it. 
 
 2. There, are a few individuals among my people who have 
 consecrated their property both by vote and deed ; but they have 
 not, as yet, consecrated it in their hearts. They are, in their 
 hearts, holding on to it, and think that they will wait for a short 
 time to see what I will do, and they say that they will do nothing 
 more than they have done, until they shall have seen a manifesta- 
 tion of power from me; that when they shall have seen it, they 
 will consecrate their property in a proper and lawful manner ; but, 
 until then, they think that they will hold on to their property. 
 
 3. Behold, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am about to speak 
 unto those people who reason in the manner which I have 
 described. What do you think that I want with your property? 
 Your property is as filthy rags unto me ! I would not touch it 
 with one of -my fingers ! It is as filthy as you ' are it is cursed, 
 and so are you. It is not your property that I want, for you own 
 none ; it does not belong to you. You are thieves in your hearts. 
 You hold fast to that which does not belong to you. There is no 
 thief that is willing to let go that which he has stolen ; it sticks as 
 close to him as his own heart's blood. To separate a thief from 
 
THE REBELLIOUS AND THEIR PROPERTY. 369 
 
 stolen property, you must first destroy him, and then you can take, 
 unmolested, the property which he has stolen. This is the way in 
 which I shalfact with those thieves who are in the midst of my 
 people. I shall take them, and the property which they hold will 
 be left. But neither I, nor the faithful of my people, will need a- 
 particle of it. 
 
 4. The poor of my people will have more property than they 
 will know what to do with without touching their (so called) cursed 
 property. I shall not slay them because I need the property which 
 they hold. I will take care that none of the faithful of my people 
 pollute their hands with it. The property which has life, that they 
 hold in their possession, shall perish with them. It shall follow 
 them into the spirit worlds, and they can have it there. They will 
 die for it, and they ought to have it. They were one with it in 
 life, and in death they shall not be separated, only while it shall 
 have time to die and follow them. And oh, what a joyful meeting 
 it will be when they and their property meet together again ! A 
 man will then be able to say to his horse : " O, how I love thee ! 
 How near thou art to my heart ! I died for thee. Nothing could 
 separate us while in mortality, and nothing shall separate us here I 
 I shall never forget the many times that I have ridden thee, and 
 the many happy times which we have spent together; and now 
 thou hast followed me, we will again have many happy days 
 together. O, how I love thee ! No tofrigue can tell the love which 
 I have for thee. We are one, and we will never be separated. 
 Thou art mine, and I am thine to all eternity. We have lived and 
 died together. We are one in very deed. Thou art one in me, 
 and I am one in thee. Who are like unto us ? " 
 
 5. Oh, ye idolaters ! How can you inherit my kingdom upon 
 the earth? But you will say. that you are not idolators. I say 
 that you are, and that, too, of the worst kind. You have sinned 
 against a fulness of light. How can you escape my judgment? 
 But you will say that you have not seen much. You will deny 
 the sight of your own eyes. You are in the gall of bitterness, and 
 in the bonds of iniquity. You will not acknowledge the truth. 
 There is no such thing as convincing you of it. You will deny 
 that the sun shines when you see it. 
 
 6. I am now speaking figuratively in order to show you your true 
 
370 THE REBELLIOUS. 
 
 character. The individual that will deny the work which you have 
 embraced, will deny that the sun shines when he sees it. Eyesight 
 is of no use to him, neither are his senses ; for he will deny that 
 he knows anything. Such people have a delusive spirit that will 
 deny all the truth that comes from heaven. It is the spirit of the 
 devil; and for a saint who is possessed by such a spirit there is no 
 help. Such a spirit cannot be cast away from him while in mor- 
 tality. He has to be slain to separate him from it. All those who 
 have yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel, and after- 
 wards turn away from it, become possessed by such spirits, and 
 will be destroyed in the flesh. Those who deny the keys of the 
 holy priesthood and the revelations which I have given, deny both 
 me and my Father, and also the Holy Ghost, with all that is good. 
 Let my people be aware of that spirit ; for if they partake of it, it 
 is sure death unto them. 
 
 7. My people know that I have committed the full keys of the 
 holy priesthood to the earth. But the devil strives very hard to 
 make those of my people, whom he can get near enough to to influ- 
 ence, believe that they know nothing either about me, nor the keys 
 of the holy priesthood. He strives to make them deny all truth, 
 and to believe that there is no God, neither any hereafter. In this 
 way he leads men to destruction. 
 
 8. Do my people know anything about me? Yes, they do. 
 If the devil has not blinded their minds, they know that they have 
 the full keys of the holy priesthood in their midst. Have I not 
 protected those who have yielded obedience to my gospel ? Have 
 I not commenced a work in their midst, and gathered them here 
 from almost all parts of this Territory? Have I rot opened the 
 last seal? Have I not upheld my people in every respect, accord- 
 ing to my promises ? If they know anything at all, they know that 
 I have. If all this, is true, my people are compelled to trust me 
 for the future ; for as sure as I have fulfilled all my promises, in 
 their times and seasons, while my people have been in weakness, 
 which I could fulfil, so sure I shall fulfil those promises which 
 pertain to the giving unto my people the power over their enemies, 
 and establishing my kingdom upon the earth never more to be 
 prevailed against ; but to break down all other kingdoms, and to 
 stand forever. This is the power which I am about to give unto 
 my people. I am the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
THE WEAK AND FAITHLESS. 371 
 
 THE LORD INFORMS HIS PEOPLE THAT THE LAW 
 
 OF HEAVEN COMPELS HIM TO LABOR 
 
 WITH THE WEAK AND FAITHLESS 
 
 BEFORE HE CAN LAWFULLY 
 
 DESTROY THEM. 
 
 .No. 203. WEBER, UTAH, January i5th, 1862. 
 
 1. I WISH to speak unto you, my son, concerning my people. 
 I can assure you that there are some of them who are unprepared 
 to meet me. A few of them have been very backward in coming 
 to my terms. They have not consecrated with all their hearts, 
 and I have been laboring with them. I am compelled by the law 
 of heaven to labor with those who are weak and backward, to 
 show unto them the truth as it is, and to leave them without 
 excuse ; and if they will not turn round after I have done my 
 duty to them, and shown mercy unto them to the extent of the 
 law, -I can justly destroy them. This is what has held me so long 
 from my people ; but if they had all come to my terms at the first, 
 I should have had nothing to wait for, and I should have delivered 
 my people weeks ago. Those of them who came to my terms at 
 the first, have been called to suffer the inconveniences incident to 
 such circumstances as, at the present time, they are called to 
 endure, which are very painful unto them, and which, for some 
 time past, have caused them so much suffering indeed, the faith- 
 ful have always had to suffer on account of the wicked. 
 
 2. My people are all together, both the innocent and the guilty, 
 and while such is the case, and until the guilty shall have filled up 
 their cup, the innocent must suffer with them; but when the guilty 
 shall be destroyed, the faithful will be delivered. I will not hold 
 the faithful of my people in pain and suffering any longer on their 
 account than while I can settle my affairs with those few hypocrites 
 who are among them. 
 
 3. My bowels yearn for the faithful of my people. I see their 
 sufferings, and I long to come to their release. I will work as fast 
 as I can with those hypocrites to bring them to that point where I 
 shall be able either to save them, or lawfully destroy them, and I 
 
372 THE UNFAITHFUL. 
 
 may say that I have about done so, and I am coming speedily to 
 my people. Let them raise their drooping spirits and keep on the 
 lookout for me ; for I shall come and release them. They will 
 then be satisfied, and their joy will be full, for I shall abundantly 
 reward them for all the sufferings which they have endured in this 
 place. Let them keep their spirits up ; for lo, I come quickly ; 
 even the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE CLERK IS COMMANDED TO OBLITERATE THE 
 
 NAMES OF APOSTATES FROM THE 
 
 RECORD BOOK. 
 
 No. 204. WEBER, UTAH, January iyth, 1862. 
 
 1. I AM COME to speak unto you again, my servant, for I am 
 compelled, through the difficult circumstances in which my people 
 are placed, to speak unto you often, in order to bear them up- and, 
 even by so doing, I can scarcely create faith within them. They 
 let their spirits droop in spite of all that I can do in that respect. 
 They want to see a manifestation of my pow r er, and they say in 
 their feelings that their minds would then be forever at rest ; and 
 that nothing short of that will satisfy them. Oh, how they are 
 afflicted in their minds ! They fear that I shall leave them to 
 perish. If they could only feel satisfied in their minds that I shall 
 come and release them, according to my promise, they would wait 
 contented ; but they fear that I shall not come, and that is the 
 cause of all their trouble. 
 
 2. What can I do to satisfy them? A promise from me would 
 not pacify their feelings to any great extent. They will never be 
 satisfied until I come. I know that I cannot satisfy them by 
 promises ; but I have a better way than that wherein to satisfy 
 them, and I wish to hold the faithful of them together until I can 
 lawfully do so. My people know my situation, for I have told it 
 unto them often enough. I have to work by law, and I cannot 
 deviate from it. I cannot come unto them immediately ; there- 
 fore, I have to take a course to hold them together, until I can 
 
THE UNFAITHFUL. 373 
 
 come. I shall not stay away from them one minute after the law 
 of heaven permits me to come unto them. It is very hard for me 
 to deal with mortals ; for they are ignorant of the law of heaven, 
 and they can see little or nothing but their own situation. I will 
 take care of my faithful people, and I will delivet them in time. 
 I will put no more upon them than what they are able to bear. I 
 know how to treat mortals, and I do not put any more upon them 
 than what they ought to bear. I am their Judge. 
 
 3. Some of my people are in better circumstances than others 
 are, and they have suffered but little inconvenience ; but others 
 have suffered much. My people have not all suffered alike; and 
 those who have suffered the least have been the first to give way 
 and to depart from the truth ; but I will yet try them as they were 
 never tried upon this earth, and, either living or dead, I will make 
 them endure the trial from which they have shrunk. It would 
 have been better for them to have endured it, and thereby to have 
 saved their lives. There is is a trial which lies before all of Abra- 
 ham's seed, and, either living or dead, they will have to endure it. 
 People need net to think that they can ward off that trial, and 
 shun it, for they cannot ; it will come. 
 
 4. I shall speedily try those who yielded obedience unto my 
 gospel, and, in order to shun the trial which lay before them, have 
 forsaken me and denied the truth. I will bring a trial upon them 
 which will waste them all away. Those who unrighteously seek to 
 save their lives will lose them. When my people forsake the truth, 
 the devil makes them believe that I shall never come ; but I shall 
 speedily convince them that they are in the devil's hands, and that 
 he has deceived them. All is now -over with some of them, 
 and others will soon be in the same condition, for they have, 
 already, denied the truth in their hearts ; but they are not, as yet, 
 fully known among my people. Now is the trying time, and it will 
 take away all the useless and corrupt-hearted from among them. 
 Nothing will be left but the whole-hearted, and I will take care of 
 them. 
 
 5. When they begin to fail, I will (as they call it) take the 
 screws off them. The lightest material will be blown away first ; 
 but when the good begins to go, I shall stop the mill. I shall 
 
 ' save all the good, and only blow away the chaff. This I am com- 
 
374 THE UNFAITHFUL. 
 
 pelled to do. I know all those who are worth saving. Should I 
 save the lives' of the hypocrites, they would do me no good ; but, 
 on the contrary, they would fight against me. I know better than 
 to save their lives. I shall purge them out. I shall not deliver 
 one of them, if they remain among the faithful of my people 
 undetected^ and gather with them in the rank to meet me, I shall 
 slay them there. But previous to that time, I shall purge out as 
 many of them as I possibly can. But the time allotted to me for 
 that purpose is now almost spent. I have forced a number of 
 them out, and my servant, the clerk, must blot out their names 
 from the list which contains the names of those who have yielded 
 obedience to the fulness of my gospel, in order that those who 
 shall be appointed to that work may not get into confusion when 
 they shall call over the names of my people as they place them in 
 the rank to meet me. 
 
 6. I do not want any more hypocrites in the, rank than what I 
 can well avoid. It would be so painful to the faithful to see them 
 slain while standing in their midst; therefore, I will purge out as 
 many of them* as I possibly can. I have not sufficient time to 
 purge out many more; for I shall be compelled to come and 
 release the faithful of my people. They have arrived at the far 
 end, and it is impossible for me to remain away from them much 
 lunger. I am coming unto them in time, according to my word. 
 They can endure this week out, for it is nearly spent, and soon 
 after it shall be quite spent, I will come. The faithful of my peo- 
 ple can endure that much longer. 
 
 7. I have been compelled to delay the deliverance of rny peo- 
 ple so long as I have done, on account of the hypocrites who are 
 in their midst ; but now I have about done with them, and when I 
 shall have entirely done with them, it will be a great relief to me. 
 O, how I long to meet with my people ! I want to come unto 
 them as much as they want to see me, and I am coming after this 
 present week shall be spent. My coming is that near. 
 
 8. My people now know how to preparte themselves to meet 
 me. I shall tell them the .time of my coming no nearer at present. 
 I know that they cannot exist as they now are ; it is impossible. 
 
 9. I will now show those hypocrites their mistake. The devil 
 has persuaded them that I shall never come; but oh, how he has 
 
THE SUFFERING POOR. 375 
 
 fooled them ! They would not believe what I told them ; but they 
 would rather believe the devil. But they shall now see who told 
 them the truth. I cannot save the lives of some people ; for they 
 would sooner believe the devil than they would believe me, because 
 they love lies better than they love the truth. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Light and Life of the world ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET IS INSTRUCTED HOW TO RELIEVE 
 
 THE SUFFERING POOR AMONG THE 
 
 PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 205. WEBER, UTAH, January i8th, 1862. 
 
 i. You WISH to know what you are to do with the poorest of 
 my people even those who are suffering the most. It is right for 
 my people to bear burdens according to their strength, so that 
 they may be equal. ButT have not brought them to the point 
 yet ; neither can I do so while they remain in weakness. I have 
 gone as far with them as I can go at present. I do not expect so 
 much from them now as I shall require of them when I shall have 
 given them the power of the gospel ; they will then have to abide 
 that portion of my law which they would not now be able to abide. 
 I have only, as yet, given unto them the first law of my kingdom, 
 and a number of them cannot endure even that. Such being the 
 case, what would they do should I give unto them the whole 
 law? They could not endure it as they now are, and I know 
 better than tc force it upon them. I have only tried them, as 
 yet, with the first law. But after the power of my gospel shall be 
 given, they will have to abide the full law. Therefore, my people 
 ought not to think that I am hard on them, for I am not. I am 
 as gentle and as easy with them as the law of heaven permits me 
 to be. They should not think that I require too much at their 
 hands, seeing that I have revealed unto them the keys of the holy 
 priesthood. The calls which I have made upon them are not 
 
INSTRUCTED NOT TO HARBOR HYPOCRITES. 376 
 
 equal to the knowledge which I have given unto them ; conse- 
 quently they are, even now, in my debt ; therefore, I have not 
 been hard with them. But as they continue to increase in knowl- 
 edge and power, I shall continue to require more at their hands 
 until I have enforced the fulness of my law upon them. They 
 will gradually grow from little to 'more until they can abide it. I 
 shall not bring it all upon them at once; they could not endure 
 it ; therefore, I shall work with them gradually, and in such a way 
 that the faithful and whole hearted can endure it none else can 
 inherit my kingdom upon the earth. I shall save the lives of all 
 those who are worthy not one of them will be destroyed. 
 
 2. My people need not to fret when they see people leaving 
 them ; for none will leave but those whom I have rejected. They 
 were cast off because they were unworthy before me. Mine angels 
 would not abide with them, because they could do nothing with 
 them ; consequently, they cast them off, and gave them up to 
 devils, whose company they invited, and they have led them to 
 destruction. I shall reject none but the hypocrites whom I can 
 do nothing with; all such I shall cast off, for no idolater can 
 inherit my kingdom. Mine angels claim the right to rule Abra- 
 ham's seed in mortality, whom they either lead to salvation or cast 
 off and destroy. Therefore, the faithful of my people must not 
 fret on account of those whom I have cast off. No matter how 
 closely they may be connected with them, they must withdraw 
 from them altogether, and let them go, and not take sides with 
 them; or, if they do, they will partake of their influence, and go to 
 destruction with them. They must not let any person abide in 
 their house who has denied the revelations which I have given ; 
 for I have rejected such persons, and their names are down for 
 destruction ; and if any of my people open their doors and admit 
 them into their house, I will cast them off, also ; for that spirit 
 which denies me and my Father, and the Holy Ghost, shall not 
 have an abiding place with the faithful of my people; I will not 
 suffer it. 
 
 3. My people now know my mind concerning that spirit. My 
 people are ignorant, and they do not know how to detect delusive 
 spirits. They are very easy overcome by them. That spirit which 
 will lead a person to deny the revelations that I have given, is the 
 
THE SUFFERING POOR. 377 
 
 spirit of Lucifer, and it will deny me and all truth. If there are 
 any such among the faithful of my people, let them withdraw from 
 them, for they are not of me ; I have rejected them, and I will 
 reject all those who open their doors to admit any into their houses, 
 or even sympathize with them. When they are doing so, they are 
 sympathizing with the devil, and are my most bitter enemies. 
 They are enemies to all truth. When they open their doors to let 
 a delusive spirit into their house, it proves that they are one with 
 it ; if they were not, they would not be willing to admit it into 
 their house. A person is known by the company he keeps. 
 Therefore, let all my faithful people guard against false spirits if 
 they wish to save their own lives; for if they do not, they will lose 
 them. I am the Lord. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the poor of 
 my people. It is very difficult for them to obtain either wood or 
 provisions. My eyes are upon all these things. They are now in 
 great need of wood. What shall I do with the poor of my peo- 
 ple, seeing that this is the case? And not only this, but some of 
 them have very unpleasant places to live in, and they are very 
 uncomfortable indeed. What shall I do for them to relieve them 
 speedily? I will tell you. As I am about to come speedily, and 
 as my people will not need their meeting tent much more, it would 
 be well if the poorest of my people, even those who are the most 
 uncomfortable, would move into it after my people have held their 
 Sunday and Monday meetings ; for my people will not meet 
 much longer in that tent. It will accommodate a great many 
 poor families for a few days. In this way they will have a speedy 
 relief. ' They can then use their old houses for fire wood. 
 
 5. After I have delivered my people, and while they are pre- 
 paring to move to the central point in this Territory, even the 
 place which is appointed by me for the gathering place, they can 
 make use of tfreir old houses for fire wood while they remain in 
 this place. But they must not remain in this place any longer 
 than they can help after I have moved their enemies out of their 
 way. Lo, I come quickly. I am the Lord of Hosts; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen, 
 
37^ CONCERNING APOSTATES. 
 
 REVELATION INSTRUCTING THE PROPHET HOW 
 TO DEAL WITH APOSTATES. 
 
 No. 206. WEBER, UTAH, January ipth, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am come to speak 
 unto you concerning those people who have denied the truth, and 
 whom I have rejected. They are going about from place to place 
 among my people, and are striving to destroy them. My people 
 are not able to detect their false spirit; and if great care is not 
 taken, a number of them will be overcome by it. If they sympa- 
 thize with it, it will obtain power over them, and consequently 
 some of them might have to be slain, who otherwise might be 
 saved. Satan seeks to deceive, and lead my people to destruction. 
 They know him not. There are some of my people who have 
 sympathized with a false spirit, and it is now laying hold of them ; 
 and if they do -not humble themselves before me, they will be over- 
 come, for I will cast them off; and before they are aware of it, 
 they will be destroyed. 
 
 2. My people should know that a spirit which denies the reve- 
 lations which come from my mouth, is of the devil; for I shall 
 never deny my own words. My spirit is a spirit of truth. It is 
 true in all its movements, and it leads into all truth. It will not 
 contradict that which I have spoken ; but it will confirm my word. 
 It is one with me in all things ; we are not divided. When those 
 who have yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel, and 
 afterwards deny the truth, go forth among my people to deceive, 
 and lead them to destruction, they strive to make them believe 
 that they are good, honest, intelligent, and truthful saints, and that 
 they know too much to be deceived. Thus, with their lying 
 mouths, and with poison under their tongues, they go from place 
 to place seeking to deceive my faithful people ; and by deceiving 
 them, and leading a delusive spirit upon them, they cause their 
 death, and thus become murderers of the foulest kind. Through 
 their hellish guile they lay traps for the destruction of the innocent. 
 They are most mean, hellish and corrupt of all people who expect 
 to obtain a resurrection from the dead. They labor with all their 
 
APOSTATES. 379 
 
 might to shed innocent blood, and thus they are instruments in 
 the devil's hands to destroy the lives of Adam's faithful children. 
 Such murderers must be watched, and, at all hazards, be cast out 
 from among my people ; for it would be better to take their lives 
 than to permit them to deceive and destroy the innocent, which 
 they would do, should they be permitted to continue in their 
 present course. 
 
 3. And behold, I give unto you a commandment, you shall 
 stop the wicked course of those apostates, even should you have 
 to put them to death in order to do so. You need not to fear any 
 authority in this Territory, nor yet in the United States.; for I will 
 uphold and sustain you in doing so. I am now coming unto you, 
 myself, to give unto you the power of your office. I shall be with 
 you before you shall have had much, if any, trouble with apostates. 
 I now deliver them into your hands, and you must deal with them 
 as I have commanded you. I am the Stone and Shepherd of 
 Israel, the Bright and Morning Star. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 THE PEOPLE ARE INSTRUCTED TO HOLD SMALL 
 
 MEETINGS AT VARIOUS PLACES IN 
 
 THE CAMP. 
 
 No. 207. WEBER, UTAH, January 22nd, 1862. 
 
 i. I AM COME to speak unto you again, my son. You see 
 that things are drawing to a close in this place with my people. 
 They have apparently destroyed their public meeting room 
 families are moving into it. My people seem determined to force 
 me out of my hiding place to deliver them. They now have no 
 place where, under any circumstance, they can be assembled; and 
 I perceive that I shall be compelled to come, for they cannot 
 remain here in their present condition ; something must be done. 
 Therefore, my son, you see that I must now come in order to 
 make my promises good. But, at present, there is much confusion 
 in the Camp. Hard feelings exist in the minds of some of my 
 
380 THE WEAK AND FAITHLESS. 
 
 people against each other. Let them make their wrongs right, 
 and become properly united. There must be no contention 
 among them. They must deal justly with each other. They 
 must put away from them all selfishness, and every one must love 
 his brother as himself. If they will cultivate that spirit, there will 
 be no confusion or hard feelings among them. They must 
 do this in order to prepare themselves to meet me; for, as I 
 have said, I am speedily coming. Satan seeks to stir up con- 
 tention among them, and to bring them into confusion, in order 
 that he may destroy them. Some of them are very weak and 
 short-sighted ; they suffer him to gain the upperhand of them in 
 almost every frivolous thing that crosses their path. What can I 
 do with such weak and short-sighted people ? They are a con- 
 stant trouble to me and to the faithful among my people. They 
 cannot, beforehand, see the result of the smallest act of their lives. 
 They cannot see anything but the -object which they wish to gain. 
 They do not consider the results which necessarily follow their acts. 
 
 2. But how blessed are they who can see into the future, who 
 are endowed with the gift of fore-knowledge, who are peace- 
 makers ; for the reward of their labors shall be given unto them. 
 They shall inherit perfect peace. They shall find great treasures 
 of knowledge. They shall inherit the good things of the earth 
 when the wicked are cut off; for my sole delight is in them. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you complain of 
 not having the power to govern my people. You say that you are 
 nearly run over by some of them ; that they will do as they choose 
 to do, and that you cannot help yourself; and you wish to know 
 what you are to do with such men. You must keep your eye 
 upon them. If they do not go among my people to strive to 
 destroy them, you need not to trouble yourself about them, but 
 let them do as they choose. If they wish to go to destruction, 
 they may do so ; but they shall not have the liberty to run at 
 large among my people to give the devil power over them. 
 
 4. There are a few among my people who are rebellious, and 
 you can do no good by counselling them, for they will not obey 
 you. I know them, and when I come I will send them to their 
 graves ; until then, you may let them take their own course ; but 
 they must not be permitted to go abroad among the faithful of 
 
THE REBELLIOUS. 381 
 
 my people to seek to infuse their poisonous influence into their 
 minds in order to destroy them. Srch a wicked act I will not 
 endure from them. If they commit it, they shall instantly die. I 
 am the Lord. 
 
 5. And as I have said unto you before, my people have 
 destroyed their public meeting room. They have no place where- 
 in to meet together, even to hear the revelations read which I 
 shall give from this time until I come. I shall speak unto them 
 several times more, and I wish them to pay diligent heed to what 
 I shall say unto them. I shall come unto them in time to release 
 them. But before that time, I want to reveal a few more im- 
 portant things unto them as fast as I can coveniently do so. 
 
 6. They must humble themselves greatly before me, for they 
 need great humility. I am about to talk unto them in a plain and 
 pointed manner, and I shall search their hearts, and find out their 
 full intentions ; and if there are any among them who cannot sac/ 
 rifice all things for the gospel's sake, they will fall by the hands of 
 the destroying angels ; for I cannot deliver any person who can- 
 not make a full and complete sacrifice of all things. My people 
 should lay these things to heart, and try themselves thereby, and 
 see if they can make such a sacrifice. If they cannot do this, 
 they may conclude that there is no deliverance for them ; but, on 
 the other hand, sudden death. I deal honestly with them. I tell 
 them what I can do, and what I cannot do. They may depend 
 upon what I say. I do not want to deceive them ; neither do I 
 want them to deceive themselves. They can save their lives by 
 doing what the law requires ; but, otherwise they cannot. 
 
 7. The law is about to be enforced upon my people; there- 
 fore, I want them to understand it as it is. They cannot get 
 around it. They need not think that they can. When the law 
 is presented to a people, life and death is also presented to them ; 
 for, to obey it, is life ; but to reject it, is death. I fear much for 
 some of my people ; for they are determined to run in the face of 
 the law, and think that they will not be slain. They need not to 
 think any such thing ; for, if I cannot convince them to the con- 
 trary by my word, I shall convince them by my power when I 
 come. They are like the unthinking horse that rushes into battle 
 and is destroyed. I want to save the lives of as many of my peo- 
 
382 THE PEOPLE MUST HEAR THE REVELATIONS. 
 
 pie as I possibly can. If they had as much thought for them- 
 selves as I have for them, not one of them would lose their lives 
 through transgression. But they do not think about what they are 
 doing. O how they permit the devil to deceive them ! They may 
 think that L do not tell the truth ; but I do. They work against 
 common sense. Their intellects are of no use to them. They act 
 as though their heads were of less value to them than a turnip. 
 They could make some use of a turnip; for when they were 
 hungry they could eat it ; but their heads are of no use to them. 
 Their legs have carried such heads about long enough. It is time 
 that they were lying in their graves, where I shall soon send them. 
 I shall deal honestly with my people whether it be in saving their 
 lives, or destroying them. 
 
 8. And behold, I say unto you, my son, inasmuch as you 
 have no place wherein to assemble with my people, to read unto 
 them the revelations which I shall give unto them, you must use 
 your own judgment in relation to this matter. You must, by 
 some means, let all my people hear the revelations as I shall give 
 them unto you. Do the best that you can. It would be well 
 for my people to assemble themselves in small numbers through- 
 out the camp, to hold meetings, and thereby seek to edify 
 and build each other up. In this way they must endeavor to 
 strengthen each other for a few days until I come. I shall come 
 speedily to their release. They may keep on the lookout for me. 
 I am the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONTAINING AN OATH TO BE SWORN 
 
 BY THOSE WHO HAVE YIELDED OBEDIENCE 
 
 TO THE FULNESS OF THE GOSPEL. 
 
 No. 208. WEBER, UTAH, January 23rd, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am about to 
 divide these people whom I have gathered together. I am about 
 to cast some of 'them off. I will now lay a stumbling-block before 
 
THE FAITHLESS. 383 
 
 them. I have trifled with them long enough, and I will now 
 purge the false-hearted from among the faithful of my people. I 
 I am astonished at them ! They show how much they appreciate 
 the blessings which I have conferred upon them. Oh, the sin of 
 ingratitude which they have committed against me ! But they 
 shall meet with their reward. They are so afraid of me that they 
 cannot do their own duties. They are so afflicted with fear that 
 they have no pleasure of their lives. They are afraid to make the 
 least move, lest they should lose something which would never 
 again be replaced. Such fearful people are of no use to me. I 
 can do very well. without their assistance. They are a constant 
 burden unto themselves. They make their lives miserable by their 
 dark forebodings, and they are continually striving to post them- 
 selves up against a failure. O, what faith they have in the full 
 keys of the holy priesthood which they know that they have 
 received ! O, how they insult me with their wickedness ! I can 
 make nothing of them. They fear that I shall never come to 
 deliver my people. They are not willing to risk all for the light 
 which they have received, as hundreds of others have done. They 
 say that they want to see t>he power of my gospel, and that, then, 
 they will consecrate. I have given unto them the full keys of the 
 holy priesthood, and I have called upon them for but little, as yet. 
 I only called upon them to consecrate their property, and to make 
 a complete offering up in their hearts of all they possessed. I did 
 not intend to take it all away from them until I had given unto 
 them a manifestation of my power, and, even after that, they will 
 need means to live upon, if they abide my law. 
 
 2. After I shall have committed unto my people the power of 
 my gospel, I shall commence to give unto each of them a steward- 
 ship ; but I shall not do this while my Church is in weakness. I 
 only call for a sacrifice, in the heart, of all that people have, and 
 if these people had made such a complete sacrifice, they would not 
 have withheld their property when I sent my steward for only a 
 small portion of it. If they withheld a little from him when I sent 
 him for it, it proves that they are hypocrites, and that they had 
 never, in their hearts, consecrated a particle of it ; if they had done 
 so, they would have allowed my steward to take not only a little, 
 but all that they had, and they would not have offered one word 
 
384 THE HYPOCRITES. 
 
 of complaint. If my steward had met with a person of this kind, 
 he would have said at once: "That person has consecrated in 
 his heart, and that is enough. He shall retain his property. He 
 has fulfilled the law, and I shall only take a little from him now, 
 for he will let his property go whenever it is called for. He is 
 willing either to hold it, or to let it go ; therefore, it is right for 
 him to hold it as it seemeth me good." I, the Lord, can work 
 with such a person. He is willing to obey me in all things. He 
 is not an idolator. He loves the truth above all things ; he can 
 sacrifice everything else for it. Such persons I have accepted, and 
 they shall inherit the earth and possess wealth in .abundance, until 
 their souls are satisfied. 
 
 3. O ye hypocrites and deceivers ! I need not to look to you 
 for help. I have sent my steward unto you to try you, and I am 
 now satisfied concerning you. I did not want much of your 
 property to assist the poor before I came to deliver the faithful of 
 my people ; but I wanted to try you who profess to have conse- 
 crated your property. 
 
 4. The hypocrites may fl.ee away to save their lives ; but I will 
 follow them up and slay them, no matter where they go. They 
 need not to think that they can save their lives by running away. 
 They are as safe here as they would be in any other place. They 
 cannot run away from me. I am about ready to recompense 
 them. I am bringing things to a point as fast as I can. They 
 are working at a rapid rate. I am now about to draw the dividing 
 line between the hypocrites and my faithful people. The hypo- 
 crites, though they have not seen me, begin to tremble already ; 
 but I can tell them that they will tremble when I come. 
 
 5. The inhabitants of this Territory may begin to prepare 
 themselves for a visit from my destroying angels, who will speedily 
 lay dead about one-half of the inhabitants of this Territory. They 
 need not to think that they can get out of my way, and shun my 
 judgments, for they cannot. When I come, one of the first things 
 that I shall do will be to weed that little crop. But I shall not 
 hurt the whole-hearted. I know them ; they are mine, and I will 
 separate them from the false-hearted. My people know what I 
 require of them. They might as well humble themselves, and 
 obey my law, and thereby save their lives, as to rebel against it, 
 
THE RICH SHOULD ASSIST THE POOR. 385 
 
 and lose them. If they had allowed my steward to take that por- 
 tion of their property which he called for, for the support of my 
 poor, it would have been all that I required of them at that time. 
 I did not want to strip them of all that they had until the law 
 should be put in full force, which cannot be until I shall have- 
 delivered my people. I have only, as yet, been showing unto 
 them the nature of that law, and I shall not call upon them to keep 
 it fully until I give unto them a stewardship. But I want the rich 
 of my people to hand out their substance to feed the poor, now 
 that it is needed ; for it will not be needed when I have delivered 
 all the spoil of mine enemies into their hands. Now is the time, 
 and not after their deliverance, that the poor of my people need 
 assistance. If those of my people who are in good circumstances 
 wish to do good, let them help the poor who are in their midst, 
 and not keep their property from them until I come ; for then they 
 will not need it. They will have an abundance of property, even 
 more than they will be able to take care of. If the wealthy of my 
 people cannot assist the poor who are in their midst, their property 
 is of no use to me ; for if I ever need the property of the rich, I 
 need it to feed and clothe the poor, when the poor need it; and if 
 the rich cannot deliver it into my hands when I can use it to good 
 advantage, I do not want it at all. If persons wish to do good to 
 their fellow creatures, it should be' when they are needy, even when 
 they can appreciate a favor. They will not need the assistance of 
 the rich when they become rich themselves. Therefore, if the 
 rich who are now among my people cannbt assist their poor 
 brethren while they need assistance, the poor of my people will 
 have nothing to thank them for. But I will bless the poor abund- 
 antly with the good things of the earth ; for my sole delight is in 
 them; they are my chosen ones; they have no earthly object 
 which twines around their hearts ; their dependence is in me ; the 
 truth is all in all with them ; they are my chosen people, and they 
 shall inherit the earth forever. The rich I need not to look to for 
 much ; for if I do, I shall be disappointed. The poor are my 
 hope, and I will raise them up, and make them the head over all 
 things, and the rich who are permitted to live shall serve them. I 
 will bring down their high heads, even to the ground ; for I am the 
 Lord. I resist the proud, and exalt the poor and humble. 
 
386 PRESIDENT OF THE AARONIC PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 6. And behold, I speak unto you concerning the president of 
 the priesthood of Aaron. It is his duty to be the first steward 
 over all temporal matters, under the direction of the presidency 
 of the Melchisedec priesthood, and also to meet with them in 
 counsel from time to time, to report unto them the state of tem- 
 poral affairs among my people. He shall receive counsel from 
 them upon all important matters. He shall not have the power 
 to make such calls upon the rich for the support of the poor as he 
 may think fit ; but he shall receive his authority from the presi- 
 dency of the high priesthood. He shall make no call upon the 
 rich of my people for property, until he has first obtained permis- 
 sion from them, and when he does so, he shall receive a note from 
 them signed by their hands, and he shall present the note, or 
 notes, to the person, or persons, unto whom he shall apply for 
 property to assist the poor, in order that no undue and unreason- 
 able calls shall be made upon the more wealthy of my people. 
 Every precaution must be taken against wrong, in order that all 
 things among my people may be conducted in truth and honesty. 
 Behold, I am the Lord, and I do not censure my servant, the 
 bishop, for being dishonest. He has been very diligent, and faith- 
 ful in his office, and he is not blamable. I am well pleased with 
 his course. I cannot bring about a perfect organization all at 
 once ; but I have to do it gradually. I have not givtn these in- 
 structions because the bishop has done wrong; but because it is 
 the order of the priesthood. He must consult the presidency of 
 the high priesthood upon all important matters; for this is his 
 duty. 
 
 7. And now, behold, I speak unto you again concerning my 
 people, and I make known unto you what I require at the hands 
 of all those whom I shall deliver. I require of them that they 
 shall take an oath in my presence, in the presence of my holy 
 angels, and in the presence of my servant, the prophet, and his 
 counsellor, or counsellors, as the case may be. I shall be present 
 when my people are called upon to take that oath, and I shall 
 deliver none but those of my people who will take that oath in all 
 honesty and sincerity of heart. I do not wish a hypocrite to swear 
 that oath, lest I should consume him in a minute; for I will not 
 suffer hypocrites to swear that oath. When my people shall be 
 
THE PEOPLE WILL BE TRIED. 387 
 
 called to swear it, they shall stand in my presence, and in the 
 presence of my holy angels. Although I may not show myself 
 unto them at that time, yet they may feel my power penetrate them 
 to their innermost souls. They will feel that I am there, though 
 they do not see me; for I shall smite hypocrites dead if they 
 come there to stand in my presence to mock me. I will speak 
 unto you again^ and make known unto you the time when you 
 shall call my people together to take that oath. I will try my 
 people's honesty. You need not to care how many of them rise 
 up against you at that time ; for I will stand by your side, and 
 should all the world be against you, I am more than a match for 
 them. I could lay the whole earth desolate in a few minutes, 
 should it be necessary. I am not to be mocked by hypocrites. 
 I will speedily perform an act that will awaken those who are 
 asleep in this Territory. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 8. And ndw, behold, I give unto you the oath which my peo- 
 ple shall swear in my presence, in the presence of my holy angels, 
 and also in the presence of you, and of your counsellors ; and all 
 those people who do not swear this oath, shall have their names 
 taken off of the list, and they shall not stand in the rank with my 
 faithful people. The male, or female, shall stand before you and 
 your counsellors, and express the following words: "I, the ser- 
 vant (or hand maiden) of the Lord; present myself before him, 
 and his servants, on this solemn occasion, to swear an oath in 
 their presence. And I hereby swear that I will abide all the 
 laws which he shall reveal unto his people while I remain upon the 
 earth, at the peril of my life ; and that I will faithfully abide all 
 the counsels of the Lord which he has already given, and which 
 he shall hereafter give through his servant, the prophet ; and that 
 I will walk blamelessly before the Lord until the day of my death. 
 This oath I swear in the presence of the Lord, of his holy angels, 
 and of his servants, who are my witnesses that I have bound my- 
 self unto the Lord by an oath which cannot be broken." After 
 repeating these words he (or she) shall kiss the written word of the 
 Lord. No person can, after having sworn this oath, and broken 
 it, live upon the earth ; for death is the penalty for breaking this 
 oath. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE OATH. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE MANNER IN WHICH 
 
 THE OATH SHALL BE ADMINISTERED 
 
 TO THE PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 209. WEBER, UTAH, January 25th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, it is lawful for all of 
 Abraham's seed to swear the oath whicft I have now placed before 
 these few people who have yielded obedience to the fulness of my 
 gospel; and all people who shall hereafter enter into my Church, 
 under the fulness of my gospel, shall swear that oath, or they shall 
 have no part in my kingdom. None shall have a place in my 
 Church who will not take that oath. When the fulness of my 
 holy priesthood was upon the earth among the children of Israel, 
 they all took that oath before I delivered them. The law of 
 heaven forbade me to deliver them until they had taken it. It is 
 an oath which has to be sworn by two-thirds of Adam's posterity. 
 They swore it while in their first estate in the presence of their 
 father, Adam. But the other third would not swear it ; and, on 
 that account, their names were blotted out of the Lamb's Book of 
 Life. They would not sustain the principles of righteousness; 
 but they set themselves against them. They would not abide the 
 law of the Lord, and consequently they have neither part nor lot 
 with him. They are under another power ; and they labor to 
 destroy all truth and righteousness. Those of my people who 
 will not swear the oath, partake of the influence of the devil, and 
 lend him their assistance to destroy those same principles of truth 
 and righteousness which they, in their first estate, swore to sus- 
 tain. Those of therA who are the children of Adam, swore it upon 
 this earth when it was in its first estate ; and those of them who 
 are high priests, swore it in the presence of their Fathers on earths 
 which have become celestial. All those who are heirs to the resur- 
 rection have sworn an oath in the presence of their father, Adam, 
 to uphold every principle of truth and righteousness ; and if they 
 fail to do so, they forfeit their mortal existence. And inasmuch 
 as two-thirds of Adam's children swore an oath in their first-estate, 
 and bound themselves unto their father to uphold all truth and 
 
CONCERNING THE OATH. 389 
 
 righteousness ; so in like manner they will, again, be called upon 
 to swear the same oath while in mortality; and if they will not 
 swear it when it is presented to them, they are traitors, and are 
 guilty of treason against the government of God ; and all such I 
 
 shall slay ; for I am compelled by law to do so. I slew all the 
 
 children of Israel who were guilty of treason against my govern- 
 ment. Not one of them who were guilty of that crime ever escaped 
 my judgments. 
 
 2. My people must humble themselves greatly before rne, and 
 mind what they are doing. They are now approaching my laws, 
 and they need to be solemn, and very careful lest they should 
 break one of them, and be slain. They need not to think that I 
 deal hard with them. If I enforce a law upon them, it is no more 
 than what both I and my holy angels abide we abide a perfect 
 law, and we never break it in the least degree. I do not call upon 
 my people to do a thing which I do not do myself. I do .much 
 more than I shall ever require at their hands while they are 
 clothed with -mortality. I require nothing more of mortals than 
 what they are well able to live up to, if they will exert themselves 
 to do $o ; but if they suffer themselves to go to sleep, the smallest 
 duty is a trouble to them ; even the smallest requirement which 
 the gospel makes upon them is too much for them to attend to. 
 A person who is asleep, and without energy, is of no worth. He 
 will turn around and deny all truth on account of his laziness and 
 dishonesty. He is not worthy to bear the name of a man. What 
 are such men good for? They are too lazy to carry their worthless 
 bodies about with them, and I promise them that I will speedily 
 relieve them of that burden. 
 
 3. I am very sorry that I have such worthless people to deal 
 with. I am compelled to make use of language suitable to their 
 cases. I have to make myself appear very low, in consequence of 
 being compelled to use very common-place language in order to 
 deal with, and describe, such unprincipled and worthless people as 
 some of my people are. But after all that I can do, in showing 
 unto them their foolishness, I cannot put them to shame. They are 
 as presumtious, blind, rebellious and wicked as the devil himself. 
 Language will not penetrate them at all. I have tried that method 
 with them, and it is all to no purpose ; but I will penetrate them. 
 
390 CONCERNING THE OATH. 
 
 I shall not be afflicted by them but a few more days, at the 
 furthest. I shall soon assemble my people to take the oath, and 
 as soon as they are well through with that matter, I will come. I 
 have nothing whatever to wait for after that business is well over, 
 and all things are arranged. 
 
 4. I will reveal unto you the manner in which you shall admin- 
 ister the oath unto my people. You must commence with the 
 high priesthood, and when you shall have administered it unto 
 them, you must administer it unto the priests of Aaron. After 
 them, you shall call upon the women in their order, as you shall 
 have called upon the men in their order, commencing with your 
 own wife ; and lastly, you shall call upon the boys who have been 
 baptized, but not ordained. When you call upon my people to 
 swear the oath, as many as twelve persons may stand before you at 
 a time; and when either you, or one of your counsellors (as the 
 case may be), stand before them to administer the oath unto them, 
 those who are assembled shall repeat the oath, word by word, after 
 the person administering, and after they have repeated it, they 
 shall come to one of my servants who shall hold the book of reve- 
 lations in his hand, and they shall kiss it, one by one. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you must be there 
 yourself. You need not administer the oath unto my people your- 
 self, unless you feel disposed to do so. You may have the privi- 
 lege to call upon one of your counsellors to administer the oath in 
 your stead, and I will sanction it as though you administered it 
 yourself. If you authorize another, he acts under you, and the 
 thing done, is as though you had done it yourself. I am the Lord 
 of Hosts. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, I will speak unto 
 you again, and make known unto you the way and manner in 
 which you shall arrange all things relating to the affair which now 
 lies before you. Be of good courage ; for I am with you. I am 
 the Lord of Hosts; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen, 
 
INSTRUCTED TO PREPARE TO SWEAR THE OATH. 391 
 
 REVELATION INSTRUCTING THE PEOPLE TO SET- 
 TLE ALL DIFFICULTIES, AND PREPARE THEM- 
 SELVES TO SWEAR THE OATH. 
 
 No. 210. WEBER, UTAH, January 2yth, 1862. 
 
 1. I WISH to speak unto you, my son, concerning my people. 
 Insasmuch as I am about to call upon them to take an oath, it is 
 necessary that they should bring themselves to perfect order, and 
 to settle all their difficulties with each other. They must do so 
 before they come into my presence, or I will cast them off. I will 
 not suffer stubborn and rebellious people to take that oath. Those 
 who swear it must be very humble and submissive, so that I can 
 deal with them. They must have no hardness of feeling towards 
 each other. If they wish to be accepted of me, they must put 
 from them all such feelings, and become one. I want none 
 but the honest and humble. Such I can deal with; but I 
 can do nothing with the proud and rebellious but destroy them, 
 which I shall do. Therefore, if there are any in the midst of my 
 people who have hard feelings against their brethren, or sisters, let 
 them make such things right, and become one with them, in me. 
 They need not to present themselves before me and my holy 
 angels to take the oath if they will not first do as I command 
 them. They will now know my mind concerning them. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, when you call upon 
 my people to stand before you to take the oath, you shall put the 
 following questions to them : "Are you who present yourselves 
 before me on this solemn occasion at perfect peace with each 
 other?" "Are you willing to be united according to the require- 
 ments of the gospel of Jesus Christ even to become one in him?" 
 And when you have put these questions to them, they shall all 
 express their feelings ; and should there be any standing before 
 you who shall not be able to satisfactorily answer these questions 
 in truth and honesty before me, you must command them to stand 
 on one side ; they must not take the oath, for they are rejected by 
 me. Therefore, let my people prepare themselves in a proper 
 manner to answer the questions, and to take the oath. Those who 
 
392 . CONCERNING THE OATH. " 
 
 
 
 
 
 intend to keep my law, and become members of my kingdom, 
 need to be preparing themselves to take the oath in order that they 
 may not be cast off when they present themselves before me ; for 
 they will then have no time to do so ; it will then be too late. 
 Therefore, let them prepare themselves in time, that it may be well 
 with them. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, as soon as my peo- 
 ple shall be well through with taking the oath, I shall come and 
 deliver them. After I shall have finished that business, I shall 
 have nothing more to wait for. You may depend upon what I 
 say unto yon. You understand the signs of the times. To take 
 the oath is the last thing that I shall call upon my people to sub- 
 scribe to, before I come to deliver them. 
 
 4. Let them .gather themselves together, and hold as many 
 meetings as they possibly can until I call upon them to take the 
 oath. And let my servants thoroughly instruct them, so that they 
 may understand what they are about to do, in order that that mat- 
 ter may have a due bearing upon their minds; that they may enter 
 into it understandingly, and not under any false impressions. Let 
 them cultivate my spirit, and it will lead them aright in all things, 
 and strengthen them, and give unto them power to keep my laws 
 as fast as I shall reveal them unto them. If they are willing to 
 invite my holy 'angels to constantly attend them, they will not lack 
 for power to keep my laws. I am all sufficient for them, if they 
 will only cling close to me. If they will be faithful unto me, I 
 will be faithful unto them. My yoke is easy, and my burden is 
 light. Let my people fully prepare themselves for that which lies 
 before them, and all will be well with them. Lo, I come quickly. 
 Even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING NIELS JACOBSEN. 
 
 No. 211. WEBER, UTAH, January 28th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and, according to your 
 request, I speak unto you concerning Niels Jacobsen. I know 
 him. I called him many years ago, while my Church was in weak- 
 
EXCITEMENT. 393 
 
 ness, to preach my gospel, and, in that day he did some good. At 
 times he was overcome, and committed sins before me, which I 
 forgave him. I understand his nature. I knew that he was an 
 excitable person, and that, on account of his excitability, and not 
 because he desired it in his heart, he time after time committed 
 sins, and was thereby led away from me. When he came to his 
 senses, and saw his true position, he would humble himself before 
 me ; and, knowing his nature as I did, I could not do otherwise 
 than forgive him. 
 
 2. Where there is excitement, there is uncertainty. Many 
 people whose hearts were honest, who might have lived upon the 
 earth as shining lights to their fellow creatures, who might have 
 been examples of piety and goodness to all those by whom they 
 weie surrounded, have destroyed their lives by excitement. It has 
 destroyed both them and their talents, and robbed the world of 
 their services, which otherwise might have been of much benefit 
 to the human race. But, alas ! they are gone ; and many others, 
 on account of the same failing, will follow them. It is the greatest 
 failing that mortals have. No matter how many talents a man 
 may possess, or how brilliant they may be, if he has that failing, 
 those talents are rendered worthless. Such men cannot be 
 depended upon ; for, with them, all things are uncertain. Men 
 who are called to hold responsible offices in my Church, must not 
 give way to excited feelings ; but they must strive to overcome 
 them. They must never act under excitement ; but when they act 
 they must be calm and deliberate, and thus allow all their senses 
 to operate at the same time, and what they do, will be done ac- 
 cording to their best judgment, and they will be justified before me. 
 
 3. All people have not judgment alike some have better 
 judgment than others. All people who are heirs to the resurrec- 
 tion will, sooner or later, have to regulate themselves, and their 
 judgments, by my words. I am their Chief Judge, and they must 
 regulate themselves by me. Their senses and judgments must all 
 be swallowed up in mine; this is their duty. But if they will not 
 do it, I will not hold them guiltless. Their judgment is worthless, 
 unless they regulate it by mine. I am the Lord of Hosts. But 
 when men are excited, they neither regulate themselves by my 
 words, nor use their own judgments. They can only see one 
 
394 CONCERNING NIELS JACOBSEN. 
 
 object before them. They do not think of the consequences 
 which may follow their reckless course, and consequently they 
 are doomed to suffer bitterly in this world. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I speak unto you again concerning Niels 
 Jacobsen. I called him into the fulness of my gospel, and gave 
 unto him an honorable place among my people. He might have 
 prospered in his office and calling among them, and have gained 
 to himself a name that would never have perished from the earth ; 
 but through excitement, he turned traitor to me and to my work, 
 and sought to do me an injury. He knew not what he was doing. 
 He has fought against his best friend ; and he now has no friend 
 upon the earth, who can befriend him in the least degree, if I am 
 not his friend. What can I do with him? He is miserable. Can 
 I restore him to his former office as an apostle ? No, I cannot. 
 He has broken the covenant which he made with me when I con- 
 ferred the apostleship upon him. Before he was ordained to the 
 office of an apostle, he covenanted with me in the presence of all 
 my people that he would be true to his trust ; but now he has 
 betrayed both my confidence and the confidence of my people; 
 and should I restore him to that office, my people would not be 
 able to place confidence in him ; therefore, he cannot be restored 
 to the apostleship. But if he wishes to remain among my people, 
 and will humble himself sincerely, and walk worthily before me, I 
 will forgive him his sins, and he may hold the office of a high 
 priest, and become a member of the high priests quorum ; for that 
 is his birthright. But if he will not accept of the offer which I 
 now make unto him, but will fight against me, I will slay him 
 when I come to deliver my faithful people. If he concludes to 
 humble himself before me, let him make all .his wrongs right. Let 
 him withdraw those false statements which he made to mine 
 enemies, wherein he falsely represented my people, and plant the 
 truth in their stead. This I require at his hands, and if he will do 
 it, I will accept of him. He now knows my mind concerning 
 him. He can do as seemeth him good. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
THE MISSION OF MICHAEL. 395 
 
 REVELATION CONTAINING ITEMS CONCERNING 
 THE POWER OF THE GOSPEL AND THE MIS- 
 SION OF MICHAEL, THE ARCH-ANGEL, 
 TO THE EARTH. 
 
 No. 212. WEBER, UTAH, January 3oth, 1862. 
 
 i. I SEE, my son, that your duties are very burdensome unto 
 you in consequence of continued sickness which has been brought 
 upon you through past hardships which you were compelled* to 
 endure ; you could not possibly have avoided them, for they were 
 connected with your calling. Your office is the highest that ever 
 was conferred upon mortal man upon this earth, and its nature is 
 such that the greatest hardships are connected with it. I see that 
 you are unable to do your duty. You are almost always in pain. 
 Your inward parts are very much injured, and, in consequence 
 thereof, you are unable to fully discharge your duty. I know that 
 you have done all that you possibly could do. What can I do for 
 you, seeing that you are so weak and sickly? I know that no 
 other man can act in your place. Other men may do their own 
 duties ; but they cannot do yours. If all my servants would strive 
 with all their power to do their own duties, they might relieve you 
 to some extent. They are not equally faithful. Some of them do 
 all that they possibly can to assist you ; but others might do more 
 than what they have done if they would exert themselves. My 
 servants cannot write the revelations of my will from my mouth. 
 You could not appoint another in your stead to do this; for it is 
 unlawful, under the fulness of the gospel, to give revelations to 
 any other man ; and I shall not do so until the seventh thousand 
 year is expired, and your mission is ended. But after your mis- 
 sion is ended, I shall work through Michael, the Arch-Angel, until 
 I come to make all things anew and to raise this world from mor- 
 tality to immortality, which will be the last time that I shall come. 
 I shall work through him during the short time which will inter- 
 vene between the time when the seventh angel shall have finished 
 his mission upon the earth and the time of my last coming. That 
 space of time will be very short, and it will be allotted to Michael 
 
396 THE MISSION OF MICHAEL. 
 
 to gather together all of Abraham's seed who will be* living at that 
 time, and to fight the last battle which will be fought in mortality 
 between them, and the false prophet, and his fallen spirits. In 
 that battle all fallen spirits then living upon the earth will be slain 
 by Michael and his angels. And shortly after that battle is fought, 
 I shall make my last appearance upon the earth to make all things 
 anew. The seventh angel will almost finish the work of this 
 dispensation. He will not leave much to be done by Michael ; 
 therefore, Michael will have but a very short mission upon the 
 earth when, for the last time, he comes to act his part to his 
 childen in mortality. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, my servants might 
 assist you in some things. If they cannot help you in one way, 
 they might in another ; every little in this great work will help it 
 on, and ease your burden. Those who love you and the truth will 
 assist you with all their power, which is all that I require at their 
 hands ; but if they will not do this, they are blamabie. If they 
 would only look at you, they would see that you have spent all 
 your strength for them ; that you are so weak that you can scarcely 
 speak unto them at all. No man could do more than what you 
 have done for the seed of Abraham. You have suffered more 
 than ever mortal man suffered before, myself not excepted. I suf- 
 fered greatly while I was upon the earth, and when they crucified 
 me upon a cross ; while it lasted, I suffered as bitterly as you 
 have ever suffered ; but it was soon over. But your sufferings 
 have continued for years, and have been gradually undermining 
 your constitution until they have almost destroyed your physical 
 powers ; you have not had any rest from them ; they are continu- 
 ally gnawing at you while you are held in weakness ; but when I 
 come unto you, I will relieve you at once. I will heal you, and 
 make you perfectly strong, and put all things straight ; but until 
 then, I am compelled to take a certain course with you ; for while 
 I am giving unto you the keys of the holy priesthood and the 
 theory of my gospel, I cannot give unto you the power thereof. 
 I am compelled to confine myself to that branch of the work; and 
 even in doing that I have to reveal unto you one thing at a time. 
 When I shall have given unto you the leading keys of the holy 
 priesthood, the law of heaven will compel me to give unto you the 
 
THE POWER OF THE GOSPEL. 397 
 
 power of your office. My first duty to you was to give unto you 
 the theory of my gospel, and my second duty is to give unto you 
 the power of it ; and I cannot - heal you before I give unto you 
 that power. 
 
 3. When I give unto the children of men the priesthood in 
 part, I give unto them the little power which is connected with it, 
 which is the power to heal the sick, and to cast out devils. When 
 the theory of that priesthood is given, the power connected with it 
 is given at the same time. But such is not the case when the ful- 
 ness of the holy priesthood is given the theory and the power 
 thereof are given at different times. There is a great difference 
 between the priesthood in part and the fulness of the holy priest- 
 hood : one claims all power, and the other claims but little ; each 
 has its lawful and righteous claim ; but one differs altogether from 
 the other in its nature and privileges. 
 
 4. Therefore, I say unto you, my son, it is my will that my 
 servants should assist you as much as lies in their power, and my 
 holy angels shall strengthen them abundantly ; they shall lack for 
 nothing in that respect. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE HIGH PRIESTS ARE COMMANDED TO PRE- 
 PARE THEMSELVES TO PREACH THE 
 FULNESS OF THE GOSPEL. 
 
 No. 213. WEBER, UTAH, February ist, 1862. 
 
 i. You SAY that you want me to come and deliver my people 
 as soon as they shall have taken the oath ; that it appears to you 
 as though that ought to be the last thing to be required of my peo- 
 ple before I come unto them, and that if I do not come as soon 
 as they have done that thing, you can see trouble before you. 
 You think that it. is quite probable that there will be a number of 
 my people who will not take the oath, and should such be the 
 case, that it would bring great confusion into the camp, and bring 
 
398 COMMANDED TO SETTLE ALL DIFFICULT!!*. 
 
 trouble upon you. and that you would want me to come ancHquell 
 it ; for you would be entirely without power to do so. You say 
 that if I require anything more at the hands of my people before I 
 can lawfully come to deliver them, besides taking the oath, you 
 would like me to attend to it now, and to reserve the administra- 
 tion of the oath until the last. ( What can I say unto you concern? 
 ing these matters? I know that you are powerless, and that your 
 whole dependence is in me. I know how you look at things. 
 You see them as they are, to a certain extent ; but you have not, 
 as yet, seen them perfectly. I have only given unto you the lead- 
 ing keys of the holy priesthood, and I have yet many things to 
 reveal unto you, which are connected with those keys ; but I shall 
 not reveal them unto you until after I shall have given unto you 
 the power of your office. The law of heaven only binds me to 
 give unto you the leading keys of the priesthood before I give 
 unto you the power thereof. I have already given unto you those 
 keys, and I could now lawfully come unto you ; but I am waiting 
 for my people to prepare for me. The whole work is waiting for 
 them. They continue to call upon me to come and release them, 
 but they themselves are in <my way. Therefore, let them prepare 
 themselves for me, and when they are ready, I will come. 
 
 2. Let all those of my people who expect to be accepted by 
 me, settle all their difficulties with each other they must do so 
 before I can accept of them. They have not as yet done so. They 
 are slow to hearken unto me and to obey my words. They stand 
 in their own light, and labor against their own interest. I have told 
 them what to do; but they will not do as I have commanded 
 them. They keep me away from them ; for I cannot come until 
 they make themselves ready in the way that I have appointed. 
 The first thing that I require of them is, to settle all their dif- 
 ficulties with each other, and after that, I want them to sit in judg- 
 ment upon their own hearts, and see whether they can honestly 
 swear the oath which I have placed before them, or not. Those 
 of them who can do so, are right in my sight ; but those who can- 
 not, need not attempt to swear it, for they will be rejected. I 
 want my people to be very thoughtful, for this is a solemn time. 
 They will either save their lives,' or lose them, in the enterprise 
 which lies before them. No person who has once yielded obedi- 
 
MANY THINGS TO BE REVEALED. 399 
 
 ence unto the fulness of my gospel can refuse to swear that oath, 
 and afterwards live upon the earth. I will send all traitors home 
 when I come. I shall convince them of the truthfulness of my 
 words at once. They think that I shall never come, and I shall 
 not convince them to the contrary more than one minute before 
 they will all lay dead upon the ground. When I cannot convince 
 people by my word, I can convince them another way. But when 
 I do convince them, it is then too late for them to repent. Oh, 
 the screams, the lamentations, and the groans which will proceed 
 from the dying, and from those who will be left alive to behold 
 the scene ! It will sicken the hearts of the stoutest men upon the 
 earth ! The wicked people of the earth, never would believe me 
 when I spoke concerning them. I have always had to sweep them 
 from the earth, and I shall have to do the same thing now. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you need not to 
 fear those 'who may refuse to take the oath, be they few or many. 
 I will take care of them myself; for I shall be present when they 
 are called upon. I shall take the work into mine own hands, and 
 everything shall go right. I require no more at the hands of my 
 people than to take the oath, and when they shall have done that, 
 I will come. They now know what stands in my way. If they 
 wish me to come, let them do as I have commanded them. Iain 
 the Lord. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, when you assemble 
 my people to take the oath, after having administered it to the 
 apostles, you must administer it to those of the high priests who 
 are willing to swear it. And it would be well if you had a place 
 which would hold as many as one hundred people at a time. And 
 when you have gathered as many people together as will fill the 
 room, you must administer the oath to them, and then dismiss 
 them, and 'call others who have not sworn it. In this manner you 
 must administer it unto all those who are worthy ; and as soon as 
 they shall have sworn it, I will come and release them. I shall 
 soon make known unto you when you shall commence to adminis- 
 ter the oath unto my people. They will very soon be called upon 
 to attend to that business. Let them prepare for it. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts. 
 
 5. And behold, I speak unto you concerning the high priests 
 
400 COMMANDED TO PREPARE TO PREACH THE GOSPEL. 
 
 of my Church. I am about to place a great responsibility upon 
 them. I shall speedily send them throughout the length and 
 breadth of this Territory to gather together those whom I shall 
 leave alive after the first scourge, and the priests of Aaron shall 
 assist them. They will need to be well acquainted with the 
 principles of the fulness of my gospel, so that they may be. fully 
 prepared to teach them to the ignorant. They must be very 
 humble and 'submissive, so that my holy angels may be well able 
 to work through them ; this I require at their hands. Let them 
 avail themselves of every opportunity which presents itself, to learn 
 all that they possibly can ; for they will need it when they are 
 called to go abroad. Let them hearken unto my words, and obey 
 them, and I will be with them unto the end. I am the Stone and 
 Shepherd of Israel, the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION DENOUNCING POLYGAMY AS PRAC- 
 TICED IN THE OLD CHURCH. INSTRUCTIONS 
 FOR THE SETTLEMENT OF FAMILY 
 DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 No. 214. WEBER, UTAH, February 3rd, 1862. 
 
 i. I CALLED upon all my people who intend to take the oath 
 which I have placed before them, to settle all their difficulties with 
 each other before they are called to stand before me to take that 
 oath, and some of them have settled their disputes ; but others of 
 them are backward in doing so. They say in their feelings that 
 they do not see the possibility of becoming reconciled with those 
 who have offended them ; that their grievances are of such a na- 
 ture that they cannot see how they can be settled. They wish to 
 know what to do to satisfy me, and whether, or not, there is any 
 chance for them to do so. There is a chance for them if they 
 will do as I command them. Inasmuch as there are difficulties 
 of long standing existing in families, which difficulties have broken 
 
THE INFLUENCE OF SATAN. 40! 
 
 their peace, and set them one against another, they ought to con- 
 sider that the false and lying influence under which those dif- 
 ficulties were brought about has been the cause of their disunion 
 and miserable grievances with each other. But when I cast the 
 devil and his band out of my Church, their influence will go with 
 them, and will no more exist among my people ; for my spirit will 
 then rule in my kingdom; in it there will be no confusion ; all will 
 be peace, for my people shall have my law to govern them, and I 
 shall continually be with them to take care of them. They will 
 not be left any more to the destroyer as they, for many years past, 
 have been. Such a state of things had to be according to law. 
 While Satan has ruled among my people he has brought them into 
 misery and confusion until they do not know what they are doing. 
 They are in hell. They know nothing but misery. Their lives 
 are a burden to them. They are held by the chains of the devil, 
 and they know not what ails them. They long to be liberated. 
 They feel, at times, as though they were about to be overcome by 
 the current of evil ; for it appears so strong that it almost carries 
 them away with it. Some of my people are almost ready to cease 
 striving against it, and to go with it ; but they ought to know that 
 I am close by their side, and that I will shortly give unto them 
 the victory. I will catch them before they faint. Mine eyes are 
 over them for good, and I will quickly release them. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, my people must 
 consider that they have been under the influence of the devil, 
 and that that influence has caused so much hatred, confusion, 
 division of feelings, and even fornication to exist among them. 
 These are the fruits which have been produced by the evil spirits 
 which have led the people of the old Church ; and those who have 
 yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel are not, as yet, en- 
 tirely free from that influence. Some of them have drunk deeper 
 into it than others have, and have, thereby, given the devil greater 
 power over them, and they cannot be fully liberated until I come 
 in power to set them free. But others of them who have not 
 drunk so deeply into that influence, are partially delivered, so 
 much so that they can have comparative peace in their families, 
 and also with their neighbors ; while others are bound so fast in 
 
4O2 CONCERNING POLYGAMY. 
 
 in the snares of the devil, that they cannot loose themselves ; there- 
 fore, I shall have to liberate them by power. 
 
 3. Those shepherds of the old Church, who were ordained by 
 my servant Joseph Smith, have led my people into all manner of 
 abominations by giving unto them a plurality of wives contrary to 
 my will. I did not command my servant Joseph Smith to teach 
 my people to practice that doctrine. I only made known unto 
 him that such a doctrine belonged to my kingdom. I did not 
 give it as a doctrine to be practiced by the people of my Church 
 while they were in weakness. That doctrine belongs more par- 
 ticularly to the fulness of my gospel. But those people misunder- 
 stood me, and run into it, and they have, thereby, run themselves 
 to destruction. They have filled the Church with adultery by 
 running into that doctrine without authority, and contrary to my 
 will and to the order of my kingdom. I am the Lord, and I do 
 not, in that respect, sanction their works ; for I do not sanction 
 what I have not appointed ; and I do not appoint except by law. 
 
 4. There are those who have yielded obedience to the fulness 
 of my gospel who have been caught in that snare, and, on that 
 account, have had great difficulties to contend with, which they 
 otherwise might have avoided. I never sanctioned those unions ; 
 consequently, nothing but trouble and misfortune have attended 
 them. My people have been called to endure unspeakable misery 
 on that account. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, inasmuch as there 
 are some of my people who are still laboring under these dif- 
 ficulties, who seem to be entirely bound up, and who do not know 
 what to do, I will tell you what I require of them. Let them, as 
 much as they possibly can, forgive each other all past offences ; 
 and if they will do this, I will accept of them ; for I know their 
 situation. This is as far as they can now go towards settling 
 their difficulties ; but when I come, I will fully settle all their dis- 
 putes, and give unto each of them their rights ; but as this cannot 
 be done until I come, let them do as I have commanded, and the 
 remainder I will settle when I come. Lo, I come quickly even 
 the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
AN EXPRESSION. 403 
 
 AN EXPRESSION FROM THE ARMY OF HEAVEN. 
 
 No. 215. WEBER, UTAH, February 4th, 1862. 
 
 i. WE are coming! we are coming! we are coming to war !" 
 We shall make a slaughter. Therefore, look out for us. We are 
 the warriors of heaven, the sons of the Eternal Father, whose right 
 it is to reign. We understand your feelings, and we will speedily 
 set them at rest. Look out for us, for lo, we come, we come, we 
 come quickly even the warriors of heaven. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION DISCLOSING THE INTENTION OF THE 
 
 ENEMY TO DESTROY THE SAINTS IF 
 
 THEY SWEAR THE OATH. 
 
 No. 216. WEBER, UTAH, February 4th, 1862. . 
 
 1. Lo, I COME! I come! I come! even the Lord of Hosts; 
 for mine enemies are on the watch tower, watching the move- 
 ments of my people ; and they say in their hearts, that if my peo- 
 ple take the oath, they will come out upon them, and put them all 
 to death ; that they have endured enough from them, and that 
 they will bear with them no longer. They should say, "If we are 
 not put to death ourselves." I will promise them that they shall 
 not have the power to hurt one of my faithful people; for I will 
 take care of them. I will make mine enemies do what I want 
 them to do. If they will not serve me willingly, I will make them 
 answer mine own purposes. I will bring them to those points 
 which I wish to bring them to. They cannot do anything, except 
 what I permit them to do ; for I control them, even as I control 
 those who are heirs to the resurrection. 
 
 2. My Father has given me the power over all races of people 
 who dwell upon the earth, and they are subject to me. If the 
 wicked will not serve me in one way, I will make them serve me 
 
404 THE BOASTINGS OF THE ENEMY. 
 
 in another ; for I have the power over them. They cannot even 
 move one of their fingers, without my permission. I could, in a 
 few minutes;* lay them all in the dust, where they could not move. 
 Their breath and lives are in my hands. They cannot do the 
 smallest thing without my permission. In vain do they boast of 
 their power and greatness. I will speedily show them what they 
 are, and try how much power they have even as soon as my peo- 
 ple shall have done as I have commanded them. They have 
 boasted of their power, and even challenged the whole world to 
 battle. They are for wiping out (as they call it) everything that 
 crosses their path. But should a few thousands of people come 
 up against them, they would run into the mountains and hide their 
 heads in the clefts of the rocks, or in some other secret place 
 (behind the sage brush, for instance), and they would watch for 
 their enemies with fear and trembling; they would raise their 
 heads and peep out from their hiding place, and if they heard a 
 bush shake with the wind, or from some other cause, they would 
 drop their heads again. O what brave men to challenge the world 
 to battle ! Let them hide their faces in shame ; for they are like 
 the devil who is at their head he is the greatest coward upon the 
 earth ; for if he saw the least danger, he would run fit to break his 
 neck ; and the rest of his band are like him. 
 
 3. If they fight, it must be in secret, where they can take the 
 advantage of their opponent where he has no chance whatever 
 with them; and thus they will slay him. O what champions they 
 are in war ! There is not an honorable act about them. They 
 are rotten and unprincipled in all their actions, like the devil him- 
 self. Rather than to challenge the world to battle, they need to 
 hide their cowardly faces. I will shortly try their strength. I will 
 stop their boasting as soon as my people will open the way for me. 
 My people are now holding me. I cannot come and deliver them 
 until they have sworn the oath. But, seemingly, some of my peo- 
 ple will not settle their difficulties, although I have called upon 
 them several times to do so ; and if they do not very speedily 
 settle them, I will come and accept of those who are ready. All 
 my people are ready to take the oath, with the exception of a few 
 who are stupid and rebellious. They know what to do to satisfy 
 me; but they will not do it. They are gazing all around them, 
 
CONCERNING THE OATH. 405 
 
 and their minds are upon almost everything but what they ought 
 to be upon ; but if they do not heed me now, it will be too late 
 for them to do so ; for I am about to appoint the day for my peo- 
 ple to commence taking the oath. It may take as much as two 
 days to get through that business. Mine enemies are waiting to 
 see it commence, and if they do not then do something, it will 
 be because they cannot. I will take care of them myself, and 
 bring them to the right point. 
 
 4. But behold, I say unto you, my son, I shall be driven to 
 the necessity of coming to release my people as soon as the taking 
 of the oath is well through. I know the feelings of mine enemies 
 towards my people, and I will take them while they are hot. 
 When my people have taken the oath, it will arouse their enemies, 
 and bring them into the right state of mind for me to sweep them 
 off the earth it will stir them up. Therefore, let those of my 
 people who have not settled their difficulties as yet, settle them as 
 soon as they can, that it may be well with them ; for lo, I come, I 
 come, I come quickly; even the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION INSTRUCTING THE SAINTS TO HAVE 
 THEIR WHEAT GROUND. 
 
 No. 217. WEBER, UTAH, February 5th, 1862. 
 
 i. IT WOULD be well for my people to gather up as much 
 wheai as they can, conveniently, and send it to the mill to be 
 ground, in order that they may have sufficient flour to serve them ; 
 for mine enemies are fully set against them. They will strive to 
 use my people up, and even to starve them out. They have it in 
 their hearts to close their grist mills against my people, and not to 
 grind for them. In this way they want to starve them out, and 
 destroy them. They suffered their mills to grind for my people up 
 to this time, continually supposing that they would scatter and 
 come to naught ; but they now see that instead of scattering, they 
 increase in numbers, and become more united. Therefore, mine 
 
406 INSTRUCTED TO HAVE THE WHEAT GROUND. 
 
 enemies consider that they must now take another course to use 
 them up and to put an end to their lives. But their conclusion 
 not to grind any more wheat for my people has come too late. I 
 do not want them to grind much more. They will grind as much 
 as I want them to grind. My people will have sufficient flour to 
 serve them, if ttiey will gather up their wheat and take it to the 
 mill forthwith. Let them get as much wheat ground this week as 
 they can ; for they may not have the chance to get any ground 
 after this present week. If they will do as I have commanded 
 them, they will not lack provisions ; for I will come and place all 
 mills and wheat in their possession before their supplies shall be 
 exhausted. But if they do not send their wheat to the mill and 
 get it ground, they may be brought to want before I deliver them. 
 I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it is my will that 
 my people should settle all their disputes this week ; this I require 
 at their hands. I have told them in time, therefore, let them 
 attend to it ; for lo, I come quickly. I am weary of hearing their 
 murmurings against me on account of my absence from them. I 
 want to come unto them as strongly as they want to see me. I do 
 not stay away from them because I love to afflict them; but because 
 the law of heaven forbids me to come unto them before they have 
 taken the oath, and bound themselves unto me. 
 
 3. Behold, I am Jesus Christ. I swore an oath in the pres- 
 ence of my Father, that I would abide a celestial law; and all the 
 inhabitants of our earth swore the same oath. And we are for- 
 bidden to hold communion with Adam's children while they are in 
 mortality, in a plain and positive manner even as one man holds 
 communion with another until they have bound themselves by an 
 oath unto their father, Adam, as we bound ourselves unto our 
 Father by a celestial law. In order for two persons, one celestial, 
 and the other mortal, to enter into each other's society and hold 
 communion, they must both be bound by an oath to sustain the 
 same cause they must be of one order, holding equal privileges. 
 When my people have taken the oath which I have placed before 
 them, they may have the privilege to behold my face, and the faces 
 of my holy angels. This right they can claim after they have 
 sworn the oath ; but not before. Nevertheless, they will not, even 
 
CONCERNING OATHS. 407 
 
 then, have the privilege of conversing with my holy angels, as they 
 converse with each other; but they may see them occasionally, 
 and speak with them, and know perfectly that they exist. My holy 
 angels have taken three oaths : the first, in their first estate ; the 
 second, in their second estate ; and the third, which is a celestial 
 oath, in their third, or celestial estate. But my people have not, 
 as yet, sworn their second oath ; and how can they expect to be 
 equal with my holy angels, who are so far in the advance of them ? 
 My people will see, at once, that they are a long way behind my 
 holy angels in point of progression. Therefore, let them consider 
 who they are ; and if they want to see me and my holy angels, let 
 them swear the oath which I have placed before them, and they 
 shall both see us and talk with us. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE BLESSINGS TO BE 
 DERIVED FROM SWEARING THE OATH. 
 
 No. 218. WEBER, UTAH, February 6th, 1862. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword; for I am about to speak unto 
 you again concerning *my people. O how anxious they are to see 
 me, and to witness my power. I am as anxious to see them as 
 they possibly can be to see me ; for I am weary of hearing their 
 complaints. I know that they are put to much inconvenience ; 
 and some of them, on account of my delaying my coming, suffer 
 their faith to fail them. But they should know that I cannot come 
 unto them until they are ready to receive me. I have told them 
 what is in my way; and as soon as they have complied with my 
 request, I will come unto them. They have a duty to perform, as 
 well as I have, and why do they not do it ? If they will do their 
 part, I will come and do mine. But the difficulty with them is, 
 that they are backward -io coming forward and acting their own 
 part. They continue to call upon me to come and deliver them, 
 
408 CONCERNING THE OATH. 
 
 which I cannot do, until they have opened the way for me*; but 
 this they will not do within any reasonable time. Through their 
 folly they block up my way, and destroy themselves. What can I 
 do with them ? I require but little from them. I have only called 
 upon them to consecrate their property, and swear an oath of 
 allegiance to the government of heaven. I require nothing from 
 them that is hard, if they are honest. 
 
 2. If they ever expect to be saved and exalted by the govern- 
 ment of heaven, they must sustain it. All people who swear an 
 oath of allegiance to that government, and sustain it with all their 
 power, are sustained by it ; this is just. It will grant unto them 
 eternal life, and exalt them to thrones and dominions, principali- 
 ties and powers, in the presence of the Gods forever. It will place 
 all things in their hands ; for all things are theirs. But there are 
 people who do not take this oath, who will possess nothing ; who 
 will have to endure both the first and the second death ; who are 
 angels of the devil ; and who are doomed to suffer the wrath of 
 God in the lake of fire and brimstone; for they are rebels against 
 the government of God. They rebel against God, and perish by 
 his power. Therefore, let my people be aware of rebelling against 
 my government, lest they, also, perish. I am in duty bound to 
 make all things clear to my people concerning the oath, in order 
 that they may well understand what they are doing. They may 
 now see the advantages to be derived from swearing the oath; and 
 the losses to be sustained from utterly refusing to swear it. But 
 some of my people say in their feelings thafthey would swear the 
 oath, if they were satisfied that I would come and deliver them, 
 after they should have done so. O how fearful and suspicious my 
 people are ! They are afraid to make a move for fear that I 
 should betray them ; but they need not fear to do what I com- 
 mand them, for I shall never betray them. I will shortly show 
 them what they long to see. They must not be excited, but they 
 must be calm, and I will work all things aright ; nothing shall go 
 wrong. They need not fret or be excited about what they may 
 see or hear. All mine enemies are in my hands, and they shall 
 do nothing but what I permit them to do. I am the Lord of 
 Hosts, and lo, I come quickly. , 
 
 3. Mine enemies will work while they have the opportunity 
 
OF 
 
 COMMANDED TO SETTLE ALL DISPUTES. 409 
 
 this right they claim ; 'and I claim the right to stop them when 
 they have gone far enough, and I shall exercise that right. When 
 I permit mine enemies to work, my people ought to be satisfied 
 with what they do ; for they are only doing their duty. I will con- 
 trol them aright. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it would be well if 
 my people would make all their wrongs right, and put everything 
 straight, and hold themselves in readiness to be called upon to 
 swear the oath ; for they will be called upon suddenly. Now is 
 the time for them to settle all their disputes. There may not be 
 many difficulties existing among my people now they have settled 
 many of them. Let those who still have difficulties to settle, 
 settle them as soon as possible, in order that all things may be 
 right with my- people that they may be ready to take the oath 
 when called upon to do so. They have no friend but me ; there- 
 fore, they had better do as I have commanded them, that they 
 may find favor in my sight, and in the sight of all glorified beings ; 
 for we have all power, and independent of us no animated 
 creature exists. We hold in our hands the destinies of all flesh ; 
 and we uphold no one but those who love the law of the Lord, 
 and are willing to be governed by it. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Light and Life of the world ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DRESS OF THE 
 
 PROPHET, AND THE DECORATIONS OF 
 
 THE ROOM IN WHICH THE OATH 
 
 SHALL BE ADMINISTERED. 
 
 No. 219. WEBER, UTAH, February 8th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world, and I am 
 come to speak unto you again. O how restless you are ! You are 
 not willing to give me time to do that which I am compelled by 
 law to do. You ought to know that I cannot come until my peo- 
 ple have finished taking the oath. I am preparing them to take it 
 
410 THE REBELLIOUS. 
 
 as fast as I can. You should blame them, and not me. I am wait- 
 ing for an opening so that I can come ; they prevent me from 
 coming ; they will not, in any reasonable time, open the way for 
 me. But you would say, " Do not wait for those rebellious peo- 
 ple, but come to deliver those who have settled their difficulties, 
 and are well worthy of a deliverance. You cannot see what use 
 it is for me to wait for stubborn and rebellious people ; for you 
 think that, by so doing, I may weary the faithful of my people, 
 and destroy them ; that their patience is already exhausted ; that 
 they will not endure it much longer ; and that it would be better 
 for me to come and accept of those who are ready. By so doing, 
 you think that I may save some." I am not waiting for those that 
 I know will never come to my terms ; but I have been waiting for 
 some of my people who have had difficulties of Ipng standing, 
 which they hardly knew how to settle, until I had made it known 
 unto them. They have had the misfortune to fall into the hands 
 of the destroyer, and drink so deeply into his influence, that it is 
 very difficult for them to separate themselves from it. Such are 
 worthy of a deliverance, and I have been waiting a short time for 
 them ; for I have greatly pitied them. I will not cast them off 
 because of that misfortune ; but I will deliver them. I shall wait 
 for none but those. They are now about ready for me, and lo, I 
 come to their deliverance. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it would be well if 
 you would make all necessary preparations for administering the 
 oath. You have a meeting room which will hold as many as one 
 hundred persons at a time ; and you had better have it white- 
 washed and cleaned as soon as possible, so that it may be respect- 
 able for me and my holy angels to meet in with my people ; for 
 we shall be there. And it would be well for you to have a plat- 
 form made to reach across the room, even fr.om one side of it to 
 the other. And you must also have a desk to reach across the 
 room, to separate you and your counsellors from those who shall 
 present themselves before you to swear the oath. They must 
 stand on one side of the desk, and you and your counsellors on 
 the other side. They shall stand in front of the desk, and face you 
 and your counsellors. One of your counsellors must stand at your 
 right side, and the other at your left side. They shall stand upon 
 
THE MANNER OF TAKING THE OATH. 41 I 
 
 their feet, and one of them shall administer the oath, and the other 
 shall hold the book of revelations in his hand while those who 
 shall have sworn the oath, kiss it, one by one. You shall appoint 
 two men as conductors to assemble the people, and to place them 
 in order before you to swear the oath ; and when one set of per- 
 sons have sworn the oath, those two men shall conduct them to 
 their seats, and bring up another set, and place them in order. 
 Thus they shall continue until all my people who will do so shall 
 have sworn the oath. And a clerk shall be appointed to take the 
 names of all those who shall swear the oath, and he shall sit by the 
 side of the first presidency, in order that all things may be con- 
 ducted in a proper and orderly manner. None of my people shall 
 stand in the rank to meet me but those who shall have sworn the 
 oath. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 3. And I say unto you, when my people are about to swear 
 the oath, you must dress yourself in white linen. You must wear 
 white linen all the time, even from the time that my people shall 
 commence to swear the oath, until they shall have finished. And 
 you must sit upon a seat which must be elevated, between your 
 counsellors, -who must dress themselves well; but they need not 
 dress themselves in white linen no person but you must do that. 
 You must divide your hair into seven parts. I will stand by your 
 side, and you shall know it to your satisfaction. And my people 
 must dress themselves in their best when they shall come to stand 
 before me. I wish them to be as neat and clean as possible when 
 they meet me. I know that some of them are very poor in cloth- 
 ing, but I will supply their needs at once. I am not ashamed of 
 the poor and honest, no matter how poor they are in clothing and 
 other useful things. I will supply their needs in every respect. I 
 am the Lord. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, as soon as the administering 
 of the oath is well through, you may begin to look for me ; for 
 mine enemies may force me to come in a hurry. I shall permit 
 them to come to this place, if they wish to do so. Behold, I say 
 unto you, my son, the taking of the oath will very likely stir them 
 up. But whether they come against my people, or not, I will 
 deliver the faithful as soon as they are well through swearing the 
 oath. If they come, it will be all right ; and if they do not come, 
 
412 HANS PETER SMITH CALLED. 
 
 it will be equally right. I shall slay them, no matter where they 
 may be. They have done enough. I am not waiting for them to 
 do any more ; but I am waiting for my people. 
 
 5. I shall soon show unto you the place which I have conse- 
 crated, on which you must stand when you raise your rod and give 
 the command. It is not very far from your own door. I know 
 that you want to see me, as much as you possibly can do ; and I 
 want to satify you. I do not like to hear you murmur against me 
 so much. Therefore, prepare for me ; for lo, I come. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CALLING HANS PETER SMITH TO 
 THE APOSTLESHIP. 
 
 No. 220. WEBER, UTAH, February zoth, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I am come to speak unto 
 you concerning the apostleship. Inasmuch as there is a vacant 
 place in that quorum which needs filling, it would be well if you 
 would fill it ; for I am about to administer the oath unto my peo- 
 ple. But before I do so, I want that quorum complete as far as 
 it has yet been organized. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, you shall call and ordain 
 my servant Hans Peter Smith to the office of an apostle ; for he is 
 worthy before me. His heart is right in my sight. I know his in- 
 tentions. He has sought to serve me with all his heart, and I, the 
 Lord, have great confidence in him ; and through his faithfulness 
 he may bring many thousands to a knowledge of the truth. He 
 may gain to himself a name that will never be forgotten by those 
 who may be closely connected with him that the tide of time 
 will never wear away; but that will be renewed by succeeding 
 generations, down to the end of time. He will need no monu- 
 ments erecting in memory of his name ; for his good deeds will be 
 handed down from generation to generation. I am the Lord, and 
 through his faithfulness I will be with him until his mission is 
 ended ; and he shall live upon the earth as long as he shall desire. 
 
THE OATH. 413 
 
 
 
 He shall have all the power granted unto him which he may ask 
 for, to enable" him to fill the responsible mission which may be ap- 
 pointed unto him ; for I am the Lord, and I have confidence in 
 him. Therefore, let him accept of this appointment, and all will 
 be well with him. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you must call a 
 meeting of the Danish saints as soon as you can, and place him 
 before them, and ordain him to the office of an apostle, as I have 
 commanded ; for lo, 1 come quickly. I am the Lord of Hosts ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE DAY APPOINTED ON WHICH TO SWEAR 
 THE OATH. 
 
 No. 221. WEBER, UTAH, February nth, 1862. 
 
 i. You SEE trouble around you, my son; but I am as near 
 unto you as your enemies are. I will make them do what I want 
 them to do. My people need not fear them, for I am leading them, 
 and they shall not have power to do anything except what I per- 
 mit them to do. They want to arrest some of my people. They 
 consider that they have been imposed upon by them. But I will 
 show them their weakness. I will confound them, and, by that 
 means, I shall work them up until they will be very apt to assem- 
 ble all their forces, and come up against my people, if I do not 
 prevent them. I will promise them that, if they intend to come 
 up against my people in a proper manner, they will have to do" it 
 speedily ; for I shall come and cut them off as soon as my people 
 shall'have finished swearing the oath; but, until then, I will hold 
 them so that they shall not have power to injure one of my faithful 
 people. Nevertheless, I call upon my people to do what they can 
 to hinder mine enemies from taking any of my people prisoners, 
 if, in order to do so, they shall have to slay them. They can pre- 
 vent a few of mine enemies from doing so, even without my assist- 
 ance ; and this they must do. I only call upon my people to do 
 
 that which they are able to do, and what they cannot do, I 
 will do. 
 
414 A DAY APPOINTED. 
 
 % 
 
 2. If you can make all things ready for my people to com- 
 mence taking the oath to-morrow, do so, and I will come and 
 stand by your side. I shall be ready as soon as you. You need 
 not linger, supposing that I am not ready, for I am, and waiting 
 for you. As soon as my people shall have taken the oath, my way 
 will be clear. But if you cannot make all things ready to com- 
 mence administering the oath to-morrow, you must begin the fol- 
 lowing day ; for you must not linger. I will do my part never 
 fear. Therefore, as soon as you can make all things ready, com- 
 mence, and I will be there with you ; and mine angels shall guard 
 this place while my people shall be taking the oath ; they will keep 
 everything quiet in this Fort. I am the Lord of Hosts. And inas- 
 much as mine enemies are now on the move, it would be well if 
 you would get through your work as soon as possible, in order 
 that I may be set at liberty. I will baffle my people no more 
 with mine enemies after they shall have finished taking the oath. 
 Let them prepare themselves ; for lo, I come. I am Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET COMMANDED TO ADMINSTER THE 
 
 OATHS OF THE HIGH PRIESTHOOD 
 
 TO THE HIGH PRIESTS. 
 
 No. 222. WEBER, UTAH, February i3th, 1862. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto me, my son, for I am about to speak unto 
 you concerning the high priests of my Church. I am well 
 pleased with my people for the prompt and faithful manner 
 in which they came forward and swore the oath which I placed 
 before them. I was present myself, and I saw every person who 
 took the oath. My holy angels guarded this place, and kept every- 
 thing quiet. My people are about through with the taking of the 
 oath. There may be a few who were absent when the main body 
 of my people were taking it, and if they are one with them, they 
 had better come to this place as soon as they can, and swear that 
 oath ; but if they are not, they need not come and present them- 
 
THE HIGH PRIESTS' OATH. 415 
 
 selves before me to do so. Those who have not sworn the oath, 
 but who intend to do so, will need to hurry, or they may not have 
 the opportunity to do so before I come out in power. They have 
 no time to lose. I have told you that you must not suffer any 
 person to come into the rank but those who have taken the oath. 
 Those few stragglers will understand me. If they are one with 
 the body of my people, let them come to this place forthwith ; but 
 if they are not, they may remain where they are, and I will 
 promise them that, when I come, I will lay them low. I will show 
 them the traitor's doom. When people have yielded obedience 
 unto the fulness of my gospel, they have no right to leave this 
 place, and go to live among mine enemies ; they might as well 
 never obey my gospel, as to do so ; for they cannot keep the faith 
 and live among mine enemies. I have but little hope of such per- 
 sons. They are neither hot nor cold. They are very likely to 
 turn traitors to me. They are not valiant either for me or for the 
 devil. They are good for nothing on either side; therefore, I 
 place no dependence in them. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, the high priests of 
 my Church must swear another oath before I deliver my faithful 
 people, and send them through this Territory to preach the fulness 
 of my gospel. They have not, as yet, sworn an oath of the holy 
 priesthood. They have only sworn the oath which belongs to the 
 sons and daughters of Aaron. The high priests are compelled by 
 law to first swear that oath, and, by so doing, acknowledge the 
 lesser priesthood. If they did not do so, they could never have 
 the privilege granted unto them to swear the oath of the holy 
 priesthood. There is no priesthood without an oath; and the 
 greater has always to acknowledge the lesser. The children of 
 Aaron have to swear one oath in mortality ; but the high priests 
 have to swear two. All high priests have to acknowledge the 
 priesthood of Aaron by swearing the oath which belongs to it; but 
 inasmuch as all high priests cannot be upon the earth in mortality 
 while the fulness of the holy priesthood is upon the earth, those 
 high priests who are upon the earth will stand for those high priests 
 who are in the spirit worlds, and act for them ; and what they do 
 in their stead, will be as valid as though they were here to act for 
 themselves. All high priests cannot be upon the earth and act 
 
4i 6 THE HIGH PRIESTS' OATH. 
 
 their part in mortality at the same time. Their duties are on this 
 earth and in the spirit worlds. They are rightly divided. There 
 are some of them upon every earth where Adam's children are 
 living; for it is their duty to save Adam's covenant children. But 
 when the first resurrection is about to commence, they will all 
 leave their fields of labor for a short time and come forth upon 
 this earth with their resurrected bodies, and commence it ; and 
 when they are through with that duty, they will return again to 
 their various fields of labor. 
 
 3. And now, behold, I say unto you, my son, you must 
 assemble the high priests, and administer unto them the second 
 oath even the oath which belongs to the holy priesthood. You 
 must make all things ready, and administer it unto them as soon 
 as you can, and all will be well. I am the Stone and Shepherd of 
 Israel, the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION APPROVING THE CONDUCT OF THE 
 PEOPLE IN SWEARING THE OATHS. 
 
 No. 223. WEBER, UTAH, February i5th, 1862. 
 
 i. I SEE, my son, that you are about through with administer- 
 ing the oath unto my people. I have been present all the time, 
 and I have seen all that my people have done ; and, as far as they 
 have gone, I am well pleased with them. I have poured out great 
 blessings upon them ; for I have made them the first-fruits of my 
 kjngdom. All others of Abraham's seed will have to receive the 
 truth at their hands they are my chosen ones. I was enabled to 
 work upon them in a manner that I could not work upon many 
 others. There are thousands of people now living in this Terri- 
 tory whom my holy angels have been able to influence to a cer- 
 tain extent, but not sufficiently to cause them to leave all they 
 had and come up to this place. They believe in me in part ; and 
 when I move the obstacle out of their way, they will turn unto me 
 with all their hearts. They are waiting to see me make a move 
 
A CHOSEN PEOPLE. 417 
 
 that will release them. But many of these people whom I have 
 gathered to this place, were easier to work upon. I could in- 
 fluence them, and draw them to this place with greater ease than 
 I could the others. But I did not want to bring many people 
 to this place. I only wanted to gather a few hundreds of people,- 
 so that I might teach them the principles of the fulness of my gos- 
 pel, and thereby prepare them to teach those principles to those 
 who will be left alive after the overflowing scourge shall have 
 passed through this Territory ; this I was compelled by law to do 
 before I could cut off mine enemies. I gathered to this place 
 those whom I could influence with the greatest ease; and I have 
 made them the head over those whom I could not influence suf- 
 ficiently to bring them to this place. Those whom I have brought 
 here, who have been taught the principles of the fulness of my 
 gospel fyy my servant, the prophet, shall carry those principles 
 through the length and breadth of this Territory, even to those who 
 were not valiant enough to leave all and follow me, as they have 
 done: those who have not gathered to this place shall receive 
 those principles at their hands, for they are my chosen servants, 
 and the first-fruits of my kingdom, and I will give unto them great 
 stores of knowledge and wisdom ; for I am the Lord, and I have 
 chosen them. 
 
 2. Behold, I say unto you, my son, when I shall have cleared 
 the way for the preaching of my gospel, you shall send my servants 
 throughout this Territory, two by two, a high priest and a priest 
 of Aaron shall go together, and they shall gather all those people 
 who will give heed to them to Great Salt Lake City, that they may 
 be tried ; for they will all have to pass through a strait gate, where 
 both the president of the earth and Jesus Christ will stand. And 
 if any fallen spirits present themselves for admittance, they will be 
 refused such cannot pass that strait gate ; but they will be slain 
 there and then. When my servants shall-have gone through this 
 Territory, and gathered all those who will listen to their testi- 
 mony, I will send mine angels through the Territory with the 
 second scourge, and they will cut off all those who shall have re- 
 fused to hearken unto my servants. I shall spare the lives of 
 none who will not gather to the central point, as they will be com- 
 manded by my servants who will labor among them. 
 
41 8 COMMANDED TO PREPARE TO PREACH. 
 
 3. And inasmuch as my people are through with the taking of 
 the oath, you wish to know what I am about to do now. What 
 can I say unto you upon this matter? I know that you want me 
 to come. You do not want to hear of anything else. Nothing 
 else will satisfy you but my coming. You say in your feelings 
 that my people have endured as long as they can endure; that 
 those who own mills will not suffer their miller to grind for my 
 people; and you want to know what they must do. I will tell 
 you what my people must do. They must put down the name of 
 every miller who refuses to grind for them ; and when a miller 
 shall have once refused to grind, they must not ask him again, but 
 they must go to another, and so continue until they shall have 
 tried all the millers within ten or fifteen miles of this place. If 
 all those millers refuse to grind for my people, I will come and 
 cut them off, and also the owners" of the mills, and I will deliver 
 the mills into the hands of my people. But if there should be 
 one miller found within fifteen miles of this place, who will grind 
 for my people with a willing and generous mind, I will save the 
 life of that miller. Let my people do as I command them in this 
 respect, and I will come and deliver them before they suffer for 
 want of food. I am watching over them. They are safe in my 
 hands. 
 
 4. Let my servants use all dilligence to learn as much as they 
 possibly can, in order that they may be fully prepared to preach 
 the fulness of my gospel after I shall have removed the obstacle 
 out of their way. I know that you are weary of waiting for me. 
 It is the power of your office that you want ; you do not want to 
 hear of anything else. It seems almost impossible for me to keep 
 your spirits up by giving unto you the keys of the holy priesthood ; 
 they do not satisfy you. I cannot sufficiently encourage you to 
 raise even that amount of courage which is necessary to induce 
 you to walk up and do your duty. You have nothing to be afraid 
 of. You know that I am always with you ; and when you need 
 the power of your office, I shall give it unto you. You should 
 rise up, and walk forth among my people, and preach unto them 
 in the spirit of your office, and not suffer your spirits to droop so 
 much. You have no cause to give way to such an extent, or to 
 labor in fear ; for you know, as well as you need to know, that I 
 
DELIVERANCE PROMISED. 419 
 
 cannot fail to come unto you and give unto you the power o fyour 
 office when you need it. You should act in your office in the 
 spirit of it, and not distrust me so much.* I will do mine own 
 part ; and if you do not do yours, you will be blamable. There- 
 fore, cast all fear far from you, and walk forth, and do your duty 
 undauntedly, and I will always be by your side to fight your 
 battles. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE LORD REASSURES HIS PEOPLE THAT HE WILL 
 
 COME TO THEIR DELIVERANCE AFTER 
 
 THEY HAVE TAKEN THE OATH. 
 
 No. 224. WEBER, UTAH, February i8th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am he whose words are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword; \even Jesus Christ. I am about 
 to speak unto you concerning my people. Mine eyes are upon 
 them for good. I see the strainings of their minds which are so 
 fixed upon my coming that they do not want to hear of anything 
 else. They are weary of receiving nothing but the keys of knowl- 
 edge, for they do not satisfy them. My people should know that 
 I am compelled to give unto them a knowledge of my gospel 
 before I can give unto them the power thereof; and, while I am 
 doing so, they ought to be satisfied, and rest assured that inasmuch 
 as I have given unto them a knowledge of my gospel, I shall also 
 give them the power of it. TJiey should make themselves con- 
 tented with one thing at a time. I am working with them as fast 
 as they can endure it. I am compelled to load them along, little 
 by little, until I get them to the point where I can give unto them 
 the power of the gospel. But some of my people will not let me 
 work with them. They are continually wishing to see a manifes- 
 tation of my power. What is the reason of this? It is because 
 they have not sufficient faith in me ; they do not fully believe in 
 my promises ; they are not willing to trust themselves in my hands 
 and do as I command them. Nevertheless, they are continually 
 
420 CONCERNING EVIL. 
 
 in my hands, and they cannot get out of them ; therefore, they had 
 better reconcile themselves to their fate. If they will allow me, I 
 will take good care of them. They shall not suffer beyond what is 
 common to mankind. I shall lay no more upon them than what 
 the law of heaven compels me to do, before I come to deliver 
 them. They aie not compelled to endure any more than what 
 others, who have been clothed in mortality, have endured. The 
 inhabitants of all glorified worlds, when in mortality, had to 
 endure as much as Adam's race has endured. We know all about 
 the sufferings of Abraham's seed ; for we passed through similar 
 sufferings before they came forth into mortality. We know what 
 all mortal beings have to pass through. Adam's race need not to 
 think that they will get through any easier than we did when we 
 were in mortality. We had to fight our way through evil, and 
 they will have to do the same. They need not to think that their 
 sufferings are greater than have ever before been endured by 
 mortal beings ; for all mortals have the same amount of evil to 
 fight their way through to exaltation and glory. Therefore, as all 
 are treated alike, all ought to be satisfied with their fate, and not 
 murmur so much while they are receiving their just due. 
 
 2. Some of these people who yielded obedience to the fulness 
 of my gospel, turned round against me, and denied all the truth 
 which I have revealed. Did they think that the truth could be 
 changed by their corrupt and empty hearts? Did they suppose 
 that if they turned away from it that its nature would change, and 
 that my work would come to an end? Such are in the gall of 
 bitterness, and I will visit them as with a whirlwind. I will not 
 spare one of them. They thought that by running away they 
 could change the common course of things ; and that they should 
 never be brought to an account for their wickedness. O how the 
 devil has destroyed them. If they had hearkened unto my holy 
 angels, they never would have denied me; but they rebelled 
 against my holy angels, who withdrew from them and cast them 
 off, and delivered them into the hands of the devil that he might 
 buffet them until the day of their death. They cannot be liberated 
 from him till then ; for after a holy angel has cast a person off on 
 account of their transgressions, it is unlawful for him to influence 
 that person again while he is in mortality. The angel against 
 
HIGH PRIESTS AND PRIESTS OF AARON. 421 
 
 whom he has sinned, will be the angel to execute the -penalty of 
 death upon him. My people must consider that my holy angels 
 cannot be trifled with. They should give way to them ; and if 
 would do so, they would lead them into all truth. 
 
 3. And behold, I speak unto you concerning the high priests 
 of my Church, and also the priests of Aaron. I gathered them to 
 this place in order that I might reveal unto them the hidden 
 mysteries of my kingdom which belong to the fulness of my 
 gospel, that I might prepare them to preach my gospel after I 
 shall have cleared the way for them. This was the main object 
 I had in view in gathering my people to this place. I could not 
 lawfully destroy mine enemies in this Territory until I had pre- 
 pared a number of men to preach to those who should be left 
 alive, and gather them to the place which I have appointed. But 
 many of my servants do not strive to prepare themselves for the 
 work which lies before them as they ought to do ; but, instead of 
 doing so, they are continually calling upon me to come. I am 
 waiting for them to prepare themselves. If they would have con- 
 fined themselves, even months ago, to their own duties, I should 
 have come unto them and delivered them before now ; but they 
 could not do their own duties for fear that I should not do mine. 
 They were afraid that I should lead them into a snare; conse- 
 quently, they have neglected their own duties, and prolonged the 
 deliverance of my people. What can I do with them? I cannot 
 wait for them. I must come and deliver my people, whether they 
 are prepared for the work that lies before them, or not. 
 
 4. My people need not to hang their heads, and conclude that 
 I am not coming yet ; for, as I have said, I am coming as soon as 
 the oath is well through with. Let my people set all things in 
 order in the Camp, and have their bodies and clothing as clean 
 as possible. I told them, some time ago, to put their wagons in 
 order, ready for a quick move. Have they done as I commanded 
 them in that matter? If they have not, let them do so as quickly 
 as possible. There is none too much time allotted them to do 
 what they have to do. They will see that when I come they will 
 not be fully prepared for me. But I shall have to come, whether 
 they are prepared or not. Let them do as I have commanded 
 them, and prepare themselves to meet me as well as they can ; 
 
422 CONCERNING THE DISAPPOINTMENTS. 
 
 and I will accept of all my faithful and honest people. Therefore, 
 let them rest in me, and I will not betray their confidence ; for lo, 
 I come quickly. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE REASON WHY THE 
 LORD HAS DISAPPOINTED HIS PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 225. WEBER, UTAH, February 2oth, 1862. 
 
 i. Lo, I COME; but who among my people will stand when 
 I appear? For nature will shake, and men will fall upon the 
 ground as though they were dead. The sensation will be so 
 strong that people who will not be smitten dead will feel that it is 
 impossible for animated beings to live through the scene. I know 
 what many of my people think about my coming ; they treat it 
 lightly, even as as a small occurrence. I am round about my peo- 
 ple continually by my holy angels, and I hear all their conversa- 
 tion concerning my ma'y of working with them. Some of them 
 are very much dissatisfied with it. They say that they would not 
 work in the way that I do, if they were in my place ; that they 
 would work in a plain and positive way, so that people could un- 
 derstand them. But if they were placed in the same position that 
 I am placed in, they would work with mortals just in the same 
 way that I do. Some of them who blame me for my way of 
 working have forgotten how they worked when they were in power 
 as mediators. They worked with the mortal people whom they 
 had to deal with just in the same way that I work with them now. 
 They need to close their mouths, and say no more about what 
 they would do if they were in my place. I know what they 
 have done, and ihat is enough for me to know about them. 
 But I can assure them that they are now so blind that they do not 
 know what they are doing. They are losing my spirit. They 
 cannot see their way clear before them. They are ready to catch 
 at a straw to hold themselves from falling. Such is their weakness 
 after all the privileges which they have had to learn the principles 
 
CONCERNING THE DISAPPOINTMENTS. 423 
 
 of my gospel. But I can assure those dissatisfied people that I 
 am about to make a change with them. I can do nothing right 
 for them. They are like a troubled sea. They are afraid lest 
 they should be brought to want ; and when they look a few days 
 ahead, and imagine that they see a little poverty before them, they 
 begin to fear, and ask "What shall be done?" as though they had 
 no faith at all in me. Have I ever forsaken them? Have they 
 not been provided for up to this time? They are afraid before 
 they are hurt. They put themselves to a great deal of unneces- 
 sary trouble. I know all about their situation, and I shall lay no 
 more upon them than what the law of heaven compels me to do ; 
 that much they will have to endure, let them murmur against me 
 as much as they may. What better are they than other mortals? 
 All mortals have to fight their way through the powers of dark- 
 ness; and, while doing so, they all have to suffer. Therefore, 
 inasmuch as all are treated alike, all ought to be satisfied. My 
 people murmur because I have disappointed them a few times. 
 Why have I disappointed them so much? I have done so to see 
 if I could show unto them their follies. I wished, by giving unto 
 them blank disappointments, time after time, to show unto them 
 that they were not prepared to meet me ; but it appears that I 
 cannot teach them much by taking that course with them ; for, 
 instead of that bringing them to their senses, convincing them of 
 their follies, and showing unto them that they were not prepared 
 to meet me, it has worked the opposite way with them. They 
 turned around upon me, and charged me with being false ; and 
 like fools, they laid the whole blame upon me, and strove to 
 justify themselves. I should think that a blank denial from me 
 ought to teach a sensible person something. All people who have 
 half a grain of sense will admit at once that I know more than 
 they do. But some of my people act as though they had no sense 
 at all. If they had their proper senses, it would go hard with 
 them ; for I would chasten them severely. There are those among 
 my people who think nothing of setting themselves against me, and 
 sitting in judgment upon my course and condemning it. They 
 pretend that they know how I ought to act ; that they know how 
 things ought to be conducted in my Church, arid that if I would do 
 as they would like me to do, I should do right. They have not as 
 
424 THE DISAPPOINTMENTS. 
 
 much good sense as a brute beast. There are a few sensible peo- 
 ple in my Church, and there are others who, if they have any good 
 sense, do not make use of it. They act wildly. There is no 
 steadiness about them. They do not appear to collect their senses, 
 and bring them to bear upon the most trifling thing ; but they run 
 wildly and thoughtlessly at every simple thing with which they 
 have to do. 
 
 2. If my people had been prepared to meet me without my 
 having to disappoint them in order for me to prepare them for 
 that event, I should not have disappointed them once. The object 
 I had in view for disappointing them so many times, was to show 
 unto them that they were unprepared ; and I thought that, after I 
 had disappointed them the first time, they would have understood 
 at once the reason of such a disappointment ; that they would have 
 sought to prepare themselves in such a manner to meet me as to 
 be disappointed no more. I can, in that way, teach sensible peo- 
 ple ; they will understand me at once. The wise of my people 
 have understood me ; but they are but few. They are now ready 
 to' meet me, and lo, I will come and deliver them. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE PRINCIPLES OF 
 LIGHT AND DARKNESS. 
 
 No. 226. WEBER, UTAH, February 2ist, 1862. 
 
 i. I HAVE heard your prayer, my son, and I am come to 
 answer it. You wish me to make known unto you, positively, 
 what I am about to do with my people, seeing that I cannot, 
 apparently, bring them to that point which I should like to bring 
 them to. You say that it appears to you that the course which I 
 have been taking with them during the last few months, has had a 
 tendency to drive them further from me, instead of bringing them 
 nearer unto me ; that in consequence of disappointing them so 
 many times, I have almost broken their confidence in me ; that 
 they will not scarcely believe anything that I say. And you say 
 
LIGHT AND DARKNESS. 425 
 
 also that, when you undertake to explain unto them the reason of 
 so many disappointments, and apparent contradictions, which I 
 have made in the revelations which I have given, your explana- 
 tions do not satisfy them ; that they will not even listen to any 
 
 explanations. 
 
 2. My people should consider that they are mortal, and sur- 
 rounded by a false and evil influence. They do not see as I see; 
 for, to do so, they must be where I am, and move under the in- 
 fluence of light and truth, even as I do. They are mortal, and 
 are of the earth, earthy; and all that they see in the world is of a 
 worldly nature. They see and understand it according to the 
 influence of the devil which prevails in the world. It is an influ- 
 ence of da-rkness ; consequently, it is false. And when mortals 
 under that influence judge anything, their judgment is the judg- 
 ment of devils even a false judgment. And thus, while people 
 are under that false influence, they will rise up against me, and sit 
 in judgment upon my course. While people are under the in- 
 fluence of the devil, they see things as he sees them. 
 
 3. Light and darkness are in direct opposition to each other. 
 Light can never be judged by darkness. The darkness which 
 envelops mankind, understands things in one way, but the light 
 of heaven sees them in another way. My people need not to 
 think that they can see things aright under that false influence. 
 They can only see things aright in proportion as they are enlight- 
 ened by my spirit ; and my spirit will only enlighten them accord- 
 ing to their faithfulness. If people are not enlightened by my 
 spirit, they know nothing whatever about me, but are wholly con- 
 trolled by the influence of darkness. No people can possess the 
 light of heaven if they are not faithful and true to the source whence 
 that light comes. There are only two influences in existence the 
 influence of light and the influence of darkness. All animated 
 beings move forth and act under one or the other of those influ- 
 ences ; and according to the influence which they are under, they 
 see and understand aH things. 
 
 4. And inasmuch as my people are not fully enlightened, they 
 cannot see all things as I do. They are influenced more by the devil 
 than they are by me, for the influence of darkness which is in the 
 world is more powerful than the influence of light and truth which 
 
426 LIGHT AND DARKNESS. 
 
 they have as yet feceived. They are overpowered by darkness, 
 and it -appears very hard for them to fight their way through it. 
 But when I come, my people will have the greatest influence ; and 
 the faithful will have perfect victory over the devil and his in- 
 fluence. My influence will then be the prevailing influence in my 
 Church; for my influence is greater than the influence of the 
 devil. Both devils and their influence will have to give way to me 
 and my influence, for I will sweep them off the earth. 
 
 5, My people think that I have contradicted myself many 
 times ; but if they were celestial beings, and could see as I see, 
 they would know that I have never contradicted myself. They are 
 under one influence in the world, and I am under another in 
 heaven. When I speak the truth as it exists in heaven unto men 
 upon the earth, it clashes with that false influence which is in the 
 world. All mortal 'men act under that influence, until they be- 
 come enlightened, and then they, in part, see as I see. Thus the 
 true influence from heaven comes in open contact with the false 
 influence of the earth and produces a clash ; and w T hen a clash 
 takes place, the children of men forthwith begin to judge and con- 
 demn the things which come down from heaven by the things which 
 exist- upon the earth ; and thus my people wish to try me, and all 
 my works, by the devil's standard. They should know that light 
 will clash with darkness, and truth with error; that I am true, and 
 that all the revelations which I have given are also right and true. 
 My words cannot be tried by the carnal mind ; for the things of 
 heaven cannot be discerned by the natural man. 
 
 6. My people are very much grieved with me, because I will 
 not submit to be tried by the devil. If they wish to please me, 
 they must believe every word that proceeds from my mouth, and 
 live by it, no matter how my words may appear to contradict each 
 other. My people must consider that they are mortal, and in the 
 hands of the devil; and if they wish to be delivered out of his hands, 
 they must do as I command them ; there is no other way for them 
 to obtain a deliverance. They are too poor and depraved to judge 
 me. Let them forsake their follies, and learn to obey my words, 
 no matter how inconsistent they may appear; for, by so doing, they 
 may save their own lives. My ways are not as man's ways. It is 
 my duty to command, but it is man's duty to obey ; therefore, let 
 
THE PEOPLE ARE DESTITUTE. 427 
 
 my people obey me, and all will be well with them. I am the 
 Lord. 
 
 7. My people wish to know when I shall deliver them. They say 
 that they are in great poverty and distress. Some of them are very 
 bare, and in want of the common necessaries of life ; and I know" 
 that it is impossible for them to endure their present circumstances 
 much longer. My people are almost destitute of everything ; but 
 I am watching them, and I will come and deliver them before 
 they are called to suffer the want of food. I shall speedily be with 
 them to release them. They need not to let their spirits droop ; 
 for I shall speedily come unto them, and then they will be re- 
 warded for all the inconveniences which they have suffered in this 
 place. Let my people help each other, and ease each other's bur- 
 dens as much as they possibly can; and I will reward them when 
 I come. Lo, I come quickly. I am the Bright and Morning 
 Star; even Jesus Christ. Even s"o. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THOSE PEOPLE WHO 
 
 HAVE BEEN OVERCOME BY AN EVIL 
 
 INFLUENCE. 
 
 No. 227. WEBER, UTAH, February 22nd, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, that you may be watch- 
 ing for me ; for trouble has commenced among my people, and 
 the devil is gaining a fast hold on 'the minds of some of them. 
 They have given way to him, and a few of my people have denied 
 me in their hearts ; and even a number of men who are now in 
 high standing among my people have given way to a false spirit, 
 and it is gradually destroying them. If they do not speedily re- 
 trace their steps, it will be all over with them. They are blinded 
 by the devil already, and they wish to hide their feelings, in order 
 that they may hold their places among my people; but they are 
 not fit to labor in their offices. They are in possession of fake 
 spirits, and you must stop them from acting in their offices. You 
 must put others in their places. You need not fear what they can 
 
428 THE DIVISION. 
 
 do. If you will take this course with them, it will either bring 
 them to repentance, or destroy them at once ; it will have a right 
 effect upon them. You need not be astonished if you see my 
 people divide into two parties, and if the opposite party should 
 be led by men of high standing. If you should see them draw 
 quite a number of this people with them, you need not be as- 
 tonished. There is quite a number of this people whom I shall 
 not deliver, and I am about to withdraw my spirit from them. If 
 I was to deliver them, they would not abide my law after their 
 deliverance. I know all those who will obey my law ; these I 
 will hold by my spirit ; not one of them shall be destroyed ; they 
 have been reconciled to my way of working; they have been 
 willing to let me dictate, and have murmured but little, if any, 
 against me. But those dissatisfied people who have almost con- 
 tinually been sitting in judgment upon my course, and condemn- 
 ing me by the influence of the devil, which they are in possession 
 of, they shall not be benefited in this life by my works which they 
 have so often condemned. I have told my people ofte,n enough 
 what to do to save their own lives; but some of them would not 
 do as I have commanded them ; but they have almost continually 
 been finding fault with me. 
 
 2. And inasmuch as a division is likely to take place among 
 my people^ all these murmurers will come out against me ; and 
 when you see my people begin to form themselves for a division, 
 you may then begin to prepare for me. I will manage things with 
 those straggling apostates until I am ready to withdraw my spirit 
 from all those who I do not intend to deliver. I want to hold the 
 hypocrites together until I am ready to cast them all off. I want 
 to keep them as quiet as I possibly can until I am ready to 
 destroy all of them. As I cut of Korah, Dathan, and Abiram, 
 and the princes of Israel, so I will cut off all the apostates who 
 depart from me. When I have withdrawn my spirit from all the 
 hypocrites who are among my people, they will all gather together 
 with their leader, and form themselves into a body to oppose me ; 
 and as soon as ever they have all united to oppose me, then I will 
 come out of my hiding place and consume them. This is a true 
 sign of my coming which I have given unto you. You may 
 depend upon this. I am talking untu you, and not to my people. 
 
RICHARD COOK AND JOHN BANKS APPOINTED. 429 
 
 You may look out for trouble with the heads of my Church ; and 
 that opposite party will form itself by the direction of that head 
 which will come out of my Church. That head is already begin- 
 ning to prepare himself for his work. 
 
 3. You will not have to wait long to see a slaughter. Yotr 
 must keep your eyes open and watch that opposite spirit. You 
 must take charge of the main branch in this place, and appoint my 
 servant Richard Cook over another meeting place ; and you shall 
 appoint my servant John Banks over another branch in this place. 
 You must appoint them to preside over those meetings which I 
 shall show unto you. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that when I withdraw 
 my spirit from those people whom I do not intend to deliver, I 
 will pour out my spirit in great abundance upon those of my peo- 
 ple whom I intend to deliver. You must strive to hold my faith- 
 ful people together, and I will assist you, and all things will go 
 right. I shall be with you for good in a few days. I shall not be 
 more than a few more days before I come in power. I am speak- 
 ing to you now. I shall not disappoint you. Keep all your 
 linen clothing ready to put on at a few minutes warning, and 
 watch both the hypocrites who are in the midst of my people and 
 also for me ; for lo, I come in the course of a few days. I am 
 the Lord of Hosts; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE SPIRIT OF 
 APOSTACY. 
 
 No. 228. WEBER, UTAH, February 23rd, 1862. 
 
 i. I WISH to speak unto you again concerning things of great 
 importance. The spirit of apostacy is in the midst of my people, 
 and it is making great havoc with some of them. If you see 
 scores of these people come out against me and deny the truth, 
 you need not be surprised. None will leave the truth but those 
 whom I have rejected; and I shall withdraw my spirit from those 
 
430 THE SEPARATION. 
 
 whom I have rejected ; and after I have withdrawn my spirit from 
 a number of the people, they will fall, and Satan will take full 
 possession of them, and they will deny me, and thirst for your 
 blood, and for the blood of all the rest of my faithful people. But 
 I will guide them aright, and bring them to the right position. As 
 soon as I have separated them from the faithful of my people, I 
 will come and consume them. After their leader has gone from 
 among the faithful of my people, they will speedily go around him, 
 and set themselves against my faithful people ; and as soon as he 
 has drawn them all around him, and a proper division has taken 
 place between the hypocrites and the faithful of my people, then I 
 will come. 
 
 2. AVhen the hypocrites turn against me, they will desire to 
 commit violence upon the faithful of my people ; but I will sur- 
 round them by my holy angels, and force them to a certain place 
 where I want them to stand when I destroy them ; and I will hold 
 them powerless until I slay them. 
 
 3. I have selected a place where I intend to separate these 
 people. I will show you the place which I have appointed for that 
 purpose. I will make known unto you, from time to time, how 
 things are working with the hypocrites who are in the midst of my 
 people. You shall know all about them ; and I will shortly show 
 unto you the man who will lead the hypocrites. I will force him 
 out from among my people, and you shall see him as he is ; and 
 the rest of my faithful people shall see him. You need not be sur- 
 prised if you see a number of men, who are in high standing, 
 gather around him and sustain him. 
 
 4. There are a number of men in the apostleship who are 
 losing my spirit, and I have but little or no hope for them ; they 
 are going down to destruction. But the majority of that quorum 
 will be very likely to stand and receive their deliverance. It would 
 be well if that quorum was disorganized, and the dividing line was 
 drawn between the faithful and the unfaithful, in order that the 
 faithful might not be injured by the influence of those apostate 
 apostles. 
 
 5. When you divide the apostleship, you may know that the 
 trouble has commenced. You must attend to this matter when 
 the apostles assemble in their next meeting. I am coming unto 
 
 
THE PROPHET COMMANDED TO BE PREPARED. 431 
 
 you in a few days, as I told you in the last revelation. I have 
 trifled long enough with this people. I will force the apostates 
 to act. I could not come until I had divided the hypocrites from 
 the faithful of my people. I come as a man of war. I come 
 when my power is needed. I come to defend the truthful and the 
 innocent. I come to fight your battles. I will lay everything low 
 that opposes you until your mission is ended ; for I am the 
 Lord. 
 
 6. And I speak unto you again concerning your linen dress. 
 See that you have all those things ready so that you can dress 
 yourself quickly ; for I shall come unto you suddenly when my 
 time has come. Cast all fear far from you, and walk forth among 
 this people and instruct them, so that they may understand my 
 ways. Some of these people have departed from me because they 
 did not understand my way of working, and, on that account, the 
 devil has gained the power over them. They gave up to him. 
 They wanted to sit in judgment upon my words, and try them by 
 their own wisdom ; and because that my words differed from their 
 idea of things, they condemned me and left the truth. They 
 wanted to be my judge. O the blindness and ignorance of mortal 
 men ! How the devil does destroy them ! If the children of 
 Abraham would do as I command them, not one of them would 
 be slain by the hands of the destroying angels ; but they give way 
 to the devil and suffer him to blind their eyes, and destroy them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOHN PARSON. 
 
 No. 229. WEBER, UTAH, February 25th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world, even Jesus 
 Christ, and I am come to speak unto you concerning John Parson. 
 I called him and gave unto him an honorable place in my Church. 
 I made him the president over the apostleship, and I have sus- 
 tained him in that office up to the present time; and I enlightened 
 
432 CONCERNING JOHN PARSON. 
 
 him greatly. I placed him where he had the opportunity of learn- 
 ing the principles of the fulness of my gospel, as far as they have 
 been revealed unto my people through my servant, the prophet. 
 When he was humble he did some good to this people whom I 
 gathered to this place. He labored diligently for a few months to 
 assist me to establish my work upon the earth ; and when he was 
 humble I accepted of his labor, and greatly blessed him with light 
 and knowledge ; but he grew large in his own conceit, and began 
 to condemn me. He thought that his judgment was superior to 
 mine, and he treated my words as a thing of naught. He -raised 
 himself up and condemned me, and I have withdrawn my spirit 
 from him, and he is now led by the 'devil. He will do all that lies 
 in his power against me ; but he will not hurt one person whom 
 I have chosen. I will be with them by mine holy angels, and I 
 wilHhold them. He will only gather together those whom I have 
 withdrawn my spirit from and cast off. I will give them unto him, 
 and they shall die with him. He wishes to be a leader, and he 
 shall have the desire of his heart until he has gathered out from 
 among my people all the hypocrites. His pride and conceit have 
 destroyed him. He knows not what he is doing. He has greatly 
 injured a few of the members of his quorum. He suffered the 
 devil to overcome him, and he led a delusive spirit upon the mem- 
 bers of his quorum, and a few of them are greatly injured by that 
 false spirit which he led upon them. 
 
 2. It will be very difficult for some of them to come out from 
 under that influence ; if they do so, they will have to exert them- 
 selves greatly. I have but little hope for some of them. When 
 people are in possession of a delusive spirit, they know not what 
 they are doing. They believe that they are all right, and that every 
 other person who does not see and understand things as they do, 
 are wrong, and they will seek to contend with them, to see if they 
 cannot put them right. ' All people who are in the possession of 
 the spirit of Lucifer will do so. The devil makes them believe 
 that they are right, and that every person that opposes them is 
 wrong. There is but little chance for people who are so far 
 deceived by the devil, to repent and to turn unto me again. 
 
 3. And behold, I give unto you a commandment : You shall 
 disorganize the quorum of the twelve: for I have cast off John 
 
THE APOSTLESHIP MUST REMAIN DISORGANIZED. 433 
 
 Parson. He shall preside no more over that quorum. He is a 
 traitor to me, and I will show him the traitor's doom. And when 
 you disorganize the apostleship, you shall ask them how many of 
 them are willing to uphold you and your counsel ; and those who 
 will uphold you with all their power, I will accept of, and they - 
 must meet with you in your council, and place themselves under 
 your influence. 
 
 4. You must not organize the apostleship again until some time 
 after I have delivered my people. I will send unto you a man 
 who will fill that office faithfully ; until I send him unto you, the 
 apostleship must remain disorganized; and when you have dis- 
 organized the apostleship, if there should be any members of that 
 quorum who will not sustain you, but who take the opposite course, 
 such I have rejected; and as soon as John Parson and those of 
 his fellows who may fall with him, if there should be any such, 
 have gathered all the hypocrites together to one place, then I will 
 come. They have long wanted to see me, but they shall feel me 
 then. I want the hypocrites separated from the faithful ; and as 
 John Parson would not serve me in mine own appointed way, I 
 will make him do my dirty work. 
 
 5. I will make traitors serve me either in one way or else in 
 another until the day of their death. And when he has gathered 
 all the hypocrites together, I will come out of my hiding place and 
 consume them all, as I did Korah, Dathan, and Abiram, who rose 
 up against my servant Moses. I always destroyed his enemies 
 when he was upon the earth before, and I shall do the same now. 
 I am sworn to do so. Those who do not believe that I shall do 
 so, let them try me. Whenever they try me they will find out that 
 I will sweep them off. I should have done it before now if I had 
 been compelled to ; but my people have never as yet seen a mani- 
 festation of my power, because I have never been compelled to 
 manifest it. They shall see a manifestation of my power when I 
 have divided this Camp. I shall speedily come, for all things will 
 be ready for me very shortly. I will force things up to a head 
 rapidly among my people. I know that you are weary of waiting 
 for me. I am coming. Watch for me. I am the Lord of 
 Hosts. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that you must 
 
434 CONCERNING JOHN PARSON. 
 
 gather the apostles together to-morrow, or the day following, and 
 break up that quorum as I have commanded you; and you must 
 read this revelation both before the twelve, when they are assem- 
 bled together, and also in the public meeting of the saints. I 
 want the apostates to withdraw from my faithful people as soon as 
 they can ; for I want to come and put all things right. I am the 
 Lord of Hosts. Lo, I come; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOHN PARSON. 
 
 No. 230. WEBER, UTAH, February 2yth, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am he that shuts, and no one opens, and that 
 opens, and no one shuts, even Jesus Christ ; and I .am about to 
 speak unto you again concerning my servant John Parson, accord- 
 ing to your request. He says he will not fight against me. He 
 says that he is willing to act his part as one of my apostles. 
 It seems by what he says that he intends to be true to me. If 
 this is his determination, I will uphold him as an apostle ; but he 
 must guard against evil influences, for Satan has a particular spite 
 against him, and is continually upon his track. He is not aware of 
 all the wiles and the cunning of the devil as yet ; and it is well for 
 him to give up the presidency of the apostleship. If he was per- 
 mitted to hold it in his own hands, Satan would destroy him and 
 many more of his brethren ; for I have not, as yet, given unto 
 them the power to detect false spirits. This power will be given to 
 the apostleship when I have given unto my servant the power of 
 his office ; until then, the twelve must deliver themselves into the 
 hands of my servant Joseph, and he must instruct them upon all 
 points of doctrine which will be necessary for them to know. 
 They should know that they do not understand all things as yet. 
 They need to be taught much. Let them guard against pride and 
 worldly wisdom, for it is foolishness in my sight. My ways are 
 not as the ways of man. It is the duty of mortals to give up 
 to me. 
 
CONCERNING JOHN PARSON. 435 
 
 2. My servant John Parson is the first person I called to the 
 apostleship, and he has done much good in preaching to those 
 people whom I gathered here. He has done his part in preach- 
 ing. I have no fault to find with his labors ; but he has not, as 
 yet, the power to detect false spirits. They have the power over 
 him as yet. 
 
 3. I have a person whose birthright is great, and whose judg- 
 ment is excellent, whom I intend to place over the apostleship ; 
 and inasmuch as my servant John Parson is faithful, he shall be 
 his counsellor, even one with him. Let my servants (the twelve) 
 be satisfied with what I have done, for all things will work right. 
 I know what is best for them, and I will satisfy all the faithful of 
 my people shortly. 
 
 4. I intend to purge from among my people all the hypocrites, 
 as fast as I can ; and it is likely that men will break out from the 
 high priesthood, and gather together those people whom I have 
 rejected. I want them separated from the faithful, and then I will 
 come and clear them out of the way. I cannot deliver those who 
 will not abide my law. The law is placed before them in part ; 
 and those who will not abide that little which I have already given 
 unto my people, would not abide the full law if I was to deliver it 
 to them. I will deliver those who will fully abide that portion of 
 the law which I have revealed unto them and none else. Life 
 and death are now placed before my people; they can choose 
 which they will. My people should know what I require at their 
 hands. The conditions whereby either life or death are gained 
 are now placed before my people. They can save their lives, if 
 they wish, or lose them. I have done my duty unto my people ; 
 let them take whatever course they may. I am coming to put all 
 things right. I am the Son of the Eternal Father; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
436 THE DESTITUTE CONDITION OF THE PEOPLE. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE KEYS OF THE 
 PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 No. 231. WEBER, UTAH, February 28th, 1862. 
 
 1. I WISH TO speak unto you, my son, concerning these my 
 people. You say that when you survey the people who compose 
 this Camp, you find that there are a number of them destitute of 
 those things which render the existence of mortals tolerable ; that 
 you feel for those destitute people ; and that you can do but little 
 to help them ; for you feel that your hands are tied. You say that 
 you can see a backwardness in some of those who are tolerably 
 well circumstanced to help the poor; and, on this account, the 
 poor are called to suffer more than they ought to suffer ; and that 
 it is unreasonably hard for them to endure. If those who are in 
 good circumstances will assist the poor of my people, they will 
 please me. They need not to be afraid to let their substance go 
 to feed and clothe the poor. I do not intend to strip them and 
 bring them down to poverty before I deliver them. They need 
 not to be afraid of my bringing them to wapt before I place fresh 
 means in their hands. If they will assist the poor of my people 
 now that they need help, I will give unto them an abundance of 
 property even as much as they can desire inasmuch as they 
 wish to use it in a proper manner. But I want the needs of the 
 poor supplied now. They will need no help from the more 
 wealthy of my people after I have delivered them ; they will all 
 have an abundance of wealth then. 
 
 2. I gathered a few people to this place, in order that I might 
 prepare a number of men to preach the fulness of gospel ; and I 
 have continued to put off the day of deliverance in order that I 
 might give unto my servants all possible opportunity of learning 
 the doctrines contained in the fulness of my gospel. My servants 
 should learn the doctrines of my Church as fast as they can, for 
 they will find that when I send them through this Territory, they 
 will know none too much about them. Let my servants post 
 themselves as much as possible while they have an opportunity to 
 do so. They should also strive to sustain my work by adminis- 
 
CONCERNING THE KEYS OF THE PRIESTHOOD. 437 
 
 tering to the necessities of the poor who are in their midst; for, 
 by so doing, they will help themselves, and gain time and oppor- 
 tunity to learn the doctrines of my Church, and thus accomplish 
 the purpose for which I gathered them to this place. 
 
 3. My people have consecrated their property according to the~ 
 law which I have given- unto them, and they have sworn the oath 
 which I placed before them,' and they have thereby bound them- 
 selves to me, and to abide my law as it is revealed unto them 
 through my servant, the prophet. The first law which I gave unto 
 them was the law of consecration, which they have sworn to abide, 
 and not only that law, but every other law which I shall hereafter 
 give unto them. And inasmuch as they have bound themselves to 
 me by an oath which cannot be broken, and they refuse to let any 
 portion of their property go for the support of the poor, or other 
 Church purposes, when a lawful call is made upon them by the 
 steward, I will withdraw my spirit from them, and cast them off; 
 such break my law, and I shall destroy them. I am the Lord. A 
 breach of that oath is death ; therefore, all those who will faithfully 
 abide my law as far as I have revealed it unto them,' I will deliver. 
 Those who will not abide the little which I have already given 
 unto them, would not abide the remainder of my law which has 
 yet to be revealed, if I should deliver them. Those who will not 
 acknowledge the keys of the holy priesthood which they now have 
 in their midst, would not acknowledge the power of my gospel, 
 should they see it. For a people to deny the keys of the holy 
 priesthood, they have to deny the sight of their own eyes, and the 
 whole of their senses at the same time. If such people should see 
 me and my holy angels, and witness a manifestation of my power, 
 it would not satisfy them ; for the spirit that will deny the keys of 
 knowledge which I have given unto my people, will deny all truth, 
 no matter how visible and powerful it may be. My people have 
 their eyesight and senses, and, to a certain extent, they both see 
 and understand the keys of the holy priesthood ; and if they can- 
 not believe in them, they cannot believe in me at all. Whosoever 
 understands perfectly the keys of knowledge, sees me in all my 
 glory ; but without this knowledge, no person can know me per- 
 fectly. Through the keys of the holy priesthood, I am revealed 
 unto the children of men ; but without them, neither I nor my 
 
CONCERNING TIIK KEYS OF' THK PRIESTHOOD. 
 
 leather could be revealed unto them. Through those keys I work 
 and reveal all things ; but without them I do nothing among men. 
 Therefore, that spirit that will deny the keys of the-holy priesthood, 
 will deny the power of it. Let my people be aware of that spirit, 
 for it is the spirit of Lucifer, the devil. He strives to make my 
 people believe that those keys are a small thing ; yea, even a thing 
 of naught ; and thus strives to destroy my people by causing them 
 to undervalue the greatest of all blessings which can be conferred 
 upon the human race. 
 
 4. The full keys of knowledge are the greatest of all gifts com- 
 mitted to mortals ; for, without them, there is no resurrection from 
 the dead ; without them, no salvation can be given to Abraham's 
 seed ; without them, no light can be given to mortal beings ; with- 
 out them, there would be no channel of communication open 
 between heaven and earth ; without them, Jesus Christ and the 
 army of heaven could never come out to battle, and go from 
 conquering to conquer; without them, the power of the gospel 
 never could be committed unto man ; without them, this world 
 would go back to its native element, and exist no more in an 
 organized form ; for, through them, and by them, all things both 
 in heaven and upon the earth, and also in hell-, exist. O ye my 
 people ! be aware how you speak about the keys of the holy priest- 
 hood ; or you will speedily go down to the pit. Those who speak 
 against the priesthood, and against him who holds the keys thereof 
 upon the earth, speak against me and my Father, and all his holy 
 angels, and also against all glorified beings. I have forewarned 
 my people of all these things, and if they run recklessly into these 
 sins, I shall bring swift judgment upon them. I am the Lord. 
 
 5. Let my people hearken unto my words, and obey them, 
 that all may be w^ell with them. I know what they want, and I 
 will give it unto them. Let them prepare for me ; for lo, I come 
 quickly to their release. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
HOW TO PROVIDE FOR THE POOR. 439 
 
 THE PROPHET INSTRUCTED HOW TO PROVIDE 
 IMMEDIATE RELIEF FOR THE POOR. 
 
 No. 232. WEBER, UTAH, March ist, 1862. 
 
 1. You are in great trouble concerning the poor of my people. 
 You see that they are suffering much for the necessaries of life, 
 and that they must either have speedy relief, or their sufferings 
 will be unendurable to them. You wish to know of me what to 
 do to speedily relieve them. You say in your feelings that you 
 cannot rely upon a number of those people who have embraced 
 the fulness of my gospel ; that you can plainly see that they have 
 not consecrated their property ; that they are only mocking me ; 
 for their consecration was a mock consecration ; that if the least 
 call should be made upon them, they would murmur and make all 
 manner of excuses to get around it. Do they suppose that they 
 will meet with a deliverance at my hands? I will send them 
 speedily to their graves. I can provide for the poor of my people 
 without their assistance. I do not want the help of those hypo- 
 crites ; I only wish to tiy them, for this I am compelled to do 
 before I can destroy them the law of heaven compels me to 
 do so. 
 
 2. I know the thoughts of those who are heirs to the resurrec- 
 tion, and what they will do before they do it ; but I do not pretend 
 to understand all the movements of fallen spirits. They are out- 
 laws ; they are not governed by my law, but they run at loose 
 ends. Their course is uncertain. There is nothing belonging to 
 their course that can be depended upon, or from which any sure 
 calculations can be made. I can make just and true calculations 
 on the heirs to the resurrection ; for they are governed by law in 
 whatever world they reside. The law has a claim upon them 
 while they are in mortality; and if they will not abide it when it is 
 placed before them, I am compelled to cut them off the earth and 
 send them to the spirit world, where they will be compelled to 
 abide the law. 
 
 3. Abraham's seed need not think that they can get around 
 or shun my law, for they cannot ; they will have to abide my law, 
 
44 HOW TO RELIEVE THE POOR. 
 
 let them go where they may. Therefore, my people who have 
 yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel, might as well make 
 up their minds to abide my law. They need not writhe and twist, 
 fret and fume, and make so many excuses when my servant, the 
 steward, is sent unto them for a portion of that which they have 
 consecrated ; for it does not belong to them it is mine ; and I 
 wish to use some of it for the support of my humble poor. I will 
 either have that which my people have consecrated unto me, or at 
 least as much of it as I need for present uses, or I will have the 
 lives of those who have made such a mock consecration. I will 
 not be mocked by those hypocrites. Although I know the inten- 
 tions of my people, yet I have to send my steward unto them, to 
 meet with a denial from them, before they are condemned by me. 
 If any persons who have consecrated their property refuse to allow 
 my steward to take away that portion which he has been sent for, 
 such break my law, and are condemned to die ; such I shall with- 
 draw my spirit from, for they are no longer members of my 
 Church. When I come I will destroy them. I am the Lord. 
 
 4. You wish to know what can be done to administer unto the 
 poor of my people instant relief, seeing that they are suffering. 
 You must speak of the distress of the poor of my people publicly. 
 And let those of my people who have means carry some of their 
 substance to the poor, and thereby supply their needs for a few 
 days even until something more can be done for them. 
 
 5. I will make an alteration in the arrangement of things in 
 the course of a few more days. The most wealthy of my people 
 must consider the distress of the poor, and administer to their 
 necessities as I have commanded them, and all will be well with 
 them. Let my people humble themselves greatly before me dur- 
 ing the next few days, in order that they may be prepared for a 
 change, for they will witness one. They will see what it will be 
 when it comes. They will need great humility to enable them to 
 meet it. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 6. Let my people keep on the look out for me, for lo, I come. 
 It would be well for them to sit in judgment upon their own 
 hearts, and ask themselves this question: "Have we honestly 
 consecrated our property according to the law which has been 
 revealed unto us?" If they have, they are right, and have nothing 
 
CONCERNING PROPERTY. 441 
 
 to fear ; but if they have not, they have great cause to fear. I 
 have told them often enough what the law of heaven requires at 
 their hands. They are not so ignorant as they are wilful and 
 rebellious. O that all those who have embraced the fulness of my 
 gospel were valiant for the truth, but they are not. Some of them 
 think a great deal more of a little perishable property than they 
 think of the keys of knowledge, which are the greatest gifts that 
 can be conferred upon mortals. I have done all that I possibly 
 could to prepare my people to meet me; but they are very back- 
 ward in doing as I have commanded them. They will soon have 
 to stand in their own lot, and receive their own reward ; for lo, I 
 come to give it unto them. I am the Lord of Hosts. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING PROPERTY. 
 
 No. 233. WEBER, UTAH, March 3rd, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I wish to speak unto 
 you again. You say that you see the situation of those who have 
 embraced the fulness of my gospel who have property ; that you 
 cannot obtain their property because of mine enemies standing in 
 the way, and on that account it is of no use to you ; and that there 
 are a number of such men who can do but liitle or nothing to 
 help my poor people ; therefore, it makes it harder upon the 
 wealthy of my people who have property at their command. You 
 say, also, that the property which is at command will soon be 
 exhausted ; and you would like to know what you are"to do then. 
 I will answer you this question. I will come and deliver my peo- 
 ple long before they shall have used up their property which, by 
 them, is accessible. I will not strip the wealthy of my people 
 who have means to appropriate for the support of my poor ; but 
 they shall have sufficient for their owja use until I deliver them ; 
 such shall not be brought to want ; they need not to fear poverty, 
 for they shall never be called to partake of it. 
 
 2. I know that there are a number of men in my Church who 
 
442 f CONCERNING PROPERTY. 
 
 have an abundance of property ; but they cannot make use of it ; 
 therefore, it is of no use to me, neither will it be when I liberate 
 it ; for, at that time, all my people will have an abundance of 
 wealth. Property which I cannot make use of now, is of no use 
 to me. I want assistance now, and not after awhile ; therefore, 
 those who cannot now make use of their property, to assist my 
 cause, will never be able to help me in that respect. Those of my 
 people who are generous, who have assisted me with both their 
 means and talents, I will abundantly bless. Their good deeds 
 shall never be forgotten, but shall shine upon the pages of history 
 for their children and their children's children to behold, even 
 down to the latest generation. 
 
 3. There are those among my people who have an abundance 
 of property in their possession, which does not fully belong to 
 them which property they consecrated unto me; but such 
 property I shall not ^ise, for I do not acknowledge it as being 
 consecrated unto me. I do not call upon my people to hand out 
 such property for the support of my work in general such people 
 are free. Let them take care of it, and pay their just debts. Some 
 of my people are placed under very peculiar circumstances; there- 
 fore, I have to do the best I can with them. There are among 
 my people those who hold property in their possession which they 
 do not own. I do not call upon such persons to assist my work 
 with that means. I consider that none of my people can conse- 
 crate any property unto me but that which they own. I do not 
 depend on that which I cannot use. I shall accept of all those 
 who are whole-hearted, whether their property is accessible by me 
 or not. If they are willing to give up all that they have unto me, 
 I shall in such cases take the will for the deed. I have no other 
 way in justifying them. I have to consider the situation of peo- 
 ple, and deal with them accordingly. I know the motives of all 
 my people, and I shall deal with them lawfully. I shall lay mat- 
 ters plainly before them. I shall try them. I shall weigh them all 
 and see what weight they are before I deliver them ; and all those 
 who are heavy enough I .shall deliver; but the rest I shall blow 
 away, and send them to their graves. Those who are weighty, 
 will abide my law ; but those who will not, are too light to obtain 
 a deliveiance at my hands. My law is the scales whereby all my 
 
EARTHLY THINGS AND HEAVENLY THINGS. 443 
 
 people will be tried. Those who are weighty, claim a deliverance 
 it is their due. Let my people prepare themselves for a severe 
 trial ; for they are about to pass through one. Let my people 
 hearken unto my words, and diligently obey them, that it may be 
 well with them ; for lo, I come. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING HOW EARTHLY THINGS 
 
 IN THE HOLY PRIESTHOOD PATTERN 
 
 AFTER HEAVENLY THINGS. 
 
 No. 234. WEBER, UTAH, March 5th, 1862. 
 
 i. JOHN, the Revelator, in the fourth chapter and the fourth 
 and fifth verses of his book, gives us the following: "And round 
 about the throne were four and twenty seats : and upon the seats 
 I saw four and twenty elders sitting, clothed in white raiment ; 
 and they had on their heads crowns of gold. * * * And 
 there were seven lamps of fire burning before the throne, which 
 are the seven spirits of God." Who are the four and twenty 
 elders spoken of by John, the Revelator? They are four and 
 twenty of the Eternal Father's firstborn sons, even the chief rulers 
 in heaven. Is Jesus Christ included? Yes; he is the first mem- 
 ber in that quorum, and consequently their president, under his 
 Father. He is also the first of the twelve chief generals in heaven. 
 Who are the "seven spirits of God" spoken of? They are the 
 "seven angels who go in and out of the temple," and who "pour 
 out the vials of the wrath of God upon the earth " at the sounding 
 of the trumpets of the presidents of the seven dispensations of 
 Adam's earth. Are they included in the four and twenty elders 
 spoken of? Yes. Who compose the first council in heaven? 
 God, the Eternal Father; Jesus Christ, his firstborn Son, and the 
 second captain of the Lord's Host, who is next to Jesus Christ by 
 birthright, and who rides upon the black horse. These three form 
 the first quorum in heaven, and are the head over all. The first 
 four captains of the Lord's Host, the first of whom is Jesus Christ, 
 
444 THE FOUR AND TWENTY ELDERS. 
 
 were appointed by the Eternal Father to rule the four quarters of 
 the earth one to each quarter. The next three captains have the 
 charge of a branch of holy angels who are Holy Ghosts, or minis- 
 tering angels to the children of men ; and they do not go to war 
 except in cases of necessity. The remaining five of the first twelve 
 generals, with the second twelve of the twenty-four, assist the first 
 seven generals, and act under their jurisdiction, in their own 
 places, according to their birthrights. There are one hundred 
 and forty-four thousand chief rulers in heaven, who are the first- 
 born sons of the Eternal Father, and who rule according to birth- 
 right : all things are in perfect order there. 
 
 2. Are there four and twenty elders connected with this earth, 
 as there are in heaven? Yes. Who are they? Seth, Enos, 
 Cainan, Mahalaleel, Jared, Enoch, Methuselah, Lamech, Noah, 
 Shem, Arphaxad, Salah, Eber, Peleg, Reu, Serug, Nahor, Terah, 
 Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, Joseph, Reuben and Dan. Are the 
 seven presidents of the earth included in the twenty-four? Yes; 
 and Moses being the first one by birthright is the president 
 thereof. He who holds the keys of the holy priesthood upon the 
 earth must be the president of the twenty-four apostles ; for that 
 is the highest quorum upon earth. Jesus Christ is the president 
 of the four and twenty elders in heaven, and Moses is the presi- 
 dent of the twenty-four apostles upon the earth, being their head 
 by birthright. Earthly things must pattern after heavenly things. 
 
 3. Are there any instances on record of earthly things pattern- 
 ing after heavenly things? Yes; in the case of Abraham, Isaac 
 and Jacob. Abraham is a representation of the Eternal Father ; 
 Isaac, of Jesus Christ, the first-begotten *of and first counsellor to 
 the Eternal Father; and Jacob, of the next general by birthright 
 to Jesus Christ, who is the second counsellor to the Eternal 
 Father, being a representative of the Holy Ghosts. The offering 
 up of Isaac by his father, Abraham, is a type of the offering up of 
 Jesus Christ upon the cross. Thus earthly things pertaining to the 
 holy priesthood pattern after heavenly things. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ, even he 
 who has dictated you. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE TRIAL. 445 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE GREAT TRIAL 
 
 THROUGH WHICH THE SAINTS WILL BE 
 
 CALLED TO PASS BEFORE THEY 
 
 CAN BE DELIVERED. 
 
 No. 235. WEBER, UTAH, March 6th, 1862. 
 
 1. WHAT can I say unto you, or even do for you, to satisfy 
 you ? You know the true situation of my people, in almost every 
 respect, even as I do that they are not prepared for a visit from 
 me ; and that if I were to come to-day, I should be compelled by 
 the law of heaven to slay a number of them. Seeing that this is 
 the case, what would you have me to do? Some of my people's 
 minds are like the fool's eye upon almost everything but that 
 which they ought to be upon. They are continually calling itpon 
 me to come and deliver them; but they neglect to prepare them- 
 selves for the event which they so much pray for. I am waiting 
 for them to prepare themselves for it. 
 
 2. They are hindering me from coming to the faithful of my 
 people. I am compelled to show mercy unto such, and to use 
 time to go the rounds of the law with them. If I had no such 
 characters to deal with, I could come and deliver my faithful peo- 
 ple ; but while there are such characters among my people even 
 those who take such a round-about course to get around my law - 
 I am compelled to take a round-about course with them, until I 
 bring them to a point where I can lawfully dispense with them ; 
 and while I am doing so, I am wasting time and wearing away the 
 patience of those who are prepared for a visit from me. I have 
 told them often enough what hinders me, and yet they will not 
 clear the way for me. They have hindered me for weeks, and 
 they are now calling upon me the most for deliverance. They are 
 blind. They cannot see their own duties ; and yet they think that 
 all is right with them ; but they are the furthest from the mark of 
 any of my people, and are hindering the deliverance of my people. 
 They need not think that I am not ready, for I am. I have been 
 ready many weeks ; but I have been prevented from coming by 
 such people as I have spoken of. If my people would look to 
 
446 THE TRIAL. 
 
 their own duties, and do them, they would open the way for me ; 
 but as long as I have to take such a round-about course with those 
 of whom I have spoken, in order to deal with them according to- 
 law, I am wasting time and delaying the deliverance of my peo- 
 ple, week after week, until I am injuring both my servant, the 
 prophet, and my faithful people. Some of the unfaithful have 
 departed from me ; but some of them yet remain. How much 
 longer shall I wait for them, and thereby afflict the faithful of my 
 people? Not much longer. 
 
 3. I am about to put my people through a process of trial 
 which will purge out from among them all the hypocrites. After 
 this trial is through with, there will be none left' among my peo- 
 ple but those who will abide my law as far as I have revealed it. 
 I will speedily put them through this trial, and then you will 
 know to your satisfaction what kind of people you have to deal 
 with. 
 
 4. You are much oppressed in your feelings in consequence 
 of the deliverance of my people being so long delayed ; and you 
 are almost ready at times to break out upon me, and blame me 
 for being the cause of it ; but you need not do so, for I have told you 
 what has been in my way. I know that it is hard for you to have 
 to deal with short-sighted mortals ; for they are continually tor- 
 menting you with their complaints, and wishing to know of you 
 when I shall come to release them. I will promise them that I 
 shall come as soon as they are ready for me. I am about to make 
 a change with them. Let those who wish to save their lives greatly 
 humble themselves before me, or they will not stand. They know 
 not what is coming upon them in the course of a few days. If 
 they did, they would humble themselves before me in such a man- 
 ner as they have never humbled themselves before. They must 
 remember that I have told them of it before it comes. I have 
 given them a chance to prepare for it, and if they feel disposed, 
 they can do so. 
 
 5. I wish my faithful people to understand that I am not going 
 to keep them here much longer. I will not weary their patience 
 by waiting for those foolish people of whom I have spoken ; but I 
 will bring them to the test and try them. They will not go 
 through the next test, for it will purge them out. I shall be 
 
THE TWELVE SONS OF JACOB. 447 
 
 obliged to put my faithful people through the test with them ; but 
 they will not be hurt, for I will take care of them ; but I will not 
 uphold the hypocrites ; they will go to destruction. Lo, I bring 
 the trial upon my people speedily. Let them prepare for it ; for 
 none but the faithful will go through it safely. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Stone and Shepherd of Israel, 
 the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION- CONCERNING THE BIRTHRIGHTS OF 
 THE TWELVE SONS OF JACOB. 
 
 No. 236. WEBER, UTAH, March 6th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Alpha and Omega, even the beginning 
 and the end. I am come to make known unto you the particulars 
 concerning the birthrights of the twelve sons of Jacob. The 
 account of them as recorded in the Bible is not correct ; there is 
 confusion in it ; but I will make known unto you the true order 
 thereof. You know that I have told you that there are four and 
 twenty elders in heaven who form a quorum. I am the first mem- 
 ber in that quorum by birthright, and my Father's second first- 
 born-son is the second member in that quorum, even as Moses 
 and Elias are the two first members in the quorum of the twenty- 
 four apostles which belongs to the fulness of the holy priesthood 
 on Adam's earth. As I and my Father's second firstborn son are 
 the first two of the first twelve generals in heaven, so the first two 
 of the second twelve generals in heaven stand at the head of the 
 remaining ten of the second division. These divisions when 
 united constitute the quorum of the twenty-four; and as I and 
 my Father's second firstborn son are the first two in that quorum, 
 we rule over it, I am the firstborn son of my Father, and you 
 are the firstborn son of Adam, as pertaining to the holy priest- 
 hood ; and as my Father ordained and anointed me to preside over 
 his posterity, so Adam ordained and anointed you to preside over 
 two-thirds of his children even those whose names are written 
 
448 THE PRIESTHOOD IN PART. 
 
 in the Lamb's Book of Life. The other third belongs to Cain, 
 Adam's second born son. Twenty-four apostles form a quorum 
 under the fulness of the holy priesthood ; but twelve apostles only 
 form a quorum under the priesthood in part. The prophet, 
 Joseph Smith, had fourteen apostles who, with himself, made 
 fifteen. How can this order of the priesthood in part be a repre- 
 sentation of the first order in heaven, seeing that the first order of 
 heaven consists of thirteen persons only, including the Eternal 
 Father? It is represented in the following manner: Joseph 
 Smith being the sixth angel, holding the priesthood Jn part, and, 
 in his day, the only prophet in power upon the earth, represented 
 the Eternal Father. His first counsellor represented Jesus Christ, 
 and his second counsellor represented the Eternal Father's second 
 firstborn son. Ten of his twelve apostles represented the remain- 
 ing ten of the first twelve generals in heaven ; and the other two 
 apostles represented the two chief generals of the second twelve in 
 heaven. 
 
 2. Abraham, Isaac and Jacob also represented the Father, 
 Son and Holy Ghost ; and ten of the twelve sons of Jacob repre- 
 sented the remaining ten generals of the first twelve in heaven. 
 The last two of Jacob's twelve sons represented the first two of 
 the second twelve generals in heaven. And in this manner earthly 
 things in the holy priesthood pattern after heavenly things. 
 
 3. With respect to Jacobs sons : You know that Jacob had 
 four wives ; and that, according to the heavenly order, no woman 
 can have two sons to hold a first birthright ; therefore, the first- 
 born sons of those four wives held the first birthright ; after them 
 came the four secondborn sons, and so on with the remaining 
 four, according to their own order. Their places according to 
 their birthrights are as follows : Joseph, Reuben, Dan, Gad, Ben- 
 jamin, Simeon, Naphtali, Asher, Levi, Judah, Issachar, Zebulun. 
 Joseph, although he was not born the first, held the first birthright. 
 The devil gained the advantage of Jacob's father-in-law, and 
 sought to confuse and break up my arrangements with Jacob. 
 He succeeded in frustrating me in the beginning of that affair. 
 Reuben, who was the second by birthright, came first; but I 
 threw him out of that place and gave it unto Joseph, for it be- 
 longed to him. I overruled the devil in that instance, as I do in 
 
 
THE PEOPLE MUST BE INFORMED. 449 
 
 all others. I always give him the start, but I overtake him before 
 he goes too far. It is but little trouble for' me to overthrow him 
 when the law of heaven gives me liberty to do so. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. Let this suffice for the present, 
 and, from time to time, I will give unto you all necessary infor- 
 mation. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 THE PROPHET AND HIS COUNSELLORS INSTRUCT- 
 ED TO INFORM THE PEOPLE OF THEIR 
 TRUE POSITION. 
 
 No. 237. WEBER, UTAH, March 8th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, I wish you and your 
 counsellors to spare no pains in showing unto my people their true 
 position before me. You know that they have not looked aright 
 at the things which relate unto my coming. Some of them have 
 looked at that event in almost every other way than that in which 
 they ought to look at it. They treat it as a light and frivolous 
 thing as something which they have been called to witness almost 
 every day. But when they are called to witness my coming, the 
 sensation will be so great that their hearts will pain them. They 
 cannot form a correct idea of such an event. If they could see it 
 as it will be, they would not call upon me to come ; but during 
 the time that will be allotted them from this day to the day of my 
 coming, they would be wholly occupied in humbling themselves 
 before me, and calling upon me for mercy. Instead of calling 
 upon me to come, they would rather call upon me to give unto 
 them a little more time to prepare themselves for that event. If 
 some of my people could fully see what is needed to prepare them- 
 selves for my coming, they would see at once that they have spent 
 considerable time to little profit ; and they would .do more in a 
 few days towards preparing themselves for that thrilling and im- 
 portant event, than they have done during many months which are 
 past. They have done but little, as yet, towards preparing them- 
 selves for that which they have to meet in a few days. They have 
 
45 INFIDELITY AMONG THE PEOPLE. 
 
 almost continually been calling upon me to come, instead of pre- 
 paring themselves for "that event, and thereby doing their own 
 duties, and leaving mine to me. 
 
 2. There is a great deal of infidelity among my people; some 
 of them even doubt my coming to deliver them. Some of my 
 servants who are now in high standing have such feelings ; they 
 are loosing my spirit. My holy angels despise them, and da not 
 want to come near such. They are almost continually murmuring 
 in their feelings nothing seems to go right for them. If my peo- 
 ple would cling unto me with all their hearts, they would have no 
 such dark and miserable feelings as they are called to endure at 
 times, for my holy angels would continually be round about them, 
 to chase far from them all evil spirits. If they were sufficiently 
 faithful before me, they would be enlightened by my holy angels, 
 and continually enjoy great peace of mind. But they continually 
 give way to the devil and allow him to buffet them, and lead them 
 into all manner of misery; and in consequence of their ignorance 
 and laziness, they go about with hell in their hearts. Some peo- 
 ple are too lazy and indolent to serve me, or to save their own 
 lives the least duty in my kingdom is too much for them to per- 
 form. O how I do despire lazy people ; there is no dependence 
 in them. If you confer an office upon them, they are too lazy to 
 act in it ; but, seemingly, they would rather go about with their 
 heads down, counselling with devils, and being led by them into 
 all kinds of misery, until they have no pleasure of their lives, than 
 they would rise up and shake themselves, and act in their offices in 
 the spirit of them. They give way to every devil that approaches 
 them, and fall victims to his influence. If such do not quickly 
 rise up and shake themselves, and begin to act in the spirit of their 
 offices, I will cast them off. I did not call them to the holy priest- 
 hood, and give unto them honorable places in my Church, to give 
 way to devils, and thereby bring the influence of the devil among 
 my people, to destroy them ; by so doing, they become mine 
 enemies. 
 
 3. I will not suffer that any person who has been called to fill 
 an office in my Church shall preach unto my people, except he 
 shall be in possession of the Holy Ghost ; such will cast a good 
 influence among those people whom they may be called to address. 
 
FALSE INFLUENCES. 451 
 
 But should a person in possession of an evil influence address my 
 people, he would spread that influence among them, and thereby 
 injure them greatly. Therefore, persons who are in possession 
 of such a spirit, shall not administer to my people. Let my peo- 
 ple be aware of the spirits which operate upon them, and cling tD 
 my spirit, which leads into all truth, and they will not go about in 
 misery, with their heads down ; but they will enjoy peace of mind, 
 and be satisfied with my course. They will acknowledge my hand 
 in all things. 
 
 4. Some of my people have already begun to make calcula- 
 tions as to what will take place among them when the Spring opens. 
 Some think that they will begin to scatter ; but they need not look 
 so far ahead- as that ; there is something nearer home which ought 
 to occupy their attention. They may be called to behold great 
 scenes before that time. There is a trial right at their doors, 
 which will open the eyes of some of my people, and shut the eyes 
 of others. Let them think about it, and not about what will take 
 place when the Spring opens. Let them prepare for it, for it is at 
 their door. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you must labor 
 fa'thfully with my people until I come, and try to save as many of 
 them as you possibly can ; for I shall come in the course of a few 
 days. It is time for my people to lay things to heart. Let them 
 do as I have commanded them ; and all that will do so, I will 
 save. I am He that was, and is, and is to come ; even Jesus 
 Chaist. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE APOSTLES. 
 
 No. 238. WEBER, UTAH, March nth, 1862. 
 
 i. I SEE, my son, that you are greatly oppressed in your feel- 
 ings on account of this people. You say that you can make but 
 little progress towards bringing them to my terms ; that they do 
 not seem to understand my ways ; and what makes the matter still 
 worse, you cannot teach them ; for there are many of them who 
 
45 2 THE APOSTLES. 
 
 either will not or cannot understand what I require at their hands. 
 You say that after you have taught them their duties, they will not 
 do them j but rather rise up and sit in judgment upon my words, 
 and condemn my course ; that they must be either wilfully wicked, 
 or very ignorant ; but that you cannot see how that can possibly 
 be the case after you have taught them so much ; that there 
 are a number of them who will go where they please with- 
 out coming to ask your counsel; that some of them disregard 
 your counsel ; that you have but little control over the people at 
 large ; and that they have not, as yet, learned obedience unto me. 
 2. You say that you are completely heartsick at being held 
 powerless so long by me ; that I gave unto you, some time ago, 
 twelve apostles to strengthen your hands, and to help to bear 
 you up ; but that some of them seem to be the weakest men in 
 the Camp ; that they cannot even keep themselves straight ; that 
 they cannot even bear their own burdens, let alone assisting you 
 to take care of my people ; and that they will go about contending 
 with one another about the meaning of the revelations which 
 have came from my mouth. They show how worthy they are of 
 the office of apostles. They are a disgrace to the holy priesthood ; 
 and they will do almost anything but their own duty, which is to 
 live by every word that proceeds from my mouth. What dignified 
 characters they are(?) What helps (?) they are unto you in going 
 about breathing out treason against the government of heaven. 
 Some of them are well worthy of death ; and if they were in pos- 
 session of good, sound sense I would not pass by their wicked- 
 ness. They will not use that common sense which came into the 
 world with them ; but they let the devil rob them of it. O what 
 unprincipled people I have to deal with ! But I will open- the 
 way for you, so that you may obtain better men to place in the 
 apostleship than some of those who are now holding that office ; 
 for some of them are unworthy of the least office in the holy 
 priesthood. I shall not suffer men who hold the office of apostles 
 to fight against me, and to act the part of traitors to my govern- 
 ment. Therefore, if those men of whom I have spoken do not 
 humble themselves before me, and cease their sitting in judgment 
 upon the revelations of my mouth, and condemning them, I will 
 move them out of the apostleship ; for I will not suffer that mor- 
 
THE UNBELIEVING AND FAITHLESS. 453 
 
 tal men shall sit in judgment upon my words, after I have clearly . 
 shown unto them the consequences of doing so. I will not, after 
 this jevelation has been read in the hearing of the people, suffer 
 any man who holds the office of an apostle, or that of a high 
 priest, to sit in judgment upon the revelations of my mouth ; if 
 any do so, I will reject them, and withdraw my spirit from them, 
 and destroy them. Hereafter there will be no forgiveness for this 
 crime ; the penalty will be inflicted. And such as shall be guilty 
 of this sin after this time, I will reveal them unto you ; and when 
 I do so, you must read their names before the congregations of 
 my saints ; and you shall blot their names out of the list of those 
 who swore the oath which I placed before my people. Those 
 who will live by the words of my mouth, and not sit in judgment 
 upon them and condemn them, I will deliver; but -none else. I 
 will not suffer that my course shall be questioned by mortal beings 
 who expect salvation at my hands; it is their duty to obey, and not 
 to dictate. If they know more than I do, why do they call upon 
 me to direct their course, and deliver them out of the hands of 
 the devil? If they can deliver themselves, why do they not do so? 
 I do not want the trouble and aggravation which I have with them. 
 I can assure them that I do not want to be afflicted by their 
 foolishness if they can do without my help ; but if they expect to 
 be delivered by me, they must do as I command them. Those 
 that I deliver, I deliver upon mine own terms ; and those of my 
 people who cannot come to my terms, cannot be assisted by me. 
 It is high time that my people should begin to learn a little good 
 sense. I am weary of dealing with such ignorant people as some 
 of them are. If I could only convince them that they are fools, 
 and that they know but little or nothing, as they ought to do, I 
 could do something with them ; but some of them are so blinded 
 by the devil that they almost think that they know everything, and 
 consequently that there is nothing more for them to learn. I 
 cannot work with such fools. I can do nothing with them but 
 smite them dead. I will speedily make such men open their eyes, 
 and shut them again in quick succession. People must be fools, 
 and blind, when they think that they know more than I do. O what 
 presumption poor ignorant mortals are guilty of when they dare to 
 rise up and sit in judgment upon my course, and condemn it ! If 
 
454 INSTRUCTED TO HE PREPARED. 
 
 I was not merciful, I should smite all who are guilty of that crime 
 dead in one minute, and I shall do so the next time they are 
 found guilty of it. I will bear with them no longer; for after I 
 have told my people this time, I shall have shown mercy unto 
 them, until mercy will have no more claim on them justice will 
 next fall upon them. Therefore, if my people wish to save their 
 lives, let them reflect upon what they are doing. Life and death 
 are now placed before them, and they can choose either of 
 them. My wrath is kindled against those who are foolish and 
 unprincipled among my peopler I cannot bear with them any 
 longer. 
 
 3. I am quickly coming unto you; therefore, look put for me. 
 I will quickly speak unto you again, and I will tell you how you 
 must prepare for me. I have something more to reveal unto you 
 before I come ; for you are not fully prepared to enter into my 
 presence. I will fully prepare you to meet me. Lo, I come, I 
 come, I come speedily. I am the Lord of Hosts. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING MERCY, JUSTICE, AND 
 JUDGMENT. 
 
 No. 239. WEBER, UTAH, March i3th, 1862. 
 
 i. WHILE you look at the people who compose this Camp, you 
 say in your feelings that you see among them some who will not 
 meet with a deliverance at my hands when I come, unless a great 
 change is wrought in them quickly; that you very much doubt 
 whether they will alter much for the better ; and that, knowing 
 their destiny, you are pained when you look at them. You con- 
 tinue to call upon me to have mercy on them, and save their lives, 
 if I possibly can ; but you know my situation, my son, that I can 
 only show mercy until it has had its claim upon mortals. Justice 
 has a claim as well as mercy ; but justice cannot interfere with any 
 persons in my kingdom until mercy has had its claim upon them, 
 according to the law. 
 
MERCY, JUSTICE AND JUDGMENT. 455 
 
 2. You wish to know what mercy and justice are. You say in 
 your feelings that you know what the men of the world call mercy 
 and justice, but their opinion does not satisfy you; for you feel 
 certain that men of the world know but little or nothing aright. 
 You place no dependence in their wisdom. You know that it is. 
 all foolishness in my sight, and that it is all of the devil, being 
 fully controlled by his influence. You want to see things as I see 
 them, and not as the devil sees them. You are not willing to take 
 the devil to be your standard of right. You want to see things as 
 they are ; and as you know that a perfect knowledge of all things 
 exists only in the heavens, you wish to be taught by me, so that 
 you may always understand aright. Mercy and justice are eternal 
 principles which belong to my gospel, and are based upon eternal 
 laws, each having a claim upon mortal beings. Mercy has a claim 
 upon two-thirds of Adam's posterity who willingly abided the law 
 of God while in their first estate. It is the first law of the gospel, 
 and the foundation upon which all the remaining portions of the 
 law are based. Justice is the next principle of the gospel, and 
 steps in after mercy has had its claim ; and judgment, being the 
 third principle of the gospel, holds the third and last claim. 
 Mercy has no claim on fallen spirits, because they rejected the 
 whole law of God; consequently, justice is the first principle that 
 will lay hold on them, and judgment is the second and last that 
 has any claim upon them. Justice and judgment claim the right 
 to utterly waste away and destroy ; but mercy will save, exalt and 
 glorify all those who come under its claims. It passes by all 
 fallen spirits, and justice and judgment claim them, and utterly 
 waste them away, both temporally and spiritually. 
 
 3. By mercy all the rest of Adam's children are saved, because 
 they were true to the law of their Father while in their first estate ; 
 therefore, when they come forth into their second estate, and are 
 blinded by the devil, mercy claims them. They will be rewarded 
 according to the works they perform while they see, and not ac- 
 cording to the works they perform while they are blinded by the 
 devil. The children of Abraham in mortality are condemned in 
 proportion to the privileges which they have of obtaining light and 
 knowledge; and when any of them become so blinded by* the 
 devil as to be swamped in sin and blasphemy, it is a mercy be- 
 
4^6 rONCKKNINV. MKRCV AND JUST1CF. 
 
 stowed upon them by me, if I cut them off, and thereby put them 
 out of their misery ; for no person can be put to greater misery 
 than to be buffeted by the devil. 
 
 4. Mercy can operate in different ways. When persons are 
 suffering under a miserable influence, it is a mercy to ease their 
 pain, even if by so doing you have to put an end to their mortal 
 existence; for it will separate them from the evil spirit which 
 haunts them", which could not otherwise be removed. When per- 
 sons yield obedience to the fulness of my gospel, and afterwards 
 surfer the devil to overcome them, even so much as to cause them 
 to deny my work, that spirit never can be separated from them in 
 mortality ; such the law of heaven compels me to slay out of their 
 misery ; for their misery never could come to an end until they 
 should either be slain or die a mortal death ; therefore, the mercy 
 which I owe unto them claims their death at my hands, in order 
 to ease their pain. If my people wish to save their lives, let them 
 be aware of false spirits. 
 
 5. It will be a mercy conferred upon two-thirds of the people 
 of this Territory for me to slay them, or rather one-third of the 
 two-thirds; for one-third are fallen spirits who claim no mercy. 
 Justice will be inflicted upon them, and mercy bestowed upon the 
 other third who are blinded by the devil. When people are so far 
 blinded by the devil -that mine angels cannot influence them and 
 turn them from their wicked ways, the law of heaven compels me 
 to slay them. It is a mercy conferred upon them to stop their 
 wickedness, and to put an end to their misery. 
 
 6. You say that you are very sorry for some of those who have 
 yielded obedience to the fulness of my gospel who now stand in 
 dangerous places, and who will not, seemingly, abide that portion 
 of my law which I have revealed unto my people. You need not 
 to trouble about them. I have laid that small portion of my law 
 plainly before them, and if they will not abide it, they will have to 
 abide the consequences of their disobedience. 
 
 7. You have done your duty to my people; and if they should 
 all be destroyed, you would have nothing to fret about. If you 
 had failed to do your duty to them, you might fret ; but I have no 
 fault whatever to find with you. You could do no more to save 
 the lives of my people than what you have done ; and if they will 
 
THE SEPARATION. 457 
 
 not exert themselves, but are too lazy to save their own lives, after 
 you have taught them the way, let them perish and go down to 
 destruction ; such are well worthy of death. I will promise such 
 lazy and unprincipled people that they will meet with no sympathy 
 from me. I have done my duty to them, and if they would only 
 do theirs, all would be right with them. If they will rrot do their 
 duties, what can either you or I do for them ? We cannot save 
 their lives when the law of heaven seals the sentence of death upon 
 them. It is the law that either saves a people or destroys them. 
 Let my people think about what y they are doing; and if they wish 
 to save their lives, let them abide my law, and live by every word 
 that proceeds from my mouth. If they will do this, all will be well 
 with them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE SEPARATION OF 
 THE REBELLIOUS FROM THE FAITH- 
 FUL OF THE PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 240. WEBER, UTAH, March i5th, 1862. 
 
 1 . WHAT can I say unto you to satisfy you ? You are at a loss 
 to know what you shall do with a number of these people. You 
 say that you cannot make them understand what I require at their 
 hands; that to teach them appears to be of no use; and what to 
 do with them, you do not know. You say that inasmuch as they 
 are in the midst of my faithful people, and will neither abide my 
 law, nor move out from among them, unless they are removed, 
 they will bring my work to a standstill, which must never be the 
 case ; therefore, something must be done to remove them. 
 
 2. Behold, I say unto you, O ye rebellious and stiff-necked 
 people ! I can bend your stiff necks, even to the ground. I can 
 separate you from* my faithful people, and this I am about to do ; 
 therefore, you may be setting yourselves for that separation, for it 
 
45 8 THE SEPARATION. 
 
 will come upon you suddenly. You would not give heed unto me 
 when you might have done so, and thereby have saved your own 
 lives ; therefore, now that your accounts are made up, there is no 
 more chance for you in mortality ; in mercy to you, I will now 
 send you home. 
 
 3. I will, from this day, withdraw my spirit from those whom 
 I have rejected, and from this very hour they will begin to go 
 down ; they will begin to hunt each other up and club together ; 
 and they will continue to do so until they have drawn out from 
 among the faithful all the false-hearted ; and when they shall have 
 done so, I will pay them off. When I shall have entirely with- 
 drawn my spirit from them, they will speedily separate themselves 
 from the faithful of my people. I have suffered my holy angels to 
 linger around them, to stay them, and to hold them, until I should 
 be ready to cast them all off together. I shall now withdraw my 
 holy angels from them, and deliver them into the hands of the 
 devil, and he will take possession of them, and they will then rage 
 and thirst for your blood, and also for the blood of my faithful 
 people. I will force them to the right point, where I intend to 
 destroy them. I shall deal with them aright. When they are 
 gathered together, I will see that they are laid low in mine own 
 appointed way. My people will see how mine enemies are 
 destroyed, when the enemies have gathered themselves together. 
 
 4. The faithful of my people need to be setting their hearts 
 for a painful scene. They must put away from them all sympathy 
 towards the false-hearted whom I have rejected, no matter how 
 closely they may be connected to them by relationship. They 
 will have to break asunder all family ties existing in families in 
 which false-hearted people are found ; for if they are found sym- 
 pathizing with those whom I have rejected, they will be slain with 
 them. The false-hearted will be slain for refusing to abide my 
 law; but the rest who will be slain, will be slain for sympathizing 
 with them. In sympathizing with the false-hearted, they partake 
 of their spirit, and thus become one with them, and equally guilty 
 before me. Therefore, let the faithful of my people, if they wish 
 to save their lives, be aware of sympathizing with the rebellious ; 
 for they are about to be placed in dangerous places, where they 
 will need to keep their eyes wide open. It will be all that the 
 
DESTRUCTION OF THE HYPOCRITES. 459 
 
 most faithful of my people will be able to do to save their lives. 
 Sympathy for the condemned will be that which will try them the 
 most. I greatly fear for them in that respect. When death is 
 staring the false-hearted of this people in the face, it will try the 
 courage of the faithful to behold it. Let my people think about 
 their situation; for they will be tried before they get through. 
 They will see their position suddenly. Let them seek to humble 
 themselves greatly before me, in order that I may strengthen them 
 for that which they have to meet ; but if they do not do so, but 
 few of them will go through the test alive. 
 
 5. When all the hypocrites are gathered together from among 
 my people, I will come, and I will superintend the destruction of 
 the hypocrites who are in the midst of my peopje ; and if any 
 help is needed, I shall be there to render assistance to my faithful 
 people. When you need further information upon this subject, 
 I will reveal it unto you. Let this suffice for the present, and as I 
 have said, I will speedily force out the false-hearted in a body ; 
 therefore, look out for them. I am the Lord, and I am continu- 
 ally by your side to fight your battles. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOHN COOK AND 
 RICHARD COOK. 
 
 No. 241. WEBER, UTAH, March iyth, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Son of the Eternal Father, even Jesus 
 Christ, and I am come to speak unto you concerning John Cook 
 and Richard Cook. I have seen their works in the midst of my 
 people from the commencement of my work in this place. They 
 have done some good in assisting me to start my work here. 
 They placed considerable confidence in me in the commencement 
 of my work. I inspired them greatly at that time. They are men 
 who are naturally very suspicious, which suspicion creates a lack 
 of confidence a fearfulness. Suspicion is a principle which 
 destroys faith in the object of a pursuit. It renders the person 
 
460 EXCITEMENT AND SUSPICION. 
 
 in whom it is found almost useless, because it destroys his con- 
 fidence in his undertaking, and therefore it produces 'double- 
 mindedness ; and a double-minded person is unstable in all his 
 ways. Suspicion is a great failing in that person in whom it is 
 found. Excitement and suspicion are two of the greatest failings 
 which mortal men can be guilty of; either of them will destroy 
 that person's future usefulness if the person does not strive against 
 them, and overcome them. Suspicion is the greatest failing that 
 those men have. Their suspicion makes it difficult for me to 
 work with them ; it destroys their confidence in me ; and in con- 
 sequence of that, they are continually seeking to post themselves 
 against a failure, and thus they are double-minded and unstable in 
 the faith of my gospel ; and while they are in that condition of 
 mind, they cannot preach my gospel with the spirit of it. No 
 person can preach my gospel with the spirit of it but those who 
 are whole-hearted. 
 
 2. When people who are double-minded undertake to preach 
 .my gospel, they do more injury by their preaching than they do 
 good. They lull my people to sleep, and thereby give the devil 
 advantage over them : such are unprepared to preach my gospel 
 in the spirit of it, until they have overcome their suspicions, and 
 are fully able to trust in me ; and when they have overcome all 
 suspicion against me, they will be fully prepared to preach my 
 gospel in the spirit of it ; if they can overcome it, it will be well 
 for them ; but if they do not overcome it, it will overcome them. 
 Their integrity will be tried in that matter. They will never over- 
 come their suspicion before I come and deliver my people, if they 
 do afterwards. Time will tell what they will do. If they con- 
 tinue in as good standing as they are in even now, I will deliver 
 them when I come. I will try them fairly, and see if I cannot 
 destroy their suspicion at once ; and if they still continue to be 
 suspicious and half-hearted after they have seen a manifestation of 
 my power, then I will cast them off at once. If they cannot place 
 all necessary confidence in me after the deliverance of my people, 
 then I shall settle with them. They seem to have the advantage 
 over me at present ; but I shall speedily have the power over 
 them. They are hard men to deal with. They are almost con- 
 tinually looking out for failures. They musfe have a very low 
 
CONCERNING SUSPICION. 461 ' 
 
 opinion of me to be continually suspecting me. I think that I 
 am as honest and true to my word as they are to theirs. They 
 may yet prove the truth of my words in that respect. 
 
 3. It is a grievous sin in my sight for a person to be sus- 
 picious of me ; such doubt in my honesty and truthfulness, and 7 
 by their acts charge me with guilt when I am innocent. They, 
 therefore, lay false charges against me ; and they ought to know 
 something about the sin of laying false charges against any per- 
 son upon the earth, let alone against me. 
 
 4. I love the whole-hearted those who do not desire to ques- 
 tion my course, but are willing to deliver themselves into mine 
 hands, and live by every word that proceeds from my mouth, 
 believing that I shall deal with them honestly, and do all things 
 aright such I delight in. But the suspicious and fearful I take 
 no pleasure in; they are a continual aggravation unto me. I 
 have no pleasure in them, and they have no pleasure in them- 
 selves; for through their fearfulness they cannot enjoy the full 
 spirit of my gospel ; but they are constantly in fear; it is a con- 
 stant canker worm to their souls, and eats away their peace of 
 mind, which they might otherwise enjoy. They have no pleasure 
 in themselves, neither have I any pleasure in them. I can assure 
 them that they need not be suspicious of me. I shall fulfil 
 my words to the sorrow of a number of this people. If people 
 are sensible they will save themselves the trouble of being sus- 
 picious of me. If they need to be suspicious of any person, it 
 should be of themselves, lest they should fall short of doing their 
 own >art, and thereby be cast off, and sent home again, from 
 whence they came, in shame and disgrace, having failed to faith- 
 fully fill the mission to which they were appointed. If any people 
 need to fear, it is them. Let the suspicious look well to them- 
 selves ; and let them take care that their suspicions do not send 
 them home again. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Bright and Morning 
 Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
462 THE SPIRIT OF HYPOCRISY. 
 
 THE PROPHET COMMANDED TO EXPOSE THE 
 SPIRIT OF HYPOCRISY. 
 
 No. 242. WEP.ER, UTAH, March i8th, 1862. 
 
 1. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; for I am about to speak unto 
 you again concerning the false-hearted among my people. I am 
 about to make known unto you how you shall deal with them, in 
 order to purge them out from among the faithful of my people. 
 
 2. You wish to know what I call a hypocrite. I will answer 
 you to your satisfaction. A hypocrite is a person who is double- 
 minded half-hearted ; who has not a single eye to an object, but 
 who has a two-fold object in view in what he does. Such persons 
 are fearful and unbelieving, and are under condemnation before 
 me. My spirit cannot influence them to any great extent. They 
 cannot receive a perfect testimony of the truth. It is impossible 
 to satisfy them ; for they will not acknowledge that which they can 
 see, hear, taste or handle. They are in the possession of a spirit 
 from Lucifer, which causes them to deny me and all the truth 
 which I have revealed. Persons who would deny the keys of the 
 holy priesthood, which they have seen, and the operations of my 
 spirit, which they have felt, would deny anything that might come 
 from me, no matter how powerful a manifestation it might be. 
 Such persons are deceived by the devil. A lying spirit has so 
 deep a hold on them, on account of their suspicions, that they are 
 almost destroyed. There is little or no chance for them. Mine 
 angels cannot influence such persons. They will not come to my 
 terms. They perish in the midst of light, and being blinded and 
 deceived by the devil, they consider that all is deception. They 
 measure all truth by the spirit of the devil. I have told my peo- 
 ple often enough how to shun those false spirits; but some of them 
 would not pay attention to what I said. They need not blame 
 anybody for their disaster but themselves. It is their half-hearted- 
 ness and suspicion that has led them to destruction. 
 
 3. Who are they whom I call my faithful people? Those who 
 acknowledge my hand in all things ; who, with undivided hearts, 
 
DESCRIPTION OF A FAITHFUL SAINT. 463 
 
 are willing to live by every word that proceeds from my mouth ; 
 whose eyes are single to my glory ; who, being reconciled to my 
 course, are satisfied with it ; who have no darling object which 
 they place before the truth ; but who first seek my kingdom and 
 its righteousness, and allow all other things to follow in their owrt 
 order ; who, having consecrated hearts, are willing to place them- 
 selves and all that they have upon the altar as a sacrifice. Such 
 are mine, and shall see me in my glory. Unto them I will give 
 the good things of the earth, and they shall feed in a fat pasture ; 
 for their hearts are right in my sight. But the hypocrites I will 
 visit ; and inasmuch as they will not abide a law here, I will send 
 them where they will have to abide a law. They are continually 
 dissatisfied with my way of working, and are found sitting in judg- 
 ment upon my words and condemning them, because they will not 
 bear the scrutiny of the devil. Such are in the gall of bitter- 
 ness. 
 
 4. While my people are ignorant, I have to bear with their 
 follies ; but they have been taught too much to be ignorant at this 
 late hour ; therefore, they will now have to pay the penalty of their 
 sins. 
 
 5. And now, behold, I give unto you a commandment, my 
 son : You must walk forth among these people, as a lion walks 
 through a thicket, and you shall expose that evil spirit which the 
 hypocrites among my people are in possession of. You shall 
 expose it wherever you find it, whether in high or low places. 
 You need not to fear how many of the people turn away and 
 oppose you, for I will stand by your side ready for any emergency. 
 You need not fear, should two-thirds of them turn against you to 
 become mine enemies. You shall maintain your ground in this 
 place until I have cut a clear way for you through this Territory. 
 I wish the false-hearted among these people to know that I am the 
 master of this Fort. I claim this spot of ground upon which to 
 commence my kingdom, and all the power of the world cannot 
 move me off it ; but when I am ready, I will send my faithful peo- 
 ple throughout this Territory to preach my gospel. The hypocrites 
 may rage and foam, and lay claim to what they have a mind, but 
 I will show them that I am the master in this place, and they shall 
 receive nothing but what I please to give unto .them. Death will 
 be their portion, for in my heart I despise traitors. 
 
464 THE HYPOCRITES. 
 
 6. I wish you to force out the hypocrites from among my peo- 
 ple as soon as you can. If you will expose them, you will speedily 
 force them to a head. I do not want the deliverance of my faith- 
 ful people to linger any longer on account of the hypocrites who 
 have held them in bondage during so many weeks. My faithful 
 people have suffered enough on account of the hypocrites. They 
 shall suffer no longer on their account. I will now force them out 
 of the midst of my faithful people ; and when I have separated 
 them from the faithful, I will attend to them. Should they be as 
 numerous as the faithful, or nearly so, and I see that it will be 
 difficult for them to destroy the hypocrites, I shall not call upon 
 them to slay them ; but I will come and give unto you your robe 
 and rod, and I will slay them myself. I will not overburden you 
 in this thing. You shall have an abundance of power to do the, 
 work which I shall call upon you to do. 
 
 7. You may keep yourself in readiness to meet me; for I may 
 ride "up to you suddenly while you shall be purging out the hypo- 
 crites from among my people. You must keep on the lookout for 
 me ; for I shall be round about you during the whole of the .time 
 that you will be engaged in that work ; and if I see that you are 
 in danger, I shall come unto you in an instant. I will come 
 when my presence and power are needed. You will know me 
 when you see me; for I have described myself plainly unto you. 
 Therefore, do 7 as I have commanded you, and all will be well. I 
 am the Stone and Shepherd of Israel, the Bright and Morning 
 Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION DESCRIBING THE LAST TEST PRE- 
 VIOUS TO THE COMING OF THE LORD. 
 
 No. 243. WEBER, UTAH, March 2oth, 1862. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words, and pay attention to what I am 
 about to say unto you. You say that you cannot see how you 
 can purge out the false-hearted who are in the midst of my faith- 
 ful people by taking the course which I have appointed ; that it 
 
THE LAST TEST. 465 
 
 does not matter .how you roar in their midst, and expose false 
 spirits, for after all that you may do, they will still hang together. 
 You think that the plan which I have adopted will not fully 
 answer; that unless I have something more searching than that, I 
 cannot effect a separation between the false-hearted and the faith- 
 ful ; that if I want to separate them I ought to put them through a 
 trying test, such as will purge out the false-hearted; and that I 
 cannot accomplish it in any other way. But you say that you 
 cannot see what trying test I can put them through, unless I come 
 to do it myself, which, at present, you think I am unwilling to do ; 
 for you think that I am too fond of placing the whole burden of 
 the people upon you. You say that you are entirely tired out with 
 my present course ; that week after week passes away, and nothing 
 appears to be done. You feel as though everything was at a stand- 
 still in consequence of my not coming ; that I know well enough 
 that you can do nothing with the people; and that, apparently, I 
 will not come to your assistance. You wish to know what is to be 
 done with the people ; whether I am about to come unto them to 
 put them through a test myself, or whether I intend that you 
 should put them through a test, and thereby strive to purge out 
 the false-hearted from among the faithful. You wish to know what 
 my intentions really are ; how I intend to purge out from among 
 my people all those who offend. You say that many of my people 
 are placed in such difficult circumstances as regards their property 
 and families, that you cannot see how I can possibly try them by 
 the law of consecration, should I wish to do so. You wish to 
 know what I am intending to do in such cases. 
 
 2. . I have a way to try them all, no matter what their circum- 
 stances may be. I have a strait place to put them through; and 
 I shall not, at that time, oppress you with too much mental labor. 
 I shall bring on this test, the last one, and put my people through 
 it myself. After I shall have commenced I shall soon be through 
 with it. This last test will take place at my coming. You wish 
 to know what it will be. I will tell you. I know the hearts of all 
 these people. Their intentions are all fully known to me, and I 
 shall judge them righteously. I know all their names, and I 
 understand all their works ; and, no matter how difficult their 
 circumstances may be, I can find a way to try them, which I shall 
 
466 THE LAST TEST. 
 
 do when I come. I shall command you to gather all the people 
 to the place which I shall appoint ; and I shall stand by your 
 side, and you shall call upon the people to step up and take their 
 places in the rank, and should a hypocrite step up, I shall send 
 mine angels to pick him out and take him to a place which I shall 
 appoint for all the hypocrites to stand in until I shall have placed 
 all my faithful people in the rank. My faithful people will stand 
 in one place, and the hypocrites in another. After I have done 
 this, I shall give unto you your rod, which will be just when I want 
 you to use it. But I shall first give unto you your robe, and you 
 must put it on before you place my people in the rank, even as 
 soon as you have dressed yourself in white linen. 
 
 3. I will give unto you to see the place on which you and I 
 will be called to stand, in time for my people to beautify it. I 
 shall stand with you all the time that you will be placing my peo- 
 ple in the rank. I shall keep all these particulars back until the 
 last. I will reveal them unto you in their own order. 
 
 4. When I come unto you, I shall be gentle both with you 
 and my faithful people until I have separated the hypocrites from 
 the faithful. I shall then give unto you your rod, and when you 
 shall have given your command, you may look out ; for as soon as 
 you shall have done so, you must prepare yourself for a mighty 
 shock. It will be all that you will be able to do to hold the rod, 
 even when you are well assisted. The stoutest-hearted persons 
 will have enough to do to stand upon their feet ; for I shall shake 
 the earth, and it will reel to and fro as a drunken man. People 
 will fall upon the ground as dead, and all animated nature will feel 
 as though it was impossible to live through the shock; for never 
 since this world came forth into mortality have human beings 
 been called to experience such a shock as the world of mankind 
 will witness at my coming. If they only knew what is close 
 upon them they would be striving to prepare themselves for it ; 
 but it will take them unawares. 
 
 5. When I shall have purified my Church, and cleansed this 
 Territory, I shall go to the United States, and I shall lay low the 
 inhabitants of that land by millions. I shall lay that land nearly 
 waste ; for I shall establish my kingdom upon it. More than two- 
 thirds of the inhabitants of that land are fallen spirits ; and when I 
 
THE LAST TEST. 467 
 
 shall have destroyed them, that land will be almost desolate. 
 After I have started, I shall make a slaughter. I am the Lord of 
 Hosts. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it is my will that in 
 your preaching you should be heavy on the hypocrites, and expose 
 all false spirits. Purge out as many of them as you possibly can 
 until I come to put my people through the last test ; for I shall be 
 with you speedily to remain with you. I know that you are weary 
 of struggling with these people to assist them to keep their heads 
 above water, and to overcome the devil ; but with all that you can 
 possibly do, he overcomes a number of them ; and when you see 
 it, it discourages you, and you are constrained to call upon me to 
 assist you. You feel as though the devil and the people, without 
 my interference, were too much for you ; therefore, you continue 
 to call upon me to come and assist you in a powerful manner. I 
 know your situation, and when your burden becomes too heavy 
 for you to bear, I will come and help you. I am watching over 
 you continually, and I am ready to render you assistance when- 
 ever you need it. Strive to bear up under your burden and be 
 patient until I have brought my work to a head ; and then I will 
 render you all the assistance which you could ask for. I am Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION GIVING A FULL DESCRIPTION OF A 
 
 HYPOCRITE UNDER THE FULNESS OF 
 
 THE GOSPEL. 
 
 No. 244. WEBER, UTAH, March 2ist, 1862. 
 
 i. A HYPOCRITE is a person who is double-minded; who is 
 half-hearted ; who has not a single eye to an object ; but who has 
 a two-fold object in view in what he does ; who is fearful and 
 unbelieving ; who is careless and indolent ; who is perishing by 
 darkness in the midst of a fulness of light ; who is suffering under 
 dark and miserable influences when they might enjoy light, liberty 
 
468 DESCRIPTION OF A HYPOCRITE. 
 
 and happiness ; who is calling out for more testimony of the 
 truth when he is in the midst of an abundance of testimony, but 
 who cannot see it; who professes to be a servant of the Lord, 
 but is in reality a servant of the devil; who professes to enjoy 
 the spirit of truth, but who is led by a false spirit ; who continues 
 to justify his own course, and condemns every other person who 
 does not see things as he sees them ; who takes darkness for 
 light, and light for darkness ; who cannot see his way clear, but 
 who is bewildered; who cannot truthfully understand his own 
 position ; but who flatters himself that he is one thing, when in 
 reality he is another ; who professes to have faith in my gospel, 
 but, in reality, has not. Such persons are entirely deceived by the 
 devil, and are laboring under gross mistakes, taking the spirit of 
 truth for a false spirit, and a false spirit for the spirit of truth. 
 Such have not settled faith in my work; but they ebb and flow; 
 they. are up and down, just as a spirit operates upon them, no 
 matter what kind of a spirit it may be ; and when it ceases to 
 operate upon them they fall flat in their feelings. They are good 
 for nothing only while they are operated upon. They have but 
 little or no force of character about them. They are altogether 
 governed by influences, and the influence which often operates 
 upon them is a false one, and it is the most congenial to their feel 
 ings. They do not want to put themselves about much, in order 
 to gain an influence to operate upon them ; therefore, the influ- 
 ence of the devil suits such persons, because it is always near ; 
 it needs no straining or exertion on their part. They are too lazy 
 to strive to win the influence of the Holy Ghost to lead them into 
 all truth, because they cannot obtain it unless they are willing to 
 live by every word that proceeds from my mouth, and acknowl- 
 edge my hand in all things. They cannot serve me acceptably 
 without some energy and force of character, and that does not 
 suit them. They want to go an easier way than that. They wish 
 to pass along with as little trouble as they possibly can. No per- 
 son can serve me in an acceptable manner unless he is whole- 
 hearted. This is the cause why the hypocrites are always in dark- 
 ness and misery. They cannot serve me without energy ; for it 
 requires a constant labor on their part to keep all my laws as fast 
 as I shall reveal them unto my Church, 
 
THE SAINTS MUST EXERT THEMSELVES. 469 
 
 * 
 
 2. All lazy and indolent people will be cast out of my Church; 
 for such will not abide my laws. When individuals will not abide 
 my law, my faithful people must not sympathize with them ; for it 
 is forbidden by the law of heaven. All Abraham's seed are able 
 to abide my law if they will exert themselves to do so ; but if they 
 will not exert themselves,, they will have to perish in the flesh. 
 Therefore, those of my people who intend to stand, and receive a 
 deliverance at my hands, will have to be energetic, and have force 
 of character about them ; nothing else will enable them to stand 
 through the test. Those who expect to be accepted of me, must 
 be up and doing with all their might, or they will fall short of that 
 which they are looking for. I have told my people many times 
 what they must do to win the prize, and if they lose it, it will be 
 their own fault. I have laid a small portion of my law before 
 my people, and those of them who will abide it, I will deliver. 
 Therefore, let my people run well for the prize, and win it, and 
 they shall receive it, for I will give it unto those who win it. 
 I am the Lord of Hosts; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DELIVERANCE OF 
 
 PERSONS FROM THE INFLUENCE 
 
 OF THE DEVIL. 
 
 No. 245. WEBER, UTAH, March 22nd, 1862. 
 
 i. I AM about to speak unto you again. You see some peo- 
 ple apparently departing from me, whose hearts are apparentjy 
 honest, but who need integrity and that force of character which 
 is necessary at this trying time ; and you wish to know what I am 
 am intending to do with such persons. You think that they 
 are not wilfully wicked and dishonest, fully intending to fight 
 against the truth at the risk of all consequences, choosing evil 
 rather than good, because they love it best ; that they are not wil- 
 fully perishing in the midst of light and truth, when .they could 
 save themselves. If they were as guilty as some of those who 
 
470 THE INFLUENCE OF THE DEVIL. 
 
 
 
 hive departed from me are, you consider that they would be well 
 worthy of death, and that I ought not to have any sympathy for 
 them ; but you think that these are not under equal condem- 
 nation. 
 
 2. I will promise you that I shall not spare the wilfully wicked. 
 I will spare those who are honest, but weak who in their hearts 
 love truth and righteousness, but have not a sufficient amount of 
 integrity of heart to stand to the truth in this trying time; who 
 have been overcome by false spirits in consequence of advantages 
 having been taken with them by other persons who were not only 
 overcome by the devil, but who in their hearts were also wicked. 
 
 3. There have been such wicked persons in my Church, who, 
 because they have had the power, have aided the devil to ob- 
 tain power over those who were closely connected with them by 
 family ties, and other bonds of friendship ; and a number of my 
 people have been overcome and have departed from me, and are 
 now suffering under the influence of the devil, on account of those 
 wilful and wicked hypocrites. They have worked against me with 
 all their power, and have sought to break my hold on mankind. 
 But, as I live, I will pay them for it all ; but the virtuous, the 
 truthful and the honest whom they have given the devil the advan- 
 tage over, I will favor with another chance when those cursed 
 hypocrites shall be dead. The fowls of the air, and the wild 
 beasts of the field shall eat their corrupt and rotten carcasses. 
 They shall not be favored with a grave ; their day is over. But I 
 will give unto the weak and honest whom they have overcome, 
 another chance, under more favorable circumstances than what 
 they were placed in when they were overcome by those" wilful 
 hypocrites. I will give unto them a fair chance for their lives, 
 an^d I will see what they will do at a time when they cannot have 
 the least shadow of a doubt in my work. Inasmuch as they were 
 taken advantage of by others, in the days of their weakness, I will 
 see how they will act when they shall have seen my power ; but if 
 they do not then walk up and do their duty, I will cut them off. 
 
 4. When weak-minded people give way to the devil, and he 
 obtains the upper hand of them, it is unlawful for me to deliver 
 them out of his hands until I come with the. power of the gospel ; 
 until then, I have to let them go where the devil chooses to lead 
 
THE INFLUENCE OF THE DEVIL. 471 
 
 them. To deliver such a person out of the hands of the devil, I 
 should have to manifest a great degree of power, even more than 
 the law of heaven allows me to use while I am only giving the 
 keys of the holy priesthood. While I am thus engaged, I cannot 
 manifest much power. I am compelled by law to confine myself 
 to one thing at a time. I can, however, while I am giving the the- 
 ory of my gospel, liberate a person from a fallen spirit, if that spirit 
 has not obtained possession of him ; but if it has, I am compelled 
 to let it remain with him until I can, according to the law, bring 
 the power of the gospel. 
 
 5. When the devil obtains the full power over a people, it takes 
 the full power of the priesthood to break his hold and to conquer 
 him. It requires not only the theory, but also the power of the 
 gospel to accomplish it; consequently, when the devil has obtained 
 the full possession of a person, he lawfully holds him in his grasp 
 until the power of the priesthood comes and liberates him. But 
 if, while I am revealing the theory of the gospel, the devil buffets 
 and tempts a person, and that person does not wholly give up to 
 him, but fights against him and tries to assist himself and help 
 my holy angels to liberate him, I can lawfully assist that person, 
 and deliver him out of his hands. But if a person has fully given 
 himself up to the devil, he has to be taken out of the hands of the 
 destroyer independently of his own exertions. Therefore, let my 
 people be aware of what they are doing, and not give way to the 
 devil, but shun all temptation, that it may be well with them ; for 
 lo, I come, I come, I come speedily ; even the Lord of Hosts. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE IMPRISONMENT 
 OF PETER MOSS. 
 
 No. 246. WEBER, UTAH, March 22nd, 1862. 
 
 i. I AM in a hurry to speak unto you again, although I know 
 that it is very straining upon your mental powers to write from 
 my mouth so much at once ; nevertheless I am compelled through 
 
472 IMPRISONMENT OF PETER MOSS. 
 
 the force of circumstances to speak often unto you at this time. 
 I am just upon the point of coming unto you, to remain with 
 you, and to speak unto you personally. You will need to see 
 me very soon. This is as near as I can now tell you the time of 
 my coming. You will soon be placed in a position where you will 
 not be able to proceed without my powet. The devil is closing 
 in upon you from all around, and he is about to try what he 
 can do. 
 
 2. My people must remain at home as much as possible. 
 When they go abroad among mine enemies, they are in danger of 
 being trapped by them. It is not safe for them to go among their 
 enemies ; therefore, if they wish to be safe, let them stop in this 
 place. But when they are compelled to go abroad in search of 
 cattle, quite a number of them must go together ; for should a few 
 of mine enemies see a number of my people together, they will not 
 molest them. If my people will do as I command them, I will 
 take good care of them. Some of my people have been disobe- 
 dient, and have run about from place to place in great danger, 
 and if I had not guarded them, they would have suffered by the 
 abuses of mine enemies. I have protected them so far, but if 
 they do not hearken unto my words, and obey them, I will not 
 continue to protect them. 
 
 3. Mine enemies have now one of the members of my Church 
 in their hands ; but had he asked counsel of my servant Joseph, 
 he would not be in that trap. I suffered him to fall into their 
 hands in order that others might learn from his disaster. Never- 
 theless, he is in my hands, and I will bring all things aright in his 
 case. My hand is in that affair. Let his parents rest themselves 
 contented, and I will work all things well for him. When my 
 people do as I command them they will always be right. 
 
 4. I shall bring things to a head in mine own way. Mine 
 enemies will have to come to the point to which I wish to bring 
 them. I can make them do my will. My people will not be put 
 to the necessity of going out of this place after many more cattle 
 for Church purposes; they are about through with that tedious 
 work. It will not be needful for any of my people to go out of 
 this place many more times, on any account whatever ; for I am 
 about to wind up my affairs with my people, and also with mine 
 enemies. 
 
THE FAIHFUL WILL BE GREATLY BLESSED. 473 
 
 5. I shall pour out my spirit upon my faithful people in a 
 powerful manner, and they will feel like lions; and the false- 
 hearted will tremble and fear, and withdraw from their midst ; for 
 it' will lay hold on them as pain lays hold of a woman in travail 
 when the time of her deliverance has come. I shall separate my 
 people by the power of my spirit. The hypocrites will not be able 
 to partake of it. They will strive to get out of its way. It will 
 make them miserable, for they cannot enjoy it as my faithful peo- 
 ple can. To the faithful it will produce happiness ; but to the 
 unfaithful, misery. I wish the false-hearted to get out of the midst 
 of my people as soon as they can. They must understand that I 
 shall not trifle with them. It is of no use for people to flatter 
 themselves that they will meet with a deliverance at my hands if 
 they will not abide my law. They might as well withdraw now as 
 to wait until I send mine angels to pick them out. I shall deal 
 honestly with them. They know the conditions on which I can 
 deliver them. 
 
 6. I am well pleased with some of my people, but displeased 
 with others of them. It is hard for me to deal with some who are 
 in the midst of my people. They keep my wrath burning against 
 them continually through the unprincipled course which they take. 
 They do not appear to make use of their common senses, no 
 matter how much I tell them what I require at their hands. They 
 either do not understand me, or they are determined that they will 
 not do my will. 
 
 7. You must come out heavy upon the false-hearted who are 
 among my people, and pur-ge out as many of them as you possibly 
 can, and I will be with you and watch over you while you are 
 doing so. I shall continue to purge out the hypocrites until I 
 come to settle all difficulties with all parties. Those who are now 
 found filthy, will remain filthy until death has been inflicted upon 
 them as the penalty for their sins; and those who are found right- 
 eous among my people, shall be righteous still ; for I know what 
 course thev will all take. I have tried them, so that I know them, 
 and I will bring all things right with them. Let the faithful con- 
 tinue to trust in me ; for I am their Shepherd, and I will defend 
 their rights, and bring them off more than conquerers. I am with 
 them unto the end. Even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
474 THE PAYMENT OF DEBTS. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE PAYMENT OF 
 DEBTS BY APOSTATES. 
 
 No. 247. WEBER, UTAH, March 24th, 1862. 
 
 1. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; for lo, I come quickly to plead 
 your case with the inhabitants of this Territory in a way that they 
 will understand me. They seemingly cannot understand the 
 theory of my gospel; but they will understand that which will 
 come next. 
 
 2. I stood by your side yesterday while you were addressing 
 my people, and I dictated your words while you spoke unto them, 
 and although you preached a good and penetrating sermon, I shall 
 preach unto them a still better one. I want you to set things on 
 the move, both in the midst of my people and among mine 
 enemies abroad, and my holy angels shall render you all the assist- 
 ance which your circumstances may require. You need not to 
 fear when trouble seems to disturb this long calm which has 
 existed both among my people and among mine enemies abroad ; 
 for trouble will roll right upon you, and upon my faithful people ; 
 and the apostates who go out from among them will be the ring- 
 leaders of this trouble. They will be the means of stirring up the 
 trouble ; for the devil of all devils is in their midst spurring and 
 inspiring them to make a disturbance among my faithful people. 
 They will invite the devils from all around to come up to this 
 place to, as they suppose, assist them to destroy my faithful peo- 
 ple. They are the most corrupt and blood thirsty of all mine 
 enemies, for Lucifer, the devil, is continually inspiring them. He 
 will speedily run them to a head to a point where they can get 
 no further ; and that will be the last of them. I have now told 
 you who will commence the test. You must keep an eye on 
 them. 
 
 3. And inasmuch as the apostates have consecrated their 
 property, both by oath and deed, it is justly mine according to 
 their own agreement, and they shall pay their just debts. I wish 
 them to understand that they own nothing. What they call theirs, 
 
THE PAYMENT OF DEBTS. 475 
 
 is mine, for they gave it unto me, and I wish them all to under- 
 stand that I shall hold it. If they wish to go to the devil they 
 shall not take away my property with them. If they are babes 
 and fools big enough to let the devil fool them, they cannot fool 
 me ; for I will either make them walk up to the covenant which 
 they have made with me, or else I will strip them of all they have; 
 and if they leave me, they shall leave naked and stripped of all 
 that they have. The devil that fools them cannot fool me. They 
 may call upon their fellow devils and devils' slaves from all around 
 to fight against me, and the sooner that they gather together, the 
 sooner I shall come to release my faithful people. I want them 
 to make haste ; and what they do, I want them to do it quickly. 
 
 4. My servant, the steward, shall make out a bill against all 
 those who apostatize, of all that they have received out of the 
 store-house, and hand it to them, and they must pay it before they 
 shall be permitted to move at all. And if there are some who 
 wish to go over to the devil, who cannot settle their bills, they 
 must call upon some of their fellow hypocrites to assist them to do 
 so. I should think that their brethren would be willing to do 
 almost anything to liberate them out of the hands of such a tyrant 
 as they think that I am. I am hard on all devils' slaves, even 
 those whom I have enlightened as I have enlightened these peo- 
 ple. They know too much to be permitted to act like devils ; for 
 w v here I have given much, I require much. When people are in 
 the possession of devils, they always think that my course is hard. 
 They may know that when I am hard on them they are in the 
 possession of false spirits ; and I am compelled to destroy false 
 spirits, even if I have to destroy the persons possessed by them at 
 the same time; but the devil makes such persons believe that they 
 are right, although they know that they are as miserable as they 
 possibly can be. If such ever knew anything about the operations 
 of my spirit, they know that it produces peace and happiness ; but 
 apostates know that they have no such feelings ; for they are as 
 miserable as the devil can possibly make them, and they want to 
 destroy everything that they possibly can. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you must continue 
 to purge out from among my faithful people as many of the hypo- 
 crites as you possibly carr; and while you are doing so, you must 
 
47 6 R. J. LIVINGSTONE AND J. O. MATHER CALLED. 
 
 keep on the lookout for me ; for I am round about you continu- 
 ally. Be of good courage, for you have nothing to fear. I will 
 speak unto you again speedily. I shall now speak unto you often 
 until I come to remain with you. You will be satisfied with my 
 way of working with you from this time henceforth. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CALLING RICHARD J. LIVINGSTONE 
 
 AND JOHN O. MATHER TO THE 
 
 APOSTLESHIP. 
 
 No. 248. WEBER, UTAH, March 25th, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I am come to speak unto 
 you concerning the apostleship. I called upon you, some time 
 ago, to organize a quorum of twelve apostles, and I told you that 
 I did not need more than that number at that time. But it is 
 now wisdom in me to call two more men to the apostleship. I 
 have an object in view in doing so. I want men of integrity to 
 fill the office of apostles, such as will not sit down to be run over 
 by devils ; men who have confidence both ' in me and in them- 
 selves; who feel themselves of too dignified a character to sit 
 down and listen to damned spirits ; for those who do so are a dis- 
 grace to the holy priesthood, and I will have none such in the 
 apostleship. I want those that will conduct themselves in such a 
 manner that my holy spirit can continually abide with them, to 
 lead them into all truth ; such as are always faithful before me 
 whose hearts are honest who are honorale before me, and not 
 treacherous such I delight in. They shall be the chief rulers in 
 my kingdom, and their seed after them shall be honored in the 
 midst of my people forever. I am the Lord. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I make known unto you those whom I 
 have called. I have called Richard John Livingstone and John 
 O. Mather to the office of apostles ; and you shall lay your hands 
 
THE APOSTLES. 477 
 
 upon them and ordain them to that office, for their hearts are 
 honest before me, and I have confidence in them. And inas- 
 much as they will be faithful, they will bring many thousands to a 
 knowledge of the truth, and I will endow them with all the power 
 that they may stand in need of until their mission is ended. I 
 will speedily burst asunder the fetters that now bind them, and 
 they shall be like lions let loose among lambs ; they shall tear 
 asunder, and none shall deliver out of their hands. Millions of 
 the warriors of heaven shall go before them to tear up and destroy 
 everything that rises up against them ; for I am the Lord, and I 
 will tear asunder and waste away everything that opposes my ser- 
 vants unto the end. My faithful servants, the apostles, shall be like 
 lion's whelps they shall continue to grow in strength ; they shall 
 tear asunder and destroy every enemy that they shall lay their 
 grasp on. Their grasp shall never be broken by an enemy ; for 
 I, the Lord, am their strength. I love the faithful ; my whole 
 delight is in them, and I will fight their battles forever. 
 
 3. I do not care about having a great many men to com- 
 mence my work with. If one-half of those who have yielded 
 obedience unto the fulness of my gospel should depart from me, 
 even then I should have sufficient left to commence my work 
 with ; for I do not look unto men upon the earth for power. I 
 shall furnish the power to establish my kingdom upon the earth, 
 and to overthrow the devil ; for I have an abundance of it. I do 
 not need to employ all my power to break the devil's hold off 
 Abraham's seed. When I have once made a start, my people will 
 see what they have to trust to. I will take the sharp edge off the 
 devil. He will not, after I have once made a breach upon him, 
 look as large as he now does ; but his servants will fear and trem- 
 ble ; their hearts will be smitten, and they will begin to go down 
 from the time that I shall first manifest my power. I shall shake 
 the whole earth, and all flesh will feel the shock ; and from that 
 time all embodied fallen spirits will be heart smitten; but my 
 chosen people will be encouraged, and rise up and gain strength. 
 They will become strong; but the opposite race will become 
 weak. This will be the commencement of my power; after that, 
 I shall tear up, break asunder and waste away until I shall have 
 purified the earth and made it a celestial abode ; for the hour of 
 
47 8 THE COMING OF THE LORD. 
 
 my judgment is come. Therefore, let all flesh prepare themselves 
 for a visit from me, for I am now coming to pay them one. 
 
 4. I wish all my servants who intend to stand faithful unto me 
 to prepare themselves with all diligence to preach the fulness of 
 my gospel ; for I require it at their hands. I will fight the battles 
 of my people. I shall never call upon them to fight much, if any. 
 I will attend to my own duty ; and let my people attend to theirs. 
 If they will do so, all will go on right. I now give unto you no 
 nore. I am the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING HOW THE EARTH WILL BE 
 SHAKEN AT THE COMING OF THE LORD. 
 
 No. 249. WEBER, UTAH, March 26th, 1862. 
 
 1. I WISH to speak unto you concerning my coming; for it is 
 necessary that you should understand more about it. How shall 
 I come? and by what means shall I shake all nature? I shall 
 bring all my power, even the whole army of heaven, with me to 
 shake the world and ail things which it contains. I only need to 
 bring a few of mine angels to cleanse this Territory. Mine army 
 will be scattered throughout the whole earth, and large numbers 
 of them, yea, even millions of them, will be placed at the head of 
 each of the governments of the earth. 
 
 2. When I give unto you your rod, and you shall have given 
 your command, I shall give my command to the remaining chief 
 generals of the army of heaven, and they will all give their separate 
 commands in the different places where they will be stationed. 
 While a small portion of mine army lays low mine enemies in this 
 Territory, the remainder of mine army will shake all the thrones 
 upon the earth to their center, and all the kings and rulers of the 
 earth will be heart smitten. They will feel as though their natural 
 strength had left them, and they will never regain it. After I have 
 given them a shake, and broken down their spirits, I will keep 
 them *down. After I have once smitten them with terror, I will 
 
HOW THE EARTH WILL BE SHAKEN. 479 
 
 crowd heavily upon them. The devil will not then feel as large 
 as he now does. 
 
 3. The army of heaven are all horsemen they will all come 
 on horses ; and when they drop, at once, upon the earth, they will 
 make it shake and reel as a drunken man. This earth exists in 
 space, and moves in its orbit. It is situated near the center of 
 space ; and when it has made one more move, or, in other words, 
 become celestial, it will be placed in the central portion of space, 
 which is beyond all the power of evil. From the time of the 
 creation of a world until it has arrived to the point at which this 
 world has arrived, it has to fight its way through evil, being as- 
 sisted by power from above. And in consequence of the manner 
 in which the earth now floats in space, it cannot bear more than a 
 certain weight before it gives way. It will not bear a great deal 
 more than what is now upon it. It is even now loaded down ; 
 and when two hundred millions of an army, with their horses and 
 all their equipage of war, drop down upon it, it will be over- 
 balanced and borne down in space, and it will reel to and fro like 
 a drunken man by the sudden shock which it will receive. I shall 
 not have the whole army of heaven with me, only when I come to 
 commence my work ; for the earth would not bear them continu- 
 ally. I shall only have as many of them on the earth as it will 
 bear even sufficient to do the work which I have to do. There- 
 fore, one portion of mine army will be upon the earth, and the 
 other portion will be in heaven. They will change about as 
 suits me. They are all delivered into my hands, and are subject 
 to me; and I will make all things work well. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you must run things 
 up to a head as soon as you possibly can ; for we are all ready to 
 drop down upon the earth as soon as you shall have done so. 
 You must do so with all your might, and put away from you all 
 fear of consequences which may arise from the course which I 
 shall lead you to take. I am just upon the point of coming unto 
 you, and you will see me to your satisfaction. I am now waiting 
 until you have run things up to a head ; and when you have done 
 so, I shall then be compelled by law to come and liberate you ; 
 but until then, I cannot come. I will lead you aright. 
 
 5. Let all my people abide your counsel, and not* run into 
 
480 CONCERNING THE ARMY OF HEAVEN. 
 
 things before they are sent. I know that they are very restless to 
 run into mischief with mine enemies before the time. Let them 
 be contented until the proper time ; for they will be let loose soon 
 enough ; it is right on their heels. Let them prepare themselves 
 for the test, and they will see as much as will satisfy them. Let 
 this suffice for the present, and I will shortly speak unto you again. 
 I am the Son of the Eternal Father ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE MANNER IN WHICH 
 
 THE ARMY OF HEAVEN WILL RECEIVE THE 
 
 COMMANDS AT THE COMING OF 
 
 THE LORD. 
 
 No. 250. WEBER, UTAH, March 2yth, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he who shuts, and no one opens, and that 
 opens, and no one shuts ; even the Son of the Eternal Father. 
 I am about to speak unto you again. I have shown unto you 
 how I intend to shake all nature. You may wish to know whether 
 I have had a portion of mine army stationed in this place, or not; 
 and if I have, whether they have ever stood upon the earth, or 
 not. I will inform you. I have had a portion of mine army here 
 to guard my faithful people from wicked men and disembodied 
 devils. If I had not done so, my people would have all been 
 destroyed long ago. A portion of mine army has been in this 
 place ever since you first arrived here ; it came with you, and has 
 since remained. If I had not guarded you, Satan would have 
 destroyed you before this time. 
 
 2. The warriors of heaven have not, as yet, planted their feet 
 upon the earth. They have a fulness of knowledge, and have 
 power over all elements, even power to cut their way through space 
 almost as quick as thought. They have power to move, even from 
 one end of the earth to the other, in a few seconds. There is 
 nothing on the earth that can travel as swiftly as they can. Those 
 of them who have guaided this place have been stationed in the 
 
CONCERNING THE ARMY OF HEAVEN. 481 
 
 air at a short distance from the earth ; for it is unlawful for them 
 to stand upon the earth until I come unto you and give unto you 
 your robe and rod. I shall be the first person of all the heavenly 
 host to descend upon the earth ; but I shall not do so when I give 
 unto you your robe. My horse will not, even then, plant his feet 
 upon the earth ; but I shall bend down and give unto you your 
 robe. My horse's feet will be near the ground, but they will not 
 touch it. Both I and my holy angels have the power to stand 
 anywhere in space, because we have a fulness of knowledge and 
 power over all things. My horse will not set his feet upon the 
 ground until you have a place beautified to stand upon ; but when 
 this is done my horse shall stand upon the ground by your side, 
 and then I will give unto you your rod. My horse will be the 
 first celestial horse to set his feet upon the earth. A portion of 
 mine army will be with me ; but they will have to wait until you 
 have given your command before their horses can descend to the 
 earth. 
 
 3. When I come to you, all the heavenly hosts will be stationed 
 in their various places, ready to descend upon the earth at once, 
 which they will do after I shall have given my command The^ 
 earth will then reel and shake, and lower in space, as I have 
 before said unto you. Oh, how the wicked men of the earth will 
 be heart smitten ! 
 
 4. If only a small portion of my army will be needed to slay 
 mine enemies in this Territory, how shall the other" portions of my 
 army, which will be stationed throughout the nations of the earth, 
 know when to descend upon the earth, seeing that they will be so 
 far away from you? for it would seem to you impossible for them 
 to hear your command. I will inform you what course I am 
 about to take in order to make them know when you will give 
 your command, so that they may descend upon the earth at once. 
 Before I come unto you, I shall have portions of mine army 
 placed at the head of every government upon the earth, and I 
 shall visit them all before I come unto you, and tell the general 
 of each of them that I am coming unto you. I shall place them 
 all in readiness before I come unto you. When I go to the first 
 of them, I shall tell him that he is the first that I have visited, and 
 that I have to visit the others and inform them also that I am 
 
482 CONCERNING THE ARMY OF HEAVEN. 
 
 coming unto you, and I shall tell him how long I shall be in visit- 
 ing* them. They will all know perfectly, even to one minute, 
 when I shall visit you ; and I shall have ambassadors by my side, 
 and as soon as I am about to give my command, they will fly 
 Jike lightning to every part of the earth where portions of mine 
 army will be stationed, and inform them that I was giving the 
 command when they left me. They will all then descend upon 
 the earth at once with all their equipage of war. We have per- 
 fect order in our army. We have no such confusion as there is 
 among the armies of the earth : we make true calculations ; but 
 they do not understand perfect order. Therefore, my son, con- 
 tinue to hold yourself in readiness, and I will come unto you 
 speedily, for things are now nearly at a head between mine 
 enemies and my people ; they cannot run much longer. I will 
 soon satisfy you. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 REVELATION PROMISING THAT THE ENEMIES WILL 
 
 NOT BE PERMITTED TO COME UP AGAINST 
 
 THE SAINTS UNTIL THE RIGHT TIME. 
 
 No. 251. WEBER, UTAH, March 28th, 1862. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword. I see that your feelings are 
 somewhat unsettled at the thought of that which lies before you. 
 You see trouble threatening you from mine enemies abroad, and 
 you want to know my mind concerning them. You say that you 
 thought that I did not intend to wait any longer for them, seeing 
 that they disappointed my people when they threatened to come 
 against them ; that I was going to take the will for the deed, and 
 trouble no more about them; that they had the disposition to 
 come up to this place to put all my people to death, and that they 
 would have dene so had they not been overruled; that you can- 
 not see what more I can require of them to warrant their utter 
 
CONCERNING THE ENEMIES. 483 
 
 destruction ; that I know that they are filled with the desire to 
 shed the blood of my people ; that you are satisfied that I have 
 held them powerless, and that I have nothing to thank them for ; 
 therefore, you cannot see how I can be waiting for them to do 
 anything more than what they have done ; and you wish to know 
 whether I am waiting for them to come up against my people, 
 or not. 
 
 2. I am not waiting for them; but I am waiting more particu- 
 larly for my people. I want the hypocrites cast out from among 
 them as soon as possible, even all that can be cast out before I 
 come. But while I am doing this, mine enemies are being worked 
 up. The severe way in which I shall deal with those who aposta- 
 tize from my Church will work them up, and they would come up 
 -against my people in great numbers should I permit them to do 
 so ; but I shall take them in time. If they had come up against 
 my people, when they attempted to do so, I would have suffered 
 them to come into this Fort, and I would have slain them here ; 
 but seeing that they failed to come at that time, I shall not suffer 
 them to come into this place when they make their next attempt. 
 They will be about ready to come up again by the time that I 
 have purged from among my people a few more hypocrites. I 
 have withdrawn my spirit from the hypocrites, and the devil is 
 leading them away one by one. They are clubbing together, and 
 making their arrangements for going away ; but I shall catch them 
 upon the move and stop them from going far from this place. If 
 they had intended to get far away before the day of my coming, 
 they should have apostatized some time ago. They have delayed 
 their apostacy till too late an hour for them to get far away from 
 this place, even if they were to start immediately ; consequently, 
 they may reconcile themselves to their fate, for I am coming 
 speedily, and I will send them home. They need not think that 
 they can get out of my way by running to this, that, or the other 
 place. They might as well stand their ground. They will gain 
 nothing by attempting to run away, for I shall find them, no mat- 
 ter where they go. 
 
 3. You may ask me this question : "If mine enemies attempt 
 to come up -against this people, how near this place shall I allow 
 them to come?" I shall pay very little attention to them at all; 
 
484 CONCERNING THE HYPOCRITES. 
 
 for I am not waiting for them. I am waiting for my faithful peo- 
 ple to purge the hypocrites from among them ; and as soon as they 
 shall have purged out as many of them as they can by taking the 
 course that they are now taking with them, even by exposing them, 
 I will come and deliver them. I will take good care that mine 
 enemies do not come against my people before that is done. I 
 will keep them away until the right time. I shall work all things 
 aright with them. You do not wish me to per-mit them to come 
 within sight of my people ; for you say that my people have all 
 the burden placed upon them that they are now able to bear; 
 and you think that if I were to bring mine enemies into their 
 sight while they are burdened as they are now, and not having as 
 yet seen me, I should be very unreasonable ; tha I should destroy 
 all my faithful people ; that I should entirely overpower them, and 
 consequently they would deny me, and fall into the hands of the 
 devil; and that all the blame would be justly placed upon me. 
 But I can assure you that I shall not destroy them by placing too 
 much upon them; for I will give unto them an abundance of 
 strength to meet every painful circumstance which lies before 
 them. 
 
 I now add no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen 
 and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING PREPARATIONS TO BE 
 MADE FOR THE COMING OF LORD. 
 
 No. 252. WEBER, UTAH, March 2pth, 1862. 
 
 i. Lo, I COME, I come, I come. Therefore, look out for me. 
 You have some preparations to make, my son, before you will, in 
 every respect, be prepared for me. I told* you some time ago 
 that you must have a white horse. He must be large and gentle, 
 and in good order, even beautiful to behold, and one of the best 
 that can be found. My horse is very large and beautiful. There 
 are no horses upon the earth that can be compared with him for 
 beauty ; and it is my will that you should have as large and fine a 
 
COMMANDED TO PURCHASE A HORSE. 485 
 
 horse as can conveniently be found. My people must buy one of 
 that description for you as soon as they can. There must be no 
 time lost in attending to that matter. I have delayed this item of 
 business until the last, because I did not wish to put my people to 
 unnecessary trouble in taking care of horses so long before the time 
 that they would be needed ; but now it must be attended to im- 
 mediately. Four horses will be needed, as I have before informed 
 you. My people may have the other three horses in their own 
 possession, and if they have, they must let my servants have them; 
 but if they have not, they must be obtained. You must ride a 
 white horse, and my servant John Banks must ride a black horse, 
 and my servant Richard Cook must ride a red horse, and my 
 servant John Parson must ride a pale horse. These horses must 
 be found immediately. 
 
 2. I will now show my people what Jthey have longed to see. 
 If there are any of them absent from this place who wish to do my 
 will, they had better gather into this place, even to the main body 
 of my people, immediately. And if my people wish to be favored 
 by me, it is time for them to cease running about from place to 
 place. They should begin to settle themselves here, and prepare 
 for me. I do not wish to tell them the exact day of my coming. 
 They may judge of its near approach by the signs of the times. 
 Let them consider what mine enemies are doing, and the plans 
 which they have laid to catch them. They have fined a number 
 more of my servants ; and it is their intention to come up to this 
 place with a sufficient force (as they suppose) to take .away those 
 for whom they have writs issued. But I will promise them that 
 I shall catch them. I know what mine enemies are doing, and I 
 shall lead them a long way. 
 
 3. My people must know that my coming is very near. They 
 must know that mine enemies must come up against them in a 
 very short time, if they act according to their own law; and I can 
 assure my people that they would do so if I do not prevent them ; 
 for they now feel strong because they believe that the revelations 
 which I have given have all failed, and they now think that I have 
 nothing to do with this work ; that they are right, but that this 
 work is of the devil. Last year they were very weak, but during 
 the last three months they have gathered strength wonderfully. 
 
486 THE OPINION OF THE ENEMY. 
 
 They very much wanted a prophet last summer; but now they 
 can do without one, for they feel strong. They now think that by 
 coming up here they can put an end to the works of the devil 
 which are carried on in this place by a very smart devil ; for they 
 think that my servant Joseph is the smartest devil that ever lived, 
 and that all other devils are not fit to hold a candle to him. 
 They consider him the master-piece of all devils ; and they think 
 right in that respect, for he will show them where the devils be- 
 long, and he will put them all in their right places. They swear 
 one to another, that he is the most bare-faced devil that they ever 
 saw or read of. But they say that they will endure with his abuse 
 no longer; that they will now try what he is made of. But I can 
 assure them that they have hardly begun to take abuses from him; 
 for just about the time that they will be getting ready to come up 
 against him, and try him, as they say, he will show them what 
 abuse is. They consider that his abuse unto them surpasses any- 
 thing that they ever endured before, and it has been hard for 
 them to bear it ; and if they could have prevented it, they would 
 not have borne it ; but they could not help it they had to take it. 
 
 4. Therefore, my son, make all things ready, and I will come 
 unto you long before your enemies are ready to come upon you. 
 I will promise you that you will never see them alive ; but you 
 may see some of their dead bodies. And as I have said unto you 
 before, my people may judge by the movements of mine enemies 
 that my coming will take place in a very few days. Therefore, 
 let them humble themselves greatly before me, in order that they 
 may be prepared to meet that event in an acceptable manner. 
 Let them obtain those four horses immediately. They must not 
 delay that matter. And after they have obtained them, they must 
 keep them up, and clean and feed them well until I come. They 
 may be able to obtain them two or three days before I come ; and 
 they may not obtain them one day before that time ; but should 
 they obtain them two or three days previous to that event, they 
 must take good care of them. 
 
 5. You must continue to purge out from among my people as 
 many of the hypocrites as you can. And behold, I give unto you 
 a commandment : You must stop hypocrites from going into the 
 houses of -my faithful people. You must not suffer them to mingle 
 
CONCERNING THE HYPOCRITES. 487 
 
 with my faithful people. If hypocrites go into the houses of any 
 of my faithful people, the inmates thereof shall tell them to go 
 about their business, and also tell them that if they are found 
 going into the houses of any of the faithful saints, after being once 
 notified not to du so, they will be slain ; for I will not suffer them 
 to go into their houses, breathing out poison, and seeking to 
 destroy the innocent. If they will not keep out of the houses of 
 my faithful people, they will be slain. If they wish to let the devil 
 destroy themselves, they may do so ; but they shall not have the 
 privilege to give the devil the advantage over the faithful who seek 
 to do well, and struggle to save their lives. If the hypocrites, are 
 determined to go among my faithful people to destroy them, it 
 shall be life for life ; therefore, if the hypocrites wish to live a few 
 days longer, they will keep out of the houses of my faithful people. 
 If they give the devil power over one of my faithful people, and 
 on that account I should be put to the necessity of destroying the 
 life of that person, I promise them that I will have their lives first. 
 It shall be blood for blood with them. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you shall appoint 
 my servants, the apostles, to look over this Fort and Camp, and 
 they shall go from house to house among my people, and they 
 shall teach them, and see that everything is going on aright. They 
 must look well after the hypocrites They must strive to find out 
 the feelings of all my people, and when they see a person who has 
 a false spirit ; and who is about to apostatize, they must report that 
 person to the first presidency, and such shall be dealt with right- 
 eously. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Bright and Morning 
 Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
PREPARATIONS FOR THE COMING OF THE LORD. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE GATHERING OF 
 
 CATTLE, AND FURTHER PREPARATIONS 
 
 FOR THE COMING OF THE LORD. 
 
 No. 253. WEBER, UTAH, April ist, 1862. 
 
 1. You say that it appears very likely to you, that after mine 
 enemies have placed fines upon my people, they will make a 
 general drive of all the cattle which belong to my people to one 
 place, and dispose of them in order to pay the fines which they 
 have imposed upon my people. By this means they think that 
 they will be enabled to draw out quite a number of my people to 
 look after their cattle ; and that if they succeed in doing so, they 
 will take them prisoners. It is a trap that they are laying to catch 
 as many of my people as they possibly can ; therefore, my peo- 
 ple must be aware of them. If my servant, the steward, would 
 send a number of men out upon the range to gather up the cattle 
 which belong to my people and bring them to this, place, he would 
 act wisely. He should head mine enemies in this matter ; and 
 should my people succeed in gathering together and securing all 
 their cattle, they must keep them up for a day or two, until mine 
 enemies have made their drive, after which, my people may turn 
 their cattle out again in a fresh place, and keep an eye on them 
 for a few days. I will force things up to a head quickly. But if 
 mine enemies head my people and drive all their cattle into one of 
 their settlements, my people must not go after them to bring them 
 back, and thereby be caught by their enemies. They must let 
 them go. But my people will not be too late to gather up their 
 cattle, if they are wide awake. They must strive to outwit mine 
 enemies and confound them ; if they would do as I command 
 them, they would always outwit mine enemies. 
 
 2. I see that my people have neither teams nor wagons suf- 
 ficient to move them all away from this place at once ; but as soon 
 as I shall have cut off mine enemies out of the way, there will be 
 plenty of teams and wagons which my people may obtain without 
 putting themselves to much inconvenience. I will place within 
 the reach of my people an abundance of everything which they 
 
CONCERNING THE HORSES AND SWORDS. 489 
 
 may need. They should have all their wagons in order ready for 
 a move. I have already spoken unto them a time or two con- 
 cerning this matter; and if they have attended to it, it is all right ; 
 but if they have not, they must do so immediately, for I shall be 
 with them suddenly, and they will then have no time to attend to 
 these things. 
 
 3. I see that you have succeeded in obtaining a white horse ; 
 and you wish to know what I think about him, and whether he 
 will suit me, or not. He is not very large, but he is the best that 
 you can now conveniently obtain ; he will answer for the present. 
 He is not half so large as my horse is. After I shall have 
 removed the obstacle out of your way, you shall have a larger and 
 a better horse than he is ; for you will then have an abundance of 
 horses to make a selection from. You shall have the best horse 
 that can be found ; but, for the present, I will accept of the one 
 which you now have. You wish to know whether a mare will not 
 answer as well as a horse. I will answer you. Those four horses 
 of which I have spoken must be horses mares will not answer. 
 My servant John Banks should have a larger and better horse 
 than the one which they have obtained for him, for it is not at all 
 suitable ; it is too small. Therefore, my people should strive to 
 purchase a larger and a better horse for him. 
 
 4. It is my will that my servants should have four nice horses, 
 in good condition ; and that they shall have good saddles and 
 bridles, and be well rigged for the occasion. And you must have 
 your horses mane divided into seven parts, and each part plaited 
 and tied at the ends with white ribbon. The first part must hang 
 down his forehead, and the other six must hang down by the side 
 of his neck. You must have a glittering sword in your hand, and 
 my servant John Banks must hold a pair of balances in his hand, 
 and my servant Richard Cook must have a sword in his hand, 
 and must ride by your side ; and my servant John Parson must 
 carry my law, even that portion of it which I have given unto my 
 people, which is life and death ; and hell will both go before him, 
 and follow after him. Death and hell shall flee before you and 
 your three brethren ; and you shall drive the devil and all his 
 agents off the earth until the end of your missions. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Light and Life of the 
 world ; even Jesus Christ. Evert so. Amen and Amen. 
 
490 CONCERNING CONSECRATED PROPERTY. 
 
 REVELATION COMMANDING THE PROPHET NOT 
 
 TO ALLOW APOSTATES TO TAKE AWAY 
 
 CONSECRATED PROPERTY. 
 
 No. 254. WEBER, UTAH, April 3rd, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I [am he that shuts, and no one opens, and that 
 opens, and no one shuts ; and I am about to speak unto you. It 
 would be well if my people would obtain those four horses of 
 which I have spoken, and also their rigging, as soon as they 
 possibly can ; lor if they do not do so, they will not be ready 
 for me by the time that I have to come, which is almost imme- 
 diately. 
 
 2. I am about to make a move among my people. I will try 
 them and see whether they will abide my law or not. I do not 
 want any more of their hypocrisy. I will now show them that the 
 property which is held by them belongs to me. I shall now 
 assume my rights. I will not be trifled with by these foolish and 
 unprincipled people any longer; therefore, they may now prepare 
 themselves for the trial which is coming upon them. I will now 
 show them what the law of consecration is, and I will try how 
 many of them have consecrated according to the law ; and I fear 
 that when I do so, nearly one-half of them will not subscribe to 
 that law. If one-half of them do so in a proper and an acceptable 
 manner, it will be as many as I ever expected to do so at this try- 
 ing time, and thereby obtain a deliverance at my hands ; for many 
 of them have fixed their hearts upon the little property which they 
 hold in their possession ; it lies nearest to their hearts. Such are 
 hypocrites before me, and I shall not deliver them. I shall deliver 
 none but the whole-hearted. The rest are idolaters. 
 
 3. And now, behold, I give unto you a commandment : You 
 shall suffer no more apostates to take away property which they 
 have consecrated unto me both by oath and deed ; and if they 
 attempt to do so, you must appoint men to stop them on the spot. 
 If they wish to leave my people, they must leave empty-handed ; 
 they shall not take away with them that which belong to me. 
 They may call upon the devils alfr around to come and assist them 
 
CONCERNING CONSECRATED PROPERTY. 491 
 
 to take away property ; but they will see what they will gain by 
 doing so. And when my servant, the steward, needs any property 
 for Church purposes, he shall receive a note from the first presi- 
 dency, signed by their hands, and he shall go and take away that 
 portion of property specified in the note, without asking the con- 
 sent of the parties holding it ; and when he has done so, he shall 
 give the note unto them. I see that these people either do not 
 understand the law of consecration, or else they are corrupt hypo- 
 crites ; but they are not so blind and ignorant as they are fearful 
 and dishonest. You say in your feelings that you now see trouble 
 before you ; but you need not to be afraid of it. You must launch 
 right into it. I am now waiting for you to open 'the way for me. 
 As soon as you get fast with these people by enforcing my laws 
 upon them, I will come and cut off everything that stands in your 
 way. I am waiting for you to run things up to a head ; therefore, 
 do so as fast as you can, and when you are brought to the neces- 
 sity of putting people to the test, in order to enforce my law upon 
 them, you may know that I am coming unto you. Should you see 
 this take place, you may know that it will not be more than one 
 day before I come.. You must remove, and that too without 
 sympathy, either male or female, who attempts to break my law. 
 None of my faithful people shall sympathize with such persons ; 
 for if they do, they shall share the same fate. When you begin to 
 put hypocrites to death, you will stir up mine enemies abroad, and 
 they would soon come up against you if I were to permit them to 
 do so ; but I will take them in good time. You wish to know 
 what you are to do if the faithful of my people (so called) will not 
 go forth at your command and put traitors to death. You must 
 try them, and see what they will do ; and if those whom you call 
 upon first, refuse to obey your command, you must have their 
 names put down. You must then call upon others, and if they 
 refuse, you must put their names down also, and try others until 
 you have tried all my people, if it becomes necessary ; and if they 
 all refuse to obey your command, I will come and slay them 
 instantly. I shall be by your side while you are engaged in that 
 work. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, it would be well if my peo- 
 ple would obtain those four horses immediately. They must lose 
 
49 2 THE LAW OF CONSECRATION. 
 
 no time, for if they do, they will be too late, and it will be their 
 own fault, for I have given unto them an abundance of time to 
 attend to this matter. I shall bring things up to a head suddenly. 
 Up to this time I have been moving slowly ; but I will now force 
 all things between my people and mine enemies up to a head. I 
 shall now touch all parties to the quick. The false-hearted may 
 look around for places to hide themselves from my presence, and 
 from the presence of my holy angels. Therefore, my son, do as I 
 have commanded you, and I will lead you aright in all these mat- 
 ters. You will understand the movements of my spirit ; therefore, 
 act accordingly, and all will be well. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE LAW OF 
 CONSECRATION. 
 
 No. 255. WEBER, UTAH, April 5th, 1862. 
 
 i. WHAT CAN I say unto you at this time? for I see that you 
 wish to hear from me again. You wish me to keep things on the 
 move ; for you say in your feelings that you wish to see me, and 
 see me make a change in this Territory, and you shall have your 
 desire granted unto you speedily. Things are upon the move, 
 and I will control them aright. My people must be subject to 
 your counsel, and all will be right with them. They must not 
 manifest a disposition to run into anything before they are sent ; if 
 they do, they may bring trouble before the proper time. I wish 
 to have all things connected with the deliverance of my people 
 work up to a head together, in order that they may all meet and 
 burst in a proper manner at once. I will lead you aright ; there- 
 fere, let my people be controlled by me, and abide your counsel 
 in all things. They must not interrupt men who come into their 
 midst to deliver writs unto those whom they have fined for neg- 
 lecting to train. If such men are civil, they must be treated with 
 civility ; and if they bring their writs into the houses of my peo- 
 ple, my people are not obliged to receive them from their hands. 
 
THE LAW OF CONSECRATION. 493 
 
 The men who bring them can either leave them in the houses of 
 my people, or take them away again. If my people are wise they 
 will understand me. I wish to run all things up to a head to- 
 gether. If my people are not cautious and obedient they may. 
 by running too fast, bring trouble upon themselves before other 
 things are brought up to a head ; but such must not be the case, 
 and to prevent it my people must strictly abide your counsel. I 
 am at the head of #11 matters ; and if my people will be obedient 
 unto me, I will make all things work aright. 
 
 2. I shall now put the law of consecration in full force; and 
 those who rebel against it, I shall put to death. The putting of 
 my law into force will stir up mine enemies, and it will work them 
 up to ahead, if nothing else will. I only wish to work up mine 
 enemies in proportion as my people progress in my work, which 
 they can only do gradually, for I cannot bring them all at once to 
 the point at which I can deliver them. I have to train them until 
 I have brought them to a point at which I can enforce a law upon 
 them, so that I can deliver them. I have held mine enemies off 
 on account of my people not being ready for a deliverance ; for 
 they could not learn the nature of my laws, nor understand my 
 work in general, any quicker than they have done. But I shall 
 now put the law in full force among my people, and I shall also 
 let mine enemies loose; and as soon as I have done so, I shall 
 slay them. Both my people and mine enemies will come to a 
 head at once. 
 
 3. When my servant, the steward, shall be called to take 
 property from my people for Church purposes, he shall go into 
 the houses of tjje persons unto whom he shall be sent, and he 
 shall inquire into their circumstances, and by that means he will 
 come to a knowledge of their true situation ; and -if they have 
 nothing to spare, he shall not take anything from them. He shall 
 not reduce my people to-extreme poverty; but he shall leave them 
 sufficient to work upon. He shall not take away from a family 
 the last cow, or the last yoke of cattle, or the last wagon, or the 
 last horse, or the last animal of any kind which they have ; neither 
 shall he take away their household furniture, or their bedding, or 
 their clothing, unless they have more than they really need for 
 their own use. And when my steward shall inquire of any of my 
 
494 'I'HE LAW OF CONSECRATION. 
 
 people as to what property they have in their possession, they shall 
 answer him truly ; and if they have in their possession anything 
 more than what the law allows them, he shall take it away with 
 him for Church purposes ; but, as I have said, he shall not reduce 
 my peopfle to poverty. Those of my people who have not large 
 families, who have both a horse team and an ox team, must give 
 up their oxen to the steward ; but those who have large families, 
 even as many as ten in number in a family, m&y hold in their pos- 
 session, if they have them, two wagons and two yokes of cattle, 
 or one yoke of cattle and one span of horses ; this is as near as 
 such families shall be stripped. Therefore, my servant, the stew- 
 ard shall regulate himself by this law while he administers in his 
 office among my people. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Light and Life of the 
 world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE ORDER OF THE KING- 
 DOM OF GOD UPON THE EARTH. 
 
 No. 256. WEBER, UTAH, April 8th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world, even Jesus 
 Christ, and I am come to speak unto you concerning the high 
 priesthood, and also the priesthood of Aaron. Each priesthood 
 has its claims. In heaven there is only one priesthood, which is 
 the high priesthood ; but on the earth there aretwo priesthoods, 
 which are the high priesthood and the lesser priesthood. The 
 missions of the angels of heaven are of one nature the angels all 
 act under one order of priesthood. But inasmuch as there are two 
 distinct orders of priesthood upon the ea'rth, and each priesthood 
 holds separate claims, the earthly mission which is administered 
 under the order of the Lord is of a two-fold nature ; therefore, it 
 differs in some respects from the order of heaven. In heaven 
 there are twelve first generals over the whole host of 4 heaven, and 
 there are twelve other generals who are next in authority to the 
 first twelve ; there is, also, a third twelve, who are subject to the 
 
THE ORDER OF THE KINGDOM. 495 
 
 second twelve, and thus this order continues down to the last 
 order of generals. All the generals of the whole army of heaven 
 are in separate divisions, having twelve in each division, and the 
 inferior division is subject to the superior division by birthright. 
 This is the order of the generals over the whole army of heaven. 
 And in due time there will be four and twenty leading generals 
 upon the earth, as there are in heaven, and also other divisions of 
 generals below them ; so that when my kingdom shall be set up 
 on the earth, the armies of the earth will pattern after the armies 
 of heaven. You are the first general over the armies of the earth, 
 even as I am the first general over the armies of heaven ; and as I 
 am a man of war, you must be a man of war also. And in due 
 time you must have eleven more generals who must be high priests 
 by birthright, even those of the highest birthright that can be found 
 upon the earth ; and you and they will form the division of the 
 firs\ twelve generals on the earth. The second twelve generals 
 must be selected out of the priesthood of Aaron, and Aaron him- 
 self must be the first of that number. The remaining eleven must 
 be the firstborn sons of Adam, and they with Aaron will form the 
 second division of generals, each one standing in his own place, 
 according to his birthright. All the re$t of the generals who will 
 be chosen, will be chosen from the Aaronic priesthood. There will 
 only be twelve generals chosen out of the high priesthood, and 
 they will be the first twelve generals even the rulers over all 
 other generals, and all the armies of the earth must be subject to 
 them. 
 
 2. The kingdom which I shall establish upon the earth, will be 
 a temporal kingdom, even a kingdom of kings and priests unto 
 me ; and they will be the temporal ministers of the law which I 
 shall establish upon the earth ; for it belongs to them. Thus out 
 of the priesthood of Aaron, kings and rulers, generals and captains, 
 and also priests, will be called to administer the law. 'The high 
 priests will act in their own places, and will be the ministers of the 
 everlasting gospel, to carry it in power to the nations of the earth. 
 Through the high priests the gospel will go to Aaron's children, 
 which gospel is from above, and is the power of God. The high 
 priests who are from above bring the gospel with them, and 
 through the power of the gospel, which will be administered by the 
 
496 THE ORDER OF THE KINGDOM. 
 
 high priests, the faithful seed of Abraham will gain the upper hand 
 of the seed of Cain, and have a temporal kingdom established for 
 them, which is their right. The priests of Aaron entirely depend 
 upon the high priests for the power over their enemies, and to be 
 made a kingdom of kings and priests ; therefore, the powers which 
 are from above are invested in the high priests, and the powers of 
 the earth belong to Aaron's children who will be the ministers of 
 a temporal law when it shall be established upon the earth for 
 them by the high priests. If the second twelve generals of the 
 twenty-four will be chosen out of the Aaronic priesthood, what will 
 be the position of the second twelve who are apostles and high 
 priests by birthright? What will be their calling? They will be 
 ministers of the gospel, tq carry it to all nations even twelve 
 traveling apostles ; and all other high priests in the midst of the 
 nations where they may be sent will be subject unto them. But 
 they will not be called to be twelve generals like unto the first 
 twelve their's will be a different mission altogether. The first 
 twelve generals on earth will be called to represent the high priest- 
 hood on earth ; and inasmuch as the high priesthood is of a higher 
 order than the Aaronic priesthood, it must, according to the law 
 of heaven, be acknowledged the first. Therefore, if twelve chief 
 generals had not first been called out of the high priesthood, in 
 order to acknowledge that priesthood, twelve generals could never 
 have been chosen out of the Aaronic priesthood, neither could a 
 temporal kingdom be established on the earth; for the greater 
 priesthood must be acknowledged before the lesser can be the 
 higher priesthood always opens the way for the lesser priesthood. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, in due time you 
 must wear a dress suitable to your position as the first general of 
 the armies of the earth, even a royal dress ; and you shall have a 
 hat most beautiful to look upon, having seven crowns of gold upon 
 the top of it, with many diamonds set therein. You cannot dress 
 yourself in a royal dress now ; but I will tell you, when I come, 
 how you shall dress yourself to go before my people. I know 
 what you need, and I will give it unto you. The eleven generals 
 who are next unto you by birthright shall also have dresses pro- 
 vided for them suitable to the positions which they may be called 
 to hold as the chief generals of the armies of the earth. The first 
 
CONCERNING THE SPIRIT OF SYMPATHY. 497 
 
 seven shall wear crowns according to their various positions ; and 
 I will deliver the kingdoms of the earth into their hands in quick 
 succession. They shall have an abundance of territory to spread 
 themselves upon, and great multitudes of people shall be subject, 
 unto them. 
 
 4. I shall lay low the inhabitants of this earth by millions. I 
 shall lav low everything that opposes me. Therefore, as I have 
 often said unto you before, so I say unto you again, hold your- 
 self in readiness for a visit from me ; for I am drawing nearer unto 
 you every day. You will do no more than turn yourself round 
 before you see me face to face, and then you will be abundantly 
 satisfied. Therefore, hold yourself in readiness, for lo, I come 
 unto you quickly. I am the Bright and Morning Star ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION WARNING THE SAINTS AGAINST THE 
 SPIRIT OF SYMPATHY FOR TRANSGRESSORS. 
 
 No. 257. WEBER, UTAH, April loth, 1862. 
 
 i. You WISH to know why I am so backward in speaking 
 unto you. You seem to think that there must be some cause for 
 my backwardness ; for you say in your feelings thafc you have 
 never seen me so backward in speaking unto you as I seem to be 
 at the present time, and you would like to know the reason of it. 
 I will answer you. I take little or no pleasure in speaking unto 
 a number of these people who have yielded obedience unto the 
 fulness of my gospel, for they are guilty of the sin of ingratitude. 
 They neither lay my words nor the principles of my gospel to 
 heart, and I cannot save the lives of such. But they will do 
 almost anything else. They will leave their homes and come 
 here and consecrate their property and give it up when I call for 
 it. They will swear the oath which I have placed before my peo- 
 ple, and they will go where they are sent, no matter where it may 
 be. They will do all this ; but they will not lay the principles of 
 my gospel to heart and seek to learn and understand them, so 
 
498 THE CARELESS AND INDOLENT. 
 
 that they may be prepared to preach them to those who now sit in 
 darkness. They are spending their most precious time to little or 
 no purpose ; for they think about themselves, and no one else. 
 If they can save themselves, it is about all that they think of. A 
 person who can do no more than save his own life in my king- 
 dom, is not "worth much ; he is little better than nothing, even 
 next to nothing, and he might as well be out of existence ; for if 
 he lives, he lives to little purpose. There are those of this class 
 among my people. Their minds are like the fool's eye upon 
 almost everything else but that which they ought to be upon. I 
 gathered my people to this place in order that I might teach them 
 the principles of the fulness of my gospel, so that they might be 
 fully prepared to preach them to those who are now sitting in 
 darkness ; and if they neglect to learn those principles, they might 
 as well have remained away from this place ; for I shall not ac- 
 complish, through them, the purpose for which I gathered them 
 here, even to prepare them to carry my gospel to those who now 
 sit in darkness ; for if they do not understand it themselves, they 
 will not be able to preach it unto others. Those who possess my 
 spirit to any great extent will strive to learn the principles of my 
 gospel, in order that they may be made a blessing unto their fel- 
 low creatures who are now sitting in darkness. 
 
 2. My people stand in their own light. They labor against 
 their own interest. They block up my way so that I am com- 
 pelled to work with them so slowly that it takes me an un- 
 reasonable length of time to bring them up to that point at which 
 I can deliver them. If I could have worked with them faster, I 
 should have delivered them long ago ; but they are so slow that 
 they are wearing themselves out, and even destroying themselves; 
 and for that which is the result of their neglect of duty, they con- 
 tinually blame me ; but I cannot bring things up to a head only 
 in proportion as I can prepare my people; and if they are slow 
 to hearken unto and obey my words, I am compelled to bring 
 things up to a head slowly. I cannot work with my people faster 
 than what they will permit me. 
 
 3. I now wish to bring them to another point, even to the last 
 point to which they can be brought before their deliverance ; but 
 many of them are unprepared for it it will pinch them tightly. 
 
 
CONCERNING THE SPIRIT OF SYMPATHY. 499 
 
 They are so full of sympathy for the devil and his servants that 
 they do not wish to see them hurt. They will cry over them, and 
 plead with me for them, that I may not hurt them ; and if they 
 see -that I do not hear and answer their prayers, and let the devil 
 go on destroying everything as he has done, they mourn greatly. 
 They say: "O Father, have mercy on him, and do not hurt 
 him, for we cannot bear to see him hurt. We know that we are 
 in his hands, and that he has punished us all our days, but O 
 Father, do not hurt him, for we cannot bear to see him hurt, 
 although we know that he has never taken pity on us, but has 
 afflicted us all our days ; but notwithstanding all this, we cannot 
 endure to see him hurt. Father, have mercy on him, and do not 
 hurt either him or any of those who uphold him, for we cannot 
 bear to see it. O Father, be merciful to him, and do not hurt 
 him. Is there no other way, Father, to deal with him without 
 hurting him ? If there is, won't you be pleased to deal with him 
 in some other way? O how you would relieve our feelings, for 
 we cannot bear to see him hurt ; therefore, O Father, do have 
 mercy on him, and do not hurt him, for we cannot endnre it. 
 And now, remember, if you do hurt him, we will forsake you, and 
 we will go and assist him ; for, if we can help it, we will not have 
 him hurt; we are his friends." 
 
 4. O ye hypocrites ! Ye enemies to all truth and justice ! Ye 
 friends of corruption, and enemies to all righteousness ! How 
 can you escape the justice of the law of God? Ye are as whited 
 walls and painted sepulchers, even full of rottenness ! Some of 
 you may have a fine outside, but you are rotten within ! You 
 cannot endure to see justice executed ; but, in your hearts, you 
 wish to prevent it. Ye enemies of all truth and righteousness ! 
 How can you expect to 'meet with a deliverance at my hands? I 
 might as well deliver the devil himself as to deliver you ; for you 
 are one with him, and you must share his fate. It is high time 
 for these people to begin to examine their own hearts, and see 
 whether they are filled with sympathy towards those who break 
 my laws, or not ; for if they are, they are not my friends ; they 
 are my bitterest enemies. They prove by their actions that they 
 are as corrupt-hearted as Lucifer is, and they are his best friends. 
 Let my faithful people be aware of that spirit, for it is the spirit of 
 
500 THE PEOPLE WILL BE TRIED. 
 
 Lucifer, the devil ; and many of these people, if they do not 
 guard against it with all their might, will be overcome by it, and 
 be destroyed. It is the most powerful hold that Satan has on 
 these people, and if they are not very careful, he will, at one time, 
 destroy more of them by it than he has destroyed since my peo- 
 ple came to this place. 
 
 5. My people are now about to be tried to see whether they 
 are true to my laws, or whether they wish to see them trampled 
 upon and perverted by transgressors. When I try them in this 
 way, I shall know who is true to me, and who is not. Those who 
 are true to me will uphold my law when it is executed upon the 
 transgressors ; they will be my friends, and will always be ready 
 to execute the law upon transgressors. The next move that I will 
 make among my people will be to try them, and they will then 
 show what they are; therefore, let them all prepare themselves 
 for it, for it is right upon them, and none will go through it but 
 those whose hearts are right before me. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father ; even Jesus Christ Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE ACCEPTANCE OF 
 THE HORSES AND SWORDS. 
 
 No. 258. WEBER, UTAH, April i2th, 1862. 
 
 i. You wish to hear from me again. You will not let me rest 
 unless I continue to speak unto you. You are determined that I 
 shall speak unto you at least as often as every other day ; and you 
 wish to hear irom me even oftener than that. It will be much 
 easier for me when I can come unto you and speak unto you 
 mouth to mouth. I have had to move backward and forward 
 through space, even from heaven to the earth, and from the earth 
 up to heaven, for years, even ever since I commenced to speak 
 unto you. Every time that you have received a revelation from 
 my Father, either I, or one of the members of the first council in 
 heaven, have had to bring it unto you, and stand by your side to 
 
CONCERNING REVELATIONS. 501 
 
 dictate you until you have written it ; and as it takes you quite a 
 length of time to write a revelation, it causes it to be very tedious 
 for those who bring the revelations unto you. It is very painful 
 for a heavenly messenger to remain still long in one place ; for 
 the nature of a holy angel is to be quick and lively, and to move 
 about from one place to another. Therefore, when I come to 
 speak unto you mouth to mouth, I shall be relieved of a great bur- 
 den. I shall not have to remain still in one place so long at a 
 time. I have brought unto you almost all the revelations which 
 you have received ; consequently, my burden hitherto has been 
 very heavy. But I am now about to be relieved of that burden ; 
 for I am now coming to talk with you. 
 
 2. You must do as I command you, and thereby open the way 
 for me. I shall look to you to commence the work, even to give 
 me a start ; and when you shall have done this, I will sweep off 
 your enemies. I will open the way for you to your satisfaction. 
 You will understand me. I shall be with you in one day after you 
 shall have commenced the work, and even sooner than that, if it 
 becomes necessary. I can stir mine enemies when I am ready, 
 and I can also stir the hypocrites who are in the midst of my peo- 
 ple, even such as have not been penetrated before to any great 
 extent. I can find the way to every heart to see whether they are 
 sound or not. Therefore, my son, do as I shall command you, 
 and I will make all things work well. 
 
 3. You may continue to hold yourself in readiness, so that you 
 may not be taken unawares. You know, to a certain extent, what 
 is needed in order for you to be fully prepared to meet me ; for I 
 shall come unto you in an instant. I have told you how I shall 
 first come unto you, and you must look for me to approach you 
 in the manner that I have described, so that you will not be dis- 
 appointed. 
 
 4. You wish to know whether I will accept of those horses 
 which you have obtained or not. I have seen them, and I don't 
 see that you could, at this time, do any better than you have done. 
 I have spoken unto you before concerning your horse, and I told 
 you I would accept of him until you could obtain a better one ; 
 and I will accept of the others on the same condition. They will 
 answer until better horses can be obtained to replace them. They 
 
5 02 CONCERNING RICHARD COOK. 
 
 are not fine horses at all, and they would not be accepted by me 
 were it not for the poverty of my people ; for I know their situa- 
 tion, and I have to deal with them accordingly. Therefore, I shall 
 have to accept of those horses to commence with ; but I will soon 
 find better horses than those. My people, as yet, have had to be 
 content with small things ; but I will turn the common current 
 of things. I will place the riches and the valuable things of the 
 earth in the hands of mine own covenant people. I will wrench 
 them out of the hands of the fallen spirits who now possess them, 
 and I will give them unto the rightful owners thereof. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you wish to know 
 whether I will accept of the two swords which you have obtained, 
 or not. They are not at all suitable for the circumstance ; but if 
 better ones cannot be obtained immediately, they will have to do 
 until I come, and then I will talk about a suitable sword for you. 
 Set you mind at rest, and I will attend to that matter for you. I 
 see what you need, and I will assist you. Do what you can, and 
 what you cannot do, I will do for you ; for I am perfectly able to 
 do all that you require of me. 
 
 6. And as concerning my servant, Richard Cook, let him 
 guard against sympathy, for he is very weak upon that point, and 
 if he is not very careful when he is tried in that matter, Satan will 
 overcome him and destroy him. Let him take timely warning, 
 and if he will do so, he may save his life ; but if he will not do so, 
 Satan will surely destroy his mortal life. Therefore, let him set 
 himself against that weakness, that it may be well with him. The 
 sword which he now has will answer for the present ; but if he 
 overcomes Satan, a suitable sword will be provided for him at the 
 proper time. Let him do his duty, and all will be well with him. 
 I am the Light and Life of the world, even Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
CONCERNING JOSEPH ASTLE AND WILLIAM JONES. 503 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING JOSEPH ASTLE AND 
 WILLIAM JONES. 
 
 No. 259. WEBER, UTAH, April T4th, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he that shuts, and no one opens, and that 
 opens, and no one shuts ; even Jesus Christ. And I am about to 
 speak unto you concerning my servants,' Joseph Astle and William 
 Jones. My people have desired to know the reason of their being 
 taken from the earth at such a time as this, even when their assist- 
 ance was so much needed among my people. I will make it 
 known unto them. 
 
 2. There is an order connected with the fulness of my gospel, 
 which has to be observed both by me and my Father, and we can- 
 not pass over it. That order is as follows : This mortal earth on 
 which you stand is next in point of progression to our earth, which 
 is celestial ; and as the holy priesthood runs down from one world 
 to another, and this, earth being the next in progression and 
 authority unto ours, it is the first world to be honored with the 
 full keys of the holy priesthood ; and the president over mine elect, 
 even over Abraham's seed, must dwell upon it during one thou- 
 sand years, even until his mission is completed ; but the remain- 
 ing six angels must rule in the spirit worlds, for they could not 
 have existed upon this earth for any great length of time. The 
 devil would have destroyed their mortal lives, because they did not 
 hold the keys of the holy priesthood ; and consequently not being 
 able to defend themselves against the devil, they could not remain 
 upon the earth, but they had to go and rule in the spirit worlds 
 where the laws of the Lord are administered, even where Satan 
 has little or no power. There they can exist and fill their separate 
 places in the holy priesthood without being hindered' by the 
 devil. 
 
 3. Those worlds where the six angels now dwell are governed 
 by the laws of the Lord ; and all fallen spirits when there have to 
 be subject to those laws; therefore, fallen spirits do not like to be 
 in those spirit worlds. They are almost continually tormenting 
 my people upon this earth where the government of the devil 
 
504 CONCERNING JOSEPH ASTLE AND WILLIAM JONES. 
 
 exists. But they do not trouble that portion of my people who 
 are in the spirit worlds, because they have not the power to do so. 
 They do not rule in those worlds ; they only rule upon this earth 
 for a certain length of time, ai>d that is the only privilege they 
 have by way of governing. Therefore, they like to be upon the 
 earth where the government of Lucifer and the" Beast exists, and 
 there is where they spend the most of their time. They would 
 never leave this world at all to go to the spirit worlds if they could 
 help it ; but they cannot, for they have to go there to provide 
 themselves with food and clothing. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning my servants 
 William Jones and Joseph Astle. I was compelled by the law of 
 the holy priesthood to send messengers from the earth to the spirit 
 worlds to bear testimony unto the inhabitants thereof that I have 
 raised up a prophet, and committed unto him the full keys of the 
 holy priesthood, and that I have opened the last seal. I could 
 not send my holy angels to testify to these things, for it would be 
 out of order for me to do so ; but I can send them down upon 
 the earth both to testify to the truth of the everlasting gospel, and 
 to fight the battles of mine own covenant people who are upon the 
 
 earth. But I cannot send them to the spirit worlds to testify unto 
 the inhabitants thereof of the fulness of the gospel. I am com- 
 pelled to send high priests from the earth to the spirit worlds to 
 testify to the inhabitants thereof, concerning my work upon the 
 earth. Mine angels testify unto mortal beings of all things which 
 belong to the gospel ; but messengers from the earth must testify 
 unto the inhabitants of the spirit worlds of what they witnessed 
 concerning the fulness of my gospel while they were upon the 
 earth previous to their death. Therefore, I took my servants 
 William Jones and Joseph Astle to testify unto my servant Joseph 
 Smith and to the five other angels, that I have commenced to 
 establish my kingdom upon the earth, in order that they might be 
 preparing themselves to make up their accounts and to set all 
 things in order, ready to meet the seventh angel, and give unto 
 him an account of their stewardship ; for this they will have to do 
 in their own order, commencing with the first angel, and so on up 
 to the sixth. 
 
 5. Behold, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I testify unto all my 
 
CONCERNING JOSEPH ASTLE AND WILLIAM JONES. 505 
 
 people that I took my servants Joseph Astle and William Jones 
 from the earth to testify to my work and to represent it to my ser- 
 vant Joseph Smith and to the remaining five angels ; for they were 
 valiant for truth, and were counted by me worthy to be my repre- 
 resentatives, even to represent my work to the presidents over 
 those spirit worlds. They have been promoted to great honors, 
 and are considered by the six angels of the Churches to be valiant 
 for truth, and they are very highly esteemed by them, and are con- 
 sidered worthy of the great honors which have been conferred 
 upon them. They have spoken to large multitudes in the presence 
 of my servant Joseph Smith and others of the angels of the 
 Churches. O how they delight in those worlds to hear that I have 
 opened the last seal, and commenced to establish my kingdom 
 upon the earth ! O how they love the society of those two mes- 
 sengers whom I have sent unto them to bear testimony to the 
 work which I have commenced upon the earth. I have already 
 sent two high priests unto them, and I shall send another unto 
 them ; for they need three witnesses to bear testimony to the same 
 thing before the testimony can be complete according to the law ; 
 therefore, I shall take another high priest, even one who is valiant 
 for truth, as the other two were, from among my people, and send 
 him into the spirit worlds, and he will be promoted to great honor. 
 The other two were valiant men ; they would not betray their trust, 
 and they are honored wherever they go. Great multitudes are 
 often found crowding around them to hear them speak. O that 
 all those who have embraced the fulness of my gospel were as 
 valiant for truth as they are, for if they were they would do honor 
 to their profession. I now need valiant-hearted men cowards are 
 of no use to me. I want valiant-hearted people who will sustain 
 my law, who love the truth, and who will fight for it with all their 
 power ; such I delight in, and they are mine forever. I am the 
 Stone and Shepherd of Israel, the Bright and Morning Star ; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
506 THE SPIRIT OF SYMPATHY. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING SYMPATHY FOR 
 TRANSGRESSORS. 
 
 No. 260. WEBER, UTAH, April i5th, 1862. 
 
 i. I SEE that you are greatly oppressed in your feelings on 
 account of my people. You say that you can see great weakness 
 manifested by some of them, and you greatly fear that one-half of 
 them will not stand the test ; that they will begin to sympathize 
 with those whom I shall condemn, and on whom the penalty of 
 death will have to be inflicted ; that if the spirit of sympathy for 
 the condemned should take hold of one individual, it would have 
 a tendency to cause many more to do the same thing ; and that 
 that spirit would run from one person to another until one-half of 
 my people would have caught it. Some of them very likely will 
 catch that spirit, and if they do, it may run from one to another 
 until it has destroyed quite a number of these people; for if that 
 spirit obtains a fair start, it will not stop until it has taken hold of 
 all those who are weak-minded, and such as are not grounded in 
 the truth. If my people are not very careful, many of them will 
 thus be destroyed. If they wish to save their lives, they must 
 guard against sympathy. They must not give way to it at all, but 
 they must set themselves against it with all their might, and feel 
 determined to overcome it, and by doing so, they will overcome 
 the devil and save their lives and live long upon the earth to do 
 much good to their fellow creatures. My people must know that 
 my law must be put in force ; that my kingdom cannot exist upon 
 the earth without laws ; that those who abide my laws, exist by 
 them ; and that those who break them, must perish by them. 
 Even the most ignorant of my people must surely know this ; and 
 if they turn against me, and sympathize with those who break my 
 Jaws, they do it wilfully, and are well worthy of death. They sin 
 against both light and knowledge, with their eyes wide open; 
 therefore, they are wilful sinners before me. If my people know 
 anything at all about me, they know that my law cannot be altered 
 to suit people's strange whims and sympathies. The minds of 
 some of them are like the fool's eye continually moving from one 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR THE PEOPLE. 507 
 
 foolish object to another; and if it were possible for me to change 
 my law to suit them to-day, it would be wrong for them to-morrow. 
 I might continue to change it day by day, and even hour by hour, 
 and yet not please them ; but by doing so, I should destroy all 
 law and order, and consequently all righteousness ; therefore, I" 
 should become as corrupt as the devil himself, and there would be 
 neither truth nor righteousness, honesty nor certainty, to my 
 course. If I trie.d to please everybody, I should please nobody; 
 I should soon become a devil, and cease to exist; for I could no 
 more exist eternally than devils can. 
 
 2. Let my people cease their foolishness, and make themselves 
 well acquainted with substantial principles that will save them. 
 Let them cast away all shadows, and take hold of substances, in 
 order that they may save themselves. Let them cast far from them 
 all their foolish and false traditions which they have learned in the 
 world. Let them take hold of the truth as it is, and live the life 
 of saints, and not the life of hypocrites, who are continually fooled 
 and deceived by the false traditions of the world and the devil. 
 If they wish to save themselves, they must learn to understand the 
 truth as it is, and live by it. Previous to their embracing the ful- 
 ness of my gospel they were trained in falsehood ; but it is high 
 time for them to leave all their false notions ; for false principles 
 will never save them. They are so slow to get rid of their false 
 ideas of things that it is very hard to make them believe that they 
 learned but little about me correctly previous to embracing the 
 fulness of my gospel, and consequently the devil holds them in his 
 chains and makes them believe that they are right when they are 
 wrong. He persuades them that they know something, and that 
 all that comes in contact with their standard of right, is wrong ; 
 that they need not to trouble themselves ; for if they will only con- 
 tinue to do as they are doing, all will be right with them. In this 
 way he throws his snares around them, and holds them in his 
 chains, and he is lulling them to sleep, and leading them down to 
 destruction ; but they perceive it not, and when such are severely 
 tried, the devil will take his last grasp on them, and destroy them. 
 They are in his snare, and all that he has to do is to make one 
 strong pull to destroy them. They did not liberate themselves 
 from his snares when they might have done so; but they suffered 
 
508 THE SPIRIT OF SYMPATHY. 
 
 him to make them believe that they knew a great deal, when they 
 knew nothing, as they ought to have known it ; thus he led them 
 to reject the truth, and to prefer his wisdom to mine, and the dark- 
 ness of the world to the light of heaven. They have never appre- 
 ciated the light of the fulness of my gospel ; but they have thought 
 that they had light when they had darkness, and consequently 
 they were contented with it. But they never knew the light of the 
 gospel ; for had they ever known it, they would, never have been 
 contented with darkness. Such cannot appreciate the light and 
 the blessings of my gospel ; they are in the bonds of iniquity, and 
 in the snare of the devil, and he will take them when he takes his 
 last pull. 
 
 3. And now, I say unto you my son, you wish to know 
 what you are to do to stop the spirit of sympathy if, when I put 
 my law in force upon the transgressor ' thereof, my people should 
 give way to the spirit of sympathy to a great extent. I will tell 
 you, my son, what you shall do. I shall be by your side at that 
 time, and I shall have all mine army placed in order, ready to 
 drop down upon the earth in a moment ; and if, when the people 
 are divided, the sympathizers should be the strongest party, and it 
 should become necessary, I shall not call upon you to put any per- 
 son to death, but I shall slay them myself upon the spot where 
 they will stand before I give unto you your rod, or even show 
 myself unto my people. The law of heaven grants unto me the 
 privilege to cut off a few hundreds of people at any time when 
 they are in your way, without you raising your rod and giving your 
 command ; for you may not always be placed in a position where 
 you can take up your rod, and give your command at a minute's 
 warning. You may see times when your enemies will crowd upon 
 you in an instant, even when you will have no time at all to take 
 your rod in your hand and to give your command ; and should I 
 not at such times instantly defend you by cutting off your enemies, 
 they would destroy you. The law of heaven gives me the liberty 
 to head your enemies !n every move which they attempt to make 
 against you ; therefore, if I am put to the necessity of coming out 
 to your defense, before the time that I have appointed to come 
 unto you, I shall do so. I shall have all things perfectly ready 
 before I give unto you a commandment to put my law in full 
 
CONCERNING THE HYPOCRITES. 509 
 
 force. You need not to be afraid of putting my law in force when 
 I command you, supposing that I am not ready, for, as I have 
 said unto you before, so I say unto you again, if it becomes 
 necessary, I will cut off all the hypocrites that may first separate 
 themselves from my faithful people; and I will afterwards place 
 my faithful people in rank, and give unto you your rod; and when 
 you have given your command, I will make a sweep among mine 
 enemies in this Territory ; but if you have the power in your own 
 possession to put to death all those who turn traitors to me and 
 break my law, you must do so without my assistance. What you 
 cannot do, I will do ; but what you can do, you must do ; for this 
 is your duty. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONTAINING INSTRUCTIONS FOR 
 THE BISHOP. 
 
 No. 261. WEBER, UTAH, April lyth, 1862. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword, for I am about to speak unto 
 you. I know that you are laboring under great difficulties among 
 these people, and, at times, you scarcely know what to do with 
 them. They are so slow to learn the principles of my gospel that 
 they weary you out with waiting for them. I cannot teach them 
 the principles of the fulness of my gospel any faster than they can 
 receive them ; and through the slow manner in which they receive 
 them, you are held in weakness an unreasonable length of time. 
 I feel, at times, almost ready to cast them off, and send you to 
 another place to commence my work in some other way, and to 
 save as many of the innocent people, who are now in the old 
 Church, as I can. My people have burdened my mind very 
 much, in consequence of their being so slow to hearken unto and 
 obey my words. It appears that they cannot learn the nature of 
 the fulness of my gospel in any reasonable length of time. They' 
 
510 CONCERNING THOSE WHO HAVE CONSECRATED. 
 
 weary every holy angel who has anything to do with them, as well 
 as wearying out both you and me. What can I do with them? 
 I cannot lawfully cast them off as long as they continue to struggle 
 against evil, and strive to learn the principles of my gospel, even 
 if they learn them but slowly. If they are as faithful as they know 
 how to be, I have to bear with them. When they do the best 
 they can, it is not very good ; and when they learn as fast as they 
 can, it is but very slowly. This is a time when my people need 
 to learn fast, and not a time to trifle. It is too painful to those 
 who stand at the head of my people to be held in suspense so 
 long if it could be avoided. My people might ease their own 
 burdens and the burdens of my people if they would only come 
 to my terms quickly. They think so much about the property 
 which they have consecrated unto me, and dally so long before 
 they are willing to let that portion of it go which I call for, that 
 it is a great barrier in their way to prevent them from learning the 
 principles of my gospel. Property twines around the hearts of some 
 of my people, and appears to be all in all with them; it is the main 
 thing that prevents them from learning the principles of my gos- 
 pel. They are so afraid of it being taken away from them that 
 they can scarcely think about anything else. Such are held in 
 the snare of the devil, and are doing all that they can to bring my 
 work to a stand. Some of my people do not know their own 
 hearts. They think that they are living in an acceptable manner 
 before me, when they are not; for no person is living in an 
 acceptable manner before me whose heart is placed upon property 
 which he holds in his possession. He cannot serve me and his 
 property too ; for I will accept of none but the whole-hearted. 
 When people have their hearts set upon property, they ought to 
 know that they are not accepted of me. My people know well 
 enough what I require of them. They know the conditions on 
 which they can be saved ; but yet they , will continue to act the 
 part of idolaters in spite of all that I have taught them. What 
 can I do with them but cut them off as cumberers of the ground ? 
 They must know that no idolater can inherit my kingdom upon 
 the earth, and yet they continue to let the devil fool them. When 
 will my people learn good sense? They have learned enough 
 nonsense in the world, and it appears almost impossible for them 
 
INSTRUCTION FOR THE BISHOP. 51 I 
 
 to get rid of it, and learn good sense instead thereof. They can 
 never be saved by false knowledge, for it will lead them down to 
 destruction. If they would do as I command them, they might 
 save themselves. They should know that I am the standard for 
 them to go by. But they treat my words lightly, and perish by 
 them in the midst of light. I am well satisfied that I can make 
 but little headway with these people by talking to them. 
 
 2. I told my people, a few days ago, that I intended to put 
 my law in full force upon the transgressors thereof. I am now 
 giving unto them a little time to consider the matter over, and to 
 prepare themselves for it ; and after they have had a little time to 
 do so, I shall draw them up to the law. I do not want to bring it 
 upon them unawares; but I want to make them acquainted with it, 
 and also to give unto them a fair chance to prepare themselves for 
 it. I do not take my people unawares. I let them 'see what they 
 are about to enter into beforehand, which is just. But the devil 
 works in secret, and thereby seeks to take advantage of innocence. 
 He works in the dark. He works deceitfully, in order to ensnare 
 and destroy the innocent. 
 
 3. You hear complaints made by my people about their desti- 
 tute condition with regard to food. Let my servant, the steward, 
 "take the surplus property from the people, and purchase food 
 therewith, and let him supply the needs of the poor of my people, 
 that they may have no just cause to murmur. The poor must be 
 fed. The steward must not suffer his hands to be tied by these 
 people ; but he must go and take property from those who have 
 more than the law allows them to have, even if he has to take it 
 by force. There is an abundance of property in the possession of 
 my people to supply the needs of the poor, and much more than 
 will be used by my people before I come to place fresh means in 
 their hands. All that I am now waiting for is my people. I wish 
 to give unto them a short time to consider the matter which now 
 lies before them, in order that they may prepare themselves for it ; 
 and when this is done, I shall come. I shall look for you to 
 open the way for me, if it is possible for you to do so. You know 
 what I require at your hands, in order to open the way for me. 
 I will overrule everything for your convenience, so that you may 
 have as little trouble as possible; for I know that it is all you can 
 
512 THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 do to bear the burden that is placed upon you; but I will make it 
 as light as I possibly can for you. Therefore rest contented until 
 you see my face ; for lo, I come unto quickly ; even the Lord of 
 Hosts. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE ORDER OF THE 
 ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 No. 262. WEBER, UTAH, April ipth, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he who searcheth the hearts and trieth the 
 reins of the children of men ; who penetrates through the mists of 
 darkness, and lighteth up all animated nature ; who walketh not in 
 crooked paths; but whose course" is one eternal round ; whose pur- 
 poses never fail ; who speaks the word, and all the inhabitants of 
 the earth either obey or perish; even the son of the Eternal 
 Father. And I am come to reveal unto you the order of the 
 eternal progression of worlds, and the order in which they exist in 
 space. 
 
 2. I have before revealed unto you the order of the first 
 quorum of worlds, in connection with which the first God sits 
 enthroned in majesty in a large globe, from which the laws that 
 govern all worlds proceed. The first quorum of worlds, not in- 
 cluding the world of the first God, numbers one hundred and forty- 
 four thousand, and they are all on a level with each other in space, 
 and being the worlds of the firstborn sons of the first God, they 
 form the first rank. 
 
 3. All quorums of glorified worlds stand below each other in 
 space. The firstborn sons of the first God form the first quorum, 
 and their firstborn sons form the second quorum, and each of the 
 second quorum has his world next to and immediately underneath 
 his Father's world. 
 
 4. In the quorums of the firstborn sons, the firstborn son of a 
 Cjpd always redeems the earth immediately below his Father's in 
 point of progression. In all other quorums, the son who holds the 
 
THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 513 
 
 first birthright redeems the earth immediately below his Father's. 
 You are the first person in power in the quorum of high priests, 
 and I am the last person. You are that much in advance of me 
 by birthright, but we both belong to the same quorum. Adam is 
 not yet connected with the quorum to which my Father belongs ; 
 but he belongs to it. And when his world becomes celestialized, 
 he will take his place as the last God in that quorum, in like man- 
 ner as his Father is the last God of the quorum to which my 
 Father's Father belongs. 
 
 5. Each perpendicular quorum consists of a Father and his 
 sons. Every God who has not already obtained a quorum of 
 worlds for his sons may have one in due time, for it is his privi- 
 lege. Some Gods have already a quorum of worlds exalted for 
 their firstborn sons, and all Gods will have the same privilege. 
 Some Gods are in advance of others by birthright, and conse- 
 quently have greater dominion. They all stand in their own order, 
 one in the advance of another. One hundred and forty-four 
 thousand quorums of worlds, lacking one quorum, were created 
 and became celestial before the second born sons of the first God 
 had the liberty to become redeemers ; and when they had that 
 liberty, they redeemed the quorum of worlds belonging to the last 
 quorum of firstborn sons. There are now in existence more than 
 one hundred and forty-four thousand and one quorums of glorified 
 worlds, one quorum below another in space. 
 
 6. A new world comes into existence every seven thousand 
 years, and as one world steps forth into mortality, another is 
 created; therefore, worlds are also exalted in their own order. 
 There are, however, three stationary worlds, which were created 
 for the accommodation of all traveling planets, that do not follow 
 the above rule. They are stationed in space for the accommoda- 
 tion of each quorum of traveling worlds, and they remain with it 
 until it is glorified. They are then lowered in space to accommo- 
 date another quorum, and they remain with that quorum until it 
 has become glorified also ; and so they continue to be used for 
 the accommodation of all worlds that come into existence. There 
 is only one quorum of worlds traveling up to perfection at the 
 same time. One quorum must be completed before another 
 quorum can commence; therefore, there can be but one world 
 
514 THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 passing through mortality at the same time. If such was not the 
 case, there would be great confusion. The priesthood runs in 
 order from one world to another ; and the heavenly host attend to 
 only one thing at a time, and thus they prevent confusion. There 
 is only one redeemer called to operate at the same time. There 
 is but one God ruling over a mortal earth at the same time. 
 There is but one angel holding the keys of the holy priesthood 
 upon a mortal earth at the same time; and there can be but one 
 chief devil at the same time. 
 
 7. Behold, I am Jesus Christ, and it is my duty to be the 
 representative of the holy priesthood to man upon earth. I stand 
 in the presence of my Father to represent all Gods and all powers, 
 both in the heavens and upon the earth, and also in hell, and all 
 glory and dominion connected with eternal beings ; for besides 
 me, there is at present no Savior in power. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. Let this suffice for the present, 
 and I will shortly speak unto you again. I know what you need, 
 and I will come and give it unto you. I am the Son of the 
 Eternal Father. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE ETERNAL PRO- 
 GRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 No. 263. WEBER, UTAH, April 191)1, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, you seem as though you 
 were set fast. You do not seem to understand the true position 
 of Adam's earth which is now passing through mortality. You 
 cannot find a place for it in any of the quorums. You say that I 
 have told you that my Father is the last God in that quorum of 
 worlds over which your Father presides ; that Adam is not con- 
 nected with that quorum, neither can he be connected with the 
 quorum of high priests over which you preside. You say that if 
 there are only one hundred and forty-four thousand Gods in a 
 quorum, you cannot see where Adam and his world can be placed, 
 
THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 515 
 
 for that all the quorums are filled p without his world, unless 
 there are one hundred and forty-four thousand and one worlds in 
 a quorum. 
 
 2. As the first God of all has one hundred and forty-four 
 thousand firstborn sons, and each of them has a glorified world, 
 which, with their Father's world, make one hundred and forty-four 
 thousand and one worlds in the first quorum, so each of his sons 
 who own the first quorum of glorified worlds, has one hundred 
 and forty-four thousand firstborn sons whose glorified worlds stand 
 in perpendicular columns or quorums, directly under their own 
 Father's, which make, with their Father's, one hundred and forty- 
 four thousand and one quorums. The horizontal quorum over 
 which your Father presides will, when complete, only number one 
 hundred and forty-four thousand worlds. Adam's world is in 
 mortality, and is not as yet connected with any quorum. But 
 when it becomes celestial, it will join and complete the quorum 
 over which your Father presides, and take its own place next to 
 my Father's world. Adam's world will, therefore, occupy its own 
 place in space as all other celestial worlds do. 
 
 3. Therefore, let my people rest contented, and act well their 
 own part, and in due time I will make all things perfectly plain, 
 even those things which may be necessary for them to know. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I will shortly speak unto you 
 again. I am the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONTAINING FURTHER INFORMA- 
 TION ON THE SUBJECT OF ETERNAL 
 PROGRESSION. 
 
 No. 264. WEBER, UTAH, April 2ist, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I say unto you, my son, you wish to understand 
 the true nature of the first world which is owned by the first God, 
 the manner in which it was created, and the kind of material of 
 which it is formed. You also wish to understand the true nature 
 
516 THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 of the one hundred and forty-four thousand worlds which belong 
 to the firstborn sons of the first God, the manner in which they 
 were created, by whom they were created, and the manner in 
 which they were redeemed. 
 
 2. Behold, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I will reveal these 
 things unto you in a manner in which you will be well able to 
 understand them. The first world of all, which is owned by the 
 first God, never passed through a mortal estate ; it was never sub- 
 ject unto death, for it was never inhabited by fallen spirits as other- 
 worlds which have since been created have been. It was formed 
 of pure material, and consequently fallen spirits could not proceed 
 from nor receive organized bodies out of it. Inasmuch as it 
 was pure, nothing impure could possibly spring forth from it. 
 Fallen spirits always proceed from impure material. All material, 
 whether good or bad. yields or produces its own kind, conse- 
 quently, the first world has always been celestial, and never sub- 
 ject to death. It is altogether different in its nature from other 
 worlds which have been created since it was created. But other 
 worlds which have since been created have been formed of two 
 kinds of material pure mixed with impure. The first world is 
 many times larger than any other world, and it took much longer 
 to create it than it has taken to create any other world since ; yea, 
 it took more than one hundred times as long. None other world 
 can be compared with it for size. Other worlds almost appear as 
 nothing by the side of it. It rules all other worlds, for it was 
 created for that purpose. With respect to time, one day with all 
 celestial worlds is equal to one thousand years of the time of mor- 
 tal earths ; for celestial worlds are all ruled by the first God, who 
 is the time-keeper. All other worlds are ruled by his world. All 
 laws were discovered or made by him; therefore all celestial 
 worlds are governed by his laws. He discovered the principles 
 upon which those laws were based in his own world, and being 
 assisted by his two firstborn sons, who are next to him in au- 
 thority, and are his counselors, he framed those laws. 
 
 3. The world of the first God was created by his own wisdom 
 and power, with the assistance of his own children. But when he 
 first commenced to create it he had but little help, for he then 
 had no posterity to assist him ; therefore, he commenced his work 
 
THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 517 
 
 without any person to assist him except his wife. She rendered 
 him all the assistance she possibly could. But as time rolled 
 along, his family increased, and he obtained more help, even until 
 his world was well finished. After it was created, it ascended 
 in space; and as it ascended in space, it continued to grow 
 during many hundreds of thousands of years; and as it grew 
 and ascended, other worlds were created for the first God's sons, 
 beginning with his firstborn son, each of whom stepped out in 
 their own order to create worlds for themselves, being assisted 
 by their Father to do so until, at length, each of the firstborn 
 sons had had a world created for him. 
 
 4. But how did these one hundred and forty-four thousand 
 firstborn sons come into existence, seeing that the first God of 
 all had but one wife to begin with? If he had one hundred and 
 forty-four thousand firstborn sons, he must have had one hundred 
 and forty-four thousand wives ; and if such was the case, where 
 did they come from? There was a time when the first God was 
 the only being in existence, and there was only one woman who 
 was equal with him in age. I shall not reveal unto you at this 
 time the manner in which the first two came into existence ; but 
 it suffketh me to say that they were in existence as the first two 
 beings, and they are still in existence, and are now the first King 
 and Queen over all animated beings. 
 
 5. The first God begat many sons and daughters, a*nd he gave 
 unto his firstborn son his firstborn daughter to wife, and started 
 him out to create and people a world for himself. The first God 
 took his own second born daughter to be his second wife, and he 
 begat many sons and daughters also by her, and he took her first- 
 born daughter to be his third wife. And the second born daugh- 
 ter which he had by his second wife, he gave to his firstborn son 
 by his second wife. He took all his firstborn daughters which he 
 had by his wives to be his wives, with the exception of the first- 
 born daughter of his first wife, until he had obtained one hundred 
 and forty-four thousand wives. He has as many firstborn sons as 
 he has wives ; for he had a firstborn son by every wife ; and his 
 firstborn son took his firstborn daughter to wife, and his last first- 
 born son took his last firstborn daughter to be his wife, with these 
 exceptions all the sons of the first God took their own mother's 
 
518 THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 second born daughters to be their wives. Inasmuch as nature pro- 
 vided a first wife for the first God, he gave unto his firstborn son 
 his firstborn daughter, and unto his second firstborn sons he gave 
 his second born daughters. 
 
 6. You will readily perceive, my son, th.at the first world of all 
 is entirely different in its nature to all other worlds. It is an 
 exception to them all, being created celestial, and never having 
 been subject to death and darkness. No devil had any power to 
 destroy that first family, nor yet to break up any of their arrange- 
 ments. They were not divided into two parties in direct opposi- 
 tion to each other, as the families of all other worlds are divided, 
 in consequence of fallen spirits being among them. Fallen spirits 
 cause death to overtake a world, and to destroy both it and its 
 inhabitants for a certain length of time. Each race of people 
 which belongs to an earth claims its separate rights ; and when the 
 rebels against the government of the Gods rule a world, they 
 always bring death and destruction into it. They always keep 
 their hold on a world until they are overpowered by the angels of 
 the Gods. If they were not overpowered by holy angels, they 
 would destroy the earth on which they exist ; but they are con- 
 quered and destroyed by the angels, and the worlds are all saved 
 through mediators, whose right it is to destroy all fallen spirits on 
 the earths which they are appointed to redeem. Thus you will see 
 that all other quorums of worlds must differ in some respects from 
 the first quorum. The firstborn sons of the first God never passed 
 through death on their Father's earth they were all born celestial; 
 but their sons, and the sons of all other Gods, are subject to death; 
 they have to pass through it before they can become celestial 
 beings. The first quorum of Gods never having been made sub- 
 ject to death, are a quorum of independent Gods. They are 
 independent because they needed no assistance to help them to 
 overcome evil ; they had full power over it, and in this consists 
 their independence. If the first God and his firstborn sons had 
 not been independent, evil would have prevailed over them and 
 destroyed them. There was no power in existence greater than 
 that which they possessed for them to look to for assistance ; they 
 were all powerful, and consequently independent. 
 
 7. You wish to know by what means all the firstborn sons of 
 
THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 519 
 
 the first God obtained worlds. The first God sent his children to 
 assist his firstborn son to create a world, and it took them seven 
 thousand years to create it ; and when it was created and had 
 taken its place in space, it hung right underneath the Father's 
 world, and was owned by the firstborn son. After this, the Father 
 assisted his second firstborn son to create a world for himself, in 
 like manner as he before assisted his first firstborn son; and so he 
 continued to assist his sons one by one until he had a worjd each 
 created for them ; and as a new world came into existence every 
 seven thousand years, the column to which it belonged, with the 
 first God at the head, made a move higher in space, until all his 
 sons' worlds stood in one long string underneath his own. And 
 when this was done, and his quorum was completed, he sent his 
 last firstborn son to redeem his first firstborn son's world. The last 
 member of the quorum of high priests always redeems the world 
 belonging to the first member of that quorum. The last member 
 is always in power when the world of the first member is in the 
 hands of a devil, upon the same principle that Jesus Christ, being 
 now the last member of that quorum, redeems Adam's world, 
 which at present stands at the head of the quorum. Adam's world 
 being in mortality, represents the world which is owned by the 
 first God. It appears to stand between two quorums of worlds, 
 and does not appear to be claimed by either of them. In the first 
 quorum of all there are one hundred and forty-four thousand 
 worlds, not including the world belonging to the first God, and 
 which appears to stand outside of a quorum, as Adam's world 
 appears to do ; therefore, Adam's world represents the first great 
 central world. And Moses' world, standing at the head of a 
 quorum of worlds, which are traveling up to perfection, represents 
 the world owned by the firstborn son of the first God. He stands 
 at the head of a quorum .of Gods, under his Father, as Moses 
 stands at the head of a quorum of high priests under his Father. 
 The quorum of high priests, including Adam and Abel, numbers 
 one hundred and forty-four thousand and one, and represents the 
 first quorum of all which, with the first God, numbers one hun- 
 dred and forty-four thousand and one. 
 
 8 ] I do not wish to weary you by writing any more at this 
 time, for I know that you are weary ; but I have more to reveal 
 
520 THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 to you upon this subject, and I will reveal it unto you as fast as 
 you are able to write it. I have a great deal to do in a short 
 time. I am coming quickly unto you to talk with you mouth to 
 mouth, and I will then put all things right; therefore, look out for 
 me, for lo I come, I come, I come. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE ETERNAL PRO- 
 GRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 No. 265. WEBER, UTAH, April 22nd, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am come to speak 
 unto you again. There are some things connected with this great 
 subject which you say in your feelings you do not as yet compre- 
 hend. You would like to know upon what principle those hun- 
 dred and forty-four thousand firstborn sons of the first God obtain 
 each one hundred and forty-four thousand wives, seeing that their 
 worlds were all created and placed in a perpendicular line before 
 the first of them had been redeemed. You feel assured that none 
 of those firstborn sons of the first God could ever become redeem- 
 ers, excepting the last member of that quorum ; and that, such 
 being the case, you do not see how they could obtain wives out of 
 the worlds of other Gods so far below them; that they could 
 never become redeemers after their own worlds had been glorified 
 and they themselves become Gods. 
 
 2. The last firstborn son of the first God redeemed the world 
 of the first firstborn son. He was the first person that ever 
 redeemed a world, and after the world belonging to the firstborn 
 son of the first God was celestialized, another world, which was 
 owned by the second firstborn son of the first God, entered into 
 mortality, and became subject to death, and the firstborn son of 
 the first God's firstborn son, redeemed it for him. And when it 
 had been redeemed and become celestial, the world belonging to 
 the third firstborn son of the first God came forth into mortality, 
 and was redeemed by the firstborn son of the first God's second 
 
 
THE ETERNAL .PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 52! 
 
 firstborn son. The first-born sons of the first quorum of Gods 
 were, with one exception, redeemers ; but none of the first quorum 
 of Gods have been redeemers, except the last member of that 
 quorum ; consequently, they are all independent Gods. They 
 were born long before the first world was completed, and they 
 assisted their Father to complete it. The first God had a numer- 
 ous family before his world was fully formed and ready to take its 
 place in space; and when it had made one move up in space, he 
 assisted his firstborn son to create a world for himself, to create 
 which it took seven thousand years. And when it was finished, 
 he gave unto his firstborn son his firstborn daughter to wife, and 
 they then commenced to beget their posterity. The first God then 
 sent his second firstborn son to create a world for himself, and he 
 assisted him as he had previously assisted his first firstborn son to 
 create his world. 
 
 3. And in like manner he assisted all his firstborn sons to 
 create worlds for themselves ; and as each son had a world created 
 for him, his Father gave unto him a wife. He gave unto each of 
 his sons, who had worlds created, a wife of his own daughters, 
 every seven thousand years. Thus when all his firstborn sons had 
 their worlds created, and occupied their own places in space, he 
 had to give unto them one hundred and forty-four thousand of his 
 daughters at once; but when he had only one thousand worlds 
 formed for one thousand of his sons, he only gave unto them one 
 thousand of his daughters at once. As each world was created 
 and took its place among the others that had been created before 
 it, the number of daughters given out increased one, so that the 
 last son who had a world created for him might have a wife as 
 well as those sons had who had had worlds created for them, and 
 wives given unto them before he had. Inasmuch as he had a 
 world created for him, he claimed the right to have wives as well 
 as his brothers who were in advance of him by birthright. There- 
 fore, when all the firstborn sons of the first God had their worlds 
 glorified, they had received from their Father one hundred and 
 forty-four thousand wives each. He gave unto them one hundred 
 forty-four thousand times one hundred and forty-four thousand, or 
 twenty billion, seven hundred and thirty-six million, of his own 
 daughters to be their wives. Thus the firstborn sons of the first 
 God obtained their wives. 
 
^22 THE ETERNAL PROGRESSION OF WORLDS. 
 
 4. In what way did the firstborn sons of those one hundred and 
 forty-four thousand firstborn sons of the first God, who constituted 
 a quorum of redeemers, obtain their wives after they had filled the 
 office of redeemers? They were ministers of the gospel, even high 
 priests, and as such they each helped to save one hundred and 
 forty-four thousand mortal worlds, including their own, and they 
 each took one wife from every mortal earth on which they minis- 
 tered, excepting their own ; and while they were ministering the 
 gospel on these niortal earths, their own earths were growing and 
 traveling up to perfection, and their families were continually upon 
 the increase. Thus they each took one hundred and forty-four 
 thousand mortal missions ; and they each took one wife from each 
 God whose world was passing through mortality for whom they 
 labored. In this manner all redeemers obtain their number of 
 wives. Every God gives unto the high priests who minister unto 
 his family and save it, one wife each of his firstborn daughters. 
 
 5. I do not wish to weary you any longer at this time by 
 straining your mind upon this subject. It is painful for you to sit 
 so long at once ; but I have but little more to reveal unto you 
 before you will be able to see it all clearly. From this time, it will 
 not be so straining to your mind as it has been for the last few 
 days. Since I commenced to reveal this subject unto you, it has 
 been painful indeed to you ; but I have now revealed unto you 
 the greatest portion of it. .Rest contented, and know that either I 
 or my holy angels are continually by your side. I am Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE CREATION OF 
 
 WORLDS. 
 
 No. 266. WEBER, UTAH, April 23rd, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world, even Jesus 
 Christ; and I am about to speak unto you again. You say in 
 your feelings that you wish to understand the order of the second 
 born sons of the first God, even those whose right it is to start the 
 
THE CREATION OF WORLDS. 523 
 
 second rank of quorums after the firstborn sons have become 
 glorified. You wish to know how their worlds came into existence. 
 They came into existence in the same order as the worlds of the 
 second firstborn sons do. Their worlds were created one by one 
 every seven thousand years, and stood in space in a perpendicular 
 column, even as the first quorum did at the beginning. When the 
 first God's firstborn son's world had become celestial, another 
 world was added to the bottom of the column which it had left. 
 As the first quorum of worlds came up to perfection, one by one, 
 they surrounded the first world, and stood on a horizontal plain 
 with it. The first world of all, with all other worlds which stand 
 below it, ascended in space, in order to make room for other 
 worlds as they should be created. As new worlds are being 
 formed the material of which they are made condenses, and a 
 vacuum or atmosphere is formed of rarefied or less dense matter 
 suitable for them to move in ; thus every new world makes room 
 for itself. All pure material works harmoniously together to 
 accommodate itself and to supply its own needs; therefore, all 
 celestial beings work together for their mutual benefit. There is 
 always room for new planets as fast as they roll into existence, and 
 there will be to all eternity; for they assist to make room for 
 themselves. Space is continually being formed as well as new 
 worlds are. Space, therefore, can never be filled. If it could be 
 filled, there would be an end to eternal progression, for the way of 
 all worlds would be blocked up and their motion prevented. They 
 would all become powerless, and blend together in one solid mass, 
 and all animated nature would be destroyed. Such would be the 
 case if space did not continue to enlarge as new worlds came into 
 existence. 
 
 2. The second born sons of the first God arrive at the God- 
 head upon the same principle as his firstborn sons did, and all 
 others ot his sons, including his third, fourth, fifth and sixth born 
 sons, and so on' throughout all his sons to all eternity, will become 
 exalted on the same principle. I have now given unto you the 
 order of the progression of worlds to all eternity. When you are 
 able to trace out the order of the first and second born sons of 
 the first God, you will be able to trace out that of all others ; for 
 this is the complete order of eternal progression. 
 
524 THE' SCEPTER OF POWER. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you wish to know 
 something more concerning the rod which was used by my servant 
 Moses, whether it was owned by your Father or not. It is not 
 your Father's rod ; but your Father holds the jurisdiction over it 
 while this earth of Adam's is in mortality. Your Father has a rod 
 of his own ; therefore, he does not own the seventh angel's rod ; it 
 belongs to the* first God. It is his scepter, and the person who 
 uses it, uses it in his name and by his authority, for he is his 
 representative upon the mortal earth ; he rules by it as though the 
 first God was present himself. You are the first God's represent- 
 ative to all Adam's posterity. It is your duty to display all power, 
 glory, majesty and dominion to Abraham's seed. You will stand 
 upon the earth with the scepter of the great first God in your hand, 
 and he is compelled by law to sustain his own representative. Be- 
 ing a celestial God, he cannot come himself. It is unlawful for 
 him to leave his throne and come down upon a mortal earth to 
 represent his glory, majesty and dominion ; therefore, each seventh 
 angel stands upon each mortal earth in his name and by his 
 authority to represent his greatness to mortals. 
 
 4. Adam, who now seems to stand disconnected with any 
 quorum, represents the first God, and his being weak and power- 
 less for seven thousand years, represents the first God being shorn 
 of his power for seven thousand years ; for he gives his rod, which 
 is his power, to every seventh angel who has to come in contact 
 with devils and break their hold, and save the worlds. He has 
 not this to do, and therefore he does not need his power; but they 
 need it, and he gives it unto them. He is, himself, beyond the 
 power of Satan ; but they are not, and therefore they use his rod. 
 They are the legitimate rulers over every mortal earth. Adam 
 does not use that rod because he is not in power; but Moses being 
 the president of a quorum of one hundred and forty-four thousand 
 high priests upon Adam's earth, is in power, and therefore uses 
 that rod. Adam sanctions the authority of the man who was 
 appointed by the first God to be the seventh angel to his world 
 'by bringing him forth into mortality and ordaming him in the flesh 
 to preside over his posterity and save his world. When, the power 
 is needed, it is given. 
 
 5. You wish to know whether there are one hundred and forty- 
 
CONCERNING ETERNAL PROGRESSION. 525 
 
 four thousand and one worlds in all those quorums which have 
 become celestial. I will answer you this question. There are one 
 hundred and forty-four thousand and one .worlds in the first 
 quorum ; but there are only one hundred and forty-four thousand 
 in every other quorum which has become glorified. The world 
 which is passing through mortality is always an odd world, and 
 represents the first world of all, which is an odd world. There are 
 but two odd worlds in existence, one is above all other celestial 
 worlds, and the other is below them. The mortal earth is placea 
 below to represent the first world of all. There are one hundred 
 and forty-four thousand and one worlds in the first quorum, and 
 there are one hundred and forty-four thousand and one worlds in 
 the last quorum which belongs to the high priests, including 
 Adam's world. Each of the other quorums number one hundred 
 and forty-four thousand only. This order will exist to all eternity. 
 There is always a world passing through mortality, that the name 
 of the first God may always be glorified, and his authority acknowl- 
 edged by mortal beings when his representative is upon the earth ; 
 but when his representative is not upon the earth, his name is not 
 known, neither is his power and glory understood by mortal beings. 
 He can have but one representative upon a mortal earth. All 
 other high priests hold the priesthood in part, and are subject to 
 the devil. But inasmuch as the first God has all power over evil, 
 even so his representative has power over all evil also. 
 
 6. I now give unto you no more. Let this suffice for the pres- 
 ent, and I will shortly speak unto you upon another subject. I 
 shall stir my people when I am through with this subject; there- 
 fore, they may be preparing themselves for it. I have but little 
 more to reveal unto you upon this subject, and I will give it unto 
 you as fast as you can write it, until I have revealed it all unto you 
 so that you can understand it, which is all that is necessary. Let 
 my people prepare themselves to meet me ; for lo, I come quickly. 
 I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
526 CONCERNING ETERNAL PROGRESSION. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE POSITIONS OF THE 
 MEMBERS OF THE FIRST QUORUM. 
 
 No. 267. WEBER, UTAH, April 24th, 1862. 
 
 1. You SAY, my son, that you would like me to continue to 
 reveal unto you the principles of the eternal progression of worlds 
 as fast as possible, until I have revealed them all ; that I need to 
 hurry and get through with this subject, so that I may talk to you 
 upon other matters ; for you say that you see difficulties before 
 you, and you do not want me to hold you to the subject of pro- 
 gression of worlds any longer than I can possibly avoid ; that you 
 want to get through with it so that your mind may be at liberty to 
 dwell, to some extent, upon other things. 
 
 2. I wish to fully clear up this subject in this revelation, and 
 then you will be at liberty to direct your attention to other things. 
 The subject of eternal progression is a difficult one for you to 
 write upon, in consequence of your lack of language to make it 
 clear to the understanding of men. In fact, there are some things 
 connected with this subject which you have not been able to 
 express. But I have taken the small portion of language with 
 which you are acquainted and I have used it as well as I possibly 
 could to express through you those things which I wish to make 
 known. That which you are unable to express in writing, I will 
 always show you in another way, so that you shall never lack for a 
 thorough understanding of all principles which may be necessary 
 for you to know. 
 
 3. You now see clearly the order of the eternal progression of 
 worlds, even how they exist in space, and the manner in which 
 new worlds are created. You understand the nature of the first 
 world of all, even how it came into existence, and how it ascended 
 in space, and how a long string of worlds were created under it, 
 and also how those worlds followed it, and, ultimately, surrounded 
 it, and that they were owned by independent Gods. You also 
 understand the order by which the worlds of the firstborn sons of 
 those first Gods came into 'existence, and how, when they became 
 glorified, they stood under the first quorum, each son's world un- 
 
THE FIRST WORLD. 527 
 
 derneath his Father's world. The first world is an exception to 
 that order; for there is no other world directly under it. It 
 stands in the center of one hundred and forty-four thousand 
 worlds belonging to the firstborn sons of the first God who owns 
 it. The world owned by the firstborn son of the first God stands 
 by the side of his Father's world, the center of each being on a 
 horizontal line. The first world being so much larger than the 
 second, extends much higher and lower in space than it does. 
 All the worlds which are owned by the first quorum of Gods are 
 not one hundreth part as large, nay, not one thousandth part as 
 large as the first world is. I do not wish to tell you at this time 
 how much larger it is than other planets are ; but you will readily 
 perceive that the world owned by the firstborn son of the first 
 God could not stand underneath it. It is the world of the first- 
 born son of the first God that stands at the head of the column 
 of worlds belonging to the presidents of quorums. This order 
 continues throughout all quorums; therefore, you now see the 
 order of eternal progression. 
 
 4. Be content, and know that I am with you unto the end. 
 You will now have trouble, my son, with the devil, for he has 
 deceived a number of these people, in spite of all that I have said 
 unto them. They would give way to him, and let him overcome 
 them ; but I will pay them for their wilful wickedness. They 
 would not strive against evil, because they were corrupt-hearted ; 
 therefore I will speedily give unto them their just reward. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CALLING PETER C. KLEMGARD TO 
 
 COLLECT THE FIREARMS, AND TAKE THE 
 
 OVERSIGHT OF THEM. 
 
 No. 268. WEBER, UTAH, April 25th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world; even Jesus 
 Christ. I am about to speak unto you concerning the gathering 
 
528 CONCERNING FIRE-ARMS AND AMMUNITION. 
 
 together, to one place, of the fire-arms and ammunition belonging 
 to my people. I should have spoken unto you before upon this 
 subject if I had not been otherwise engaged. You know that I 
 have had no opportunity to do so, because I have had to keep 
 you writing upon other subjects as fast as it was possible for you 
 to write. But knowing that it was necessary to attend to that 
 matter before I should have the opportunity to speak unto you, I 
 moved upon my servants to attend to it, intending, as soon as I 
 should have an opportunity, to explain the matter unto you, in 
 order that you might fully understand it. I have to work in a 
 way to make all things work together and burst at the same time ; 
 and to do this, I have to work in mine own way. I know how to 
 bring things up to a head at once, and how to burst them when I 
 have done so. You will see that when I have done so, I will 
 cause a commotion. I will shake all things to the center. All 
 things are working well. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it would be well for 
 you to gather together all the fire-arms and ammunition to one 
 place, even near to your own house, and appoint a person to take 
 charge of them ; and he shall be subject to your counsel in all 
 things. You must appoint a faithful man to fill that office, and he 
 shall be counseled by none but you while he is acting in that 
 office. Your counselors may counsel my people in all other 
 things as far as they may be able to do so; but I shall not give 
 unto them the power to counsel the man whom you shall appoint 
 to that office. I will counsel you, and you shall counsel him. I 
 will wholly control that matter through you. Let not my servants, 
 ytmr counselors, think that I am slighting them ; that is not my 
 intention. I will respect them in their places. If that man 
 should be counseled by many individuals he might be misled, 
 and thereby cause great trouble and confusion, which will not be 
 the case if he is only counseled by one person. My servants will 
 understand me aright. 
 
 3. You must appoint Peter Christian Klemgard to fill this 
 office of which I have spoken. I know him, and have confidence 
 in him. Let Kim accept of the appointment and fill it faithfully, 
 and, in due time, he shall be promoted to great honors in my 
 kingdom. He shall reap the reward of Tiis labors in an after day. 
 
CONCERNING FIRE-ARMS AND AMMUNITION. 529 
 
 When he shall have gathered together all the arms and ammuni- 
 tion, he shall take charge of them, and no person shall take away 
 a gun or a pistol without his consent. Should any person attempt 
 to do so, he shall be stopped. If my servant should not be able 
 to stop them, he shall call upon others to assist him, and any per-^ 
 son who refuses to assist him shall be punished. He shall not 
 suffer more than five guns or pistols to go out in one day, unless 
 more than that number of persons are called to go out on the 
 range in search of cattle or horses. In such cases, he shall not 
 suffer more than ten guns or pistols to go out at the same time ; 
 and those who take them out shall return them the same day to my 
 servant. But if it is impossible for the persons to return the same 
 day, they shall deliver up the arms immediately upon their return. 
 My servant shall not give unto any person more than five rounds 
 of ammunition ; and those who may not be called to use it, shall 
 return it unto him ; they shall not waste it. I am the Lord, and 
 they cannot hide their actions from me. I see every move which 
 my people make, and I will reward them according to their works; 
 for I am the Lord, and who can stay my hand? I have all 
 power both in heaven and upon the earth, and I will bring all 
 mine enemies under my feet. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Lord of Hosts. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE PORTRAIT AND 
 PROCLAMATION OF THE LORD. 
 
 No. 269. WEBER, UTAH, April 29th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Alpha and Omega, the beginning and 
 the end, even the Lord your God, whose words are quick and 
 powerful, sharper than a two-edged sword. I am about to speak 
 unto you upon an important subject. You say that you can see 
 great difficulties ahead of you ; that they are right upon you ; and 
 you wish to know whether I am willing to sustain you or not ; 
 whether I have mine army stationed throughout the world, even at 
 
530 THE LAST TF.ST. 
 
 the head of all the governments thereof. In short, you wish to 
 know whether I have all things ready, so that if I was needed I 
 could come unto you in one instant. I will inform you concern- 
 ing this matter. Should you need to see me the next minute, I 
 am perfectly ready to come unto you. I am always ready to do 
 my own part, and if you will do your part, it is all that I require 
 at your hands. You need not fear that I shall not be ready 
 when I am needed, for I shall. I am always ready to do my 
 duty, and I never fail to do it. All that I ask of you is to open 
 the way for me ; this is your duty. You need not fear that after 
 you have opened the way for me, I will not come and open the 
 way for you. I will speedily satisfy you upon this matter. 
 
 2. The last test has now begun, and it will not stop until I 
 come. I will work all things connected with it myself. You need 
 not trouble yourself as to which way things will go ; for I will 
 make all things go aright. You must be led by me in all things, 
 and you will always be led aright. 
 
 3. I will now see if I cannot penetrate the hypocrites who are 
 among these people. They take but little notice of my words. 
 They do not believe them; neither do they believe that I intend to 
 cut them all off, although I have told them so many times that I 
 would do so. They must be fools ! But I will undeceive them at 
 once. It is their unbelief which causes them to act the part of 
 hypocrites ; for if they fully believed that I should cut off all hypo- 
 crites, they would not act as they do. But when I commence to 
 cut them off from the earth, they will -be taken by surprise. They 
 will be surprised at my fulfilling the promises which I have so often 
 made. What fools they must be ! They will shortly call out for 
 the devil to help them ; but they will call upon him in vain. They 
 will call upon those blasphemers who stand at the head of the old 
 Church to assist them, even upon those who have blasphemed my 
 holy name in the midst of my house. O ye hypocrites and blas- 
 phemers ! Ye cannot help yourselves in this case. Your dooms 
 are fixed ! You may strive to come up against me to attempt to 
 deliver your fellow hypocrites- out of my hands, but when you do 
 this, I will take hold of you. I have set a trap for you. and I 
 I shall catch you in it. I can make you come to my terms at 
 last. 
 
THE SEPARATION. 53! 
 
 4. And behold, I give unto you a commandment, my son : 
 You shall now prepare yourself and get all things ready for a test 
 between my faithful people and the hypocrites. And when I call 
 upon you to separate my people into two companies, you must do 
 so ; and when that is done, you shall command the faithful of my 
 people to slay all the hypocrites. They shall not leave one of them 
 alive. You shall continue the work until you have cut off every 
 hypocrite that comes within your reach ; and when you have done 
 so, you will have done your part, and will have opened the way 
 for me. It will stir mine enemies, and then I will meet them. 
 
 5. I do not call upon you to preach unto this people any 
 more on this side of my coming ; neither do I forbid you the 
 privilege of talking to them when you feel to do so. I wish you 
 to prepare for war; for this is now your duty. I will tell you 
 when to separate these people; and when you do so, you must 
 gird on your sword and mount your horse, aud ride a few rods 
 from the main body of my people, and call upon all those who 
 will abide my law faithfully and execute it upon the transgressors 
 thereof, to come over to you ; and those who will not live by my 
 law, and defend it unto death, will be rejected by me. All the 
 members of my kingdom must both live my law and defend it. 
 
 6. I am about to reveal unto you the place where you and I 
 shall stand, even that spot of ground which must be beautified. I 
 shall show it unto you in time for you to have it beautified. You 
 must have linen, pure and white, laid down for you and me to 
 stand upon. You may lay carpets or some other suitable things 
 underneath the linen. Your horse must be as white as he possibly 
 can be made ; and you must be dressed in white throughout. 
 My horse is white; therefore, the ground on which both you and 
 I shall stand must be white also; the upper covering thereof must 
 be white linen. Therefore prepare these things, and have them 
 all in readiness, in order that when the time comes you may not 
 be detained; for you will then have no time to spare. I shall 
 come suddenly ; therefore all things must be ready in proper time. 
 
 7. And now, behold, I say unto you, before I can come 
 unto you I must cast my shadow before me, and give unto you 
 my proclamation, and you must sign it with your own hand ; this 
 you have the power to do, for you hold the same keys of the holy 
 
532 THE PORTRAIT AND PROCLAMATION. 
 
 priesthood as I do. If you did not, you could not sign my name 
 for me. You wish to know what my shadow and -proclamation 
 are that you must sign for me. I will inform you. My shadow 
 is my portrait ; and you must have a portrait drawn both of me 
 and my horse. My horse must be drawn large, and in a circle. 
 He must be drawn larger than my servant Gudmund Gudmundsen 
 drew him when he drew the twelve generals and their horses, and 
 he must be drawn white. 
 
 8. When my servant draws my portrait, he must represent me 
 as a large man, with rather long features, and a long sandy beard. 
 I can scarcely describe unto you the color of my hair ; but it is 
 somewhat light much lighter than yours. My hat is tall with 
 seven crowns upon the top thereof. I am dressed as a man of 
 war. This is the description of my portrait. 
 
 9. And now I will give unto you my proclamation. It is as 
 follows: "To all nations and people of all languages who dwell 
 upon the face of the earth, be it known unto you that I am about 
 to establish my Kingdom upon the earth, and all people shall 
 either abide my law, or perish. My law is eternal, and will pre- 
 vail, for I will defend it. I am the King of Israel, even the King 
 of kings and Lord of lords unto Abraham's seed; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen." 
 
 10. And when it is printed, you must sign it for me. And 
 you shall carry my portrait and proclamation upon the front of 
 your hat, that all my people may read it. You must have my 
 portrait drawn and my proclamation printed as soon as you pos- 
 sibly can, and wear them upon your hat, as I have commanded 
 you. I will inform you when to wear them. Watch the move- 
 ments of my spirit upon you, and you will never err, for I will 
 always make you understand me aright. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Stone and Shepherd 
 of Israel, the Bright and Morning Star. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
CONCERNING DUTY. 533 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DUTY OF THE 
 LORD, AND THE DUTY OF THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 270. WEBER, UTAH, May ist, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I am about to speak unto 
 you concerning your duty. You have a duty to perform as well 
 as I have, and each of us must do our own duty in order that all 
 things may go on aright. Therefore, it is right that you should 
 know your duty, in order that you may be able to do it. It is your 
 duty to cleanse your Church. Wben I say your Church, I mean 
 the Church over which you preside. The people whom I now 
 include in your Church, are those who have yielded obedience to 
 the fulness of my gospel. I include none else, although you are 
 the president over all Abraham's seed. I have spoken unto you 
 in this way in order that you may understand me aright. I want 
 you to cut off all the hypocrites who have embraced the fulness of 
 my gospel and have turned traitors to me. Your Church, at pres- 
 ent, consists of those who have yielded obedience to the fulness of 
 my gospel ; but as people continue to obey it, your Church will 
 gradually increase in strength and numbers until all people who 
 will be permitted to live upon the earth will yield obedience unto 
 its laws. 
 
 2. You knov^ that your Church must be small to begin with ; 
 for it could not be otherwise, because Abraham's seed is blinded 
 by the devil so that you cannot, as yet, use them ; but I will 
 wrench them out of his hands. I will give unto you all your own 
 in due time ; but at present you must be satisfied with small 
 things. Your power and influence will gradually increase upon 
 the earth. You cannot deal with the children of Abraham only as 
 you can approach them through the fulness of my gospel. When 
 they hear it and refuse to obey it, they are in your hands, and 
 you shall deal with them ; but you cannot lawfully punish them 
 before they have had the privilege of hearing it. This is my 
 law unto all those whose names are written in the Lamb's Book of 
 of Life. But you can lawfully punish all those people who have 
 yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel, and have 
 
534 CONCERNING DUTY. 
 
 departed from it ; but those who have had the privilege of obeying 
 it, and have refused to do so, I shall cut off myself. I do not ask 
 you to cut these off; but I do call upon you to cut off all those 
 who have turned traitors to me, even all such as come within your 
 reach ; but those of that class who may get out of your reach, so 
 that you cannot get at them without putting yourself to great 
 inconvenience, I will destroy, myself. And when you have cut off 
 all those who may be within your reach, you will have done your 
 part. You must cut off all the hypocrites out of your Church from 
 this time henceforth. The strongest party will always both live 
 my law and defend it, so that you will always have an abundance 
 of power to do your own part ; but should there ever be a time 
 when the hypocrites are the strongest party, I will cut them off for 
 you. I will always do for you that which you cannot do yourself; 
 for this is my duty. 
 
 3. My duty is to cut off all your enemies abroad, even to over- 
 throw the nations of the earth, in order to clear the way for my 
 servants to preach the gospel and establish my law throughout the 
 whole earth ; this I can soon do after I commence. The inhabit- 
 ants of the earth shall know that I am the master. I have now 
 revealed unto you both your duty, and mine own. We have all 
 the power necessary to do the work which we have to do. 
 
 4. You must have the linen and the carpets ready so that they 
 can be laid down with little trouble, and you must have all other 
 things in readiness also; for I am about to call upon you to 
 divide this Camp, and to cut off all the hypocrites ; and after you 
 have done so, I shall come unto you. I shall be with you in the 
 course of one day after that time. I will take your enemies in 
 time. They will never trouble you while they are alive. There- 
 fore, prepare for me ; for lo, I come quickly. I am Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE ARMY OF THE KINGDOM. 535 
 
 REVELATION INSTRUCTING THE PROPHET HOW 
 
 TO ORGANIZE THE ARMY OF THE 
 
 KINGDOM. 
 
 No. 271. WEBER, UTAJI, May 2nd, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I wish to speak unto you 
 concerning the organization of an army. I am about to organize 
 an army, in the midst of my people, which shall continue in my 
 kingdom while this world is in mortality. The duty, of this army 
 will be to cleanse my kingdom by cutting off all hypocrites who 
 may embrace the fulness of my gospel, and afterwards will not 
 abide my law ; all such characters shall be cut off by this army. I 
 want none in this army but true-hearted men, who will defend my 
 law, and execute it upon all those who break it. I want no traitors 
 in this army. My people will understand me. It is my will, if 
 arms can be found, that all those men who have yielded.obedience 
 to the fulness of my gospel should join the army, in connection 
 with those of their brethren who have already joined ; but if suf- 
 ficient arms cannot be found for all, they need not be discouraged; 
 for if they are true to my law, I will accept of them as though they 
 were soldiers in the ranks. He that honors my law, honors me ; 
 but he that rejects my law, is rejected by me. I am the Lord. 
 
 2. And it is right that the army should be organized into com- 
 panies, of twelve in each company, not including the captains of 
 the companies. The captains of the companies being included, 
 will make thirteen in each company. This is the way in which 
 they should be organized into companies : There should be seven 
 companies, and a captain over each company ; and the seventh 
 captain must be the commander of the seven companies. He 
 shall have ninety men in his company, including the six captains. 
 And when I have cut off albyour enemies out of your way, and 
 your Church increases in numbers, your army will increase also, 
 until it will become numerous ; and in due time you will have a 
 a mighty army. When you have organized seven companies, 
 with ninety men in each company, exclusive of the captains, you 
 shall appoint one of those captains as commander over the seven 
 
536 THE ARMY OF THE KINGDOM. 
 
 companies. He shall be commander of six hundred and thirty- 
 six men. The seventh captain shall always be the commander. 
 He shall always be the chief commander of the divisions of the 
 army below him, even when your army numbers millions. This is 
 the order in which your army shall be organized. 
 
 3. You may wish to know what I mean by calling it your 
 army. It is your army. You are the president over the whole 
 earth, even as I am the president over heaven, under my Father. 
 I do not call it mine army, because it is not mine army. Mine 
 army consists of holy angels, who are celestial beings ; but .your 
 army will consist of mortal men. It is my duty to bring mine 
 army to assist you, because your people are in the hands of the 
 devil; they are now his slaves; consequently, they are of no use to 
 you. You cannot u>e your own people until I have delivered 
 them into your hands by destroying the power of the devil. If I 
 did not do this, you could never gain a foothold upon the earth to 
 commence to set up a temporal l^ingdom for Abraham's seed. 
 You are wholly dependent upon me to open a way for you, and to 
 give unto you your rights and to make you the president over your 
 own people. All the power necessary to accomplish this is in 
 mine own hands. I am your general, and at the appointed time, 
 even I when can bring all things to a head, I shall be commanded 
 by you. Therefore, let the faithful of my people form themselves 
 into companies, and prepare themselves to cut off all hypocrites, 
 which is their duty ; but those who will not do this, must not join 
 the army ; for I want true men, and none else. Let those who 
 wish to become soldiers ask themselves this question, "Will I live 
 the law, and execute it upon the transgressor thereof? " If they 
 will not do this, they need not go into the ranks ; for I will not 
 accept of them. They should know that military men must be 
 true men. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
THE FORESHADOWING. 537 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING HOW THE COMING OF 
 
 THE KINGDOM OF GOD MUST BE 
 
 FORESHADOWED. 
 
 No. 272. WEBER, UTAH, May 3rd, 1862. 
 
 1. Lo, I AM come to speak unto you again, my son, to make 
 known unto you what you must do. This is a time of war, and 
 you must prepare for it. There are duties which you have to per- 
 form before I can lawfully come and cut a clear way through your 
 enemies, so that you can set up a kingdom upon the earth for the 
 house of Israel. I wish you to foreshadow my coming, and also 
 the coming of the first eleven generals over my host. You need 
 not foreshadow any more of my generals. If you foreshadow 
 the first twelve it is all that I require at your hands in this 
 respect. 
 
 2. You must call out eleven men besides yourself, even your 
 two counselors and nine of the apostles who were first called to the 
 apostleship. And you must have twelve horses for the twelve men 
 to ride upon, and they must travel four abreast ; and each man 
 must be well dressed. The white, the red, the black and the pale 
 horses must form the first rank, and lead off, and the others must 
 follow in their own order. And they must all travel seven times 
 around this Fort, and shout a loud "hosanna" seven times; and 
 the twelve generals over the heavenly host will be there to witness 
 the sight ; and directly afterwards we will come unto you suddenly. 
 The faithful of my people will then see us as we are, for we will 
 fully unveil ourselves unto them, and they shall look upon us until 
 they are satisfied. And when those twelve men ride around this 
 Fort, you must have your sword drawn, and my servant Richard 
 Cook must have his sword drawn also, and my servant John Banks 
 must have his balances in his hand, and my servant John Parson 
 must carry my law. When all this has been done, the coming of 
 the twelve generals over all the heavenly host will have been fore- 
 shadowed. They will then be at liberty to come and deliver the 
 faithful of my people. But the shadow must go before the sub- 
 stance ; for it is an eternal principle. There is no substance with- 
 
538 THE FORESHADOWING. 
 
 out a shadow; therefore, all substances cast their shadows before 
 them. 
 
 3. You must also foreshadow the setting up of my kingdom 
 upon the earth. You must have tie same men and horses in the 
 second case as in the first ; and you must ride round the Fort seven 
 times, in precisely the same order as in the first case, and my peo- 
 ple shall give unto the prophet seven cheers. They shall hail him 
 as lord over the whole earth ; for this is his right. His power shall 
 drive all evil from the earth, and his influence shall reign and rule 
 forever. He shall break all nations to pieces as a potter's vessel 
 is broken; for I am the Lord, and I will give unto him 
 power over all evil. No enemy shall ever stand befor* him unto 
 the end. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the priest- 
 hood after the order of Aaron. You must select twelve men out 
 of the priesthood of Aaron, and they must have twelve rods of 
 wood to represent the twelve rods which belong to the twelve 
 princes of Israel; and they must have twelve horses, and they 
 must travel four abreast. The bishop and his counselors, with 
 another man, must form the first rank; and the men must all be 
 well dressed, and they must travel around this Fort twelve times, 
 in order to acknowledge the twelve princes of Israel. This will be 
 their shadow ; but in due time the substance will come. 
 
 5. The twelve firstborn sons of Adam will again be upon the 
 earth, and take their own places as the twelve princes of Israel. 
 All things which were not done away with at my first coming will 
 be restored by the fulness of my gospel. And when the twelve 
 princes of Israel again come to the Dearth to take their places, I 
 shall give unto them their twelve rods ; for they will be the rulers 
 over all Abraham's seed, in temporal things; but I shall give those 
 rods to none of Aaron's sons but the legal heirs to them. Inas- 
 much, therefore, as I am about to establish a kingdom upon the 
 earth for the house of Israel, I must acknowledge the first rulers 
 in that kingdom by sending their shadows before them. I must 
 acknowledge all leading authorities, both in heaven and upon the 
 earth, by casting their shadows before them. This I am doing at 
 the commencement of my kingdom. Therefore, do as I have 
 cammanded you, and all will be well. I am Jesus Christ. Even 
 so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE LORD PROMISES TO PROVIDE. 539 
 
 THE LORD PROMISES TO SUPPLY THE PEOPLE 
 WITH FOOD. CONCERNING THE FORE- 
 SHADOWING OF THE ROD 
 OF MOSES. 
 
 No. 273. WEBER, UTAH, May 6th, 1862. 
 
 1. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; for I am about to speak unto 
 you concerning the present situation of my people, and also the 
 preparing of the people for the great event which lies before them. 
 You look at the situation of my people, and you are greatly pained; 
 for you see that they are destitute of food, and you cannot see 
 what can be done for them. You say that every way seems 
 blocked up, so that my people cannot obtain that which is neces- 
 sary for their subsistence ; and what to do to relieve them, you do 
 not know. If I can do anything for them, you say that you would 
 like me to do it. You do not wish to see them brought to extreme 
 poverty ; but if I do not speedily supply their needs, you say that 
 such will be the case. You say that you fully depend upon me to 
 provide for mine own people ; that I must know that you can do 
 nothing for them ; that I suffer your enemies to keep your hands 
 tied, so that you can do nothing either for yourself or them ; and 
 therefore you fully depend upon me to supply their needs. 
 
 2. You call them my people. In one sense they are my peo- 
 ple ; but in another sense they are not. Strictly speaking, they 
 are your people, because they sprung from you. You have the 
 first claim on them, Aaron has the second, and I have the third. 
 Thus, there are three persons who each have separate claims on 
 Abraham's seed. You have the first claim, because by you the 
 holy priesthood came to the earth. To you and your seed belongs 
 the government over Adam's posterity. You are their lawgiver. 
 You are the child of promise, who was ordained to "bruise the ser- 
 pent's head," and to destroy his power, and to establish righteous- 
 ness, universally and eternally, over the face of the whole earth ; 
 therefore, you have the first claim upon Abraham's seed. Aaron 
 has the second claim on Abraham's seed, because the lesser priest. 
 
540 CONCERNING THE THREE CLAIMS. 
 
 hood came to the earth through him to them. He stands at the 
 head of all those of Adam's children whose names are written in 
 the Lamb's Book of Life. Under the president of the high priest- 
 hood he is the lawgiver to Adam's posterity. He has the second 
 claim because he was the second person to operate. He had 
 introduced his seed upon the earth long before I came to the 
 earth and was crucified upon the cross. Seth was born long before 
 the death of Abel. Cain, Abel and Seth were all upon the earth 
 at the same time. Seth was grown up to manhood before Cain 
 slew Abel ; and Abel had a seed upon the earth before Cain slew 
 him, and his seed has continued upon the earth ever since. The 
 Bible does not give a full account of Cain, Abel and Seth. There 
 are many things contained in the Bible which are wrong' as they 
 now are, because they have been altered, and the true sense there- 
 of has been destroyed; but in due time I will put right all things 
 contained in that Book. Those three men have each a seed upon 
 the earth which, in the beginning, started from them, and has con- 
 tinued upon the earth ever since. Adam knew, long before either 
 Cain or Abel were born, that Cain would slay Abel when he 
 should have the opportunity to do so. Adam knew them both 
 more than a million years before that circumstance took place. 
 He had no occasion to wait until that circumstance had taken 
 place in order to know that it would take place ; for he knew it 
 long before either Cain or Abel had a spiritual existence. There- 
 fore, Aaron has the second claim. I was called to operate the last. 
 My blood was spilt upon the cross for all Abel's children whose 
 names are written in the Lamb's Book of Life, and therefore, I 
 hold the last claim. It is my duty to finish the work, and to do 
 that for you and Aaron which you cannot do for yourselves. You 
 are both in weakness ; but the power is in my hands, and I have 
 to deliver and save Abraham's seed through you and Aaron, We 
 have each a part to act, and we have to work together in perfect 
 union. I hold the last claim because I am celestial. I am not of 
 this earth. All the claim that I have on Aaron's children is to 
 save them, and raise them from mortality to immortality, even to 
 eternal life. This is my duty, and until I have accomplished it, I 
 "shall not have finished my work as a Mediator and a Savior to 
 "Abraham's children. Therefore, it is my duty to operate the last 
 and to finish the whole work. 
 
THE LORD PROMISES TO PROVIDE. 54! 
 
 3. You look unto me to supply the needs of these people; for 
 you say that it is my duty to do it, and that you do not wish to 
 have your mind burdened with that which belongs to me ; for you 
 think that ^you have enough to bear without being thus afflicted. 
 You say that you wish me to do mine own duty, and you will do 
 yours. If you will do your duty, that is all that I require at your 
 hands. You need not fret about the poverty of these people, for 
 I will provide for them myself. I will continue to open a way for 
 them, so that they will have sufficient food until I deliver an 
 abundance of everything into their hands, which I shall do .as soon 
 as they can get all things ready for the test. They will not need 
 a greal deal more provision in this place ; but what they do need, 
 I will open a way for them to obtain. I will provide for them from 
 day to day, as I have hitherto done. I have supplied the needs of 
 these people in this place up to the present time, so that they have 
 not, to any great extent, lacked bread. Therefore, rest yourself 
 contented and trust in me, and I will supply the needs of my faith- 
 ful people unto the end. I am the Lord. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I say unto you, my son, I wish to speak 
 unto you upon another subject. You must have a rod made of 
 wood, as much as five feet in length, with a large ball on the top 
 of it, in order to foreshadow the rod which I am about to give unto 
 you. It must be made as neat as possible. As I have said unto 
 you before, so I say unto you again, the shadow must go before 
 the substance ; therefore, you must foreshadow the rod which I am 
 about to give unto you before you can lawfully take it into your 
 hands. And when you travel seven times around this Fort the 
 second time, you must hold your sword in your right hand, and 
 the rod in your left hand until you have ridden round the Fort 
 seven times. If you had only your rod to carry, it would be right 
 to carry it in your right hand ; but inasmuch as you have both a 
 sword and a rod to carry at once, you must carry your sword in 
 your right hand, and the rod in your left hand. 
 
 5. I do not, at this time, wish to give unto you the signature 
 of the first God, which is engraven upon the rod which I shall give 
 unto you ; but when I give it unto you, you will see the signature 
 engraven upon it. I shall keep that signature secret until I give 
 unto you the rod ; for it is unlawful for me to reveal it unto you 
 
542 THE PROCLAMATION AND SIGNATURE. 
 
 until I give unto you the rod ; and when I do this, you will have 
 the power of your office at once ; but while you are in weakness I 
 cannot reveal that secret unto you. I cannot do that which the 
 law forbids me to do. But you may place the following signature 
 upon the rod which my people will make for you, as a shadow of 
 that signature which is upon the rod which I shall give unto you : 
 "To all nations and people of all languages that now dwell upon 
 the earth : Be it known unto you that I am sent by the great King 
 of Kings, and Lord of Lords, to rule over all Adam's posterity; 
 and being his representative, I hold in my hand this emblem of 
 power, unto which all nations and kingdoms of the earth must 
 bow; for I am the legitimate ruler over all the earth, and my 
 authority is sanctioned by the first God ; therefore, I hold in my 
 hand an emblem of power to represent his scepter which will 
 shortly be given unto me." You must sign this proclamation with 
 your own hand ; for there is none upon the earth greater than you. 
 And when you have signed it, I will sanction it. I will sanction 
 all that you do, and I will lead you aright in all things. You must 
 sign it in the following manner: "I am Joseph Morris, President 
 of the Melchisedec Priesthood." This signature will answer until 
 I give unto you the rod which is signed by the first God. This is 
 only a shadow to go before the substance. 
 
 6. And it is my will that my servant Richard Cook should 
 wear a printed card upon the front of his hat ; and he must have 
 these words printed upon it: "Life, prosperity, glory and exalta- 
 tion the reward of the law-abiding citizens of my Kingdom. But 
 the reward of those who break my law will be death and destruc- 
 tion." 
 
 7. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the rod 
 which is to represent Aaron's rod. It must have a large ball upon 
 the top of it, much larger than the other rods ; ad leaves and 
 branches must be painted upon it. It must be made to look as 
 though it was blossoming. My people must beautify all those rods 
 as well as they possibly can. I will not hold you any longer at 
 this time; but I will speak unto again. I am the Light and Life 
 of the world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
CONCERNING THE ROYAL ROBE. 543 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE PROPHET'S ROBE. 
 
 No. 274. WEBER, UTAH, May yth, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world, even Jesus 
 Christ, and I am about to speak unto you again. You wish to 
 know something more about the royal robe which I have promised 
 to give unto you. It belongs to the first God ; and the rod which 
 I shall give unto you belongs to the first God also. They were 
 both delivered into the hands of your Father when his world 
 entered into mortality. Previous to that time you received your 
 ordination under the hands of your own Father,, and he was 
 assisted by two other Gods, who were his counselors. By these 
 three Gods you were ordained to rule over Adam's posterity, even 
 to be their lawgiver, and to either bring those of them who are 
 in mortality to obedience to -the law^ or else to destroy them from 
 off the. face of the earth, until the law has become universal. It is 
 your calling to accomplish this work, even to make all crooked 
 places straight, and rough places smooth. After you had received 
 your ordination under the hands of your own Father to rule over 
 Adam's posterity, the first God sanctioned your ordination by giv- 
 ing his own rod, which is his scepter, unto your Father, and also 
 his own robe; and your Father was compelled by law to give them 
 to you when you took your mission to this earth. Just previous to 
 taking your first mission to this earth of Adam's, you came to our 
 earth, which is celestial, and you brought with you the robe and 
 scepter ; and when you left our world to come upon this earth on 
 your first 'mission, you left them with my Father who is compelled 
 by law to take care of them until you need them, and when you 
 need them he is compelled by law to send them unto you. He 
 cannot withhold them when you need them, for you first brought 
 them unto him, and he is compelled to give them unto you when 
 he has given unto you the leading keys of the holy priesthood, 
 even when he has raised you up ; but he is compelled to give unto 
 you the theory of the gospel before he can give unto you the 
 power thereof. The robe and rod which you brought unto us are 
 always either in our possession in heaven, or else in your posses- 
 
544 THE ROBE AND THE ROD. 
 
 sion upon the earth. I shall give unto you the rod directly after 
 you have foreshadowed it. When you took your first mission to 
 this earth, Adam sanctioned the ordination which you received 
 under the hands of your Father by ordaining you to preside over 
 all his posterity. This is according to the order of the holy priest- 
 hood. You have the sanction of the first God, the sanction of 
 your own Father, and also the sanction of Adam ; therefore, you 
 have the sanction of three Gods, which completes your appoint- 
 ment. The Eternal Father sanctions all that they have done in 
 your appointment ; therefore, you will be in full power as soon as 
 I have given unto you your robe and rod. 
 
 2. Your Father has a robe and rod of his own which he holds 
 in his own possession. He did not give them unto you when you 
 came to take your mission on Adam's earth; but he gave unto 
 you the robe and rod of the first God. But when you were a 
 redeemer, and filled the office which I am now filling, you used 
 your Father's robe and rod, even as I am now using my Father's 
 robe and rod ; but you have never used them since, neither will 
 you ever be called to use them again. 
 
 3. You wish to know whether I am pleased with the rigging 
 which you have obtained for your horse, and also your sword. 
 They are not at all suitable for the occasion. My people should 
 strive to obtain a suitable sword, and more suitable rigging for 
 your horse. I know that my people are poor and unable to do 
 a great deal either for you or the rest of my servants. But it is 
 not lawful for the rest of my servants to have their horses rigged 
 as beautifully as your horse should be rigged. My people must 
 consider your position, and give honor to whom honor is due. 
 Every man should be treated according to the rank which he 
 belongs to. When the rest of my servants are called to hold the 
 same office up(3n other mortal earths as you are now called to hold 
 upon this earth, they will be entitled to every blessing and endow- 
 ment which you are now entitled to. 
 
 4. I do not particularly wish to blame my people but they 
 are very forgetful and short-sighted. I wish to stir up their minds 
 to look at all things aright. They are very apt to run over au- 
 thority, and undervalue it, which is a great sin, even the sin of 
 ingratitude, and would lead a people down to destruction. My 
 
AUTHORITY SHOULD BE RESPECTED. 545 
 
 people must respect their leaders according to the rank and place 
 which they hold. They must not forget to do this ; for if they do, 
 they will see great affliction.. I do not want my servants to mis- 
 understand me. I do not wish to blame or censure them for 
 assuming that which does not belong to them, for they have nor 
 done so ; but I wish to stir up the minds of my people in order 
 to put them in a way to look at things aright. They are so apt to 
 err in their ways that if I were not to speak in this manner at 
 times, they would almost forget that there are any men in their 
 midst who hold any authority at all, and consequently my servants 
 would lose their influence over them. My people must under- 
 stand that if they fight against those men whom I have called to 
 lead them, they fight against me. If my servants are faithful, and 
 uphold my servant, the prophet, my faithful people shall uphold 
 them. But my people shall not uphold any man who will not up- 
 hold my servant, the prophet ; for such persons are not of me 
 they are rejected by me ; therefore my faithful people shall uphold 
 none such. I am the Lord. 
 
 5. All my servants must stand in their own places, and be 
 faithful to my servant, the prophet; and my people must uphold 
 my servants as they would uphold me if I were in their midst ; for 
 those that my servant Joseph has called, I have called. I called 
 them through him, and I will uphold them as long as they are 
 faithful to him. If they are faithful unto him, they are faithful 
 uuto me ; for I shall always lead him aright. 
 
 6. And now, my son, it would be well if you could obtain a 
 better sword, and better rigging for your horse than you now have; 
 but if you cannot do so, I will accept of that which you now have. 
 I will shortly 'speak unto you again, and make known unto you 
 some things which you will need to know before my coming. I 
 am now quickly winding up affairs, in order that the way may be 
 clear before me. I shall come speedily. I am the Glorious 
 Branch of Jesse, the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
546 THE FORESHADOWING OF THE ROBE. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING HOW THE PROPHET'S ROBE 
 
 AND THE ROBE OF JESUS CHRIST MUST 
 
 BE FORESHADOWED. 
 
 No. 275. WEBER, UTAH, May 8th, 1862. 
 
 T. I AM about to speak unto you again, my son; for my work 
 presses me very much at present, and will continue to do so until 
 I come unto you in power, which I shall do very soon after you 
 have foreshadowed my coming. You know that the substance is 
 not long before it makes its appearance after the shadow has been 
 seen; and so it will be with respect to my coining. As soon as 
 the shadow shall have passed before my people, the, substance will 
 begin to make its appearance ; for the substance is connected with 
 the shadow ; they both go together. It is impossible for a shadow 
 to exist without a substance ; where one is the other must be. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the fore- 
 shadowing of that robe which I shall give unto you ; for you must 
 foreshadow that also. You must have a robe made of fine white 
 linen, and you must wear it when you ride around the Fort tile 
 second seven times. You will foreshadow me and the remaining 
 eleven generals over all the heavenly hosts when you ride around 
 the Fort the first seven times, and at that time you must carry with 
 you my proclamation and signature upon the front of your hat, as 
 I have said unto you before. You must foreshadow me as a man 
 of war upon that occasion. You need not wear the robe which 
 my people must malj:e for you, nor yet carry your rod ; but you 
 must have a drawn sword in your hand, and my proclamation and 
 signature upon the front of your hat ; and you must wear your 
 light checked dress. If you had an officer's dress, it would please 
 me much better ; for if you had, I should be much better fore- 
 shadowed than when you wear plain clothing. But on account of 
 the poverty of my people, they cannot obtain those things which 
 would be the most proper and suitable for the occasion ; therefore, 
 I shall have to accept of those things which they can obtain. I do 
 not require impossibilities at their hands. To properly foreshadow 
 me, and the remaining eleven generals, those twelve men who will 
 
THE FORESHADOWING OF THE ROBE AND ROD. 547 
 
 be called to foreshadow us, should be dressed in military apparel. 
 They should each have an officer's dress, and the first seven of 
 them should wear crowns according to their birthright, even from 
 one crown up to seven. In this manner we should be properly 
 foreshadowed. But when my people have done the best they can, 
 we shall have to accept of their work. 
 
 '3. You will foreshadow your own robe and rod the second 
 seven times that you ride around the Fort, and you will foreshadow 
 my robe and rod at the same time. Your robe must be made long 
 and wide at the bottom, and it should be one foot longer than 
 from your shoulder to the ground. You must wear it when you 
 ride, for it is not for you to walk in; and you must wear your 
 checked dress under it. It must be made with sleeves, and it 
 must wrap around your body. It must cover your body, and not 
 one-half of it only. A robe such as the people of the old Church 
 wear only covers one side of a person ; they are only half robes, 
 and represent the priesthood in part. If my servant Joseph- Smith 
 had known the nature of his robe, and what it represented, he 
 would have known that he only held the holy priesthood in part ; 
 for the robe covering only one side represented imperfection and 
 weakness, even the priesthood in part. If he had had a. perfect 
 robe to cover him all around, with sleeves in it, it would have 
 proved that he held the full keys of the holy priesthood ; for the 
 man that holds a perfect priesthood must wear a perfect robe. 
 Therefore, my son, you must wear a perfect robe, because you 
 hold a perfect priesthood. 
 
 4. You wish to know what kind of a hat you are to wear when 
 you carry my proclamation and signature. You should wear a 
 black hat at that time ; a white hat would not be proper for you to 
 wear. Your outside covering must be of different colors. You 
 must appear as much like a man of war as you possibly can when 
 you foreshadow me ; but when you go around the Fort the second 
 seven times, you must wear a white hat and your white robe. At 
 that time, you need not carry my proclamation around with you. 
 
 5. When you foreshadow the heavenly and earthly orders, you 
 must have your horse's mane plaited in seven parts, and each part 
 must be tied at the bottom, with white rosettes attached. Your 
 horse must be washed clean, even as white as possible for the 
 
548 CONCERNING THE PROPHET. 
 
 occasion, and you must also have your own hair divided into seven 
 parts. You do not seem to put yourself to much trouble about 
 dividing your hair into seven parts ; but you wear it plain almost 
 continually, as though it was of little consequence whether your 
 hair is divided ,or not. You must get some person to attend to 
 the dividing of your hair every day. You must wear your hair in 
 seven locks continually. You have no need to have such things 
 neglected for the want of a little more help. 
 
 6. You are very much afraid of putting any person about, in 
 the least, on your account. How much have you been put about 
 on these people's account ? A thousand times more than they 
 will ever put themselves about for you. But few of my people 
 appreciate the gift which I have sent unto them. They do not 
 seem to know that they have the best and most unassuming man 
 in their midst that ever trod upon this earth as a prophet. If I 
 should take him away from them, they would never meet with 
 another man like unto him for justice, virtue and integrity ; for 
 there is none upon the earth. He will face anything for truth. I 
 could not find another man upon the earth that could have done 
 what he has done. He will suffer all manner of abuse, and never 
 give way. He never gave way upon this earth. But when I have 
 to deal with some men, they give way over a thing of naught and 
 betray their trust. He has never done this, although he has been 
 placed in the most trying circumstances that ever man was placed 
 in. If a man would give way at" all, he would give way when 
 placed in such circumstances as those which my servant has been 
 placed in. When a man, being placed in such circumstances as 
 my servant has been placed in, overcomes them, he overcomes all 
 things ; therefore, he is entitled to rule over all things even to 
 rule the earth with a rod of iron, and dash the nations into pieces. 
 There are some of my people who have, to a certain extent, appre- 
 ciated my blessings ; but there are others- who have not done so. 
 Such people appear to know nothing about the gift of a prophet to 
 lead a people, which is the greatest of all gifts unto mortals. They 
 % do not know how to treat a prophet; if they did, they would 
 watch for my law at his mouth, and run with delight to obey it. 
 They should treat him as they would treat me if 'I were in their 
 midst. Tney respact me because they cannot see me, or talk to 
 
CONCERNING THE THREE PRISONERS. 549 
 
 me as they can talk to him ; but if I were in their midst, and they 
 could see my face as they can see his, they would think as little of 
 me as they do of him. The person who despises my prophet, 
 despises me ; who loves and respects him, loves and respects rrie ; 
 who obeys him, obeys me ; for I am one with him, and he is one 
 with me. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE TWO CONFLICT- 
 ING POWERS, AND THE THREE PRISONERS. 
 
 No. 276. . WEBER, UTAH, May 9th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, even Jesus Christ, and 
 I am about to speak unto you again. You wish to know what 
 you are to do with those three men whom my people brought into 
 this place, and who have departed from me, and who are now my 
 most bitter enemies. You know my law, and it will be inflicted 
 upon them at the right time. They are condemned by my law to 
 perish, and they shall perish at the right time. They are traitors 
 to my government, and death is the traitor's doom. You must 
 keep a strong guard over them, and keep them in this place, and 
 my people must feed them and guard them until I am ready to 
 divide this Camp. I will divide this Camp as soon as you are 
 through with foreshadowing my coming. I want to get through 
 with that work as soon as I can ; for I want to purge out from 
 among my faithful people all the hypocrites as soon as I possibly 
 can, for mine enemies all around are getting worked up at a rapid 
 rate at this time, more so than what they have been before. They 
 perceive that things are fast working up to a head with my people; 
 and as fast as my people come up to a head, they come up to a 
 head. Both powers will meet at the right time, and then there 
 will be a crash. The power of two worlds will come together 
 when I come; for when I come I shall bring all the warriors of 
 heaven, which consists of the whole power of our earth, with me. 
 
550 THE ENEMIES ARE RESTLESS. 
 
 When I speak of power, I mean all the military power of our 
 earth. The inhabitants of this earth will feel their weakness when 
 the power of our earth has been brought to bear upon them. 
 Therefore, when I come, two worlds will come in contact with 
 each other, and the power of heaven will destroy that power which 
 has ruled this world for six thousand years, and raise it to immor- 
 tality, to exist for all eternity. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, mine enemies who 
 are abroad are getting restless. They wish to get a clue on my peo- 
 ple, so that they may have, as they suppose, a just cause to come 
 up against my people to "use them up" (as they call it). They 
 are waiting for rny people to do something so that they can lay 
 hold of them according to their laws. I will give unto them what 
 they are waiting for as soon as all things are made ready in this 
 Camp. All that I am waiting for is for my people to get all things 
 ready so that I can come. You understand me aright. I do not 
 wish you to punish those three men until I tell you, and then you 
 must do as I command you. You must keep a good guard over 
 them, and treat them properly, and I will keep your enemies off 
 until I am fully ready to destroy them, and then I will let them 
 all loose, and smite them all dead as soon as I have done so; 
 and I will supply the needs of my people until that is done. 
 After that, they will have an abundance of everything to render 
 them happy. In due time they shall be the richest of all people. 
 Therefore, my son, be diligent, and assist me as well as you can 
 to make all things ready, so that I can come and release my faith- 
 ful people, and show unto them my glory ; for this is what I shall 
 do speedily. 
 
 3. I need not reveal unto you any more at this time. You 
 know how to deal with those three men. Do as I have com- 
 manded you, and all will be right. I will take care of your 
 enemies who are abroad. Leave them in mine hands. They will 
 never trouble you alive. Therefore, rest content, and know that 
 I am with you to do that for you which you cannot do for yourself. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Light and Life of the world; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE ROBE OF AARON. 551 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING HOW THE ROBE OF AARON 
 MUST BE FORESHADOWED. 
 
 No. 277. WEBER, UTAH, May ioth, 1862. 
 
 1. You wish to know, my son, whether I have anything more 
 to make known unto you, in order to fully prepare you for the 
 event which is close upon you. I will answer you. There are 
 several important items which I have yet to make known unto you, 
 in order that all things may be made ready for my appearance, 
 and I will reveal them unto you, from day to day, whenever you 
 need information. I cannot reveal unto you all things at once ; 
 but I have to give unto you a knowledge of things gradually, as 
 you need it. My work is a progressive work. It commences very 
 small, and it increases daily, and it will increase until it will finally 
 fill the whole earth. You "know that everything that exists must 
 have a beginning, and that which has a beginning must have a 
 maturity ; but my gospel will never arrive at a maturity upon this 
 earth of Adam's until it has raised it from mortality to immor- 
 tality. 
 
 2. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning a robe to 
 foreshadow Aaron's robe, which must be worn by my servant 
 William Harris when he and eleven more of the priests of Aaron 
 who may be selected for the occasion, travel around the Fort 
 twelve times. It must be made with sleeves attached, and it must 
 wrap around his whole body. But it must not be made more 
 than half as wide at the bottom as your robe must be, neither 
 must it be as long; it must not reach to within six inches of his 
 feet. But as far as the making of it is concerned, it must be made 
 in the same shape as yours. It must be a perfect robe, with the 
 exception of it being short. It being short represents the weak- 
 ness of the Aaronic priesthood its inability to defend itself against 
 the enemy. It not covering the man entirely, shows that there is 
 something lacking. The man who wears the robe represents the 
 power of the devil over an earth in mortality, and the robe repre- 
 sents the power of the priesthood which he holds. Therefore, 
 Aaron's robe represents his priesthood being too weak to over- 
 
552 CONCERNING THE ROYAL ROBE. 
 
 power the devil, and liberate itself from under his power. But the 
 robe which has been made for you, represents the first God's robe, 
 which, being much longer than the man who wears it, represents 
 an abundance of power. It i.s the royal robe of the Melchisedec 
 priesthood, and it is the only one that comes down from heaven to 
 the earth. It is owned by the first God, and it Comes down to 
 every mortal earth to be worn by every seventh angel. It being 
 so long, represents power over evil; and it being so wide, repre- 
 sents a superabundance of power. The person who represents the 
 power of the devil appears to be small in that robe ; lor it will 
 wrap around him several times, which represents that the power of 
 the devil is small when compared with the power of the holy 
 priesthood. 
 
 3. You wish to know whether there are any marks or signs to 
 be placed upon the robes. There are signs upon the robJe, and a 
 signature upon the rod which I shall give unto you ; but it is un- 
 lawful for me to reveal them unto you until I give unto you the 
 robe and rod, and then you will see them for yourself. But you 
 may place the following inscription upon the robe which has been 
 made for you: "This robe represents the power of the Melchise- 
 dec priesthood, and foreshadows the first royal robe which is about 
 to be given unto me, it being my legitimate right to wear it. And 
 being the representative of the great King of Kings and- Lord of 
 Lords to" all Adam's posterity, I stand upon the earth in his stead, 
 having my mission signed and sealed by him. And as a token of 
 my appointment, I hereby present myself before the inhabitants of 
 the earth with the symbol of his robe upon me, and of his rod in 
 my hand." And you shall sign the above in the following man- 
 ner : "I am the President of the Melchisedec Priesthood, and the 
 Representative of the first God to all Adam's posterity, even 
 Joseph Morris. Even so. Amen and Amen." 
 
 4. And now, behold, I say unto you concerning the robe 
 which must be made to foreshadow or represent Aaron's robe. 
 You wish to know the inscription which must be placed upon it. 
 It is as follows : "To all nations and people of all languages who 
 novv dwell upon the face of the earth : Be it known unto you that 
 I stand upon the earth in Aaron's stead, with the symbol of his 
 robe upon me, and of his rod in my hand. And having received 
 
THE ROBE AND ROD OF AARON. 553 
 
 mine appointment from Jesus Christ, and from his prophet upon 
 the earth, I act in the name of Jesus Christ, and by his authority, 
 in Aaron's stead, until he shall come forth to act in his own place. 
 My robe represents his priesthood, and my rod his power." You 
 shall sign the above in the following manner : " I ar Jesus Christ, 
 who first called my servant William Harris, and his appointment 
 was sanctioned by the president of the high priesthood, even 
 Joseph Morris. Even so. Amen and Amen." 
 
 5. Both you and my servant William Harris must each have 
 his own inscription fastened to the front of his robe, and carry it 
 upon his breast, so that they may be read by those who may wish 
 to read them. They must be printed, so that they may be read 
 without any difficulty. Let my people labor with all diligence to 
 get all things ready, so that I may not have to wait for them an 
 unreasonable length of time. I have waited for them long enough. 
 Therefore, let them make all things ready as soon as they possibly 
 can, for I am coming speedily. Even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE ROBES OF THE 
 TWO PRIESTHOODS. 
 
 No. 278. WEBER, UTAH, May i2th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am he that shuts, and no one opens; and that 
 opens, and no one shuts; even Jesus Christ. I am come to speak 
 unto you again. I can assure you that mine enemies are now 
 being worked up in their feelings at a rapid speed. They hardly 
 know how to contain themselves. They do not know what to 
 think about my people taking up prisoners. They say that my 
 people are taking the law into their own hands, and that they are 
 against all the laws of the country. They also say that the act 
 which my people have committed pertaining to those prisoners 
 proves to their satisfaction that my people are opposed to their law 
 and are rebels to their government ; and they declare that they 
 will not stand it. I can assure them that they will have to stand it ; 
 
554 THE ROBES OF THE PRIESTHOODS. 
 
 for they will have to bear it. I will now show unto them who is 
 master. I wish you to drive things ahead as fast as you can until 
 all things are. made ready for me to come and visit you. I can 
 assure you that my people have no time to trifle away ; but they 
 must work wit]} all diligence until all things are made ready for 
 me to come. I have to keep mine enemies back even now. They 
 are restless to come up against my people, and I have to break 
 them up and confuse them in order to keep them back. I want 
 my people to hurry and make all things ready as soon as they 
 possibly can ; for I do not want to be- put to the necessity of hold- 
 ing mine enemies back any longer than what I can avoid. I want 
 to sweep them off the earth, and be avenged on them ; but I can- 
 not do so until all things are made ready for me to come. There- 
 fore, let my people work with all diligence to make things ready 
 as soon as they can, and I will then come and deliver the faithful. 
 I am the Lord. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son, as soon as you have 
 foreshadowed my coming, you shall divide this Camp; for there 
 are hypocrites among these people whom you could never pene- 
 trate by preaching unto them ; but you shall penetrate them as 
 soon as they are separated from the faithful. They are deceived 
 by the devil ; he makes them believe that they are all right, and 
 the contrary they will not know until they are separated, and stand 
 before the faithful to be slain by them. It will be the duty of the 
 faithful to slay the hypocrites, and cleanse my Church from all 
 lawless and rebellious characters. I shall give unto you a com- 
 mandment to divide this Camp as soon as you have foreshadowed 
 my coming ; and after the Camp has been divided, and the hypo- 
 crites shall have been cut off, I shall come unto you in the course 
 of one day, and then I shall cut you a clear way through your 
 enemies to your satisfaction. I shall let mine enemies loose as 
 soon as the hypocrites shall have been cut off, and I shall slay 
 them. 
 
 3. You wish to know whether the remaining eleven apostles who 
 will be called to ride with you seven times around this Fort, should 
 wear robes as well as yourself. I will inform you. It is not neces- 
 sary on this occasion, in consequence of tie poverty of my people. 
 We shall dispense with that matter ; for my people are unable to 
 
THE ROBES OF THE PRIESTHOODS. 555 
 
 fit out all my servants as they should be fitted out if my people 
 were more wealthy. I do not wish to burden my people in fitting 
 out my servants any more than I can possibly help. When they 
 have done all that they .can, I require no more of them ; but in 
 due time all the high priests will be called to wear the robes of the 
 Melchisedec priesthood, which robes are represented unto people 
 upon the earth by your robe, for they will be made like it, even 
 long and wide, to represent the power of the high and holy priest- 
 hood ; therefore, one robe will suffice to represent the power of the 
 Melchisedec priesthood. The eleven apostles might have the 
 privilege to wear robes when they travel around this Fort, as well 
 as you, if they had them ; but my people are too poor at present 
 to purchase them for my servants. All ihe robes of the holy 
 priesthood are made alike, and all robes of the Aaronic priesthood 
 are made alike also ; therefore, one robe of each kind will be suf- 
 ficient to represent the power and authority of the two priesthoods. 
 The eleven priests of Aaron might also wear robes like unto the 
 bishop's when they travel with him twelve times around this Fort, 
 if they had them. All priests, whether high priests or Aaronic 
 priests, are entitled to the privilege of wearing the robes which 
 belong to their priesthood, when they can be obtained for them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION INSTRUCTING THE PROPHET TO 
 
 ORGANIZE SEVEN COMPANIES OF SOLDIERS 
 
 AS A COMMENCEMENT OF THE ARMY 
 
 OF THE KINGDOM. 
 
 No. 279. WEBER, UTAH, May i5th, 1862. 
 
 i. You CONSIDER that I have been extremely backward in 
 speaking unto you, and you say in your feelings that you would 
 like to know the reason of it. What can I say unto you? What 
 reason can I assign for neglecting to speak unto you for the last 
 few days ? I looked down upon you, and I saw the position in 
 
 
556 THE ORGANIZATION OF AN ARMY. 
 
 which you were placed. I saw that you had a number of other 
 matters to attend to, and that your whole time was taken up in 
 attending to them, so much so that you had no time to sit down 
 to write from my mouth ; therefore, I considered that I should ac;t 
 very unreasonably to press you to write under such circumstances. 
 I have to act reasonably in all my movements. I can only reveal 
 unto you the mysteries of my kingdom gradually, for you cannot 
 receive all things at once. I have to work with you just as the 
 circumstances in which you continue to be placed compel me. 
 As you need fresh information upon one subject after another, I 
 am compelled by law to impart it unto you. I will never neglect 
 you never fear. I am the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 2. And behold, I speak unto you concerning the organization 
 of a small army in the midst of my people. You must have an 
 army of valiant, faithful men who will both live my law and cut 
 off those who, after having yielded obedience to the fulness of my 
 gospel, will not abide it ; such persons shall be cut off by this 
 army when commanded by the proper authority to do so. As I 
 have said unto you before, so I say unto you again, you must 
 have seven companies, with twelve men in each company, not 
 including the captains of the companies. And the soldiers com- 
 posing these companies must be chosen men, even chosen by you ; 
 for I want none in this army but those who are too honorable to 
 betray their trust. I do not want more than seven companies to 
 commence with ; that number will be sufficient at present. You 
 must gather together all the men of this Camp, and select seven 
 companies out of them. You must select none for soldiers who 
 are over three-score years old ; neither shall you select any who 
 are under eighteen years old ; but you shall choose your soldiers 
 from eighteen to sixty years of age. And those whom you may 
 choose shall swear an oath which must be sworn by all soldiers 
 who may be called into your army upon the earth, and by none 
 else; and that soldier who may stand in the rank and break 
 that oath, after swearing it, must be punished as soon as he has 
 broken it. 
 
 3. Inasmuch as I have called upon you to organize seven com- 
 panies, with a captain over each company, the seventh captain 
 must command the whole division. And when the division shall 
 
THE ORGANIZATION OF AN ARMY. 557 
 
 be called out to cut off the hypocrites, the soldiers must stand in a 
 block, one company behind another. The first company, com- 
 manded by the first captain, must form the first line, and they 
 must stand next to those who shall be executed. The second 
 company must stand behind the first, and the third company 
 behind the second, and so on, including the seventh company 
 which must stand behind the sixth. And when they shall be 
 called to operate, you must give the first command to the captain 
 of the seventh company, and he shall give his command to the 
 first captain. The first captain shall then give his command to 
 his company, and they shall fire the first ; after which they shall 
 all kneel down, unless there should be some who fail to do their 
 duty ; such shall not be permitted to kneel down, but they shall 
 stand up in the ranks. The second captain shall then, after hav- 
 ing received command from the seventh captain, give his com- 
 mand to the second company, and they shall shoot those of the 
 first company who fail to do their duty when commanded. And 
 in this manner each company shall always cut off those in the 
 company before them who may fail to do their duty in the rank. 
 In this order your army shall be arranged and operate when they 
 shall be called upon to do so by the captains. But if after the 
 seventh captain shall have given his command to the six com- 
 panies the hypocrites should not be cut off, he shall give his com- 
 mand to his own company, and should they fail to do their duty, 
 you must give your command to me, and I will see if I cannot 
 find power to cut them off. If the army which you have will not 
 cut off the hypocrites after you have gone the regular round with 
 them, then I will cut them off instantly ; but I feel persuaded that 
 you will not need my help on that occasion. 
 
 4. There are some valiant men in the midst of my people, 
 who will not give way when they are tried ; but they will be faith- 
 ful unto you. There are sufficient of them to cut off all the false- 
 hearted out of your way without troubling me with such a small 
 affair, and you may depend upon them with safety. Therefore, 
 my son, drive things up to a head as fast as you can, and be sure 
 to make all things ready for a sudden burst ; for such will be the 
 case. Make ready for it. I am the Lord. 
 
 5. And now, behold, I give unto you the oath which must be 
 
558 THE SOLDIER'S OATH. 
 
 sworn by all those who may be called to constitute the army of 
 Israel frum this time until your mission is ended ; and they shall 
 either abide it or perish in the rank. The oath is as follows : 
 " Having been chosen and elected by him who holds the keys of 
 authority upon the earth, and whose legitimate right it is to call 
 me to be a soldier, I hereby set my hand to swear a solemn oath 
 in the presence of the Father, arid of the son, and of his servant, 
 the prophet, that I will faithfully abide the law of God, and defend 
 it until death at the peril of my life, feeling it my duty and calling 
 to do so; and as a soldier I will obey my commander. Agreeably 
 to the order of heaven, I swear this oath before the Father, the Son, 
 and these earthly witnesses ; they being my witnesses that I have 
 bound myself to the Lord and his prophet to faithfully defend the 
 law of God until the day of my death." And when those whom 
 you may call to be soldiers have repeated this oath, they must kiss 
 the written word of the Lord, and have their names recorded in a 
 book as military men, which is the highest honor that can be con- 
 ferred upon them in mortality. It is the highest position that men 
 of their rank can ever be called to occupy ; for they will always 
 be closely connected with the highest authority upon the earth. 
 My servant Joseph will always be their general. They will always 
 be more closely connected with him than other members of the 
 Church will be. They will be his strength and the main pillars of 
 my kingdom upon the earth ; and they will be continually inspired 
 by the warriors of heaven who will be at their backs pressing them 
 forward, and strengthening them, and fitting them for their duties. 
 I will abundantly assist them by my holy angels who shall be 
 their constant companions. I do not wish to weary you any 
 longer at this time ; but I will soon speak unto you again, and 
 make known unto you some things which you need to know. 
 
 I now add no more. I am the Bright and Morning Star ; even 
 Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE RODS OF THE PRINCES OF ISRAEL. 559 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING HOW THE TWELVE RODS 
 
 OF THE TWELVE PRINCES OF ISRAEL 
 
 MUST BE FORESHADOWED. 
 
 No. 280. WEBER, UTAH, May lyth, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, even the Son of the Eternal 
 Father, and I am about to speak unto you concerning the twelve 
 priests of Aaron who have been appointed to carry those twelve 
 rods which have been made to foreshadow the twelve rods of the 
 twelve princes of Israel. Each man's name must be written upon 
 the rod which he may be appointed to carry ; for those twelve men 
 are called to represent the twelve princes of Israel, whose names 
 are written upon their rods. Each prince has his name, number 
 and standing written upon his own rod. Aaron is number one, 
 and his inscription, which is the first, is written upon his rod. 
 The next prince is number two, and the second inscription is 
 written upon his rod. The third prince by birthright has also 
 his name and the third inscription written upon his rod and so 
 on, throughout the whole twelve princes. 
 
 2. I need not, at this time, reveal unto you the names and 
 inscriptions of the twelve princes of Israel ; but I will reveal unto 
 you the inscriptions which must be written and placed upon the 
 twelve rods which must be carried around this Fort by the twelve 
 priests of Aaron. That rod which must be carried by my servant 
 William Harris, which will represent or foreshadow Aaron's rod, 
 must have his name, number and the following inscription placed 
 upon it: "Behold, I am William Harris, even number one; and 
 I present myself before this people, and also before all mankind, 
 in Aaron's stead, to represent or foreshadow his name, number 
 and inscription, he being the firstborn son of Adam, and the 
 legitimate ruler over all Abraham's seed even over the elect of 
 God." 
 
 3. . And now, behold, I give unto the inscription which must 
 be placed upon the second rod : " Behold, I am William Magee, 
 even number two ; and I present myself, with this rod in my hand, 
 before this people, and also before all mankind, in the stead of 
 
560 INSCRIPTIONS FOR THE RODS. 
 
 the second firstborn son of Adam, to represent or foreshadow his 
 name, number and inscription, he being the second ruler over all 
 Abraham's seed even over the elect of God." 
 
 4. And behold, I give unto you the third inscription, also : 
 ".Behold, I am Thomas Parker, even number three; and I present 
 myself with this rod in my hand before this people, and also 
 before all mankind, in the stead of the third firstborn son of 
 Adam, to represent or foreshadow his name, number and inscrip- 
 tion, he being the third ruler over all Abraham's seed even over 
 the elect of God." I need not reveal unto you. any more of the 
 inscriptions for those twelve men ; for the remaining nine are like 
 the first three which I have revealed unto you, with the exception 
 of the names and numbers. Each man must have his own name 
 and number upon the rod which he may be called to carry. These 
 inscriptions must be printed as soon as possible, and placed upon 
 the rods. 
 
 5. Let my people labor with all diligence to make all things 
 ready for me to come unto them. I want to come unto them, and 
 I will come unto them as soon as they have opened the way for 
 me. I want to come unto them as much as they want to see me, 
 and even more so. But I cannot come to deliver them until they 
 have made all things ready for me. They have but little more to 
 do before they are entirely ready for me. And when I do come 
 unto them, I will suddenly burst the bonds which now hold them, 
 and I will set them free. They will afterwards have no cause to 
 complain of me at all; for the balance of power will be in their 
 hands, and the faithful will see no more oppression ; they will have 
 the power over all their- enemies. I will cut off everything that 
 opposes my people after they have once opened the way so that 
 I can come untcuthem, after which they will always be satisfied. 
 Therefore, let them labor diligently, and prepare for me as soon as 
 they can, and I will then come unto them, and satisfy them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Glorious Branch of 
 Jesse, and the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
THE PROPHET'S SON. 561 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DEATH OF- THE 
 'PROPHET'S SON. 
 
 No. 281. WEBER, UTAH, May ipth, 1862. 
 
 1. LET not your spirit droop because of the death of your 
 child, for it is all right ; I know all about it. You need not think 
 that I take no delight in your interest and happiness, for I do. I 
 suffer nothing to happen which is painful, but that which is lawful, 
 and that I cannot help; for I must act according to the law. You 
 look back at the many misfortunes that you have had with all your 
 children, and you blame me for them all. You have bitter feelings 
 towards me, because you think that I care nothing at all about 
 your interests and happiness upon the earth ; that, in some things, 
 I do not notice you at all ; but that I suffer the devil to destroy 
 your children, one after another, without putting myself about in 
 the least to prevent him. You say that if I ever did care anything 
 about your interests and happiness, you would like me to explain 
 myself, and show unto you just reasons for taking your children 
 from you in the way which I have done; that if I can do this, it 
 will ease your feelings. You wish me to do my duty towards you, 
 seeing that I know your situation very well, and that you can do 
 nothing yourself towards breaking the hold of the devil off you ; 
 and you say that, if I will not do this for you, I am of no use 
 whatever to you. You are prejudiced against me, for you think 
 that I neglect you, when I do not. You are setting your feelings 
 against me, because of your sufferings in consequence of the death 
 of your children; for they lie near unto you. It afflicts you greatly 
 when they are taken away from you, and you begin to think that I 
 give, the devil the upper hand over you in almost every circum- 
 stance. You think that I either neglect my duty, or I 'must be too 
 weak for the devil. You would like to know whether I intend to 
 uphold you, or continue to let the devil have the upper hand over 
 you. You say that you are entirely heart-sick of being held in 
 weakness so long. 
 
 2. What can I say unto you, seeing that you make so many 
 complaints against me? I know that you are greatly displeased 
 
562 CONCERNING THE PROPHET'S CHILDREN. 
 
 with me, because of the death of your children. You were preju- 
 diced against me even before the death of this last child ; but your 
 prejudice has now increased four-fold to wrM it was before. It is 
 almost impossible for me to satisfy a prejudiced mind. I know 
 very well that if you once set yourself against a person it is almost 
 impossible to change you, for you are of such an unchangeable 
 nature that it is almost impossible to change your mind after it 
 has once become set. You are immovable in your feelings, and I 
 fear that should you once become prejudiced against me, I could 
 scarcely turn you ; and how could I work with you under such 
 circumstances? You would always suspect me and be jealous of 
 me ; in short, you would lose confidence in me, and we could not 
 work together with any degree of satisfaction. I know that you 
 are so oppressed that you hardly know how to pass one day after 
 another, and you continue to lay the blame on me for it all. You 
 believe that if I would, I could do better for you than I have 
 done, and it seems almost impossible for me to convince you to 
 the contrary. What can I do with you? I am satisfied that your 
 feelings are set against me; but I can do no more than tell you 
 the truth, which I have always done, and shall continue to do unto 
 the end, whether you believe me or not ; but if you do not believe 
 me, it will be an injury to you, and it will work very much against 
 your interest, and put you to much inconvenience. 
 
 3. I can assure you that I have not taken your children away 
 from- you in order to afflict you ; but I have done it because you 
 were not placed in a position to take care of them. You know 
 tnat it was the best thing that I could do for you, to take your 
 children to myself, and take care of them ; for you could not take 
 care of them yourself. While I have been raising you up and pre- 
 paring you for your office during many years, even before you had 
 any children at all, I always knew what you would have to pass 
 through, and I took your children off the earth in order that they 
 may not be ill-treated by those people into whose hands they might 
 have fallen; for I can assure you that if I had suffered them to 
 have lived, they would have suffered great affliction and abuse; 
 but knowing that you could not have taken care of them yourself, 
 it was my duty to take them to myself and take care of them for 
 you. Your children must be taken good care of, for they are 
 
CONCERNING THE PROPHET'S SON. 563 
 
 celestial, both males aqd females ; they are of the royal seed of 
 heaven. I suffered one of your daughters to remain upon the 
 earth for a special purpose ; and during the last few years she has 
 met with much ill treatment from her mother and her mother's 
 husband, and I have cursed them both, and I will pay them for 
 their cruelty towards that child. Since the time that your name 
 went throughout the length and breadth of this Territory as a 
 prophet, your child has been despised by them. They abuse and 
 despise it because of you, and they look upon it with hatred in 
 their hearts, and are almost ready to take its life ; but I will take 
 care of it. My eyes are continually over it, and I will watch it, 
 and I will settle with those who have thus ill-treated it. I will 
 deliver them both into your hands, and you shall deal with them 
 as seemeth good unto you. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning the child 
 which I have just taken away from you. I know who he is, and 
 you know him also. This is the second time, within a very few 
 years, that he has been to the earth and taken a body and returned 
 unto me. He lived upon the earth but a very few months at the 
 first time of his coming, and he then returned to me, and he has 
 since been on a short mission into the spirit world. Previous to 
 sending him upon the earth the second time, I sent for him, and 
 he returned from his mission, and I sent him to the earth to take a 
 body, as your son, the second time; and shortly after he was born 
 he returned unto me, and he is now in heaven in the presence of. 
 my Father, counseling with him. I saw him, and spoke unto him 
 before I came to speak unto you. We shall not send him into the 
 spirit world any more before he has finished his mission upon the 
 earth. He was counseling with my Father, before I came to give 
 unto you this revelation, about going to see his father. He said 
 that he should like to go and see his father before he took another 
 mortal mission, and my Father will grant him the privilege to do 
 so. He promised to return unto us in the space of a few days; 
 for the time for him to take his mortal mission has now come. 
 And when he returns to our earth from his visit, he will remain 
 with us until we send him down to you again, which will make his 
 third time of coming to the earth within the space of a few years. 
 We shall send him unto you again as soon as we possibly can 
 
564 CONCERNING THE PROPHET'S SON. 
 
 according to the law. You will speedily have him with you again 
 to comfort you. 
 
 5. All that I have done. I have done according to the law, 
 and this you will know in due time ; and what you do not now 
 know, you will know hereafter. When he comes to the earth to 
 fill his mission, you must train him in a particular way. When he 
 comes unto you again, I shall speak unto you from time to time, 
 and make known unto you how you shall train him, and the kind 
 of food which he shall eat ; for nothing unclean shall ever enter 
 into his mouth. He shall be pure from his mother's womb. 
 While he is in power, which will only be for a few years, he will 
 have the power to call fire down from heaven to burn up the 
 inhabitants of the earth. He will have power to turn the waters 
 into blood, and to smite the earth with a curse as often as he wills. 
 He will destroy the inhabitants of the earth by thousands, and he' 
 will be a terror to many nations until the day of his death ; for he 
 will wield your power for a few years. While he is in power, he 
 will rule in his father's name and by his father's authority wher- 
 ever he goes. He will not be with his father. He will be in one 
 place, and his father will be in another ; and wherever he goes, he 
 will wield his father's authority, even as I wield my Father's 
 authority ; and as I was in power one thousand, two hundred and 
 three-score days when I was upon the earth, after I had been 
 ordained by Moses upon the Mount, so he will be in full power 
 .one thousand, two hundred and three-score days ; and during that 
 time he will prophecy, and smite the earth with a curse as often 
 as he may wish to do so, until his mission is ended. And as I 
 rose from the dead the third day, and ascended into heaven, so he 
 will ascend from the earth the third day ; for his spirit will enter 
 into his body and quicken it again, and lift it up from the earth in 
 like manner as my body was lifted up from the earth. He will be 
 in power upon the earth the same number of days that I was in 
 power upon the earth. I foreshadowed his mission, for in some 
 respects his mission is like unto mine. He is a prophet ; but I 
 am a Redeemer; nevertheless, we must both be in power the same 
 length of time, and both lift up our bodies again from the earth 
 after having lain the same number of days. In these respects, our 
 missions are alike. 
 
CONCERNING THE PROPHET'S SON. 565 
 
 6. Earthly things and heavenly things must both agree under 
 the fulness of the holy priesthood. Your son must come to the 
 earth three times before he can enter upon his mission, in order to 
 acknowledge the three estates of man, viz: The first, or spiritual 
 estate ; the second, or mortal estate ; and the third, or celestial 
 estate. Twice he has to return from the earth shortly after having 
 . received a body ; but the third time he will have to remain upon 
 the earth until he has completed his mission. When he came 
 upon this earth on his first mission, he lived upon the earth during 
 eight months, which represented a specified time, even a certain 
 number of years during which a world is traveling in its first estate, 
 even from the time that a world is first created until it enters its 
 second estate. When he came the second time, he only lived a 
 few hours, and he mourned all the time, even from his birth to his 
 death. His short life represented death, and his mourning repre- 
 sented sorrow, both of which attend the inhabitants of the earth 
 when in its second or mortal estate. His coming to the earth the 
 third time to remain for many years and to fill a mission of power, 
 represents the third or celestial estate of man. His spirit raising 
 up his body towards heaven, after its having lain dead upon the 
 ground three days, represents the power of the holy priesthood 
 over death. He therefore represents the power of the holy priest- 
 hood to all Adam's posterity, bidding defiance to the devil to hold 
 his body ; for he will raise it up again in spite of the devil and all 
 his power. He represents a triumphant priesthood, even as I did 
 when I rose from the dead the third day. All high priests hold 
 the keys of death and hell. Therefore, my son, make yourself 
 contented, and be satisfied with what I have done, and I will send 
 him back to you as soon as I can ; and when he comes again, he 
 shall remain with you to comfort you, and you shall enjoy his 
 society for many years. 
 
 7. Let your companion be comforted, and I will give unto her 
 both sons and daughters. I am well pleased with her, for she has 
 been patient ; and inasmuch as she will be faithful before me, I 
 will greatly bless her. 
 
 I now give unto you no more ; but I will shortly speak unto you 
 again. I am the Son of the Eternal Father ; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
566 CONCERNING THE JUDGMENTS OF GOD. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE ORDER IN WHICH 
 
 THE SAINTS MUST MOVE FROM SOUTH 
 
 WEBER TO SALT LAKE CITY. 
 
 No. 282. WEBER, UTAH, May 2oth, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world, even Jesus 
 Christ, and I wish to speak unto you again. I am about to reveal 
 unto you the order in which my people shall march out of this 
 place to the central point of this Territory after I have cleared 
 the way for them, which I shall do as soon as my people will 
 cleared the way for me. I shall cut off all your enemies in this 
 Territory, and shake every throne to the center, and break the 
 spirits of all kings and rulers until they will become entirely 
 powerless ; for I will place large armies at the head of every 
 kingdom upon the earth, and I will shake the thrones more than 
 any other thing upon the earth. Towers, castles, churches and 
 thrones will be cast down level with the ground. I will find the 
 idle hands something to do to build them up again. I will give 
 unto the inhabitants of this earth one shake that they will never 
 forget; yea, I will give unto the wicked such a shake that they 
 will never again be able to recover themselves ; their spirits will 
 remain broken as long as they may live after it. When I have 
 once broken their spirits I shall sweep them down ; for I will pour 
 out one judgment after another so heavily and so fast that they 
 will be weary of their existence ; they will desire to die. They 
 will never again have any solid courage in them to fight against 
 me, for they will see that it will be of no use to do so. My power 
 is so much greater than theirs that it will break them down at 
 once. 
 
 2. When I have shaken the eirth, and cut off the wicked out 
 of this Territory, I shall gather the eleven first generals unto me, 
 and you shall see us, and talk with us until you are satisfied ; and 
 not only shall you see us, but the faithful of my people shall see 
 us, and look upon us as one man looks upon another. We will 
 go before my faithful people, and lead them forth out of this place 
 to the place which I have appointed, where I intend to separate 
 
THE ORDER^TO BE OBSERVED IN MOVING. 567 
 
 the sheep from the goats. We shall have a portion of our army 
 with us. We shall not need the whole army of heaven. After 
 the whole army has shaken the earth, one portion of them will 
 return home, and remain there until they are needed a^ain, and 
 then I shall call for them. But the other portion of the army 
 will be with me and the remaining eleven generals, and we will 
 go before you and the faithful of this people, and lead you unto 
 perfect victory. 
 
 3. And now, behold, I am about to make known unto you the 
 order in which this people shall march out of this place to the 
 place which I have appointed. There must be twelve men of the 
 high priesthood, including yourself, that must go before my peo- 
 ple on horseback, and they must travel four abreast, even in three 
 tiers, and they must be followed by the high priests who are in 
 the army; and if you need more high priests to make up any 
 deficiences in any company, you can call them if there are any of 
 the right age. 
 
 4. You must put Alexander Dow in the first company of the 
 high priests while my people march down to the place which I 
 have appointed. He is pa& age ; but on account of the position 
 which he holds in the high priesthood, he must travel in the first 
 company of high priests; this he must do, if he is faithful before 
 me. Satan seeks to overcome him and destroy him, which he will 
 do if he is not very careful. He gives way to a false spirit from 
 Lucifer, and it strives to make him believe that it is my spirit. It 
 seeks to deceive him. It has already got a strong hold on him; 
 and if he does not humble himself greatly before me, and seek 
 the counsel of my servant, the prophet, and abide it, he will be 
 destroyed. He cannot detect my spirit from a false spirit. The 
 devil has the power over him, and he has deceived him and 
 led him astray. Therefore, if he wishes to save his own life, let 
 him humble himself greatly before me, and take the counsel of my 
 servant, the prophet, that it may be well with him. Let all my 
 people be aware of false spirits ; for they have not the power to 
 detect them fully as yet. They should be humble and obedient 
 before me, and then I would detect the devil for them. I would 
 keep all false spirits away frcm them if they would only be faith- 
 ful enough before me. Therefore, my servant Alexander Dow 
 now knows my will concerning him. I am the Lord. 
 
568 THE ORDER TO BE OBSERVED IN MOVING. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, the remaining four 
 apostles must be in the first rank with the high priests, and they 
 must walk next to those first twelve on horseback. And after the 
 high priests that may be enrolled in the army, the twelve priests of 
 Aaron, with their rods in their hands, must follow, and lead up the 
 Aaronic priesthood. The army will march on foot in proper order, 
 even as soldiers do ; and they must all carry their arms with them, 
 with the exception of those twelve Aaronic priests who will be 
 called to carry the twelve rods. The first two of the first four, the 
 second four who will compose the second tier, and the first one of 
 the third tier of the twelve apostles who will ride on horseback, 
 must each carry a sword in his right hand seven of the twelve 
 must carry a sword in their right hands to represent the first seven 
 generals over the army of heaven, and also the seven angels of the 
 seven Churches. The seven swords being in their right hands 
 represents a contest with the devil. A sword represents war. 
 Two others of the twelve will represent the two Olive Branches. 
 One of them must carry a pair of balances in his hand, and the 
 other must carry my law. The law and the balances represent 
 justice. Therefore, there will be three out of the twelve who will 
 not be called upon to carry anything. They will represent the 
 three first Gods, who aie independent. Their carrying nothing in 
 their hands to defend themselves with, represents an independent 
 priesthood, even the power of the Gods over all evil. Their being 
 the last of the twelve, even behind them, represents the first three 
 Gods who are the highest .of all Gods in authority, and being 
 behind all other Gods, it is their duty to back up all other Gods 
 who are below them. They are at the back of all other Gods, 
 following them up and pressing them on to their duties. And it 
 will be the duty of those men and boys who are able, who may not 
 be ranked with the soldiers, to take care of the women and chil- 
 dren, and drive the teams after .the army. 
 
 6. But all this people will not stand to receive a deliverance; 
 for some will suffer the devil to overcome them and destroy them. 
 You will know what you have to count upon after the test is over; 
 for this people will be tried severely; and I am about satisfied 
 that some people will not come through it alive. Such as have a 
 weak place about them, will have that weak place probed; they 
 
CONCERNING THE HYPOCRITES. 569 
 
 will* have hard work to see through the test. Let such seek to 
 fortify themselves, in order that they may not be overcome by the 
 devil and destroyed by him ; for at that time he will have great 
 power over the weak. My people must remember that I have told 
 them the nature of the trial before it comes; and if they will suffer 
 the devil to overcome them and destroy them, it will be their own 
 fault. I have told them how to prepare themselves, and if they 
 wiH do as I have commanded them, it will be well with them ; 
 but if they will not, they will have to surfer the consequences 
 arising from their disobedience. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION IN WHICH THE LORD EXCUSES THE 
 
 AGED OF HIS PEOPLE FROM WITNESSING 
 
 THE DESTRUCTION OF THE 
 
 HYPOCRITES. 
 
 No. 283. WEBER, UTAH, May 22nd, 1862. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; for I am about to speak unto 
 you upon important matters. In looking $ver this people, you see 
 in their midst a number of aged people whom you consider are 
 rendered very weak and feeble by old age, and. incapable to 
 endure the first test, which now lies before these people. When I 
 speak of the first test, I mean the dividing of this Camp the 
 separating of the hypocrites from the faithful ; and when this is 
 done, the slaying of the hypocrites by the faithful. This is what I 
 mean by the first test. The next test will be my coming to shake 
 the earth and to destroy your enemies. Both the first and the 
 second tests will almost come at the same time. The second test 
 will immediately follow the first test. Not more than one day will 
 pass over, after the first test is through with, before the second 
 test will commence ; for I shall come as soon as you have cut off 
 
570 CONCERNING THE AGED PEOPLE. 
 
 the false-hearted from among these people. I will divide this 
 Camp by my holy angels. They shall do that work. You will 
 have no trouble to separate the false-hearted from the faithful ; for 
 my holy angels will do it. 
 
 2. And now, behold, ' I speak unto you concerning the aged 
 people of ray Church, who are rendered weak and feeble by old 
 age. Those people who are near seventy years of age and upwards, 
 who are known to have been faithful unto me, shall not see the 
 first test. Satan shall not have the privilege to take the advantage 
 of their weakness ; but they shall remain in a house, or houses, as 
 the case may be, and they shall not come out to behold the scene; 
 neither shall children under fourteen years of age be permitted to 
 come out of their houses to behold the scene; but they shall 
 remain shut up in their houses until the first test is through with, 
 after which they may have the privilege to come out of their 
 houses. The old people and the children, such ' as I have 
 described, shall be gathered together and put into such houses as 
 shall be appointed for that purpose until the first test is over; 
 and the aged people and the young boys and girls must take care 
 of the infant children during the absence of their parents who 
 may be passing through the test. This will be their duty. The 
 first test will be over in the the space of a few hours at the longest; 
 therefore, the faithful women of my Church will not be kept long 
 away from their infants ; but the hypocrites shall never see their 
 children any more in this life. They shall not have them to cor- 
 rupt them and to lead them down to destruction. I will give their 
 children unto those who will take good care of them, and train 
 them up according to my law. The faithful of my people shall 
 have everything to make them happy; for in due time I will 
 deliver all things into their hands. I am the Lord. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, the first test will 
 commence as soon as you have foreshadowed my coming. When 
 you commence to foreshadow my coming, you may know that I 
 shall not be more than two or three days before I come. The 
 foreshadowing and the first and second tests will all be completed 
 in the short space of four or five days from the time that the fore- 
 shadowing will commence; therefore, you can now make your 
 calculations as to the time of my coming. And when I come 
 
 
THE ROBE AND ROD. 571 
 
 unto you, I shall approach you in the way which I have before 
 described unto you. I shall send a number of my holy angels 
 unto you to influence and lead you into my presence, and I shall 
 reach down and give unto you your robe, as I before said unto 
 
 you, even at the front of your own door. I shall give unto you 
 
 your robe and rod just in the way which I have before described 
 unto you. I have told you before how to use your rod when you 
 give your command. You shall raise your rod and steady it 
 before you commence to give the command, and you shall not 
 drop it again until I tell you, and then you shall drop it, and raise 
 it again suddenly, and give unto me the sign for stopping, after 
 which, you shall lower your rod for good. Your way will then be 
 clear. You may then place your army in order for starting out of 
 this place, and traveling to the place which I have appointed. 
 Therefore, my son, make all things ready for me, so that I can 
 come unto you ; for I am restless. I want to clear the way for 
 you. Prepare for me ; and lo, I come unto you quickly. I am 
 the Son of the Eternal Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DESIGN OF THE 
 ENEMIES OF THE PEOPLE OF GOD. 
 
 No. 284. WEBER, UTAH, May 23rd, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, and I am about to speak 
 unto you again. You wish to know what you are to do to obtain 
 two more horses, seeing that two of those that were chosen by me 
 for a certain purpose have been stolen. You are satisfied that you 
 will need two more horses in their stead, and how to obtain them 
 you know not. You think that it is about time that you had them 
 in your possession ; that the test is so near that there is no time to 
 spare to hunt for fresh horses, and you wish to know how to obtain 
 them in the easiest way. You say that you would like to know 
 whether I will accept of mares instead of horses, seeing that the 
 
 i 
 
572 THE FORESHADOWING, ETC. 
 
 horses which you first obtained have been stolen. I will answer 
 you. I will accept of mares in the place of horses if horses can- 
 not be obtained in time, seeing that you have once obtained 
 horses according to my commandment unto you. But you need 
 not trouble yourself about that matter. I will open the way for 
 you so that you can obtain such things as you may stand in need 
 of; therefore, leave that matter in my hands, and when either horses 
 or mares are needed, they will be brought forth. I will influence 
 you, and lead you aright, and provide for you everything which 
 you may need. I know where there are plenty of horses- and 
 mares, and I will give unto you that which you may stand in need 
 of. You need not put yourself about in the least because you 
 cannot obtain the things which you think you need ; for if I do 
 not place such things in you hands immediately, you may know 
 that it is not my will for you to receive them immediately. I will 
 give unto you everything in the right time. It is my duty to give 
 unto you everything which you need, and this I can do, and none 
 can hinder. 
 
 2. My purposes and designs are not frustrated by mortal men, 
 or disembodied devils. I walk not in crooked paths. I work, 
 and none can hinder, and I will convince the inhabitants of the 
 earth of this in the space of a few more days, and they may be 
 setting themselves for it. Therefore, my son, set your feelings at 
 rest. I will accept of such horses or mares as I think fit to pro- 
 vide for you ; and although they will be speedily needed, I can 
 speedily find them, and I will find them for you in time. 
 
 3, I shall call upon you to foreshadow my coming as soon as 
 my people can make all things ready for it. If they will be dili- 
 gent, and work with all their might, they can have all things made 
 ready in the course of four or five days more at the furthest, for 
 they have but little more to do to make ready for it. If my peo- 
 ple are not diligent, and will not labor with all their might, I shall 
 spur them up. They had better work with all their might to save 
 themselves further trouble. If they do not, they will have trouble 
 before they are fully ready for it. I shall give unto them a suf- 
 ficient length of time to make all things ready, and if they will not 
 use that time to advantage, they will have to suffer for their sloth- 
 fulness and negligence. They should open their eyes, and look 
 
CONCERNING THE THREE PRISONERS. 573 
 
 about them, and work with all their might, for they have no time 
 to trifle away. They must work while they have the opportunity 
 to do so. If they will work diligently, they will have all things 
 ready in time ; but if they do not, they will be caught in a trap. 
 
 4. And behold, I speak unto you concerning those three 
 prisoners who are in this place. I am the Lord of Hosts, and I 
 delivered them into the hands of my people for a special purpose. 
 They are my prisoners. My influence brought them to this place, 
 and I shall deal with them as seemeth good unto me. I can 
 make mine enemies stir at the right time. I know how to work 
 them up. They have often said that they would not come up 
 against my people as a mob, and I can assure them that they 
 never shall. They will make the attempt to come up against my 
 people, but I will sweep them off long before they have had the 
 privilege of- reaching this place. They would obey me if I would 
 permit them. O how obedient they are unto me. They would 
 do as I command them with all their hearts. They long for the 
 time to come when they can have the privilege of doing what I 
 commanded them to do a few months ago. They then said that 
 they would not obey me ; but they have repented of that sin ever 
 since, and they say in their feelings, "Father, we will obey, you 
 now, for we have had no solid comfort since the time that we 
 refused to obey you. Oh, Father, how we do repent ! We have 
 regretted ever since we did not do as you commanded us a few 
 months ago. Will you forgive us, Father? and we will now do 
 what you then commanded us to do, with all our hearts, souls, 
 might and strength, for we have had no solid pleasure since we 
 rebelled against you. We know, Father, that it is the best thing 
 that we can do to obey you whenever you speak. We are poor, 
 ignorant creatures. We do not know what is the best for us ; 
 and now, Father, we acknowledge our weakness and ignorance. 
 
 Father, will you forgive us for our rebellion t and we will now 
 obey you with all our hearts." 
 
 5. O ye hypocrites ! Ye vipers ! Your race is now run. Ye 
 rebellious and blood-thirsty race! I will now give unto you 
 blood enough. You will obey when you cannot help yourselves. 
 
 1 can bring you to obedience. I can answer mine own ends 
 with you, and make you do what I want you to do. I do not 
 
574 CONCERNING THE ENEMIES. 
 
 want to save you; but I shall make use of you to bring to pass 
 mine own purposes. Ye are vessels of wrath, doomed to suffer in 
 the lake of fire and brimstone this is your doom. O ye hypo- 
 crites, you shall not now have the privilege to come up to this 
 place against my people. Ye might have come up into this Fort 
 a number of months ago, if ye had dene as I commanded you, 
 and I would have smitten you all dead in this place. 
 
 6. I will control mine enemies, and I will bring them to the 
 right point. You need not trouble yourself at all about them ; 
 but make all things ready for me as soon as possible, so that I 
 can come unto you ; for you will need me shortly. 1 will be with 
 you when I am needed. Those prisoners are in my hands, and I 
 shall deal with them as seemeth good unto me. 
 
 7. And behold, I give unto you a commandment, my son. 
 You shall pay no attention to sheriffs, lawyers, petty governors 
 and devil's slaves ; for I will pay them all off at once. They will 
 never trouble you at all. You shall hold those prisoners until I 
 tell you what to do with them ; and what I command you to do, 
 you must do. Should any officers of the law command you to let 
 those prisoners go, and threaten you with the consequences if you 
 continue to hold them, you must tell those officers that you fear 
 no consequences, and that you pay no more regard to them than 
 what you do to the dirt under your feet ; and should they threaten 
 to send up a mob against these people, to sweep them off, tell 
 them to send it as soon as they can. You need not be afraid, my 
 son, that you will not have all things ready by the time that your 
 enemies will be prepared to come up against you ; for should they 
 attempt to come up against you to-morrow, I am ready for them, 
 and I would cut them all off. I need not wait until I have given 
 unto you the rod, and until you have given your command ; for I 
 have the privilege, at any time, to cut off a few hundreds of peo- 
 ple who may attempt to injure or commit violence upon my 
 people : this I can do according to law, without the raising of 
 your rod. You understand the principle by which I can do this. 
 Therefore, I am ready for your enemies whenever they make the 
 attempt to come. Make all things ready for me as soon as you 
 can, and deliver all your enemies into my hands, and I will attend 
 to them. They will never trouble you while they are alive. I 
 
THE SABBATH DAY. 575 
 
 need not give unto you any more at present Let this suffice, 
 and I will shortly speak unto you again. I am the Light and Life 
 of the world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE SABBATH DAY. 
 
 No. 285. . WEBER, UTAH, May 23rd, 1862. 
 
 1. INASMUCH as some of my people have been to inquire of 
 you whether they should work to-morrow, seeing that things are so 
 pressing, I wish to speak unto you upon this subject. It is not 
 necessary for my servants to labor on that day which is called the 
 Sabbath day ; for it is a day that has been set apart by the world 
 of mankind to worship me, as they suppose. They know that 
 there should be a Sabbath day, and they call the day that is now 
 set apart to worship me, the Sabbath day, and it will have to 
 remain as such at present ; but in due time I will put all such 
 things right. I have to let things be until the time arrives that I 
 can lawfully change them, and put that right which is now wrong. 
 All things which are now wrong, in due time I will put right, 
 through you. There is nothing right in the world ; for the devil 
 has turned everything upside down, and changed the true sense of 
 everything that he has anything to do with. He has had to do 
 with everything that belongs to this earth for six thousand years, 
 and his influence has been the prevailing influence for that length 
 of time, with the exception of a number of years while the fulness 
 of the holy priesthood was upon the earth. His influence is a 
 false influence, and by it all mankind, or rather all Abraham's 
 seed, have been deceived. 
 
 2. All things in this world are wrong for me, but they are 
 right for the devil. Any thing that is wrong for the Gods, is right 
 for the devil. He claims all that they throw away. They lay no 
 claim at all to rotten and false material, for it all belongs to the 
 devil. The Gods claim all that is true and right, even all that is 
 endurable ; for all true material will endure in an organized form 
 to all eternity. Pure material will never waste away, nor diminish 
 
576 THE INFLUENCE OF SATAN. 
 
 in the least ; for it has the power within itself to sustain itself ; and 
 being the most powerful material, it cuts its way through all im- 
 pure material, and loses nothing. It continually disorganizes the 
 impure material. In this way all false and impure material con- 
 tinues to lose its power. It can never exist in an organized state 
 long enough to arrive at any height of glory and exaltation. It is 
 so rotten and deceitful that it continually destroys its own organ- 
 ization. It cannot continue in an organized form more than a few 
 years, compared with eternity. 
 
 3. The devil is such a fool, and so ignorant, that he destroys 
 his own existence, and the existence of everybody who comes 
 under his influence, except those whose right it is to wield the 
 full power of the priesthood. All the rest he destroys. O that all 
 Abraham's seed knew what a fool they have had to lead them in 
 this miserable world ; if they knew this, they would be glad to 
 come out from under his influence; but they are blinded by him 
 so much that they cannot see at all. They are continually in 
 misery, groping their way through the world without a friend in it 
 that can benefit them at all. They need not look to their fellow 
 creatures for help ; for none can help them but me. Their help 
 must come from above. I will assist them if they will permit me, 
 and they need not look to any other source for any help. I am 
 the Lord of Hosts. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it is my will that my 
 servants should not work on that day which has been set apart to 
 worship me ; but they may labor until late this evening, and com- 
 mence early on Monday morning, if they feel to do so, and that 
 will answer as well as working on the day which is called the 
 Sabbath day. They must assemble with the rest of my people, 
 and worship me with all their hearts, and I will bless them abun-* 
 dantly. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Son of the Eternal 
 Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
COMMANDED TO REORGANIZE THE ARMY. 577 
 
 % 
 
 REVELATION INSTRUCTING THE PROPHET TO 
 
 REORGANIZE HIS ARMY ACCORDING TO 
 
 A FORMER REVELATION. 
 
 No. 286. WEBER, UTAH, May 26th, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am he who moves forth in the midst of darkness, 
 and the darkness comprehendeth me not even Jesus Christ ; 
 and I am about to speak unto you again. It would be well for 
 you to set your army in order, according to the revelation which 
 I lately gave unto you. You must make such alterations in the 
 army as will be necessary, according to the instructions contained 
 therein, ^ou will understand me. You know what ought to be 
 done in order to have your army properly arranged, according to 
 the pattern which I have given unto you ; therefore, attend to this 
 matter as soon as you can, and all will be well. And as soon as 
 my people have made all things ready, I will give unto you a com- 
 mandment to commence to foreshadow my coming. I am now 
 waiting for them. 
 
 2. Your enemies 'abroad seem to trouble you, and you fear 
 that I shall let them loose before you have made all things ready 
 for me to come out to meet them. You say that you see the 
 situation of these people, and you are afraid that they do not work 
 fast enough for me, and that I shall let their enemies loose upon 
 them to drive them to their duty, and to chastise them for their 
 negligence and slothfulness. You say that you do not like to be 
 brought into difficulty through the unfaithfulness and neglect of 
 those of my people who have never laid my work to heart as they 
 ought to have done ; and that you wish me to hold your enemies 
 from you until you are through with both the foreshadowing and 
 the first test ; and you think that you will then be fully ready for 
 them. I can assure you that you will be ready for them then. I 
 will make unto you this promise : I will either keep your enemies 
 from you until you are ready for them, or I will smite them all 
 dead at once. It matters not how. soon they may make the 
 attempt to come up against these people; for whenever they make 
 that attempt, I will cut them all off. I should like to bring them 
 
578 THE PROPHET FEELS OPPRESSED. 
 
 to that point, and I can do so without any difficulty. Therefore, 
 rest yourself contented concerning your enemies, and be of good 
 courage, and I will suddenly strengthen you. I know that you 
 feel weak and much oppressed at this time ; but I will lift you out 
 of weakness all at once. The oppression which you are called to 
 endure, works against you ; it holds you down, and serves to 
 depress your spirits ; it gives the devil great power over you to 
 such an extent that you cannot enjoy life. Your happiness is 
 destroyed through the influence of the devil which has prevailed 
 in the worrd for so long a time ; but as soon as I come you will be 
 relieved of that burden, for mine influence will be the greatest 
 influence in the world ; the influence of the world will then have to 
 bow to it, and all my faithful people will be relieved of that false 
 and oppressive influence all at once. They will nt then feel 
 oppessed as they do now ; therefore, let them be of good courage, 
 and they will be relieved speedily. Let them work diligently, and 
 make all things ready as soon as they can. I am the Lord. 
 
 3. And behold, I say unto you, my son, it would be well if 
 my people w r ould have an eye to those horses which will be needed. 
 If my servants cannot obtain horses enough for the occasion, I 
 will accept of mares instead thereof. I will accept of the best 
 horses or mares which they can obtain. When they have done the 
 best that they can, I require no more of them. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Bright and Morning 
 Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION IN WHICH THE LORD REASSURES 
 
 THE PROPHET THAT THE ENEMIES 
 
 WILL BE DESTROYED. 
 
 No. 287. WEBER, UTAH, May 27th, 1862. 
 
 i. You are much troubled in your feelings, my son, and you 
 have many complaints to make against me. You seem to find 
 much fault with my way of working at present. What can I do to 
 
F THE 
 
 'IVER SIX'S 
 
 THE PROPHET EXPRESSES DISSATISFACTION. 579 
 
 satisfy you? You feel to complain of me for suffering mine 
 enemies to steal those two horses, after you had put yourself to so 
 much trouble to obtain them. You wish to know whether I pay 
 any attention at all unto your enemies, or whether I intend to let 
 them run at large, and steal from my people what they have ar 
 mind to do. You say that if I do pay any attention to them, and 
 regard the interests and welfare of these people, you would like me 
 to show unto you the reason why I suffered mine enemies to steal 
 those horses ; for that you cannot fully see through that act ; if y^ou 
 could, your feelings would be somewhat relieved. You also say 
 that I have always permitted your enemies to come into this place 
 whenever they have wished to do so ; that you cannot see a time 
 when I have ever restrained them, in the least, from doing what 
 they wanted to do. If I have ever restrained them from com- 
 mitting any violent act upon these people, you say that I have 
 done it in such a way that you could not see it ; for that you never 
 saw me interfere with your enemies in any plain and satisfactory 
 manner. 
 
 *2. You say that you are entirely tired of shadows ; that you 
 want to see me begin to do something, and not talk so much ; 
 that you should like me a deal better if I would only prove to you 
 that I am as ready to fight as I am to talk ; that I seem to mani- 
 fest so much mercy and sympathy towards that blood-thirsty race 
 that is in the midst of the people in this Territory, that I entirely 
 discourage you. You think that I would rather talk than act ; in 
 fact, you are afraid of me neglecting my duty. You begin to think 
 that I am sympathizing with fallen spirits, and with those who 
 have been corrupted by them. You say that I afflict you severely 
 with causing you to bear their threats, abuses and robberies ; that 
 you would like to know how much more abuse I wish yofi to take 
 from them ; that if you had the power in your own hands you 
 would never trouble me for help; that I am so slow to make any 
 kind of a move that will count, that I have entirely wearied you 
 out ; that you cannot see why I should put up with so much from 
 devils as I do ; that in consequence of suffering so much from 
 devils, I am destroying your confidence in me. You cannot see 
 any just cause for putting up with them so long, and you are afraid 
 that I am giving way to the devils and turning traitor to you. You 
 
580 THE PROPHET EXPRESSES DISSATISFACTION. 
 
 are so worked up in your feelings against me, in consequence of 
 your oppression, that you are almost ready to charge me with 
 being a friend of the devil, and an enemy to righteousness ; but I 
 suppose that I shall have to bear your false charges until I can 
 convince you to the contrary. I should not bear so much from 
 you if you were not oppressed to such an unreasonable extent. I 
 I know that you cannot help murmuring, and I have to put up 
 with it ; but it is unpleasant to me. 
 
 3. I am no more the friend of the devil than you are ; for I 
 despise both him and his works as bad as you do; neither am I 
 afraid to fight when the way has been opened for me. I shall be 
 as ready to fight, when the time has come for me to do so, as I 
 have ever been to talk. I am always ready to do my duty, 
 whether you think so or not. Your prejudice against me will not 
 change the truth; but it will injure you very much. I have done 
 all that I possibly could to keep down prejudice in your mind 
 against me ; but it seems almost impossible for me to do so, for if 
 I put it down in one case, it will rise again in another. You are 
 not satisfied with my way of working. I do not work plainly 
 enough for you. You cannot see every move which I make among 
 these people and among mine enemies. You wish to see both me 
 and my holy angels come and go, and to do this, that and the 
 other. You want to see us all just as we are, and you say in your 
 feelings that you will never be satisfied until you do see us, know- 
 ing that it is your right to see us. You want no mystery at all. 
 
 4. I know that it is your privilege to see us; but you are not 
 willing to give me time to confer that blessing upon you. You 
 cannot have the privilege of fully beholding me and my holy 
 angels and watching us move about from place to place, even as 
 one maia sees another, until you are endowed with the power of 
 your office. We must first come unto you all together before you 
 can see us to your satisfaction. You shall then stand and talk 
 with us, and handle our hands. You shall then see resurrected 
 beings until you are fully satisfied ; for they shall continually be 
 with you, ministering in your presence. You shall see them smite 
 your enemies dead whenever they approach you. Your life-guard 
 will consist of holy angels, and not mortal men ; for they are a 
 surer guard than mortal men are. I shall not place you in the 
 hands of mortal men. 
 
THE GUARDIAN ANGELS. 581 
 
 5. It will be the duty of your soldiers to cut off hypocrites 
 from among your own people. I am your guardian angel, and 
 mine army, which numbers two hundred million, will be your life- 
 guard. They are all at my command, and I am at your com- 
 mand ; therefore, I am your guardian angel, and mine army is 
 your life-guard. You need not fear a few of mine enemies, such 
 as your life-guard may think fit to admit into this place ; for I shall 
 suffer nothing to come into this place but for a wise purpose in 
 myself. Should you see a few men come into this place, you may 
 know that your guards know their business, and that they have 
 admitted them. We suffer none to come into this place but those 
 whom we admit. There is no power upon the earth that could 
 come into this place if we did not admit it. This place has 
 been guarded ever since you came into it, and it will be guarded 
 until you go out of it ; and when you go ut of it, your guard will 
 go with you. Ever since you came into this place there has been 
 one of the first generals with all his host, which numbers about 
 eighteen million, planted here, and they have been guarding you 
 and my people, and no person has ever entered into this place 
 but those whom the general has admitted. No earthly power can 
 approach you ; therefore, you have nothing to fear. Put far away 
 from you all prejudice against me ; for there is no cause whatever 
 for it. If I ever suffer your enemies to come upon you, I will then 
 bear the blame. Wait until you have a just cause before you 
 blame me, and then I will willingly bear it ; but do not act unrea- 
 sonably. If you are oppressed to an unreasonable extent, strive to 
 bear it, and do not begin to blame me without a just cause. I 
 feel for you, and I will release you as soon as I can ; therefore, be 
 patient. I am one with you, and always ready to assist you. 
 
 6. And as concerning those horses which mine enemies stole 
 away from my people, I suffered them to commit that act for a 
 wise purpose in myself. You know, my son, that all their judges, 
 lawyers, presidents and bishops sanctioned that act when they 
 knew, at the same time, that those horses were stolen. Those per- 
 sons who stole them were counseled to do so by men who now 
 stand in high authority in this Territory. Do I require anything 
 more of those judges, lawyers, presidents and bishops than .what 
 they have already done? I am taking a course to dra'w all the 
 
582 COXCKRNINC, THE ENEMIES. 
 
 head authorities of this Territory into the snare which they have 
 been laying for the pure of my people, and I shall catch them in 
 it. They have striven with all their power to rob, cheat and 
 destroy the poor of my people, and now I will destroy them this 
 is just it is the reward of their own hands, for they have justly 
 merited it. It is my duty to give unto every person the reward of 
 his own works, and I will do so. Deliver all things into my hands, 
 my son, and I will manage them well. 
 
 7. Mine enemies are now studying what to do to bring this 
 people into subjection to them. They say that they can see that 
 blood will have to be shed; and I can assure them that blood will 
 be shed, but it will be their blood. As soon as they have pre- 
 pared themselves to make a move against my people, I will catch 
 them. All that I want of them is to draw themselves together in 
 a body, ready to start up to this place ; and when they have done 
 this, I will slay them. They shall not live one minute after they 
 have done this. They will come to this point as soon as my peo- 
 ple can get ready for me to come. I will break them up and con- 
 fuse them, so that they cannot operate until I am ready to destroy 
 them all, arid then I will let them loose. Therefore, be of good 
 courage, and know that I am with you unto the end. Even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION INSTRUCTING THE PROPHET TO 
 WEAR SEVEN WHOLE CROWNS UPON HIS 
 . HAT WHEN HE FORESHADOWS 
 THE LORD. 
 
 No. 288. WEBER, UTAH, May 28th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts. I wish to speak unto 
 you again. You wish to know of me how you are to march out 
 of this place at the head of this people, and I will make it known 
 unto you. When you go before these people to the place which I 
 have appointed, you must be dressed as a man of war. You will 
 not need to carry a rod in your hand when you are on the march 
 from this place; but you must carry a sword in your hand. 
 
CONCERNING THE CROWNS. 583 
 
 2. Before you commence to march out of this place, you will 
 have used the rod ; and when you have used it, you will return it 
 to me to take care of it for you until you have a place prepared 
 where you can take care of it yourself; but, until then, I will take 
 care of it for you. Therefore, you will only need to carry your 
 sword while you are on the march from this place. And as you 
 travel you must foreshadow or represent me to the people until 
 ycu arrive at your journey's end. You should have seven whole 
 crowns, in order to properly represent me to the people. You 
 have but one whole crown now, and that is not sufficient to 
 properly represent me to the people. Although I shall march 
 before you, and you will see me, mine enemies, or rather those 
 whom I shall have left alive, will not see me. I shall be unveiled 
 to you and to some of the most Jaithful of my people; but I shall 
 be veiled to all others ; therefore, you will have to represent me 
 unto them ; and to do this correctly, you should have six more 
 whole crowns made, but you need not have them made as large 
 as the central crown. You can have them made in the course of 
 two or three days. You need not fear your enemies coming upon 
 you, for I will hold them until the right time. Do as I command 
 you, and I will take care of your enemies. When you have 
 obtained six more whole crowns, you will be able to cast a pretty 
 correct shadow of me; but you could not do so with but one 
 crown, for I wear seven perfect crowns, and you must also wear 
 seven perfect crowns, in order to cast a perfect shadow of me. 
 
 3. Let my servant, or servants, work with all diligence to 
 make those six crowns ; and while they are being made, let my 
 people make all other things ready, for I do not want to wait any 
 longer for them than while those crowns are being made. Let 
 my people strive to make themselves ready altogether, and not 
 have to wait for each other ; for as soon as those crowns shall 
 have been made, the foreshadowing must commence. It will take 
 but a short time to make those crowns if my servant Gudmund 
 Gudmundsen can obtain a little assistance. He has been very 
 diligent in doing his duty, and I am well pleased with him. He 
 will not lose his reward for his diligence and faithfulness to my 
 work ; for his labors shall be as bread cast upon the waters seen 
 after many days yea, for many generations ; and his name will 
 
584 CONCERNING THE PROCLAMATION. 
 
 become great upon the earth, for he is a man without guile ; guile 
 is not found in his mouth ; he is pure before me, even as pure as 
 he can be at the present time. But my people will be purer in 
 due time' than they now are. They will know much more than 
 they know now, and have the power to carry it out in their lives. 
 This will raise them in the scale of perfection. My people, as yet, 
 know but little about purity; but when my law has been fully 
 revealed unto them, they will know .what purity is to a great extent. 
 They now know but little about it; consequently, but little is 
 required of them. 
 
 4. You wish to know, my son, whether it is necessary for you 
 to carry my proclamation on the front of your hat when you travel 
 from this place to the place which I have appointed. Twill inform 
 you. You must carry my proclamation on the front of your hat 
 until you have represented me before the people. You must wear 
 it until I tell you to take it off; and when you take it off, I will 
 represent myself to the people of this Territory who may be left 
 alive. Therefore, you must wear my proclamation, and those six 
 additional crowns, until I tell you to take them off, after which I 
 ^hall stand before all people, and as many as can look upon me 
 unveiled, shall see me as I am. I shall then stand before them to 
 represent myself; but, until then, you must represent me unto 
 them. I shall show myself unto those who have yielded obedience 
 unto the fulness of my 'gospel before I show myself unto those who 
 will be left alive in the Territory. You must first foreshadow me 
 unto those in this Fort who have embraced my gospel, and then I 
 will come and show myself unto them. They are the first-fruits of 
 my kingdom, and consequently are entitled to the first visit from 
 me ; therefore, I shall pay to them the first visit. And I shall cut 
 off their enemies before you will be called to foreshadow me unto 
 those who will be left alive ; and after you have foreshadowed me 
 unto them, I will stand before them unveiled, andahey shall look 
 upon me and see me as clearly as one mortal man sees another. 
 I shall first show myself unto my people in this place, when I 
 come to deliver them ; and secondly, I shall show myself unto 
 such as will be left alive after the overflowing scourge shall have 
 passed through this Territory. In this way I shall make myself 
 manifest unto all those whom I shall leave alive after I have cut 
 
CONCERNING THE ENEMIES. 585 
 
 off mine enemies. Those who will be left alive will gather around 
 you and my servants by thousands to hear you preach, and they 
 will believe the words which will flow from your mouths, with all 
 their hearts, and they will seek to enter into my Church with all 
 their power. You will then have little or no trouble to convince 
 people of the truthfulness of your mission; for they will believe it 
 with all their hearts, and seek diligently to become one with you. 
 Therefore, my son, be of good courage, and make all things ready 
 for me as soon as you can ; and lo, I come quickly. I am Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE ENEMIES, THE 
 PRISONER, AND THE FORESHADOWING. 
 
 No. 289. WEBER, UTAH, May 2pth, 1862. 
 
 i. WHAT can I do for you to relieve your mind from so much 
 oppression? You understand my situation very well. You know 
 that I cannot cut off your enemies until they have gathered them- 
 selves together and made the attempt to come up against my peo- 
 ple with the intention to destroy them. When they have gathered 
 themselves together to some place, and made the attempt to come 
 up against this place, then I will send one of the captains of our 
 hosts, and he shall cut them all off in an instant. I am watching 
 their movements, and I am ready for them, no matter how soon 
 they make the attempt to come up to this place. But you say in 
 your feelings that you do not believe I should cut your enemies off 
 if they were to make the attempt to come up against this people 
 before the foreshadowing is through with ; for you say that you 
 cannot see how I could be ready for them before my coming has 
 been foreshadowed. You say that you cannot see how the sub- 
 stance could come before the shadow. You think that if I was to 
 cut them off, that I should have to bring the substance to do it; 
 for you think that no shadow would cut off hundreds of people ; 
 but I can assure you that I shall not be put to the necessity of 
 cutting them off before my coming has been foreshadowed. I will 
 
586 CONCERNING THE ENEMIES. 
 
 keep them off until the right time. You need not fear that you 
 will be troubled with them before I am fully ready for them, for 
 you will not. 
 
 2. They are striving with all their power to get ready; and I 
 have sent mine angels unto them to take charge of them, and if 
 they work too fast, mine angels will confuse them and hinder them 
 until the right time has come. They are now both doing and 
 undoing, and they cannot make headway as fast as they wish to, 
 and they do not know what is the matter. They consider that 
 they ought to have been up to this place before this time, and 
 have finished their work with my people. They are hindered, and 
 they do not know what it is that hinders them. It is mine angels 
 who are with them, confusing them, and holding them back. That 
 general and those angels who are now with them, will control them 
 and let them gather themselves together in a solid body to start up 
 to this place, and as soon as they are started, mine angels will lay 
 them all low. You may depend upon what I tell you, for I shall 
 do as I have said. Let not your spirit droop, for all things will work 
 right. Things will not be as bad as you think that they will. You 
 have not much confidence in this people. You look on the dark 
 side, and you almost imagine things will work worse among this 
 people when the first test comes than what they really will. I can 
 assure you that there are some true-hearted men in the midst of 
 my people, who will cut off anything which you command them 
 to. They will stand by you unto death. They are not all false- 
 hearted ; and that you will see when they are tried. There are 
 some men in the midst of my people who will stand trying unto 
 death. They will not give way when they are tested. My peo- 
 ple are not all corrupt and worthless. There is an abundance of 
 faithful people m this Camp to cut off the hypocrites, and they 
 will do so when you command them to do it; for my spirit shall 
 rest upon the faithful of my people to that extent that they will 
 feel no weakness at all. They shall feel my spirit work upon them 
 in such a powerful manner as they have never felt it work upon 
 them before, and it will qualify them for the work that lies before 
 them. I will tell you how to divide the Camp and to slay the 
 hypocrites as soon as you are through with the foreshadowing of 
 my coming ; for the dividing of this Camp will immediately follow 
 the foreshadowing. 
 
CONCERNING THE PRISONER. 587 
 
 3. You wish to know when I intend to show unto you the 
 place which I have appointed for you and me to stand upon when 
 I come. You begin to think that it is time for me to begin to 
 show unto you that spot of ground ; for you say that you can see 
 that my coming is not far off; and you say that you would like me 
 to show unto you that spot of ground a little beforehand. I will 
 show it unto you as soon as you are through with foreshadowing 
 my coming. I will show it unto you in time. You need not 
 to fear. All things shall come along in their right time and 
 order. 
 
 4. I see that those men who were on guard have let one of 
 their prisoners go ; but I will take care of him. He is not out of 
 my hands, if he has escaped from my people. I will pay him off. 
 He will gain nothing by running away, for I will cut him off as 
 soon as I come; yea, I will cut off all those. corrupt-hearted hypo- 
 crites who have wilfully departed from me. Those that escape 
 your sword, I will slay, so that no hypocrite will escape justice. 
 There are men now in the midst of this people who are hypocrites. 
 They are not fit to be trusted in any place. If you place any con- 
 fidence at all in them, they will betray you. They are corrupt at 
 heart. There is no honor at all in them. They think nothing at 
 all about an honorable principle. They love dishonesty and 
 rottenness too much to respect honesty and act honorably. They 
 are as corrupt as that influence is which leads them. There is no 
 soundness in them. No matter what privileges they have, or what 
 light they live and move in, they reject it all, and like a sow that 
 has been washed, they turn to their wallowing again, because they 
 love sin and the devil the best, and most of them will meet the 
 same fate as he will. Such are not worthy of an existence upon 
 the earth ; neither shall they have one. 
 
 5. And behold, I say unto you, my son, that you may com- 
 mence to foreshadow my coming as soon as ever you have a mind 
 to do so ; that matter is in your hands. Arrange things so that 
 you can make a start as soon as possible. You know the situa- 
 tion of this people. The twelve generals of our host will be there 
 to witness the scene. It would be well if my people would all 
 wash themselves this day, and prepare themselves for that circum- 
 stance, let it take place whenever it may. The commencing of 
 
588 CONCERNING THE FORESHADOWING. 
 
 that matter is for you to decide. I leave it in your hands, and 
 whenever you commence it, we will all be there to witness the 
 sight. You know how to conduct it. Work according to the 
 pattern which I have given unto you, and all will be well. I am 
 the Lord. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, when you have foreshadowed 
 me as a man of war, with seven perfect crowns upon your head, 
 then you must represent the six angels who all hold the priestho6d 
 in part, by wearing upon your hat six half crowns. You must 
 have those six half crowns upon your hat when you represent the 
 order of the earth. Having two sets of sixes, you will have the 
 power to foreshadow or represent both the heavenly and earthly 
 orders. I will tell you how to act from time to time. You will 
 not be misled in the smallest thing ; therefore, commence the fore- 
 shadowing when you please to do so, and I will be with you on 
 that occasion, as well as on all others. 
 
 I now give unto you no more at present. I am the Light and 
 Life of the world ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE FORESHADOWING. 
 
 
 No. 290. WEBER, UTAH, May 3oth, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am he that shuts, and no one opens; and that 
 opens, and no one shuts; even the Son of the Eternal Father; 
 and I am in a hurry to speak unto you this morning. I see that 
 you are about to foreshadow my coming this day. You are for 
 rushing things ahead. I see that you are determined to open the 
 way for me. You are perfectly right in foreshadowing my coming 
 to-day. I did not hardly expect that you would rush things ahead 
 as you appear to be doing. I see that if I keep pace with you I 
 shall have to hurry. I will hurry, I will move side by side with 
 you. I will not let you pass me; but I will be as quick as you 
 are, let you be as quick as ever you may. I know what you want. 
 You want to get through with the foreshadowing, and then you 
 
THE FORESHADOWING. 589 
 
 think that my way will be opened so that if mine enemies should 
 make the attempt to come upon you, that I might be at liberty to 
 cut them off according to the law ; for you think that the sub- 
 stance cannot come before the shadow ; and after the shadow of 
 a person has been seen, you think that the next object that makes 
 its appearance must be the person himself he must follow his 
 own shadow. You have no faith in a substance making its appear- 
 ance before its shadow has been seen. You could not possiby 
 believe that I should cut off mine enemies before my coming has 
 been foreshadowed. You could not believe that I was always 
 ready to cut off your enemies ; for you think that it is contrary to 
 the principles of my kingdom for me to bring the substance before 
 the shadow, and I could not pacify you by telling you that I was 
 always ready for them. I never intended to cut them off before 
 my coming had been foreshadowed ; but I intended to hold them, 
 and keep them from approaching my people to injure them until 
 my coming had been foreshadowed. When I told you that I was 
 always ready for your enemies, let them make the attempt to 
 come up against you whenever they might, that did not satisfy 
 you. I was always ready to confuse them, and break them up, 
 and hold them in weakness to prevent them from injuring either 
 you or any of my faithful people. This I have done up to this 
 day, and both you and this people ought to be satisfied and 
 acknowledge that I have done my duty towards them as far as 
 things have gone. If my people will give me credit for what I 
 have done, it is all that I ask of them ; this I am entitled to ; this 
 is my right, and I ask for no more. I am the Lord. 
 
 2. And behold, I say unto you, my son that, both I and the 
 remaining eleven generals will be present with you this day. 
 They will leave their respective stations and appoint other generals 
 to take their places until they return after the foreshadowing is 
 over. They have stations throughout the whole earth where the 
 armies of heaven gather in large groops ; and thus the armies of 
 heaven are stationed in different places throughout the whole 
 earth; and all the leading generals will leave their various stations 
 to witness this great scene, for it will be the greatest scene which 
 has ever been witnessed on this earth of Adam's either by mortal 
 men or by holy angels. This day the foundation of a kingdom 
 
590 CONCERNING THE PROPHET. 
 
 will be laid that will bear rule over the earth. It will drive the 
 power of the devil from the surface of the whole earth. This day 
 is the gate-way to the power of your office ; it will launch you right 
 into power, and make you the president over the whole earth at 
 once. Your commands shall be obeyed by all kings and rulers 
 of every name and nature from this day henceforth, and you shall 
 tread down and destroy, and none shall hinder ; for when thou 
 shalt speak after this day is over, it shall be as though I had 
 spoken. Thy word shall be as the word of God, for thou shalt 
 be as a god to all Adam's posterity. They shall either obey thy 
 command, or be cut off from the earth, for thou art the legitimate 
 ruler over the whole earth, and those who refuse to obey thy com- 
 mand shall perish, whether they be fallen spirits, or heirs to the 
 resurrection, it matters not. Thou art the head over all, and thy 
 command shall be obeyed as though thou was God ; for I am the 
 Lord, and I will uphold thee. Therefore, my son, as soon as the 
 foreshadowing is through with, the test will commence, which is 
 the dividing of the Camp. Prepare for this test, my son, for it 
 will be severe on the hypocrites. It will move them all off the 
 earth. You will no sooner have laid down that rod which was 
 made to foreshadow your own rod, than you will be called upon 
 to take your own rod in your hand, and then you will have the 
 power. One rod will follow the other. 
 
 I now give unto you no more at present. I am the Son of the 
 Eternal Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION APPROVING THE FORESHADOWING, 
 
 AND SHOWING HOW THE ORDER OF 
 
 THE GODS IS REPRESENTED 
 
 ON THE EARTH. 
 
 No. 291. WEBER, UTAH, May 3ist, 1862. 
 
 i. Lo, I am come to speak unto you again. I see that you 
 are through with the foreshadowing. Both I and the eleven 
 generals were present, according to promise, and we saw all that 
 
HOW THE ORDER OF THE GODS IS REPRESENTED. 591 
 
 was done. We were well pleased with the manner in which all 
 things were conducted on that occasion. We took the lead our- 
 selves, and made everything go according to our minds and wills. 
 W T e were as busy controlling and arranging things as my servants 
 were. We were one with them in their labors on that occasion. 
 We are now ready to make another move as soon as you are 
 ready ; but the next move will be a painful one to all those who 
 have yielded obedience unto the fulness of my gospel to. the 
 faithful as well as to the hypocrites ; but it will be much more 
 severe on the hypocrites than it will be on the faithful, for the 
 hypocrites will lose their lives. The faithful will have to slay them, 
 and this will be a painful task to some of my faithful people. It 
 will be more painful to some of them than it will be to others ; 
 even the stoutest heart will feel it. 
 
 2. I am compelled by law to make three separate and distinct 
 moves in the setting up of my kingdom, in order to endow my 
 servant with power to bear rule over all the earth. I have to work 
 by threes in this matter, for it is a matter which concerns all Gods, 
 and must have the sanction of all leading authorities in the 
 heavens. The first three Gods must be acknowledged, in the 
 setting up of my kingdom upon the earth, by three distinct moves 
 being made by my people, which moves represent the first, second 
 and third estates of man, as well as acknowledging the authority 
 of the first three Gods. The ruling authority of the Gods is em- 
 bodied in three persons ; and the three estates of man were first 
 instituted to represent or acknowledge the three leading authorities 
 in the heavens. The leading authorities of the Gods consist of 
 threes. The leading authorities of a mortal earth consist of seven; 
 and the leading authorities of the lesser priesthood consist of 
 twelves. 
 
 3. When the fulness of the holy priesthood is upon the earth, 
 and my kingdom established, the several authorities have to be 
 acknowledged. The order of threes has to be acknowledged the 
 first, because it represents the first three Gods, and the authority 
 of the Gods. The order of sevens has to be acknowledged tbe 
 next, because it represents the leading authorities of the high 
 priesthood upon the earth. And the leading authorities of the 
 lesser priesthood must be acknowledged the next by twelves. 
 
592 HOW THE ORDER OF THE GODS IS REPRESENTED. 
 
 4. A literal descendant of Aaron may act without counselors, 
 because he does not belong to the higher order of priesthood 
 even the holy order of the Gods ; therefore, the priests of Aaron 
 do not need a quorum of three. They must represent their own 
 order of priesthood, which is the order of twelves. Threes, sevens 
 and twos exist in the lesser priesthood, even as they exist in the 
 high priesthood; but the Aaronic priests must not divide them- 
 selves into those orders they must remain in twelves undivided. 
 It is their duty to confine themselves to that order of priesthood 
 while in mortality ; but when they arrive at the higher order of 
 priesthood, they will have the privilege to divide their twelves into 
 threes, sevens and twos. 
 
 5. When Adam's children have become celestial, they will 
 have many twelves to divide into those orders ; for those are the 
 orders in every celestial world; and it is the order of the holy 
 priesthood upon the earth. The order of threes represents the 
 first three Gods ; the order of sevens represents the seven angels 
 of the seven Churches, and the order of twos represents the two 
 Olive Plants. I hold the keys of the holy priesthood' in heaven, 
 and by taking my two brothers, who are next to me by birthright, 
 to be my counselors, we three represent the first three Gods ; and 
 by taking seven more of the twelve generals to represent the seven 
 angels of the seven Churches, it leaves two to represent the two 
 Olive Plants. 
 
 6. Although my Father is the first president of our earth, he 
 is not included in the twelve of whom I have spoken ; but he is of 
 a higher order. He represents the first God of all, who is the 
 president over all, and who is not connected with any quorum of 
 Gods. The firstborn son o( the first God is the first person in the 
 first quorum of Gods, and consequently he holds the keys of 
 authority over that quorum. The -last glorified God always repre- 
 sents the first God, in not being connected with his sons in a 
 quorum capacity. He belongs to one order, and his sons belong 
 to another. He is a God, and is ranked with the order of the 
 Gods ; but his sons are of a lower order ; they are angels, and 
 possess no power only what they receive from him. I am the 
 firstborn son of my Father, and I hold the keys of the lower 
 order, which is an order of holy angels. I preside over all my 
 
HOW THE ORDER OF THE GODS IS REPRESENTED. 593 
 
 Father's posterity. There are twelve of us who are the twelve 
 generals over the lower order. I am entitled to two counselors of 
 the same order as myself, even my two brothers who are next to 
 me by birthright. The president of every order in the holy priest- 
 hood is entitled to two counselors. You are entitled to two coun- 
 selors; but your first two counselors are presidents or lords over 
 dispensations ; therefore, you cannot use them to any advantage, 
 neither can you take the two Olive Plants to be your counselors, 
 for they are the counselors of the first and second angels. You 
 have to take the next two to them by birthright to be your coun- 
 selors. The remaining six angels must all have two counselors 
 each before you can have your second set of counselors. 
 
 7. How does the earthly order represent the heavenly order? 
 Your office is of a two-fold nature. You represent the first God 
 of all, who sent you to Adam's posterity, in Adam's stead ; and 
 your two counselors represent the two counselors of the first God. 
 You represent the first God in Adam's stead, because his ruling 
 time is not yet come ; but he will, eventually, represent the first 
 God himself to his own posterity, and take the reins of govern- 
 ment into his own hands. He will represent the first God to his 
 posterity as my Father now does to his posterity. Adam is not 
 yet a celestial God ; therefore, the next angel to him takes the 
 reins of government, and represents the first God, in his stead, 
 until he comes to do it himself. You are filling two offices at 
 present. You hold the keys of the holy priesthood upon the 
 earth, and you are acting as the representative of the first God in 
 Adam's stead ; but, in due time, Adam will fill that office himself. 
 It takes both my Father and me to fill the offices to the inhab- 
 itants of our earth that you are now filling to Adam's posterity. 
 You hold the keys of the holy priesthood, even as I do, and you 
 represent the first God to Adam's posterity, even as my Father 
 represents him to his posterity. And inasmuch as your office is 
 of a two-fold nature, you claim two counselors to assist you to fill 
 your office ; and when both you and your two counselors have 
 been taken to represent the first God and his two counselors, you 
 then claim to represent me and my two counselors, and to do so 
 you take two more counselors to assist you to act in your own 
 office as president of the high priesthood on earth. You will see 
 
594 CONCERNING THE THREE MOVES. 
 
 your own position. Act well your part, and I will be with you 
 continually. I am the Lord. 
 
 8. And behold, I say unto you, my son, I am compelled to 
 make three moves when I begin to establish my kingdom upon 
 the earth, in order to acknowledge the leading authorities of the 
 holy priesthood and the three estates of man. I am compelled 
 to work by threes when I have anything to accomplish through 
 the Melchisedec priesthood ; for I cannot do the smallest thing 
 through that priesthood without acknowledging the first authorities 
 thereof. The foreshadowing of my coming is the first move of 
 the three, and represents the first estate of man, and also the first 
 law, which is mercy. The foreshadowing being a pleasant sight 
 to beholders, represents mercy, which produces perfect happiness 
 to the partakers thereof. 
 
 9. The next move which I shall make, even the second move, 
 will be the execution of the law upon transgressors, and will repre- 
 sent death and justice, and the second estate. Its being painful, 
 represents death and misery that attend the second estate; and 
 its short duration represents the short duration of man upon the 
 earth, and also the short time which a -world occupies in passing 
 through mortality. 
 
 10. The third move which I shall make will be the great 
 deliverance which I shall bring to my people at my coming, and 
 it will represent a celestial reward. . My faithful people will then 
 be no longer slaves to the devil ; for it will be a celestial reward 
 unto them, and give unto them power over the devil. It will be 
 pleasant for the faithful to pass through ; but no hypocrite will be 
 made a partaker of it ; for the test, which represents death, will 
 take them away. None will receive that reward but those who 
 are found worthy before me. My people have a representation 
 of death to pass through before they can receive that celestial 
 reward. Let my people prove themselves worthy of that reward, 
 and they shall receive it. 
 
 11. And now, my son, you must look out for the next move 
 which I shall make. It will be hard on you as well as on the 
 rest; but I will bring all who are worthy safely through it. My 
 people may be preparing themselves for it, for it is about to come 
 upon them it will not linger, but it will come speedily. It will 
 
THE ENEMIES WILL BE RESTRAINED. 595 
 
 will be a heart-rending scene. There is not a heart that will not 
 be penetrated. 
 
 12. And now, behold, I say unto you, my son, I am about 
 to show to you the place which I have appointed for you and 
 me to stand upon. I will lead you to the place by a number of 
 my holy angels, and they shall show it unto you ; but you must 
 not show it unto any other person until I tell you. It is not far 
 from your own door. You may now expect me to manifest my- 
 self unto you in a plain manner. Therefore, lookout for that 
 influence, for it will soon come upon you. 
 
 13. And behold, I say unto you, I will hold your enemies 
 back until you are perfectly ready for them. They shall answer 
 your purposes. They shall do as you wish them to do ; for I 
 know that you feel as I feel towards them. You do not- want to 
 save them ; but you want them to answer your own purposes; and 
 that they shall do. You shall have the desire of your heart. They 
 are now laboring with all their might, but they can make no head- 
 way, for mine angels confuse them, and break them up, and keep 
 them doing and undoing. They shall not make any headway 
 until you are fully ready for them to gather themselves together to 
 make a start, and then I will permit them to do so ; and as soon 
 as they have done so, I will cut them all off instantly. 
 
 I need not reveal unto you any more at present. Let this suf- 
 fice, and I will come unto you speedily. I am the Son of the 
 Eternal Father; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING HUMAN FEELINGS. 
 
 No. 292. WEBER, UTAH, June 3rd, 1862. 
 
 i. Lo, I COME unto you speedily to release you. I see that 
 you are in trouble again. You are often in trouble, and you find 
 many things to complain about. I cannot, apparently, keep on 
 the right side of you, no matter what I do. You are afraid of 
 these people being brought to want bread ; and should such be 
 the case, you say that you know that you would have to bear the 
 
59^ NATURAL FEELINGS. 
 
 blame, and not me ; for that they know very well that they could 
 not get at me to avenge themselves, consequently, they would turn 
 upon you. You say that they do not study much about the right 
 of any matter when they are brought into a tight place ; but they 
 turn upon you and blame you for all their afflictions, no matter 
 how innocent you may be. You say that you have had experience 
 enough with people on this earth to know how they will act when 
 they are brought into a tight place ; that they will blame the per- 
 son that is nearest to them ; such is the failing of many mortal 
 beings. They work upon feelings, and not upon principle ; and 
 while such is the case, confidence cannot be placed in them. 
 
 2. When people are led by feelings, they will run any way or 
 do anything that their wild and false fancies lead them to do. 
 They are-like a wave of the ocean, tossed about first into one atti- 
 tude, and then into another, just as the wind blows upon them; 
 such is the uncertainty of people who act upon human feelings. 
 Human feelings in a mortal world are not of me, but they are of 
 the devil. Mortal beings have been trained under the influence 
 of .the devil, which is a false influence, and it gives unto mortal 
 beings a false feeling, and leads them down to destruction. 
 
 3. The natural man sees and feels as the devil does, and his 
 standard of right is the devil's standard of right ; therefore, how 
 can mortal beings who follow their natural feelings be right? The 
 natural feelings of mortal beings have been given unto them by 
 their parents from generation to generation, even as far back as 
 the days of Cain, who had natural feelings that led him to break 
 my law, and to commit murder. He also introduced into the 
 world all manner of wickedness according to his natural feelings. 
 He was the first person that had natural feelings, and, through 
 following them, they led him to bre,ak my law, and trample it 
 under his feet as long as he could. He is the founder of 
 natural feelings ; they sprung from him. How many are there of 
 my people who wish to be led by natural feelings? Those who 
 call themselves after my name, and wish to do so, are not of me, 
 but they are of the devil who gave unto them those feelings ; such 
 mine , angels will not influence. Such characters will take the 
 devil's side when I divide this Camp. But those who are willing 
 to put their natural feelings on one side, and cling to my law with 
 
NATURAL FEELINGS. 597 
 
 all their hearts, mine angels will influence and strengthen at the 
 test. Those who will stand through the test will have to put away 
 their natural feelings, and act upon principle. My law will regu- 
 late all things ; it is the standard of right to those who embrace 
 my gospel, and not only to those, but also to all mankind. It 
 will do away with natural feelings as it approaches them, until it 
 has sent them to hell, whence they came. The devil shall take 
 them back again, and perish with them. The pure in heart have 
 no other feelings than to honor my law. They take it to be their 
 standard, and put away their natural feelings. My people will 
 know who I claim as mine. I shall bring mine own people safely 
 through the test, because they have a claim upon me. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, you blame me for 
 suffering mine enemies to block up the way of my people so that 
 they cannot obtain food and other necessary things to subsist 
 upon until I am ready to deliver them. You say that I might 
 have kept the way open for my people to obtain food; but it 
 appears to you that the way is now blocked up so that you can 
 see no chance for my people to obtain those things which they 
 need to sustain them, and what to do you do not know. You say 
 that you can see plainly enough that I am not ready to come unto 
 you and give unto you your rod, or in other words, my people are 
 not yet ready, for that there is considerable to be done before I 
 can come. You say that the test has not taken place as yet ; that 
 you can see that I have more to/eveal unto you concerning the 
 preparation of both you and my people for the test ; therefore, 
 you wish to know what these people are to do for food until I 
 come and place fresh means in their hands. You may set your 
 feelings at rest concerning that matter. I will continue to open 
 the way for them to obtain food until I place the whole Territory 
 in their hands, which I shall speedily do. I shall make others 
 subject unto them. They shall be the heads in my kingdom ; 
 and those who come in after them shall be subject unto them. I 
 know that you are troubled to know what these people must do to 
 obtain food. You do not wish to see them go hungry while there 
 is an abundance' of food in the Territory in the possession of 
 devils and devils' slaves ; but you wish me to open the way for 
 them to obtain sufficient food. You also wish me to hurry and 
 
598 MORE TO BE REVEALED. 
 
 reveal unto you all that I have to reveal before I come. You 
 say that you wish me to show unto you the place that I have 
 appointed to meet you, and for us to stand upon. You wish to 
 know when I intend to show it unto you. You want to see it 
 before the test takes place. I will promise you that I will show 
 it unto you before the test takes place, but not long before ; for 
 as soon as I have shown it unto you, I shall bring on the test. 
 You say that you are satisfied that I have more to reveal unto you 
 before the dividing of this Camp takes place. 
 
 5. I have more to reveal unto you before that time, but not 
 much. I can soon reveal unto you all that I have to reveal. I 
 would have spoken unto yesterday had you not been sick. When 
 I saw that you was sick I did not wish to trouble you until your 
 health was better. I am aware that you are still unwell ; but I 
 am compelled to speak unto you to-day, seeing that you are able 
 to write. I know that it has been very painful to you to sit and 
 write from my mouth to-day, although you are very much better 
 in health than you were yesterday. When you are sick, it prevents 
 you from doing your duty ; for it is all that you can do when your 
 health is tolerable to act your own part. You are often sick; 
 therefore, I have to work very gently with you. If you were more 
 healthy I could work much faster through you, for you would be 
 able to write more than what you have hitherto been able to do. 
 I have had to consider your health, and deal with you accordingly. 
 But when I come, I will heal you at once, and you will have good 
 health. 
 
 6. And now, behold, I say unto you, you need not trouble 
 yourself about the destitute condition of these people. They shall 
 not want for bread ; for when they are apparently out of flour, I 
 will' open a~way for them to obtain more, until I place all the 
 means in this Territory in the hands of my faithful people. Mine 
 enemies can make no bonds that I cannot break ; neither can 
 they set any trap that will catch my faithful people. The trap 
 which they have laid for these -people shall catch themselves. It 
 will be with them as it was with Hainan, who built a gallows to 
 hang himself upon. When Haman built the gallows with the 
 intention to hang Mordecai, he did not think that he was building 
 it to put an end to his own existence ; and so it will be with mine 
 
MORTAL BEINGS. 599 
 
 enemies. They are building a gallows to hang my people upon, 
 but Haman-like, they shall be hung upon it themselves. All 
 things will soon be ready so that I can put them upon their own 
 gallows. I am the Lord. 
 
 7. I do not wish to hold you any longer at this time; but I 
 will speedily speak unto you again. I will speak unto you as fast 
 as you are able to write until the division of the Camp takes place, 
 and then I shall have about done speaking unto you in the way 
 in which I now do. I know that it is painful to you to write so 
 much at once ; but you will be relieved of that tedious burden, to 
 a certain extent; when I come. I am Jesus Christ, the son of the 
 Eternal Father. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING MORTAL BEINGS. 
 
 No. 293. WEBER, UTAH, June 4th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world. I wish to 
 speak unto you concerning mortal beings, and the manner in 
 which I have to reveal unto them the mysteries of my kingdom, 
 until I come and show myself unto them plainly and move forth 
 in their sight. Being mortal, they have a mortal understanding, 
 and I have to work with them in a two-fold manner. Mortality 
 signifies falsehood, darkness, ignorance, death and imperfection. 
 There is nothing but falsehood and misrule in a wofld that is in 
 mortality. The devil brought mortality, which produces misery 
 and death, into the world ; therefore, he is the founder thereof. 
 When I speak to mortal beings I have to talk to them, to a certain 
 extent, as they talk to each other, and when I do so, in one way 
 they understand me, but in another way they do not. They do 
 not understand me aright by their natural understanding, for it is 
 of the devil. The natural man understands things as the devil 
 does, who first gave him his natural feelings and understanding. 
 Though I speak to mortal men in their own language, they 4o not 
 understand my meaning ; but they understand me according to 
 their understanding of words ; being deceived, and neither seeing 
 
600 MORTAL BEINGS. 
 
 nor understanding anything aright, they do not understand me 
 aright. All mortal beings have a false understanding ; but I have 
 a true understanding. Mortal beings understand my words in one 
 way, but I understand them in another; they have a wrong under- 
 standing of them, but I understand them aright. 
 
 2. The devil does not understand my language, because he 
 has a false understanding. The same language being spoken, he 
 would understand it in one way, but I should understand it in 
 another way. He would understand it according to darkness, 
 but I would understand it according to light. Inasmuch as Satan 
 is an angel of darkness, and I am an angel of light, we cannot see 
 alike, for light and darkness are directly opposite in their natures ; 
 they see nothing alike; for the principle of light sees all things as 
 they are, but the principle of darkness does not. Therefore, it is 
 impossible for mortal beings, who are deceived by the devil, to 
 understand my words, although I speak plainly unto them. The 
 natural man cannot understand me when I speak unto him, 
 because he is not of me. He could understand the devil very 
 well, if he were to speak to him, because all darkness is alike, and 
 it understands all things alike. Light also sees all things alike. It 
 sees all things one way; but darkness sees the same things in 
 another way. 
 
 3. The natural man should know that, naturally, he cannot 
 understand me when I speak. If there is no better way for him 
 to find me out, he can never understand me ; for I continually 
 move in the midst of darkness, and the darkness comprehendeth 
 me not. But I cannot move in the midst of light without being 
 seen by the angels of light; I cannot move forth to do the 
 smallest thing but they see me as I am. But I can go anywhere 
 among mortal beings, and do anything in their midst, but they 
 cannot see me. I can stand close by a person's side and smite 
 him dead, and he would not see me do it. Oh, how mortal 
 beings are deceived by the devil! The natural man can see 
 nothing at all that is of any benefit to him. He is deceived in 
 everything. There is no way to make the carnal mind, or natural 
 man, understand me when I speak to him, for he takes my words 
 to mean something different to what they do mean. When I 
 stand close by his side, he cannot see me; and when I speak 
 
MORTAL BEINGS. 6oi 
 
 unto him, he cannot understand me ; and if I were to smite him 
 dead, he would not know who had done it. Oh, the blindness of 
 mortal beings ; yet how they boast of their light and wisdom. Oh, 
 how they are destroyed by the devil. Oh, the difference between 
 them and the holy angels who see all things aright ; who cannot 
 be blinded and deceived; who see everything as it is. No move 
 can be made that holy angels cannot see. There is nothing hid 
 from their eyes. But mortal beings cannot see anything as it is ; 
 neither can they understand anything aright. They are fooled 
 with everything with which they have to do ; and such being the 
 case, how can they understand anything about me? They know 
 me not unless my spirit has enlightened them. My spirit will 
 explain the meaning of my language unto all those who possess it, 
 for it is enlightened, even as I am, and it understands all my 
 words aright, and it will explain their meaning unto all those who 
 are truly faithful before me. 
 
 4. I have to work with mortal beings in a two-fold manner. 
 Firstly, I have to speak unto them through a, prophet, and when I 
 have done so, I have to send my holy angels to explain my words 
 unto them. Mine angels will give unto them to see and under- 
 stand what I mean when I speak unto them ; if they did not do 
 so, my people would take me wrong ; they would misunderstand 
 me altogether. If my. word was not explained unto them by my 
 holy angels, it would destroy them. Thus, after I have spoken to 
 a people, I have to send unto them an interpreter to make them 
 understand my words. If mortal beings could see and under- 
 stand all things aright, even as holy angels do, they would under- 
 stand me when I speak, without interpreters ; but, in consequence 
 .of their blindness, I have to send mine angels to influence them, 
 to enlighten them, and to lead them aright. It would be well for 
 mortal beings if they understood their true position. But the 
 devil makes them believe that they have a great deal of knowl- 
 edge, and that their judgment is most excellent, when, in reality, 
 they know nothing aright; for they are deceived in everything 
 that they have to do with while they are under the influence of the 
 devil. Both me and my holy angels have to take full charge of 
 them, even as a mother takes charge of her sucking child they 
 are perfectly helpless. 
 
602 
 
 CONCERNING SATAN. 
 
 5. The devil himself is dependent upon us for his present 
 existence. He would have destroyed himself more than a million 
 years ago, had it not been for our government which preserved him 
 and kept him alive. He was such a fool that he would have put 
 an end to his own existence ; but we took pity on him, and saved 
 his life, because we did not want him to die until he had done his 
 work. We saved his life to accommodate ourselves, even to do 
 his own work. Therefore, we have led him along up to the 
 present time. When he came forth into mortality and cgm- 
 menced a government of his own, he was such a fool that, when 
 he had only had a mortal body a few years, he killed himself, 
 and, with very few exceptions, he killed everybody that came after 
 him. - He had to return into the spirit worlds under our form of 
 government again, in order that we might save his spiritual body 
 alive ; for he says that he does not want to die, but he wants to 
 live as long as he can. He is now in great trouble ; for the time, 
 when he must die. is now drawing so near that he does not know 
 what to do. We shall save his life until he has done his own 
 work, and answered our ends. We do as we like with both him 
 and his band; but we are always very mindful to work to our 
 advantage. My people have had a wonderful monster as their 
 leader for six thousand years. I should think that by this time 
 they are tired of him. 
 
 I do not wish to hold you any longer at this time, my son ; but 
 I will soon speak unto you again. I am the Glorious Branch of 
 Jesse, and the Bright and Morning Star; even Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING THE ORIGIN AND CAUSE 
 OF FEAR. 
 
 No. 294. WEBER, UTAH, June 4th, 1862. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words, which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword, for I am about to speak unto 
 you again. You say in your feelings that you wish me to make 
 
THE ANGELS ARE AT WORK. 603 
 
 haste and drive things ahead so that I can come. I can assure 
 you that I am working faster than what you think I am. I have 
 many different points to watch, for I have to "watch the devil, and 
 when He has laid, as he supposes, a plan that will destroy my peo- 
 ple, I have to send a number of mine holy angels to upset his 
 plan, or plans, as the case may be, and in this way I hold him in 
 weakness. He cannot make any headway against my people, 
 because I continually break up his plans. If I had not broken 
 up his plans many times, he would have destroyed my people 
 long ago ; but mine holy angels move hither and thither and 
 break up the many plans which mine enemies lay against my peo- 
 ple, and no mortal being can see them. They do as they have a 
 mind to do with mortal beings. They turn them hither and 
 thither as it pleases them ; and in this way mine enemies obey 
 me as well as my own covenant people do. I have never failed, 
 as yet, to bring mine enemies to those points which I desired to 
 bring them to, according to the law by which I am governed. I 
 am entirely controlled by law, both in my treatment of devils and 
 in all other things. I have never failed to make everything 
 according to the pattern which my Father gave unto me. I work, 
 and none can hinder. Therefore, I bring all people to my terms, 
 let them be of whatever race they may, for I have all power both 
 in heaven and upon the earth. 
 
 2. My people are right when they confess my hand in all 
 all things ; for I suffer nothing to exist which operates against the 
 general interest of my work, only that which ought to exist by law; 
 and when it is lawful to change anything, I change it. Nothing 
 exists now only according to law ; and when anything is changed, 
 it will be changed by law. All things are controlled by law. My 
 people need not to fret and fume about some things going wrong. 
 They fear too much that something exists which ought not to 
 exist; and they cannot help but be troubled more or less. 
 What is it that troubles them? It is ignorance and blindness; 
 they fear, and fear is from the devil. The angels of heaven do 
 not fear anything. They keep a perfect law, because they delight 
 in it. They know no fear, because they have a perfect knowledge 
 of all things, and consequently they do not fear being brought 
 into difficulties by those things which Jhey understand perfectly. 
 
 
604 CONCERNING FEAR. 
 
 They understand all things, and they have power over all things, 
 and consequently there is nothing for them to fear. But mortal 
 beings fear everything, because they do not understand anything 
 correctly, and that is what causes them to fear. They are in con- 
 stant misery through fear; for fear is misery; it is hell; it is a 
 constant canker worm to the souls of mortal beings ; it destroys 
 all happiness where it exists to a great extent. Those persons 
 who fear are always in trouble and misery. Their lives are a 
 burden unto them. 
 
 3. Fear is a principle of the devil. It is not of me. There 
 is not a heavenly messenger on any celestial earth that knows fear. 
 It is not a principle of my gospel. It is from hell. But faith and 
 confidence are principles of my gospel, and as they grow and in- 
 crease with mortal beings, tney drive fear away from them, and 
 gradually produce happiness in their stead. Let my people cling 
 to the principles of my gospel, and seek to understand them, and 
 seek to cast all fear far from them, in order that they may enjoy 
 some portion of happiness while they live, and not let the devil 
 always hold them in chains, and thereby destroy their happiness. 
 They need not let any fear creep over them on my account, sup- 
 posing that I shall neglect them, for I shall not. I shall do my 
 duty to them. They must know that I have always done my duty 
 to them since I first brought them to this place; and if they 
 would worship me with all their hearts, and do as- 1 command 
 them, I would bring them all safely through the test. But some 
 will not do as I command them ; such will perish. I am the 
 Lord. 
 
 4. And behold, I say unto you, my son, mine enemies are 
 in great confusion. They cannot agree upon the subject of com- 
 ing up against my people. One party wants to come up here 
 and "wipe my people out" (as they call it) immediately. They 
 are almost crazy to come up. But there is another party which is 
 opposed to coming up now, and this party is holding them back ; 
 and they are almost ready to. fight with each other, and, being 
 divided, they cannot make any headway. One party says that my 
 people have done enough to be "wiped out, ; ' and the ether party 
 says that they want to wait a little longer to see my people do a 
 little more;, and they tellttie opposite party that if they will wait 
 
CONCERNING THE ENEMIES. 605 
 
 a little longer, that they will have all the hold on my people that 
 they desire; and they tell them that my people are gradually 
 growing worse every day ; and they also tell them that if they will 
 only be quiet a little longer, my people will commit murder, and 
 they say that when they see this, they shall be as ready to come 
 up against my people, and ' ( wipe them out," as they are. In this 
 way they talk to the opposite party to pacify them and restrain 
 them. I can assure them that I do not need their assistance. I 
 can hold them back. They are all equally guilty before me, for 
 they all thirst for the blood of my people ; but one party is a little 
 more foolish than the other. I will not hold them in confusion 
 lung. I can assure them that I will give unto them what they 
 want. I will unite them, and as soon as I have done so, I will 
 send them all together into the spirit world. As soon as they are 
 united, they shall all die. It will be the first time that ever they 
 were united in this world, and they cannot die at a better time. 
 
 5. You wish to know whether it will be long before I bring on 
 the test. It will not be long, for it is just upon the point of com- 
 ing now. I have but little more to reveal unto you before it 
 comes. I shall be with you in the test. I shall have everything 
 ready so that I, can come unto you as soon as the test is over. 
 When the test commences, I shall be a looker-on. I shall be with 
 you to set how things proceed ; but I shall not manifest my power 
 then, without it is needed. If it is not needed then, it will be in 
 a few hours afterwards. I shall show unto you the place where 
 we must stand before the test, and I shall have everything ready 
 so that I can come unto you in less than one hour after it is over, 
 if it should be necessary. As soon as ever you have cut off the 
 hypocrites who are in the midst of this people, your enemies will 
 unite to come up against you. I shall let them gather themselves 
 together then, and make an attempt to come, and then I will cut 
 them off, as I have said; but, until then, I will hold them. 
 Therefore, my son, place your confidence in me, and know that I 
 am with you unto the end. I am the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus 
 Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
606 THE PROPHET FEELS OPPRESSED. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DUTIES OF THE 
 ANGELS OF HEAVEN. 
 
 No. 295. WEBER, UTAH, June 5th, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am the Light and Life of the world, even he 
 who moves forth in the midst of darkness, and the darkness com- 
 prehendeth me not ; who speaks the word and all the heavenly 
 hosts obey ; even Jesus Christ. I am about to speak unto you 
 again. I know your feelings very well, and also the manner in 
 which you are oppressed. I know what you need as well as you 
 can tell me. I know what holds you down and destroys your 
 happiness. I know that you have no pleasure of your life through 
 having to endure so much oppression ; but it cannot be avoided. 
 You know that you must necessarily bear the evils of the world 
 until the day of power has come. The influence of the world 
 oppresses you, and you cannot help yourself, neither can I help 
 you until all things are made ready for me to come unto you. 
 Much has had to be done to prepare for me since I first sent you 
 to this Fort. I could not give unto you the power of your office 
 without making some preparations or taking some preliminary steps 
 towards commencing a kingdom. I am compelled to bring things 
 into such a shape that I can have a people to come to who believe 
 in me ; who will have been taught the principles of my gospel, 
 and who will have had the opportunity of being taught the nature 
 of my true character, so that they may know what to expect when 
 they see me. I must reveal unto a people mine attributes before 
 I can come and show myself unto them. Therefore, until I have 
 done so, I cannot come unto you altogether, neither can you have 
 the power of your office ; for when you receive the power of your 
 office, I shall have to come and stand by your side, and talk with 
 you mouth to mouth, and remain with you. After that time, a 
 portion of mine army will always be upon the earth. 
 
 2. When you receive the power, of your office, I and all my 
 holy angels will have to be upon this earth. All the heavenly 
 hosts are subject to me ; and when I am upon the earth, I am 
 subject to you ; but when I am in heaven, I am subject to my 
 
THE "DUTY OF THE ANGELS. 607 
 
 Father. I am a swift messenger, and my duty is to minister 
 between two powers. I am also a revelator. I receive all reve- 
 lations upon all subjects connected with my Church, and also the 
 law, from my Father. I am a revelator to you, and you are a 
 revelator to all Abraham's seed. The reason why I do not do for 
 you now what you wish me to do is, because it is unlawful for me 
 to do it. I am not yet under your command. I am subject to 
 my Father. I have hitherto been busily engaged in carrying 
 revelations from my Father unto you, and I still have to do so, 
 for I have not yet finished that work; and while I am thus 
 engaged, I shall not be subject to your command. I shall be 
 subject to my Father until I come and stand by your side. 
 When my Father shall send me to stand by your side to endow 
 you with power, he will then deliver me and all the army into 
 your hands, and you will have full control over us from that time 
 until your mission is ended; and during that time, my Father 
 will have no control over us. Our duty will then be to cut off all 
 your enemies upon the earth. Inasmuch as you are the president 
 of the earth, our Father will deliver us entirely into your hands, 
 and we shall be subject to your command ; for we cannot serve 
 two masters. While we remain upon the earth we shall be sub- 
 ject to you ; but when we return to heaven, we shall be subject 
 to our Father. He has given unto us, the warriors of heaven, a 
 mission to the earth to fight your battles for one thousand years, 
 and when we once begin, we will make a slaughter. During the 
 time that we shall be subject to you, my Father will have no con- 
 trol either over me or any other person who belongs to the army 
 of heaven. Should he undertake to dictate one of them contrary 
 to your wish, he would break the law by which all Gods are 
 governed ; for, after he shall have delivered us into your hands for 
 one thousand years, he will not, until that time is expired, have 
 any control over us; but when we have done serving you, we 
 shall be subject to " our Father again. And now, my son, you 
 know what you have to trust to when we come unto you. You 
 have been much tioubled in your feelings, because we have not 
 worked to please you at times. You have thought that we ought 
 to have been subject to you before this time, and to have done 
 many things to relieve you; but if we had done so, we would 
 
608 THE DUTY OF THE ANGELS. 
 
 have broken the law of heaven ; we would have obeyed you when 
 we were not subject to you, but were subject to our Father. It is 
 unlawful for us to have more than one master at a time ; we have 
 to get through with one master before we can serve another. You 
 will now understand your own situation, and ours also. Let us 
 work well together, and each of us act our own part, and then all 
 things will go on well. 
 
 3. One reason why we cannot be subject to you before we 
 come unto you altogether is, because you do not know enough to 
 control us. You might give unto us false commands, and there- 
 by bring us into confusion. Our Father has to control us until 
 he has fully -prepared you to take charge of us ; and when he has 
 done so, he will give us into your hands, and we will be faithful 
 unto you. We will cut off everything that you tell us to cut off. 
 When our Father delivers us into your hands, you will know how 
 to control us aright ; for what you do not know, I will tell you, 
 so that there will not be anything lacking. 
 
 4. You think that I am very backward in bringing on the test; 
 but I can assure you that I am bringing things up to a head at a 
 rapid speed. You may know by this revelation, which I am now 
 giving you, that I am now preparing you to take the reins of 
 government into your own hands, and showing you what you have 
 to trust to. The strength from our earth is great. Behold, I 
 am Jesus Christ, and I have two hundred million angels in my 
 army, who will be under your command, and if that number is 
 not sufficient, you can have as many more ; for, should it become 
 necessary, my Father would send a dispatch unto your Father, 
 who is the president of that quorum to which my Father belongs, 
 for more help, and he would soon respond to it. But I can 
 assure you that you will not need any help from any other earth 
 besides ours ; for we have power enough to overthrow the devil, 
 and to drive his influence from Adam's earth, and save it. There- 
 fore, rest satisfied and trust in me, and know that I am with you 
 unto the end. 
 
 5. Satan works hard at my people. Let them be diligent, 
 and guard against him, for he will deceive some of them, and 
 destroy them. They cannot be too watchful and diligent. They 
 have no time to trifle away in idleness and unprofitable conversa- 
 
THE IDLE AND UNFAITHFUL. 609 
 
 tion ; and of this they will be convinced very shortly. There are 
 idle, slothful people in this Camp, who trifle away their most 
 precious time to no purpose. Such are hypocrites, and shall not 
 live in the midst of these people. They will not work if they can 
 help it ; neither will they put themselves about, in the least, ta 
 assist my work. Their hearts are not in my work. They are 
 corrupt and filthy before me. They are here to assist the devil 
 to work against my faithful people. They cast their poisonous 
 influence out of their mouths whenever they have an opportunity 
 to do so. They are as vipers in the midst of this people, going in 
 secret and striving to poison as many as they can ; thus, they 
 are traitors to me. At the test I will force them out from among 
 my faithful people, and they shall then be destroyed in the sight 
 of my people. Oh, how I despise them. Their race is about 
 run. They know who I mean. They know very well that they 
 despise work, and that they are hypocrites. They know that their 
 hearts are not in my work; that they go about in the midst of 
 these people, in secret, striving to poison the minds of as many of 
 my people against the truth as they can. They do not believe 
 the revelations which come from my mouth, because they are too 
 idle and worthless to seek the assistance of my holy spirit to guide 
 them. They are led by damned spirits, and they go about among 
 my people leading those damned spirits upon them. 
 
 6. Let my servants, the apostles, who visit my people, look 
 at themselves, and see if they are right in my sight. Let them 
 examine their own hearts, and see that all is right with them. 
 Some of them are dying away through slothfulness and indolence,, 
 and are afraid lest they should do too' much work. They give 
 way to idleness, and through it the devil is destroying them. If 
 they do not rise up and shake therflselves, and work with dili- 
 gence, I will come out upon them as a whirlwind, and cut them 
 off". I did not call them to the apostleship to give way to the 
 devil, and to become mine enemies, as some of them are now fast 
 becoming. They are going to sleep. They have forgotten their 
 calling, and are fast becoming devils' slaves ; and, before they are 
 well aware of it, the devil will destroy them, if they do not rise 
 right up. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
6lO THE MANSIONS IN HEAVEN. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE MANSIONS IN 
 HEAVEN. 
 
 No. 296. WEBER, UTAH, June yth, 1862. 
 
 1. You ARE determined to keep me going. You will not let 
 me rest unless I speak unto you every day, and when I do so, it 
 takes up a great deal of my time, for some days I have to remain 
 by your side as much as seven or eight hours at once, dictating 
 you ; and after I have dictated one revelation to you, I have to 
 go to my Father and remain awhile with him in counsel, in order 
 to obtain another revelation, before I can come unto you again. 
 By continuing this practice from day to day, it becomes very hard 
 on me, for almost all my time is spent in doing so, and I have 
 but little left to remain at home with my companion. Both my- 
 self and all the warriors of heaven have companions and mansions 
 according to our birthrights. We have pleasant homes, such as 
 mortal beings never saw, and there is everything around us that is 
 delightful. I have the most beautiful mansion in heaven, except- 
 ing my Father's. I have only one mansion, but my Father has 
 many. I only need one, because I have only one companion. 
 None of the captains of our host have more than one mansion 
 each, and in like manner all the heavenly host have each a man- 
 sion beautified according to his rank and birthright ; consequently 
 there are many mansions in heaven owned by me and my brethren. 
 
 2. Before my Father sent you to this earth on this last mis- 
 sion, you always lived with me when you were upon our earth. 
 You have lived in my mansion thousands of years. It is not your 
 duty to go on missions in the spirit worlds, as the other six angels 
 do, for their missions chiefly lie in the spirit worlds; but your 
 mission chiefly lies in this mortal world ; and oftentimes when 
 you have not been upon this earth, you have been with me at my 
 home. I know you well, and you know me well. There is not a 
 feeling of your nature but what I w r ell understand, and I know 
 how to deal with you. When I come unto you, you will know me 
 at once, for your spirit is perfectly acquainted with me, and as 
 soon as I show myself unto you, you will know me. You were 
 
CONCERNING THE TEMPLE. 6ll 
 
 with me when I sent the prophet, Joseph Smith, to the earth to 
 open the sixth seal. He was sent by your command to prepare 
 the way for you. All high priests are sent to the earth by your 
 sanction. You give me your sanction, and I send them on their 
 missions. When you are not upon this earth upon a mission, it is 
 your duty to be with me at my home, for I always have to work 
 through you whe-n I have anything to do pertaining to Adam's 
 earth ; therefore, it is your duty to be with me when you are not 
 on a mission to the earth ; and when you are upon your mission 
 upon the earth, it is my duty to be with you. We must always be 
 together either in heaven or upon the earth, because I cannot 
 do anything without you, and you cannot do anything without 
 me; cur labors lie together; 1 hold the power, and you hold 
 the authority. My power cannot be made use of to do any- 
 thing upon Adam's earth without the consent of him who holds 
 the authority over that earth; and your authority is useless with- 
 out my power to back it up ; and my power wilt not accomplish 
 anything unless I have the opportunity to make use of it. 
 Therefore, we must either work together, or nothing will be ac- 
 complished. The power and the authority must both go together, 
 and then all things will work well ; and in order for us to operate 
 together, we must both be together, and talk together, as two mor- 
 tal men talk to each other when they meet. I must be close by 
 your side almost continually. We talked to each other when we 
 were together at my home, and we must now do the same. 
 
 3. When you have a temple built. I will stay with you in it 
 most of my time ; but, as yet, I have no house built upon the 
 earth where I can stay with you ; and until a temple shall be 
 built where we can constantly meet and counsel together, we shall 
 Cither have to meet together in the open air, or in some other 
 place, such as can be obtained for that purpose. But I want to 
 have a temple built as soon as possible, so that we can have a 
 proper place to meet in. 
 
 4. I will soon clear the way for you, so that you can take 
 the faithful of my people back to the center stake of Zion, to 
 commence to build a temple in Jackson county, even the place 
 appointed, where the first, great temple must be built. In a very 
 short time you will be there ; for as soon as I have well cleansed 
 
6l2 THE GOODNESS OF GOD. 
 
 this Territory from corrupt people, and gathered the few who are 
 honest, whom I shall leave alive, into my Church, and set all 
 things in order, I shall lead them forth to the place where the first 
 temple shall be built. After I come, I shall soon have all things 
 made ready so that I can move my people out of this Territory ; 
 for this is no fit place for my faithful people. I will find them a 
 better home than this. Therefore,- my son, I shall soon move my 
 people to a goodly land, and they shall enjoy the good things of the 
 earth, for I will give unto them their inheritances, and they shall 
 enjoy them without being molested by their enemies. Great bless- 
 ings lie before them ; for I will make them the head over all 
 things. 
 
 5. And now, behold, I speak unto you concerning my Father. 
 I told you before that he has many mansions. You may wish to 
 know the reason why my Father has so many mansions, when his 
 sons have but one each. You know, my son that, neither I nor 
 any of the rest of my brechren have any offspring. We are upon 
 a celestial earth where nothing but celestial beings dwell, and we 
 have but one wife each; therefore, one mansion each is sufficient 
 for us. But my Father has many wives. I need not tell you the 
 number, for you know it yourself. Therefore, my Father needs 
 many mansions to accommodate his large family. His children are 
 better supplied than he is, in proportion to the families they have. 
 Our Father loves his sons and daughters even better than he loves 
 himself. He would put himself abou t to any extent to bless and 
 benefit them. He feels that he cannot do too much for them, 
 and they love him because he is so good to them. He shows 
 unto us an example worthy of imitation, and we will do anything 
 that he requires at our hands. We all dwell in perfect union. 
 We can hardly do enough for each other. Our Father is the 
 leading person upon our earth, and we all drink into his influence*, 
 and follow his example, and thus we know no evil when we are at 
 home with our Father. But when we come to the earth to you, 
 we meet evil spirits ; but we have all power over them, and we 
 will keep them far "away from those who are faithful to our Father. 
 We want nothing to do with hypocrites. We do not like to come 
 near them. They are not worthy of our society. Our Father 
 tells us to have nothing to do with them;, not to spend our 
 
THE FLAG OF INDEPENDENCE. 613 
 
 precious time with them ; but to leave them alone until he has 
 delivered us into your hands, and when you give unto us your 
 command, he says that we must cut them all off. He tells us to 
 strengthen the faithful now, and to save their lives, and this we 
 will do. 
 
 6. And behold, I say unto you, my son, my people have 
 made a flag of independence, even a flag of my kingdom, and I 
 am well pleased with it ; but they must not wave it until all things 
 are made ready so that I can come out of my hiding place and 
 cut off their enemies. They must not wave it until I tell you to 
 do so. It is right that it should be waved just as the power is 
 about to come, even a few hours previous to my coming. As 
 soon as it has been waved, the power should come. A flag of my 
 kingdom. is not an article to be played with. It should be waved 
 at the proper time ; therefore, I will tell you when you must wave 
 it. I have but little more to reveal unto you before I come. 
 Therefore, be patient, and get all things ready as soon as you can; 
 for lo, I come, I come, I come quickly ; even the Lord of Hosts ; 
 even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION SHOWING HOW THE SAINTS HAVE 
 BEEN PROTECTED. 
 
 No. 297. WEBER, UTAH, June 9th, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, I am the Lord of Hosts, even the Son of the 
 Eternal Father. I wish to speak unto you again. Inasmuch as 
 my army has not yet been delivered into your hands, and seeing 
 that none of my holy angels have had the privilege to set their feet 
 upon the earth, or even to slay any person, you wish to know by 
 what means your enemies are held off you. I will inform you, 
 and not only so, but I will show unto you how I have opened the 
 way for my people, and supplied their temporal needs up to the 
 present time. These were duties which I had to attend to, 
 because I had not delivered the power into your hands. The 
 power is all in my hands until I deliver it unto you; consequently, 
 
6 14 CONCERNING THE MESSAGE. 
 
 I have had to attend to all such matters ; but when I give the 
 power into your hands, you will have to attend to all such matters 
 yourself, even as I have done. 
 
 2. And now, behold, my Father speaks unto you through me : 
 "Behold, I am the Eternal Father, and I shall give my power 
 into your hands, because you need it, but I do not. I shall give 
 it into your hands as soon as I have prepared you for it, which I 
 have now done, as nearly as it is possible for me to prepare you. 
 Therefore, the next move which I shall make with you will be to 
 give the power unto you ; but, previous to doing so, I shall send 
 unto you my message, giving up to you all claims to mine army, 
 which is my power, for one thousand years, and .you will hold all 
 jurisdiction over it until your mission is ended. This message I 
 shall speedily send unto you, for I have but very little more to 
 reveal unto you before I do so. My message is a deed of my 
 power, and you must consider that when you have received it, 
 you have received my power ; for when I send my message unto 
 you, I give up all claims to mine army unto you, and you will 
 command it in my stead, with the same authority as I should 
 command it myself, were I upon the earth. I shall both sen'd 
 unto you my message and show unto you the spot of ground on 
 which we shall stand before the test is brought on, so that all 
 things will be made ready for me to come. Mine army will be in 
 your hands, and you will have the privilege to use them in the 
 first test if you need them ; but, if you do not need their power at 
 that time, it would be unwise for you to call upon them. Do not 
 call upon them when you do not need their assistance ; and when* 
 you do need it, they will be ready to assist you. They are always 
 ready to do their duty." 
 
 3. Behold, I am Jesus Christ, and I shall come unto you 
 altogether as soon as the test is over ; for mine enemies are all 
 ready and waiting for the test. They are waiting until my people 
 have shed some blood, and they say that when they see this, they 
 will be ready to come upon my people. The man that stands at 
 the head of the old Church says that as soon as my people have 
 shed blood, he will give his consent, with all his heart, to all who 
 are in the old Church to come up against my people to put them 
 to death. This is the conclusion which he has come to ; this is the 
 
HOW THE ENEMIES HAVE BEEN RESTRAINED. 615 
 
 decided point that he has come to, and it is the point to which I 
 intended to bring him ; and as soon as he has given his consent 
 to those who are anxious to come up against my people, and have 
 gathered themselves together, and just made a start to come this 
 way, I will cut off that man and all his seed ; not a vestige of him 
 shall be left ; and I will also cut off his blood-hounds and one- 
 half of the inhabitants of the Territory at the same time. And 
 now, my son, I have made known unto you his intentions ; there- 
 fore, you will know how to prepare for him. We shall all he 
 under your command when he gives his consent to his blood- 
 hounds. When he wields the power of the devil, you shall wield 
 my power. You shall meet him at the right place. 
 
 4. And now, behold, I say unto you, my son, you wish to 
 know how I have held mine enemies back from my people. I 
 have told you before that I have had a large army stationed upon 
 this spot of ground to protect you and these people whom I have 
 gathered here. One of the captains of our host has been stationed 
 here with his army, and he received a commandment from both 
 me and my Father to take charge of the old Church, and it has 
 been his duty to watch them in all their movements, and when 
 they, being assisted by the damned spirits, have fixed a plan to 
 come up against my people, or to waste them away, that captain 
 has sent a number of holy angels to drive all the devils away from 
 the men who set the plan, and they have thereby been smitten with 
 weakness, until they have become utterly powerless. That captain 
 has always a number of his angels going about, watching the 
 movements of those men of the old Church ; and if they are likely 
 to execute a plan which would injure my people, they make their 
 report to the captain, and he sends a sufficient number of angels 
 to drive the devils all away, and thus break up all their plans, and 
 smite them with weakness, and change their minds, and thus their 
 plans are broken up for a time ; but the devils soon gather around 
 them again, and start them to lay another plan; but I break up all 
 their plans in the way I have described unto you. Thus the devil 
 is doing through them, and I am undoing, so that he can make no 
 headway until I permit him ; but at the right time, I will let them 
 unite to die, for in death they should be united. When mine 
 enemies, even the heads of the old Church, counsel their people 
 
6l6 HOW THE ENEMIES HAVE BEEN RESTRAINED. 
 
 not to trade with my people, neither to grind their wheat for them, 
 I send my holy angels unto those people who have been counseled, 
 and they drive the devils away from them, and give unto them an- 
 other feeling, and then they want to trade with my people. They 
 follow the spirit that works upon them ; and as my spirit has the 
 most powerful influence, it drives the devils away from the people 
 unto whom they are sent. In this manner I continue to open the 
 way for my people to obtain that which is necessary for them ; but 
 I shall block up my people's way just before I come to deliver 
 them they will have used up all their flour before I come. I can 
 bring my people unto this point at any time in the course of two 
 or three days; for I can suffer the devil to shut up all the mills 
 against rny people, whenever I have a mind to do so. My peo- 
 ple need not think that the test is far off, for it is not it is right 
 at their door. I am just about to give up to my servant, the 
 prc phat. 
 
 Let my people humble themselves greatly before me, that it may 
 be well with them when I come ; for lo, I come quickly. I am 
 the Lord of Hosts ; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE PERFECTION OF 
 
 THE GODS, AND THE PERFECTION OF 
 
 HOLY ANGELS. 
 
 No. 298. WKDFR, UTAH, June loth, 1862. 
 
 i. LISTEN unto my words which are quick and powerful, 
 sharper than a two-edged sword ; for I am about to speak unto 
 you concerning the leading authorities of heaven. There are some 
 things which you still need to know, that you do .not now know. 
 It is said in the New Testament concerning my coming: "But of 
 that day and hour knoweth no man, no, not the angels of heaven, 
 but my Father only." You may wish to know how this can be, 
 seeing that it is also said that holy angels have arrived at a fulness 
 of knowledge. If the angels of heaven have received a fulness 
 
THE PERFECTION OF HOLY ANGELS. 617 
 
 of knowledge, in what sense have they received a fulness? They 
 have received that fulness which belongs to holy angels in their 
 third, or celestial estate ; but holy angels have not arrived at the 
 fulness of the Gods. Their fulness is to see as they are seen, and 
 to behold the presence of their Father, and mothers, and to under- 
 stand the nature of everything which is below them, even the 
 nature of all kinds of material. They have the power over all evil, 
 because Jhey dwell upon an earth where no evil exists ; where no 
 darkness exists ; but where all is light ; where there is no deception, 
 nor misrule ; but all things are seen, and understood by holy angels 
 as they are seen, and they cannot be deceived by ^devils, for they 
 have power over them, and over the principle of evil by which they 
 are actuated. The perfection of angels is not the perfection of 
 Gods. There are different degrees of perfection connected with 
 Gods and angels. It is the duty of angels to fight, and to sustain 
 the law which is administered by their Father to a mortal world. 
 Their Father is the lawgiver, and they sustain the law after he has 
 given it ; he holds all authority, and they hold all power, it being 
 invested in them ; but they cannot operate without the consent of 
 their Father who holds the authority. Therefore, the authority is 
 invested in a God, but the power is invested in his angels. The 
 perfection of a God is to hold the authority ; but the perfection 
 of holy angels is to hold the power. They cannot work without 
 authority ; therefore, they have to look up to a person who is of a 
 higher rank than themselves to give unto them the privilege to act, 
 before they can do so. Angels cannot look to themselves for 
 authority, for they only possess the power. No one person can 
 possess both power and authority. A person whose birthright en- 
 titles him to be a commander, must confine himself to his own 
 duty, and those commanded by him must be the executors. The 
 commander possesses the authority, but his army possesses the 
 power. Thus you see, my son, that there is a difference between 
 the person who holds the authority, and the army which possesses 
 the power. The authority may be invested in one person, but the 
 power may be invested in millions ; for the power of an army con- 
 sists in its number, union, and good training. Therefore, the 
 perfection of an angel is one thing, but the perfection of a God is 
 another thing. 
 
6l8 THE REDEEMING OF WORLDS. 
 
 2. Behold, I am Jesus Christ, even the- first captain over all 
 the heavenly host ; but I do not know my Father's intentions only 
 as he reveals them unto me. He does not tell me all his inten- 
 tions at once ; but he reveals his mind and will unto me one thing 
 at a time ; and as he reveals unto me, I reveal unto you ; he gives 
 unto me revelations, and then I give them unto you. My Father 
 has redeemed a world, and exalted it from mortality to immor- 
 tality, but I have not. My Father knows all about redeeming a 
 world, for he has passed through that experience millions of years 
 ago; he is far in advance of me. I have to look unto him for 
 counsel and instruction, and I am wholly guided by him. He 
 has books which it is unlawful for me to open and look into. I 
 shall not know all about the redeeming of a world until I have 
 redeemed one ; for it is unlawful for my Father to reveal that 
 knowledge unto me, only as I progress in the work of redemption. 
 All Gods understand the process of redeeming worlds, because 
 they have passed through it, and consequently they are entitled 
 to the privilege of looking into all those books which give a full 
 account of the process by which all worlds are redeemed. The 
 redeeming of a world is the greatest work that the Gods are ever 
 engaged in ; it is the most difficult work that they have to do. No 
 holy angel, who has not redeemed a world, has the privilege to 
 open those books which give an account of the process of redeem- 
 ing worlds. That knowledge cannot be imparted unto them until 
 they have gained it by experience; but after they have once 
 redeemed a world, they are entitled to the privilege of opening the 
 books, and reading them from time to time, in order to refresh their 
 memories of what they have once passed through. Therefore, 
 there are different degrees of knowledge and perfection. There- 
 fore, my son, I have shown unto you my Father and his holy 
 angels as they are, and I have also laid open to you their rights 
 and privileges. Therefore, you can now perceive that neither I 
 nor any of the holy angels know either the day or the hour when 
 my Father will send us all unto you ; but I shall continue to bring 
 revelations as my Father gives them unto me, until I have brought 
 the last one unto you, and then he will send all his army unto you. 
 I can tell you this much. I have almost done bringing revela- 
 tions unto you, for my Father has told me so. He says that I 
 
CONCERNING THE FIRST FOUR GENERALS. 619 
 
 have about finished that work ; that he is about to send unto you 
 his message ; and that he will then have done revealing unto you 
 in this manner. 
 
 3. You wish to know the exact order in which the first four 
 generals in heaven stand. I will reveal it unto you. I am the 
 first general, and I ride a white horse, as I have told you before. 
 The next general to me by birthright rides a red horse. He it is 
 that has had his army guarding you up to this time, and that 
 has taken charge of the old Church. I could not bring mine 
 army to guard you myself, because I am a swift messenger, and 
 a revelator from my Father to you, and this will be my employ- 
 ment until I have brought the last revelation unto you, and then I 
 shall come to you myself. Inasmuch as I have been otherwise 
 engaged, and could not guard you myself, I sent the next general* 
 unto me with his army to act for me, even to guard you, and to 
 take charge of the old Church, until I shall be liberated. The 
 third general rides a black horse. I sent him unto you to give 
 unto my people a little of his history, and it was interesting unto 
 them. He only gave unto them a small portion of his history ; 
 therefore, I may send him again to give a little more of it. I will 
 not, however, positively promise this, unless my servant Joseph 
 wishes him to come again. If he wishes to hear from him again, 
 I will send him, and he shall do what my servant, the prophet, 
 wishes him to do. He has not been stationed here ; none other of 
 the generals have been stationed here except the one that rides the 
 red horse. The person that rides the pale horse is the fourth 
 captain, or general, of the heavenly host, and he carries the law 
 with him to regulate all the army. The generals look unto him 
 for the law to regulate them in their movements, for they are 
 always governed by law. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. Let this suffice for the present, 
 and I will shortly speak unto you again. I am Jesus Christ. 
 Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
620 THE DUTY OF THE LORD. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE DUTY OF THE 
 LORD, AND ALSO CONCERNING THE TEMPLE, 
 AND THE MESSAGE. 
 
 No. 299. WEBER, UTAH, June nth, 1862. 
 
 i. WHAT can I say unto you this morning to comfort you? 
 I am in a hurry to speak unto you to-day ; but you look for me 
 to speak unto you every day ; and it is very tedious for me to do 
 so. I have spoken unto you every day, with a very few excep- 
 tions, for some time, and it appears that you continue to look for 
 it. You should consider that I have other things to attend to 
 *to besides talking to you. I have the entire army of heaven to 
 attend to. The burden of arranging the army rests on me. When 
 I can come unto you altogether, to be entirely under your con- 
 trol, it will be a great relief unto me, for I shall not have to travel 
 as much as I have had to do while I have been raising you up. 
 My chief work will then be to remain with you, and cut off your 
 enemies. My duty will be more stationary then, and all my cap- 
 tains will continue to visit me for instruction. I shall appoint 
 unto them their fields of labor. I shall be controlled by you, and 
 they will be controlled by me; this is the order in which we must 
 work together. I shall always be with you, and I shall see what 
 you stand in need of from day to day, even continually, with the 
 exception of a few minutes, or a few hours, as the case may be, 
 when I may take a trip to my Father to counsel with him upon 
 some important matters concerning the law which I shall give 
 unto you ; for my Father only gives unto me the law a little at a 
 time ; and, on this account. I shall have to go up to him time 
 after time to bring the law unto you by degrees. If my Father 
 would give unto me the entire law at once, then I should not 
 have to continue to go up to him time after time to bring it unto 
 you a little at a time, as I shall have to do ; this is the way that 
 my Father works. He gives unto me a little at once, and as he 
 gives it unto me, I shall give it unto you. Therefore, my son, I 
 shall be absent from you, betimes, for a few minutes, or a few 
 hours, as the case may be. In order for me to be with you con- 
 
CONCERNING THE MESSAGE. 62! 
 
 tinuaily, I shall need a temple built, so that I can be with you. 
 In that temple the laws will be kept. When the laws have been 
 fully given, there will be one room in that temple set apart ex- 
 pressly for the law to be deposited in. It will be set apart for 
 you and me to meet in to read the law, and to counsel together 
 upon all important matters. 
 
 2. You will take the reins of government into your hands as 
 soon as my Father has sent unto you his message. His message 
 will come unto you first, and then I shall show unto you the place 
 where we must both stand. I shall show unto you the place as 
 soon as you have received my Father's message ; for his message 
 is one of the last things which will be given unto you. It is a 
 giving up unto you. 
 
 3. As soon as I have shown unto you the place where we will 
 stand, I shall bring on the test, and as soon as the test is over, I 
 shall give unto you your robe and rod. You will see your way 
 clear when you have received my Father's message. You will 
 know what to look for the next. These things will all come on in 
 their own order, without any confusion. I may ask you if you 
 are now ready to receive my Father's message. You may turn 
 round on me, and ask me if I am ready to bring it unto you, and 
 after I have brought it unto you, whether I am fully ready to sus- 
 tain it. Your answer is to me that you are ready to receive it as 
 soon as I am ready to sustain it. I will promise you that I will 
 sustain it as soon as I have brought it. You may wish to know 
 what it will be like when it comes. Will it be long, or short? I 
 will answer you. It will be quite lengthy for a President's mes- 
 sage. My Father is a King, or President, over a celestial world, 
 and when he has to give up his army to another president over 
 another world, he has to send his message to that president unto 
 whom he intends to send his army ; this is the order by which all 
 Gods work with other powers that are dependent upon them for 
 assistance. 
 
 4. A president's message, wherein he gives up all his claim to 
 his army to another president, signifies that he has given up all 
 claim to his army until it is given back to him again. He has 
 deeded them to another president whom they they must serve ; 
 for it is the duty of the army to do so until it has filled the con- 
 
622 THE WORKS OF SATAN. 
 
 tract. You will understand our duty, as the warriors of heaven, 
 to you when you have received our Father's message. 
 
 5. What more can I say unto -you at this time? I have not a 
 great deal to reveal unto you to-day, because I think that it is not 
 necessary to reveal unto you so much every day. It is too painful 
 for you to write it, as well as being tedious unto me to remain so 
 long by your side. Let this suffice for the present, and I will 
 speak unto you again shortly. I am the Bright and Morning 
 Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE WORKS OF SATAN, 
 AND ALSO CONCERNING THE SEPARA- 
 TION OF THE PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 300. WEBER, UTAH, June i2th, 1862. 
 
 i. INASMUCH as my Father is about to deliver both me and 
 all his army into your hands, you wish to know how you are to 
 make use of us, or, in other words, the principle by which you 
 shall work with us ; for you think that it will not do for you to go 
 to work with us in an uncertain manner. You think that there 
 must be some lawful way for us to work, in order that we may 
 always act justly and righteously in every move that we may 
 make ; for we must go to war in righteousness, and not in un- 
 righteousness ; for devils do that, and we must not do as devils 
 do, or else we would be no better than what they are. They 
 work in unrighteousness, but we must work in righteousness, and 
 in a lawful manner. Devils do everything unlawfully, and the 
 consequence of an unlawful course being pursued by them has 
 filled the world with darkness, misrule and wickedness of every 
 name and nature. They have turned all things upside down, and 
 destroyed the true sense of everything that exists in the world ; 
 this is the result of the labors and actions of a lawless race of peo- 
 ple. They brought death and misery upon themselves and upon 
 the law-abiding sons and daughters of Adam. Nothing but death 
 
CONCERNING THE WORKS OF SATAN. 623 
 
 and destruction follow their course. They have thrown every- 
 thing out of order, turned things wrong side up, and destroyed 
 the true sense of everything, so that there is not anything that can 
 be seen aright. When things are out of order, and in confusion, 
 and a person looks at them who is perfectly right, he sees them as 
 they are all wrong. A person must be right himself before he 
 can see the things which are wrong as they are. It takes a perfect 
 rule to try an imperfect rule by, and a true coin to try counterfeit 
 dollars which, being of ah equal size, would both be of similar 
 weights . 
 
 2. Darkness would not pass a sentence upon itself, but it 
 would justify itself. How can a thing which is wrong be tried by 
 another which is wrong? it is impossible. That which is right 
 must try that which is wrong. One thing that is wrong, and an- 
 other thing that is right, will not both agree, for they are entirely 
 opposite to each other in their nature. How then is it possible 
 for this world to be right when the devil has had the control of it 
 for so many thousands of years. He is in opposition to all Just 
 and righteous laws. He will not endure any law which proceeds 
 from heaven, if he can help it. He has broken every law which 
 has proceeded from the first council of Gods, and he has dis- 
 seminated his own lawless principles in the world, and by them 
 he has destroyed all mankind. Death is brought upon a people 
 through a violation of law. 
 
 3. The nature of everything that exists in the world has to be 
 changed; for all things in the world are now wrong, and it is my 
 duty to put them all right. All mortal beings should know that 
 they do not know anything as they ought to know it. I call 
 upon Abraham's seed to lay down all their worldly wisdom which 
 they have received from the devil ; this 1 require of all those who 
 are heirs to eternal life, for I will not accept of those , who con- 
 tinue to hold to their worldly wisdom ; as long as they do that, 
 they hold to the devil, for they know nothing only what he has 
 told them, except they have been taught by my holy angels. I 
 will not accept of a person who will not give up the devil ; and in 
 giving up the devil, he will have to give up all that the devil has 
 taught him, and the devil has taught him all that he has learned 
 in the world, unless he has been enlightened by my spirit; and 
 
624 CONCERNING THE WORKS OF SATAN. 
 
 whatsoever a person knows, which he has learned in the world, 
 that my spirit has not taught him, is of the devil, and is rejected 
 by me ; for the devil has deceived mankind, and cast his bane- 
 ful influence everywhere, and any mortal being who is not en- 
 lightened cannot see anything in the world aright. How can a 
 person who never saw anything else but darkness know what light 
 is? And how can a person who never, in mortality, knew any- 
 thing else but wrong, know what right is? It is impossible for 
 them to know what right is unless they are taught right and right- 
 eous principles by a personage who moves in eternal light ; who 
 can see all things as they are ; who does not move in darkness, but 
 sees all things in a true light ; who does not look at the deceitful 
 garb which is wrapped around all things ; but who penetrates the 
 outer covering, or the devil's garb, and unfolds all things so that 
 they can be seen. It is my duty to take the false garb off of 
 everything which the devil has placed it upon. 
 
 4. When mortal beings have looked at anything, they have 
 only seen the outside, even the devil's garb, and consequently 
 mortal beings have seen nothing but the outside shell, which is 
 the devil's shell. The devil has a covering for everything, and 
 no person can see things as they are unless the false covering is 
 taken off, and it cannot be taken off only by me, under the ful- 
 ness of the holy priesthood. When I begin, I can throw off this 
 garb, so that all things can be seen aright. The devil puts it oh, 
 but I take it off again. Let my people be aware of his false garb, 
 and not be caught in a mantle. Let them forsake the devil, and 
 cling to me, and, in due time, I will show unto my people all 
 things as they are. I want my people to give themselves entirely 
 into my hands, and I will lead them into all truth. They now 
 know what I require at their hands. I will not accept of people 
 who will not fully give up to me ; this they will have to do to be 
 saved by me. I cannot work with a people who will not place 
 themselves in my hands; my people know very well that it is 
 their duty to do so. They must know that I cannot work with 
 them if they will not give up to me. I require at their hands only 
 what is right. . Let them do their own duty, and all will be well 
 with them. I am the Lord. 
 
 5. And now, my son, you wish to know how you are to pro- 
 
CONCERNING THE SEPARATION. 625 
 
 ceed with us after our Father has delivered us into your hands. 
 You wish to know who you are to cut off. I will tell you. When 
 you lead my people out of this place, you shall cut off every per- 
 son who may rise up against you with the intention of injuring 
 either you or any of the rest of my faithful people who are with 
 you ; but you must not cut off any person who does not cross 
 your path, or retard your progress. You shall go straightforward 
 when you have started to the place which I shall send you to ; 
 and everyone who opposes you, I will cut off, as you bid me 
 to do. And when you have arrived at the place which I have 
 appointed, namely, at the head of the old Church, you shall send 
 my servants out to preach to those whom I shall leave alive in the 
 Territory, and my servants shall gather as many of the people 
 as will hear them up to the head of the old Church to be tried, 
 and Jo pass through the strait gate, if they are worthy. As 
 many of them as are worthy shall pass through; but all those 
 who oppose my servants, and seek their lives, I shall cut off. My 
 angels will go before my servants when they travel through this 
 Territory to gather the pure of my people who have been deceived 
 by the devil ; my angels will clear the way for them ; but those 
 who refuse to gather up to the head of the Church, according to 
 the command of my servants, I shall cut off, and in this manner 
 I shall purify my Church from rebellious and wicked characters. 
 You shall cut off all those who seek to oppose you in your onward 
 course ; and you shall cut off all those who refuse to gather up to 
 to be Jried ; this will take away all the rebellious. You will now 
 see your way clear. I will remove out of your way all those whom 
 you cannot use. You shall rule this world to your satisfaction. 
 
 I need not say unto you any more unto you at present. Let 
 this suffice for this time, and I will soon speak unto you again. I 
 am the Stone and Shepherd of Israel, and the Bright and morn- 
 ing Star; even Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
626 THE TWO PRISONERS. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE TWO PRISONERS. 
 
 No. 301. WEBER, UTAH, June i3th, 1862. 
 
 i. I WISH to speak unto you concerning the two prisoners. I 
 had an object in view in bringing those prisoners here and retain- 
 ing them until this time. I told my people that I could bring a 
 mob up against them when I was ready for a mob to come ; and 
 I was ready for them to do what they have done. My words will 
 not fall to the ground unfulfilled. The object I had in view in 
 retaining those prisoners, was to bring up mine enemies to this 
 place, in order to fulfil my words ; therefore, I have accomplished 
 what I wished to do through those prisoners. I can dispense with 
 them now. I can divide this camp without them. I have almost 
 finished now. If you let them out, I will cut them off my- 
 self. Do as I tell you and all will be right. My Father has 
 already given unto me his message, and I will give it unto you 
 speedily. I shall be fully prepared for them by the time they are 
 ready to make another move. This is a move to divide this camp, 
 and it is already about divided. This move was necessary to be 
 made in order to divide the camp ; and when that is done, I have 
 no more use for mine enemies. They do just what I want them 
 to do, and they cannot do anything else. I am compelled to take 
 a course to divide this camp ; and while I purge out the hypocrites, 
 the process is severe on the faithful. Nothing but a severe course 
 being taken will purge out the hypocrites ; therefore, while* I am 
 doing this, you must be reconciled to it. Rise up like a man, and 
 do not let your spirit droop. The storm will soon be over. My 
 turn will soon come, so be of good courage. You may let out 
 those prisoners, for I do not want them any longer. I will cut 
 them off myself when I come. ' I am now about to give unto you 
 my Father's message, as I told you before, and then you shall 
 gather together all the faithful ; and if there should still be any 
 hypocrites remaining, who have not left with mine enemies, you 
 shall seperate them from the faithful, and slay them, as I have com- 
 manded you. You will see what you have to trust to, as soon as 
 I have stayed the course of mine enemies this time. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
INSTRUCTION. ' 627 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PROPHET. 
 
 No. 302. WEBER, UTAH, June i3th, 1862. 
 
 1. BEHOLD, I am Jesus Christ, and I come near unto you. I 
 know your condition. I wish to try this people before I deliver 
 them. I will put a stop to the present course in a short time. The 
 enemies shall go so far, and then I will stop them they have 
 almost gone far enough I will stop them at the right time. I 
 know you feel discouraged, and feel as though I had forsaken you 
 and this people; but I have not, and that you shall soon see. Be 
 still, and faint not. They have commenced the work, but I will 
 finish it. As soon as this scrimmage is over, I will give unto you 
 my Fathers message, and then I will sweep them off. You need 
 not fear ; I will stop them at the right time. The hypocrites that 
 are in the midst of this people will go over to the other side. As 
 soon as they have drawn from among this people all the hypocrites, 
 then I will put a stop to their present course. I have suffered 
 them to come and do what they have done, in order that they may 
 draw out all the hypocrites. None will leave me and go over to 
 the other side but those people who are false before me who 
 have not my spirit to strengthen them. The true and faithful will 
 stand firm ; but the false-hearted will go. Those that stand faith- 
 ful and maintain their ground through this, I will deliver. You 
 do not think that I should suffer this .to take place; but I have 
 suffered it for a wise purpose. This is a trying day to some. 
 The clouds all around appear dark to my people; but a bright 
 cloud will soon make its appearance. 
 
 2. . You begin to think that I am betraying your confidence, 
 because you are in trouble at this time, but you will find me a 
 friend when I am needed, even when this scrimmage is over. Oh, 
 how I do wish that I was let loose, I would make a slaughter 
 among them. You consider it hard that I should let my enemies 
 loose upon you before I have given unto you the power of your 
 office. I have told you before that I have only done this to draw 
 out the unfaithful from among the faithful.. When I have done 
 this, I will stop them ; and until I have done this, I shall let them 
 
628 A COMMUNICATION. 
 
 continue to fire. Both you and the faithful must depend on me, 
 and you will be right. You must not give up to them, but stand 
 them out, and I will sustain you. You must take notice of how 
 many of these people go over to the other side. All such you 
 must set down as hypocrites ; these I will not deliver. 
 
 I need not say any more unto you at this time. Let this suffice 
 for the present. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. Amen and 
 Amen. 
 
 A COMMUNICATION FROM THE .SECOND CAPTAIN 
 OF THE LORD'S HOST. 
 
 No. 303. WEBER, UTAH, June i3th, 1862. 
 
 1. ACCORDING to the request of my Father and my brother, 
 Jesus Christ, I speak unto you in haste. I received my appoint- 
 ment from my Father and my brother, Jesus Christ, to guard 
 both you and my people, and I will do it. I know what your 
 enemies are doing at this time. I will control them aright. I 
 know all about them. I have suffered them to gather themselves 
 together as on the present occasion. 
 
 2. My Father has not, as yet, sent his message unto you; 
 and, until he has done so, I am not allowed the privilege of cut- 
 ting your enemies off; but I will break them up, and turn them 
 another way. They shall have no power neither over you nor any 
 of the rest of my faithful people. I know what your enemies 
 want. They are tco impatient. They must wait a little longer. 
 You will speedily receive my Father's message, and then it will 
 liberate me. I do' not like to try your feelings by suffering a mob 
 to come in sight ; but I am compelled to do what I am doing at 
 this time. I, the Second Captain of the Lord's host, have suffered 
 them to come thus far according to my Father's request, and I 
 will turn them the right way fear not. I wish to try my people 
 before I deliver them. I had an object in view for doing this ; 
 it will have the desired effect. I will make it work right. Let 
 my people be still and composed, and I will take care of them. 
 
CONCERNING THE ENEMIES. 629 
 
 Stand to your post like a man, and do not give up any person to 
 them ; bur watch them. They are as nothing in my hands. I 
 can turn them any way that I desire to. 
 
 I now give unto you no more. I am the Second Captain of the 
 Lord's host. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 REVELATION CONCERNING THE ENEMIES, AND 
 
 THE COURSE THAT THE LORD WILL 
 
 PURSUE WITH HIS PEOPLE. 
 
 No. 304. WEBER, UTAH, June i5th, 1862. 
 
 1. I WISH to speak unto you this morning to encourage you. 
 I know that you have none to whom you can look for strength but 
 me. It is my duty to strengthen you ; for I can administer unto 
 you all the strength which you need. I heard the prayer that you 
 offered up this morning, and I will answer every word of it ; for I 
 was by your side when you offered it up, and dictated you while 
 you spoke. I wished you to pray after that manner so that I 
 could answer your prayer. 
 
 2. I will confuse those men who are shooting 'at my people, 
 either with cannons or muskets. I will blind their eyes, so that 
 they will not be able to shoot to the mark. Mine angels shall be 
 the busiest persons in the war. Oh, how they shall confuse those 
 men this day. This is the third day of the war ; it is my day, 
 (Sunday). I have told you to a certain extent how I shall act 
 with mine enemies to-day. I need not say any * more unto you 
 on that head at this time, but I wish you to know that I am by 
 your side, and that I shall not leave you. Everything is about 
 ready, and the time is come when I shall have to come and show 
 myself plainly unto you. 
 
 3. My faithful people have nearly spent their physical strength, 
 and used up their ammunition, and when they have done so, and 
 are not able to defend themselves against their enemies any longer, 
 they will have done their own part, and will be pronounced faithful 
 before me, having done their duty. Until my people have come 
 
630 CONCERNING THE DELIVERANCE. 
 
 to this point, I cannot lawfully come to their release. A people 
 must spend their own strength and means before they have a law- 
 ful claim on me for assistance, and when they have done so, I am 
 compelled by law. to come and assist them. If I should fail to do 
 so at that time, I should break the law, and that a celestial mes- 
 senger cannot do, if he could, he would be a sinner, and no sinner 
 can exist in heaven. 
 
 . 4. I have now shown unto you, my son, my people's duty in 
 the test, and also my duty unto them. You may judge by what I 
 have told you how near my coming is. When you see the am- 
 munition of my people used up, and they have no means left to 
 defend themselves, and mine enemies begin to make headway and 
 force themselves into this camp, you may know that the time of 
 my coming has arrived. You may judge by this how near my com- 
 ing is. I may turn them another way, and I may not. I do not 
 want to tell you any nearer at this time what turn I shall take with 
 them, but it sufficeth me to say, that I shall make such a turn with 
 them as will bring the deliverance of my faithful people, even to 
 their satisfaction, with shouts of joy and praise to my name. My 
 people will soon find me their never-failing friend ; but they can- 
 not prove my faithfulness and fidelity to them in a test until I have 
 first proved theirs to me. 
 
 5. I have not shown myself unto you in a plain, visible and 
 satisfactory manner up to this time ; but I cannot hide my face 
 from you many more hours. I shall have to unveil myself to you 
 and this people in the course of a few hours, if I do not turn mine 
 enemies another way ; but I will not satisfy you at this time; what 
 I shall do you will soon know. Should I turn mine enemies an- 
 other way, it would delay my coming a little longer, and it would 
 give you a little more time to properly arrange your business with 
 my people. I know that you are crowded at this time, for your 
 enemies are upon you, and you do not know what to do with 
 them. If I were to turn them another way, and hold them for a 
 short time, you think it would be better for you, as you would have 
 time to make all necessary arrangements, so that there would be 
 no confusion at the time of the deliverance of the people ; but I 
 will not promise at this time that I will do this ; neither will I 
 promise you that I will bring on the test forthwith. You will 
 
CONCERNING THE DELIVERANCE. 631 
 
 very soon see what I shall do. Watch, for it will come right 
 which ever way it comes. I am either ready to bring on the test, 
 or rather the deliverance of this people, right now, or I am ready 
 to turn mine enemies another way, and delay it a little longer. 
 Should I turn them another way, I should permit them to gather 
 together. again, and make an attempt to come up against my peo- 
 a second time, and then I should cut them all off as soon as they 
 had started. This I should do if I prolong the deliverance of this 
 people ; but as I have said before, I shall not tell you at this time 
 what course I shall take. Should I conclude to bring the deliver- 
 ance of my people right on when mine enemies begin to enter this 
 Fort, I should paralyze them all ; I should hold them so fast by 
 mine holy angels that they could neither move limb nor joint. I 
 could send one thousand angels to one thousand mortal men, one 
 angel to one man, and those angels would hold the men so that 
 they could not move. One angel is stronger than four mortal 
 men ; he can do more than half a dozen men ; he can cut off half 
 a dozen men in less than two minutes. Mortal men are not to be 
 compared to holy angels for power. 
 
 6. Behold, I am Jesus Christ, and I could cut off that mob, 
 which they call one thousand men, myself. But they lie; there 
 is not one thousand of them, nor seven hundred either. I could 
 tell how many there are of them if it was necessary, but it is 
 not. But be they many, or few, I could, with all their boasting, 
 go from one to another and slay them all with my own hands in 
 less than fifteen minutes. I could go forth alone, and with my 
 own hands I could cut off all your enemies as fast as they attemped 
 to approach you. I can assure you that you have nothing to fear. 
 I am true to you, and that you shall see when I have brought 
 things to that point where I can lawfully come and fight your 
 battles. Oh, my son, you have nothing to fear while y-ou have 
 such a warrior as I am by your side, and I shall always be by 
 your side from this day out, with the exception of a few hours, 
 occasionally, when I may be visiting my Father to obtain informa- 
 tion upon some matters connected with our mission. Don't be 
 discouraged ; I will stop them all directly, or I will cause them to 
 cease firing at this point. I will make all things work right. I 
 can assure you that I will put a stop to their present course 
 
632 CONCERNING THE DELIVERANCE. 
 
 directly. They will do their best while I permit them ; but if I do 
 not see fit to turn them another way before I destroy them, I will 
 come to the deliverance of my people like a thunderbolt. You 
 will know presently what conclusion I have come to. Should I 
 come to the deliverance of my people before I send mine enemies 
 away, the first thing that I should do would be to paralyze all 
 mine enemies, and then I should come to you, and call you by 
 name. I shall call you by name whenever I come, and when- 
 ever I call you, you need not be afraid to come to me. Should 
 I do such a thing to-day, all the guns would soon be still, 
 nothing would move, for all mine enemies would be paralyzed, 
 and soon after that, would all be dead. Therefore, my son, if 
 I come now, you know how I shall come; but if I do not 
 come now, I shall have more time to arrange matters, and my 
 coming would differ in some respects from what it would be if I 
 should come now ; for the circumstances in which I am placed 
 now, are very different from what they may be in the course of a 
 few days. If I was to visit you now, I should be cramped to 
 make all things agree with the former revelations which I have 
 given unto you, showing how I intend to come ; but if I have 
 sufficient time, I can make all my statements concerning the 
 deliverance of this people agree. 
 
 I need not say any more to you at this time. Look out for me ; 
 for lo, I come unto you quickly. I am Jesus Christ. Even so. 
 Amen and Amen. 
 
A PROPHECY. 633 
 
 A PROPHECY DELIVERED BY THE PROPHET, 
 
 JOSEPH MORRIS, AT A MEETING 
 
 OF THE SAINTS. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, March gth, 1862. 
 
 i. BEHOLD, verily, verily, verily, thus saith the Lord of Hosts 
 unto the people who compose this Camp : I, the Lord, am coming 
 unto you speedily. Yea, I say unto you, I will in a lew days come 
 and deliver you. You know not how near my coming is; if you 
 did, you would fall down upon your faces in humility before me. 
 I have seen your temptations, and, time after time, I have sent my 
 holy angels to deliver you from them. I will deliver many of my 
 people who have been tempted; for many of them are honest 
 before me. Because of their honesty, I have delivered them out 
 of the hands of the destroyer, and when I come, they shall behold 
 my face, and see my glory ; but some of my people will fall by the 
 shaft of death. My holy angels shall abunandtly strengthen the 
 faithful of my people; and I will speedily lead them out of this 
 place, for I am well pleased with them. Through the integrity of 
 their hearts I will deliver them and .make them rulers in my king- 
 dom, and they shall be the first to receive an inheritance. I will 
 preserve their lives, and with a mighty hand, and with an out- 
 stretched arm, I will go before them and clear their way, and they 
 shall be the pioneers to the Land of Promise. But a few years 
 will pass away before they will commence their journey across the 
 plains, at the head of ten thousand saints. Yea, verily, verily, thus 
 saith the Lord : I will go before them, and they shall behold the 
 faces of my holy angels ; they shall be surrounded by a halo of 
 celestial light ; they shall cross both lakes and rivers as though they 
 were walking on dry ground, and no power shall stand before them. 
 And I will bless the faithful of my people with long life, and give 
 unto them their inheritances in the Promised Land ; they shall 
 inherit the good things of the earth, for I will bless them, their seed, 
 and their seed's seed, even from generation to generation. I, the 
 Lord of Hosts, have spoken it. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
634 INTERPRETATION OF A TONGUE. 
 
 A TONGUE GIVEN THROUGH THE PROPHET, 
 
 JOSEPH MORRIS, IN FELLOWSHIP 
 
 MEETING. 
 
 INTERPRETATION BY SISTER MARGARET. COOK. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, March 9th, 1862. 
 
 1. VERILY, verily, verily, thus saith the spirit of the Lord unto 
 you, oh ye, my people : Prepare yourselves for the great events 
 about to take place. Oh, that your eyes were open to see things 
 as they will shortly transpire, for they will be such as it will be 
 hard for human beings to behold ; therefore, prepare yourselves for 
 that which you will shortly witness, for it will be hard for mortality 
 to behold that which is about to be revealed. Let the faithful of 
 my people prepare themselves as far as mortality can be prepared, 
 for I, the Lord, will reveal all you will be able to bear ; I will 
 show you all you will be able to see. 
 
 2. Oh, ye saints, when I am at home by my own fireside, I 
 think of you. When I reflect on the condition of this people, oh 
 how I mourn ! How I mourn for the unfaithful, not for the 
 faithful. 
 
 3. For thus saith the Lord unto you who are faithful among 
 my people : I will be with you, and I will give mine angels charge 
 concerning you. As I" live, saith the Lord of Hosts, not a hair of 
 your heads shall be injured, and ye shall be guarded from the 
 power and grasp of the wicked one. I will be strength to you in 
 your weakness, and a light to you in your darkest hours. I will 
 be round about you as a wall of fire. Oh, lift up your heads, ye 
 saints of God, for verily, verily, thus saith the Lord, your deliver- 
 ance is at hand. 
 
 4. Oh, prepare, prepare yourselves for that event. Put away 
 from you all your follies and light-mindedness, for you will need 
 great humility ; and when people are light-minded, the spirit of 
 humility is not there. Therefore, I say unto you again and again, 
 put from you your light-mindedness, your light speeches, and your 
 unprofitable conversation, and cleave unto me with all your heart, 
 soul and strength. 
 
INTERPRETATION OF A TONGUE. 635 
 
 5. Love your neighbor as yourself. Share with your brethren 
 and sisters the comforts of life, if you have them and they have 
 not, and I, the Lord, will be with you both by night and by day. 
 I will lead you forth with a high hand and an outstretched arm. I 
 will go before you, and I will be with you as I was with my peo- 
 ple anciently, and the enemy shall have no power over you. 
 
 6. But oh, the scenes that you will behold, even things that 
 will make your hearts to melt within you. Oh, if you could only 
 behold the scenes through which you will be called to pass, you 
 would humble yourselves as in sack-cloth and ashes before me; 
 for I, the Lord, am about to come out as in flaming fire, to take 
 vengeance on those who obey not my laws. Prepare, prepare 
 yourselves for that which is coming upon you. I will very nearly 
 lay waste the City of the Salt Lake. I will slay the wicked who 
 reside there, and in all parts of this Territory. I will begin, as I 
 before told you, with those who stand at the head of my Church, 
 for they have led my people into wickedness. I will slay them 
 and their seed also, and likewise the other false shepherds of my 
 flock, for they have committed abominations in my sight. The 
 news of their slaughter shall go throughout the earth; yea, the 
 sound of their abominations shall go from nation to nation, for I 
 detest them more than I detested the abominations of the inhabi- 
 tants of Sodom and Gomorrah. Oh, how I detest them. But yet 
 there are a few honest among them whom I will deliver; their 
 cries have come up before me. 
 
 7. Oh, the cries ! Oh, the sorrows ! Oh, the anguish of the 
 fair daughters of my people ! I feel for them, for I love them 
 as I love my sons, and I will deliver them. They have been 
 oppressed and trampled under foot. They have been led into 
 difficulties and sins by my sons, until my heart is grieved for them. 
 Oh ! my sons, my sons, my sons, ye have tried and oppressed my 
 daughters, and ye have rent from them their rights and their privi- 
 leges ; but I declare unto you that as ye have measured unto them, 
 so I will measure unto you ; as ye have put them through the fire, 
 so ye shall go through the fire. 
 
 8. And again I say unto you my people, be humble and faith- 
 ful, or you shall not escape my judgments; for lo ! I come, I 
 come, I come, saith the Lord of Hosts. Even so. Amen. 
 
636 ORDER OF TWELVES AND TWENTY-FOURS. 
 
 THE ORDER OF TWELVES AND TWENTY-FOURS. 
 
 AN ARTICLE BY THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, March 29th, 1860. 
 
 1. WE FIND it written in the Bible, that when prophets erected 
 temples and altars, they erected them with twelve stones, as in the 
 case of Elijah, when he repaired the altar* that was broken down. 
 Where did this order originate? In heaven ; it is an eternal order 
 there. Are there temples and altars in heaven? Yes. Rev. 15 : 
 5, gives the following: "And after that I looked, and, behold, the 
 temple of the tabernacle of the testimony in heaven was opened : 
 and the seven angels came out of the temple." Rev. 16 : 17: 
 "And the seventh angel poured out his vial into the air; and there 
 came a great voice out of the temple of heaven, from the throne, 
 saying, it is done." Rev. u : 19: And the temple of God was 
 opened in heaven, and there was seen in his temple the ark of his 
 testament." Rev. 6:9: "And when he had opened the fifth 
 seal, I saw under the altar the souls of them that were slain for the 
 word of God, and for the the testimony which they held." Rev. 
 9 : 13: "And the sixth angel sounded, and I heard a voice from 
 the four horns of the golden altar which is before God." Rev. 14 : 
 15: "And another angel came out of the temple." Rev. 14: 
 17-18: "And another angel came out of the temple which is in 
 heaven." "And another angel came out from the altar, which had 
 the power over fire." Rev. 15: 8: "And the temple was filled 
 with smoke from the glory of God." 
 
 2. John, in Rev. 21 : 12, in speaking ,of the New Jerusalem, 
 says that, "it had a wall great and high, and had twelve gates, and 
 at the gates twelve angels, and names written thereon, which are 
 the names of the twelve tribes of the children of Israel." Rev. 21 : 
 14: "And the wall of the city had twelve foundations, and in 
 them the names of the twelve apostles of the Lamb." From this 
 we learn that there are both temples and altars in heaven, the 
 erection of which was practiced there before it was upon the earth. 
 And it is in accordance with the eternal order of heaven that the 
 
ORDER OF TWELVES AND TWENTY-FOURS. 637 
 
 lesser should pattern after the greater; therefore, earthly things 
 must pattern after heavenly things. 
 
 3. But why could they not erect temples and altars of stone, 
 without erecting them upon twelve stones? Because, to do other- 
 wise would not be in accordance with the eternal law of heaven. 
 And the. Lord will not sanction anything save that which is done 
 according to law ; for he is always regulated thereby ; without law 
 he does nothing. 
 
 4. All Gods are subject to the same laws, and those laws 
 cannot be changed; therefore, the course of the Gods is one 
 eternal round. 
 
 5. Rev. 4: 4, reads as follows : "And round about the throne 
 were four and twenty seats : and upon the seats I saw four and 
 twenty elders sitting." Tenth verse, same chapter reads : "And 
 the four and twenty elders fall down before him that sat on the 
 throne." Rev. n : 16: "And the four and twenty elders, which 
 sat before God on their seats, fell upon their faces, and worshipped 
 God." Rev. 5: 14: "And the four beasts said, Amen. And 
 the four and twenty elders fell down and worshipped him that 
 liveth forever and ever." We learn from this that there must be 
 another order in heaven higher than the first one. In the first 
 case we read of the Lord working by twelves ; but in the second 
 case we read of him working by twenty-fours. What is the cause of 
 this? In heaven they have a fulness of knowledge ; but on the earth 
 they have only a knowledge of the things of God in part. Therefore, 
 the order of heaven is in advance of that of the earth. But when 
 the fulness of the holy priesthood is committed to the earth, its in- 
 habitants will enter into a higher order of things than that to which 
 they are now subject. They will enter into the same order that 
 exists in heaven. 
 
 6. The four and twenty elders who are in heaven, referred to 
 by John the Revelator, represent the twenty-four apostles who will 
 be ordained in the Church, under the fulness of the holy priest- 
 hood. When that which is perfect is come, then that which is in 
 part will be done away, and the will of the Lord will be done on 
 the earth, as it is now done in heaven. It is necessary that the 
 children of men should understand the order by which the Lord 
 works among them, and from which he cannot deviate. When 
 
638 INTERPRETATION OF A TONGUE. 
 
 they understand the laws by which he works, they know him, 
 whom to know is life eternal. 
 
 7. We read that, through obedience to the laws of heaven, 
 many miracles have been performed upon the earth, such as 
 cleansing the leprosy, dividing the waters of the Red Sea, and 
 quenching the violence of fire. The order by which the "Lord 
 works and performs all his wonders among men, is the order of 
 ones, threes, sevens, twelves and twenty-fours, and aside from these 
 orders, he does nothing. They were instituted in the council of 
 the first God, and are handed down from one God to another and 
 cannot be changed ; therefore, they are eternal. 
 
 THE TESTIMONY OF THE THIRD C'APTAIN OF 
 
 THE LORD'S HOST, GIVEN IN A TONGUE 
 
 THROUGH THE PROPHET, JOSEPH 
 
 MORRIS, IN THE SAINTS' 
 
 MEETING. 
 
 INTERPRETATION BY DAVID RICHARDS. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, June 8th, 1862. 
 
 1. BE IT KNOWN unto you that I am the Third Captain of the 
 Lord's army, and I am here by you, and a portion of the army of 
 heaven are along with me. Our swords are glistening in the air, 
 and we are dressed in military uniform, and if you could look on 
 us, the brightness of the sight would blind you. You cannot be- 
 hold us at the present ; but if you were permitted to, it would be 
 a wonderful sight. It is not so with us, because we are familiar 
 with such sights ; but, at present, let this matter not trouble you; 
 nor think about it. With permission I have come to visit you to- 
 day, because I wish to relate to you some of my history, that the 
 faithful among you may be comforted ; and when the prophet will 
 give me his permission, then I will do so. 
 
 2. Some of you have wondered many times, and thought, 
 "Have the angels who are now in heaven, at any time, on a mortal 
 
TESTIMONY OF THE THIRD CAPTAIN. 639 
 
 earth, passed through such circumstances as these that, at present, 
 are prevailing on our mortal earth?" You wonder if we, at any 
 time, were in such a place as you are in now. I will explain this 
 matter unto you. We were in just such circumstances, and in just 
 such a place as you are in. We had a camp and a fort, and- a 
 river that did run close by it, like yours which you call Weber 
 River, and- from that river I have carried willows, like* some of you 
 do, and I have had to go up into the canyon to haul logs, and my 
 feet have been frozen. When I first came to the camp, all the 
 clothes that I had, consisted of a coat and overshirt and a pair of 
 cotton pants, and a pair of very bad shoes. I had a wife and 
 two children ; one was four years old, and the other was two years . 
 old. My wife had two dresses. One of the children had two 
 dresses, and the other only had one dress. I had to lie in my 
 wet clothes three nights, until I was wet all over, (so terrible was 
 the rain ) which caused me to suffer much more than many of you 
 have suffered, and I was not the only sufferer, for my children 
 had to suffer as much as I did, being without shoes, except some 
 that was not fit to wear. 
 
 3. I was upon the earth when Adam was the seventh angel, 
 and I preached the gospel under him. I was 'twenty-three years 
 old, which was considered a man's age, I was the fifth person 
 that was baptized into the fulness of the gospel, and I was then an 
 ignorant creature, and many believed that I had not good sense, 
 and it was even thought so by the saints in the camp, until the 
 great test come on. I was looked upon as a short-sighted person, 
 and I was very much despised ; but after the test was over, I was 
 blessed abundantly, and became a man of wisdom, and now I am 
 the Third Captain of the Lord's host, that is my birthright. 
 
 4. Now, although you are weak and ignorant, do not be 
 downcast because you do not know much, for the Lord will bless 
 you, and strengthen you, after you have gone through the test, so 
 that you will be strong, and wise also. Some of you wonder why 
 that person (the Third Captain) is not upon this earth, like I 
 have been upon my Father's earth, and why he has not come 
 forth and embraced the fulness of the gospel, as I have done. 
 You do not know whether he is in your midst or not. I have 
 only to say that he is on this earth ; but it is not yet revealed 
 
640 INTERPRETATION OF A TONGUE. ^ 
 
 where he is. You also wish to know if we, when we expected to 
 be delivered, were disappointed like you have been. Yes ; we 
 expected the Lord, day by day, and time after time ; but we were 
 disappointed, like you have been. We swore the oath, like you 
 have done ; and after we had done so, we believed that we would 
 see the deliverance the next day after, but we were disappointed ; 
 but when ouf deliverance came, we had eaten up the test bushel 
 of wheat, and killed the last animal we had, or traded it off; and 
 at that time we were surrounded by our enemies who had come 
 up to take our lives, and all hell was against us. But as soon as 
 the test was over, and we had killed the hypocrites, then our 
 enemies became more enraged, so that we could not trade with 
 them any more. 
 
 5. You- would ask me how many we had in our camp, and 
 how many were killed? I will answer you. We killed thirty-five 
 in one day, even on the day of the test, and after we had done so, 
 the enemies came up all around us with their murderous instru- 
 ments, but they were slain. 
 
 6. We had a city, and was going to it like you, and in the 
 same order that you wanted to go to Great Salt Lake City. Our 
 enemies disputed 'with us on the road; but when the prophet 
 gave his command, they were slain, and sent from number two to 
 number four (see diagram). Your circumstances are like unto 
 ours. You expect a deliverance shortly. Some of you think that 
 you will not be driven into such circumstances as we were ; but 
 this you do not know. You are in the hands of the Lord ; and 
 when he sees that it is necessary that you should pass through such 
 scenes, he can shut down the gates so that in one day you would 
 be in just such circumstances as we were in, that is, when he 
 wishes to do ; but when it is possible for you to escape such cir- 
 cumstances I will supplicate the Lord for you. 
 
 7. I will now offer up a short prayer in your midst, for we, 
 the angels of God, do pray as well as you : O my Father and 
 God, I am on a visit to this Camp to-day, by thy permission, and 
 come before thee now, and supplicate thee to bless these thy peo- 
 ple who are assembled this day to worship thee. Let them feel 
 the influence of thy holy angels who are to comfort and to bless 
 them ; and I pray thee, Father, to bless the faithful, that they may 
 
TESTIMONY OF THE THIRD CAPTAIN. 641 
 
 become strong, and that they may be able to stand the test that is 
 before them, and give, dear Father, when it is right in thy sight, 
 what they need, that they not be in such trying circumstances as 
 we were in before our brother came to deliver us. We know not 
 the day nor the hour when thou wilt deliver them from this place ;~ 
 only thou alone knowest this, dear Father; but we know that the 
 day draws nearer, and for that I pray thee to strengthen the faith- 
 ful that they may continue to be faithful, and that they may stand 
 and become stronger from day to day. And I pray thee, Father, 
 to bless the prophet and his counselors, and all thy faithful people 
 here. I ask these blessings for them, and leave my blessing upon 
 them. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 8. And now,, after I have prayed for you to my Father, I will 
 relate unto you a little more of my experience. Some oT you 
 wonder if we, in our experiences of the Lord's coming, have not 
 set stakes. O how many have been disappointed by setting 
 stakes, and have apostatized, and have been destroyed. But 
 the setting of stakes is not the greatest evil; but being disap- 
 pointed because the Lord does not come at the time appointed, 
 they lose confidence in God and in his word. We believe that 
 the great test will come before he comes ; but when he comes he 
 will try every man and every woman. But oh ! you cannot com- 
 prehend the happiness, and the joy, and the thanksgiving, which 
 was in the fort the day after the test; and you cannot compre- 
 hend now how busily we were engaged to make ourselves ready to 
 go to the city. You may ask, "How could you go? for you had 
 not one animal left. How could you get teams?" I answer: It 
 was no trouble for us to obtain teams, because there were plenty of 
 horses and oxen left for us to move. We had every earthly bless- 
 ing in our hands. You wish to know whether, or not, we had 
 tea, coffee, beer, liquor, and all such things. I answer, yes. You 
 wish to know what we did with those things. We used them 
 when it was necessary. We were like you ; we were a long time 
 without them. 
 
 9. After the test, the prophet soon had the power of the gov- 
 ernor in his own hands, and all who would not obey the law were 
 slain, for he had that power. I lived ninety years. Some of you 
 wonder if there was such a man as Brigham in that time. I an- 
 
642 TESTIMONY OF THE THIRD CAPTAIN. 
 
 swer, yes ; we had precisely such a man. He would cheat, mis- 
 lead and beguile our daughters and wives. You ask, "Had you 
 in your time any prisoners at you place?'' Yes; we had three like 
 you, and one escaped in the same manner as yours did, and I was 
 so mad the next morning that I could have slain the guard ; but 
 all things worked for our good, and so it will be with you. Con- 
 cerning the one who escaped out of prison: he is in our hands, 
 and we will have our eyes upon him. 
 
 10. You wish to know whether or not polygamy is a true prin- 
 ciple. I answer, yes, in the right time and in the right place ;. but 
 I thank God that I did escape it until I had preached the fulness 
 of the gospel. You ask me, "Will polygamy be practiced?" I an- 
 swer, yes, in the Lord's own time, then it will be necessary. Be 
 satisfied with what I have told you, and I witness and testify that 
 it is true. I am the Third Captain of the Lord's host who has 
 spoken in your midst. 
 
 11. We, the holy angels, are satisfied with many of you, even 
 with the faithful among you, and I pray that they may be stronger, 
 (and they will be); but from this time the hypocrites shall go 
 down. Even so. Amen and Amen. 
 
 AN ARTICLE ON COUNSELORSHIP. 
 
 BY THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, March i5th, 1861. 
 
 i. IT is written in the book of Doctrine and Covenants, that 
 a president of the high priesthood should have two counselors. 
 Why was this order introduced upon this earth? Because it is ac- 
 cording to the eternal order of the Gods that earthly things must 
 pattern after heavenly things. Where did this order originate? 
 With the first God of all. He took unto him two counselors, 
 who were the next Gods below him in authority, and from those 
 three who form the First Presiding Quorum, all laws originated, 
 and have been transmitted from one God to another. 
 
COUNSELORSHIP. 643 
 
 2. According to the eternal order of the Gods, it takes one 
 hundred and forty and four thousand Gods to form a quorum, and 
 the first God of a quorum presides over all the rest of his quorum, 
 and the two Gods who are the next below him in authority are his 
 counselors. 
 
 3. The Eternal Father, whom we worship, is the last God 
 glorified; and his sons and daughters who have received their 
 resurrection, constitute his power. They go at his bidding and 
 come at his call. And his sons are ministering angels^ appointed 
 to minister to the inhabitants of this earth who are heirs of salva- 
 tion. It is their chief duty to minister to this world of ours, and 
 rule it. 
 
 4. Has the Eternal Father counselors?. Yes, but not as other 
 Gods have. His firstborn son, Jesus Christ, is his first counselor, 
 and the holy ghosts, who number millions, fill the place of second 
 counselor; but other presiding Gods each have counselors, who 
 are two persons that can be present with him. The case of 
 the Eternal Father whom we worship, differs from that of other 
 Gods. He dwells in heaven, and rules upon this earth by his 
 agents; whereas, other Gods are not under the same obligations 
 to this earth that he is, and therefore do not need to have their 
 agents here. 
 
 5. It is also written in the book of Doctrine and Covenants, 
 that a literal descendant of Aaron can act in the office of bishop 
 without counselors. Thus high priests after the order of Mel- 
 chisedec must have two counselors; but a priest of Aaron can 
 act without them. What is the reason of this? The priests of 
 Aaron have not yet received their resurrection ; therefore they act 
 under a lower order of things, and are not subject to a celestial 
 law, as high priests are. But when the priests of Aaron shall have 
 received, their resurrection, they will have to keep a celestial law 
 as high priests do; but their duty now is to minister in tem- 
 poral things, and consequently they have an order adapted to 
 their case. 
 
 6. All worlds, when they enter into their second estate, will 
 abide the same law as this does now ; consequently, when Adam's 
 sons leave the lesser priesthood, and become celestial messengers, 
 holding the orifice of the high priesthood, other Aaronic priests will 
 
644 THE ORDER OF SEVENS. 
 
 come forth upon other earths that will succeed this in a state 
 of mortality. Therefore, the Aaronic priesthood is as eternal 
 as the Melchisedec priesthood, and both are as eternal as the 
 Gods are. 
 
 AN ARTICLE ON THE ORDER OF SEVENS. 
 
 BY THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 1. THE EARTH continues in mortality during a period of 
 seven thousand years, which period is divided into seven equal 
 parts, called dispensations. There are also seven high priests who 
 are appointed to preside over the several dispensations. These 
 high priests are called in the Scriptures the seven angels of the 
 seven churches. Their names were Seth, Enos, Cainan, Mahala- 
 leel, Jared, Enoch and Methuselah. They were born into the 
 world in the following order : Seth first, Enos second, Cainan 
 third, Mahalaleel fourth, Jared fifth, Enpch sixth, and Methuselah 
 seventh. They were ordained by Adam in the Garden of Adam- 
 on-di-Ahman. The holy priesthood takes root upwards and runs 
 downwards, or in other words, the holy priesthood originates in 
 heaven, and comes thence to the earth. But there is a principle 
 which regulates many of the works of the Lord, and which in 
 many instances causes the first to be last, and the last to be first. 
 Therefore, the order in which these high priests preside, is the 
 reverse of that in which they were born. Methuselah, though the 
 last one born, is the first angel, and presides over the first thous- 
 and years. Enoch, the second; Jared, the third; Mahalaleel, the 
 fourth ; Cainan, the fifth ; Enos, the sixth ; and Seth, the seventh. 
 The seventh is the senior and presides over the other six. 
 The seven angels in connection with Jesus Christ, open the seven 
 seals when they go forth to fill their respective missions. 
 
 2. The seven angels are subject to each other, and succeed 
 each other in presiding. Two of them, Enos and Seth, the sixth 
 and the seventh angels, are obligated by law to fill three missions 
 
THE ORDER OF SEVENS. 645 
 
 on the earth. Enos filled his second mission to this earth in the 
 person of Elijah, and his third in the person of Joseph Smith. 
 Seth filled his second mission in the person of Moses, and is filling 
 his third in the person of Joseph Morris. He is the president of 
 the high prieshood, and, as such, will continue to preside over the 
 church and kingdom of God till the close of the seventh thousand 
 years. He will then resign the presidency of the work to Adam, 
 who will assemble his forces, and lead them against those fallen 
 spirits that will then be upon the earth, and who have been spoken 
 of as the great army of "Gog and Magog." Adam will, in turn, 
 be succeeded by Jesus Christ, who will finish the work ; and, after 
 the earth has been celestialized, deliver it up to his Father. The 
 Father will then deliver it to Adam, for'whom it was made ; and 
 and he will reign over it "as an Eternal God forever. These prin- 
 ciples are often foreshadowed in the old Scriptures, as will be seen 
 by reference to the following quotations : Rev. i: 20, reads as 
 follows: "The mystery of'the seven stars which thou sawest in 
 my right hand, and the seven golden candlesticks. The seven 
 stars are the angels of the seven churches : and the seven candle- 
 sticks which thou sawest are the seven churches." Rev. 1:4: 
 "Grace be unto you, and peace, from him which is, and which was, 
 and which is to come ; and from the seven spirits which are before 
 his throne." Rev. 3: i: "And unto the angel of the church in 
 Sardis write : These things saith he that hath the seven spirits of 
 God, and the seven stars ; I know thy works, that thou hast a 
 name that thou livest, and art dead." Rev. 4:5: "And out of 
 the throne proceeded lightnings and thunderings and voices : and 
 there were seven lamps of fire burning before the throne, which 
 are the seven spirits of God." Rev. 5:6: "And I beheld, and, 
 lo, in the midst of the throne and of the four beasts, and in the 
 midst of the elders, stood a lamb as it had been slain, having seven 
 horns and seven eyes, which are the seven spirits of God sent 
 forth into all the earth." Rev. 8:2: "And I saw the seven 
 angels which stood before God ; and to them w r ere given seven 
 trumpets." Zechariah 3:9: "For behold the stone that I have 
 laid before Joshua ; upon one stone shall be seven eyes : behold, 
 I will engrave the graving thereof, saith the Lord of Hosts, and I 
 will remove the iniquity of that land in one day." Zech. 4 : 10: 
 
646 THE ORDER OF SEVENS. 
 
 "For who hath despised the day of small things? for they shall re- 
 joice, and see the plummet in the hand of Zerubbabel with those 
 seven ; they are the eyes of the Lord, which run to and fro 
 through the whole earth." Zech. 4: 2: "I have looked, and 
 behold a candlestick all of gold, with a bowl upon the top of it, 
 and his seven lamps thereon, and seven pipes to the seven lamps 
 which are upon the top thereof. 
 
 3. Who are these seven spirits refeired to in these quotations? 
 They are the seven angels. What should be understood by the 
 stone which was laid before Joshua? The stone represents the 
 seventh angel. The eye represents light. There being seven 
 eyes engraven upon the stone, represents the light of the seven 
 dispensations which will be possessed by the seventh angel. The 
 stone being laid before Joshua, represents that at the time when 
 the seventh angel should commence his mission, Joshua should 
 be upon the earth, and that they would come in collision, the one 
 with the other. Joshua 6:4: "And seven priests shall bear 
 before the ark seven trumpets of ram's horns: and the seventh day 
 ye shall compass the city seven times, and the priests shall blow 
 with the trumpets." And, again, Elisha told the Assyrian leper to 
 go and wash in Jordan seven times. Num. 23 : 1-29 : Balaam, the 
 prophet, commands Balak, the king, "Build me seven altars, and 
 prepare me here seven oxen and seven rams." Leviticus 8: u: 
 "And he sprinkled thereof upon the altar seven times." Exodus 
 12 : 15 : *" Seven days shall ye eat unleavened bread." Exodus 
 13:6: "And in the seventh day shall be a feast unto the Lord." 
 Gen. 7:2: "Of every clean beast thou shalt take to thee by 
 sevens, the male and his female." Deut. 16: 15: "Seven days 
 shalt thou keep a solemn feast unto the Lord thy God." Deut. 
 16: 9 : "Seven weeks shalt thou number unto thee." Tenth 
 verse: "And thou shalt keep the feast of weeks unto the Lord 
 thy God with a tribute of free will offering of thine hand." 
 Exodus 29 : 37 : "Seven days shalt thou make an atonement for 
 the altar and sanctify it." Leviticus 4: 17: "And the priest 
 shall dip his finger in some of the blood, and sprinkle it seven 
 times before the Lord, even before the vail." The i3th chap., 
 54th verse, in speaking of the leprosy, says: "Then shall the 
 priest command that they w r ash the thing wherein the plague is, 
 
THE ORDER OF SEVENS. 647 
 
 and he shall shut it up seven days more." The i4th chap., i6th 
 verse: "And the priest shall dip his right finger in the oil that is 
 in his left hand, and shall sprinkle of the oil with his finger seven 
 times before the Lord." The 38th verse, speaking of the plague, 
 says: "Then the priest shall go out of the house to the door of 
 house, and shall shut up the house seven days." The i6th chap., 
 1 9th verse says : "And he shall sprinkle of the blood upon it 
 with his finger seven times, and cleanse it." The i4th verse: 
 "And before the mercy seat shall he sprinkle of the blood with 
 his finger seven times." 
 
 4. What should we understand by these ceremonies being 
 repeated seven times? It was done to acknowledge the seven 
 presidents of the earth, whose authority must be acknowledged ; 
 and when that is done, the Lord ratifies the administration of men 
 who are called to officiate in, the holy priesthood. Hence, while 
 Samson wore his seven locks, he had the sanction of the seven 
 presidents oi the earth, and retained his strength ; but when he 
 suffered them to be cut off, he lost the sanction of the seven presi- 
 dents, and consequently lost his power. 
 
 AN ARTICLE ON ORDINATION. 
 
 BY THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 WEP.ER, UTAH, May gth, 1861. 
 
 i. THE subject of ordination is a subject that has occupied the 
 attention of thousands, many of whom have been lost in confusion 
 while contemplating it, because they have not understood its true 
 order. They have regarded the ordination which a high priest re- 
 ceives upon the earth as though it conferred office upon him finally 
 and independently of any prior or subsequent ordination, whereas, 
 a high priest must receive his ordination to that office in heaven 
 before he can receive it upon the earth. If this were not the case, 
 earthly things would not pattern after heavenly things, but heavenly 
 things would pattern after earthly things, and thus the greater 
 
648 ORDINATION. 
 
 would pattern after the lesser, and this could not be, for earthly 
 things must pattern after heavenly things. There are many who 
 boast of the ordination which they receive under the hands of 
 some man upon the earth, and take it for granted that such earthly 
 ordination is sufficient. Suppose, for instance, that a prophet of 
 the Lord should place his hands upon the head of a man who was 
 only an heir to the priesthood of Aaron, and ordain him to the 
 office of a high priest, would he be a high priest in consequence 
 of such ordination? No; he would be a priest of Aaron, only; 
 and if he officiated in the office of a high priest he would deceive, 
 for the Holy Ghost would not be subject to him. He would be 
 an imposter, for while he made pretentions to be that which he 
 was not, he would deceive every person to whom he administered. 
 
 2. Holy Ghosts are resurrected persons, and are all beyond the 
 power of death. They are ministering angels, appointed to direct 
 the footsteps of mortals upon this earth. How, therefore, can they 
 become subject to the sons of Aaron who are in their second 
 estate only, and are all subject to the power of death ? 
 
 3. With respect to the mission of Joseph Smith to this earth : 
 we are informed that he received his ordinations, pertaining to the 
 flesh, under the hands of Peter, James, and John. Was that the 
 first ordination he received to become a Prophet? No. He re- 
 ceived his first ordination under the hands of his own Father upon 
 a celestial earth, which ordination was understood, acknowledged, 
 and again sealed upon him by Adam in the Garden of Adam-on- 
 di-Ahman ; his name was then called Enos. By this we perceive 
 that Joseph Smith was a prophet before Peter, James and John 
 appeared to him. Then what authority did they confer upon him? 
 None. They simply ordained him to the office of a high priest, in 
 order that the previous ordinations which he had received might 
 be acknowledged upon the earth by the people to whom he had 
 to minister ; otherwise, they, being ignorant of his authority, would 
 not have acknowledged him as a prophet. 
 
 4. The Lord said unto Jeremiah : " Before I formed thee in 
 the belly, I knew thee ; and before thou earnest forth out of the 
 womb, I sanctified thee, and I ordained thee a prophet to the 
 nations." Peter, also, in his first epistle, first chapter, twentieth 
 verse, when speaking of Jesus, says: "Who verily was fore- 
 
ORDINATION. 649 
 
 ordained, before the foundation of the world." In tire Old and 
 New Testament we find the principle of fore-ordination often 
 mentioned. In the account of the mission of Jesus Christ, we 
 read that he chose twelve apostles, and ordained them to the 
 apostleship before he had received an ordination in the flesh. 
 For after he had called and ordained the apostles, he took Peter, 
 James and John with him, and went upon the mount, and was 
 transfigured before them. And while there, Moses and Elias ap- 
 peared, and ordained him to the high priesthood. If Jesus had 
 the power to officiate in the holy priesthood before he was ordained 
 in the flesh, of what benefit was it to him to receive an ordination 
 from Moses? None at all, so far as power is concerned. Jesus 
 had, before that time, been ordained to the office of a high priest 
 in heaven ; but it was necessary for him to receive an ordination 
 upon the earth to the same authority, in order that that which had*" 
 been done in heaven might be acknowledged upon the earth, for 
 earthly things must pattern after heavenly things. 
 
 5. The Eternal Father rules in heaven, and Moses rules upon 
 the earth ; therefore, Jesus being an heir to the fulness of the- holy 
 priesthood, had to receive an ordination from them both, in order 
 to fulfil the law, and acknowledge their authority. 
 
 6. Where, and by whom, did Moses receive his first ordina- 
 tion to hold the presidency of this earth? In -a council of the 
 Gods. His own Father, assisted by the two Gods who are his 
 counselors, and who, with him, form the Presidency of a Quorum 
 of Gods, ordained him. 
 
 7. Where, and by whom, did he receive his second ordination 
 to the same authority? In the Valley of Adam-on-di-Ahman, under 
 the hands of Adam. His name was then called Seth. And when 
 he came to deliver the Children of Israel out of the hands of 
 Pharaoh, he received an ordination to the office of a high priest, 
 under the hands of Jethro. Did that ordination give him power 
 to deliver the Children of Israel? No, it did not. It was only 
 acknowledging on the earth that which the Gods had before done 
 in heaven. It did not give him any power. If Jethro could 
 have conferred the power upon Moses to deliver the Children of 
 Israel, he surely could have delivered them himself; but if he did 
 not possess the power to deliver them himself, he could not confer 
 
650 ORDINATION. 
 
 it upon another. Where did that power come from? It come 
 from heaven. Those Gods who first ordained him, sustained him 
 by sending to him the power to deliver Israel. No person can give 
 that to another which he himself does not possess. No man on 
 earth can confer power upon high priests ; their power must come 
 from above. There were many high priests among the Children 
 of Israel in the days of Moses ; but they could neither deliver their 
 brethren nor themselves. They held the office of high priests as 
 well as Moses, but they did not hold as much power as he did. 
 
 8. From this we learn that all high priests do not hold the 
 same degree of power. There must be a cause for this. The or- 
 dinations which they receive in the flesh are of but little avail ; the 
 power must come from above, and there is but one man through 
 whom that power which is the ruling power can come. Moses 
 
 Jbs that man ; he holds the full keys of the holy priesthood. 
 
 9. Where did I, who now hold the full keys of the holy priest- 
 hood, receive my ordination to that authority? In heaven. Have 
 I received an ordination upon the earth in this dispensation to the 
 office^ of a high priest? Yes; in the High Priests' Quorum, Great 
 Salt Lake City. Did that ordination confer any power upon me, 
 more than a similar ordination has upon other members of that 
 quorum? No; it was only acknowledging that ordination upon 
 the earth which I first received in heaven. It was there that I 
 received the office of president of the high priesthood pertaining to 
 this earth, and thence I shall receive the power. I hold my au- 
 thority as independently as the Gods of eternity hold theirs, hav- 
 ing gained it by the law of eternal progression. 
 
CELESTIAL MARRIAGE. 651 
 
 AN ARTICLE ON CELESTIAL MARRIAGE. 
 
 BY THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 AN EXPLANATION TO THE REVELATION WHICH WAS GIVEN TO 
 JOSEPH SMITH UPON CELESTIAL MARRIAGE. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, June 4th, 1861. 
 
 1. HE INQUIRED of the Lord, to know wherein he justified 
 Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, as also Moses, David and Solomon, 
 as touching the doctrine of them having many wives and concu- 
 bines. It should be understood that Moses wrote this law, and 
 that it was observed by the children of Israel. They had both 
 wives and concubines. If they had not yielded obedience to that 
 law, they would have beerfunder condemnation ; but this law was 
 given to be kept by the children of men, to regulate them in mor- 
 tality. It has nothing to do with eternity. Not being a celestial 
 law, it was given to raise up a rightous seed ; and when men were 
 found in transgression, those wives were taken from them and 
 given to others, as in the case of Saul. When he transgressed the 
 commandment of the Lord, his wives were taken from him and 
 were given to David ; after which he transgressed and lost them 
 also ; thus we see that when men rebelled against the Lord, and 
 broke his commandments, they could not keep their women ; but 
 they were taken away from them, and given to those who were 
 more worthy. It is not lawful for a wicked man to have a plur- 
 ality of wives. 
 
 2. We read of the children of Israel having concubines; what 
 are they? What is the difference between a wife and a concu- 
 bine? A wife is a woman who kept her first estate; whose name 
 is recorded in the Lamb's Book of Life, and an heir to the resur- 
 rection ; of the seed of Abraham, and consequently an heir to the 
 promises made to him. What is a concubine? A woman who is 
 a fallen spirit ; who kept not her first estate ; whose name is not 
 recorded in the Lamb's Book of Life ; not an heir of salvation ; of 
 the seed of Cain; of Gentile blood; doomed to suffer both the 
 first and second death. She is given to one of the sons of Israel, 
 
652 CONCERNING CELESTIAL MARRIAGE. 
 
 according to law, to raise up seed ; and through her husband her 
 seed becomes sanctified. Angels which are heirs of salvation 
 come forth through her ; in this case, the unbelieving wife's seed 
 is sanctified by her husband's ; and when she has filled her appoint- 
 ment with him according to law, she leaves him, and goes to her 
 own place. 
 
 3. We read that the kings and prophets of old had both wives 
 and concubines, and they were taken from one and given to an- 
 other; they could not hold them in wickedness. But if those 
 women had been sealed to those men for eternity by the celestial 
 law, there is no power in heaven nor on the earth that could sepa- 
 rate them again, for the celestial law is as unchangeable as the 
 Gods are ; that law cannot be changed. 
 
 4. Although the kings and prophets had so many wives for 
 time, y^et they can have but one sealed to them each for eternity. 
 The prophets of Israel called it Sealing in their day, but it was not 
 sealing for eternity ; it was marrying for time according to the law 
 of Moses. They did not understand the sealing power for time 
 and all eternity. They only held the priesthood in part ; they 
 did not hold the keys of a dispensation. They were sent to 
 be prophets to the kings, holding no sealing power for eternity. 
 Their missions were to administer the law of Moses for time. 
 They had nothing to do with sealing for eternity. That law was 
 not revealed unto them; and it will not be revealed until the 
 dispensation of the fulness of times is ushered in. 
 
 5. When the prophet, Joseph Smith, united more than one 
 woman to one man, he, like the ancient prophets, called it seal- 
 ing, when, in fact, the celestial law had never been revealed to 
 him ; but he knew no better than to call it sealing for eternity. 
 He did nothing but marry for time, like the ancient prophets did. 
 The foregoing shows that Moses wrote that law in order to regu- 
 late marriages among the children of men for time, and not for 
 eternity. 
 
 6. The prophet, Joseph Smith, speaks of certain angels who 
 cannot enlarge, but must remain single, without exaltation, in 
 their saved condition, to all eternity, not having the power to 
 become Gods. Whom are they who will be deprived of the bless- 
 ing of exaltation ? Those who are overtaken by the second fall, 
 
CONCERNING THE REBELLION. 653 
 
 which is a fall from exaltation ; having broken the law of the 
 Lord, they have thereby rendered themselves unworthy of a part- 
 ner for eternity. 
 
 7. In due time a law will be written in Zion which will regu- 
 late all families ; and those who cannot abide that law must suffer 
 the consequences ; if, after once receiving a wife by the celestial 
 law she is taken away from them, they will remain single to all 
 eternity, and henceforth will never become Gods, but angels of 
 God to all eternity. That which is sealed on the earth, will be 
 sealed in heaven, and cannot be changed to all eternity. 
 
 8. Where do angels fall from salvation? In their first estate. 
 What is the cause of their first fall? Rebellion against God. 
 They resisted the Holy Ghost, which is the power of God, and 
 consented to the shedding of innocent blood. There is no fallen 
 
 spirit that has not denied the Holy Ghost, and consented to the 
 shedding of innocent blood. They are continually thirsting after 
 blood, if they are crossed in their pathway. They set themselves 
 against the Lord, to pull down every principle of truth and virtue. 
 
 9. Where does the second fall take place? In the second 
 estate, in mortality. By what means is this fall brought about? 
 By transgressing a celestial law. 
 
 10. When male and female are sealed together by the celestial 
 law, and cannot conduct themselves according to it, but are sep- 
 erated according to the law of the holy priesthood, they will 
 remain single to all eternity, having once had an opportunity of 
 becoming great, but have forfeited that blessing through trans- 
 gression ; therefore, they have to be content without an exaltation 
 to all eternity ; but all others will become Gods in due time. 
 
654 THE RESURRECTION. 
 
 AN ARTICLE ON THE RESURRECTION. 
 
 BY THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 CONCERNING the resurrection of Jesus Christ. Showing that he 
 received a resurrection contrary to the natural process, in 
 order that he might convince the whole House of Israel that 
 he was the true Messiah, and that he held the keys of the res- 
 urrection, and also showing the reason why he was called the 
 "Only begotten Son of the Father." The order of the first 
 resurrection, and also of the whole House of Israel. The 
 resurrection of Lazarus. The nature of transfiguration. The 
 preservation of the three Hebrews from the flames of Daniel 
 while in the lion's den, and the power possessed by holy angels 
 over fire and other elements. 
 
 1. THE RESURRECTION of the dead is a birth a spiritual or 
 celestial birth, wherein children are born of immortal parents 
 in a similar manner as, in their second estate, they are born 
 of mortal ones. 
 
 2. It may be asked, if the resurrection of the dead is brought 
 about by a natural process, why did Jesus rise from the dead on 
 the third day with the same body that had been crucified? The 
 peculiar circumstances attending the mission of Jesrs Christ, and 
 the duties required of him, were entirely unlike those required of, 
 or attending any of the sons of Adam. He had previously passed 
 through a mortal estate, and had been resurrected in connection 
 with his own Father's family ; but none of the sons of Adam have 
 even yet been resurrected. Neither his birth, his death, nor his 
 resurrection were of the general order. He left his resurrected 
 body with his Father, and took another body on this earth, 
 adapted to the mission which he had to fill. This body was not 
 entirely mortal it was half immortal, being begotten by an im- 
 mortal Father and born of a mortal mother. It was begotten by 
 the first captain of the Lord's host, whose duty it was to do that 
 for him (Jesus) which he could not do for himself, and to provide 
 such a body for him as his mission required. 
 
 3. As the Eternal Father begat his firstborn son, Jesus Christ, 
 both in the first and second estates, so also he begat him, and 
 
THE RESURRECTION. 655 
 
 of his sons, him only, in the third estate. Hence, as he did not 
 beget any other except him in the third estate, it is truly said of 
 him that "He is the only begotten Son of the Father." Adam is 
 a high priest who is next in authority to the Eternal Father, and 
 when he assisted the Father in the resurrection of his posterity, he" 
 begat the Eternal Father's second firstborn son, who is by birth- 
 right the first captain of the Lord's host, and who is spoken of by 
 John the Revelator as riding upon a black horse. Being the next 
 firstborn son to Jesus Christ, he is also the next to him in au- 
 thority, and is constantly associated with him, acting as his coun- 
 selor and forerunner. 
 
 4. The mission of Jesus Christ is of a two-fold nature, con- 
 sisting, firstly, of the office of Savior, and secondly, of the office 
 of Mediator, to fill which offices he needed also a body of a two- 
 fold nature. 
 
 5. His mission as Savior required him to have a body partly 
 mortal, and to die upon a cross, and by rising from the dead on 
 the third day to break the bonds of death, and overcome its power. 
 In order to do this, the seeds of immortality were sown in his 
 body, consequently death could not hold him. He held the 
 power of the resurrection within himself, and also the keys of the 
 resurrection to Adam's posterity; therefore, he said, "I am the 
 resurrection and the life. I have the power to lay down my life 
 and to take it up again." 
 
 6. His mission as Mediator requires him to be present, 
 alternately, with his Father in heaven, and with his servants upon 
 the earth; and, as "mortality cannot inherit immortality," or in 
 other words, "mortal beings cannot enter a celestial world," it 
 was necessary for him to have a body partly immortal, so that he 
 might be able to enter the Father's presence. And it was neces- 
 sary also for him to have and retain his crucified body, in order 
 that he might show to scattered Israel the marks of his wounds, 
 and by so doing convince them that he was the true Messiah. To 
 portions of them he has at different times done this since his visit 
 to the spirits in prison. He first appeared to the apostles at 
 Jerusalem, and afterwards to the apostles of the Nephites on the 
 American Continent. He has also visited other portions of the 
 House of Israel, and will finally visit the Jews at Jerusalem, who 
 
656 THE RESURRECTION. 
 
 will be the last people to be convinced of the truth of his mission. 
 At that time he will stand upon the Mount of Olives, and the 
 Jews, who will have gathered to that place in unbelief, will look 
 upon him whom their forefathers pierced, and as they examine the 
 prints of the nails in his hands, and the mark of the spear in his 
 side, they will be overcome by a spirit of wonder and of deep 
 humility, while the power of God will irresistibly seal conviction 
 upon their minds that the lowly and rejected Jesus of Nazareth is 
 indeed the King of the Jews their long looked for, and at last, 
 welcome Messiah. 
 
 7. Jesus was a stumbling-stone to the Jews ; hence, he said, 
 "Whosoever shall fall upon this stone shall be broken; but on 
 whomsoever this stone shall fall, it shall grind them to powder." 
 The Jews thought that when the Messiah appeared, he would come 
 as a mighty deliverer to establish them forever ; but they were 
 mistaken. He was born of humble parents, and instead of estab- 
 lishing himself as their king and deliverer, he was led like a lamb 
 to the slaughter, and was crucified. They, consequently stumbled 
 over him, and were broken and scattered among all nations ; their 
 hopes were blasted ; their eneimies fell upon them, and drove 
 them from their own lands, and took possession of them ; and 
 Jerusalem, their Holy City, has been trodden under the feet of 
 the Gentiles until the present day. But they will return, rebuild 
 their city, and possess their own lands ; for this promise has been 
 made unto them ; and they will gather in unbeli^". 
 
 8. Although they were mistaken in supposing that the Messiah 
 was coming as their deliverer in the first place, yet, when he 
 comes the second time, their hopes will be realized, for he will 
 then be their deliverer. He will destroy their enemies from before 
 them, and they will no more be driven from their own lands. 
 
 9. When he shall have convinced them, he will have con- 
 vinced all the world that he is their Redeemer, and that he holds 
 the keys of the resurrection to Adam's posterity. 
 
 10. The objects for which his crucified body is retained, will 
 then have been accomplished ; he will then abandon it, and return 
 to that body which he obtained by a natural process from his im- 
 mortal parents in his third estate. 
 
 11. Concerning the resurrection of Adam's posterity, Ezekiel 
 
THE RESURRECTION. 657 
 
 informs us that he saw a vision, and that in that vision he saw a 
 valley filled with dry bones ; that the bones came together, bone 
 to its bone ; that flesh and skin came upon and covered them, and 
 that they stood upon their feet an exceeding great army. What 
 are we to understand by this vision? That it is a figure represent-- 
 ing the resurrection of the whole House of Israel of whom none 
 will be lost. They are the elect of God the heirs of salvation 
 the sheep spoken of by the Savior, for whom he suffered his blood 
 to be shed, that through his death and sufferings they might 
 receive a glorious resurrection, and enter into a fulness of joy. 
 
 12. The heirs of salvation will be resurrected in their own 
 order, according to their birthright, or the right they hold to be 
 born in a celestial estate, in the same order as that in which they 
 were born in their first or spiritual estate. 
 
 13. The resurrection will be commenced by one hundred and 
 forty-four thousand high priests, including and headed by Father 
 Adam, who, accompanied by their celestial wives, will be assem- 
 bled on Mount Zion for that purpose. Father Adam has one 
 hundred and forty-four thousand firstborn sons, and the same 
 number of firstborn daughters, of whom, in the resurrection, he 
 will beget his firstborn son and his firstborn daughter only. The 
 second firstborn son and his wife, and the second firstborn 
 daughter of Adam, will be begotten by Moses, who is the high 
 priest next in authority to Adam, and who will take his second 
 firstborn daughter to wife ; and this order will continue until all 
 of Adam's firstborn sons and daughters and his firstborn sons' 
 wives shall have been resurrected ; and theirs will constitute the 
 first resurrection. The firstborn sons of Adam will then, with their 
 wives, hold the keys of the second resurrection, in consequence of 
 their having power to beget immortal bodies. They will, then, in 
 the same order as that in which the firstborn sons and daughters 
 of Adam were resurrected, beget one hundred and forty-four 
 thousand of the sons of Adam and their wives, whose birthright is 
 next to their own. Those of the second resurrection will then 
 hold the keys of the third resurrection, and beget one hundred 
 and forty-four thousand more of the sons of Adam and their 
 wives, who will hold the keys of the fourth resurrection. This 
 order will be continued until all of the sons and daughters of 
 
658 THE RESURRECTION. 
 
 Adam, who kept their first estate, shall have been resurrected. 
 
 ^14. The mode and order of the resurrection in every world 
 are the same. ' 
 
 15. In Adam's family, John the Baptist fills the office of 
 counselor and forerunner to his elder brother, Abel, who will be 
 the Savior to the world that will succeed this in a state of mor- 
 tality. It is an eternal principle that, in every world the younger 
 act as counselors and forerunners to the elder, who are next above 
 them by birthright. Thus, Elias (or Enos) acts as counselor and 
 forerunner to Moses ( or Seth ), and restores that priesthood in 
 part which Moses restores to its fulness. 
 
 1 6. Concerning the resurrection of Lazarus, it is asked: By 
 what power was he raised, and what was the nature of his resur- 
 rection? His mortal body had not decayed, and Jesus holding 
 the power of the holy priesthood, called the spirit back to the 
 dead body, and by this means quickened it ' again. It was not 
 changed to a celestial body, but remained what it was before a 
 mortal body subject to death. 
 
 17. We have heard of cases where individuals have been 
 in a trance; in such cases the spirit sometimes leaves the body 
 for several, days, and then returns to it again. The case of 
 Lazarus was very similar to that of a trance ; his spirit returned to 
 his body before it had commenced to. decompose. 
 
 1 8. In connection with the above, how shall we understand 
 the statement found in the Bible that Elijah took his mortal body 
 to heaven? We have simply to say that that statement is not 
 true. He did not take his mortal body to heaven he left it be- 
 fore he arrived there. 
 
 19. What is transfiguration? It is a state of being wherein a 
 mortal man is enveloped in a holy influence, consequent upon a 
 visitation from the Lord or his holy angels, by which he becomes 
 spiritually minded, and can behold the face of God or celestial 
 beings, whose faces, without such change, he could not behold, 
 as God, holy angels and the things of God are spiritually dis- 
 cerned. Prophets undergo this change for special purposes ; as 
 in the case of Moses, to whom the Lord appeared on the Mount, 
 and in whose presence he wrote upon the tables of stone with 
 his finger. 
 
CONCERNING MIRACLES. 659 
 
 20. As concerning miracles, we read that many have been 
 performed upon the earth ; such, for instance, as the preservation 
 of the three Hebrews, who, though cast into a fiery furnace heated 
 seven times more than it was wont to be heated, remained unin- 
 jured; and of Daniel, who was preserved from the ravenous grasp 
 of lions when cast into their den. 
 
 21. Both the Hebrews and Daniel were preserved by the holy 
 angels, between whom and mortal beings there is a material differ- 
 ence. The angels of the Lord have power over the elements of 
 fire, the ferociousness of wild animals, and other destructive in- 
 fluences to which mortals are subject. Understanding the dan- 
 gers to which mortals are exposed, and possessing the power to 
 deliver them therefrom, they are appointed to minister to beings 
 in mortality, to direct their footsteps, and preserve them from 
 destruction; in filling which appointment, they have wrought 
 those many wonders, called miracles, an account of which we 
 find on record. 
 
 22. The Lord reveals himself to whomsoever he will, and 
 his gifts and callings are unto none but those who are heirs 
 to them. 
 
 AN EXPLANATION OF THE FIRST THREE 
 CHAPTERS OF GENESIS. 
 
 AN ARTICLE BY THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, March ist, 1861. 
 
 1. THERE ARE eternal, fixed laws by which all Gods work 
 and are regulated, and those laws first originated in the council 
 of the first Gods. When the laws were made, the first God signed 
 
 - them with his own hand ; and he is sworn to sustain them. The 
 Lord says that his course is one eternal round. All Gods are 
 governed by those eternal laws, and upon this principle the Lord 
 could justly say that his purposes never fail. 
 
 2. Moses said that, "In the beginning God created the 
 
660 CONCERNING THE CREATION. 
 
 heaven and the earth." What God was it who created this earth? 
 It was Adam's own Father who gave the command for it to be 
 formed out of unorganized matter, and his own sons created it for 
 Adam, his firstborn son ; and when it was first formed, it was a 
 dark body, and the Lord saw that it was necessary for them to 
 have light, and he commanded them to create the sun, moon and 
 stars to give it light, and these lights rule the seasons, both days, 
 weeks, months and years, and they were placed in the firmament 
 above to reflect their light upon the earth. 
 
 3 This world has moved one hundred and forty-four thousand 
 times since it was created;, and when this world moves, the sun, 
 moon and stars move with it, to give it light ; and from the time 
 that it was first created, until it becomes celestial, it will continue 
 to grow; and as it has grown the inhabitants have increased upon 
 it. This world has supported its own inhabitants, both in food 
 and raiment. 
 
 4. We may ask the question, Do angels eat food and wear 
 clothing in their first estate ? Yes. We may also ask the question, 
 Where did the seeds come from to this earth which yield forth all 
 all kinds of fruit? The seed is in the earth, and is self existent 
 like all other matter; and when a world is created, all trees and 
 herbs spring forth upon it to supply the inhabitants ; in fact, all 
 worlds support their own inhabitants, whether they are temporal, 
 or spiritual, or eternal.- 
 
 5. Was the animal creation first spiritually created? Yes; 
 and they were used by men in their spiritual estate as they are 
 now used by them in their temporal estate ; when man moves, 
 they move with him, to be used by him, for they were created for 
 the use of man, and are as eternal as he is. 
 
 6. How long was it from the time that they commenced to 
 form this world to the time when they finished it? Six thousand 
 years ; and the seventh thousand year is called the Lord's Sab- 
 bath ; having finished creating this world in six thousand years, 
 he called the seventh the Sabbath of rest, and that is the reason 
 why the Lord commanded people upon this earth to labor six 
 days, and to rest from all their labors on the seventh. 
 
 7. One day with the Lord is one thousand yeais, according to 
 the time which regulates all the celestial worlds. The sun re- 
 
CONCERNING THE GARDEN OF EDEN. 66 1 
 
 volves around that great central planet ( see diagram ) once every 
 thousand years ; and all Gods are regulated by it; but with us 
 twenty-four hours is called one day; therefore, the Lord calls 
 upon all people to keep the Sabbath day holy ; and if they do not 
 do this, they break that commandment, and are guilty before the" 
 Lord. 
 
 8. With respect to the animal creation : all things, whether of 
 the vegetable or animal creation, had a spiritual growth before 
 they had a temporal one ; and all that has a temporal growth will 
 have an eternal growth ; therefore, trees and herbs of all kinds will 
 have a resurrection as well as all species of animals. 
 
 9. Moses informed us that the Lord God planted a garden 
 eastward in Eden, and there he put the man whom he had 
 formed. What garden was that referred to by Moses? It was 
 the whole earth. What tree was that standing in the midst of the 
 garden, representing the principle of good and evil, which the 
 woman was commanded not to touch? It was the devil. Good 
 was already in the world, and he brought the evil. Which way 
 did he bring the evil? He beguiled Eve; she gave way to him, 
 and he begot Cain who was a murderer, for he slew his brother. 
 Who was Cain? He was the second born son of Adam. Why 
 did he murder his brother, Abel? Because he is a fallen angel. 
 He fell in his first estate, and one-third of Adam's sons and 
 daughters fell with him in like manner as Lucifer and his band 
 fell. Had Lucifer once a mortal body? Yes; and all who fell 
 with him had mortal bodies on the mortal earth that preceded 
 this; but they lost their mortal bodies, and never obtained a 
 resurrection ; and they will finally meet with their second death, 
 which is the death of the spirit. They will be cast into that lake 
 burning with fire and brimstone, which is the second death. 
 
 10. What was the cause of Cain's fall? He sought to take 
 away -the birthright from Abel, the firstborn son, and this could 
 not be done; therefore, he concluded to establish himself, and he 
 revolted from under his father's government, and drew one-third 
 of Adam's children with him. When he fell, Adam entered into 
 a covenant with him, which is as follows: "Now, my second 
 born son, seeing that you have revolted from under my govern- 
 ment, and sought to establish a government of your own, in 
 
662 THE AGREEMENT. 
 
 opposition to me, as my firstborn son ruled in the first estate, so 
 you shall lead off in the second estate ; and it shall come to pass 
 that if you can conquer me and my prophets, you shall hold the 
 world in your grasp; but if I conquer you, I will not leave one of 
 you alive, neither temporally rior spiritually." Therefore, Cain 
 claimed the right to come first upon this earth in its second-estate, 
 according to the eternal law of the Gods ; and when he came into 
 it he led 'death into it, he being an angel of death; that is the 
 reason that death was passed upon all flesh. 
 
 IT. The firstborn son always holds the birthright. Abel ruled 
 this world in its first estate ; he held the birthright in that estate ; 
 but as this is the second estate, and Cain is the second born son 
 of Adam, he (Cain) claims the right to come first to lead off, and 
 in doing so, he brought death upon the other two-thirds of Adam's 
 children who kept their first estate, whose names are recorded in 
 the Lamb's Book of Life ; they are the elect of God ; the seed of 
 Abraham ; and Jesus Christ was sent by his Father to break the 
 bonds of death, and to open the way for all those angels who kept 
 their first estate, that they might receive their glorious resurrection. 
 He was crucified upon the cross, and received his resurrection, 
 and became the first-fruits of the resurrection to all those who are 
 heirs to it. If he had not broken the barriers of the tomb, all 
 those angels who kept their first estate must have remained in 
 their graves forever. 
 
 QUESTIONS ANSWERED IN THE SCHOOL OF THE 
 
 PROPHETS BY THE PROPHET, 
 
 JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 1. WILL THE children of Adam receive their resurrected 
 bodies before the earth moves to its celestial or third estate? No; 
 the first resurrection only will take place. 
 
 2. Will the high priests who are upon the earth at the time 
 the first resurrection commences, be quickened and act inde- 
 pendently while their spirits are engaged in the first resurrec- 
 tion ? Yes. 
 
QUESTIONS ANSWERED. 663 
 
 3. What is the reason that the first wife of a high priest comes 
 with him upon every earth to commence the first resurrection? 
 Because the second wife by marriage is the youngest by birthright ; 
 consequently, she cannot briug forth any of a higher birthright 
 than herself. 
 
 4. Why does the Second Captain of the Lord's host, or the 
 second firstborn son of the Eternal Father, beget, upon this earth, 
 a body for Jesus Christ? Because he is the next to him in au- 
 thority, and comes to do that for Jesus which he (Jesus) cannot 
 do for himself. 
 
 5. Why is Adam, in the book of Doctrine and Covenants, 
 called the seventh angel? Because he was called the seventh 
 angel to the Eternal Father's earth, hence, he is the arch-angel 
 to this earth. 
 
 6. Why do the inhabitants of this earth worship the Eternal 
 Father? Because he has to save and exalt this world, in conse- 
 quence of Adam, who is the father of the inhabitants of this earth, 
 not having become a God. 
 
 7. What is meant by baptism for the dead, and in what way 
 will it be brought about? It is the living being baptized for the 
 dead, and will be performed in the temple, when built in Jackson 
 County, and will be brought about by the supervision of Moses. 
 
 A LETTER CONTAINING PRINCIPLE AND 
 DOCTRINE. 
 
 UTAH, November i9th, 1860. 
 PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG, 
 
 DEAR SIR : Since I last wrote to you, a few more ideas have 
 occured to my mind which I should like to make known to you. 
 You know that the prophet, Joseph Smith, told you that a time 
 would come, when the curtain that hides the eternal worlds from 
 the view of mortals, would be rolled up and all hidden things 
 would be revealed. And he said that another angel would sound 
 
664 CONCERNING MOSES. 
 
 his trump both long and loud, and that all nations should hear it, 
 and that he should cast down the Roman Catholic power. He 
 also told you that the Lord would raise up a prophet like, unto 
 Moses, and that he should deliver you out of the hands of all 
 your enemies, and lead you back to the Land of Promise with a 
 mighty hand and an outstretched arm. He also told you that 
 the Lord would give unto his people a great endowment, and yet 
 the Lord has now caught you unprepared. 
 
 Moses said when upon earth, "A prophet shall the Lord your 
 God raise up unto you of your brethren like unto me ; him ye 
 shall hear in all things whatsoever he shall say unto you. And' it 
 shall come to pass, that ej/ery soul who will not hear that prophet, 
 shall be destroyed from among the people." But, if he had told 
 you the whole secret, he would have said, "Behold, I am Moses, 
 and it shall come to pass in the latter days, when my words shall 
 be lightly esteemed among men, and the laws which I have given 
 for the government of the inhabitants of the earth shall be trod- 
 den under their feet, behold, I shall come again, and those laws 
 shall be had again among the people. And it shall come to pass, 
 that all who will not give ear to my words, shall be cut off from 
 among the people." But it would have been revealing too much 
 to the people at that time. 
 
 Unless the full keys of the holy priesthood are upon the earth, 
 the kingdom of God can never triumph over its enemies, but it 
 must go down. Suppose that two great empires were at war with 
 each other, and the the one conquered the other, the one that was 
 conquered must remain under the one that conquered it until a 
 reinforcement should come to its assistance, and deliver it. 
 Then why do you fight against that reinforcement which the Lord 
 has sent you? Why not open the way for it? 
 
 Who was Cain ? In the flesh, he was the firstborn son of Adam 
 and Eve, but in the spirit, he was their second born son. Who 
 was his father? Lucifer, the devil. W T as it right for Cain to 
 come first into this world, and lead death into it? Yes? Why 
 so? When he fell in his first estate, his father entered into a 
 covenant with him, which is as follows: "Now, my second born 
 son, seeing that you have revolted from under my government, 
 and have sought to set up a government of your own, in opposi- 
 
RE-INCARNATION. 665 
 
 tion to mine. Inasmuch as my firstborn son ruled in the first 
 estate, you shall lead off and rule in the second estate. And it 
 shall come to pass that, if you conquer me and my prophets, you 
 shall hold the world in your grasp, and I will lose all ; but, if I 
 conquer you, I wilf not leave one of you alive, neither temporally" 
 nor spiritually." 
 
 What spirit was that which inhabited the body of Judas, who 
 betrayed the Savior? It was that same spirit that inhabited the 
 body of Cain? What spirit was that which inhabitated the body 
 of Cain? The same spirit that inhabits the beast which is now 
 in your midst. Why did that spirit come forth in the latter days, 
 and enter into the Church of Christ to destroy it. That he 
 might hold his grasp, and destroy the world. 
 
 What spirit was that which inhabited the body of Abel? The 
 same spirit that inhabited the body of Aaron, who holds the keys 
 of the lesser priesthood. And when "Abel was slain, the Lord 
 promised to *give unto Eve another seed in his place, who 
 was Seth. 
 
 What spirit was that which inhabited the body of Seth? The 
 spirit next in authority to Adam. Why was he the firstborn son 
 of Adam after the death of Abel ? Because he holds the full keys' 
 of the holy priesthood. If he had not come forth, the devil 
 would have held this world in his grasp forever. He received 
 his ordination in a council of the Gods, to preside over Adam's 
 posterity, having power to command the host of heaven. And 
 afterwards, he received his ordination under the hands of his 
 mortal father, Adam, to the same authority. 
 
 What spirit was that which dwelt in the body of Enos ? It was 
 the same spirit that dwelt in the body of Elijah the prophet, the 
 same spirit that dwelt in the body of Joseph Smith. 
 
 Previous to the death of Adam, he ordained seven high priests 
 to preside over his posterity, and they were the seven angels 
 spoken of by John the Revelator, represented by the seven stars, 
 standing in the midst of the seven golden candlesticks, of whom 
 Seth was the first. 
 
 What spirit was it that dwelt in the body of Moses ? The same 
 that dwelt in the body of Seth. What spirit is it that now dwells 
 in the body of your humble servant? The same spirit that dwelt 
 
666 THE PROPHET DESIRES A RECONCILIATION. 
 
 in the bodies of Moses and Seth. Why was it sent forth upon 
 this earth now? To cast the devil out of the Church, and lead it 
 triumphant over all its enemies. The holy priesthood runs down- 
 wards, and takes root upwards ; so that the first is last, and the 
 last first, throughout all the works of the Lord. 
 
 Oh, how I feel the responsibility of my office ! Do not add to 
 my burden, I entreat you; for if you do, you will run my cup over. 
 I want you to open my way without causing me any further 
 trouble. Why should you burden me ? I am now weighed down. " 
 If you will not burden me, I will not burden you any more than 
 I can help. Why should we be a burden to each other. I wish 
 you to consider my situation. I am sick ; therefore, what you do, 
 do it quickly, for I cannot wait. I have no place to stop at, and 
 if you are my friend, prove it now, for this is the time that I need 
 help. You have promised to be faithful to me ; now show it. 
 Oh, what a burden it would remove from my shoulders, if I could 
 only feel that my way was open so that I could come up without 
 any trouble. For if you stand against me, I know the conse- 
 quences that will arise from it. I have suffered every thing a man 
 could suffer, and live, to save this people, and I do not wish to see 
 them destroyed. Now, therefore, if you love your fellow creatures, 
 you will open my way at once. I have heard your pleadings, and 
 willingly grant your request. And now, what is there in the way? 
 I am willing to meet you and to converse with you, and hear your 
 complaints, and minister all the comfort to you that lies in my 
 power; and if I have ever written anything to you that you do 
 not understand, I am perfectly willing to explain it to your satis- 
 faction. I will remove everything out of your way that I possibly 
 can. You will excuse my imperfections in writing and spelling, 
 for I have had to write under very unfavorable circumstances. I 
 am not above being taught by a child that can teach me anything. 
 I am willing both to teach and to be taught. I hope to live and 
 learn, for I do not know all things yet. I now add no more, but 
 
 remain, 
 
 Yours, etc. 
 
AN ADDRESS. 667 
 
 AN ADDRESS TO PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG. 
 
 UTAH, December 2ist, 1860. 
 PRESIDENT BRIGHAM YOUNG, 
 
 DEAR SIR : I must acknowledge that I am astonished when I 
 think of the wilful blindness and rebellion of men who profess to 
 be the servants of the Lord. But when I trace the Bible and 
 Book of Mormon, and see how men acted who were kings and 
 judges, there are very few cases wherein they have not destroyed 
 themselves in the flesh. Oh, what a shame it is that men on 
 whom the Lord has placed a little authority, should destroy them- 
 selves therewith. What is the cause of this? It is rebellion. 
 When they commence to go astray they will not stop, but continue 
 to go on until the Lord is obliged to cut both them and their seed 
 off from the earth. Oh, how my heart pains me when I think of 
 the situation of this people. They are going on like a lamb to the 
 slaughter. Their shepherds have been warned, but they have 
 not warned the flock, and destruction will come upon them in one 
 day. Can the Lord stay his hand? No, he cannot. Will he give 
 up to the devil, and let him take all? Will Jesus Christ suffer 
 that his blood shall have been shed in vain? Did he suffer upon 
 the cross for naught? Have all the apostles and prophets that 
 have come upon this earth time after time, and suffered their blood 
 to be shed for the testimony of Jesus, done all this in vain? Has 
 all the blood of the saints that has been shed upon the earth, from 
 the days of Adam to this time, been spilt in vain? Shall all' the 
 sons and daughters of Adam who kept their first estate, who are 
 heirs of the resurrection, lie in the tomb forever? Must this 
 world go back to its native element, and be cast out of the rank 
 of the worlds that are traveling up to perfection? Shall Father 
 Adam lose his world, and all his posterity, and possess nothing? 
 If the Lord suffers the devil to hold his grasp now, all is lost. 
 Oh ! ye apostles, I wish to ask you a question. Shall we sit down 
 and let the devil take all? I will speak for myself the devil shall 
 never hold this world in his grasp. If you will not act your part, 
 the Lord will call others and put them in your places. If you do 
 
668 AN ADDRESS. 
 
 not wish to be subject to the man who holds the keys of the king- 
 dom, you can take your own course. I have never been an 
 enemy to you, and you will find that out hereafter. You have 
 always treated me as an enemy, but you will find out that you 
 have chosen the weakest side, and that you cannot stay the hand 
 of the Almighty. You may set yourselves against him as strongly 
 as you please, but you will go down. You shall know that the 
 Lord Omnipotent reigneth, and raiseth up at his pleasure, and he 
 will not ask you who he shall call to rule his kingdom. He can 
 do his own work without you ; he does not ask you any odds ; 
 when you have done your worst, he can accomplish his purposes. 
 You may have the power to destroy a few thousand people, but 
 better do that than to let all be destroyed. 
 
 When the Lord raises up some men to thrones of * eminence, 
 how soon they forget the pit from whence they were taken, and the 
 rock from whence they were hewn. Oh, ye who profess to be the 
 apostles of Jesus Christ, where did the Lord find you? He found 
 you earning your bread by the sweat of your brow. None of 
 you were raised in a royal palace. He found you as he found 
 me, and now you are ashamed of me; and what do you know? 
 You do not know your right hand from your left. You can 
 scarcely center one principle that belongs to the gospel of Jesus 
 Christ. You have been preaching redemption during many years, 
 and there is not one of you that can tell me what a redeemed being 
 is. And you have been trying to preach about the resurrection of 
 the dead, eternal judgment, election, reprobation, fore-ordination, 
 and the baptism of the dead, all of which are the first principles 
 of the gospel of Jesus Christ. Oh, ye proud hearted men, what 
 do you know about these principles. If you know anything about 
 them, you have received your knowledge from the man whom you 
 have despised. I wish I could once get into your company, I 
 would tell you a few secrets. I would show you that you never 
 knew much about the gospel of Jesus Christ ; but you shut your 
 doors against me. and there is no chance for me to get the privi- 
 lege to talk with you. I have striven with all my power to pene- 
 trate your hard hearts, but it appears to be all in vain. When men 
 are given up to wickedness, they will trample the words of the 
 Lord under their feet as they would an idle tale. But be it known 
 
AN ADDRESS. 669 
 
 unto you, that I have never written a word unto you that will 
 not answer the end for which it was sent, either to your salvation 
 or destruction. You have shut your ears and hearts against the 
 truth, determined to take your own course ; but can you maintain 
 your ground against that God who sent you here? You shall see 
 whether you can or not. Before your spirit left those celestial 
 worlds to come here, you foresaw all that you are now pass- 
 ing through, and you took an oath of the holy priesthood, and 
 promised to be true to your trust, and do you now falter? I have 
 done my duty to you whether you think so or not. My skirts are 
 clean of your blood. If I had not given unto you the Keys of the 
 Holy Priesthood, which no other man ever did, you might have an 
 excuse. Now select the most clever man among you, and let him 
 use his own faculties and write as I have done ; let him write reve- 
 lation after revelation, and give the Keys of the Holy Priesthood 
 that have never before been given by man. If you can do this, 
 you are clear and can go on as you are doing ; but if you cannot 
 do this, you are under condemnation, and your destruction will be 
 just. You have acted as if you had no part at all to act, and 
 left it all to me. I can do my own part, but I cannot do yours. 
 You must do it yourselves, or it must go undone, and you must 
 suffer the consequences. 
 
 I have now said and done all that I could do for you, except 
 you will humble yourselves and comply with the Lord's request. 
 If you will do this, I will be with you with all my heart, and you 
 shall prove that I am a never-failing friend; but as long as you go 
 on sustaining the power of the devil upon me and upon this peo- 
 ple, you keep my feelings worked up against you. There are but 
 two ways before you. You must take "either one or the other of 
 them ; the one leads to death, and the other leads to life. I must 
 now leave the matter with you ; do as you please. 
 
 Yours, etc., 
 
670 A LETTER. 
 
 A LETTER FROM THE PROPHET TO HIS FRIEND. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, July 9th, 1861. 
 MR. GEORGE LESLIE, 
 
 DEAR BROTHER : Having received information the other day, 
 per Brother Joseph Astel, that you were desirous of hearing from 
 me, I gladly avail myself of the first favorable opportunity to 
 accede to your wishes. 
 
 Believing that you have heard a great many rumors with respect 
 to my calling, and the course that I am pursuing, and that in con- 
 sequence of such rumors, your first and greatest anxiety will be to 
 have some reliable information relating thereto, I propose giving 
 you a brief detail of my experience, and pray that the spirit of 
 truth may lead you to draw just and righteous conclusions 
 therefrom. 
 
 In the fall of 1857, a few months before the move "South," I 
 obtained a revelation of the mind and will of God concerning 
 matters and things in this Territory, and having been most shame- 
 fully most cruelly abused by James C. Snow, who was then 
 President of the Stake at ^rovo, I wrote him a lengthy letter, in 
 which, by the aid of the Holy Ghost, I defended myself against 
 the calumnies and misrepresentations of my enemies, announced 
 that I was called of God, and exposed the wickedness of that 
 delusive spirit by whiph he was led, and by which he governed 
 the people, and under the influence of which he took from me 
 my wife, forced her to commit adultery with another man, robbed 
 me of my character, and stamped it with almost every crime of 
 which he had any knowledge. 
 
 After the return from "South," I received another revelation, 
 containing a knowledge of the keys of the priesthood, explaining 
 the principles by which the Gods were exalted and governed, and 
 by which all who obtain such power and glory must also become 
 Gods. It also gives an explanation of those one hundred and 
 forty-four thousand whom John saw standing with Jesus upon 
 Mount Zion, spoken of in the i4th chapter of Revelations. Since 
 that time I have had continual visitations from the Lord, and 
 
A LETTER. 67 I 
 
 have received and written to President Young, from thirty to forty 
 revelations and addresses. 
 
 The Lord having called me to be a prophet, seer and revelator 
 to his Church, I wrote to President Young and informed him 
 thereof, requested him to bring the matter before the people, and 
 thereby honor the word of the Lord. I also sent him the " Keys 
 of the Priesthood," and other revelations at different times, in 
 which, as well as in all the letters that I addressed to him, he was 
 commanded to inform the people what the Lord was doing, and 
 what he was about to do, and to stand up in the dignity and 
 power of his calling, and make known the glad tidings to Israel 
 that the Lord had raised up another prophet to redeem them from 
 bondage, and take them back to their inheritances in Jackson 
 County, Missouri, which place is the place of the inheritance of 
 the saints of God. 
 
 For two years and a half, I wrote to and labored with President 
 Young in the most faithful manner, revealing to none but to him 
 and his immediate associates, the designs and purposes of the 
 Almighty. During this time, I suffered trials and privations of 
 various kinds, and often prayed the Lord to remove from me a 
 burden that I seemed scarcely able to bear. My mind was 
 wholly occupied with the things that the Lord had revealed to me, 
 so much so, that I had no pleasure in conversation that did not 
 relate to God and Godliness. I was as a cipher among the peo- 
 ple. If I was silent, I was looked upon and ridiculed as dull and 
 stupid ; if I spake, I spake that which occupied my whole atten- 
 tion, and was either derided as a fanatic, stigmatized as crazy, or 
 treated as an imposter. Under such circumstances, with which I 
 had to cope from the date of my first visitation from the Lord to 
 the time that I arrived in this place, I had no less than twenty- 
 eight different homes, or rather stopping places, for I had no 
 place of residence worthy the sacred name of home before I 
 came here. 
 
 In the fall of 1860, as I was going to Great Salt Lake City, to 
 deliver two letters or addresses that I had written to President 
 Young, I met Brother John Cook near the Warm Springs. We 
 entered into a conversation, in which I told him who and what 
 I was, and what the Lord was about to do. He invited me to his 
 
672 A LETTER. 
 
 house, which invitation I accepted after transacting my business 
 in the City, and it has ever since been a home where I have been 
 well cared for. 
 
 On my arrival here, I was introduced to John Cook's brother 
 Richard, who was at that time bishop of this ward, to whom I un- 
 folded the great and precious things which the Lord had revealed 
 to me. 
 
 After a few days spent in the careful and prayerful examina- 
 tion of the revelations I had received, and the doctrines em- 
 bodied therein, he came to the conclusion that they were from 
 heaven. Others began to investigate also, and their investigations 
 likewise resulted in a conviction of the truth and divinity of my 
 mission, and of the revelations which God had been pleased to 
 give through me. In consequence of this, a notice was sent to 
 Brother Cook by W. Woodruff, stating that he and John Taylor 
 would be at Weber, on the nth day of February, and would hold 
 a meeting at 1 1 o'clock. The members of the ward were noti- 
 fied, and a full meeting was the result. In this meeting, seventeen 
 individuals expressed themselves . convinced that the Lord had 
 raised me up as prophet, seer, and revelator to his Church, and 
 because they thus expressed themselves, they were "cut off" from 
 the Church. This was the first time that I had been publicly 
 proclaimed as God's prophet, and W. W T oodruff stood up and 
 prophesied that my influence should from that time go down. 
 Since that time, however, the spirit of the Lord has rested upon 
 the people, and they have come from almost all parts of the Terri- 
 tory to inquire after these strange things that have so mysteriously 
 been brought about. 
 
 On the third day of April, I received a revelation from the 
 Lord, commanding all who believed in my testimony and mission 
 to be baptized into the fulness of the gospel, which I have been 
 sent to restore. On the 6th day of April, the reorganization of 
 the Church was commenced with six members, and the spirit of 
 the Lord so rested upon the people, that in one week by the 
 1 3th of April, the Church numbered fifty-three members, and at 
 the expiration of three months, it numbered upwards of two 
 hundred souls. 
 
 The gifts of the spirit are enjoyed, and our meetings are 
 
A LETTER. 673 
 
 rendered peculiarly interesting by tongues, interpretation of 
 tongues, prophesyings, and all the blessings which distinguished 
 Mormonism from Sectarianism in the prophet Joseph Smith's day, 
 and which now distinguishes those who have embraced the gospel 
 in its fulness, from their brethren around them who have only em~ 
 braced it in part. Each of the prophets who have been before 
 me, taught the gospel in part only, because they only held the 
 priesthood in part. 
 
 Joseph Smith, whom we all acknowledge was the greatest 
 prophet that had ever lived up to his time, ( Moses excepted ) re- 
 ceived a revelation from the Lord on January i pth, 1841, sec. 
 103, par. 10, Doctrine and Covenants wherein the Lord says: 
 "There is not a place found on earth that he may come and 
 restore again that which was lost unto you, or which he hath taken 
 away, even the fulness of the priesthood." The Lord has refer- 
 ence in this place to the temple that was to have been built, and 
 you will observe that it was not built during Joseph's life-time. 
 The fulness of the priesthood remained to be given, but it was 
 not Joseph's prerogative to possess it. It was to be reserved for 
 that prophet who should arise after Joseph's day, and to whom 
 reference is made in Doctrine and Covenants, sec. 51, par. 3; 
 sec. 101, par. 3. Bible: Deut. 18: 17-20; Acts, 3: 22-23; 
 Second Book of Nephi, chap. 2, par. 23 ; Times and Seasons, 
 page 6 7 3. 
 
 The seventh seal is now opened, and great and important 
 things are about to transpire, as you will perceive from the 
 prophecy given by the spirit, December 21, 1860. Besides this 
 prophecy, there have been a great number of revelations given, 
 wherein the Lord speaks of the great and marvelous works that 
 he is about to peiform, which, for the power that shall b mani- 
 fested in the deliverance and salvation of the righteous, and the 
 destruction of the wicked, has never found a precedent. You will, 
 however, readily perceive that to bring about such a state of 
 things, there needs to be a perfect establishment of the priesthood 
 after the heavenly order. This is being done. Under the fulness 
 of the gospel, there are but two priesthoods, and the officers of 
 each order are independent in their own sphere, and all are called 
 to office according to their birthright. The high priesthood con- 
 
674 A LETTER. 
 
 sists of the first presidency of the Church, viz. : the prophet and 
 his two counselors, twenty-four apostles, and the quorum of high 
 priests ; this completes the high priesthood. The lesser priest- 
 hood is comprised of bishops and Aaronic priests. The bishops 
 are the firstborn sons of Adam ; the Aaronic priests are their 
 younger brothers. The members of the high priesthood are sons 
 of the Gods of other worlds, even as Jesus was the son of the 
 Eternal Father. 
 
 There is much more that might be said upon these matters, but 
 it could be conveyed to you much better verbally than in writing, 
 and, being desirous that you should understand these things, I 
 hereby tender to you, and to all the honest in heart in the region 
 of country where you dwell, and every where else, an invitation to 
 come here and 'spend a few days in the investigation of these 
 things, and your time will not be mis-spent. 
 
 Please accept my kind regards, and tender the same to your 
 family, to Thomas Thorpe and his wife and sister Mary. Give 
 my best love to my dear child, of whose health and prosperity I 
 would be glad to hear, and whom I would very much like to see. 
 Remember me kindly also to Henry Beale, and believe me to 
 remain, 
 
 Your friend and well-wisher, 
 
EXPLANATION OF A VISION. 675 
 
 EXPLANATION OF THE VISION OF EZEKIEL. 
 
 BY THE PROPHET, JOSEPH MORRIS. 
 
 1. EZEKIEL (i: 9-15.) said that he saw four living creatures, 
 whose appearance was as the likeness of a man ; that every one of 
 them had four faces and four wings ; that their wings were linked 
 together, and that they went straightforward, and turned not 
 when they went. 
 
 2. What should we understand by this vision? Their faces 
 represent light ; their wings represent power to move forth quickly ; 
 their wings being linked together represent union ; and their going 
 straightforward, and turning not when they went, represent a strict 
 adherence to the order of heaven. 
 
 NOTICE TO CLOSE THE OFFICE. 
 
 WEBER, UTAH, August 3oth, 1861. 
 BROTHERS JOHN PARSONS AND MARK H. FORSCUTT, 
 
 DEAR BRETHREN After the interview of this morning, we 
 have come to the conclusion that it is prudent to close the office 
 for the present. Please remove your personal property, and hand 
 to us the key during the course of the day. We remain, 
 
 Yours truly, 
 
 JOSEPH MORRIS, 
 RICHARD COOK, 
 JOHN BANKS. 
 
 ERATTA: Weber should be omitted in date line on page 636. 
 Date of revelation 107 should be Oct. 8th. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 [THE NUMBERS REFER TO THE PAGES.] 
 
 AARON, robe of, how foreshadowed, 551-2. 
 
 Adam, posterity of, exaltation of, 10. 
 
 Address to Brigham Young, 667-9. 
 
 American Government, 191-4. 
 
 Anointing, manner of, 21 ; females, 22 ; high priests, 22. 
 
 Angels in heaven, concerning the. 166-171. 
 
 Angels of heaven, duties of the, 606-9; perfection of, 616-19. 
 
 Apostacy, spirit of, 429-30. 
 
 Apostates, how to deal with, 378; names of to be obliterated from 
 
 record book, 372-4; the payment of debts by, 474-5. 
 Apostles, oath for, 20; concerning the, 451-3; of old Church, 
 
 224-6. , 
 
 Apostleship, selection of men to, 48-9 ; organization of, 141-2. 
 Army of heaven, 195-7; manner of receiving commands, 480-1 : 
 
 expression from, 403. 
 Army of the Kingdom, how to organize, 535-6; commanded 
 
 to organize seven companies as commencement for, 555-8; 
 
 prophet instructed to reorganize the, 5778. 
 Astle, Joseph, rev. concerning, 503-5. 
 Atonement, 114-15. 
 
 BANKS, John, appointed spokesman, 137 ; birthright of, 241 ; rev. 
 
 concerning, 364-7. 
 
 Baptism, manner of administering, 78; concerning, 85, 86. 
 Bishop, instructions for the, 509-11. 
 Birthright, Prophet informed of his, 330-3. 
 Burns, Moses, rev. concerning, 119. 
 
 CAPTAIN, Second, communication from, 628; Third, testimony of, 
 638-642. 
 
 Celestial marriage, article on 651-3. 
 
 Christ, coming of, 151-3; robe of, 546-8. 
 
 Church, reorganization of, 76, 77 ; first council of, 107, 108; old, 
 concerning apostles of, 224-6; old, rejected, 24; of Christ, 
 manner of anointing females in, 22; of Christ, destruction of 
 idolatrous members of, 41. 
 
 Clerks reproved, 133-4. 
 
 Cloud now gathering, 53, 54. 
 
 Cook, Richard, concerning, 37, 39, 93, 364-7, 459-61; appoint- 
 ment of, 77. 
 
 Cook, John, concerning, 38, 459-61. 
 
678 INDEX. 
 
 Confirming, manner of, 23. 
 
 Conflict, coming, 246-248. 
 
 Command, signs of, 35. 
 
 Comet, concerning the, 122; the great, 18, 19. 
 
 Consecrate, people requested to, 338, 339. 
 
 Consecrated property, apostates not to take away, 490, 491. 
 
 Consecration, concerning law of, 492, 493 ; immediate compliance 
 enjoined with the law of, 339, 340; heirs of salvation must 
 abide the law of, 352-354. 
 
 Council of the church, 107-8; first, reorganization of, 141-2. 
 
 Counselors, revelation to, 298-9; instructed to inform the peo- 
 ple, 449, 450; prophet's, responsibility placed upon, 189, 190. 
 
 Counselorship, article on, 642, 643. 
 
 Covenant, the marriage, 129. 
 
 Cowan, James, called to apostleship, 142. 
 
 Creation of worlds, 522-525. 
 
 Crops, sowing and reaping of, 116-117. 
 
 Crowns, seven, prophet instructed to wear, 582-58*4. 
 
 Cursing, manner of, 48. 
 
 DARKNESS, principles of, 424, 425, 426. 
 
 Day of God's vengeance, 120, 121. 
 
 Death, principles of explained, 200, 201. 
 
 Debts, concerning, 103, 104. 
 
 Deliverance of God's people, 28; why deferred, 300-302. 
 
 Devil, influence of the, 469-471. 
 
 Disappointment, rev. concerning the, 296, 297. 
 
 Dove, James, called to the apostleship, 142. 
 
 EARDLEY, John R., called to the apostleship, 142. 
 
 Earth, showing how it will be shaken, 478, 479. 
 
 Earthly things pattern after heavenly things, 443, 444. 
 
 Elders, four and twenty, 197-199. 
 
 Enemies, the saints counseled to resist the, 236, 237 ; the Lord 
 promises to smite the, 238-240; disappointed, 269, 270; con- 
 cerning destruction of, 96, 97; saints counseled not to seek re- 
 dress from the, 112, 113; the course that the Lord will pursue 
 with the, 142, 143, 144; plot laid by, 145, 146 ; the coming of 
 the, 230, 231; the prophet instructed how to meet the, 252; 
 prophet instructed how to act when he meets the, 257-259; 
 unsettled condition of the, 273, 274; reluctant to come against 
 the Lord's people, 275, 276; disunion among the, 282, 283; 
 disclosing the intention of, 403, 404; design of the, 571-574; 
 destruction of reassured, 578-582; will not be permitted to 
 come up until right time, 482, 483. 
 
 Eternal progression,. 217, 218. 
 
INDEX. 679 
 
 FAITH, prophet reproved for lack of, 280, 281 ; concerning the 
 prophet's, 342. 
 
 Faithful people to be preserved, 343, 344. 
 
 Family difficulties, instructions for settlement of, 400, 401. 
 
 Farley, Robert, commanded to move, 60. 
 
 Father, Eternal, progression of, 10. 
 
 Fear, origin and cause of, 602-605. 
 
 Females, manner of anointing, 22. 
 
 Fire-arms, Peter Klemgard appointed to take charge of, 527-529. 
 
 Firth, John, rev. concerning, 51, 52. 
 
 Food, the Lord promises to supply the people with, 539-542. 
 
 Foreshadowing of the kingdom of God, 537, 538; rod of Moses, 
 539-542; revs, concerning the, 585-588,590; approval of 
 the, 590-595- 
 
 Forscutt, Mark H., called to apostleship, 102; revelation con- 
 cerning, 128, 1.29. 
 
 GENESIS, first three chapters of, explained, 659-662. 
 
 God's people, deliverance of, 28; describing amount of testimony 
 
 given to, 355, 356. 
 
 God, Judgments of, 65, 66; faithfulness of, 78. 
 Gods, order of, how represented, 590-595 ; perfection of, 616-19, 
 God's purposes, immutability of, 172-175. 
 Gospel, preaching of before second destruction, 208-210; oath to 
 
 be sworn by those who have yielded obedience to the fulness of 
 
 the, 388; power of the, 395, 396; high priests commanded to 
 
 preach the fulness of the, 397-399. 
 Government, American, 191-194. 
 Gudmundson Gudmundson called to the apostleship, 142. 
 
 HARRIS, William, revelation concerning, 101, 102. 
 
 Heaven, angels in, 166-171; army of, 195-197; mansions in, 
 610-613. 
 
 Heavenly things, earthly things pattern after, 443, 444. 
 
 High priesthood, manner of ordaining men to, 23; prophet com- 
 manded to administer the oaths of the, 414, 415. 
 
 High priests, commanded to preach the fulness of the gospel, 397, 
 400; disobedient, 15; manner of anointing the, 22. 
 
 High priests' quorum, manner of organizing, 216; how governed 
 when assembled, 232. 
 
 Horses accepted, 500-502. 
 
 Human feelings, concerning, 595-598. 
 
 Hypocrite, description of a, 467, 468. 
 
 Hypocrites, concerning the, 361-363; judgment upon, 19, 20; 
 the aged excused from witnessing destruction of the, 569, 570. 
 
 Hypocrisy, prophet commanded to expose spirit of, 462-464; 
 people who are actuated by, 350-352. 
 
68o INDEX. 
 
 INFLUENCE, evil, those who have been overcome by, 427, 428. 
 Interviews, personal, how conducted between the Lord and the 
 
 prophet, 277, 278. 
 Israel, rods of the princes of, 559 ; deliverance of children of, 221. 
 
 JACOBSEN, Niels, called to apostleship, 142; revelation concerning, 
 
 392, 394- 
 
 Jacob, twelve sons of, 447, 448. 
 Jones, John E., called to apostleship, 102. 
 Jones, William, revelation concerning, 503-505. 
 Judgments, upon the wicked, 50 ; to come, 65, 66; concerning, 
 
 454-456. 
 Justice, concerning, 454-456. 
 
 KENDALL, William, concerning, 45, 119. 
 
 Kingdom, army of, how to organize, 535, 536; instructed to or- 
 ganize seven companies for the army of, 555-558; of God, 
 how foreshadowed, 537, 538; of God, order of, 494-496. 
 
 Klemgard, Peter C. appointed to take charge of fire-arms, 527-529. 
 
 LADY, elect, manner of anointing, 21, 22. 
 
 Language, concerning, 52. 
 
 Lands, foreign, saints in, 71, 72. 
 
 Law, all things regulated by, 98; of consecration, 492, 493. 
 
 Leslie, George, letter to, 670-74. 
 
 Life, principles of, 200, 201. 
 
 Light, principles of, 424-426. 
 
 Livingstone, Richard J., called to apostleship, 476, 477. 
 
 Lord, people not prepared to meet the, 306, 307 ; the manner in 
 which he will meet the prophet, 328; the, will not delay his 
 coming when the people are prepared, 336 ; coming of, prep- 
 arations to be made for, 484-486; duty of the, 533, 534, 620, 
 621; the, informs his people that the law of heaven compels 
 him to labor with his people before he can lawfully destroy 
 them, 371. 
 
 MANSIONS in heaven, concerning the, 610-613. 
 
 Marriage, celestial; article on, 651-653; revelations concerning, 
 
 134, 135; covenant, 129* 
 Mather, James, called to the apostleship 142. 
 Mather, John O., " " " 476,477. 
 Members of first quorum, position of, 526, 527. 
 Men commanded to remain at Weber, 357, 358. 
 Mercy, concerning, 454-456. 
 Message, concerning the, 620, 621. 
 Meetings, instructed to hold small, 379-382. 
 Michael, the arch-angel, mission of, 395, 396. 
 
INDEX. 68 1 
 
 Military authorities, answer to, 139, 140. 
 
 Morris, Joseph, revs, concerning, 39, 43, 99, 100, 128. 
 
 Morris, Mary, rev. concerning, 149, 150. 
 
 Mortal beings, concerning, 599-602. 
 
 Moss, Peter, imprisonment of, 471, 472. 
 
 Moses, rev. concerning, 221-223; rod of, 25, 240, 241; rod of 
 
 promised, 68, 69, 70. 
 Murderers, the Lord's indignation against, 130, 131, 132. 
 
 OATH, for prophet's counselors, 20; apostles, 20; high priests', 
 2 1 ; the prophet commanded to administer the to high priests, 
 414, 415; deliverance promised after taking the, 419, 421; 
 conduct of people approved in swearing the, 416, 417, 418; 
 day appointed on which to swear the, 414; the blessing to be 
 derived from swearing the, 407, 408 ; manner of administering 
 the, 390; people instructed to prepare to swear the, 391 ; those 
 who have yielded obedience to the fulness of the gospel should 
 swear the, 387. 
 
 Officers, manner of electing, 105; chief acting officers, 81-85; 
 appointment of to administer to the sick, -164, 165. 
 
 Ordination, article on, 647-650; advising slowness of speech in, 
 80 ; concerning, 80. 
 
 Ordaining, manner of, 23. 
 
 Order of Gods, how represented, 590-595 ; of twelves, 636, 637 ; 
 of sevens, 644-647; of twenty-fours, 636, 637. 
 
 PARSONS, John, rev. concerning, 129, 37, 93, 431-435; com- 
 manded to move, 60; appointed, 77. 
 
 People, poor, how to provide relief for, 439, 449 ; separation of, 
 457, 458, 622-625; the course the Lord will pursue with his, 
 629-632 ; of God, deliverance of, 16, 17 ; commanded to pre- 
 pare to meet the Lord, 266 ; why not delivered, 288-293 '> dis- 
 satisfied and restless, 294-296; not fully prepared, 306, 307; 
 not delivered until united, 308-310; willing to obey the Lord, 
 317-319; commanded to be orderly and calm, 319-321 ; re- 
 quested to be prepared for moving, 324, 325 ; test placed 
 before the, 333-336; still unprepared, 337, 338; requested 
 to consecrate, 338, 339 ; anxiously awaiting a manifestation of 
 the power of God, 348-350; why disappointed, 422; the man- 
 ner of conduct while enemies are training, 147 ; righteous, future 
 prosperity for, 156-8; of God, independence of, 161-163; 
 wicked, destruction of, 208-10; promised that they shall see 
 the rod before enemies, 249-51 ; rebellious, warning to, 253-5 ; 
 believers, commanded to move to South Weber, 244; of God, 
 warning to the, 62 ; must be warned, 63 ; faithless, chastened, 
 94-5 ; instructed not to use the property of rebellious, 368-70. 
 
682 INDEX. 
 
 Portrait of the Lord, description of, 529-532. 
 
 Powers, conflicting, 549, 550. 
 
 Power of God, people awaiting a manifestation of, 348-350. 
 
 Poor, suffering, bow to relieve, 375-377. 
 
 Polygamy, as practiced, denounced, 400-2. 
 
 Priesthood, keys of, 10-15; reorganization of holy, 17-18; holy, 
 an oath of, 20-1 ; officers under the fulness of the holy, 81-3 ; 
 concerning keys of, 436-8. 
 
 Priesthoods, two, robes of, 553-5. 
 
 Princes of Israel, twelve, rods of, 559-60; twelve, each have a 
 rod, 187-8. 
 
 Prisoner, concerning the, 585-8, 
 
 Prisoners, the three, 549-50; the two, 626. 
 
 Progression, eternal, revelations concerning, 217-18, 512-22. 
 
 Promise, renewal of, 285-7 ; another, 341 ; no additional, 359-60. 
 
 Proclamation of the Lord, 529-32. 
 
 Presidency, first, revelation concerning, 224-6. 
 
 Property, revelations concerning, 441-2 ; consecrated, apostates 
 not allowed to take away, 490-1. 
 
 Prophet's son, death of, 561-565; benefactors, blessings for, 33; 
 robe, 543-545 ; robe, how foreshadowed, 546-548. 
 
 Prophet, concerning the, 32, 43,. 47, 138, 154, 155, 186, 233-4, 
 244, 245, 262, 263, 279; called, 9; the Lord promises to 
 visit the, 236, 237, 271, 272, 284; duty of the, 533, ^534; re- 
 proved for lack of faith, 280, 281 ; reproved, 185; visited, 303 
 -5; feels downcast, 316; condition of when called, 317-19; 
 commanded to prepare to meet the Lord, 322-3; commanded 
 to tarry at Weber, 67-8; appears to lack confidence, 329-30 ; 
 informed of his birthright, 330-3 ; instructed to ascertain how 
 many believe in the Lord's words, 314-15 ; instruction for the, 
 126-7, 2 ^4"5> 627; possesses great faith, 342; advised, 55-6; 
 and others reproved, 73-5 ; sickness of, 88 ; dress of the, 409- 
 ii ; manner of sealing the 44; commanded to collect the reve- 
 lations, 109-10. 
 
 Prophetess, manner of sealing the, 44. 
 
 Prophecy to the inhabitants of Utah, 40; by the prophet, 633. 
 
 QUORUM, High Priests', manner of organizing, 216; positions of 
 
 members of first, 526-7. 
 Questions answered in School of the Prophets, 662-3. 
 
 REVELATIONS, former, explained, 85-6 ; sense of must remain un- 
 changed, 125-6; manner of giving, 227-9. 
 Reports, false, circulated by enemies, 260-1. 
 Rebellious people, rev. concerning, 256-7; warning to, 253-255. 
 Re-baptism, backsliders cannot have a, no. 
 
INDEX. 683 
 
 Resurrection, article on, 654-9. 
 
 Rich, the, commanded to assist the poor, 105-6. 
 
 Rod, rev. concerning, 183-4 ; promised before deliverance, 205-7 ; 
 
 why Aaron and twelve princes had a, 187-8; prophet's 543-5. 
 Rod of Moses, concerning the, 25, 240-1; promised, 68-70; 
 
 foreshadowing of, 539-42. 
 Robe, prophet's, 543-5 ; how foreshadowed, 546-8 ; of Jesus 
 
 Christ, how foreshadowed, 546-8; of Aaron, how foreshadowed, 
 
 55*, 55 2 - 
 Robes of the two priesthoods, 553-555. 
 
 SABBATH DAY, revelation concerning the, 575, 576. 
 
 Salt Lake City, concerning the gathering to, 31 ; the order in 
 which the saints must move to, 326, 327, 566-568. 
 
 Saints, how protected, 613-616; counseled not^ to seek redress, 
 112, ri3; counseled to resist their enemies, 236, 237; com- 
 manded to gather to South Weber, 92 ; triumph of the, 96, 97; 
 informed how to act when enemies come to arrest the prophet, 
 214, 215; in foreign lands, 71, 72; instructed to have wheat 
 ground, 405. 
 
 Sacrament, concerning the, 85, 86. 
 
 Satan, works of, 622625. 
 
 Savior, description of the, 267, 268. 
 
 Salvation, heirs of, must abide the law of, 352-354. 
 
 School of the Prophets, concerning the, 87 ; questions answered 
 in the, 662, 663. 
 
 Sealing, manner of, 44. 
 
 Sevens, order of, article on, 644-47. 
 
 Shepherds of Israel, destruction of, 29. 
 
 Shepherds, false, destruction of, 36 ; wicked, destruction of, 52-3. 
 
 Sick people, healing of, 85-6 ; officers appointed to administer to 
 the, 164-5; concerning the, 159-61. 
 
 Signs of command, 35. 
 
 Smith, Hans Peter, called to the apostleship, 412. 
 
 Smith, Jr., Joseph, revelation concerning, 90. 
 
 Son of the prophet, death of, 561-65. 
 
 Sons, firstborn, 10. 
 
 Spirit of sympathy, saints warned against the, 497-99. 
 
 Swords accepted, 500-2. 
 
 TAYLOR, Abraham, called to apostleship, 142. 
 
 Temple, holy, 9; rejection of, 25; concerning the, 620-1. 
 
 Test, great, near approach of, 183-4 ; 172-5 ; time of great, 202-4 ; 
 
 first, 46, 59; saints commanded to prepare for first, 58-9; 
 
 coming, 145-6; last, described, 464-7; great, circumstances 
 
 to transpire in connection with, 179-80. 
 
684 INDEX. 
 
 Testimony, describing, amount of given to God's people, 355-6; 
 of third captain, 638-42. 
 
 Tongue, through the prophet, 634-5. 
 
 Training, revelation concerning, 148; revelation given at time of 
 149-50. 
 
 Traitors, removal of, 115; work of, 120-1; the Lord's indigna- 
 tion against, 130-2. 
 
 Transgressors, warning against the spirit of sympathy for, 497-9 > 
 concerning sympathy for, 5068. 
 
 Trolsen, John, called to apostleship, 142. 
 
 Trumpet, the purchase of a, advised, 115. 
 
 Twelves, order of, 636-7. 
 
 Twenty-fours, order of, 636-7. 
 
 UTAH, destruction of the inhabitants of, 181-2; prophecy to in- 
 habitants of, 40. 
 
 WEBER, saints commanded to gather to, 91 ; warning to the in- 
 habitants of, 57 ; prophet commanded to tarry at, 67, 68. 
 
 Wicked people, concerning destruction of, 151-3, 156-8. 
 
 Worlds, order by which governed, 211-12; creation of, 522-25; 
 eternal progression of, 51 2-5 2 2. 
 
 World, deceitfulness of the, 219-20. 
 
 YOUNG, Brigham, chosen, 9 ; revelation to, 26 ; the wicked con- 
 duct of, 176-77; letters to, 663-64, 667-69. 
 
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINIS Of 25 
 
 WILL BE AfS 
 THIS BOOKlO 
 WILL INCR 
 DAY AND 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 O RETURN 
 IE PENALTY 
 E FOURTH 
 H DAY 
 
 LIBRARY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 THIS BOOK IS DUE BEFORE CLOSING TIME 
 ON LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW 
 
 REC'n LD JUl 7 
 
 70-5PW* 10 
 
 
 102s) 
 
 LD 62A-30m-2,'69 
 (J6534slO)9412A A-32 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of California 
 
 Berkeley 
 
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY